JP7312407B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (generally called "pachinko machines") and reel-type gaming machines (generally called "pachislot machines").

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a game machine in which a lottery as to whether or not a big win is made is made based on the entry of a game ball into a starting hole, and when the result of the lottery is a big win, the big win pattern is stop-displayed on a display device to generate a big win game. In addition, many gaming machines have been proposed that control the game to a state more advantageous to the player after the end of the jackpot game than during normal times (eg, Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-26097 A

As conventional game machines, there are known ones that perform various effects .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in interest in gaming.

Effective solutions for achieving the above objectives are shown below. In addition, the operation etc. will be explained as necessary. Also, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations and the like are shown as appropriate in the embodiments of the invention, but they are not limited in any way.

In order to achieve the above object, in the invention according to claim 1,
A gaming machine that conducts a lottery based on a ball entering a starting hole and provides a profit based on the result of the lottery,
a plurality of light emitting units ;
a first multicolor light emission control executing means for executing a first multicolor light emission control for sequentially switching light emission of three or more different colors using at least three or more of the plurality of light emitting units when the result of the lottery is a win;
a second multicolor light emission control executing means for executing a second multicolor light emission control in which the three or more light emitting units used for the first multicolor light emission control are sequentially switched to emit light of three or more colors different from each other at a specific time during a non-game ;
a shooting handle operated when shooting a game ball;
a production operation unit that is operated when proceeding with a predetermined operation production,
The light emission by the first multicolor light emission control cannot be terminated even if the operation section for presentation different from the firing handle is operated,
The light emission by the second multicolor light emission control can be terminated by operating the performance operation section separate from the firing handle even if the ball does not enter the starting hole,
Furthermore, after the operation unit for presentation is operated, the light emitting unit used for the second multicolor light emission control is in a predetermined mode,
Furthermore, comprising a specific light emitting unit that is not used for the first multicolor light emission control and the second multicolor light emission control,
During light emission by the first multicolor light emission control, the specific light emitting unit is in a blinking state, while during light emission by the second multicolor light emission control, the specific light emitting unit is in a lighting state.
Furthermore, a light amount adjustment operation unit that can be operated by the player, separately from the performance operation unit,
light amount adjustment means capable of adjusting the light amount of the three or more light emitting units used for the first multicolor light emission control and the second multicolor light emission control based on the operation of the light amount adjustment operation unit;
When the light amount adjustment operation unit is operated during light emission by the first multicolor light emission control or the second multicolor light emission control, the light amount adjustment means can adjust the light amount without terminating the multicolor light emission control in progress,
The amount of light emitted from the specific light-emitting portion remains unchanged in both the special mode in which the specific light-emitting portion is in the blinking state and the specific mode in which the light-emitting portion is in the lighting state.
It is characterized by

Thus, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in amusement in a game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. FIG. 10 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is at the raised position; It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with a door frame opened from a main body frame and a main body frame opened from an outer frame; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the rear; FIG. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right side view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the outer frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a left outer frame assembly and a right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front; (a) is an exploded perspective view of an outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame and viewed from above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. It is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of a cylinder lock of a door frame, (b) is a back and front perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a), (c) is a front perspective view of a cylinder lock in a conventional pachinko machine, and (d) is a rear perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a). 34(a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in FIG. 34(a) and viewed from the front, and FIG. 34(b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in FIG. 34(a) and viewed from the rear. 34(a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) from the front, (b) is an explanatory view of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees from the state of (a), and (c) is an explanatory view of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated clockwise by 90 degrees from the state of (a). (a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed; (a) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit when it is disassembled and viewed from the front; FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit when it is exploded and viewed from behind; Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit when it is disassembled and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from behind; FIG. 41(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line E--I in FIG. 41(a). FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 1; It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. (a) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part of the door frame cut horizontally at the lower tray ball supply port, (b) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part of the conventional door frame cut at the same position as (a), and (c) is a table comparing the number of game balls stored in the lower tray between the product of the present embodiment and the conventional product. It is a top view which expands and shows the part of the ball lending operation unit in the tray unit of a door frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the production operation unit with the production operation button directed upward, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the production operation unit of (a). FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from above. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front and lower side; (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state in which the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member is in the upward movement end position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state in which the effect operation unit is moved to the raised position from the state of (a). FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting/unsprung holding member is in the downward movement end position; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship of the effect operation section outer peripheral decoration board, button outer decoration board, and button inner decoration board in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation section; (a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the effect operation unit is in the raised position. FIG. 11 is a plan view of an effect operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are provided in the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit; (a) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a switching portion is provided between the contact detection sensor main body and the plurality of contact detection bodies in (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the plate left decorative unit, the plate right decorative unit, the effect operation unit, etc. of the plate unit can move forward and backward, and the contact detection bodies are provided on the front and rear sides of the effect operation unit, etc. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative contact detection body, and (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the effect operation unit. (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a front perspective view of the door frame left side unit, and (c) is a rear perspective view of the door frame left side unit. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 62(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line Wu-Wu. (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, (c) is a front perspective view of the door frame right side unit, and (d) is a rear perspective view of the door frame right side unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 66(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-E. FIG. 66(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO. (a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in a state in which the two-color molding outer layer is made opaque in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in (a) in a state in which the inner layer is left as it is and the outer layer is made transparent. It is a front view which shows each decoration board|substrate of a door frame. It is a top view which shows the decoration board|substrate of the site|part of the production|presentation operation unit of a door frame. FIG. 4 is a rear view showing each decorative substrate provided around the door window of the door frame; It is a front view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when opening and closing the door frame with respect to the body frame; (a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device. (a) is a front perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the dispensing base unit. (a) is a front perspective view of a payout unit in a body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. Fig. 3 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full-tank ball path unit; It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball in a main body frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from below; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear; It is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the locking unit. (a) is a plan view of a body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the upper part in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the sphere tank assembled with tank rails, etc., viewed from above, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from below. FIG. 100(a) is exploded and it is the exploded perspective view seen from the front. It is an explanatory view showing a region in which the game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame circulate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the main body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball to the detour passage in the main-body frame upper part. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind the hinge side. It is the perspective view which shows the part of a tank rail enlarging, seeing the pachinko machine provided with the tank rail etc. of 2nd embodiment from back. (a) is a plan view showing the assembled state of the tank rail etc. of FIG. 106 together with the ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) viewed from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. 107 and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. 107 and viewed from the rear. FIG. 107(a) is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail and the like taken along the carker line in FIG. 107(a). FIG. 107 is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the flow of game balls in the tank rail of FIG. 107; FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing the body frame provided with tank rails and the like of the third embodiment, with the tank rail portion enlarged, as seen from the rear right. FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing the body frame provided with tank rails and the like of the third embodiment, with the tank rail portion enlarged, as viewed from the rear left. (a) is a rear view of the body frame showing an enlarged portion of the external terminal plate, and (b) is a left side view of the body frame showing an enlarged upper portion. 113(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 113(b), and FIG. 113(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 113(a). FIG. 114(b) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail. (a) is a front perspective view of the tank rail and the like of the third embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of (a) as seen from the upper right rear, and (c) is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of (a) as seen from the lower right rear. FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail, etc. of FIG. 116 and viewed from the front; FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail, etc., shown in FIG. 116 and viewed from behind; (a) is a front view of a board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) viewed from the front right, and (c) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) viewed from the front left. 119(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) viewed from the lower right rear. 119(b) is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119(a), viewed from the front; FIG. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119(a) being exploded and viewed from behind; (a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Keke line in FIG. 119 (a), (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Keke line in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Keke line in (a). 119(a) is a bottom view showing a portion behind the door frame in the pachinko machine having the board unit of FIG. 119(a). FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at an out-ball outlet of an out-ball passage; (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which an out-sensor is detachable, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out-sensor is removed in (a). (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment, omitting the power supply unit, payout control unit, and interface unit, as seen from the front right, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) as seen from the front left. (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 127 viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) viewed from the lower right rear. 127. (a) is a plan view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the corrugated line in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view cut along the sacer line in (a). FIG. 129(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the sea line in FIG. 129(a). FIG. 128 is an exploded front perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127; FIG. 128 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127 when it is exploded and viewed from behind; 128 (a) is a front perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 127, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 127; FIG. 128 is an explanatory view showing elimination of clogged balls in the board unit of FIG. 127; FIG. 128 is an explanatory view showing prevention of entry of a linear unauthorized tool in the substrate unit of FIG. 127; 128 is an explanatory view showing dust removal in the substrate unit of FIG. 127; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine in which center accessories and the like are made opaque; FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 137 as seen from the front right; FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 137 as seen from the front left; FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. FIG. 4 is a schematic explanatory diagram of routing of wiring from a function display unit on a main control board; FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board with the center accessories and the like made transparent; 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to expose the inside of the game area in which the game balls circulate and the obstacle nail. 146 is an enlarged front view showing an enlarged left side of FIG. 145; FIG. 146 is an enlarged front view showing an enlarged right side of FIG. 145; FIG. (a) is a front view showing the right half of the front unit together with a panel plate and an obstacle nail, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front. 148 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and the center right front plate in FIG. 148 and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and the center right front plate in FIG. 148 and viewed from the rear. FIG. 149 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 148 as seen from the front, with only the center right front plate seen from the rear; (a) is a front perspective view of the back box-related configuration of the back unit, and (b) is a back perspective view of the back box-related configuration of the back unit. FIG. 151(a) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 151, which is viewed from the front, in which the main members of the back box are separated; and (b) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back box rear unit in FIG. 152 and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the back. FIG. 11 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front-back decorations of the front-back-lower effect unit and the rear-back decorations of the back-lower-front effect unit in the back unit are moved to raised positions; This is a front view of a game board showing a state in which a back-bottom front decoration body of a back-bottom front effect unit in a back unit is moved to the center of a game area, a back-top rear decoration body of the back-bottom rear effect unit is moved to the upper side of the back-bottom front decoration body, and a back-bottom rear decoration body of the back-bottom rear effect unit is moved to the bottom side of the back-bottom front decoration body. 156 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front left decoration and the front right decoration of the back bottom front decoration of the back bottom front effect unit are moved to the open position and the center decoration appears in the state of FIG. 155. FIG. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back top rear decoration of the back top rear effect unit in the back unit is moved to a lowered position, and the back bottom back decoration is raised to abut on the back top rear decoration. 158 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front left decoration and the front right decoration of the back bottom front decoration of the back bottom front effect unit are moved to the open position and the center decoration appears in the state of FIG. 157. FIG. FIG. 10 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the back top front decoration of the back top front effect unit in the back unit is moved to a lowered position, the back top rear decoration of the back top front effect unit is moved to the rear of the back top front decoration, the back bottom front decoration of the back bottom front effect unit is raised and moved to the lower side of the back top front decoration, and the back bottom rear decoration of the back bottom front effect unit is raised and is in contact with the back top rear decoration behind the back bottom front decoration. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of the second embodiment showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to expose the inside of the game area in which game balls circulate. (a) is a front perspective view of the center accessory on the game board of the second embodiment, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the center accessory on the game board of the second embodiment. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the center front right plate and ball guiding unit in the right half of the center accessory in FIG. 162 and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from behind. (a) is a front view of the ball guiding unit in the center accessory of FIG. 162, and (b) is a right side view of the ball guiding unit. (a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Seuss line in FIG. 164, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Sesse line in FIG. 164, (c) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Sose line in FIG. 164, and (d) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Tarter line in FIG. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guide unit in FIG. 164 and viewed from the front right, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guide unit in FIG. 164 and viewed from the front left. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a main-control side power-on process. FIG. 168 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main-control-side power-on processing of FIG. 167; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing; 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting change processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of setting value confirmation display processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of error display processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of payout control unit power-on. FIG. 174 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the processing at power-on of the payout control unit in FIG. 173. FIG. FIG. 174 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the payout control unit power-on process subsequent to FIG. 174 . It is a flow chart which shows an example of due-out control part timer interruption processing. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when powering on a peripheral control unit; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing; It is a front view of the game board of the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a special design and special electric accessary goods control processing (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process (step S232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the production|presentation preliminary determination process (step S245). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage process (step S234). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about special design process processing (step S238). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a special design normal process (step S280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about hit determination processing (step S305). Various tables showing a low probability lottery table (A), a high probability lottery table (B), a big win pattern determination table (C), an immediate short win pattern determination table (D), and a small win pattern determination table (E). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about special design stop design setting processing (step S281). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about special design variation processing (step S283). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about special design stop processing (step S284). FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a relief number counting process (step S394); FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition of a game state. This is a specific production example until the number of variations of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 times. This is a specific example of effect when the ball enters the second starting hole during the execution of the count effect. This is a specific production example until the lottery result becomes an immediate short hit. 4 is a time chart showing a count suppression period; It is a time chart showing an immediate short hit design invalid period. It is a time chart showing the combined use of the count suppression period A and the immediate short winning symbol invalid period. It is a time chart which shows the production|presentation progress of RTC production|presentation. It is a time chart showing the progress of the effect before and after the variable display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600). It is a time chart showing the progress of the effect when the start condition of the RTC effect is established before the variable display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief number counter=600). It is a time chart showing the progress of the effect when the start condition of the RTC effect is satisfied after the variable display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief number counter=600). It is a time chart showing the performance progress before and after the immediate short hit. It is a time chart showing the progress of the performance when the start condition of the RTC performance is satisfied before the immediate short win. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing the progress of the performance when the conditions for starting the RTC performance are met after the immediate short win. 10 is a list of RAM clear conditions indicating power-on operations for executing RAM clear. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a history display that can be displayed during a period in which a setting value is changed or a display confirmation of the setting value is being performed; It is a lottery table and a symbol determination table of a modification. It is a time chart showing the immediate short hit time during the control of the low probability time saving state B. It is a time chart showing an immediate short hit time during control of 100 times of low probability time saving state A started with a big hit C as an opportunity. It is explanatory drawing which shows the door frame top unit which can be attached or detached with respect to a door frame, and an effect operation unit. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an ID code determination target; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing grouping of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing grouping of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the door frame; It is a timing chart showing an example of a suggestive effect that is executed as an effect during symbol fluctuation. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of a suggestive effect executed as an effect during symbol fluctuation when there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board. FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of button effect A during execution of rainbow effect; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of button effect B during execution of rainbow effect; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of a button effect C during execution of a rainbow effect; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the effect operation unit is not operated in button effect B during execution of rainbow effect. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the immersion prevention display is executed after execution of the simulated rainbow effect; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of erasing the immersion prevention display after execution of the simulated rainbow effect; FIG. 9 is a timing chart showing an example of limiting the execution of a simulated rainbow effect; FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where LED light emission confirmation is performed when a simulated rainbow effect is executed; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which attached the rainbow independent decoration part to the game board. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a rainbow independent decorative portion; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of executing a simulated rainbow effect when a rainbow independent decorative portion is attached; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a rainbow independent decorative portion; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a rainbow effect is executed when an initial position error of the front upper back decoration is made; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a rainbow effect is executed when a situation occurs in which a rainbow mode effect image cannot be visually recognized on the effect display device; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a rainbow effect is executed when the first to third abnormalities occur; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where first to third abnormalities occur during execution of a rainbow effect; FIG. 9 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a confirmation period other than simulated rainbow effect is provided after power is turned on. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an annular decorative portion; 9 is a timing chart showing an example of a rainbow effect using an annular decorative portion;

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the performance operation unit is at the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the performance operation unit is at the raised position from the front right. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. Fig. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame and an outer frame and viewed from the front, and Fig. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame and the outer frame and viewed from the rear.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 closing the front face of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, a main body frame 4 supporting the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable and attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be opened and closed, and a game area 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and visible from the player side through the door frame 3, where a game ball B (see FIG. 89) is hit by a player. and a game board 5 having a.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 which are separated from each other in the left and right direction and extend vertically, an upper outer frame member 30 connecting the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, a lower outer frame assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, an upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end of the upper surface of the upper outer frame member 30, and a left outer frame assembly. 10 and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40 .

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and supports the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 coaxially and rotatably by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60, and attaches the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable forward about the left side in front view.

In addition, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the door frame 3 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. By inverting the phase of the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiating it forward, the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a, and has a handle 195 operated by the player to hit the stored game balls B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

The door frame 3 is provided with a performance operation part 301 which can be operated by the player separately from the handle 195, and when the player participation type performance is executed, the player can participate in the performance by operating the performance operation part 301, and in addition to the game with the game ball B, the player can be entertained by the operation of the performance operation part 301. - 特許庁

The main body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be able to open and close and the door frame 3 to be openable and closable, a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and a game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launching device 540 for hitting a ball B, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, a payout unit 560 for paying out the game ball B received by the payout base unit 550 to the player side, a board unit 620 having a payout control board 633 in addition to a power board 630 having a power switch 630a capable of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, and a body frame base 501. A back cover 640 for covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the outside, and a locking unit 650 for locking between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4, and between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by striking a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and discharges the game ball B used in the game to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (island facility side of the game hall). The body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached openable and closable to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the upper and lower front ends on the left side of the front, and a door frame 3 is attached openable and closable so that the opened front side is closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which game balls B are played by a player's operation, a front structural member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, a plate-like game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a substrate holder 1200 that is attached to the rear lower portion of the game panel 1100, and a rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 attached to the main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, a peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) arranged behind the game panel 1100, an effect display device 1600 that is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and can display a predetermined effect image, and a game A front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the panel 1100 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are provided. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing movable effects and light emitting effects according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, there are provided a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in contact with the game balls B, and a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2004, a gate 2002, a second starting opening 2005, and a first big winning opening 2006 for giving a predetermined privilege (e.g., payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by receiving or passing the game balls B. The obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁A general winning opening 2001 , a first starting opening 2004 , a gate 2002 , a second starting opening 2005 and a first big winning opening 2006 are provided in the table unit 2000 .

A game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 by the player. As a result, the player can enjoy the driving operation of the handle 195 so that the game ball B is received or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the gate 2002, the second starting opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a.

In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a, and the lower right unit 2400 and the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, the upper back front effect unit 3300, the lower back front effect unit 3400, the upper back after effect unit 3500, the lower back effect unit 3600, and the like. It is possible to amuse the player by performing a performance.

[2. Overall configuration of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 16 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 17 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 that are separated from each other in the left and right direction and extend vertically, an outer frame upper member 30 that connects the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, a lower outer frame assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, and an upper outer frame hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end of the upper surface of the upper outer frame member 30. A lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40 is provided.

In the outer frame 2, when the body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622, and the sound output to the rear of the body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2 , the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 . The outer frame 2 can coaxially and rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60, and the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward about the left side in front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. A left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 each extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4, and attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

First, the outer frame left assembly 10 is provided with an outer frame left member 11 vertically extending with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11, and a left lower connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 includes a concave portion 11a that is flat and concave rightward at the rear portion of the left side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, a bulging portion 11b that bulges rightward from a portion on the right side opposite to the concave portion 11a, and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The left outer frame member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of vertically extending grooves on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 to be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 connects the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat plate-like upper lateral fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-rear direction, and a pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 12b on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 is attached to the outer frame left member 11 by inserting the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, bringing the horizontal fixing portion 12a into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further, in a state where the front and rear lower horizontal fixing portions 12c are brought into contact with the right side of the outer frame left member 11, and screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11. be done. The upper left connecting member 12 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper lateral fixing portion 12b in a state in which the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the lower surface of the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30 and the upper lateral fixing portion 12b is inserted into the notch portion 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a extending horizontally, a flat plate-like upper lateral fixing portion 13b extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a, a flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion behind the horizontal fixing portion 13a on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b, and a flat plate-like extending short rightward from the rear side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b. and a contact portion 13d. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left consolidated member 13 has the back surface of the contact part 13d at the front of the expansion portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and the left side of the upper and horizontal fixing portion 13b is reached on the right side of the outer frame left member 11, and the lower surface of the horizontal fixation portion 13a matches the lower end of the outer frame left member 11. By twisting a screw into the upper and horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side of 1, it is attached to the left member 11. In addition, the left lower connecting member 13 is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower lateral fixing portion 13c in a state in which the horizontal fixing portion 13a is brought into contact with the upper surface of the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the left side cutout portion 41a of the outer frame lower member 41.

Next, the right outer frame assembly 20 includes a right outer frame member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, an upper right connecting member 22 attached to the upper end of the left side of the right outer frame member 21, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side of the right outer frame member 21, an upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side of the right outer frame member 21, and a lower hooking member attached to the lower left side of the right outer frame member 21. 25 and .

The right outer frame member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The right outer frame member 21 includes a concave portion 21a that is flat and concave leftward at a rear portion of the right side surface of which the front-rear direction is divided into three equal parts, a bulging portion 21b that bulges leftward from a portion on the left side opposite to the concave portion 21a, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The right outer frame member 21 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the right outer frame member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces thereof. The plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a semicircular shape. The right outer frame member 21 and the left outer frame member 11 of the left outer frame assembly 10 are formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape.

The upper right connecting member 22 connects the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-like upper lateral fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle of the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a in the front-rear direction, and a pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 22b on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 is attached to the right outer frame member 21 by inserting the lower lateral fixing portion 22c on the rear side into the hollow portion 21c of the right outer frame member 21, bringing the horizontal fixing portion 22a into contact with the upper end of the right outer frame member 21, and further, in a state in which the lower lateral fixing portions 22c on the front and rear sides are brought into contact with the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, by screwing screws into the lower lateral fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21. be done. The upper right connecting member 22 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b in a state in which the horizontal fixing portion 22a is in contact with the lower surface of the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch portion 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a extending horizontally, a flat plate-like upper lateral fixing portion 23b extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a, a flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion behind the horizontal fixing portion 23a on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b, and a flat plate-like fixing portion 23c extending short to the left from the rear side of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b. and a contact portion 23d. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 is the back of the contact part 23d, and the rear surface of the outer frame right member 21 is the front of the inflated portion 21b, and the right side of the upper and horizontal fixing portion 23b is the right side of the outer frame right member 21, and the lower surface of the horizontal fixation portion 23a matches the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right part 21 21. By twisting a screw into the upper and horizontal fixing portions 23b from the outside of the right side of the, it is attached to the right side of the outer frame. In addition, the lower right connecting member 23 is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c in a state in which the horizontal fixing portion 23a is brought into contact with the upper surface of the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch portion 41a of the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41.

An outer frame hook 653 of a locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 to be described later is hooked to the upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 . The upper hooking member 24 has a flat plate-like mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and a flat plate-like hooking piece portion 24b that extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 24a and to which the upper outer frame hook 653 is hooked.

The lower hooking member 25 includes a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21; a flat plate-like hooking piece portion 25b that extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 25a and receives the lower outer frame hook 653; c and

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially equal to that of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, extends in the left-right direction, and is made of wood. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same lateral length as the lateral length of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 has cutout portions 30a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left and right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are respectively inserted into the cutout portions 30a on the left and right ends and attached.

In addition, the outer frame upper member 30 has a mounting stepped portion 30b at the left end portion, the upper surface and the front surface of which are recessed from the general surface. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment stepped portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame. The lower outer frame assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes and decorates the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

The outer frame lower assembly 40 includes an outer frame lower member 41 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right and extends left and right; a box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 that is arranged in front of the outer frame lower member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and that is open at the rear; and a box-shaped rear panel member 43 extending left and right, and a ball bite prevention mechanism 44 formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43 .

The outer frame lower member 41 has substantially the same width in the front-rear direction as the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, extends in the left-right direction, and is made of wood. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 has cutout portions 41a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted into the cutout portions 41a on both the left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower part of the panel rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends left and right, and extends from a position near the rear in the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. The concave portion 41b maximizes the volume of the inner space 40a formed by the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43. As shown in FIG.

The front panel member 42 extends in the horizontal direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box-like shape with a short depth in the front-rear direction with respect to the height, and the entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the panel front member 42 with the panel rear member 43, the panel internal space 40a forming a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is formed in cooperation with the panel rear member 43. The curtain plate front member 42 has an elongated opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front surface near the right end.

The rear panel member 43 extends in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front panel member 42 to the front surface of the panel rear member 43 , the panel internal space 40 a that forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is formed in cooperation with the panel front member 42 . The rear panel member 43 has a cylindrical connection tube portion 43a extending in the left-right direction, projecting upward, and communicating with the inner space 40a of the panel at the central portion in the left-right direction of the upper surface. The connecting tube portion 43a has an upper end that is slanted so as to be positioned upward as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the rear panel member 43 . In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The connection cylinder part 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length of the entire rear panel member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly shorter than the depth of the rear panel member 43 as a whole. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting tube portion 43a. When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the substrate unit 620 of the body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a, communicating with the internal space of the speaker unit 620a to form an enclosure 624.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 prevents the game ball B from being caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 by staying at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the top surface of the rear panel member 43.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and includes a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that a lower outer frame hinge member 60 (described later) abuts thereon; and an upper end projecting portion 44e projecting forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and having an upper surface inclined upward toward the rear.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position coinciding with a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size through which the game ball B can pass. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the inner space 40 a of the curtain plate, and open to the rear surface of the rear panel member 43 . Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged behind the curtain plate rear member 43. As shown in FIG.

When an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 (to be described later), the ball engagement prevention mechanism 44 can prevent entry of the unauthorized tool by the standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a. Even if the tip of the unauthorized tool abuts against the vertical wall portion 44d and bends upward, it abuts on the upper end projecting portion 44e which is provided at the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d and protrudes forward to prevent further intrusion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity through the portion of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 .

By the way, in the case where the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen onto the placing portion 44a for some reason is prevented from moving backward of the outer frame 2 by the standing wall portion 44d, so that the game ball B tends to stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B stays on the mounting part 44a, the game ball B is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, causing a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placing portion 44a can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (to the rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the second discharge port 44c, and the game ball B can be prevented from being caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 arranged on the upper surfaces of the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43 with a space in the left and right direction, a flat plate-shaped grill member 46 closing the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 from the rear side, a port member 47 having two cylinders extending forward and backward, and having two cylinders extending forward and backward. and a frame-shaped sealing member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a.

The pair of guide members 45 are in contact with the lower end of the door frame 3 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 . The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material with low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 has a strip-like shape extending in the left-right direction, and has a plurality of blade portions 46b that are spaced apart in the up-down direction. The blade portion 46b is provided in an inclined state so that the front end side is higher than the rear end side (see FIG. 47). The grille member 46 communicates the interior of the panel front member 42 (the panel interior space 40a) with the outside through the gaps between the blade portions 46b.

The port member 47 communicates the interior space 40a (enclosure 624) of the curtain plate with the front of the outer frame 2 through the gap between the blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 by means of two cylinders. The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (inside the enclosure 624) according to the principle of Helmholtz resonance, and can radiate rich bass to the front of the outer frame 2 (toward the player). In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds.

The sealing member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and prevents the sound in the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 from leaking from between the connection tube portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

According to the grill member 46 of the present embodiment, the air vibration emitted from the interior space 40a of the curtain plate by the main body frame speaker 622 to the outside can be directed into the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 in which the handle unit 180 is accommodated through the cutout opening 295b under the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 diagonally upward and forward by the plurality of inclined blade portions 46b. As a result, when the player sticks his/her fingers into the inner side of the handle cover 295 (the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (striking device for the game ball B), the player can be surprised by vibrating the body frame speaker 622 and blowing wind into the front cylinder part 291a, thereby performing an unprecedented performance.

In addition, since the port member 47 is opened forward, part of the sound pressure emitted from the port member 47 through the plurality of blades 46b of the grill member 46 is emitted forward. Therefore, the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and other players playing in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can also hear the effect sound emitted from the port member 47, and the effect sound also attracts the interest of the player. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can be attached and is highly appealing to the players.

In addition, since the port member 47 is provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 with respect to the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the main body frame 4, the volume of the enclosure 624 can be increased, so that it is possible to output a deeper bass performance sound, and to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

[2-4. Outer frame upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame and viewed from above, and FIG. 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 includes an outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, a lock member 52 attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, and a mounting screw 53 attaching the lock member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30; a flat plate-like forward extending portion 51b extending forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a; A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward, and a flat plate-like edge wall portion 51e extending downward from the edge from the left side of the forward extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side and continuing to the lateral fixing portion 51d are provided. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a later-described main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a strip-shaped lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a and then obliquely forward left, and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by an attaching screw 53, at a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 extends forward so that, when attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end can come into contact with the portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c in the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a abuts the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. As shown in FIG. The locking member 52 is biased in a direction in which the front end thereof rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 in the vicinity of the front end is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. By operating the operation piece 52b to rotate the lock body 52a in a direction in which the front end thereof moves leftward, the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c can be fully passed. As a result, the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The lower outer frame hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a, a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion rearward of the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a, an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c projecting upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d that vertically penetrates the horizontal portion 60a and is sized to allow only one game ball B to pass through. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with an upper end narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a leftward position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. 60 d of discharge holes are formed in the horizontal part 60a so that it may contact|connect the center part of the front-back direction of the rising part 60b, and may extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal part 60a in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60 d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44 b of the ball jam prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 .

In the state where the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is placed on the mounting portion 44a of the panel rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and fixed to the panel rear member 43 with a screw (not shown). The raised portion 60b is attached to the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, in the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) behind the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 gradually narrows as the main body frame 4 is closed. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position which is substantially the same as the rear end of the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1, so that the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling backward from the body frame 4, and the game ball B can be made difficult to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. FIG. 22 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into the main members and viewed from the back.

The door frame 3 is formed in a quadrangular shape extending vertically in a front view with substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the inside of the outer frame 2 via the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable from the front side. The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a, and has a handle 195 operated by the player to hit the stored game balls B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

The door frame 3 includes a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape when viewed from the front extends vertically, a glass unit 160 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and closing the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be visible from the front, a crime prevention cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and a front lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100. a handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180; a tray unit 200 that is attached to the front lower portion of the door frame base unit 100; a door frame left side unit 420 that is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit 200; and a door frame top unit 450 attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the right side unit 430 .

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a vertically extending square (rectangular) shape when viewed from the front, and having a door window 101a penetrating therethrough in the front and rear direction; a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner when viewed from the rear; a door frame main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end when viewed from the rear; a door frame secondary relay board 105, a handle rear relay board 106 attached to the rear view left side of the door frame secondary relay board 105, a door frame relay board cover 107 covering the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame secondary relay board 105 from the rear side, a handle rear relay board cover 108 covering the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 covering the wiring cable.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 , a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door frame lower hinge member 125 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 , an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 , a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 above the handle rear relay board 106 , and the door frame base 1 . 01, and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side in the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the .

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to it. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 .

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is for feeding the game balls B in the upper tray 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game balls B (foul balls) shot by the ball shooting device 540 and not reaching the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and guides the game balls B put out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 . The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 is equipped with a handle 195 which can be rotated by the player, and the handle unit 180 is used to perform a game in which a game ball B in the upper tray 201 is hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball shooting device 540 by operating the handle cover unit 290 covering the outer periphery.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31-33. FIG. 31(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame, and FIG. 31(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into the main members and viewed from the back.

The left side of the door frame base unit 100 is hinge-rotatably attached to the body frame 4 in front view, and the front face of the body frame 4 is closed so as to be openable and closable, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the body frame 4 is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a rectangular flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in the rear view of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101; A door frame relay board cover 107 mounted on the rear side and covering a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, a handle rear relay board cover 108 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the wiring cable.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 , a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door frame lower hinge member 125 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 , an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 , a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 above the handle rear relay board 106 , and the door frame base 1 . 01, and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side in the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the .

A handle unit 180 and a handle cover unit 290 are attached to the lower front corner of the door frame base unit 100, a tray unit 200 is attached to the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the right outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind.

[3-1a. door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame base 101 has a quadrangular (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 101 penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape with an inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door window 101a has an upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner circumference thereof, which are close to the outer circumference of the door frame base 101, respectively, and a lower side forming the inner circumference is located at a height of about 1/3 in the vertical direction from the lower end of the door frame base 101.例文帳に追加Thus, the door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape as a whole with the door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42) which is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface in a front view and is inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward from the right end side (see FIG. 42 ), a cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted through between the handle mounting seat surface 101b and the door window 101a, the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101. A ball feeding opening 101e is provided which penetrates in the front-rear direction on the left side of b in the front view and allows the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 to face forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 has a lower plate ball passage opening 101f that passes through the door frame base 101 forward and backward at a left side of the center in the left-right direction and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and faces forward the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. An upper plate ball passage hole 1 penetrates forward and backward so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward and backward. 01g, and a glass unit mounting portion 101h recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner circumference of the door window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of longitudinally long slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner (below the ball passage opening 101g for the upper tray) in a front view and penetrate therethrough in the front-rear direction. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1, the plural slits 101i have the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 positioned in front and the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 positioned rearward, so that the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the tray unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and is formed to match the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, which will be described later.

[3-1b. speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the cylindrical portion of the speaker duct 103 is positioned in front of the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. As a result, the sound radiated (output) from the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and can be favorably guided forward (to the player side) of the pachinko machine 1 through the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the speaker opening 211b of the plate unit base 211 of the plate unit 200.

Moreover, the speaker duct 103 has a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and holds the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 so as to extend to the left end side of the door frame 3.

[3-1c. Door frame main relay board/Door frame secondary relay board/Handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, door frame sub relay board 105, and rear handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 has a rectangular outer shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the rear handle relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, and a part of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 (see FIGS. 82 and 83) is connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape by combining a square extending left and right on the right side of the upper part of the vertically extending quadrangle in front view, and is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that the vertically extending part is adjacent to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame secondary relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side upper decoration board 422 and the door frame left side lower decoration board 423 of the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side upper decoration board 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration board 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, the door frame top relay board of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board of the main body frame 4. 635, and the remainder of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. With the door-frame base unit 100 assembled, the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 have their rear sides covered with the door-frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining parts of the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are covered with the fault cover unit 150.

The post-handle relay board 106 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG. The post-handle relay board 106 relays the connections between the door frame main relay board 104, the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. The rear side of the handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear handle relay board cover 108 when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1d. Door frame relay board cover, rear handle relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to cover the rear sides of the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub relay board 105 (parts extending vertically in an inverted L shape). The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape that is open at the front and the left side when viewed from the front. When assembled to the door-frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door-frame relay board cover 107, and the connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the open left side and connected to these terminals.

The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106 . The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and covers the wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box-like shape extending in the left and right direction, and has openings formed near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction for passing the wiring cables.

[3-1e. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100 . The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 which are spaced apart in the left and right direction, an upper reinforcing frame 113 extending horizontally and connecting the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end side is attached at a position near the upper side from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and which extends rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A cylinder mounting frame 115 connected to the right reinforcing frame 112, and a plurality of hooking members 116 mounted vertically apart from each other on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 and hooked with door frame hooks 652 of a locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 are provided.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically by a length substantially equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101 . The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tips of the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are inserted through these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4 . The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends in the left and right direction with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101 .

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends laterally with a width that is wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113 . The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch portion 114a that is rectangularly cut downward from the upper end in the vicinity of the left end, and a through portion 114b that penetrates in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end. The cut-out portion 114a is formed at the position corresponding to the upper tray ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the through portion 114b is formed at the position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is provided with a pair of rear piece portions which are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction and which are formed in the shape of rectangular flat plates extending vertically when viewed from the front, a pair of side piece portions extending in a flat plate shape forward from respective facing sides of the pair of rear piece portions, and a flat plate front piece portion connecting the front ends of the pair of forward extending portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward in plan view. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112 . A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115 .

The hooking member 116 is attached to an insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 . Door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are hooked to these hooking members 116 .

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hook member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. These are assembled with rivets.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is assembled such that a left reinforcing frame 111, a right reinforcing frame 112, and an upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, right side, and upper side of the door frame base 101, and an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is assembled so as to be positioned below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 are aligned with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, and the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 101d of the door frame base 101.

[3-1f. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31-33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in a front view. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be vertically movable, a flange member 123 attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122, and a lock spring 124 biasing the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-like attachment piece 121a that is square in front view, and flat plate-like projecting pieces 121b that extend forward from the upper and lower sides of the attachment piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 at the attachment piece 121a. Hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front ends of the pair of projecting pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, the upper end extends upward from the upper projecting piece 121b, and the horizontally extending portion contacts the lower surface of the lower projecting piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 .

The flange member 123 is an E-ring and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and covers the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the flange member 123 and the lower projecting piece 121 b of the hinge bracket 121 . The lock spring 124 urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the flange member 123 .

The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 contacts the lower surface of the lower projecting piece 121b, thereby restricting further upward movement. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes upward by a predetermined amount from the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, when the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 or removed downward. Thus, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view can be hinge-rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 4.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125, which will be described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 .

[3-1g. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so as to be capable of hinge rotation.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 includes a flat mounting piece 125a that is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and is rectangular in front view, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b that extends forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a door frame lower hinge pin 126 that protrudes downward from the lower surface near the front end of the protruding piece 125b (see FIG. 22, etc.).

The mounting piece 125a and the projecting piece 125b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer circumference of the lower end portion is tapered and chamfered. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is attached to a portion of the projecting piece 125b coaxial with the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 can hinge-rotatably support the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame lower hinge hole 522a of the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520.

[3-1h. cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. 34(a) is a front perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame, (b) is a rear-front perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a), (c) is a front perspective view of the cylinder lock in a conventional pachinko machine, and (d) is a rear perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a). 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in FIG. 34(a) and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock shown in FIG. 34(a) and viewed from the rear. 36(a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) from the front, (b) is an explanatory view of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees from the state of (a), and (c) is an explanatory view of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated clockwise by 90 degrees from the state of (a).

The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. The cylinder lock 130 includes a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed in the front end face of the cylinder body 131, and a rotation transmission member 133 provided behind the cylinder body 131 and rotated together with a regular key inserted into the keyhole 132.

A cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear end (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and has a pair of cutouts cut forward from the rear end at positions opposed to each other across the central axis. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and by inserting the pair of projections of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

More specifically, the cylinder lock 130 includes a first cam member 134 which is provided on the rear end side of the cylinder body 131 and rotates together with a regular key inserted into the keyhole 132; a second cam member 135 which is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 below the cylinder body 131 so as to be rotatable about an axis in the longitudinal direction; A strip-shaped first arm 136 is rotatably attached to a portion of the member 135 to the right of the rotation center, and a strip-shaped second arm 137 is rotatably attached to a portion below the rotation center of the first cam member 134 at its upper end and rotatably attached to a portion below the rotation center of the second cam member 135 at its lower end.

In addition, the cylinder lock 130 includes a rear cover 138 attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 so as to cover the cylinder body 131, the first cam member 134, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 except for the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133) from behind; It has

The first cam member 134 has the upper end side of the first arm 136 attached to the rear side, and the upper end side of the second arm 137 attached to the front side. The second cam member 135 is rotatably attached from the rear side by the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the rotation transmission member 133 is attached to the rear side across the front surface of the cylinder mounting frame 115 so as to be integrally rotatable. The second cam member 135 has the lower end side of the first arm 136 attached to the front side, and the lower end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front side ahead of the first arm 136 .

In each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion to which the first arm 136 is attached and the portion to which the second arm 137 is attached are spaced apart at an angle of 90 degrees around their respective rotation axes. In each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion to which the first arm 136 is attached is provided at a position farther from the center of rotation than the portion to which the second arm 137 is attached.

The rear cover 138 is detachably attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 by means of screws (not shown) at its upper end in a state in which the shaft portions 138a projecting outward from the lower ends of both left and right side surfaces in a cylindrical shape are locked in the L-shaped locking slits 115b of the cylinder mounting frame 115.

In this cylinder lock 130, a cylinder mounting frame 115, a cylinder body 131, a rotation transmission member 133, a first cam member 134, a second cam member 135, a first arm 136 and a second arm 137 are made of metal.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3 , the front end of the cylinder body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 440 b of the door frame right side unit 430 .

Here, the conventional cylinder lock 130A will be described. In the conventional cylinder lock 130A, as shown in FIGS. 34(c) and 34(d), the cylinder body 131 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115A from behind and the rear end is attached to the front piece. A rotation transmission member 133 is provided on the axis of a cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130A.

Next, the operation of the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment will be described. 34(c) and (d), the conventional cylinder lock 130 has a rotation transmission member 133 on the axis of the cylinder body 131, whereas the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment has the rotation transmission member 133 spaced downward from the axis of the cylinder body 131, as shown in FIGS.

In a normal state, as shown in FIG. 36(a), the cylinder lock 130 has the upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 at positions to the right of the respective rotation centers, and the upper and lower ends of the second arm 137 attached to the positions below the respective rotation centers of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135. The cylinder body 131 can be rotated clockwise and counterclockwise by an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state by using a proper key.

In this state, when the key inserted into the keyhole 132 rotates the first cam member 134 counterclockwise through the cylinder of the cylinder body 131, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. At this time, in the first arm 136, the upper end is attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, so the first arm 136 has a large force to rotate the second cam member 135 in a counterclockwise direction. Due to the attached, the power of rotating the second cam member 135 in a counterclockwise direction from the second arm 137 has little effect.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state, force is transmitted mainly through the first arm 136, the second cam member 135 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force acting upward due to the counterclockwise rotation of the first cam member 134 is proportional to the horizontal distance between the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the center of rotation of the first cam member 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, the force acting upward on the first arm 136 decreases, while the force acting upward on the second arm 137 increases.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the upward force acting on the second arm 137 becomes greater than that on the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates in the counterclockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees from the normal state (see FIG. 36(b)).

It should be noted that when the key is turned counterclockwise from the normal state by 90 degrees and then rotated clockwise by 90 degrees to return to the normal state, the above operation is reversed.

On the other hand, when the key inserted into the keyhole 132 rotates the first cam member 134 clockwise from the normal state via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131, the first arm 136 whose upper end is attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134 moves downward, and the second arm 137 whose upper end is attached below the rotation center of the first cam member 134 moves upward. At this time, since the upper end of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, the first arm 136 exerts a large force to rotate the second cam member 135 clockwise.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from the normal state, force is transmitted mainly through the first arm 136, the second cam member 135 rotates clockwise, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force that transmits the rotation of the first cam member 134 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the second cam member 135 is proportional to the horizontal distance between the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the center of rotation of the first cam member 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from the normal state, the force of the first arm 136 to rotate the second cam member 135 decreases, while the force of the second arm 137 to rotate the second cam member 135 increases.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the clockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the second arm 137 exerts a greater force to rotate the second cam member 135 than the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates clockwise mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated clockwise by 90 degrees from the normal state (see FIG. 36(c)).

It should be noted that when the key is used to rotate clockwise 90 degrees from the normal state to the normal state by rotating 90 degrees clockwise, the operation is reversed to the above.

As described above, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 are connected by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 attached at an angle of 90 degrees to each other to transmit the rotation. The rotation transmission member 133) can be rotated, and the locking and unlocking of the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 can be improved.

Further, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the rotation is transmitted by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as the rotation transmission mechanism, so that the rotation transmission member 133 (the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the body frame 4) can be provided at a position different from the axis of the cylinder body 131. Therefore, the position of the cylinder body 131 in the door frame 3 can be changed to any position without changing the locking unit 650. A cylinder body 131 (keyhole 132) can be provided at a portion that does not interfere with the decoration, and the pachinko machine 1 with a highly decorative door frame 3 can be provided.

Further, as described above, even if the position of the cylinder main body 131 is changed in the door frame 3, it is not necessary to change the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, so that the locking unit 650 can be diverted, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

By the way, in the conventional cylinder lock 130A, since the rotation transmission member 133 is provided behind the cylinder body 131, a fraudulent person who knows the configuration may insert a tool behind the cylinder body 131 from the front and illegally rotate the rotation transmission member 133 with the tool to open the door frame 3 and commit fraud. On the other hand, in the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position away from the axis (rear) of the cylinder body 131. Therefore, even if a tool is inserted behind the cylinder body 131 to rotate the rotation transmission member 133, the rotation transmission member 133 cannot be rotated because the rotation transmission member 133 does not exist at the relevant portion, and fraudulent actions such as opening the door frame 3 or the body frame 4 can be prevented.

Furthermore, in the cylinder lock 130, since the second arm 137 connects the first arm 136 and the second cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 to each other at a rotation angle of 90 degrees, even if the portion of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 attached to the first cam member 134 or the second cam member 135 is positioned on the straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135, the first arm 136 or the second arm The other of 137 is in a state of connecting the parts farthest from the straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135 . Therefore, even if one of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 is positioned at the dead point of the first cam member 134 or the second cam member 135 and the rotation from the first cam member 134 cannot be transmitted to the second cam member 135, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 can transmit the rotation from the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. Therefore, the rotation of the first cam member 134 is not greatly resisted, and the keyhole 13 2 can be smoothly rotated, unlocking/locking can be easily performed, the key inserted in the keyhole can be prevented from being forcibly rotated, and the breakage of the key can be prevented.

Further, since the two arms of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 transmit the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at an eccentric position, even if one arm is damaged for some reason, the rotation can be transmitted by the remaining arm, and the pachinko machine 1 having the highly reliable cylinder lock 130 can be provided.

In addition, since the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at an eccentric position by the smooth rod-shaped (strip-shaped) first arm 136 and second arm 137, when the rotation is transmitted by the gear, there is a risk that the tip of the tool is hooked on the tooth of the gear, causing the gear to rotate and the rotation transmission member 133 to rotate. By doing so, the tip of the tool can be made difficult to be caught by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 133 due to the movement of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 can be avoided, and the unlocking of the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 due to the illegal operation of the locking unit 650 can be reliably prevented.

In the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are used as the rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. However, the rotation transmission mechanism is not limited to this.

[3-1i. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. FIG. 37(a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 37(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit viewed from the rear with the rear case and the tamper-proof member removed. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the body frame 4, and can extract the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball extracting button 222.例文帳に追加

The ball feeding unit 140 includes an entrance 141a through which game balls B are supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 and penetrates in the longitudinal direction, and a ball extraction opening 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A rear cover 142 having a hit ball supply port 142a for supplying ball B to the ball launching device 540, a ball extraction member 143 supported rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141 and having a partition 143a partitioning the entry port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b on the rear side of the front cover 141, and one game ball B on the partition 143a of the ball extraction member 143. A ball feeding member 144 is fed to a hitting ball feeding port 142a of a rear cover 142 one by one, and is rotatably supported around an axis extending vertically between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and a ball feeding solenoid 145 for turning the ball feeding member 144.例文帳に追加

As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 arranged on the right side of the entry port 141a, a ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144, and a ball feeding solenoid 145 on the right side of the ball feeding member 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the center of rotation of the ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball extracting port 141b in a front view. The front cover 141 has its upper side extending upward from the upper edge of the entry port 141a, and is formed so as to close from the rear side, when the door frame 3 is assembled, the portion of the rear base 241 in the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 which is open rearward on the upstream end side of the ball feeding guideway 241b and the ball removal guideway 241c.

The ball extraction member 143 has a partition portion 143a below the entrance port 141a between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b. A rotating rod portion 143b that is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a weight portion 143d that projects from the side surface of the rotating rod portion 143b to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a below the operating rod portion 143c. An operating rod 143c of the ball extracting member 143 is formed to protrude forward through an arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 37(a)). The actuating rod 143c abuts on the upper end (upper surface) of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242 which moves downward when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 is pressed through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101.

The ball feeding member 144 is provided with a cut-off portion 144a which is fan-shaped in plan view and is centered on the rotation axis extending vertically toward the entry port 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143, a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the rear end of the cut-off portion 144a toward the rotation shaft core, and a rod-shaped neck portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180° around the rotation axis. Also, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 is sized to hold one game ball B. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding member 144 rotates about the rotational axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c, which is arranged at a position eccentric to the rotational axis, in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 rotates between a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the partition portion 143a and the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the batted ball supply port 142a, and a holding position in which the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a. When the ball transfer member 144 is in the supply position, the gaming ball B held in the ball holding unit 144B is supplied from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball -launch device 540, and the gaming ball B that entered the partition part 143a from the entrance 141a to the partition part 144a is 144B. The movement to the (hitting ball supply 142a) is cut off and stays on the partitioning portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end portion of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the ball supply port 142a, and only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings vertically when a ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (energized), and a ball feeding crank 147 which rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the movement of the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 which swings in the vertical direction and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feed actuation rod 146 has an iron plate 146a below the ball feed solenoid 145. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding operating rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around the longitudinally extending axis. When the ball-feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball-feeding operating rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward (upwards) the ball-feeding solenoid 145 by the magnetic force generated, and rotates around the right end so that the left end near the ball-feeding crank 147 moves upward. After that, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the weight of the iron plate 146a acts due to the disappearance of the magnetic force, and the left end near the ball feeding crank 147 rotates downward around the right end to return to the initial state. As a result, the left end (tip) of the ball feed operating rod 146 near the ball feed crank 147 is vertically swung by the ball feed solenoid 145 .

The ball feeding crank 147 includes an engaging portion 147a that extends in the left-right direction and is engageable with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 that moves up and down, a shaft portion 147b that is arranged on the opposite side of the engaging portion 147a from the side that engages with the ball feeding operating rod 146, and is rotatably supported about an axis that extends in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. A transmitting portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 38(b)) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the feeding member 144 is provided.

In this ball feeding unit 140, by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward, the ball feeding crank 147 can be rotated around the longitudinally extending shaft via the ball feeding operating rod 146.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward, and in this state, the ball feeding member 144 is positioned at the supply position. When the ball feed solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feed actuation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 145, the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feed member 144 rotates to the holding position. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), the game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be fed (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542 by the firing control section 633b (see FIG. 160) of the payout control board 633.

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is applied with a moment to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the rotatably supported ball extraction member 143 or the weight 143d. However, since the actuating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball extracting member 143 abuts the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray ball extracting slider 242 operated by the pressing operation of the upper tray ball extracting button 222 of the tray unit 200, the rotation thereof is regulated. The game ball B does not enter the 41b side.

When the player presses downward the upper tray ball extracting button 222 of the tray unit 200, the upper tray ball extracting slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, and the operating rod 143c moves relatively downward along with the downward movement of the operation transmitting portion 242b. When the operation rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmission part 242b, the ball removal member 143 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partition part 143a moves from between the inlet 141a and the ball removal opening 141b to release the partition. As a result, the game ball B entering from the inlet 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side, is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball removal guidance path 241c of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the plate unit 200, and is discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

The upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 formed with the operation transmission portion 242b with which the operation rod 143c of the ball extraction member 143 abuts is biased upward by the spring. Therefore, even if the game ball B is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 143a, the impact can be absorbed by the spring via the operation rod 143c. It is possible to prevent bouncing at a.

The ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular attachment recess 142b (see FIG. 38(b), etc.) recessed forward and to the upper right when viewed from the back of the batted ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142, and a fraud prevention member 148 is attached in the attachment recess 142b. The tamper-proof member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is made of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The anti-tampering member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front, and includes an upper piece 148a and a lower piece 148b which are separated from each other approximately in the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance to the left from the right side, and an inclined portion 148c which is chamfered on the tip side (right end side when viewed from the front) of the mutually facing sides of the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. The upper piece 148a of the anti-tamper member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the anti-tamper member 148 so that the right end in a front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece 148b extends flush with the general surface of the tamper-proof member 148. As shown in FIG. As a result, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The tamper-proof member 148 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the ball supply port 142a.

According to this fraud prevention member 148, when an illegal game ball B with a string attached thereto is hit into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper tray through the ball feeding unit 140, and the string attached to the illegal game ball B is manipulated to move the illegal game ball B into or out of the first starting port 2004 or the like, the force of the illegal game ball B launched (hit ball) by the ball launching device 540 causes illegal play. The string attached to the game ball B can be inserted between the upper piece part 148a and the lower piece part 148b and then cut by the V-shaped narrowed part formed by the upper piece part 148a and the lower piece part 148b, thereby preventing fraudulent acts using the illegal game ball B to which the string is attached.

[3-1j. foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. FIG. 39(a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 39(b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 40 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game balls B (foul balls) shot by the ball shooting device 540 and not reaching the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and guides the game balls B put out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. As illustrated, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-like unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and having an open front side, and a flat plate-like lid member 152 attached to the front side of the unit body 151. - 特許庁

The foul cover unit 150 has a through ball passage 150a penetrating back and forth at the upper left corner when viewed from the front to communicate between the lower normal dispensing passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit 200, and the full ball passage 150a which opens rearward at the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a when viewed from the front and can communicate with the lower full dispensing passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4. A tank ball socket 150b is provided.

In addition, the foul ball cover unit 150 has a foul ball receiving opening 150c which is open upward on the right side of the full ball receiving opening 150b when viewed from the front and receives a game ball B (foul ball) which has not reached the game area 5a despite being shot by the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and a game ball which is opened forward near the lower right corner when viewed from the front and is received by the full ball receiving opening 150b and the foul ball receiving opening 150c. A ball discharge port 150d that discharges B forward and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit 200 is provided.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit main body 151 and the cover member 152 between the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharge port 150d, and has a storage passage 150e having a width capable of storing a predetermined amount of game balls B.

The ball-through passage 150a is formed across both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152 . The full tank ball socket 150b and the foul ball socket 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. As shown in FIG. The ball outlet 150d is formed in the lid member 152. As shown in FIG. A storage passage 150 e is formed by a unit main body 151 and a lid member 152 .

Further, the foul cover unit 150 includes a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 that constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit body 151 and the lid member 152, a full tank detection sensor 154 that detects the rotation of the movable piece 153 in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

This foul cover unit 150 can store a certain number of game balls B in a storage passage 150e when the inside of the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are no longer discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower tray 202 side. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 is rotated by the weight of the game balls B so as to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B, and when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects the full tank, it is possible to stop further putting out of the game balls B and inform the players, game hall attendants, etc. to that effect to urge them to eliminate the full tank of the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the penetrating ball passage 150a, and has a door opening/closing abutment portion 150f capable of abutting the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 of the lower full ball passage unit 610 in the payout unit 560 of the body frame 4 (see FIG. 90). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 contacts the door opening/closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated to open the downstream ends (front openings) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[3-2. glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is detachably attached by being inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. As shown in FIG. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front) and closes the front of the game area 5a.

The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner circumference of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, two transparent glass plates 162 that close the inside of the glass frame 161 and whose outer circumference is attached to the glass frame 161, and a pair of glasses that are rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. A unit mounting member 163 is provided.

The glass frame 161 has a pair of flat mounting pieces 161a extending outward from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a strip-shaped locking piece 161b projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. A mounting piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can abut on a projecting portion 163 b of the glass unit mounting member 163 . The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 96). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 96).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base portion 163a mounted rotatably about an axis that extends forward and backward on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a bar-shaped projecting portion 163b that projects from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. The glass unit mounting members 163 are rotatably mounted outside the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101, respectively.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and then the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the projecting portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101 .

When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the procedure can be reversed. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the projecting portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position below the base portion 163a, the projecting portion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if the glass unit mounting member 163 is subjected to vibration or the like, the projecting portion 163b will not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally removed from the door frame base 101 .

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 includes a flat plate-like body portion 171 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-like rear projecting piece 172 that projects short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 171, and a pair of locking pieces 173 that are spaced apart in the left and right direction, project forward from the body portion 171, and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

A main body portion 171 of the crime prevention cover 170 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward beyond the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100 . Further, the upper end of the body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a on the game board 5 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. More specifically, the upper end of the body portion 171 is formed in a shape along a portion of the inner rail 1002, the out guide portion 1003, a portion of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the front structural member 1000, which will be described later, and is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 171 . Therefore, the crime prevention cover 170 is formed into a shallow box-like shape that is opened rearward by the body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171 . A rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 is formed along a portion of the outer rail 1001 of the front structural member 1000 of the game board 5 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled.

In addition, the rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion positioned between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 . Thereby, the game ball B passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B shot by the ball shooting device 540) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the hitting of the game ball B into the game area 5a is not hindered.

A pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100 .

When the crime prevention cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the body part 171 abuts against the rear face of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the rear projecting piece 172 except for the part projecting rearward from the lower side of the body part 171 is inserted into the crime prevention concave part 1009 of the front constituent member 1000. - 特許庁Also, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 171 projects further rearward than the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to come into contact with the lower surface of the front structural member 1000 . As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front structural member 1000) is bent in a complicated manner by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front structural member 1000. Therefore, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a through the gap between the security cover 170 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the game board 5, the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009 will be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit and handle cover unit]
The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 47 and the like. FIG. 41(a) is an enlarged front view showing the portion of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the portion of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit viewed from the rear. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view taken along line E--E in FIG. 41(a). FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A--A in FIG. Note that FIG. 46 is a sectional view of only the door frame 3 with the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 omitted.

The handle unit 180 of this embodiment is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the plate unit 200 together with the handle cover unit 290 covering the outer periphery, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the player's operation.

First, the handle unit 180 will be described. The handle unit 180 includes: a handle base 181 whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover base 291 of a handle cover unit 290 described later; a handle 195 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181; a plurality of handle guides 196 attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided by the handle cover base 291 described later; A disk-shaped cover base 183 attached to the base, a handle decoration substrate 184 attached to the front side of the cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface, and a handle front lens 185 attached to the cover base 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decoration substrate 184.

The handle unit 180 includes an inner base 186 attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 195, a shaft member 187 to which the handle 195 is attached at the front end and is rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181 and has a drive gear portion 187a on the outer periphery thereof, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 188. and a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the handle base 181 and the inner base 186 .

The handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 195. A handle return spring 190 urges the handle 195 to return to the initial rotation position (counterclockwise rotation end when viewed from the front). and an auxiliary spring 191 biasing it in the clockwise direction.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 at the rear of the inner base 186, a single button 193 having a distal end projecting outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front and a base end attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending forward and backward, and a single button 193 attached to the handle base 181 to detect the pressing operation of the single button 193. A release button operation sensor 194 is provided.

A handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base portion 181a extending back and forth, a disk-shaped front end portion 181b projecting radially from the front end of the base portion 181a, and three groove portions 181c recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 181a and extending in the axial direction and formed at uneven intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear cylindrical portion 291 c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290 . Also, the three grooves 181c are formed at positions corresponding to three protrusions 291d of the handle cover base 291, which will be described later. Therefore, the base 181a can be inserted into the rear cylindrical portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three protrusions 291d, and the protrusions 291d are inserted into the three grooves 181c, respectively, so that the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle cover base 291.

The handle 195 includes a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of (here, three) spoke portions 195b extending radially outward from the central hub portion 195a at intervals in the circumferential direction, an annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the plurality of spoke portions 195b, and extending in an arc around a rotation shaft (shaft member 187) and passing through the central hub portion 195a in the front-rear direction. and a locking projection 195e that projects rearward from a position inside the center of rotation relative to the slit 195d and locks the other end of the handle return spring 190. As shown in FIG. The outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the general outer peripheral surface of the handle of a conventional pachinko machine.

The three spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 are in the free state (not rotated state), and the two spoke portions 195b are extended clockwise and counterclockwise from positions of 120 degrees, centering on one spoke portion 195b horizontally extending leftward from the central hub portion 195a. The three spoke portions 195b extend to such a length that a gap is formed between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c so that a player's finger can be inserted thereinto.

An outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is provided coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195a. The outer peripheral ring portion 195c is formed in an annular shape with a constant cross-sectional shape in which the rounded side of the U-shape faces forward.

The handle 195 is formed so as to be translucent as a whole, and is partially provided with an electrically continuous plating portion from the central hub portion 195a to the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. As a result, the touch of the handle 195 is detected by the handle touch sensor 192 even when only the outer ring portion 195c is touched. Therefore, the game ball B can be hit by rotating the outer ring portion 195c.

The handle guide 196 has a U-shaped guide portion 196a that opens toward the center of the handle 195, and a flat mounting stay 196b that extends from the front end of the guide portion 196a toward the center. The three handle guides 196 have mounting stays 196 b attached to the rear side of the spokes 195 b of the handle 195 so that the guide portions 196 a are positioned behind the outer ring portion 195 c of the handle 195 . A guide piece 291g of a handle cover base 291, which will be described later, is inserted into the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196, thereby restricting movement in the front-rear direction.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in the shape of a disk having a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and has three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181 through the slits 195d of the handle 195 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the cover pedestal 183 passes through the slit 195d of the handle 195, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 195d, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 195. In this example, the handle 195 can be rotated within an angle of rotation of approximately 120 degrees.

On the handle decoration board 184, a total of 10 LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in triple concentric circles, one at the center, three LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) spaced circumferentially at regular intervals along the circumference, and six LEDs 184a spaced at regular intervals along the circumference. These LEDs 184a are divided into 5 groups: 1 in the center, 3 in the middle, 2 in the upper left corner of the outer circumference, 2 in the upper right corner of the outer circumference, and 2 in the lower part of the outer circumference (see FIG. 72). This handle decoration board 184 is mounted with a 24-bit LED driver 184b having a unique address for causing each LED 184a to emit light. This LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems, and controls 10 LEDs 184a divided into 5 groups with 3 systems for a total of 15 systems so that each group can emit light in full color.

Although not shown, the handle decoration board 184 is connected to a wiring cable composed of four wires: two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the LED 184a and the LED driver 184b, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 184b with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 184b of the handle decoration board 184 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board) through the control signal line, the 10 LEDs 184a divided into 5 groups can be caused to emit light with appropriate color and intensity for each group according to the command.

As described above, since the handle decoration board 184 has the LED driver 184b, it is possible to individually (here, for each set) control the light emission of the LEDs 184a, which is larger in number than the number of electric wires constituting the connected wiring cable.

The handle front lens 185 has a front surface that bulges forward and is translucent. The handle front lens 185 has a lens member inside which is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The steering wheel front lens 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LED on the front surface of the steering wheel decoration substrate 184 .

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor. When the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and transmission gear 188. FIG. The internal resistance of the steering wheel rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a. Therefore, when the handle 195 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of a shooting solenoid 542 in the ball shooting device 540, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180 , detects static electricity acting from the player when the player touches the handle 195 , and detects contact of the player with the handle 195 . When the handle 195 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the driving of the shooting solenoid 542 is controlled with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 195, so that the game ball B can be hit.

Therefore, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 195 by some method without touching the handle 195, the shooting solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be hit because the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 195 by a method different from the original one to play the game, and to reduce the load on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

The one-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the pressing operation of the one-shot button 193 by the player. When the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, the ejection control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 stops the driving of the ejection solenoid 542. Therefore, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 195, the shooting of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotating operation of the handle 195, and by canceling the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, the game ball B can be hit again into the game area 5a with the hitting strength before operating the single-shot button 193.

Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be explained. The handle cover unit 290 includes a handle cover base 291 which covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 behind the handle 195 and whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101; an inner 292 which covers the outer periphery of the handle cover base 291 and whose rear end is attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200; A cover decoration substrate 293, an annular substrate cover 294 covering the handle cover decoration substrate 293 from the front, and a handle cover 295 covering the outer circumference of the inner 292 and having the rear end attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200 are provided.

The handle cover base 291 includes a cylindrical front cylindrical portion 291a extending back and forth with an inner diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195; 291d protrudes inward from the inner periphery of the handle base 181 and extends in the front-rear direction.

The handle cover base 291 includes a flange portion 291e extending outward from a portion rearward of the front end of the outer circumference of the front tubular portion 291a, a cylindrical outer tubular portion 291f protruding forward from the middle of the flange portion 291e to the same position as the front end of the front tubular portion 291a, and a guide piece protruding outward from the front tubular portion 291a at a portion between the front end of the front tubular portion 291a and the flange portion 291e. 291g and an opening 291h penetrating through the lower portion of the front tubular portion 291a.

The middle wall portion 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends in an arcuate cross section from the rear end of the front cylindrical portion 291a to near the center in the front-rear direction. The rear cylindrical portion 291c is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 at its rear end. The rear tubular portion 291c is formed to have the same length as the base portion 181a of the handle base 181, and the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is inserted therein. The three ridges 291d correspond to the three grooves 181c of the handle base 181, and by being inserted into the grooves 181c, the handle base 181 can be made relatively non-rotatable. The outer cylindrical portion 291f extends forward from a position outside the radial center of the flange portion 291e. In the handle cover base 291, a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction so as to connect the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylindrical portion 291f.

The guide piece 291g protrudes from the outer circumference of the front tubular portion 291a from the center between the outer circumference of the front tubular portion 291a and the inner circumference of the outer tubular portion 291f to a position near the front tubular portion 291a. The guide pieces 291g extend in the circumferential direction with a length in the range of about 110 degrees, and are provided three in the circumferential direction at intervals of 10 degrees. By inserting the rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 in the handle unit 180 behind the guide piece 291g through the space between the guide pieces 291g and rotating the handle 195, the guide piece 291g is positioned within the U-shaped guide portion 196a, and the movement of the guide portion 196a (handle 195) in the front-rear direction can be restricted.

The opening 291h extends from the rear end of the front tubular portion 291a to the vicinity of the flange portion 291e in the front-rear direction, and extends through the front tubular portion 291a at an angle of about 90 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The inner member 292 includes an annular base portion 292a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter larger than the flange portion 291e, leg portions 292b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the base portion 292a, and a plurality of (here, four) notch portions 292c provided spaced apart in the circumferential direction from the rear end of the leg portion 292b to the vicinity of the base portion 292a. and have The base portion 292a is positioned behind the flange portion 291e with the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 inserted from the front. The leg portion 292 b extends outward in a curved shape, and its rear end is attached to the plate unit main body 252 of the plate unit 200 . The notch portions 292c are provided in the upper and lower portions and the left and right portions of the leg portion 292b, respectively.

The handle cover decorative substrate 293 is formed in an annular shape with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the same outer diameter as the flange portion 291e. The steering wheel cover decoration board 293 is mounted with 12 LEDs 293a and an LED driver 293b having a unique address for causing each LED 293a to emit light. The 12 LEDs 293a (full-color LEDs) are arranged in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into 6 sets of 2 on the lower left, 2 on the left, 2 on the upper left, 2 on the upper right, 2 on the right, and 2 on the lower right from the center (see FIG. 72). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems, and controls 10 LEDs 293a divided into 6 groups with a total of 18 systems, 3 systems for each group so as to emit light in full color.

Although not shown, the steering wheel cover decorative board 293 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four wires: two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power for driving the LED 293a and the LED driver 293b, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 293b with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 293b of the steering wheel cover decoration board 293 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board) through the control signal line, the 12 LEDs 293a divided into 6 groups can be caused to emit light with appropriate color and intensity for each group in response to the command.

The board cover 294 has an annular front plate portion 294a with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and substantially the same outer diameter as the outer diameter of the base portion 292a of the inner 292, and a cylindrical side plate portion 294b from which the outer peripheral edge of the front plate portion 294a extends short rearward. The substrate cover 294 has a front plate portion 294a located between the flange portion 291e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative substrate 293, and a side plate portion 294b extending to the base portion 292a of the inner 292. As shown in FIG.

The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a having the same inner diameter as the outer cylindrical portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 at the front end, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with a spindle (hedge-shaped, bowl-shaped, etc.) bulging rearward, and is provided with a plurality of notched openings 295b (here, four) that are notched forward from the rear end. The handle cover 295 is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the inner 292, and has a plurality of cutout openings 295b that are aligned with the cutouts 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the plate unit body 252 of the plate unit 200 via the inner 292 .

The handle cover 295 is two-color molded with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (transmittance of light). More specifically, the handle cover 295 is two-color molded with two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b to appear on the outer surface, thereby forming a circular or radial pattern. That is, the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the handle cover 295 are the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a)). When molding the handle cover 295, the inner layer 3a may be injection-molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection-molded first.

The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46 and the like, are assembled in the pachinko machine 1, and the portion behind the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 is inserted into the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291, and the handle 195, the handle front lens 185, etc. are positioned forward of the handle cover unit 290. The rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 while sandwiching the part closing the rear cylindrical portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290.

A handle 195 of the handle unit 180 is rotatably supported by a handle base 181 at a central hub portion 195a. In addition, the handle 195 is rotatably supported by the handle cover unit 290 by the handle guide 196 attached to the rear side of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the central hub portion 195a. The rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196a is inserted (locked) between the front cylindrical portion 291a and the outer cylindrical portion 291f of the handle cover base 291 and between the flange portion 291e and the guide piece 291g.

The handle 195 and the handle cover base 291, the inner 292, the board cover 294, and the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 are formed to have translucency. By lighting the LEDs 293a of the handle cover decoration board 293, the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be decorated with light. I can.

Since the handle cover unit 290 has the notch opening 295b and the notch 292c that match each other in the handle cover 295 and the inner 292, when viewed from the outside, it can be seen as if holes communicating with the inside of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 are open on both the left and right sides and the lower side. As a result, it is possible to relieve the player's mental anxiety about sticking his/her hand (fingers) into the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through between the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 and the outer ring portion 195c.

The upper cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 (the upper cutout 292c of the inner 292) is closed by the right plate decoration unit 275 and the right side unit 430 of the door frame.

In the handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment, the inside of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 into which the rear side of the handle unit 180 is inserted communicates with the cutout portions 292c and the cutout openings 295b on the lower sides of the inner 292 and the handle cover 295 through the opening 291h (see FIG. 47). As a result, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B or the like enters the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the liquid can be discharged below the handle cover unit 290 through the lower opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b.

In addition, when the liquid or the game ball B enters the cutout openings 295b on the left and right sides of the handle cover 295, it can be discharged downward from the cutout openings 295b on the lower side through the gap between the front cylindrical portion 291a and the leg portion 292b of the inner 292.

47, the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, the cutout 292c on the lower side of the inner 292, and the cutout opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 are provided on an extension line of the blade portion 46b of the grill member 46 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 in the inclined direction. As a result, the wind (wind pressure) emitted diagonally upward and forward from the grill member 46 via the blade portion 46b due to the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 can enter the front cylindrical portion 291a through the opening 291h, the cutout 292c, and the cutout opening 295b. Therefore, when the player sticks his/her fingers into the inner side of the handle cover 295 (the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (striking device for the game ball B), the main body frame speaker 622 is vibrated to send wind into the front cylinder part 291a, thereby surprising the player and performing an unprecedented performance.

Furthermore, since the handle cover 295 has a notch opening 295b, when opening the door frame 3 or the body frame 4, the right notch opening 295b can be pulled with a finger, and can be used as a handle for opening the door frame 3 or the like.

Further, since the handle 195 is plated up to the outer ring part 195c, the handle touch sensor 192 can detect the touch of the handle 195, and the game ball B can be hit even when only the outer ring part 195c is touched.

In addition, since the handle cover 295 has the notch opening 295b, the rotation position of the handle 195 can be easily fixed by gripping the outer ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b of the handle 195 with fingers, and the game ball B can be continuously hit into the game area 5a with a constant force even without continuing to twist the hand. As described above, the game ball B can be hit by rotating the handle 195 in various ways, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be provided in which the player can select a hitting operation suitable for the player.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291). The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is slanted so that the right end side is positioned more rearward than the left end side in plan view, and faces outward (open side), so that the handle unit 180 attached via the handle cover base 291 is also slanted outward in plan view (in other words, the tip part is slanted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1) and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grasp the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 and can perform the rotation operation without discomfort.

As described above, according to the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 is provided so as to be openable and closable about the left side as an axis, and closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 so as to be visible from the front. Since a handle 195 having an outer peripheral ring portion 195c is provided, and a cylindrical handle cover unit 290 extending rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c is provided, the handle 195 and the handle cover unit 290 in a shape never seen before can be seen in the portion where the handle is provided in the conventional pachinko machine, and a strong impact can be given to the player, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used by the player. This pachinko machine 1 can be made easy for a player who is wandering around in a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to select the pachinko machine 1 to play.

In addition, since the player's fingers can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, when the player operates the handle 195 to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a, when the player grabs the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, the player's fingers can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290. Since the ball is inserted into the hole, the player can be given a feeling different from the handle of the conventional pachinko machine in response to the operation of the handle 195, and the player can be entertained by the operation of hitting the game ball B with a new feeling to suppress the deterioration of interest.

When the player operates the handle 195, when the main frame speaker 622 provided in the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620A of the main frame 4 outputs a production sound, the vibration of the main frame speaker 622 causes the air in the enclosure 624 to vibrate due to the speaker box 623, and the vibration of the air in the enclosure 624 through the curtain plate inner space 40a and the port member 47 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the outer frame 2 communicating with the enclosure 624 causes sound pressure. It is emitted forward as (sound wind). At this time, the sound pressure (sound wind) from the body frame speaker 622 can be guided into the handle cover unit 290 (into the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 and the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291 by the plurality of blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 provided at the front end of the port member 47. Sound pressure stimulus can be given to the player's finger, which is operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted into the cover unit 290 . Therefore, by supplying sound pressure from the port member 47 to the fingers of the player inserted in the handle cover unit 290 through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h according to the game state in the game area 5a, the player can be surprised, the player can feel the arrival of a chance, and the operation amount of the handle operation can be changed. A decrease can be suppressed.

In addition, since the sound pressure (sound wind) from the body frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h, the inside of the handle cover unit 290 can be cooled, and the environment around the fingers of the player operating the handle 195 can be made comfortable, thereby relieving stress on the player and reducing the interest in the game.

Further, as described above, sound pressure (sound wind) emitted forward from the port member 47 provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 different from the door frame 3 in which the handle 195 and the handle cover unit 290 are provided is induced and stimulated by the blades 46b of the grill member 46 with respect to the fingers of the player operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. Therefore, compared with the case where the handle 195 is provided with a vibrating device, various sensors (handle rotation detection sensor 189, handle touch sensor 192, single button operation sensor 194, etc.) and bearing mechanisms provided in the handle 195 are not damaged. A decrease can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the handle 195 has an appearance like a steering wheel of an automobile. Therefore, even if the appearance is greatly different from that of a conventional pachinko machine, the player can intuitively recognize that the operation of the handle 195 is the same as that of a conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, even a player who sees the pachinko machine 1 for the first time can operate the handle 195 of the pachinko machine 1 without being confused, and the player can easily select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play without hesitation.

In addition, since a cutout opening 295b and an opening 291h are provided in a portion facing downward on the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 into which a player's finger can be inserted through between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, when the inside of the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) is viewed from the front, the handle cover unit 29 can be seen through the opening 291h and the lower cutout opening 295b. Since the area below 0 can be seen and a feeling of openness can be imparted to the cylindrical handle cover unit 290, the player's anxiety about inserting the finger into the handle cover unit 290 can be reduced, and the player can be made to operate the handle 195 without hesitation.

In addition, a notched opening 295b and an opening 291h are provided through the portion of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 facing downward, and the port member 47 of the outer frame 2 (lower outer frame assembly 40) is opened forward. Therefore, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B or the like enters the handle cover unit 290, it can be discharged downward from the lower notched opening 295b and the opening 291h. It is possible to make it difficult for liquid or the like discharged downward from the openings 295 b and 291 h to enter the port member 47 .

Further, the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer peripheral ring portion 195c, and a plurality of notch openings 295b are provided in the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 whose diameter at the front end is the same as that of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c. The pachinko machine 1 can be operated by fingers alone, operated like a steering wheel of an automobile by the outer ring portion 195c, gripping the outer ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b with fingers, or gripping the inner side and the outer side of the handle cover unit 290 with the fingers while straddling the outer ring portion 195c, thereby providing the pachinko machine 1 capable of performing a variety of operation (handle operation) of hitting a game ball B. Therefore, the game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a by a method that is easy for the player to operate according to the game state, the state of the player, etc., and the player can be made less bored, the player can enjoy the hitting operation of the game ball B, and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, the operating position of the handle 195 can be fixed by grasping the outer ring portion 195c and the notch opening 295b of the handle 195 with fingers, or by pinching the inside and outside of the handle cover unit 290 with fingers so as to straddle the outer ring portion 195c. Therefore, in addition to the handle operation similar to the handle of the conventional pachinko machine, the handle operation which cannot be performed in the conventional pachinko machine can be performed, so that the player can be provided with various handle operations, and the player can enjoy the handle operation and hardly get tired of the player.

In addition, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 extends rearward from the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, and the appearance of the handle cover unit 290 integrated with the handle 195 can be achieved.

In addition, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as that of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, it is possible to suppress the vertical dimension of the handle cover unit 290 from increasing more than necessary, and by suppressing the play area 5a (door window 101a) from being pressed upward by the handle cover unit 290, the game area 5a can be prevented from being narrowed, and the game area 5a can be relatively enlarged, and the large game area 5a can be used for real pachinko. The machine 1 can be made conspicuous, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to strongly attract the interest of the players.

Furthermore, by appropriately lighting the LEDs 293a of the handle cover decoration substrate 293, the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be decorated with light. It is possible to provide the highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of making the 195c stand out and strongly attracting the attention of the players.

In addition, since the handle 195 is provided at the lower right corner of the door frame 3 opposite to the hinge side, and the notch opening 295b is provided at the portion facing the right side of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290, the notch opening 295b can be used as a handle for opening and closing the door frame 3. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the door frame 3 with a handle that deteriorates its appearance, and the appearance of the door frame 3 can be improved.

Further, the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) supports the outer peripheral ring portion 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction, and has a flange portion 291e and a guide piece 291g for restricting movement in the front-back direction. , the outer ring portion 195c and the spoke portions 195b connecting the outer ring portion 195c and the central hub portion 195a are not deformed, and the handle 195 can be prevented from being damaged.

In addition, the handle touch sensor 192 detects that the player is touching the handle 195, and then receives the operation of the handle 195 to hit the game ball B. Therefore, even if the handle 195 is operated while touching only the spoke portion 195b or the outer ring portion 195c, the game ball B can be hit, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made capable of various hitting operations (handle operation) as described above, and the player touches the handle 195. It is possible to prevent the hitting of the game ball B when it is not there, prevent the handle operation using a tool, and reduce the burden on the game hall side.

[3-5. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the tray unit viewed from behind. The plate unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 includes an upper plate 201 for storing game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a, and a lower plate 202 arranged below the upper plate 201 and capable of storing the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150.例文帳に追加

The plate unit 200 includes a plate base unit 210 having an upper plate 201 and attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, a plate decoration unit 250 attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210 and having the lower plate 202, and a performance operation unit 300 attached to the front surfaces of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a flat plate-like plate unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper plate body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having the upper plate 201, a mounting base (not shown) attached to the right side of the upper plate body 212 and projecting forward, a plate unit relay board (not shown) attached to the right side of the mounting base, a ball rental operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the mounting base, and a ball rental operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the mounting base. It has an attached upper tray before ball removal unit (not shown) and an upper tray after ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear of the upper tray before ball removal unit.

The dish decoration unit 250 includes a lower dish body 251 attached to the lower front surface of the dish unit base 211 and having the lower dish 202, a dish unit body 252 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251, a lower dish ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and a left dish decoration unit 270 and a right dish decoration unit 270 respectively attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit body 252 with a space left and right. A decoration unit 275 is provided.

The performance operation unit 300 includes, as a performance operation unit 301 operable by the player, a contact operation unit 302 that can be touch-operated by the player and a press operation unit 303 that can be press-operated by the player. The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation part cover unit 310 having a spherical outer surface, an operation part base 315 housed in the performance operation part cover unit 310 and attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, an annular performance operation part outer peripheral decoration board 320 attached to the upper surface of the operation part base 315, an outer peripheral board cover 325 covering the upper side of the performance operation part outer periphery decoration board 320, and an operation part relay board attached to the rear side of the operation part base 315. a unit 330;

The performance operation unit 300 is provided with a performance operation unit 350 capable of projecting upward from the performance operation unit cover unit 310 and provided with the performance operation unit 301, a performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360 attached to the operation unit base 315 and vertically supporting the performance operation unit 350, and a projection force adjustment mechanism 380 for adjusting upward projection force of the performance operation unit 350 by the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360.

The plate unit 200 is wholly bulged forward, and the performance operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the performance operation unit 301 faces obliquely upward and forward at the center in the horizontal direction, the upper plate 201 is arranged on the left side of the performance operation unit 300 on the upper surface, the ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged on the right side of the performance operation unit 300, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the left side of the performance operation unit 300 under the upper plate 201.例文帳に追加

[3-5a. Fine plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212, and is shaped like a container that bulges forward from the left-right center in a front view and opens upward. The upper tray 201 (upper tray main body 212) bulges most forward at about ⅓ of the width of the door frame 3 in the horizontal direction from the left end to the right. The upper plate 201 has a front end retreating rearward from the most bulging portion toward the right in front view, and has a guide passage portion 201a (see FIG. 73) whose depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guiding passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the right end side of the guiding passage portion 201a in front view is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.例文帳に追加

The upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200 so that its bottom surface is inclined from a position below the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 toward the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port (not shown) to a position slightly lower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Thereby, the game balls B discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper tray 201, and the received game balls B can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side from the right end side of the guide passage part 201a through the upper tray ball supply port.

Incidentally, the guiding path part 201a is provided with a metal ground metal fitting that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B contacts (rolls), the static electricity charged on the game ball B can be removed.

[3-5b. lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50 and the like. FIG. 50(a) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part of the door frame cut horizontally at the lower tray ball supply port, (b) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part of the conventional door frame cut at the same position as (a), and (c) is a table comparing the number of game balls stored in the lower tray between the product of the present embodiment and the conventional product. The lower tray 202 is arranged below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the center of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. - 特許庁The lower tray 202 is formed in the shape of a container capable of storing the game balls B, and has a lower tray ball extraction hole 202a through which the game balls B can be discharged through the bottom wall in the vertical direction. The lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is closed by a lower tray ball removal lid 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate 202 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in a plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically, which is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom plate 202 is inclined so that its bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is positioned below the production operation unit 300 in the left side with respect to the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c in the assembled state of the tray unit 200. - 特許庁

The lower tray 202 can store the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and can discharge the stored game balls B below the tray unit 200 (for example, a dollar box) by opening the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. In addition, when the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is open, the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c, so that the game ball B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply opening 211c can be quickly discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown in FIG. 50(b), the lower tray ball outlet 202b of the lower tray 202 is provided in front of the lower tray ball supply opening 211j of the tray unit base 211 of the tray base unit 210, which communicates with the ball ejection opening 150d of the foul cover unit 150. The lower tray ball supply port 211j is shaped like a cylinder extending straight forward so that the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 150d goes straight to the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211j can be quickly discharged downward from the lower dish ball extraction hole 202b by moving the shortest distance.

By the way, when the lower tray ball supply port 211j guides the game ball B straight toward the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b, if the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b is closed by the lower tray ball extraction lid 265, the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b and the lower tray ball supply opening 211j are provided near the right end of the lower tray 202. There is a risk that retention will be concentrated. When the game balls B concentrated in the right area of the lower tray 202 block the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, the game balls B are not released from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 to the lower tray 202 side, which may cause the full tank detection sensor 154 to operate and determine that the lower tray 202 is full although the left area of the lower tray 202 still has room.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50(a), the left side wall (ball guiding portion 213) of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is inclined so as to extend obliquely forward left. More specifically, the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is inclined forward and to the left so that the distance between it and the front surface of the tray unit base 211 is the distance at which at least one game ball B can flow, at the portion directly behind the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is moved to the left of the central axis line (the line indicated by the dashed line) of the rear end (ball outlet 150d) of the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

Thus, by moving the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a to the left, the lowest part of the lower tray 202 (the part of the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a) is moved to the left, and it is possible to reduce the accumulation of the game balls B intensively on the right side of the lower tray 202 while the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed. In the lower tray 202, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored from the portion of the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower tray 202 (the front surface of the tray unit base 211), the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c obliquely extends to form a gap between the rear end of the lower tray 202 and the game balls B to flow, so that the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240 ( The game balls B released from the ball extraction guiding path 241c) to the side of the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be guided to the left side in the lower tray 202 along the obliquely extended left side wall to be released, and the game balls B can be properly stored in the entire lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation of the full tank detecting sensor 154 to notify the full tank even though the area for storing the game balls B is sufficiently left in the lower tray 202, and more game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. The dish base unit 210 is provided with a plate-shaped dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, an upper dish body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and having the upper dish 201, and a dish unit relay board 214 attached to the rear surface of the dish unit base 211 near the lower right corner.

In addition, the plate base unit 210 includes a ball rental operation unit 220 attached to the top of the front surface of the plate unit base 211, an upper plate ball removal front unit (not shown) attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the ball rental operation unit 220, and an upper plate post ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 211 behind the upper plate ball removal unit.

[3-5c-1. Plate unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed in a flat plate shape (a shallow box shape with an open rear) extending left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 101.

The dish unit base 211 has an upper dish ball supply port 211a penetrating back and forth near the upper left corner in a front view and extending cylindrically rearward; a speaker opening 211b penetrating back and forth below the upper dish ball supply port 211a and having a punching metal attached to the front side; A cutout part 211d cut out to a size through which the game ball B can pass through the right side wall of the part extending to the top, and an upper tray ball feed opening (not shown) penetrating back and forth on the upper right side of the lower tray ball feed opening 211c in front view and extending vertically, the upper part of which is located at the right end of the upper tray main body 212.

The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of which opens to the rear wall of the upper tray 201, and the cylindrical rear end penetrates the upper tray ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101 from the front side and is connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. - 特許庁As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

The lower tray ball supply port 211c has its front end opened to the rear wall of the lower tray 202 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and its cylindrical rear end penetrates the lower tray ball passage opening 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game balls B flowing through the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. The downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240 is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. As a result, the gaming ball B stored in the upper plate 201 is operated by the upper plate extraction button 222, and the upper plate ball transfer port, the ball transfer unit 140, 141a, 141B, and the ball extraction It is discharged from the lower plate supply port 211c to the lower plate 202 via the 1C and the cutting portion 211d.

The upper tray ball feed port 211a is positioned in front of the ball receiving port (not shown) of the rear base 241 in the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the state assembled to the plate base unit 210, and the game balls B in the upper tray 201 are supplied from the ball receiving port of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

Further, the plate unit base 211 of this embodiment has a ball guiding portion 213 that guides the game ball B supplied into the lower plate 202 to a position far from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The ball guiding portion 213 guides the game ball B guided from the upper tray 201 by the ball extraction guide path 241c to a position far from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 (left portion of the lower tray 202). As shown in FIG. 50(a), the ball guiding portion 213 forms part of the inner wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. More specifically, the ball guiding portion 213 forms a left inner wall facing the right inner wall where the ball extraction guide path 241c is opened in the inner wall of the cylindrically formed lower tray ball supply port 211c, and is inclined so as to move leftward from the rear end side to the front end side. Due to the inclination of the left inner wall (ball guiding part 213), a distance (clearance) is formed between the front surface of the plate unit base 211 (rear end of the lower plate 202) and the part immediately behind the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a, through which at least one game ball B can flow. As a result, when the game ball B flowing through the ball extraction guiding part 241c from the upper tray 201 abuts against the ball guiding part 213 from the right side, it is guided left forward by the inclination of the ball guiding part 213, and the game ball B can be guided to the left end side in the lower tray 202 away from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a in the lower tray 202. In other words, the ball guiding portion 213 can guide the game ball B to a position far from the lowest portion in the lower tray 202 (lower tray ball extraction hole 202a).

By the way, as shown in FIG. 50(b), since the lower tray ball supply port 211j in the conventional pachinko machine (also referred to as conventional product) extends straight in the front-rear direction, when the game ball B guided by the ball extraction guide path 241c contacts the left inner wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, it rolls forward while rebounding to the right, and is sent to a position in the lower tray 202 far from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b. Instead, the ball is stored in the right region of the bottom plate 202 where the bottom plate ball extraction hole 202b is provided. Therefore, in the conventional product, game balls B (represented by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 50(b)) are concentrated in the area on the right side of the center of the lower tray 202, and if the game balls B concentrated in the area on the right side of the lower tray 202 block the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, the game balls B are not discharged from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 to the lower tray 202 side. There is a risk that the detection sensor 154 will be activated and determine that the lower tray 202 is full even though there is still room in the left area within the lower tray 202 .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the ball guiding portion 213 is provided, the game ball B flowing through the ball removal guiding portion 241c can be guided to the left area in the lower tray 202. Also, in the lower tray 202, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored from the portion of the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower tray 202 (the front surface of the tray unit base 211), they pass through between the left side wall (ball guide portion 213) of the lower tray ball supply port 211c and the rear end of the lower tray 202, the foul cover unit 150 (ball outlet 150d) and the upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240 (ball extraction guideway 241). The game ball B discharged from c) to the lower tray ball supply port 211c side can be guided to the left side in the lower tray 202, and the game ball B can be accumulated throughout the lower tray 202. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation of the full-tank detection sensor 154 to notify the full tank even though there is a sufficient area in which the game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202, and more game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

In order to support the above effects, the inventors of the present invention counted the number of game balls B stored in each lower tray 202 when the full tank detection sensor 154 was activated in the product of the present embodiment and the conventional product. The game ball B was counted 10 times in each case. As a result, as shown in the table of FIG. 50(c), the bottom tray 202 of the present embodiment (product of the present embodiment) greatly exceeded the number of stored game balls B than the conventional product in every round, and it was confirmed that about 40% more game balls B than the conventional product could be stored on average.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49 and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 . The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and bulges forward to a greater extent on the left side than the center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. The upper plate main body 212 has a front end retreating rearward as it goes rightward in front view from the most forwardly bulging part, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The top plate main body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

The upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion near the right end, whose upper part is closed, slips under the ball lending operation unit 220 when assembled to the plate unit 200 . In addition, the upper plate main body 212 is formed with an effect operation unit attachment portion 212a in the middle portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Dish unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 is for relaying the connection between the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the left plate decorative board 273, the right plate decorative board 278, and the operation part relay board 332. The plate unit relay board 214 is attached near the lower right corner on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 . The rear surface of the plate unit relay board 214 faces the rear side of the plate unit base 211 when attached to the plate unit base 211 .

[3-5c-4. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a plan view showing an enlarged portion of the ball rental operation unit in the plate unit of the door frame. This ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, throws cash or prepaid cards into the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, lends out a predetermined number of game balls B to the upper tray 201 of the plate unit 200, displays the remaining amount of cash or prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine, or displays the cash or prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine. This is for returning the card after deducting the amount of the rented game ball B, adjusting the sound volume, and adjusting the amount of light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 attached to the top of the front surface of the plate unit base 211, an upper tray ball ejecting button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, a translucent disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 arranged to the right of the upper tray ball ejecting button 222 on the upper surface of the base portion 221, a ball lending operation base 224 arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball. A return button 225 arranged on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, a ball lending display part 226 arranged in the lower rear part of the ball lending operation base 223, a volume control button 227 arranged in front of the ball lending button 224 outside the base part 221, and a light amount control button 228 arranged on the left side of the volume control button 227 are provided.

The upper tray ball ejection button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by being pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape, and has the letters "ball" on its upper surface. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball rental display unit 226 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs and one cannonball-shaped LED, and can be visually recognized from the player's side through the transparent ball rental operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball ejection button 222 . When the ball lending button 224 is pressed after cash or a prepaid card with a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201 . When a return button 225 is pressed, the rented game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card put into the ball lending machine and returned. A ball lending display section 226 displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display section 226 when the ball lending machine breaks down.

The volume adjustment button 227 is used to adjust the volume of sound for presentation such as music, voice, sound effect, etc. output from the top central speaker and top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for low bass of the main body frame 4. The volume control button 227 is formed in a bicircular gourd shape that looks like a combination of two circles. The volume control button 227 has a "+" character in the center of one (upper) circle and a "-" character in the center of the other (lower) circle, and a pattern that looks like a speaker is emitting sound is applied to the part between the two circles. The volume control button 227 is formed such that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. Pressing the "+" side of the volume control button 227 increases the volume, and pressing the "-" side decreases the volume.

The light amount adjustment button 228 is for adjusting the light amount of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 and the brightness of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 . This light amount adjustment button 228 is formed in a bicircular gourd shape that looks like a combination of two circles. The light amount adjustment button 228 has a "+" character in the center of one (upper) circle and a "-" character in the center of the other (lower) circle, and a light bulb pattern is applied to the part between the two circles. The diameter of the circle on the "+" side of the light amount adjustment button 228 is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. Pressing the "+" side of the light amount adjustment button 228 brightens the light, and pressing the "-" side darkens it.

The volume control button 227 and the light amount control button 228 are colored in different colors (for example, the volume control button 227 is white and the light amount control button 228 is black) so that the player is unlikely to make a mistake.

By the way, when the volume and the amount of light are adjusted by using the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301, when the player-participation type effect requiring the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is not being executed, the effect operation unit 301 is appropriately operated to display a setting menu for adjusting the volume, the amount of light, and the like on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, it takes time and effort to adjust the volume and the amount of light. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, by operating the volume adjustment button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228, the volume and the amount of light can be directly adjusted, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided that can be adjusted in a short time by simplifying the labor required for adjusting the volume and the amount of light.

[3-5c-5. Unit after upper plate ball removal]
The unit before ball removal of the upper plate and the unit after removal of upper plate ball 240 in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The unit 240 after removing the upper tray ball is for discharging the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202 in cooperation with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper tray ball removing button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed.

The upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball feed port from the rear, an upper tray ball removal slider 242 attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, a spring (not shown) biasing the upper tray ball removal slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241.

The rear base 241 has a ball receiving port (not shown) that protrudes upward from a portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and opens forward to allow the game ball B to pass therethrough; A ball extraction guidance path 241c for guiding the game ball B downward and then guiding it rightward in rear view.

The ball receptacle is formed at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201 in the state assembled to the plate base unit 210, at a position that opens forward through the upper plate ball feed port of the plate unit base 211. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entry port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is positioned at the rear of the lower portion in the assembled state of the door frame 3. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

A portion of the ball extraction guide path 241c extending to the left and right protrudes to the right in a rear view from a portion where the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, is inclined so that the right end side in the rear view is lower, and opens on the right side in the rear view. A rear cover 244 closes the rear side of the portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c extending to the left and right. The ball extraction guideway 241c is formed such that, when assembled to the door frame 3, the upper portion of the portion extending vertically below the ball feeding guideway 241b is positioned in front of the ball extraction opening 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, and the right end of the portion extending leftward and rightward when viewed from the rear is connected to the notch 211d of the lower tray ball supply port 211c in the tray unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B ejected from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is ejected into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply opening 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper ball removal slider 242 has a rectangular shape in front view, and includes an operation receiving portion (not shown) projecting forward from the upper left corner, and an operation transmitting portion 242b projecting rearward from the rear surface, which is the rear side of the operation receiving portion. The operation receiving portion has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b has an upper surface that is inclined downward toward the rear, and a lower surface that extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper tray ball extracting slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving part penetrates the tray unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the lower end of the upper tray ball extracting button 222 is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving part. When the upper tray ball extracting slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242b projects rearward from the rear base 241, and the upper surface of the slider 242 is in contact with the operating rod 143c of the ball extracting member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140.

The spring has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper disk ball removal slider 242 to urge the upper disk ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper bowl ball extracting slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring, and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring.

In the unit 240 after upper tray ball removal, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upper movement end by the biasing force of the spring, and the upper tray ball removal button 222 is positioned at the upper movement end via the operation receiving part of the upper tray ball removal slider 242. In addition, since the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 is positioned at the upper movement end by the biasing force of the spring, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmission part 242b is prevented, and the partitioning part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned between the inlet 141a and the ball extraction opening 141b to separate them.

Therefore, when the upper tray ball ejection button 222 is not pressed, the entry port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b are separated from each other in the ball feeding unit 140, and the game ball B sent from the upper tray 201 to the ball receiving port can be sent from the batted ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance port 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper bowl ball extraction button 222 is pushed downward against the biasing force of the spring, the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 moves downward, and the operating rod 143c of the ball extraction member 143, which is in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper bowl extraction slider 242, can move downward. and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the inlet 141a from the upper tray 201 through the ball receiving port and the ball feeding guide path 241b is ejected forward from the ball outlet 141b that opens below the inlet 141a. Then, the game ball B ejected forward from the ball extraction port 141b passes through the ball extraction guide path 241c and is guided into the lower tray ball supply port 211c from the notch 211d, and then released from the lower tray ball supply port 211c into the lower tray 202, and the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the lower tray 202.

When the upper tray ball removal button 222 is released from the downward pressure, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring, and the upper tray ball removal button 222 is lifted.

Thus, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 can be fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 or discharged to the lower tray 202 side by the upper tray ball extraction unit 240 .

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 48 and the like. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the production operation unit 300 is attached from the front in the center in the horizontal direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire plate unit 200. - 特許庁

The dish decoration unit 250 includes a lower dish body 251 attached to the lower front surface of the dish unit base 211 and forming the lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211, a dish unit body 252 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251, a lower dish ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and a dish left decoration attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit body 252 and left and right. A unit 270 and a dish right decoration unit 275 are provided.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 . The lower plate main body 251 extends left and right and has a container shape (dish shape) that is open at the top and rear. The lower tray main body 251 is attached to the lower portion of the front surface of the tray unit base 211 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 has a substantially quadrangular shape that extends laterally in a plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction protrudes further forward than the right side. In the lower plate main body 251, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is formed in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower tray body 251 is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball removal hole 202 a is closed by a lower tray ball removal lid 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

When the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250 , the outer periphery and part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252 . In addition, the bottom surface of the lower tray main body is positioned below the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211 in the assembled state with the tray unit 200, and the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is positioned in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. As a result, the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49 and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200 . The plate unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. The top surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The plate unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward.

The plate unit main body 252 is provided with an upper side bulging portion 252a which bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction and which extends downward and is spaced apart in the left and right direction, and a lower front decorative portion 252b which bulges forward on the left side from the center in the left and right direction so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251. - 特許庁

A left plate decoration unit 270 and a right plate decoration unit 275 are attached to the front surfaces of the left and right upper side protrusions 252a, respectively.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side swelling portion 252a and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted therein, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower tray main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulge 252a.

Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, the plate unit main body 252 is formed between a pair of upper side bulges 252a in the center in the left-right direction, and has a performance operation unit attachment portion to which the performance operation unit 300 is attached. The performance operation unit mounting portion is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled with the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d.

[3-5d-3. Lower tray ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removal unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 27 and 50 and the like. The lower tray ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower tray main body 251, and by opening and closing the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a, the lower tray 202 stores the game balls B and discharges the game balls B from the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

The lower tray ball removal unit 260 includes a lower tray ball removal button 263 and a lower tray ball removal lid 265 that opens and closes the through hole by operating the lower tray ball removal button 263 .

When the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal button 263 is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decoration part 252b of the plate unit body 252, and the lower plate ball removal lid 265 closes the lower plate ball removal hole 202a. In this normal state, the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball extraction lid 265, and the game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

In a normal state, when the lower tray ball removal button 263 is pressed backward, the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is moved to open the lower tray ball removal hole 202a, and the game ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower tray ball removal hole 202a.

When the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is moved by pressing the lower tray ball removal button 263, the lower tray ball removal lid 265 remains moved, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is kept open, and the game balls B in the lower tray 202 can be continuously discharged downward.

In order to close the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a from this state, the lower tray ball extraction button 263, which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative part 252b, is pressed backward and then released, so that the lower tray ball extraction lid 265 returns to the normal position, and the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[3-5d-4. Plate left decorative unit and plate right decorative unit]
The left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 48 and the like. The left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side protrusion 252 a of the plate unit main body 252 . The left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 above the plate unit 200 .

The left plate decoration unit 270 is provided with a semi-cylindrical left plate decoration body 271 extending laterally and having translucency, a left plate decoration lens 272 penetrating the left plate decoration body 271 and having translucency, and a left plate decoration substrate 273 provided on the rear side of the left plate decoration lens 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side swelling portion 252a. The left plate ornament 271 is formed into a twisted semi-cylindrical shape with a forwardly bulging semicircular arc with a center axis extending obliquely to the upper left at the left end and a center axis extending left and right at the right end. The plate left decorative body 271 is formed milky white.

The left plate decorative lens 272 extends in the longitudinal direction of the left plate decorative body 271 while being aligned with the front surface thereof. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the left plate decoration substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the left plate decoration body 271 can be decorated with light.

The left plate decoration unit 270 is connected to the lower end of the door frame left side unit 420 at its left end when assembled to the door frame 3 . Since the left plate decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the left plate decoration body 271, when a plurality of LEDs of the left plate decoration base plate 273 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the left plate decoration body 271 can be decorated with substantially uniform light, and the fluorescent lamp can be seen to be embedded.

The right dish decoration unit 275 includes a semi-cylindrical right dish decoration body 276 extending laterally and having translucency, a right dish decoration lens 277 penetrating the right dish decoration body 276 and having translucency, and a right dish decoration substrate 278 provided on the rear side of the right dish decoration lens 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side swelling portion 252a. The right plate ornament 276 is formed in a shape of a twisted semi-cylindrical shape with a forwardly bulging semicircular arc having a central axis extending obliquely to the upper right at the right end and a central axis extending to the left and right at the left end. The right plate decoration 276 is formed in milky white.

The right plate decorative lens 277 extends in the longitudinal direction of the right plate decorative body 276 while being aligned with the front surface thereof. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the right plate decoration substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the right plate decoration 276 can be decorated with light.

The plate right decorative unit 275 is connected to the lower end of the door frame right side unit 430 at its right end when assembled to the door frame 3 . Since the right plate decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the right plate decoration body 276, when a plurality of LEDs of the right plate decoration substrate 278 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the right plate decoration body 276 can be illuminated substantially uniformly, and the fluorescent lamp can be seen to be embedded.

The left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 are partially projected upward from the front end of the upper side bulging part 252a in the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and can form a step between the upper side bulging part 252a and the left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 side. As a result, a player can hook his/her finger by using the step between the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging part 252a, and can use it as a finger hook when leveling the game ball B in the upper plate 201 or operating a performance operation part 301 to be described later. In addition, the step between the left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 to 56 and the like. FIG. 52(a) is a front perspective view of the production operation unit with the production operation button directed upward, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the production operation unit of (a). FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from above, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into main members and seen from front and lower. FIG. 55(a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state in which the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member is at the upward movement end position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state in which the effect operation unit has moved from the state of (a) to the raised position. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit in a state where the effect operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member is in the downward movement end position.

A performance operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and enables a player to operate and participate in the performance when the player participation type performance is executed. The performance operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250. - 特許庁

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player. The production operation part 301 is composed of a contact operation part 302 which can be operated by the player and a pressing operation part 303 which can be operated by the player. The effect operation section 301 has a contact operation section 302 provided above a pressing operation section 303 . In the effect operation unit 301 , the contact operation part 302 and the press operation part 303 are formed in a circular shape with a diameter about 5/8 the outer diameter of the effect operation unit 300 .

The production operation unit 300 includes a production operation part cover unit 310 which is provided on the front surface in the center in the horizontal direction of the plate unit 200 and has a spherical outer shape, an operation part base 315 which is attached to the outside of the production operation part cover unit 310 and which is attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, and a plurality of LEDs 320a which are provided on the upper surface of the operation part base 315 and are used to light-embellish the upper part of the production operation part cover unit 310 (unit top cover 312). It is provided with an operation part outer periphery decoration board 320, an outer periphery board cover 325 attached to the operation part base 315 so as to cover the performance operation part outer periphery decoration board 320 from above, and an operation part relay board unit 330 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 315.

In addition, the performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation unit 350 having a performance operation unit 301, a performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360 for lifting and lowering the performance operation unit 350, and a projecting force adjustment mechanism 380 for adjusting the projecting force of the performance operation unit 350. The effect operation section unit 350 is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat upward from the upper surface of the effect operation section cover unit 310 by the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 .

[3-5e-1. Production control unit cover unit]
The effect operation section cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The production operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the production operation unit mounting portion of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 via the operation unit base 315 . The effect operation section cover unit 310 decorates the outer circumference of the effect operation unit 300 (the periphery of the effect operation section unit 350) at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction.

The performance operation part cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 opened upward and rearward, and an annular unit upper cover 312 provided above the unit lower cover 311 and having an insertion opening 312a through which the performance operation part 301 is inserted. The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape so as to cover the front and lower sides of the operation portion base 315 . The unit upper cover 312 is formed so as to be continuous with the outer surface of the unit lower cover 311 . In other words, the effect operation section cover unit 310 has a substantially spherical outer surface. Incidentally, the effect operation section cover unit 310 of this embodiment has a spherical shape with a diameter of 216 mm.

The effect operation section cover unit 310 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis of the annular unit upper cover 312 is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line.

The front end of the performance operation part cover unit 310 is the front end of the door frame 3 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the distance from the front face of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is about 1/2 of the full width of the door frame base 101 in the lateral direction.

At least the upper unit cover 312 of the effect operation section cover unit 310 is translucent, and can be decorated with light by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs of the effect operation section peripheral decoration board 320, which will be described later.

The performance operation part cover unit 310 has a front end projecting farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state assembled to the plate unit 200.例文帳に追加Further, the effect operation section cover unit 310 is connected so that the left plate decoration 271 and the right plate decoration 276 extend outward from both left and right sides of the unit lower cover 311 . As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is conspicuous, and the integral decoration improves the appearance.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation section base 315 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The rear side of the operation unit base 315 is attached to the performance operation unit attachment portion 212 a of the upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 . The operation unit base 315 is covered with the unit lower cover 311 on the front and the bottom, and is covered with the unit upper cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301 on the top. The operation unit base 315 is formed in a container shape with an open top.

The operation unit base 315 includes a substantially cubic box-shaped body portion 315a with an open top, and a flange portion 315b extending outward from the upper end of the body portion and having a circular outer periphery. The main body portion 315a accommodates the effect operation portion unit 350 therein. In addition, the lower ends of a pair of guide shafts 362 and a central shaft 366 of a production operation section elevating mechanism 360 in the production operation section unit 350, which will be described later, are attached to the bottom wall of the main body section 315a. Further, the main body portion 315a rotatably supports the lower end side of the adjusting screw 384 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 on the upper surface of the bottom wall. Further, the board base 331 of the operation section relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear wall of the main body section 315a.

The effect operation section peripheral decoration board 320 is placed on the upper surface of the flange section 315b. Further, an annular outer peripheral substrate cover 325 is attached to the flange portion 315b so as to sandwich the effect operation portion outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 therebetween. A unit upper cover 312 is attached to the peripheral substrate cover 325 .

The upper surface of the flange portion 315 b of the operation portion base 315 is positioned substantially flush with the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 when assembled to the effect operation unit 300 .

[3-5e-3. Operation section relay board unit]
The operation section relay board unit 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The operating section relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the operating section base 315 . The operating section relay board unit 330 includes a board base 331 attached to the rear surface of the main body section 315a of the operating section base 315, an operating section relay board 332 attached to the rear surface of the board base 331, and a board cover 333 attached to the board base 331 so as to cover the operating section relay board 332 from behind.

The operation part relay board 332 includes the effect operation part peripheral decoration board 320 (the front decoration board 321 and the rear decoration board 322), the button outer decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the contact detection sensor main body 358, the button inside decoration board 364, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, the pressing detection sensor 373, the lifting detection sensor 374, the projection force detection sensor 375, and the projection force adjustment drive motor 381, and the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210. connections.

[3-5e-4. Production control unit]
The effect operation section unit 350 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The effect operation section unit 350 is provided so as to face outward from an insertion opening 312 a of the unit upper cover 312 of the effect operation section cover unit 310 , and can function as the contact operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 .

The effect operation unit 350 includes a bottomed cylindrical button body 351 whose upper end is closed, a disk-shaped contact detector 352 attached to the upper part of the button body 351, a cylindrical button sleeve 353 inserted into the button body 351 from below, a disk-shaped button base 354 attached to the lower end of the button sleeve 353 and supported by the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360 so as to be able to move up and down, and arranged above the button base 354. and an annular button exterior decoration substrate 355 having a plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on the upper surface thereof.

In addition, the effect operation unit 350 includes a vibration motor 356 arranged between the button body 351 and the button sleeve 353, a motor cover 357 attaching the vibration motor 356 to the button sleeve 353, and a contact detection sensor body 358 connected to the contact detection body 352 and attached to the outer periphery of the button sleeve 353.

The button body 351 is entirely transparent. The button body 351 has a disk-shaped upper surface portion 351a that curves upward, a tubular portion 351b that extends downward from the outer periphery of the upper surface portion 351a, and a locking portion 351c that protrudes downward from the lower end of the tubular portion 351b. The upper surface portion 351 a is formed in a shape that constitutes a part of a spherical surface having the same diameter as the spherical surface of the effect operation section cover unit 310 . The upper surface portion 351a is decorated with a circular shape whose diameter is about half the outer diameter. The outer diameter (diameter) of the upper surface portion 351 a (cylindrical portion 351 b ) is about 5/8 of the diameter of the effect operation portion cover unit 310 . The length (height) of the cylindrical portion 351b is about 5/8 of the diameter of the upper surface portion 351a. Four locking portions 351c are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 351b. The locking portion 351 c is locked to the button base 354 . Incidentally, the button body 351 of this embodiment has a diameter of about 127 mm.

The contact detection body 352 has a circular outer periphery and is formed in a dish shape in which the inner side of a certain width bulges upward from the outer periphery. The contact detection member 352 is located below the circular decoration on the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, and is formed to bulge upward obliquely and have a flat inner surface. Thereby, the contact detection body 352 looks like a part of decoration of the button body 351 . The contact detection member 352 has flat plate-like downward extending pieces 352a extending downward from the left and right ends and the rear end of the outer peripheral edge. The contact detector 352 is attached to the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351 a of the button body 351 . The contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal. The contact detection body 352 has a plurality of holes in the punching metal to suppress the capacitance with respect to the entire area, thereby preventing erroneous detection. In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, the light from the LED 364a of the button middle decoration substrate 364 provided below can be transmitted upward, and the central part of the upper surface part 351a of the button body 351 can be decorated with light in a good condition.

The contact detection body 352 is connected to the external electrode terminal of the connector in the contact detection sensor main body 358 . As a result, the contact detection body 352 can function as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, and can detect contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the upper surface or side surface of the button body 351 . In other words, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 allow the button main body 351 to function as the contact operation section 302 .

The button sleeve 353 has a vertically extending tubular sleeve body 353a and an annular flange portion 353b extending outward from the lower end of the sleeve body 353a. The button sleeve 353 is formed entirely transparent. The outer diameter of the sleeve body 353 a is about 4/7 of the inner diameter of the button body 351 , and the length of the sleeve body 353 a is substantially the same as the length of the tubular portion 351 b of the button body 351 . The button sleeve 353 can upwardly transmit light from the plurality of LEDs 355a of the button external decoration substrate 355 through the flange portion 353b.

The button base 354 is disc-shaped with a diameter approximately equal to the outer diameter of the button body 351, and is attached to the lower end of the button body 351 so as to close the open lower end side of the button body 351. As shown in FIG. The button base 354 has a pair of guide holes 354a vertically penetrating at symmetrical portions with respect to the center, a central hole 354b vertically penetrating at the center, and a pair of guide pins 354c protruding from the inner surface of the central hole toward the center. The guide shafts 362 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 are slidably inserted into the pair of guide holes 354a. The central hole 354b is formed with an inner diameter large enough for the elevation cam member 371 to pass through. The pair of guide pins 354c face each other on the same axis and are mounted rotatably around the axis.

The button base 354 extends downward, and further has a flat detection piece 354 d that is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 . The locking portion 351c of the button body 351 of the button base 354 is locked to the outer peripheral surface. A pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted into a pair of guide holes 354a, and the button base 354 is guided so as to be vertically movable. Further, the button base 354 is vertically moved by guiding the pair of guide pins 354 c to the cam portion 371 a of the elevation cam member 371 . The bottom surface of the button base 354 is in contact with the upper ends of the pair of elevating springs 365 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 and is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365 .

A plurality of LEDs 355a are mounted on the upper surface of the external button decoration board 355. As shown in FIG. The plurality of LEDs 355a are arranged in a line on a concentric double circumference. More specifically, the plurality of LEDs 355a are provided at a portion slightly outside the sleeve body 353a of the button sleeve 353 and at a portion near the center of the width of the flange portion 353b. By appropriately lighting the LED 355a of the button exterior decoration substrate 355, the portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 outside the contact detection body 352 and the side surface (peripheral surface) of the button body 351 can be decorated with light.

The vibration motor 356 has an eccentric weight attached to the rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight. Vibration motor 356 is arranged such that its rotating shaft extends in the left-right direction. In other words, the vibration motor 356 is arranged so that the rotation axis extends in a direction orthogonal to the advancing/retreating direction of the effect operation section 301 . Also, the vibration motor 356 is provided at a portion on a straight line passing through a pair of guide shafts 362 that guide the effect operation section 301 (the effect operation section unit 350) in the vertical direction. Thereby, the vibration from the vibration motor 356 can be satisfactorily transmitted to the effect operation section 301 . In addition, the vibration caused by the vibration motor 356 can reduce the influence on the pair of guide holes 354a (the pair of guide shafts 362).

The contact detection sensor main body 358 is a capacitance sensor. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the contact detection sensor main body 358 includes a sensor IC having a surge protection circuit, a transmission circuit, a detection smoothing circuit, a comparison circuit, etc., an output circuit, a constant voltage circuit that supplies power to the sensor IC and the output circuit, a sensor electrode, and a connection connector. The contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the capacitance of the sensor electrodes that it has inside. The connector of the contact detection sensor main body 358 has an external electrode terminal connected to the sensor electrode, and the external electrode terminal is connected to the contact detection body 352 . That is, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can cause the contact detection body 352 to function as an external sensor electrode. The contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the capacitance with the sensor electrodes and outputs an ON signal when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined capacitance set by the external resistance. In the present embodiment, the ON signal is output when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined value, but signals in multiple stages may be output according to the magnitude of the capacitance.

The effect operation unit 350 of the present embodiment is provided with a contact detection body 352 that functions as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance by a contact detection sensor body 358 on the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. Therefore, it is possible to detect contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the upper surface of the button body 351 via the contact detection body 352. In addition, since the contact detection body 352 of the effect operation unit 350 has a plurality of downwardly extending pieces 352a, it is possible to detect the contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the side surface of the button body 351 with the effect operation unit 350 projecting upward. Thus, the effect operation section unit 350 can cause the button body 351 to function as the contact operation section 302 with the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358 .

The effect operation unit unit 350 is supported by a effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 so as to be vertically movable. When the performance operation part unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), the upper surface part 351a of the button body 351 matches the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 of the performance operation part cover unit 310, so that the performance operation unit 300 looks like one sphere. When the effect operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the upper surface part 351a of the button body 351 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 and presses downward against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365, thereby functioning as the pressing operation unit 303.

More specifically, when the effect operation section unit 350 is in the lowest state (normal state), it does not move any further downward even if it is pressed, and is in a state in which the pressing operation cannot be performed. In this normal state, the detection piece 354 d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 . Then, when the effect operation unit unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 separates from the press detection sensor 373 and enters a non-detection state. Then, when the upper surface of the effect operation unit 350 is pushed downward to lower the effect operation unit 350 to the lower movement end against the urging force of the lifting spring 365, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373. Thereby, the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected.

In addition, since the upper part of the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal is covered with the button body 351 in the effect operation unit 350, when the contact operation part 302 is operated, the upper surface of the smooth spherical button body 351 is touched, and the player does not directly touch the surface of the punching metal having unevenness due to a plurality of holes, so that the player can smoothly operate the contact operation part 302. In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, it is possible to provide the contact operation part 302 with an arbitrary tactile sensation by forming fine unevenness or a plurality of lines on the surface (upper surface) of the button body 351, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in designing the contact operation part 302 and providing the pachinko machine 1 that further entertains the players.

In the above description, the button body 351 is transparent, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button body 351 may be made opaque or translucent so that the lower side is difficult to see through the button body 351 . This makes it difficult to see the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal through the button body 351, so that the appearance of the effect operation unit 350 can be improved. Further, when the button body 351 is made opaque, it is desirable to have translucency. As a result, the button body 351 can be decorated with light emission by the light from the LED 355a of the button outer decoration board 355 and the LED 364a of the button middle decoration board 364 provided below, and the player can be entertained by the light emission performance of the button body 351.例文帳に追加

[3-5e-5. Production operation unit lifting mechanism]
The effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation unit base 315, and can raise and lower the production operation unit unit 350. As shown in FIG. The effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is mounted in the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 below the effect operation unit 350, and is arranged symmetrically about the center axis of the elevating mechanism base 361 having a substantially circular outer periphery. a disc-shaped upper base 363 connecting the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and having an outer circumference smaller than the inner diameter of the button sleeve 353;

In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes a pair of elevating springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively inserted to urge the button base 354 upward, and a central shaft 366 that penetrates vertically through the center of the elevating mechanism base 361 and the button base 354 and has a lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a and an upper end attached to the upper base 363.

Furthermore, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes an operation button elevating drive motor 367 attached to the lower surface of the elevating mechanism base 361 so that the rotating shaft protrudes upward, a spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear 368 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, a spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 that meshes with the elevating drive gear 368 and is rotatably attached to the upper side of the elevating mechanism base 361, and the central shaft 36 that is rotated by the driven gear 369. a lift cam drive gear member 370 through which 6 is rotatably mounted.

In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes an elevating cam member 371, which is connected at its lower end to an elevating cam drive gear member 370 and is rotatably mounted through a central shaft 366, and rotates to elevate the button base 354, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the elevating mechanism base 361 so as to cover the elevating drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above.

In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes a press detection sensor 373 attached to the elevating mechanism base 361 that detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, an elevating detection sensor 374 that is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361 and detects the elevation of the effect operation unit unit 350 by detecting the rotational position of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 (elevating cam member 371), and an elevating mechanism base 361 that is attached to the elevating force adjustment mechanism 380. A projection force detection sensor 375 that detects the projection force of the effect operation unit 350 by detecting the elevation of the 385 is provided.

The elevating mechanism base 361 includes a disk-shaped base body 361a, a plurality of leg portions 361b projecting downward from the base body 361a, and a pair of through holes 361c penetrating the base body 361a and through which the pair of guide shafts 362 and the elevating spring 365 can pass. The base main body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body portion 315 a of the operating portion base 315 . A driven gear 369, an elevation cam drive gear member 370, a gear cover 372, a pressure detection sensor 373, and a projecting force detection sensor 375 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a. Further, an operation button elevation drive motor 367, an elevation detection sensor 374, and a protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 are attached to the bottom surface of the base body 361a. The lifting mechanism base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operating portion base 315 at the lower end of the leg portion 361b. Thus, a space in which the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 is arranged is formed between the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operating portion base 315 and the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. As shown in FIG. A pair of through-holes 361c are provided in the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 at positions half the diameter of the base body 361a forward and rearward from the center.

The pair of guide shafts 362 pass through a pair of through-holes 361c provided in the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 at positions half the diameter of the base body 361a forward and rearward from the center. The central shaft 366 passes through the center of the base body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 . The pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 have their respective lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315 a of the operating portion base 315 and their respective upper ends attached to the upper base 363 . A pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods.

The upper base 363 is formed to have an outer diameter approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 . The upper base 363 has a lower projection projecting downward. The upper base 363 can form a space capable of accommodating the elevation cam member 371 between the upper base 363 and the elevation mechanism base 361 by bringing the lower protrusion into contact with the upper protrusion of the gear cover 372 .

A plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the upper surface of the button middle decoration substrate 364 are full-color LEDs. The button interior decoration substrate 364 can light-embellish the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 364a.

The pair of lifting springs 365 are coil springs, through which the guide shaft 362 is inserted. The pair of lifting springs 365 have their lower ends in contact with the lower lifting spring holding members 385 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 and their upper ends in contact with the button base 354 .

The elevation cam driving gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connection portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the elevation cam member 371, and an elevation detection piece 370c that protrudes downward from the gear portion 370a in a cylindrical shape and has two cutouts that face each other and is detected by an elevation detection sensor 374. The elevation cam driving gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevation cam member 371 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The elevation cam member 371 penetrates the gear cover 372 and is provided between the upper base 363 and the elevation mechanism base 361 . The elevating cam member 371 has a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart in the circumferential direction by 180 degrees on the cylindrical outer peripheral surface and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371 a guides the guide pin 354 c of the button base 354 .

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, a second cam 371d extending upward parallel to the axis from one end of the first cam 371b, and a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d (Fig. 55, etc.). The second cam 371 d and the third cam 371 e extend upward to the same height, and the adjacent cam portions 371 a are spaced apart by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 354 c of the button base 354 .

Further, the lift cam member 371 has a connected portion 371f that connects with the connecting portion 370b of the lift cam drive gear member 370 at its lower end.

The elevation cam member 371 is formed so as to extend upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d of the cam portion 371a is rotated counterclockwise in plan view of the elevation cam member 371 . By rotating the elevation cam member 371, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 can be guided by the cam portion 371a, and the button base 354 (the effect operation section unit 350) urged upward by the elevation spring 365 can be raised and lowered.

The gear cover 372 has a through hole through which the lifting spring 365 and the lifting cam member 371 can pass. Further, the gear cover 372 has an upper protrusion projecting upward at a portion facing the lower protrusion of the upper base 363 . The gear cover 372 can form a space capable of accommodating the elevation cam member 371 between the upper base 363 and the elevation mechanism base 361 by bringing the upper projection into contact with the lower end of the lower projection of the upper base 363 .

The pressing detection sensor 373 detects the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 (press operation unit 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the effect operation unit 350. The press detection sensor 373 constantly detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 when the effect operation section unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state). This press detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state because the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is separated when the effect operation unit unit 350 is moved upward by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 from the normal state. When the upper surface of the effect operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the effect operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower moving end against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the press detection sensor 373 can detect the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 and detect the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 350 (press operation unit 303).

The elevation detection sensor 374 detects the elevation detection piece 370c of the elevation cam drive gear member 370, thereby detecting the rotational position of the elevation cam member 371 via the connected portion 371f that is connected to the connection portion 370b of the elevation cam drive gear member 370.

The projection force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385 d of the lift unsprung holding member 385 in the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 .

The effect operation part elevating mechanism 360 can vertically support the effect operation part unit 350 via a button base 354 by a pair of guide shafts 362 arranged in front and behind, and can urge the effect operation part unit 350 upward via the button base 354 by a pair of lifting springs 365. In addition, the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can move the effect operation unit 350 (effect operation unit 301) up and down with respect to the effect operation unit cover unit 310 by rotating the elevation cam member 371 with the operation button elevation drive motor 367. In addition, the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 can light-embellish the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the button interior decoration substrate 364 .

In the normal state, the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 has the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 engaged with the engaging section 371c provided on the lower end side of the elevating cam member 371 (see FIG. 55(a)). In this normal state, the effect operation part unit 350 is positioned at the downward movement end via the button base 354, and even if the effect operation part unit 350 (pressing operation part 303) is pressed downward, the effect operation part unit 350 does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303 is not detected. Also, in a normal state, the surface (upper surface) of the unit upper cover 312 in the performance operation part cover unit 310 and the upper surface of the button body 351 in the performance operation part unit 350 match, and the performance operation part cover unit 310 and the button body 351 form one sphere.

In a normal state (when the effect operation section unit 350 is in the lowered position), when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation drive gear 368 counterclockwise in plan view, the elevation cam drive gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view via the driven gear 369 meshing with the elevation drive gear 368, and the elevation cam member 371 connected to the elevation cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the lift cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. 55(a) moves rightward, and the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 rolls from the locking portion 371c to the portion of the first cam 371b to the left of the locking portion 371c, and the button base 354 moves slightly downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

As the elevation cam member 371 rotates, the guide pin 354c, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b toward the second cam 371d. Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the biasing force of the elevation spring 365 causes the guide pin 354c to move upward along the second cam 371d, together with the guide pin 354c. Then, the button base 354 rises, and the effect operation section unit 350 is in the state of the raised position. In this state, since the detection piece 354d is separated from the pressure detection sensor 373, the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detection state.

The lower lifting spring holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 with which the lower end of the lifting spring 365 abuts can be moved to various positions in the vertical direction by the protrusion force adjusting drive motor 381, although the details will be described later. Since the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 can be changed according to the vertical position of the lifting spring lower holding member 385, the effect operation unit 350 can be projected to the raised position with a projecting force corresponding to the compression amount of the lifting spring 365.

When the effect operating unit 350 is in the raised position, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a, as shown in FIG. 55(b). In this state, the driving of the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

When the effect operation section unit 350 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the button base 354 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the button base 354 is restricted. In addition, when the production operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the production operation unit 350 (production operation unit 301) as a whole moves upward, and the upper surface part 351a of the button body 351 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312.

When the button body 351 (pressing operation part 303) of the production operation part unit 350 is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 in the state of this raised position, the production operation part unit 350 moves downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372. When the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the button base 354 is in the lowered position, and the effect operation unit 350 (the pressing operation part 303) is also in the lowered position together with the button base 354.

In this way, when the button base 354 contacts the gear cover 372, the detection piece 354d protruding downward from the button base 354 is detected by the pressing detection sensor 373, and the pressing of the button main body 351 (pressing operation portion 303) of the effect operation unit is detected.

In order to return the effect operation section unit 350 (pressing operation section 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. is pressed downward, and the button base 354 moves downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

When returning the effect operation section unit 350 to the lowered position, the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 moves the lifting spring lower holding member 385 downward to reduce the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 (see FIG. 56). As a result, the biasing force of the elevation spring 365 that urges the effect operation unit 350 upward is weakened, so that the force acting on the third cam 371e of the elevation cam member 371 via the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is also weakened. Also, as the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367, an inexpensive motor with low torque can be used.

Then, when the guide pin 354c moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b as the elevation cam member 371 rotates, the downward movement of the button base 354 stops, and the guide pin 354c rolls along the first cam 371b. After that, when the guide pin 354c reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guiding pin 354c is inserted into the recessed locking portion 371c by the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 is stopped, so that the effect operation unit 350 returns to the original lowered position.

In the above description, the operation button elevation driving motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in the effect operation section elevation mechanism 360 to move the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d, thereby projecting the button base 354 (button main body 351) from the lowered position to the raised position at once. In a normal state in which the button main body 351 (the effect operation section unit 350) is moved to the lowered position by being locked by the locking portion 371c of the elevation cam member 371, the elevation cam member 371 may be rotated clockwise in plan view by the operation button elevation drive motor 367. Incidentally, the lifting distance of the button body 351 (the effect operation unit unit 350) by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in this embodiment is about 40 mm.

When the elevation cam member 371 is rotated clockwise in a normal state, the guide pin 354c moves from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the biasing force of the elevation spring 365 causes the guide pin 354c to move upward along the third cam 371e. If the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 is stopped when the guide pin 354c is in the middle position of the third cam 371e, the upward projection of the button body 351 can be stopped at an arbitrary position between the lowered position and the raised position. By projecting the button body 351 to a position above the lowered position, the button body 351 can be pressed downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the button body 351 can function as the pressing operation portion 303.

When the button body 351 is projected upward by the third cam 371e, it is desirable to move the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365. As a result, the load applied to the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 (operation button elevation drive motor 367) can be reduced, and the operational feeling of pressing the button body 351 can be reduced.

In this way, the amount of projection of the button body 351 (the effect operation section unit 350) can be changed according to the rotational position of the elevation cam member 371. Therefore, by varying the amount of projection of the button body 351 according to the game state (for example, according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005), the player can be made to indicate the degree of expectation for the game.

At least one shallow concave portion capable of engaging the guide pin 354c may be provided in the middle of the third cam 371e of the elevation cam member 371. As shown in FIG. As a result, the button body 351 (the production operation unit 350) can be stably projected to the position of the same amount of projection, and variations in the amount of projection can be prevented. Further, when a recess is provided in at least one place in the middle of the third cam 371e, the guide pin 354c is engaged with the recess, so that the operation button elevation drive motor 367 does not need to keep the elevation cam member 371 rotating and stopped, and the load on the operation button elevation drive motor 367 can be reduced.

[3-5e-6. Projection power adjustment mechanism]
The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The projection force adjustment mechanism 380 changes the amount of compression of a lifting spring 365 that urges the performance operation unit 350 upward, thereby changing the momentum (projection force) with which the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) projects upward. The projection force adjusting mechanism 380 is provided between the bottom wall of the main body portion 315 a of the operating portion base 315 and the base main body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 .

The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 includes a protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 attached to the lower surface of a base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361, a spur pinion gear 382 attached to the rotating shaft of the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381, a transmission gear 383 meshing with the pinion gear 382 and rotatably attached to the bottom surface of the base body 361a, a spur gear portion 384a meshing with the transmission gear 383, It has a screw portion 384b extending downward from the gear portion 384a in a columnar shape and having a spiral groove formed on its outer periphery, and an adjusting screw 384 through which the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably supported.

The protrusion force adjusting drive motor 381 is attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 so as to form a gap with the lower surface of the base body 361a. The rotation shaft of the projection force adjusting drive motor 381 protrudes into the gap between it and the base body 361a.

The adjusting screw 384 has a length extending from the bottom wall of the main body portion 315 a of the operating portion base 315 to the base main body 361 a of the lifting mechanism base 361 . A screw portion 384b of the adjusting screw 384 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter larger than that of the gear portion 384a.

The lifting spring lower holding member 385 has a main body portion 385a that extends in the front-rear direction, a screw hole 385b that penetrates vertically through the center of the main body portion 385a and is screwed with the screw portion 384b, spring holding recesses 385c that are provided at both front and rear ends of the main body portion 385a and are recessed downward to accommodate the lower ends of the lifting springs 365, and a flat plate-like detection piece 385d that extends upward from the front end of the main body portion 385a. are The lift lower spring holding member 385 is penetrated by the guide shafts 362 at the centers of the pair of spring holding recesses 385c. The detection piece 385 d is detected by the projecting force detection sensor 375 of the effect operation section elevating mechanism 360 .

The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 can rotate the adjustment screw 384 around the central shaft 366 via the transmission gear 383 and the gear portion 384a when the pinion gear 382 is rotated by the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 . The protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 rotates the adjusting screw 384 by the protrusion force adjusting drive motor 381, and thereby the lifting unsprung holding member 385 can be vertically moved by the screw hole 385b that meshes with the screw portion 384b.

When the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 moves the lower end of the lifting spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c upward, increasing the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365. On the other hand, when the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward, the lower end of the lifting spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves downward, and the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 decreases (see FIG. 56). In other words, when the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member 385 is moved upward, the urging force of the lifting/lowering spring 365 for urging the performance operation unit unit 350 upward can be increased, and when the lifting/lowering unsprung holding member 385 is moved downward, the urging force of the lifting spring 365 for urging the performance operation unit unit 350 upward can be reduced. As a result, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 can adjust the upward projection force of the effect operation section unit 350 .

The detection piece 385d of the lift unsprung holding member 385 is detected by the projecting force detection sensor 375 when the lift unsprung holding member 385 is raised to the maximum. That is, the detection piece 385d is detected by the projecting force detection sensor 375 when the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 is maximized. As a result, when the protrusion force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d while the lifting force adjustment drive motor 381 is moving the lifting spring unsprung member 385 upward, the lifting force adjustment drive motor 381 stops the lifting spring unsprung holding member 385 from moving upward.

In addition, as described above, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 can appropriately adjust the projection force of the effect operation unit 350. Therefore, when the effect operation unit 350 is in the lowered position, the contact detection body 352 detects the contact or approach of the object to be detected (for example, a player's finger) to the button body 351, and the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 causes the effect operation unit 350 to protrude and contact the object to be detected. The projecting force of the button body 351 may be varied by appropriately selecting the position in the vertical direction. As a result, when the button body 351 protrudes upward, the force applied to the player's fingers or the like can be varied, so that when the button body 351 strongly abuts, the player can be made to think that something good will happen, and the player's expectation for the game can be enhanced. Therefore, according to the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, depending on the game state (for example, according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005), by increasing or weakening the projecting force of the button body 351, it is possible to suggest the player's expectation for the game.

By the way, as a method of changing the biasing force of the spring, it is conceivable to change the biasing force by twisting the spring. However, it is necessary to use a compressed spring (compression coil spring) in order to protrude the effect operation unit 350, and if the compression coil spring is twisted to change the biasing force, an unreasonable stress different from the original use will act on the compression coil spring, and there is a risk that the internal tissue will deteriorate early and break. On the other hand, in the projection force adjusting mechanism 380 of the present embodiment, the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 is changed by moving the lifting spring lower holding member 385 in the vertical direction, thereby adjusting the projection force (biasing force) of the effect operation unit 350. Therefore, excessive stress does not act on the lifting spring 365, early deterioration of the lifting spring 365 can be reduced, and the effect operation unit 350 can be stably projected over a long period of time.

[3-5e-7. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the action of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58 and the like. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship of the effect operation section outer peripheral decoration board, button external decoration board, and button internal decoration board in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation section. FIG. 58(a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, and FIG. 58(b) is a front view of the plate unit when the effect operation unit is in the raised position. The performance operation unit 300 is formed in a spherical shape as a whole, and has a performance operation section 301 on the upper surface thereof which can be operated by the player. The effect operation section 301 is composed of a contact operation section 302 capable of being operated by contact or approach of the player's hand, etc., and a pressing operation section 303 capable of pressing operation. The contact operation portion 302 is provided above the pressing operation portion 303 (button main body 351).

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled in the plate unit 200 in a state in which the projecting direction of the pressing operation part 303 (the effect operation part unit 350) capable of projecting upward is inclined so that the upper part is positioned forward with respect to the vertical direction. In other words, the center of the effect operation section 301 is positioned forward of the apex of the spherical effect operation unit 300 . As a result, a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can easily see the effect operation section 301.例文帳に追加

In the normal state of the performance operation unit 300, the depressing operation part 303 (performance operation part unit 350) is in the lowered position, and the curved upper surface of the button body 351 of the performance operation part unit 350 matches the spherical surface of the performance operation part cover unit 310. - 特許庁Further, in a normal state, even if the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the pressing operation portion 303 (the effect operation portion unit 350) does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 looks like a mere spherical ornament to the player, making it difficult for the player to recognize that it is operable.

As shown in FIG. 57, the effect operation unit 300 has a effect operation part outer periphery decoration board 320 arranged below a unit top cover 312 surrounding the outer periphery of the pressing operation part 303 (the effect operation part unit 350), an annular button outer decoration board 355 inside near the outer edge of the pressing operation part 303, and an inner button decoration board 364 further inside. The effect operation unit 300 is arranged outside in the order of the button outer decoration board 355 and the effect operation part outer periphery decoration board 320 centering on the inside button decoration board 364 . The LEDs 355a inside the button inner decoration substrate 364 and the button outer decoration substrate 355 are arranged below the contact detection body 352. However, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal and has translucency, the light from them can be transmitted upward (toward the player).

The production operation unit 300 can light-embellish the annular unit upper cover 312 by means of the LEDs 320 a of the production operation section peripheral decoration board 320 . In addition, the LEDs 355a of the button external decoration substrate 355 can be used to decorate the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the upper surface of the button body 351 and the outer peripheral surface. Further, the central portion of the upper surface of the button main body 351 can be decorated with light by means of the LED 364a of the button interior decoration substrate 364. FIG.

Since the plurality of LEDs 320a of the effect operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the button outer decoration board 355, and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the button inner decoration board 364 are arranged in a row on the circumference, the player can see the light emission effect in which the light rotates around the center of the pressing operation section 303 by sequentially emitting light in the circumferential direction. In addition, since the plurality of LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, and LEDs 364a are arranged concentrically, the player can see a light emission effect in which light spreads outward from the center of the pressing operation part 303, and a light emission effect in which light converges from the outside to the center of the pressing operation part 303.

In a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a lowered position in which the pressing operation part 303 (effect operation part unit 350) is aligned with the surface of the unit upper cover 312 as shown in FIG. 58(a). In this state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303 is disabled. On the other hand, the contact operation unit 302 can enable contact operations in accordance with the player-participation type production to be executed.

As an effect (player participation type effect) in a normal state in which the pressing operation part 303 (the effect operation part unit 350) is not projected, for example, an effect image prompting the player to touch the upper surface of the effect operation unit 300 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or a voice, effect sound, or the like is output. When the contact detection body 352 detects contact (or approach) to the button main body 351, the process proceeds to the next performance stage. When the contact is detected, the LED 355a of the button outer decoration board 355 and the LED 364a of the button inner decoration board 364 emit light to decorate the button body 351, thereby making it possible for the player to recognize that the contact operation has been accepted, and to give an operational feeling to the contact operation section 302. At this time, the degree of expectation of the game (for example, occurrence of an advantageous game state such as a "jackpot" game in which the player is advantageous) may be suggested to the player by means of the emission color, emission luminance, emission pattern, etc. of the button body 351.例文帳に追加

Alternatively, when the contact detector 352 detects contact (or approach) to the button body 351 , the vibration motor 356 may be driven to vibrate the button body 351 . As a result, it is possible to impart an operational feeling to the contact operation section 302, and to make the player strongly recognize that the contact operation has been accepted. At this time, the vibration motor 356 may be used to give a strong vibration, a weak vibration, or a vibration having a predetermined rhythm to suggest the player's degree of expectation for the game.

In addition, as the production in the normal state (player participation type production), after the production display device 1600 displays a production image prompting the player to touch the upper surface of the production operation unit 300, or outputs a voice, sound effect, or the like, when the contact detection body 352 detects the contact of the player (hand or finger) with the upper surface of the button body 351, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 moves the button body 351 (the production operation unit 350) with the biasing force of the lifting spring 365. Protrudes upward (pops up) by . More specifically, in a normal state, when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b), and the biasing force of the pair of elevation springs 365 causes the effect operation section unit 350 (the button main body 351 and the pressing operation section 303) to vigorously protrude upward together with the button base 354 to the elevated position ( See FIG. 55(b)). In this elevated position, the upper surface of the button body 351 is positioned significantly higher than the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the button body 351 protrudes upward. As the button body 351 protrudes upward as described above, the finger touching the button body 351 is pushed upward together with the button body 351, so that the player can be greatly surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

After that, the game shifts to an effect of pressing the button body 351 (pressing operation section 303), and the player is entertained by the pressing operation of the pressing operation section 303. FIG. More specifically, when the button body 351 (press operation unit 303) is in the raised position and is pressed downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the button body 351 (production operation unit unit 350) moves downward so that the top surface of the button body 351 becomes flush with the top surface of the unit top cover 312, and the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373. As a result, the pressing operation of the button main body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is detected, and the presentation can be changed with the pressing operation as a trigger, and the player can be entertained by the player participation type presentation.

Incidentally, during the above effect, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 may be used to increase or decrease the protrusion force (momentum) that causes the button body 351 to protrude, so that the degree of expectations for the game may be suggested to the player by the strength of the protrusion force. Further, when the button body 351 is popped up or pressed, the vibration motor 356 may vibrate the button body 351 .

In the effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the button body 351 (the effect operation unit 350) may be projected upward when the contact detection body 352 detects that the player's finger or the like approaches within the movement range (projection range) of the button body 351 projecting upward. As a result, the button main body 351 abuts the player's finger or the like and gives an impact, so that the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. In this case as well, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 may be used to increase or decrease the projection force of the button body 351, so that the player's expectations for the game may be suggested by the strength of the projection force.

Further, in the effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the button body 351 (the effect operation unit 350) may be projected upward when the contact detection body 352 detects that the player's finger or the like approaches within a range of a predetermined distance from the projecting button body 351 outside the projecting range of the button body 351 projecting upward. As a result, the wind pressure generated by the protrusion of the button body 351 can be applied to the player's fingers or the like, so that the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Even in this case, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 may be used to increase or decrease the protrusion force of the button body 351, so that the degree of expectation for the game may be suggested to the player by the strength of the wind pressure applied to the player's fingers or the like.

Furthermore, as an effect of projecting the effect operation unit 350, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be projected upward regardless of the detection of the player's finger or the like by the contact detection body 352. At this time, when the button body 351 is projected with a strong projection force by the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, the button body 351 projects vigorously and a sound (projection sound) is generated, so that the projection sound can startle the player. In addition, when the button body 351 is projected with a weak projection force by the projection force adjusting mechanism 380, the button body 351 is quietly projected, so that the player can hardly notice the projection of the button body 351, and the player can be surprised by the projecting of the button body 351.例文帳に追加

As an effect after projecting the effect operation part unit 350 (button main body 351), the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 is weakened by the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, and the button main body 351 (pressing operation part 303) may be pressed in the same manner as a general pressing button. Alternatively, the pushing force of the lifting spring 365 may be strengthened by the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, and an effect may be executed in which the player presses the button body 351 with a strong force.

Further, as an effect after the effect operation section unit 350 (the button body 351) is projected, an effect may be executed in which the projecting button body 351 is touch-operated. At this time, since the contact detector 352 has a downwardly extending piece 352a extending downward, the side surface of the button body 351 may be touched. Also, at this time, it is desirable to increase the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 by the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380, thereby making it difficult to move the projecting button body 351 and facilitating the contact operation of the button body 351 (contact operation portion 302).

In addition, as an effect for protruding the effect operating unit 350, in the effect operating unit elevating mechanism 360, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is moved from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d by rotating the elevating cam member 371 counterclockwise by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, thereby projecting the button base 354 (button main body 351) from the lowered position to the raised position at once. It is not limited to this.

For example, in a normal state in which the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is engaged with the engaging portion 371c of the elevation cam member 371 and the button main body 351 (the effect operation section unit 350) is moved to the lowered position, the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 in a clockwise direction in a plan view, thereby moving the guide pin 354c from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and moving the elevation cam partway through the third cam 371e. The rotation of the member 371 may be stopped to stop the button body 351 from protruding upward at a position between the lowered position and the raised position. At this time, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjusting mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 .

Thus, even when the button body 351 is projected halfway by the third cam 371e of the elevation cam member 371, the button body 351 can be pressed, and the button body 351 can be made to function as the pressing operation part 303, so that the player can enjoy the player participation type performance. In this case, since the amount of upward protrusion of the button body 351 can be varied according to the rotational position of the elevation cam member 371, the degree of expectation for the game can be suggested according to the amount of protrusion of the button body 351, and the player can be entertained.

Further, as a performance of pressing the projected performance operation unit 350 (button body 351), after projecting the performance operation unit 350, the lift spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward to minimize the compression of the lift spring 365. - 特許庁As a result, since the urging force of the lifting spring 365 is in the weakest state, the performance operation part unit 350 can be pressed with a light (weak) force, and the operability of the pressing operation can be enhanced to entertain the pressing operation. Further, as a performance for pressing the performance operation part unit 350 (button body 351), depending on the lottery result of the drawn special pattern, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 may be placed at an appropriate position in the vertical direction and the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 may be set to any strength from the strongest to the weakest. As a result, the player can be made to press the performance operation part unit 350 strongly or weakly, so that the player can be entertained by the difference in the operation force of the performance operation part unit 350, more various performances can be presented, and the player can hardly get bored.

Further, as an effect using the effect operation unit 300, it is possible to detect the contact of the player's finger or the like to the contact operation unit 302 (the button body 351) at a plurality of contact stages (approach stages). In other words, focusing on the fact that as the player's finger or the like approaches the button main body 351 (contact detection body 352), the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 increases. Specifically, for example, a stage in which the player's fingers or the like are separated from the button body 351 by a predetermined distance or more, a stage in which the player's fingers or the like are not in contact with the button body 351 within a predetermined distance from the button body 351, and a stage in which the player's fingers or the like are in contact with the button body 351 are divided into stages. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by doing so.

In the above-described embodiment, as a normal state of the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 55(a), the effect operation unit 350 (the button body 351) is in the lowered position and the lifting unsprung holding member 385 is moved upward. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. As a result, since the lift spring 365 is not strongly compressed in a normal state, early deterioration (fatigue) of the lift spring 365 can be suppressed. Further, the urging force of the strongly compressed lift spring 365 can prevent early deterioration (fatigue) of the button base 354 and the lower lift spring holding member 385 .

Thus, according to the performance operation unit 300 of the present embodiment, since it can be used for various patterns of player-participation type performance, the player can enjoy various performances, and it is difficult to make the player bored, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

By the way, the effect operation unit 300 is provided with an annular (two circular arcs combined) effect operation part outer peripheral decoration board 320 on the upper part of the spherical effect operation part cover unit 310, and a contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided in the effect operation part unit 350 that moves up and down inside the effect operation part outer periphery decoration board 320. In addition, inside the button sleeve 353 of the effect operating unit 350, a button middle decoration substrate 364 whose position is fixed is provided. Since the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided with a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, when the production operation unit 350 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the contact detection sensor main body 358 (sensor electrode) approaches the production operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 and the button inner decoration board 364, and the proximity of the production operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320 and the button inner decoration board 364 may change the capacitance of the sensor electrode and cause the contact detection sensor main body 358 to make an erroneous detection.

Therefore, a conductive shield (for example, a punching metal, a metal plate, an expanded metal, a wire mesh, a metal wire, a metal foil, etc.) connected to the ground (GND) may be provided between the effect operation section peripheral decoration board 320 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and between the button inner decoration board 364 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. As a result, even if the distance between the contact detection sensor main body 358 and the production operation part peripheral decoration board 320 or the button inside decoration board 364 changes by moving the production operation part unit 350 up or down, a shield connected to the ground (GND) that does not change the distance from the contact detection sensor main body 358 to the production operation part outer circumference decoration board 320 or the button inside decoration board 364 is provided between the contact detection sensor main body 358 and the production operation part outer circumference decoration board 320 or the button inside decoration board 364.例文帳に追加4 can be reduced, and erroneous detection in the contact detection sensor main body 358 can be prevented.

[3-5 f. Another embodiment of the plate unit]
Next, a plate unit 200 of an embodiment different from the above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61 and the like. FIG. 59 is a plan view of an effect operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact detectors are provided in the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit. FIG. 60 (A) is a formal explanatory diagram that schematically shows an example of connecting multiple contact detectors to a single contact sensor body, and (B) is a formal explanatory diagram showing an example in which a switch is provided between the contact detection sensor itself and the multiple contact detector. This is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a decorative unit, a plate right decorative unit, and a production operation unit can be advanced in front and rear directions, and a contact test body is provided on the front and rear side of the production operation unit. FIG. 61(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative touch detector, and FIG. 61(b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the effect operation unit. In addition, in FIGS. 59 to 61, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 59, the contact detection body 352 is divided into a left contact detection body 390L and a right contact detection body 390R on the lower side of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350, and the left contact detection sensor body 391L and the right contact detection sensor body 391R are connected to the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R, respectively. According to this embodiment, for example, when the player moves his or her finger or the like from the left side to the right side on the top surface of the button body 351, first, when the player's finger or the like is positioned on the left side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the left contact detection body 390L changes and the left contact detection sensor body 391L becomes detected, while the capacitance of the right contact detection body 390R does not change and the right contact detection sensor body 391R remains non-detected. When the player's finger or the like moves to the center of the button body 351, the capacitance of both the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R changes, so that both the left contact detection sensor body 391L and the right contact detection sensor body 391R are detected. Furthermore, when the player's finger or the like moves to the right side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the left contact detection body 390L returns to the original state, and the left contact detection sensor body 391L becomes non-detected, and the capacitance of the right contact detection body 390R changes, and the right contact detection sensor body 391R continues to detect.

In this way, the movement of the player's fingers or the like can be detected by combinations of detection/non-detection of the left contact detection sensor main body 391L and right contact detection sensor main body 391R by the left contact detection body 390L and right contact detection body 390R, and the pattern of the change. As a result, it is possible to detect the contact operation of more various movements, to present the player participation type performance which enables the contact operation part 302 to perform various contact operations, and to further enjoy the player participation type performance of operating the contact operation part 302.例文帳に追加It should be noted that more complicated motions can be detected by increasing the number of contact detection bodies.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 60( a ) is an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are connected to one contact detection sensor body 392 . According to this embodiment, a single contact detection sensor main body 392 can detect the contact of a human body or the like at any one of the contact detection bodies 393 in a state in which the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are provided at different locations.

For example, by distributing a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 inside (lower side) of the button body 351, even if the player's finger or the like touches any part of the surface of the button body 351, contact can be detected by any of the contact detection bodies 393, and the detection accuracy of contact with the contact operation unit 302 can be improved.

In addition, a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 may be provided at a portion of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to touch (for example, a portion where the player may be injured, a portion where the player may cause trouble to other players, a portion where a fraudulent act may occur, etc.), and when any of the contact detection bodies 393 detects a human body or the like, an alert or warning may be issued.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 60(b) is an example in which a switching portion 394 is provided between one contact detection sensor main body 392 and a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 to connect only one of the contact detection bodies 393 to the contact detection sensor main body 392. According to this embodiment, by switching the connection to any one of the plurality of contact detection bodies 352 by the switching unit 394, it is possible to detect contact of a human body or the like only at a desired site (contact detection body 352). Examples of the switching unit 394 include "switching by a switching circuit using relays and transistors", "switching by other electronic circuits", and "switching according to the movement of the movable members (for example, the movable plate left decoration unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 60(c))".

For example, in the production operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302), a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are dispersedly arranged, and when a player participation type production is executed in which the parts detected by each contact detection body 393 are touched in order, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor body 392 is switched in the order of contact by the switching part 394, and the contact detection body 393 may detect whether or not the player's finger or the like is in contact. As a result, it is possible to present to the player a player-participation-type presentation with a high game quality by the plurality of contact detection bodies 393, and to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

As shown in FIG. 60(c), when the left plate decoration unit 270, the right plate decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300 can move forward and backward, a first contact detection body 393a is provided on the front side of the effect operation unit 300, and a second contact detection body 393b is provided on the rear side of the left plate decoration unit 270, the right plate decoration unit 275, and the effect operation unit 300. The first contact detection body 393a and the contact detection sensor body 392 are connected by 394, and when the effect operation unit 300 and the like are retracted, the switching part 394 may be switched to connect the second contact detection body 393b and the contact detection sensor body 392.

Thereby, when the effect operation unit 300 or the like is protruded (moved) forward, the contact or approach of the player is detected by the first contact detection body 393a, and the forward movement of the effect operation unit 300 or the like is stopped. As a result, the performance operation unit 300 or the like can be prevented from unnecessarily pressing the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable.

On the other hand, if the performance operation unit 300 or the like is protruded forward, a gap may be formed behind the performance operation unit 300 or the like, and if the performance operation unit 300 or the like is retracted to the initial position with the player's fingers or the like inserted in the gap, the player's fingers or the like may be caught and injured. Therefore, in this embodiment, the second contact detection body 393b is switched to be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 by the switching portion 394 when the effect operation unit 300 or the like moved forward is moved backward. Then, when the player's finger or the like is detected by the second contact detection body 393b, the rearward movement of the performance operation unit 300 or the like is stopped, the player is notified of the guidance to release the finger or the like from the rear side of the performance operation unit 300 or the like, and the performance operation unit 300 or the like is moved backward only in the state in which the second contact detection body 393b is not detected to return to the initial state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured by the gap behind the performance operation unit 300 and the like, and the safety of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Also, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 61(a), a contact detection body 395 for detecting contact of a player's fingers or the like has a star-shaped outer shape to provide decorativeness (design). The shape of the decorative contact detection body 395 is not limited to a star shape, and may be a circular shape, a polygonal shape, a geometric pattern shape, a shape imitating a predetermined character, a shape imitating a predetermined item, a shape imitating a predetermined logo, a picture frame shape, or the like. Thus, the contact detection body 395 which can be seen through the transparent button body 351 has decorativeness (design), so that the appearance of the button body 351 and the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the contact detection body 395 itself, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to players can be provided.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the contact detection body 352 is formed of punching metal, but is not limited to this, and the contact detection body may be formed of a metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, plating, metal deposition, foil stamping, etc., and the same effects as described above can be achieved. In addition, it is desirable that the contact detection member is provided on the back side of the transparent surface member so as not to be directly touched by the player's fingers, etc., and wear of the contact detection member can be avoided, and the touch feeling can be made smooth by the surface member.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the inside button decoration substrate 364 (LED 364a) is provided below the contact detection body 352. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. As a result, the decoration body 398 can be seen through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397, so that the decorativeness of the performance operation unit provided with the surface member 396 can be enhanced, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In the embodiment of FIG. 61(b), the contact detection body 397 may be formed by metal deposition, and the decoration body 398 provided below may not be visible due to the metallic luster of the contact detection body 397 in a normal state.

Also, the contact detection body 352 may be formed so that it cannot be recognized by the player. Here, examples of the unrecognizable contact detection body include "a body formed of a transparent member" and "a body formed so as to be seen integrally with the decoration of the surface member such as the button body". As a result, since the effect operation unit 301 in which the contact detection object 352 is provided cannot recognize the contact detection object 352, it is possible for the player to have the illusion that the contact of the finger or the like is not detected or the contact operation is performed. The presence of the contact detection body 352 (contact operation unit 302) is noticed for the first time, and the player can be greatly surprised, and the player can be entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 420 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65 and the like. FIG. 62(a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a front perspective view of the door frame left side unit, and (c) is a rear perspective view of the door frame left side unit. FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the back. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view taken along line Wu-Wu in FIG. 62(a). The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame left side unit 420 includes a door frame left side base 421 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, a door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 attached to the upper front surface of the door frame left side base 421 and having a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted thereon vertically at regular intervals on the front surface, and the door frame left side base 421 attached to the lower front surface. A door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted vertically at regular intervals on the front surface, a left side upper reflector 424 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, a left side lower reflector 425 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and a left side upper reflector. and a door frame left side decorative body 426 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the reflector 424 and the left side lower reflector 425 .

In addition, the door frame left side unit 420 includes a left side upper light guide member 427 that guides light forward from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, a left side middle light guide member 428 that guides light forward from the first LED 423a above the vertical center of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and a left side middle light guide member 428 that guides light forward from the first LED 423a below the vertical center of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423. and a left side lower light guide member 429 that guides light forward.

The door frame left side base 421 extends vertically and is shaped like a box that opens forward. The door frame left side base 421 is two-color molded with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (transmittance of light). More specifically, the door frame left side base 421, like the handle cover 295, is two-color molded with two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b to appear on the outer surface, thereby forming a circular or radial pattern. That is, the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the door frame left side base 421 are the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a)). When molding the door frame left side base 421, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 422a are mounted on the front surface of the upper decoration board 422 on the left side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two second LEDs 422b are mounted vertically arranged between the first LEDs 422a. A 24-bit LED driver 422c having a unique address for causing the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b to emit light is mounted on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame.

A total of 12 full-color LEDs, ie, four first LEDs 422a and eight second LEDs 422b, are mounted on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422. As shown in FIG. Moreover, the first LED 422a having the second LEDs 422b on both upper and lower sides is provided in the center (the center between them) between the second LEDs 422b. Also, at least the second LED 422b is a wide-angle top-view type LED that can irradiate light within an angle range of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the four first LEDs 422a are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two. Also, the eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three sets of two from the top, three from the third to fifth from the top, and three from the sixth to eight from the top. The LED driver 422c can control up to 24 systems, and controls the 4 first LEDs 422a divided into 2 groups and the 8 second LEDs 422b divided into 3 groups with a total of 15 systems, 3 systems for each group so that each can emit full color light.

Although not shown, the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four wires: two power lines (one of which is a ground line) for supplying power to drive the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the LED driver 422c; one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510; and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. It is Then, when the LED driver 422c of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) through the control signal line, the four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups can be caused to emit light in appropriate colors and intensities for each group.

The door frame left side lower decorative board 423 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and the right side thereof is formed unevenly. A plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted on the front surface of the lower decoration board 423 on the left side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two second LEDs 423b are mounted vertically arranged between the first LEDs 423a. A 24-bit LED driver 423c having a unique address for causing the first LED 423a and the second LED 423b to emit light is mounted on the door frame left side lower decoration board 423. As shown in FIG.

A total of 18 full-color LEDs, ie, 6 first LEDs 423a and 12 second LEDs 423b, are mounted on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423. As shown in FIG. Moreover, the first LED 423a having the second LEDs 423b on both upper and lower sides is provided in the center (the center between them) between the second LEDs 423b. At least the second LED 423b is a wide-angle top-view type LED capable of irradiating light within an angle range of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets of two LEDs in order from the top. The 12 second LEDs 423b are divided into four sets of three from the top to the third, three from the top from the fourth to the sixth, three from the top from the seventh to the ninth, and three from the top from the tenth to the twelfth. The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems at the maximum, and controls the 6 first LEDs 423a divided into 3 groups and the 12 second LEDs 423b divided into 4 groups with 3 systems for a total of 21 systems so that each can emit full color light.

Although not shown, this door frame left side lower decorative board 423 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four wires: two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power to drive the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b, and the LED driver 423c; one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510; It is Then, when the LED driver 423c of the door frame left side lower decoration board 423 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, the six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and the 12 second LEDs 423b divided into four groups can be caused to emit light in appropriate colors and intensities for each group.

The left side upper reflector 424 has a through hole 424a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, and a cylindrical holding tube 424b extending back and forth at a position corresponding to the first LED 422a. The left side upper reflector 424 is formed such that the rear end around the through hole 424a abuts against the front surface of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, and the front side around the through hole 424a is formed in a dish shape that spreads forward. Thereby, the light from the second LED 422b can be widely diffused forward.

A columnar light guide shaft portion 427a of a left side upper light guide member 427, which will be described later, is inserted into the holding tube 424b of the left upper reflector 424, thereby holding the light guide shaft portion 427a straight in the front-rear direction. This holding cylinder 424b is provided in the center between the through holes 424a. As a result, light from the second LED 422b of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 facing through the through holes 424a on both upper and lower sides of the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left upper light guide member 427 projecting forward through the holding cylinder 424b is irradiated with an equal amount of light from both upper and lower sides of the light guide shaft portion 427a, thereby avoiding the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decoration body 426. I can.

Further, the left side upper reflector 424 is provided with a mounting hole for mounting to the door frame left side base 421 in the center (on the center line) between the through holes 424a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is prevented from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426 .

The left side lower reflector 425 has a through-hole 425a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and a cylindrical holding cylinder 425b extending back and forth at a position corresponding to the first LED 423a. The left side lower reflector 425 is formed such that the rear end around the through hole 425a abuts against the front surface of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, and the front side around the through hole 425a is formed in a dish shape that spreads forward. Thereby, the light from the second LED 423b can be widely diffused forward.

A cylindrical light guide shaft portion 428a of a left side middle light guide member 428 and a cylindrical light guide shaft portion 429a of a left side lower light guide member 429, which will be described later, are inserted into the holding tube 425b of the left side lower reflector 425, thereby holding the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a straight in the front-rear direction. This holding tube 425b is provided in the center between the through holes 425a. As a result, the light from the second LED 423b of the left side lower decorative substrate 423 of the door frame facing through the through-holes 425a on both upper and lower sides of the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 projecting forward through the holding cylinder 425b is irradiated with a uniform amount of light from both upper and lower sides of the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a. It is possible to prevent the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a from appearing on the back side of the frame left side decorative body 426.

Further, the left side lower reflector 425 is provided with an attachment hole for attachment to the door frame left side base 421 at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 425a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is prevented from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426 .

The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward. The door frame left side decorative body 426 has a plurality of openings 426a penetrating in the front-rear direction at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the horizontal direction. The plurality of openings 426 a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding tube 424 b of the left side upper reflector 424 and the holding tube 425 b of the left side lower reflector 425 . The light guide shaft portion 427a of the left upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left middle light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left lower light guide member 429 are inserted into these openings 426a from behind. The door frame left side decoration 426 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame left side base 421 . The door frame left side decorative body 426 further has a decorative portion 426b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction and having a certain arcuate concave shape so as to avoid the plurality of openings 426a.

The left-side upper light guide member 427 has four light guide shaft portions 427a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 427b that connects the lower ends of the four light guide shaft portions 427a, and is made of a transparent material. The four light guide shafts 427a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 424b of the left-side upper reflector 424. As shown in FIG. Further, the light guide shaft portion 427a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 424b. Each light guide shaft portion 427a penetrates the holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426 so that the tip surface is aligned with the surface of the door frame left side decoration 426. The left-side upper light guide member 427 can guide the light from the first LED 422a of the door-frame left-side upper decorative substrate 422 forward by the light-guiding shaft portion 427a and irradiate it outward from the tip, so that the opening 426a of the door-frame left-side decorative body 426 can emit bright light.

The left-side center light guide member 428 has three light guide shaft portions 428a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 428b that connects the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 428a, and is made of a transparent material. The three light guide shafts 428a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the upper three holding cylinders 425b of the left-side lower reflector 425. As shown in FIG. In addition, the light guide shaft portion 428a extends back and forth with approximately the same diameter as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 428a penetrates the holding tube 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426, so that the tip surface is aligned with the surface of the door frame left side decoration 426. The left-side middle light-guiding member 428 can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the door-frame left-side lower decorative substrate 423 forward by the light-guiding shaft portion 428a, and irradiate it outward from the tip, so that the opening 426a of the door-frame left-side decorative body 426 can emit bright light.

The left-side lower light guide member 429 has three light guide shaft portions 429a extending back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 429b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shaft portions 429a, and is made of a transparent material. The three light guide shafts 429a are vertically spaced at regular intervals so as to correspond to the three holding cylinders 425b on the lower side of the left-side lower reflector 425. As shown in FIG. Further, the light guide shaft portion 429a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 429a passes through the holding tube 425b of the left side lower reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426, and the tip surface is aligned with the surface of the door frame left side decoration 426. The left side lower light guide member 429 can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 forward by the light guide shaft portion 429a, and irradiate it outward from the tip, so that the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be illuminated brightly.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern portion of the door frame left side base 421 is the same as the color of the circular or radial pattern portion of the handle cover 295, and the portion of the door frame left side base 421 outside the circular or radial pattern is the same color as the portion of the handle cover 295 outside the circular or radial pattern.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the portion above the center in the vertical direction projects slightly forward than the portion below, and the vicinity of the lower end gently curves to the right. The upper end of the door frame left side unit 420 is located above the door window 101a and below the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, and the lower end is below the door window 101a and above the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210. The upper part of the door frame left side unit 420 is located outside the left side of the door frame top unit 450 . The door frame left side unit 420 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and looks like a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded.

According to the door frame left side unit 420 of the present embodiment, since the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 are provided at positions that are somewhat rearward from the front surface of the door frame left side decoration 426, the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b mounted on them is sufficiently spread and illuminates the back side of the door frame left side decoration 426, so that the door frame left side decoration 426 emits light uniformly. can be decorated.

Further, the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, which are provided at a position away from the front of the door frame left side decorative body 426 rearward, is directed forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429. By guiding (guiding) the light to the left side of the door frame 426, the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be illuminated more brightly than the other parts.

In addition, the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 are provided in the center between the adjacent two second LEDs 422b and 423b. are As a result, the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b on both sides of the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, and the light guide shaft 429a irradiate the light with an equal amount of light. It is possible to evenly illuminate and decorate the surface.

Further, the door frame left side decorative body 426 has a decorative portion 426b extending along the width center in the horizontal direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 426a. As a result, even if the light from the second LED 422b or the second LED 423b casts shadows of the light guide shafts 427a, 428a, and 429a onto the door frame left-side decorative body 426, the shadows of the light guide shafts 427a, 428a, and 429a are difficult to see because the decorative portion 426b is provided in the region where the shadows are projected. The appearance of the luminous decoration of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be improved.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70 and the like. FIG. 66(a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, (c) is a front perspective view of the door frame right side unit, and (d) is a rear perspective view of the door frame right side unit. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame right-side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame right-side unit viewed from the back. FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A--E in FIG. 66(a). FIG. 70 is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 66(a). The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame right side unit 430 includes a door frame right side base 431 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100; A door frame right side lower decorative board 433 on which a plurality of first LEDs 433a are mounted vertically at regular intervals on the front surface, a right side reflector 434 attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and a door frame right side decoration body 43 attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the right side reflector 434. 5 and .

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a right side upper light guide member 436 that guides forward light from the first LED 423a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432, and a right side lower light guide member 437 that guides forward light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433.

Further, the door-frame right-side unit 430 includes a door-frame right-side left-side decoration 438 which is mounted to cover the left side of the door-frame right-side base 431 and has a plurality of decoration holes 438a penetrating left and right in a predetermined shape. a light-transmitting right-side left lens 439; a door-frame right-side right-side decoration 440 which is mounted so as to cover the right side of a door-frame right-side base 431 and has a plurality of decorative holes 440a penetrating left and right in a predetermined shape; and a translucent right side right lens 441 having 1a.

The door frame right side base 431 extends vertically with a substantially constant width on the left and right. The rear end side of the door frame right side base 431 extends vertically over the entire height, and the front end side extends substantially straight downward from the upper end to near the center in the vertical direction, then curves rearward and extends obliquely rearward, then curves vertically near the lower portion and extends vertically to the lower end.

The door frame right side base 431 has a plurality of reflectors 431a recessed from the left and right side surfaces and extending forward to the front end at a height where the decoration hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the decoration hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decoration 440 (the decoration portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decoration portion 441a of the right side right lens 441) are provided. The reflector portions 431a have rear ends that are inside the decorative portions 439a and 441a, and are inclined toward the side surfaces, and have curved bottom surfaces.

In the door frame right side base 431, the reflector portion 431a corresponding to the decorative hole 438a and the decorative hole 440a (the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441) provided in the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 behind the center in the front-rear direction is inside the decoration part 439a and the decoration part 441a. The front part excluding the part penetrates in the left and right direction (the left and right sides are recessed and connected to each other).

The reflector portion 431a of the right side base 431 of the door frame reflects the light emitted backward from the third LED 432c of the upper decorative substrate 432 of the right side of the door frame and the third LED 433c of the lower right side decoration substrate 433 of the door frame, which will be described later, in the left-right direction, so that the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right side right lens 441 are decorated with light (see FIG. 70, etc.).

The door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface of the upper decoration board 432 on the right side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two second LEDs 432b are mounted vertically arranged between the first LEDs 432a. Further, a plurality of third LEDs 432c are mounted on the rear surface of the upper decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame with a gap in the vertical direction. Further, the door frame right side upper decoration board 432 is mounted with a 24-bit LED driver 432d having a unique address for causing the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, and the third LED 432c to emit light.

On this door frame right side upper decorative board 432, a total of 16 full-color LEDs are mounted, including four first LEDs 432a, eight second LEDs 432b, and four third LEDs 432c. Moreover, the first LED 432a having the second LEDs 432b on both upper and lower sides is provided in the center (the center between them) between the second LEDs 432b. Moreover, at least the second LED 432b and the third LED 432c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs capable of emitting light within an angle range of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two. Also, the eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three sets of two from the top, three from the third to fifth from the top, and three from the sixth to eight from the top. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets of the top two and the remaining two.

Since the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 is divided into two sets of first LEDs 432a, three sets of second LEDs 432b, and two sets of third LEDs 432c, each of the first LEDs 432a, the second LEDs 432b, and the third LEDs 432c emits light in full color, so there are three systems for each set, for a total of 21 systems. On the other hand, the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 can control up to 24 systems at the maximum, so in addition to the above 21 systems, it controls a total of 24 systems, including 3 systems for the upper side of the third LED 433c divided into two groups on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 described later.

Although not shown, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 includes two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power to drive the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the third LED 432c, the two third LEDs 433c on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and the LED driver 432d. One clock line for synchronizing with the peripheral control board 1510 and a wiring cable consisting of four electric wires are connected. When the LED driver 432d of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, in response to the command, the four first LEDs 432a divided into two groups, the eight second LEDs 432b divided into three groups, the four third LEDs 432c divided into two groups, and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 into two groups. The two third LEDs 433c in the upper group of the two can be made to emit light with appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. A plurality of first LEDs 433a are mounted on the front surface of the lower decoration board 433 on the right side of the door frame at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two second LEDs 433b are mounted vertically arranged between the first LEDs 433a. Further, a plurality of third LEDs 433c are mounted on the rear surface of the lower decoration board 433 on the right side of the door frame at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, the door frame right side lower decoration board 433 is mounted with a 24-bit LED driver 433d having a unique address for causing the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, and the third LED 433c to emit light.

On this door frame right side lower decorative board 433, a total of 22 full-color LEDs, ie, 6 first LEDs 433a, 12 second LEDs 433b, and 4 third LEDs 433c are mounted. Moreover, 1st LED433a in which 2nd LED433b is provided in the upper-lower both sides is provided in the center (center between) of those 2nd LED433b. In addition, at least the second LED 433b and the third LED 433c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs capable of emitting light within an angle range of 130 degrees around the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 72, on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets of two LEDs in order from the top. The 12 second LEDs 433b are divided into four sets of three LEDs from the top to the third, three from the top from the fourth to the sixth, three from the top from the seventh to the ninth, and three from the top from the tenth to the twelfth. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two.

Since the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is divided into three sets of first LEDs 433a, four sets of second LEDs 433b, and two sets of third LEDs 433c, each of the first LEDs 433a, the second LEDs 433b, and the third LEDs 433c emit light in full color, so there are three systems for each set, for a total of 27 systems. On the other hand, the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 can control only up to 24 systems at the maximum. c) are controlled by the LED driver 433d of the lower decoration board 433 on the right side of the door frame. This can suppress an increase in the number of LED drivers.

Although not shown, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 has two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power to drive the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, the lower two third LEDs 433c, and the LED driver 433d, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 433d with the peripheral control board 1510. , and four wiring cables are connected. Then, when the LED driver 433d of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, in response to the command, six first LEDs 433a divided into three groups, twelve second LEDs 433b divided into four groups, and two third LEDs 433c in the lower group out of the two groups are converted into appropriate colors for each group. and intensity.

The right side reflector 434 has a through hole 434a that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the second LED 432b of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the second LED 433b of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and a cylindrical holding cylinder 434b extending back and forth at a position corresponding to the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. The rear end of the right side reflector 434 around the through hole 434a is formed so as to abut on the front surface of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433, and the front side around the through hole 434a is formed in a dish shape that spreads forward. Thereby, the light from 2nd LED432b and 2nd LED433b can be diffused widely ahead.

A cylindrical light guide shaft portion 436a of a right side upper light guide member 436 and a cylindrical light guide shaft portion 437a of a right side lower light guide member 437 are inserted into the holding tube 434b of the right side reflector 434, thereby holding the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a straight in the front-rear direction. This holding cylinder 434b is provided in the center between the through holes 434a. As a result, the light from the second LED 432b of the upper decorative substrate 432b on the right side of the door frame and the second LED 433b of the lower decorative substrate 433 on the right side of the door frame facing through the through-holes 434a on the upper and lower sides of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a protruding forward through the holding cylinder 434b are irradiated with an equal amount of light from both the upper and lower sides of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a. It is possible to prevent the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from appearing on the back side of the side decorative body 435.

Further, the right side reflector 434 is provided with a mounting hole for mounting to the door frame right side base 431 at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 434a. As a result, the shadow of the head of the screw inserted through the mounting hole is prevented from appearing on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435 .

The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 435 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward. This door frame right side decorative body 435 has a plurality of openings 435a penetrating back and forth at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the horizontal direction. The plurality of openings 435a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinders 434b of the right side reflector 434. As shown in FIG. The tip ends of the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are inserted into these openings 435a from behind. The door frame right side decoration 435 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 . The door frame right side decoration 435 has the same light transmittance as the door frame left side decoration 426 . In addition, the door frame right side decorative body 435 further has a decorative portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction and having a certain arcuate concave shape so as to avoid the plurality of openings 435a.

The right-side upper light guide member 436 has four light guide shaft portions 436a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 436b that connects the lower ends of the four light guide shaft portions 436a, and is made of a transparent material. The four light guide shafts 436a are provided vertically at regular intervals from above the right side reflector 434 so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 434b. In addition, the light guide shaft portion 436a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 436a penetrates the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration 435 so that the tip surface is aligned with the surface of the door frame right side decoration 435. This right side upper light guide member 436 can guide the light from the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 forward by the light guide shaft portion 436a and irradiate it outward from the tip, so that the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can emit bright light.

The right-side lower light guide member 437 has six light guide shaft portions 437a that extend forward and backward in a cylindrical shape, and a runner portion 437b that connects the lower ends of the six light guide shaft portions 437a, and is made of a transparent material. The six light guide shafts 437a are vertically spaced apart from the bottom of the right side reflector 434 so as to correspond to the six holding cylinders 434b. In addition, the light guide shaft portion 437a extends back and forth with a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 437a penetrates the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration 435, and the tip surface is aligned with the surface of the door frame right side decoration 435. This right side lower light guide member 437 can guide the light from the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 forward by the light guide shaft portion 437a and irradiate it outward from the tip, so that the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can emit bright light.

The door frame right side left side decoration body 438 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decoration holes 438a penetrating in the left-right direction in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape). The door frame right side left side decoration 438 has a front end side formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decoration 435 . The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is two-color molded with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (transmittance of light). More specifically, like the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is two-color molded with two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b. A part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, thereby forming a circular or radial pattern. In other words, part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a)). When molding the door frame right side left side decoration body 438, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface of the door frame right side left side decoration 438, and has a decoration portion 439a that protrudes leftward and fits into the decoration hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 from the inside (right side). The surface of the decorative portion 439a matches the outer (left) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 when fitted into the decorative hole 438a (see FIG. 70). The right side left lens 439 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 . The decorative portion 439a of the right-side left lens 439 is positioned to the left of the reflector portion 431a in the door-frame right-side base 431, and can be decorated with light emitted from the third LED 432c of the door-frame right-side upper decorative substrate 432 and the third LED 433c of the door-frame right-side lower decorative substrate 433.

Also, the right side left lens 439 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3 a of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 . As a result, in the assembled state, the decoration part 439a facing from the decoration hole 438a of the right side left side decoration body 438 of the door frame looks the same as the part of the radial pattern molded in two colors in the right side left side decoration body 438 of the door frame, and it is difficult to distinguish from the part of the decoration part 439a which is decorated by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decorative holes 440a penetrating in the horizontal direction in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape). Further, the door frame right side right side decoration 440 has a cylinder insertion opening 440b into which a cylindrical portion having the keyhole 132 is inserted at the front end of the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 . This door frame right side right side decoration 440 is formed so that the vertical direction is substantially the same as the total height of the door frame 3 . In addition, the door frame right side right side decoration 440 is formed such that the front end side from the upper end to the cylinder insertion opening 440b follows the rear end of the door frame right side decoration 435 .

The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is two-color molded with synthetic resins having different colors and translucency (transmittance of light). More specifically, the door frame right side right side decoration 440, like the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, and the door frame right side left side decoration 438, is two-color molded with two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b. In other words, part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a)). When molding the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right side right lens 441 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right) surface above the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the door frame right side right side decoration 440, and has a decoration portion 441a that protrudes to the right and fits into the decoration hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decoration 440 from the inside (left side). The surface of the decorative portion 441a matches the outer (right) surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 when fitted into the decorative hole 440a (see FIG. 70). The right side right lens 441 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 . The decorative portion 441a of the right-side right lens 441 is positioned to the right of the reflector portion 431a in the door-frame right-side base 431, and can be decorated with light emitted from the third LED 432c of the door-frame right-side upper decorative substrate 432 and the third LED 433c of the door-frame right-side lower decorative substrate 433.

Also, the right side right lens 441 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3 a of the door frame right side right side decoration 440 . As a result, in the assembled state, the decoration part 441a facing from the decoration hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 looks the same as the part of the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 with a radial pattern molded in two colors, and is difficult to distinguish from the part of the decoration part 441a illuminated by the third LED 432c or the third LED 433c.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the circular or radial pattern portions of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 are colored in the same color as the circular or radial pattern portions of the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421. It is formed in the same color as the portion outside the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421 .

In the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the part above the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward more than the same height part of the door frame left side unit 420 on the opposite side. The door frame right side unit 430 is formed to have substantially the same height as the door frame 3 from its upper end to its lower end. The door frame right side unit 430 has an upper portion located outside the right side of the door frame top unit 450 .

The door frame right side unit 430 decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the part of the door frame right side decorative body 435 looks as if a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The door-frame right-side unit 430 has a substantially half-height portion that protrudes forward greatly from the top, forming a screen. This makes it difficult for a player seated in front of the pachinko machine provided adjacently on the right side of the island facility of the game hall to see the inside of the door window 101a (game area 5a). Therefore, since the door frame right side unit 430 is formed like a screen, it is possible to block the line of sight of the players located nearby, so that it is difficult for other players to see the entire game area 5a, and it is difficult for the other players to feel that they are being watched, so that the other players can play without hesitation.

According to the door-frame right-side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the door-frame right-side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door-frame right-side lower decorative substrate 433 are provided at positions somewhat backward from the front surface of the door-frame right-side decorative body 435. Therefore, the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b mounted on them is sufficiently spread, and the back side of the door-frame right-side decorative body 435 is illuminated uniformly. can be decorated.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 guides (guides) the light forward from the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 provided at a position away from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435 to the front by the light guiding shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guiding member 436 and the light guiding shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guiding member 437. The portion of the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 can be illuminated more brightly than the other portions.

Furthermore, the door-frame right-side unit 430 emits light from the third LED 432c of the door-frame right-side upper decorative substrate 432 and the third LED 433c of the door-frame right-side lower decorative substrate 433, so that the decorative portion 439a of the right-side left lens 439 and the door-frame right-side right-side decorative body are fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the door-frame right-side left-side decorative body 438 via the reflector portion 431a of the door-frame right-side base 431. The decoration part 441a of the right side right lens 441 fitted in the decoration hole 440a of the lens 440 can be decorated with light emission. In addition, since a part of the right and left side surfaces (parts of the decorative part 439a and the decorative part 441a) of the screen-like door frame right side unit 430 can be decorated with light, the pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous to other players, and the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the players can be provided.

In addition, according to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the door frame right side decoration 435 on the front end side is illuminated by the first LED 432a and second LED 432b on the front side of the door frame right side upper decoration board 432 and the front side first LED 433a and second LED 433b on the door frame right side lower decoration board 433. Since the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 behind the door frame right side decoration 435 are illuminated by the third LED 433c on the rear side of the right side lower decoration substrate 433, the presence of the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 causes the lights from the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b to emit light. , the rear side door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 are illuminated to be illuminated, and the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c is illuminated to the front side door frame right side decoration body 435 to be illuminated. As a result, the door frame right side ornament 435 and the door frame right side left side ornament 438 and door frame right side right side ornament 440 on the rear side can be completely independently illuminated and decorated, so that the pachinko machine 1 capable of presenting a player with a luminous presentation with a higher presentation effect can be provided.

In the door frame right side unit 430, the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436, and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are provided in the center between the adjacent two second LEDs 432b and 433b. As a result, the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b on both sides of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a irradiate the light with a uniform amount of light. Therefore, even if the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a is projected from behind onto the door frame right side decoration 435, the shadow is difficult to see, and the door frame right side decoration 435 can be evenly and planarly illuminated.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 has a door frame right side decorative body 435 with a decorative portion 435b extending along the width center in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 435a. As a result, even if the light from the second LED 432b or the second LED 433b causes the shadows of the light guide shafts 436a and 437a to be projected onto the door-frame right-side decoration 435, the shadows of the light-guide shafts 436a and 437a can be made difficult to understand because the shadow is projected onto the decorative part 435b, and the appearance of the light-emitting decoration of the door-frame right-side decoration 435 is difficult. You can improve your taste.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be sandwiched between the upper portions of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430 .

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top base 451 attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100; a top upper cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451 so as to cover both the left and right sides and the front upper portion of the door frame top base 451; a door frame top decoration 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452; 451 and a door frame top bottom plate (not shown) that is connected to the lower end of the door frame.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top center decorative substrate 455 attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, a door frame top left decoration substrate 456 attached to the left of the door frame top center decoration substrate 455 in front of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a door frame top decoration 453 . and a door frame top right decorative board 457 mounted on the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front of the top upper cover 452 at the rear and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front (see FIG. 72).

The door frame top unit 450 includes a pair of top center speakers (not shown) provided on the front surface of the door frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers (not shown) provided on both left and right outer sides of the pair of top center speakers, a top lower cover 465 attached to the lower side of the door frame top decorative body 453 so as to cover the front of the top center speaker and the top side speakers, and a door frame top relay board (not shown) attached near the right end of the front surface of the door frame top base 451. ), and a door frame top plate 468 attached to the top upper cover 452 so as to cover the door frame top base 451 from above.

The door-frame top base 451 extends laterally by approximately the same length as the distance between the door-frame left-side unit 420 and the door-frame right-side unit 430 . The top cover 452 protrudes forward in a semicircular arc shape in a plan view, and has an opening 452a that is largely notched forward from the rear end. The opening 452 a is closed by a door frame top plate 468 .

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame top decoration 453 extends laterally in a semicircular arc along the front end of the top cover 452 in plan view. The front surface of the door frame top decoration 453 is formed in a semicircular shape so that the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open rearward.

The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decorative board 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 can light-embellish the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs 455a to emit light.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip-like shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative board 456 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame top left decoration substrate 456 can light-embellish the left portion of the door-frame top decoration 453 by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs 456a to emit light.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can light-embellish the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 457a.

A pair of top center speakers are spaced left and right. The pair of top center speakers are full-range speakers that output sounds such as speech and music over a wide frequency band. The pair of top-side speakers are tweeters and output high-pitched sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of punching metal, which is a metal plate having numerous through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, sounds output from the top center speaker and top side speakers are radiated forward and downward.

The door frame top relay board relays the connection between the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, the door frame top right decorative board 457, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452 , has a front end locked to the top upper cover 452 , and has a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. - 特許庁The door frame top unit 450 is connected such that the left and right ends of the door frame top decoration 453 are sunk from the front to the rear portion of the upper inner side of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 . Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side through a pair of top center speakers and a pair of top side speakers.

[3-9. door frame decoration]
Next, the decoration (exterior) of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 71(a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing a state in which the two-color molded outer layer of the door frame is made opaque, and (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in (a) with the inner layer left as it is and the outer layer made transparent. The door frame 3 has, as shown in the figure, a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 at the center in front view. In the door frame 3, the outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the left plate decoration 271 and the right plate decoration 276 of the plate unit 200, the upper unit cover 312 and the button body 351 of the production operation unit 300, the left side door frame decoration 426 of the left side unit 420, the right side decoration 435 of the right side unit 430, and the top decoration 453 of the top unit 450. .

A left plate decoration 271, a right plate decoration 276, a door frame left side decoration 426, a door frame right side decoration 435, and a door frame top decoration 453 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a are formed in a semi-tubular shape, so that the player can see the decoration that the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lamps.

In the door frame 3, behind or below the left plate decoration 271, right plate decoration 276, upper unit cover 312, door frame left side decoration 426, door frame right side decoration 435, and door frame top decoration 453, which surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a, a plate left decoration substrate 273, a plate right decoration substrate 278, an effect operation section peripheral decoration substrate 320, a door frame upper left side decoration substrate 422, and a door frame lower left side decoration substrate 42 are arranged. 3. The door frame right side upper decorative board 432, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are arranged.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, a spherical performance operation unit 300 having a diameter larger than the distance of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction is attached to the center in the horizontal direction. As a result, since the large spherical performance operation unit 300 is positioned at the center of the plate unit 200, the visual impact can be enhanced and the performance operation part 301 (the contact operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303) of the performance operation unit 300 can be conspicuous.

Further, in a normal state, the upper surface of the button body 351 as the effect operation part 301 is aligned with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 so as to be continuous, thereby forming a single sphere, making it difficult for the player to recognize that the effect operation part 301 (the button body 351) is operable, and the effect operation unit 300 consisting of a gigantic sphere makes the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at a glance. As a result, the interest of the player can be strongly attracted, the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to play.

In addition, in the plate unit 200, since the center (center) of the performance operation part 301 of the performance operation unit 300 is positioned in front of the top of the spherical performance operation unit 300, the upper surface of the performance operation part 301 (the contact operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303) faces the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the player who recognizes that the gigantic ball provided in the center of the plate unit 200 is the performance operation part 301 can easily see the whole performance operation part 301, and the performance operation part 301 can be made to appear large. In addition, it is possible to make the player strongly want to operate the gigantic spherical performance operation part 301, to raise expectations for the execution of the player participatory performance by operating the performance operation part 301, to make the player actively operate the performance operation part 301 when the player participatory performance is executed, and to make the player enjoy the player participatory performance by operating the performance operation part 301, thereby suppressing the deterioration of interest.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 2 to 5, the exterior of the door frame 3 of this embodiment has a plurality of circular or radial patterns on its outer surface. FIG. 71 shows the door frame right side unit 430 as an example of a part of the exterior of the door frame 3 .

More specifically, as the exterior of the door frame 3, a plurality of circular and radial patterns applied to the outer surface are formed by two-color molding using two types of synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). A part of the door frame 3 having a patterned exterior is two-color molded with two kinds of resins, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b to appear on the outer surface, thereby forming a circular or radial pattern.

For example, taking the door frame right side unit 430 as an example, as shown in FIG. 71(a), if the inner layer 3a is given a honeycomb pattern and the outer layer 3b is made opaque, the honeycomb pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen in the circular pattern part, and the opaque outer layer 3b can be seen in the part other than the pattern.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71(b), if the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the honeycomb pattern applied to the inner layer 3a can be seen through the outer layer 3b, and the circular and radial patterns are relatively difficult to see. In other words, the exterior has an appearance in which the honeycomb-like pattern applied to the inner layer 3a is emphasized.

In FIG. 71, in the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 which is molded in two colors as a part of the exterior, the decoration part 441a fitted in the decoration hole 440a is a part of the right side right lens 441 and is a separate member different from the door frame right side right side decoration body 440. Therefore, even if the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the pattern of the decoration hole 440a (decoration part 441a) does not change.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the main members constituting the exterior of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding, by appropriately selecting and combining the color and light transmittance of the material (synthetic resin) used for the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, the appearance can be greatly changed even if the shape remains the same.

Therefore, for example, when minor changes are made, the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed without cost by making the outer layer 3b transparent so that the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen.

Alternatively, by changing the color or the like of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b for each production lot and shipping the pachinko machines 1 of different lots to the same game hall and installing them in the island facility, it is possible to enhance the attractiveness to the players with a colorful feeling.

Although two-color molding is shown in the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and multi-color molding such as three-color molding or four-color molding may be used. Specifically, in the above-described embodiment, the exterior is configured by combining the right side right lens 441 with the two-color molded door frame right side right side decorative body 440, but as three-color molding, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 and the right side right lens 441 may be integrally formed.

Also, in the above-described embodiment, a circular or radial pattern is formed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and patterns of various shapes may be formed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, the door frame right side left side decoration body 438, and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440, which are provided outside the door window 101a facing forward of the game area 5a of the door frame 3, are two-color molded (multicolor molding) with two synthetic resins having different light transmittances, and are decorated with a polka dot pattern by the two-color molding. Since the decoration body is formed into a desired shape and at the same time, the decoration body is decorated in a desired manner, unlike the decoration body of a conventional pachinko machine, it is not necessary to form the decoration body in a desired shape and then apply the desired decoration by painting or the like.

In addition, since the decoration of the decorative body is formed by two-color molding, the appearance (appearance) of the decorative body can be easily changed by changing the color of the synthetic resin used. More specifically, when the polka-dot decoration is formed by two-color molding, the inner layer 3a forming the inner side of the polka-dotted circle and the outer layer 3b forming the outer side of the circle are formed in the same color with different light transmittance. Since the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are of the same color, the polka-dotted circle becomes difficult to see, resulting in an appearance that does not have the polka-dotted decoration. On the other hand, when the inner layer 3a forming the inside of the polka-dotted circle is white and the outer layer 3b forming the outer side of the circle is pink, the polka-dotted circle can be clearly seen due to the difference in color between the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and the pink background is decorated with white polka dots. Thus, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used when forming the decoration, the appearance of the decoration can be easily changed, and the cost for changing the appearance can be suppressed.

In addition, as described above, when forming the decorations, the appearance of the decorations can be easily changed by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used. Therefore, if the combination of the synthetic resins used is changed for each production lot, and the pachinko machines 1 of different lots are shipped to the same game hall and installed in a line on the island equipment, the island equipment can be made colorful, and a strong impact can be given to the players who are wandering around the game hall. It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of attracting players.

Furthermore, since the decorative bodies such as the handle cover 295, the door frame left side base 421, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, which have decorations molded in two colors with a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmittance, are provided at a portion outside the door window 101a facing forward of the game area 5a in the door frame 3, the outer side of the door window 101a can be decorated with the decorative bodies to improve the appearance.

In addition, since the outer layer 3b of the two-color-molded decorative body is formed of a synthetic resin having a lower light transmittance than the remaining inner layer 3a, the inner layer 3a can be made difficult to see through the outer layer 3b, and the border of the decoration (polka dot pattern) formed by the inner layer 3a can be clearly seen, so that the decoration can be clearly seen.

In addition, since the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b is lower than that of the remaining inner layer 3a, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inner layer 3a through the outer layer 3b. Therefore, in the initial model, the outer layer 3b has a low light transmittance so that the inner layer 3a cannot be seen through from the outside. Appearance (decoration) can be easily changed without modification.

In addition, as described above, since the outer layer 3b with low light transmittance can make the inner layer 3a difficult to see, the surface of the inner layer 3a is patterned (a pattern based on the shape, a pattern by painting, printing, sticking a sticker, etc.). Since the pattern can be seen through, the external appearance (decoration) of the decorative body can be greatly changed without changing the shape of the decorative body, and an increase in cost required for model change can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 capable of emitting light are provided inside the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440, and the inner layer 3a is formed of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the others, so that they are provided inside the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440. When the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c emit light, the portion of the inner layer 3a (portion of polka dots) among the decorations formed on the surface of the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 can be brightly decorated with light emission. The luminous decoration of the surface decoration 440 can be enjoyed, and the decline in interest of the player can be suppressed.

In addition, depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the outer layer 3b can also be illuminated by the light emitted from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c, which is irradiated to the outer layer 3b through the inner layer 3a. Therefore, the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 can be entirely decorated with light emission, and the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 can be made to look beautiful and the player's interest is strongly attracted. The pachinko machine 1 that can be attached and has a high appeal power can be provided.

In addition, as described above, the decorations of the decorations such as the door frame right side left side decoration 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration 440 are formed by two-color molding (multicolor molding) of a plurality of synthetic resins having different light transmittances. Therefore, depending on the number of layers up to the surface and the difference in light transmittance of the synthetic resin used, the decorations that appear when the LEDs (light emitting means) such as the third LEDs 432c and 433c are not emitting light, and the decorations that appear when the LEDs are emitting light. can be made different, and by changing the decoration, it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest. In more detail, for example, taking two-color molding as an example of multicolor molding, when a hole of a predetermined shape is formed in a portion of the inner layer 3a covered by the outer layer 3b, only the portion exposed to the surface of the inner layer 3a is visible in a state in which the LED is not emitted. On the other hand, when the LED emits light, the light from the LED directly irradiates the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a in the portions where the holes are formed in the inner layer 3a, so that the shape of the holes in the inner layer 3a becomes visible on the surface of the outer layer 3b, and the portions exposed to the surface and the portions of the holes in the inner layer 3a can be seen, and a different decoration can be seen than when the LED is not lit. Alternatively, for example, when the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, when the LED emits yellow light, only the portion of the inner layer 3a in the surface decoration is illuminated. On the other hand, when the LED emits green (or white) light, both the portion of the inner layer 3a and the portion of the outer layer 3b on the surface are decorated with light emission. Therefore, the portion of the decorative body to be decorated with light emission can be changed depending on the color of the light emitted from the LED, and the decoration with light emission can be changed. In this way, the decoration of the decorative body can be made different by the light emission of the LED, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be entertained. In addition, by making the LED emit light according to the game state, it is possible to suggest to the player the arrival of a chance, the change of the hitting operation (for example, ``right hand hitting''), etc. by the change of the decoration of the decoration body, so that the pachinko machine 1 capable of various performances can be provided.

In addition, since the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 provided on the right and left outer sides of the door window 101a (game area 5a) have different projection amounts in the front-rear direction, the impression (appearance) when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the left front and from the right front can be changed. Even if the pachinko machine 1 is passed in front of the machine 1, when the pachinko machine 1 is approached from the opposite side, the pachinko machine 1 can attract interest in the pachinko machine 1 because the appearance is different from that of the previous excursion, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal power can attract the players who are excursing in the game hall to select the pachinko machine 1 to play.

[3-10. Arrangement and system of LEDs in the door frame]
Next, the arrangement of each LED provided on the door frame 3 and the control system will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73 and the like. FIG. 72 is a front view showing each decorative board of the door frame, and FIG. 73 is a plan view showing the decorative board of the portion of the effect operation unit of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 72, the door frame 3 is provided with a handle 195 at the lower right corner in the front view, for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the player's rotating operation. The steering wheel 195 has a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b from which the central hub portion 195a extends outward, and an annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the spoke portions 195b, and has an appearance similar to that of a steering wheel of an automobile.

The handle 195 has a front side of a central hub portion 195a covered with a handle front lens 185, and a handle decoration substrate 184 having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface is provided between the handle front lens 185 and the central hub portion 195a. A handle cover decorative substrate 293 having a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on its front surface is provided behind the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195. As shown in FIG.

On the handle decoration board 184, a total of 10 LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) are mounted in triple concentric circles, one at the center, three LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) spaced circumferentially at regular intervals along the circumference, and six LEDs 184a spaced at regular intervals along the circumference. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups: one in the center, three in the middle connected by dashed lines in FIG. 72, two on the upper left of the outer circumference, two on the upper right of the outer circumference, and two on the lower side of the outer circumference, which are connected by broken lines. The LEDs 184a divided into these five groups are controlled by 15 systems by an LED driver 184b, and the LEDs 184a of each group can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the other hand, 12 LEDs 293a are arranged in a line on the handle cover decorative substrate 293 with intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into 6 sets of 2 on the lower left, 2 on the left, 2 on the upper left, 2 on the upper right, 2 on the right, and 2 on the lower right, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The LEDs 293a divided into these six groups are controlled in 18 systems by an LED driver 293b, and the LEDs 293a of each group can emit light in full color as appropriate.

As described above, the handle 195 is provided with the handle decoration board 184 and the handle cover decoration board 293, so that the player can see the light emission effect that the light rotates around the handle 195, the light light effect that the light concentrates toward the center of the handle 195, and the light light effect that the light spreads toward the outside of the handle 195.例文帳に追加In addition, the outside and inside of the handle cover 295 can be illuminated by the LEDs 293a of the handle cover decoration substrate 293. FIG.

Further, the door frame 3 has, as shown in the figure, a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center in front view. In the door frame 3, the outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the left plate decoration 271, the right plate decoration 276 of the plate unit 200, the effect operation unit 300, the left side door frame decoration 426 of the left side unit 420, the right side decoration 435 of the right side door frame unit 430, and the top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

A plate left decoration 271, a plate right decoration 276, a door frame left side decoration 426, a door frame right side decoration 435, and a door frame top decoration 453 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a are formed in a semi-tubular shape, so that the player can see the decoration in which substantially the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lamps.

In this door frame 3, as shown in FIG. 72, a plate left decoration substrate 273 behind the plate left decoration 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, a plate right decoration substrate 278 behind the plate right decoration 276, a door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 and a door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 behind the door frame left side decoration 426, a door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and a door frame right side decoration substrate 435 behind the door frame right side decoration 435. A side lower decorative board 433, a door frame top central decorative board 455 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, a door frame top left decorative board 456, and a door frame top right decorative board 457 are provided facing forward.

More specifically, the left plate decorative substrate 273 has four LEDs 273a mounted on the front surface in a row in the left-right direction, and an LED driver (not shown) for causing the LEDs 273a and the LEDs 273a of the right plate decorative substrate 278, which will be described later, to emit light. These four LEDs 273a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The LEDs 273a divided into these two groups are controlled in six systems by an LED driver, and the LEDs 273a of each group can emit light in appropriate full colors.

The plate right decorative board 278 has four LEDs 278a mounted on the front surface in a line in the left-right direction. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The LEDs 278a divided into these two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the plate left decorative board 273, and the LEDs 278a of each group can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The upper decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame is provided with four first LEDs 422a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, eight second LEDs 422b vertically aligned between the first LEDs 422a and mounted two by two, and an LED driver 422c for causing a total of 12 first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b to emit light. The first LED 422a and the second LED 422b are mounted on the front surface. The four first LEDs 422a of the upper decorative substrate 422 on the left side of the door frame are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 72, the eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three sets of two LEDs at the top, three LEDs from the third to fifth from the top, and three from the sixth to eighth from the top. The four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups are controlled in 15 systems by an LED driver 422c, and the first LEDs 422a and the second LEDs 422b of each group can emit light in full colors as appropriate.

The door frame left side lower decorative board 423 is provided with six first LEDs 423a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, 12 second LEDs 423b mounted two by two vertically aligned between the first LEDs 423a, and an LED driver 423c for causing a total of 18 first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b to emit light. The first LED 423a and the second LED 423b are mounted on the front surface. The six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets of two LEDs in order from the top, as indicated by the chain double-dashed lines in FIG. 72, the 12 second LEDs 423b are divided into 4 groups: 3 LEDs from 1st to 3rd from the top, 3 LEDs from 4th to 6th from the top, 3 LEDs from 7th to 9th from the top, and 3 LEDs from the 10th to 12th from the top. Six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups are controlled in 21 systems by an LED driver 423c, and the first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b of each group can emit light in appropriate full colors.

The door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is provided with four first LEDs 432a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, eight second LEDs 432b vertically arranged between the first LEDs 432a and mounted two by two on the front surface, and four third LEDs 432c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction. In addition, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 includes an LED driver 432d for causing a total of 16 first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b and third LEDs 432c, and two third LEDs 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 to emit light. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two as connected by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 72, the eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three sets of two LEDs at the top, three LEDs from the third to fifth from the top, and three from the sixth to eighth from the top. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The first LEDs 432a divided into two groups, the second LEDs 432b divided into three groups, the third LEDs 432c divided into two groups, and the upper third LEDs 433c of the third LEDs 433c divided into two groups on the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 are controlled by the LED driver 432d in 24 systems, and the first LEDs 432a, the second LEDs 432b, the third LEDs 432c of each group, The third LED 433c can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, six first LEDs 433a are mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, 12 second LEDs 433b are mounted on the front surface in pairs vertically between the first LEDs 433a, four third LEDs 433c are mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction, the first LEDs 433a, the second LEDs 433b, and the lower two third LEDs 433c emit light. and an LED driver 433d for The six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets of two LEDs in order from the top, as indicated by the chain double-dashed lines in FIG. 72, the 12 second LEDs 433b are divided into 4 groups: 3 LEDs from 1st to 3rd from the top, 3 LEDs from 4th to 6th from the top, 3 LEDs from 7th to 9th from the top, and 3 LEDs from the 10th to 12th from the top. Further, the rear four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets of the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by the dashed line in FIG. The six first LEDs 433a divided into three groups, the twelve second LEDs 433b divided into four groups, and the lower group of two third LEDs 433c among the two groups are controlled by an LED driver 433d in 24 systems, and the first LEDs 433a, the second LEDs 433b, and the third LEDs 433c of each group can emit light in full colors as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 provided on the left side of the door window 101a and the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 provided on the right side of the door window 101a are formed in a laterally asymmetrical shape with the center of the door window 101a as a boundary in the lateral direction. Further, the door-frame left-side upper decoration substrate 422 and the door-frame left-side lower decoration substrate 423 and the door-frame right-side upper decoration substrate 432 and the door-frame right-side lower decoration substrate 433 have different shapes in the front-rear direction.

The door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 have the same numbers of first LEDs 422a, second LEDs 422b, first LEDs 423a, and second LEDs 423b and first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, first LEDs 433a, and second LEDs 433b mounted on the respective front surfaces. In addition, the arrangement and system (the system connected by the one-dot chain line and the two-dot chain line in FIG. 72) are symmetrically provided. As a result, it is possible to easily create the data of the lighting pattern of the LEDs for performing the lighting effects.

The door frame top center decorative board 455 is provided with six LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface at intervals in the left-right direction, and an LED driver (not shown) for causing the LEDs 455a, the LED 456a of the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative board 457 to emit light. The six LEDs 455a are divided into three groups of two from the left, as connected by dashed lines in FIG. The six LEDs 455a divided into three groups are controlled in nine systems by an LED driver, and each group of LEDs 455a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is provided with four LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface with a left-right opening. The four LEDs 456a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The four LEDs 456a divided into two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top center decoration board 455, and each group of LEDs 456a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is provided with four LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface with a left-right direction opening. The four LEDs 457a are divided into two sets, two on the left side and two on the right side, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. The four LEDs 457a divided into two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top center decoration board 455, and each group of LEDs 457a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to the door frame 3 of this embodiment, the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the first LED 423a of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the first LED 432a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the first LED 433a of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is emitted from the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 and the light guide shaft portion 42 of the left side middle light guide member 428. 8a, the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436, and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are guided to the opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration 435, and are irradiated outward (forward). As a result, the player can see the light emission effect of brightly emitting dots on the front surface of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, and the player can be ``wowed'' by the light emission effect of emitting spot light like dots, which is not available in conventional pachinko machines.

In addition, in the door frame 3, the LED 273a of the left plate decoration substrate 273 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the LED 278a of the right plate decoration substrate 278, the second LED 422b of the upper left side decoration substrate 422 of the door frame, the second LED 423b of the lower decoration substrate 423 of the left side of the door frame, the second LED 432b of the upper right side decoration substrate 432 of the door frame, the second LED 433b of the lower right side decoration substrate 433 of the door frame, the top of the door frame. The LED 455a of the central decorative board 455, the LED 456a of the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative board 457 are appropriately illuminated so that the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light, or the player can be shown a light emitting performance such that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

That is, in the door frame 3, the system of LEDs connected by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 72 can perform a light emission effect of spot light emission in front of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435, and the system of LEDs connected by the one-dot chain line in FIG.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is directed to the opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration 435 by the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a. Since the light is guided to the inserted front end and irradiated forward from there, the parts of the opening 426a and the opening 435a can be brightly spot-lighted with high luminance compared to the general surfaces of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435.例文帳に追加At this time, since the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are arranged outside the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, even if the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the opening part 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 are illuminated with a high brightness, the inside of the game area 5a facing from the door window 101a is not difficult to see due to the glare. Through 101a, the game ball B in the game area 5a, the performance image, the decorative body, etc. can be visually recognized in good condition.

In addition, according to the door frame 3, the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 are projected forward from the door window 101a (game area 5a), and the opening 426a and the opening 435a that emit spot light with high brightness are the front ends of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435. Since it is provided on the line of the direction), the light of the spot emission is not irradiated to the rear side (door window 101a side). Therefore, the spot light emitted from the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 is reflected to the player side by the glass plate 162 provided on the door window 101a, so that the inside of the game area 5a behind the door window 101a is not difficult to see, and other players can be attracted to the pachinko machine 1 by spot light emission with high brightness.

Further, according to the door frame 3, since the parts for spot light emission are provided in the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 projecting forward outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3, the spot light emission parts are located substantially at the same position as the periphery of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加Therefore, even if the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the player does not block the light of the spot light emission because the spot light emitting portion is located outside the player. Thus, when the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 emit spot light, other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the light of the high brightness spot light emission, so that the existence of the pachinko machine 1 can be appealed to other players, the interest of the player can be strongly attracted, and the player who is wandering around the game hall to select the pachinko machine to play can be attracted to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加The pachinko machine 1 can be attractive and highly appealing.

The surface LEDs (second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b) on both sides of which the spot LEDs (first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a) for spot-lighting the front surface of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 are preferably made to belong to the same system. As a result, since the surface LEDs on both sides of the light guide pin (light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, and light guide shaft portion 437a) sandwiching the light guide pin for guiding the light of the spot LED are in the same lighting mode, the same amount of light is emitted from both sides of the light guide pin at the same timing, and the shadow of the light guide pin on the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435. can be made even more invisible.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 73, the door frame 3 is provided below the contact operation portion 302 in the effect operation portion 301 of the effect operation unit 300, and has an annular effect operation portion outer peripheral decoration board 320 on which 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the upper surface. This performance operating section outer peripheral decoration board 320 includes two LED drivers for causing the 31 LEDs 320a to emit light. The performance operating section peripheral decoration board 320 is divided into two parts, a front decoration board 321 and a rear decoration board 322 .

18 LEDs 320a out of 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the front decoration board 321 in the effect operation section peripheral decoration board 320. As shown in FIG. Of the 18 LEDs 320a of the front decorative substrate 321, 6 are provided at intervals on the circumference near the inner circumference, 3 are provided at intervals on the circumference between the inner circumference and the outer circumference, and the remaining 9 LEDs 320a are provided at intervals on the circumference near the outer circumference.

The remaining thirteen LEDs 320a are mounted on the rear decoration board 322 in the effect operation section outer periphery decoration board 320. As shown in FIG. Of the thirteen LEDs 320a of the rear decoration substrate 322, four LEDs 320a are provided two by two at intervals near both ends of the arc on the circumference near the inner circumference, three are provided at intervals on the circumference between the inner circumference and the outer circumference, and the remaining six LEDs 320a are provided at intervals near both ends of the arc on the circumference near the circumference by three.

The 18 LEDs 320a of the front decoration substrate 321 are divided into a total of 9 sets, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. 73: 3 sets of 2 LEDs on the inner circumference, 3 sets of 3 LEDs on the middle circumference, and 3 sets of 9 LEDs on the outer circumference. 73, the 18 LEDs 320a of the rear decorative substrate 322 are divided into a total of 7 sets: 2 sets of 4 LEDs on the inner circumference with 2 LEDs near both ends, 3 sets of 3 LEDs on the middle circumference with 1 LED each, and 2 sets of 9 LEDs on the outer circumference with 3 LEDs near both ends. In other words, on the effect operation section peripheral decoration board 320, 31 LEDs 320a are divided into 16 groups. The LEDs 320a divided into these 16 groups are controlled by 48 systems by two LED drivers, and the LEDs 320a of each group can emit light in appropriate full colors.

According to this performance operation part outer periphery decoration board 320, by properly lighting 31 LEDs 320a of 48 systems, the player can see light emission performance such as light rotation, light concentration in the center, and light spread outward in the performance operation part 301.例文帳に追加

Further, according to the door frame 3, a door frame left side decoration 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and a door frame right side decoration 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 are provided on the outside of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a on one side and the other side in the left and right direction, respectively, so that the amount of protrusion in the front-rear direction differs from each other. A door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a and a second LED 422b are mounted, a door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a and a second LED 423b are mounted, and a door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a and second LEDs 432b are mounted, and a door frame right side lower decoration on which a plurality of first LEDs 433a and second LEDs 433b are mounted. The light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is guided to near the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 and emitted forward. 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436, and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are provided. The left-side door-frame decoration 426 and the right-side door-frame decoration 435 can be planarly luminous (surface-emitting), and when the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a of the door-frame left-side upper decorative substrate 422, the door-frame left-side lower decorative substrate 423, the door-frame right-side upper decorative substrate 432, and the door-frame right-side lower decorative substrate 433 are caused to emit light, the forwardly irradiated light forms a columnar light guide axis. After being guided to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 by the portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the light is radiated forward from the front ends (front end surfaces) thereof, and the light guide shaft portion 427a and the light guide shaft portion 42 of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 are emitted. 8a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, and light guide shaft portion 437a.

Therefore, the first LED422a and the second LED422b, the first LED423a and the second LED423b, the first LED432a and the second LED432b, and the first LED433a and the second LED433b of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are caused to emit light as appropriate, so that the game area 5a (the door window 101a ), the entire left-side door-frame decoration 426 and the right-side door-frame decoration 435 provided on the outer side of the door-frame left-side decoration 426 and the right-side door-frame decoration 435 can be illuminated in a planar manner, part of the left-side door-frame decoration 426 and the right-side door-frame decoration 435 can be illuminated in a dotted manner, and while the entire left-side door-frame decoration 426 and the right-side door-frame decoration 435 can be illuminated in a planar manner, a part thereof can be illuminated in a dotted manner. This makes it difficult for the player to get tired of the game and keeps the player entertained, thereby suppressing the loss of interest in the game.

At this time, a system in which the plurality of first LEDs 422a, second LEDs 422b, first LEDs 423a, and second LEDs 423b of the door frame left-side upper decorative substrate 422 and door-frame left-side lower decorative substrate 423 are separated, and a system in which the plurality of first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, first LEDs 433a, and second LEDs 433b of the door-frame right-side upper decorative substrate 432 and door-frame right-side lower decorative substrate 433 are separated from each other. Since the plurality of first LEDs 422a, the first LEDs 423a, the first LEDs 432a, the first LEDs 433a and the plurality of the second LEDs 422b, the second LEDs 423b, the second LEDs 432b, and the second LEDs 433b are arranged in mutually different systems, the first LEDs 422a, the second LEDs 422b, the first LEDs 423a, and the second LEDs 423b on the side of the door frame left side decorative body 426, and the door frame right side. When creating lighting pattern data for the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, and second LED 433b on the decoration 435 side, for example, the data for the left side of the door frame decoration 426 can be diverted to the data for the right side of the door frame 435, or the data for the left side of the door frame 426 and the right side of the door frame 435 can have the same flow. To provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of facilitating the creation of data, facilitating the construction of more complicated lighting pattern data (within the same creation time), showing the player various light emission performances of the lighting pattern, showing the player various light emission performances with high performance effects, and exhibiting sufficient performance effects for the light emission performances of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 on both left and right outer sides of the door window 101a.

In addition, since the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the two second LEDs 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b provided between the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the second LED 433b, and the second LED 433b are of the same system, the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, the first LED 433a (light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft Since the two second LEDs 422b, 423b, 432b, and 433b provided to sandwich the portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a) are always lit at the same time, the light is irradiated from both sides of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a. , The light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a by the light from the respective second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b become thin so that the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 437a are canceled, and the light guide shaft portion 427a projected on the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 The shadows of the shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a can be made difficult to see, and the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be evenly and planarly illuminated.

In addition, the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, which are planarly decorated with light emission by the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b, are formed by the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a. Since the part corresponding to the front end of the optical axis part 437a can be decorated with dot-like light emission, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect that could not be seen in conventional pachinko machines, such as light emitting in a planar shape and a partial light-light in a dot-like manner. The pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423 on one side (left side) in the horizontal direction and the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433 on the other side (right side) are left and right asymmetrical to each other. Therefore, it is possible to avoid mistaking the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 to be assembled in the assembling work of the pachinko machine 1, thereby improving the workability of assembly and suppressing the increase in cost.

[3-11. Identification of decorative substrate]
Next, using the door frame 3 as an example, identification of various decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 74 and the like. FIG. 74 is a rear view showing each decorative substrate provided around the door window of the door frame. Here, the plate left decoration substrate 273, the plate right decoration substrate 278, the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 422, the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decoration substrate 432, the door frame right side lower decoration substrate 433, the door frame top center decoration substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 will be described in detail as examples.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a white board is used as the decoration board on which LEDs are mounted, and the LED drivers and connectors of colors other than white that are attached to the decoration board are attached to the rear side of the board. As a result, the light from the LEDs mounted on the front surface of the decoration board is reflected to the front side so that the front decorative body or the like can be brightly decorated, and the decoration board is made inconspicuous from the front (player side).

The white decorative substrate may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), or the board itself may be white.

Since the pachinko machine 1 has a large number of decoration boards, different identification portions 7 are provided on the rear surface of each decoration board so that each decoration board can be easily identified (see FIG. 74). The identification unit 7 has a character identification unit 7a using characters such as kanji, kana, alphabets, symbols, numbers, model numbers, etc., and a color identification unit 7b using different colors (indicated by shades of different shades in FIG. 74).

More specifically, as the character identification portion 7a, the character "bottom left" is displayed on the plate left decorative substrate 273, the character "bottom right" is displayed on the plate right decorative substrate 278, the character "upper left" is displayed on the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422, the word "lower left" is displayed on the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423, the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 is displayed "upper right", the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 is displayed "lower right", and the door frame top central decorative substrate. In 455, the characters "upper middle" are applied, in the door frame top left decorative board 456, the characters "upper left" are applied, and in the door frame top right decorative board 457, the characters "upper right" are applied.

Further, the color identification portion 7b has a different color for each decorative substrate, and is applied substantially over the front surface of the rear surface. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the color identification portion 7b is provided not on the entire rear surface, but partially so as not to hinder the soldering of LEDs and the like mounted on the decorative substrate.

The identification portion 7 is applied to the decorative substrate by printing (silk printing), pasting a sticker, applying paint, or the like.

In the above description, the decorative substrate provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 was explained as an example, but the identification units 7 such as the character identification unit 7a and the color identification unit 7b may be provided for various decoration substrates provided in the handle unit 180, the effect operation unit 300, the game board 5, and the like.

In the above-described embodiment, the identification section 7 includes both the character identification section 7a and the color identification section 7b. However, the identification section 7 is not limited to this, and may include only the character identification section 7a or only the color identification section 7b.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the identification part 7 (the character identification part 7a and the color identification part 7b) is provided on the decoration board on which the LED is mounted, it is possible to easily distinguish the decoration boards having similar shapes, and it is possible to prevent the wrong decoration board from being assembled during the assembly work and to improve the workability of the assembly.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the identification part 7 is provided on the rear surface of the decoration board, the front side of the decoration board can be made white as much as possible, and the light from the LED mounted on the front surface of the decoration board can be reflected forward on the front side of the decoration board, so that the decorations in front can be brightly decorated, and the decoration board can be made inconspicuous from the front (player side) to improve the appearance.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color identification part 7b as the identification part 7 is provided over substantially the entire decoration board, it is possible to recognize whether or not the decoration board is a desired (desired color) only by looking at a part of the decoration board. Therefore, even when a plurality of types of decorative substrates are superimposed during assembly or the like, if a part of the decorative substrate is visible, a desired decorative substrate can be easily found, and labor required for assembly work can be simplified.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color of the color identification part 7b is made different for each decoration board, when the decoration boards required for one pachinko machine 1 are prepared at the time of assembly, if there is a decoration board provided with the color identification part 7b of the same color, it can be easily recognized that the same decoration board is prepared redundantly. Alternatively, when the colors are insufficient in the color identification portion 7b of the prepared decorative board, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a decorative board that is not prepared. Therefore, when preparing the decoration substrates necessary for assembling the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to easily recognize that an extra decoration substrate is prepared or the prepared decoration substrate is insufficient, so that the necessary number of decoration substrates can be surely prepared, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily arranged for assembly. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled smoothly, the time required for assembly can be shortened, and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the character identification part 7a as the identification part 7 for distinguishing the decoration board from other boards is provided on the rear surface of the decoration board, the worker can easily know which part the decoration board belongs to by reading the characters of the character identification part 7a, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the front and rear surfaces of each decoration board are white and the identification part 7 is provided on the rear surface, even if the decoration provided in front of the decoration board has high transparency, the decoration board can be made inconspicuous from the front (player side), and the appearance of the decoration can be improved. It is possible to entertain the technician and suppress the decrease in interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, the functional parts such as the LED driver are provided on the rear surface of the decoration substrate so that the functional parts are not visible from the front (player side), so that the appearance of the decoration (game machine) can be improved by avoiding the deterioration of the appearance caused by the appearance of the functional parts through the decoration. In addition, since the functional parts are hidden from view by providing them on the rear surface of the decoration board, it is not necessary to color the functional parts in white (or yellow) so that they are not conspicuous, and the functional parts can be used as they are.

[3-12. Effects of door frame]
According to the present embodiment, the switching unit 394 switches the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at different positions in the pachinko machine 1 so that the contact detection body 393 provided at a desired portion where the player's approach or contact is desired to be detected is connected to the contact detection sensor body 392 . Since the change in capacitance can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392, it is possible to detect the player's approach or contact with the desired part, and in response to the detection of the contact detection sensor main body 392, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control unit 1511, and the effect display control unit 1512. Control means such as the main control board 1310 can perform predetermined control. On the other hand, in a state where the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching unit 394, the connection between the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 provided in other parts is cut off. A change in capacitance of the contact detection body 393 is not detected, and only the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 at a desired portion can be reliably detected, and erroneous detection can be prevented.

In this way, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 is appropriately selected and switched by the switching unit 394 with respect to the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at different positions. Therefore, it is possible to detect the capacitance with one contact detection sensor main body 392 for the plurality of contact detection bodies 393, and the control means such as the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control section 1511, and the effect display control section 1512. It is possible to reduce the number of channels involved in detecting the approach or contact of a person, and relatively increase the number of channels that can be used for presentation. Therefore, since it is possible to control more production means (for example, movable decorations, light-emitting decorations, production display devices, etc.) by the control means, it is possible to present more diverse productions to the player by increasing the production means, to make it difficult for the player to get bored, to sufficiently entertain the player, and to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, the contact detection bodies 393 are provided at a plurality of parts of the pachinko machine 1 which the player does not want to touch, and the contact detection bodies 393 provided at desired parts are connected to the contact detection sensor body 392 by a switching part 394 according to the game state, and the approach or contact of the player to the desired part is detected to detect the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control part 1511, and the effect display control part 1512. Since it is possible to leave predetermined cautions and warnings by such control means, while monitoring a wide range of the pachinko machine 1 with one contact detection sensor main body 392, the number of channels that can be used for performance can be relatively increased, and the same effects as above can be achieved.

In addition, since the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are configured to detect the capacitance with one contact detection sensor main body 392, each contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are provided apart from each other, so that the sensor main body having electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit can be provided in a portion that is difficult for the player to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved and the appeal to the player can be enhanced.

Furthermore, since the contact test sensor 392 has a connection terminal for electrically connecting multiple contact detectors 393, simply connecting the wiring from the contact test detector 393 to the connection terminal of the contact test sensor 392, the contact test sensor 392 is the cleaning test 393. Since the capacity can be detected, the effort of assembling pachinko machine 1 can be easy to assemble, and the cost of pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, the contact detection sensor body 392 is provided with connection terminals in advance, and the contact detection sensor body 392 and the contact detection body 393 can be connected simply by connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor body 392. Therefore, compared to the case where the sensor electrode of the contact detection sensor body 392 is brought into contact with the conductive member and the contact detection body 393 is connected via the conductive member, the number of parts can be reduced. This cost can be reduced, the design of the conductive member for connecting with the contact detection body 393 can be eliminated, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-described effects can be easily realized.

In addition, a switching unit 394 is provided to switch the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392, and the contact detection body 393 to be detected can be selected by the switching part 394. Therefore, for example, when a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are dispersedly arranged and a player participation type effect is executed in which the distributed contact detection bodies 393 are touched in a predetermined order, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is connected by the switching part 394 at the timing when the player touches the contact detection sensor body 392 in order. By switching the contact detection bodies 393 to be used, it is possible to detect whether or not the player touches the contact detection bodies 393 in order, and a player participation type presentation with high game quality can be realized by one contact detection sensor main body 392, thereby providing the Pachinko machine 1 which further entertains the players.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350 that the player can press in the effect operation unit 300 of the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player approaches the contact detection body 352 made of patching metal, the player side of which is covered by the button body 351, and the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 changes. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358, it is possible to detect a change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, so that the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 (the effect operation unit 350) can be detected via the contact detection body 352.

When the player's approach or contact with the effect operation unit 350 is detected using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 in this way, a predetermined effect is output to the player side through the contact detection body 352 and the button body 351 by the effect means such as the button external decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360, the button inside decoration board 364, and the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, so that the player can be entertained by the effect. , it is possible to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game. At this time, when the player approaches or touches the performance operation unit 350, a predetermined performance is output, so that the performance operation unit 350 can function as a non-contact operation unit or a contact operation unit by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. Since the effect operation unit 350, which functions as a non-contact operation part or a contact operation part, can be pressed by the player when protruding, the effect operation part unit 350 can perform a variety of effect operations such as non-contact operation, contact operation, and pressing operation. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 having an external appearance different from that of a conventional pachinko machine equipped with operation buttons that can only be pressed can be easily realized, and appeal to players by differentiating it from other pachinko machines. A pachinko machine 1 with high power can be provided.

Further, a predetermined effect is output to the player side in accordance with the detection of the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor body 358. Since the capacitance varies according to the distance between the contact detection body 352 (the button body 351) and the player, a plurality of threshold values of the capacitance are provided, and different effects can be output for each threshold value. Therefore, since the distance (distance) from the player's approach to the button body 351 (the performance operation unit 350) to the contact can be detected in multiple stages, by outputting the performance corresponding to each stage, more diverse performances can be presented to the player, the player is less likely to get tired of it, and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 for detecting the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 352 is provided away from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection sensor main body 358 having electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit can be provided in a portion of the production operation unit 350 that is difficult for the player to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved and the appeal to the player can be enhanced.

Further, as described above, since the operation unit can perform a variety of performance operations such as non-contact operation, contact operation, and pressing operation, by executing a player-participation-type performance that enables the player to perform performance operations, it is possible to entertain the various performance operations, to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and to allow the player to enjoy the player-participation-type performance, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352, whose capacitance is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358, is made of a punching metal made of a metal plate with a plurality of holes formed therein, the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 can be reduced when the player is not approaching or touching the button body 351 through the plurality of holes, and the occurrence of erroneous detection by the contact detection sensor body 358 can be avoided. Therefore, by appropriately selecting the number, size, arrangement, etc. of the plurality of holes, it is possible to increase the area of the contact detection body 352 while suppressing an increase in capacitance, so that the contact detection body 352 can widen the range in which the player's approach or contact to the button body 351 (the production operation unit 350) is detected. As a result, since the contact detection body 352 can be enlarged to widen the detection range, if the button body 351 (the effect operation unit 350) that can be pressed by the player is made large and the contact detection body 352 is made to have the same size as the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 as in the above embodiment, when the player is requested to approach or touch the effect operation unit 350 (the button body 351) by executing the player participation type effect, the button body 3 Since the contact detection body 352 covered with 51 is as large as the upper surface part 351a of the button body 351, the moving distance of the player's finger or the like approaching or contacting the performance operation part unit 350 is shortened, the performance operation part unit 350 can be operated quickly, the operation timing can be made difficult to miss in the player participation type performance, and the player can surely participate in the player participation type performance, and the player can be entertained by the performance to suppress the decrease in interest. I can.

In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, it is possible to output the light emission performance from the LED 364a of the button inside decoration board 364 as a performance means provided on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side to the player side through a plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352, so that the player can surely enjoy the light emission performance and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) capable of pressing operation is provided with the contact detection body 352, the effect operation unit 350 can be reinforced by the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having a certain degree of strength and rigidity. can be made difficult. Therefore, since the performance operation part unit 350 can be made difficult to be damaged by the contact detection body 352, the player can press the performance operation part unit 350 without worrying, and the player participation type performance for operating the performance operation part unit 350 can be enjoyed more and the decline of interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the contact detector 352 is a punching metal, and the contact detector 352 is an expanded metal plate processed from the same thick metal plate, the thickness of the contact detector 352 can be reduced, so that it is easy to secure a space for providing a contact detector 352, and it has been set up. In addition to making it easier, it can increase the degree of freedom of design, making it easier to design a more appealing power pachinko machine.

In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punching metal, the plate thickness is constant compared to expanded metal. Therefore, the contact detection body 352 can be easily processed into a desired three-dimensional shape by press working, and the optimal shape for detecting the player's approach or contact with the button main body 351 (the effect operation unit 350) can be easily achieved, and the above-described effects can be realized.

In addition, since the player side of the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351 in the effect operation unit 350, the player can be prevented from directly touching the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed by the button body 351, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the contact detection body 352 in which a plurality of holes are formed. , the button main body 351 can be operated without a sense of incongruity, and the effect can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

Further, since the player side of the contact detection body 352 made of punching metal is covered with the button body 351, dust and stains such as food and drink do not adhere to a plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352, so that the labor required for cleaning can be simplified, and the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed as the pachinko machine 1 which is easy to clean can be reduced.

In addition, effect means such as the outer button decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360, the button inside decorative board 364, and the projecting force adjustment mechanism 380 are provided on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side. When is detected, a predetermined performance is outputted through a plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352 and the transparent button body 351, so that the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the performance operation unit 350, and the performance output through (through) the performance operation unit 350 can be surely enjoyed to suppress the deterioration of interest.

In addition, since the effect means such as the button outer decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360, the inside button decoration board 364, and the projecting force adjustment mechanism 380 are provided on the side opposite to the player side of the contact detection body 352, the effect means is covered by the contact detection body 352, and the contact detection body 352 (the effect operation part unit 350) and the effect means can be combined compactly, so that the above-described effects are achieved. The performance operation unit 350 and the performance means can be easily provided at desired parts of the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can be differentiated from other pachinko machines can be easily provided.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the player approaches or contacts the directing operation unit unit 350 (button body 351), which is provided in the top and lower directions in the table unit 200 of the door frame 3, so that the contact test sensor changes because the contact capacity of the contact detector 352 of the direct operation unit unit 350 changes. By detecting the capacity of the contact test unit 352 by the main unit 358, the approach or contact of the player to the direct operation unit unit 350 can be detected. Then, when the contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the player's approach or contact with the effect operation unit 350, the effect operation unit 350 protrudes upward due to the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360. When the effect operation unit 350 protrudes in a state where the player is not in contact with the effect operation unit 350, the effect operation unit 350 contacts (collides) with the player, and the effect operation unit 35 is in contact with the effect operation unit 350. When the number 0 protrudes, the player can be presented with an effect using a physical force that pushes the player. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player by a performance not found in the conventional pachinko machines, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the performance operation part unit 350, and the player can surely notice the projection of the performance operation part unit 350.例文帳に追加

When the effect operation section unit 350 is projected, if the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 is moved in the direction (upward) toward the upper end of the lifting spring 365, the compression of the lifting spring 365 becomes stronger and the biasing force can be increased. By moving to the position, the urging force of the effect operation section unit 350 by the lifting spring 365 can be changed. In this way, since the performance operation part unit 350 can be projected with various projecting forces, the variation of the performance by physical force can be increased, the player is hardly bored, the performance by the projection of the performance operation part unit 350 can be enjoyed, and the decline of the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, since the projecting force of the effect operation unit 350 is changed according to the game state, when the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350 with a finger or the like, if the effect operation unit 350 abuts with a strong force, a strong impact is given to the player. .

In addition, since the performance operation unit 350 is a pressing operation unit 303 capable of pressing operation, when the player participation type performance is executed, the player can participate in the player participation type performance by having the player press the performance operation unit 350, and the pressing operation of the performance operation unit 350 can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 350 can be operated by pressing, the effect operation unit 350 is protruded by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 when the player participatory effect in which the effect operation unit 350 is operated by pressing the effect operation unit 350 (upper surface of the button body 351) for the player who puts his or her finger or the like on the effect operation unit 350 (upper surface of the button body 351) so that the player can perform the pressing operation at any time. The player can be made to recognize the start of execution of the player-participation type performance, and the desire for the pressing operation of the performance operation section unit 350 can be heightened to further enjoy the player-participation type performance.

Furthermore, since the effect operation unit 350 is protruded by the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 in the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the effect operation unit 350 can be protruded easily and vigorously compared to the case where the effect operation unit 350 is projected using a drive motor, and the above-described effects can be more easily achieved.

Also, by detecting the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352 with the contact detection sensor main body 358, the player's approach or contact with the effect operation unit 350 is detected. Since the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 352 differs according to the distance between the effect operation unit 350 and the player, a plurality of electrostatic capacitance thresholds are provided, and the effect operation unit 350 can be projected with a different protrusion force for each threshold. Therefore, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the interval (distance) from the approach of the player's finger or the like to the production operation unit 350 until it touches the production operation unit 350 in multiple stages.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is popped up by execution of the player participation type effect, and when the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350 provided so that the player can advance and retreat, the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 352 provided on the back side of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350 that the player touches changes. On the other hand, since the contact detection sensor body 358 provided apart from the contact detection body 352 in the effect operation unit 350 detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, it is possible to capture the change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 due to the player's approach or contact. Then, when the contact detection sensor body 358 is detected or the player advances or retreats (presses) the effect operation unit 350, a predetermined effect is executed by the effect means such as the effect operation part peripheral decoration board 320, the button outer decoration board 355, the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360, the button inside decoration board 364, the projecting force adjustment mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600. That is, when the player advances or retreats the performance operation unit 350 or approaches or touches the performance operation unit 350, a predetermined performance is executed, so that the player can be entertained by the performance, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

At this time, when the player approaches or touches the performance operation unit 350, the performance is executed, so the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) can be made to function like a performance operation unit (non-contact operation unit, contact operation unit). On the other hand, when the player advances and retreats (presses) the effect operation unit 350, the effect is executed, so the effect operation unit 350 can be made to function like a effect operation unit (pressing operation unit). As described above, since the player can perform various performance operations, by executing the player-participation type performance that enables the player to perform the performance operation, the player can enjoy the various performance operations, the player can hardly get bored, the player can enjoy the player-participation type performance, and the decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, the player is detected by the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 352 provided near the part of the button body 351 in the effect operation unit 350 that the player touches (below the upper surface part 351a). Since the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 352 varies depending on the distance between the contact detection body 352 (button body 351) and the player, a plurality of threshold values of the capacitance for executing a predetermined effect are provided, and different effects are executed for each threshold value. It becomes possible to Therefore, it is possible to detect the interval (distance) from the approach of the player's finger or the like to the performance operation part unit 350 to the contact thereof in multiple stages, so that the presentation of the performance according to each stage makes it possible to present the player with more diverse performances, to make it difficult for the player to get bored and to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since a predetermined effect is executed by detection of the player by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the effect can impart an operational feeling to the effect operation (non-contact operation, contact operation) using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and the player can enjoy the effect operation more.

Furthermore, since the player is provided with a production operation unit 350 that can be advanced and retreated (pressable), and a contact detection body 352 and a contact detection sensor main body 358 that can detect the approach or contact of the player to the production operation unit 350, various operations such as an operation (pressing operation) to advance and retreat the production operation unit 350 and an operation (non-contact operation, contact operation) to approach or touch the production operation unit 350 are performed in the player participation type production. can be requested, the player can be motivated to participate in the player-participation type performance by various operations, and can be easily made to participate in the player-participation type performance. When the player participates in the player-participation type performance, various operations using the performance operation part unit 350, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 make it difficult for the player to get bored, the player-participation type performance can be enjoyed, and the decrease in interest of the player can be suppressed.

Further, since the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 of the effect operation unit 350 is engaged with the locking part 371c of the elevation cam member 371 of the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the effect operation unit 350 can be locked so as not to advance or retreat. It is possible to prevent the unit 350 from moving or shaking without permission. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or anxiety due to the arbitrarily moving or swinging of the performance operation unit 350, and to make the performance by the performance operation unit 350 more enjoyable.

Furthermore, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided at a position separated from the contact detection body 352 in the performance operation part unit 350, the contact detection sensor main body 358 having electronic parts such as a sensor IC and an output circuit can be provided at a portion that is difficult for a player to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In addition, since the contact detection body 352 for detecting the capacitance and the contact detection sensor body 358 having the sensor IC for detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 and the output circuit, etc. are separate bodies, the shape, material, etc. of the contact detection body 352 can be appropriately selected independently of the contact detection sensor body 358. Therefore, the contact detection body 352 can be made to optimally correspond to the shape, form, specifications, etc. of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, when the player approaches or touches the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 covering the outer button decoration substrate 355, the inner button decoration substrate 364, or the decoration 398 with a finger or the like, the contact detector 352 or the contact detector 39 provided between the button main body 351 or the surface member 396 and the outer button decoration substrate 355, the inner button decoration substrate 364, or the decoration 398. 7 changes, and according to the change, a predetermined effect of irradiating the player side with light from the outside button decoration substrate 355, the inside button decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 398 is executed, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the outside button decoration substrate 355, the inside button decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 398 by the light irradiated to the player side, and the player can be entertained by the executed production. At this time, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the outer button decoration substrate 355, the inner button decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 398 is formed along the decoration portion provided on the button body 351 or the surface member 396, so that the player can be given the illusion that the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is part of the decoration portion. 352 or contact detector 397 can be made unrecognizable for detecting the player.

In this way, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is made unrecognizable from the player side, even if the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 blocks a part of the button outer decoration board 355, the button inner decoration board 364, or the decoration 398 (effect), the player does not notice the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, and the button outer decoration board 355, the button inner decoration board 364, or the decoration 3 does not bother the player. Even if the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is provided in front of 98, the presence of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 does not make the player feel uncomfortable. Therefore, it is possible to show the player the effects of the outer button decoration board 355, the inner button decoration board 364, or the decoration body 398 in a good state, so that the player can be entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

In addition, by detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like to the button body 351 or the surface member 396 by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the effect of irradiating the player side with the button external decoration substrate 355, the button inner decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 398 covered by the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is performed. 302), and can provide the player with a feeling of operation by light. Therefore, for example, when the player participatory effect is executed, the player's finger or the like is made to approach or contact the button body 351 or the surface member 396, and when the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 detects the approach or contact of the finger or the like, the effect is executed by the button external decoration substrate 355, the button inner decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 398. can entertain.

Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 detects the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 or the surface member 396, it is possible to change the effect of the button exterior decoration substrate 355, the button interior decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 398 according to the distance between the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the player's finger. The performance by the middle decoration substrate 364 or the decoration body 398 can be changed to show more colorful performances to the players, and the colorful performances can make the players less likely to get tired of them, thereby suppressing the decrease in the interest of the players.

In addition, a change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is detected, and when the player approaches or touches the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button outer decoration substrate 355, the button inner decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 398 changes. The pachinko machine 1 that can easily detect the approach or contact of a person's fingers or the like and has the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

In addition, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is adapted to detect a change in capacitance, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 can be made of a conductive member. Therefore, for example, when the contact detection body 397 is a metal vapor deposition film, the vapor deposition film can be made transparent by thinning the vapor deposition film, and the vapor deposition film can be made transparent by thickening the vapor deposition film so that it has a metallic luster so that it looks like a part of decoration. Alternatively, when the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 are made of punching metal having a design like a star or a heart, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 can be made to look like a part of decoration. For this reason, the contact detectors 352, 395, and 397 can be made unrecognizable by the player, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the capacitance changes when the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the transparent button body 351 covering the upper surface side (front side), and the change causes a contact for presenting a predetermined effect by the effect presentation means such as the button outer decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation part lifting mechanism 360, the button inside decoration board 364, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, and the effect presentation means such as the effect display device 1600. Since the detection elements 395 and the like (including the contact detection element 352, the left contact detection element 390L, the right contact detection element 390R, the contact detection element 393, and the contact detection element 397, etc.) are formed in a predetermined outer peripheral shape having a design property, the pachinko machine 1 can be decorated with the contact detection element 395 itself, and the pachinko machine 1 that has a good appearance and is highly appealing to players can be provided. In addition, the surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button body 351, and the effect presenting means presents a predetermined effect via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, etc. in accordance with a change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 395 and the like due to the approach of the player's finger or the like to the contact detection body 395. can function as the effect operation unit 301 . Since the contact detection body 395 or the like that can be seen through the button body 351 has a design, the performance operation part 301 looks like it has a design, so that the pachinko machine 1 having the performance operation part 301 not found in conventional pachinko machines can give a strong impact to a player, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can be differentiated from other pachinko machines can be obtained. In addition, as described above, the contact detection body 395 and the like having a design can give a strong impact to the player, so that the contact detection body 395 and the like (the button body 351) can be strongly aroused, and the expectation for the operation of the button body 351 (the effect operation section 301) can be heightened. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the contact detection body 395 or the like for detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351 is formed in a well-designed outer peripheral shape, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the performance operation section 301 (the button body 351) for presenting the performance by the performance presentation means at first glance. Therefore, when the player participation type performance for operating the performance operation part 301 is executed, by urging the player to approach or touch the button body 351, the button body 351 can be made to notice that the button body 351 is the performance operation part 301 by the contact detection body 395 or the like for the first time, and the player can be given unexpectedness to enjoy the player participation type performance more. Alternatively, when the player-participation type performance for operating the performance operation part 301 is executed, if the player approaches or touches the button body 351 without knowing the performance operation part 301, the electrostatic capacitance of the contact detection body 395 or the like changes and the performance is presented by the performance presenting means, so that the player can be surprised, the player can be entertained by the presented performance, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the effect presenting means presents an effect in accordance with the change in the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 395 or the like, it is possible to easily detect the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 or the like, and the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-described effects can be easily realized. In addition, since an effect is presented in accordance with a change in the electrostatic capacity of the contact detection body 395 or the like, it is possible to detect the interval (distance) from the approach of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 or the like until it touches the button body 351 in multiple stages.

In addition, since the outer periphery of the contact detection body 395 and the like is formed in a predetermined shape, even if an inorganic material such as punching metal, expanded metal, wire mesh, etc. is used as the contact detection body 395 and the like having conductivity, the contact detection body 395 and the like can be imparted with a design property, the appearance deterioration due to the contact detection body 395 and the like can be prevented, and the contact detection body 395 and the like can be made conspicuous, and the pachinko machine 1 exhibiting the above effects can be easily realized. I can.

In addition, since the outer peripheral shape of the contact detection body 395 and the like is formed into a predetermined shape, it is possible to construct a product having designability without forming the contact detection body 395 and the like into a three-dimensional shape. Therefore, the contact detection body 395 and the like can be formed in a planar shape or a simple three-dimensional shape, and the manufacturing cost of the contact detection body 395 and the like can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button main body 351, the contact detection body 395 and the like are prevented from being contaminated with dust, food and drink, etc., and cleaning work can be facilitated. More specifically, since the contact detection body 395 or the like is made of a punching metal or the like having unevenness, dirt such as dust or food and drink easily adheres to the unevenness, and it takes a lot of time to clean the dirt. The load on the game hall side where the cock machine 1 is installed can be reduced.

In addition, since the surface side of the contact detection body 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button body 351 so as to prevent the player from touching the contact detection body 395 and the like, when the contact detection body 395 and the like is made of a metal vapor deposition film, foil stamping, or the like that can enhance the design, it is possible to prevent the contact detection body 395 and the like from being quickly worn out due to the player touching it, and the durability of the contact detection body 395 and the like can be improved.

Furthermore, since the surface side of the contact detection bodies 395 and the like is covered with the transparent button body 351, as described above, the transparent button body 351 prevents the player from directly touching the contact detection bodies 395 and the like. can be formed.

In addition, when the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 or the like to change the capacitance of the contact detection body 395 or the like, a predetermined effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395 or the like. This allows the player to enjoy the motions of the fingers and the like.

In addition, an effect is presented to the player through the button body 351, the contact detection body 395, and the like, and when the player's finger or the like approaches or touches the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395, etc., the effect presented to the player is executed through the button body 351, the contact detection body 395, and the like. 1 (player participation type performance) can be enjoyed.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in order to operate the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350 capable of performing a plurality of operations, when the player approaches or touches the button body 351 with a finger or the like, and the contact detection body 352 (the contact detection sensor body 358) detects the entry of the finger or the like into the detection area, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the outer button decoration board 355 and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the inner button decoration board 364 emit light to cause the button body 351 to emit light. A light emitting effect in which the player is illuminated through the button body 351, a vibration motor 356 vibrating the finger of the player who is in contact with the button body 351, and a effect in which the button body 351 is protruded upward by the effect operation unit elevating mechanism 360 to give impact, push-up, wind pressure, etc. to the player through the button body 351 (via). At this time, the player is provided with performance such as light, vibration, impact, push-up, wind pressure, etc. through the button body 351, so that the player can be surprised by the performance, amused, and motivated to operate the button body 351.例文帳に追加When the player's finger or the like touches the button body 351 and presses the button body 351 downward by appropriately moving the finger or the like, the button body 351 functions as a pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, the contact operation by detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like by the contact detection body 352 and the pressing operation of the button body 351 allow the player to enjoy various performance operations, which makes it difficult for the player to get bored and suppresses the decline in interest. can be made

Further, the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and the contact detection body 352 is provided near the back surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351. Therefore, even if the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit is arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface portion 351a of the button main body 351, the contact detection body 352 detects the button main body 3. The approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like on the upper surface portion 351a of 51 can be detected, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, since the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358, the contact detection sensor body 358 provided with the detection circuit can be arranged on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface portion 351a (contact detection body 352) of the button body 351. can improve the appearance of

In addition, since the external button decorative board 355, the internal button decorative board 364, and the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360 are provided on the back side (lower side) of the button body 351, it is possible to easily impart effects such as light, vibration, shock, push-up, wind pressure, etc. to the player through the button body 351, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

[4. Overall configuration of main body frame]
The overall structure of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. FIG. 75 is a front view of the body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a rear view of the body frame of the pachinko machine. 77 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front right, FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front left, and FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the back.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by striking a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and discharges the game ball B used in the game to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached openable and closable to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the upper and lower front ends on the left side of the front, and a door frame 3 is attached openable and closable so as to close the open front side.

The main body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part is insertable into the frame of the outer frame 2 and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5; a main body frame upper hinge member 510 which is attached to the left upper end of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; and a body frame lower hinge assembly 520 attached and rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached.

The main body frame 4 includes a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front; a ball launcher 540 which is attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500 and used to shoot game balls B into the game area 5a of the game board 5; A payout unit 560 attached to pay out game balls B to the player side, a substrate unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, a back cover 640 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500 so as to be openable and closable and covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501, and attached to the right side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. and a locking unit 650 for locking.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, a connection cable guide member 502 for guiding a connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side, and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5. - 特許庁

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500; A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 away from 54 to the left in the front view, a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game balls B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, a payout device 580 that pays out the game balls B guided by the ball guide unit 570 one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580 downward, and a door that allows the game balls B that have passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to enter. A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides to the frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side is provided.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 projecting forward from the unit base 651 and capable of being locked with the door frame 3, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 projecting backward from the unit base 651 and capable of being locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 for vertically moving the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653, and a door frame hook. A lock spring 655 that biases the hook 652 downward and the hook 653 for the outer frame upward, and an unlocking lever 656 for the outer frame that moves the hook 653 for the outer frame downward are provided.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The body frame base unit 500 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 83 and the like. FIG. 82(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear part inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, a connection cable guide member 502 attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 and guiding the connection cable 503, and a game board lock member 505 attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth and for detachably holding the game board 5.

The body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 includes a base body 501a which is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, a game board insertion opening 501b which penetrates from a position slightly below the upper end of the base body 501a to a height range of about 3/4 of the total height and which is inserted from the front side of the base body 501a. 1c, and a game board restricting portion 501d that protrudes upward from the center of the game board placing portion 501c in the left-right direction and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rearward.

In addition, the body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 501c in the front view of the base body 501a. The body frame base 501 has a circular speaker opening 501g that faces forward the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in the board unit 620, the main body frame base 501 has a cable mounting recess 501h that is recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extends left and right to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable insertion opening 501i that penetrates back and forth at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h when viewed from the front.

Further, the body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base body 501a when viewed from the front. It has an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l for mounting.

Further, the body frame base 501 has a door frame open switch for detecting opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted on the front surface of the base body 501a. When the door frame 3 is opened (released) with respect to the body frame 4, the door frame open switch is depressurized and can detect the opening of the door frame 3. A detection signal from the door frame open switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 . The body frame base 501 also has a body frame open switch for detecting opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface of the base body 501a below the position where the door frame open switch is attached. When the body frame 4 is opened (released) with respect to the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch is depressing and can detect the opening of the body frame 4. As shown in FIG. A detection signal from the body frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 .

A game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 around a longitudinally extending axis below the game board placing portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 enables the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b to be detachable by regulating the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to a position to the right of the speaker opening 501g and below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. The cable attachment recess 501h is formed to have a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotatably attached about an axis that extends vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 includes a flat plate-shaped guide body 502a extending left and right, a pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b projecting forward from the upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a and extending to the right from the right end of the guide body 502a, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a. and a plurality of through holes 502d extending in the left-right direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and is formed in a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that an attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis extending vertically near the right end of the cable attachment recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503 . The connection cable 503 consists of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the opposite end of which is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3.

Next, the effects of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 is attached to the main body frame base 501 so that the end (right end) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to the door frame 3 in the left-right direction is rotatable about an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 connecting the interface board 635 of the body frame 4 and the door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 is in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502 so that the side connected to the interface board 635 extends from the right to the left of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being clamped together with the guide body 502a by means of a tie band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d in the position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the body frame 4 is located behind the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 when the assembled door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4 (see FIG. 83(a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, bends in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and extends into the door frame relay board cover 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 .

In this state, when the hinge is rotated to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, and the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is formed so as to satisfy α/2≧β (preferably α/3≧β) (see FIG. 83(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but when the opening angle α exceeds a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees), the increase stops. In this embodiment, the maximum open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

Thus, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the body frame base 501, so that the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, thereby preventing the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4.例文帳に追加

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 relatively moves rearward, so the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503, and the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not caught between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, so that the connection cable 503 can be prevented from malfunctioning.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back by 180 degrees, so that the folded portion of the connection cable 503 can be bent. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back 180 degrees changes so as to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 is applied due to the crease. When the door frame 3 is closed, the crease can prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction and guide the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) in the closing direction, so that the door frame 3 can be smoothly moved. can be closed.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is held by the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the center axis (axis) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103 a moves the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 to the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis) of the pin 126 .

Further, in the present embodiment, a tangent line passing through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502 and passing through a portion (pressing portion) of the speaker duct 103 protruding rearward from the speaker duct 103 on the central axis (axis) side of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 about the central axis (axis) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 makes an angle of 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, so that the leading end side of the open connection cable guide member 502 can be pressed in the closing direction through the connection cable 503, so that the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction when closing the door frame 3, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

[4-2. Main body frame upper hinge member]
Main body frame upper hinge member 510 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is rotatably attached to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge body 511 in which the rear part of a horizontally extending plate-like plate is bent downward into an L shape, and a main body frame upper hinge pin 512 that protrudes upward from the front end of the upper hinge body 511 in a cylindrical shape and is pivotally supported by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a that penetrates vertically on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extending portion and supports the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 pivotally.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501 k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The main body frame hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by inserting the main body frame hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 . The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 .

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a hinge-rotatable manner, and to attach the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in a hinge-rotatable manner.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and is rotatably attached to the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 includes a lower hinge first body 521 in which the rear part of a horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward into an L shape, and a lower hinge second body 522 arranged above the lower hinge first body 521 and in which the rear part of the horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L shape. In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 is arranged with a space upward from the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, and the vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521.

The lower hinge first main body 521 has an outer frame lower hinge hole 521a that penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion and into which the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

The lower hinge second main body 522 includes a door frame lower hinge hole 522a that penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion and into which the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above, and a restricting piece 522b that extends upward from a position behind the door frame lower hinge hole 522a on the left side of the horizontally extending portion to restrict the rotation range of the door frame 3. The door frame lower hinge hole 522 a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 , vertically extending parts of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 . The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to hinge-rotatably attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 and to attach the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to hinge-rotatably.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcing frame]
Main body frame reinforcement frame 530 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 and the like. The body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500 . The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in plan view that is U-shaped with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion.

Two left position regulating members 531 for regulating the forward and vertical movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 are attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 at the rear side of the portion extending rightward from the front end thereof.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove 530a that opens to the right and extends vertically on the front side that is formed in a U shape with the right side open in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into the groove 530a. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove part 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 becomes meandering in plan view, and an illegal tool can be prevented from being inserted inside from the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and prevents an unauthorized tool from being inserted into the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.例文帳に追加

[4-5. ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 84 and the like. FIG. 84(a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and FIG. 84(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device. The ball shooting device 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and is for hitting the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. The ball shooting device 540 can hit the game ball B with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 .

The ball shooting device 540 includes a flat plate-shaped shooting base 541 attached to the shooting device attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500; a shooting solenoid 542 attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the shooting base 541 when viewed from the front; A shooting rail 544 is attached to the front surface of the shooting base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

In the ball shooting device 540, the game ball B is supplied to the right end of the upper surface of the shooting rail 544 from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3. When the handle 195 is turned while the game ball B is supplied to the right end of the upper surface of the shooting rail 544, the shooting solenoid 542 is driven with the strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the ball hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the shooting rail 544 and hit into the game area 5a.

If the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the hitting strength of the game ball B, it falls from between the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) to the foul ball socket 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202.

[4-6. payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85(a) is a front perspective view of the payout base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout base unit. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and attached to the rear side of the body frame base unit 500 .

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 . The dispensing base 551 includes a top plate portion 551a extending left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, a left-side plate portion 551b extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front view with substantially the same width in the front-rear direction as the top plate portion, a right side plate portion 551c extending short downward from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a, and the rear portion of the top plate portion 551a. A back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the side to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, a back plate left portion 551e extending rightward from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the vicinity of the lower end with a substantially constant width, an inner side plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b, and a rear portion extending from the front portion of the lower side of the left side plate portion 551b to the right side. A bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the left plate portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f are provided. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open forward and inward of the L shape.

In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends horizontally with substantially the same length as the horizontal width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left side plate portion 551b extends vertically with substantially the same length as the vertical direction height of the game board insertion opening 501b. The dispensing base 551 has front ends of a top plate portion 551a, a left side plate portion 551b, and a right side plate portion 551c attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501. As shown in FIG.

The dispensing base 551 is provided with a vertically extending shallow concave portion opened rearward by the left plate portion 551b, the left rear plate portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f, and the dispensing unit 560 is attached to this portion. In addition, the dispensing base 551 protrudes rightward from the upper portion of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

The pay-out base unit 550 is provided with a box-shaped ball tank 552 that is attached to the upper surface of a top plate portion 551a of the pay-out base 551 and that is open upward in the shape of a box that extends left and right, and a tank rail 553 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side of the part extending left and right of the pay-out base 551 and extends leftward in a groove shape that is open upward.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the middle in the left-right direction, a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 away from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and the tank rail 553. and a ball stop member 557 attached near the left end in front view at the lower end of the .

The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length in the left-right direction approximately half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-rear direction shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a rightward position in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is formed in such a shape that it extends obliquely to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552 so that the depth in the front-rear direction extends from a depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B to approximately one depth, and then the depth in the front-rear direction extends straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The left end opening of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560 .

The tank rail 553 is inclined such that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left is lower at a steeper angle than the bottom with respect to the horizontal so that the height of the left end is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B.例文帳に追加The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. A first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball straightening member 556, and a ball stop member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight leftward. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from widening or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 .

The ball straightening member 556 is attached at a portion between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553 so that the end on the first rail cover 554 side can rotate about an axis extending in the longitudinal direction. The ball rectifying member 556 has rectifying pieces 556a projecting into the tank rail 553 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 91). The rectifying piece 556a delays the flow of the game balls B on the upper stage side of the game balls B circulating in two stages, and rectifies them so that they flow in one stage on the downstream side, thereby preventing ball clogging even if the height in the tank rail 553 is lowered.

The ball stop member 557 is mounted slidably in the left-right direction near the left end in front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553, and by sliding it leftward, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, and the game balls B can be prevented from flowing to the payout unit side downstream from the tank rail 553.

Furthermore, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 in front view on the top surface of the portion extending left and right of the payout base 551 . The external terminal plate 558 is for electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 has a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion opening 501b side of the main body frame base 501 . A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. FIG. 86(a) is a front perspective view of the payout unit in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. Fig. 87(a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and Fig. 87(b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550. As shown in FIG.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game balls B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, a payout device 580 that is arranged below the ball guide unit 570 and pays out the game balls B guided by the ball guide unit 570 one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit 600. A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the path unit 600 to the side of the door frame 3 or the side of the board unit 620 is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580 . The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. In a normal state, the game balls B are released from the payout passage 580a toward the upper full ball path unit 600 based on instructions from the payout control board 633, and the ball extraction lever 593 is operated. The game ball B is released from the upper full tank ball path unit 600 side.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides down the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball withdrawal passage 580b. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and guides the game balls B released from the ball extraction path 580b to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The ball guide unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553 and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side.

The ball guide unit 570 includes a box-shaped guide unit base 571 which has a guide passage 570a extending in a meandering manner through which a game ball B can flow and which is open forward, a flat guide passage front cover 572 which closes the front side of the guide unit base 571, a movable piece member 573 which is movable by the game ball B flowing in the guide passage 570a, and a game ball in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. A ball cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of B (see FIG. 91).

In the sphere guide unit 570, the shape of the guide unit base 571 and the guide passage front cover 572 when viewed from the front is a quadrangle extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, then bends rightward, extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly folding over the width of the guide unit base 571 in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guide unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a is formed so that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game balls B with respect to the circulation direction of the game balls B, and the game balls B can be guided in a line.

The ball guide unit 570 has a movable piece member 573 attached near the top thereof so as to be able to move forward and backward into the guide passage 570a. Specifically, the upper portion of the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached to a portion on the right outside of the guide passage 570a in a front view around an axis extending back and forth, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. When the game ball B comes into contact with the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a, the movable piece member 573 is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the guide passage 570a so that the movable piece member 573 does not protrude.

A ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and detects the movable piece member 573 when the part of the movable piece member 573 retreats from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. Therefore, the ball-off detection sensor 574 is in a state of detection when the game ball B exists in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B does not exist in the guide path 570a.

When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the upstream end of the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580. In the ball guide unit 570, since the guide passage 570a for guiding the game balls B extends in a meandering manner, the guide passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guide unit 570, and many game balls B can be stored in the guide passage 570a. In addition, since the ball guide unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 can be detected via the guide passage 570a.

[4-7b. dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89 and the like. FIG. 88 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction. FIG. 89(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction when the ball extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). The payout device 580 is detachably attached from behind to the lower side of the ball guide unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 .

The payout device 580 comprises a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a which is opened rearward and through which the game balls B can flow, and a ball withdrawal passage 580b which branches from the middle of the payout passage 580a, a flat payout device rear lid 582 which closes the payout device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped payout device front lid 58 which is attached to the front side of the payout device main body 581 and opened rearward. 3 and .

Dispensing device 580 includes a dispensing motor 584 attached to the rear surface of dispensing device main body 581 and having a rotating shaft projecting between dispensing device main body 581 and dispensing device front lid 583; a spur gear-shaped driving gear 585 attached to the rotating shaft of dispensing device motor 584; 86, a second spur gear-shaped transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583, a spur gear-shaped dispensing gear 588a that meshes with the second transmission gear 587, and a plurality of detection pieces 588b that extend outward from the dispensing gear 588a. a payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and has a plurality of blade pieces 589a projecting into the payout passage 580a;

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, a ball removal movable piece 592 attached to a portion branched from the payout passage 580a by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 so as to be able to open and close the ball removal passage 580b, and a ball removal movable piece 592. A ball extracting lever 593 is provided which can be held at a position closing the passage 580b and which is slidably mounted vertically by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582. - 特許庁

The dispensing device 580 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically in a plan view. Dispensing device 580 has a width in the left-right direction larger than the width in the left-right direction of ball guiding unit 570 toward the right in front view.

As shown in FIG. 88, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction, and a downstream end that opens downward at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. The delivery passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the top to about 1/3 of the total height so as to move leftward little by little as it goes downward from the upstream end. Above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, it extends downward in an arc concentric with the payout blade 589 so that a gap slightly larger than the game ball B is formed between the payout blade 589 and the outer circumference of the payout blade 589, and extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the rear view from the center of the payout blade 589.

A payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout vane 589 and directly above the downstream end in the payout passage 580a.

The ball extraction passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and branches at a portion that is bent rightward, extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view, and opens downward near the left end of the bottom surface in rear view.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 protrude backward and forward from the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b diverge so as to form a gap narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B, and are formed so as to be continuous with the left side walls of the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b in the rear view. 581a and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a are formed on the left side in rear view of a portion that branches off from the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and extends rightward in rear view at a position about 1/3 of the height from the top. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be depressed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed so as to mainly constitute the side walls of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball removing movable piece 592 rotates through between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end when viewed from the rear. The drive gear 585 , the first transmission gear 586 , the second transmission gear 587 , and the dispensing gear member 588 are arranged in front of the dispensing device main body 581 and covered with a dispensing device front lid 583 on the front side. The dispensing gear member 588 is provided with three outwardly extending flat detection pieces 588b at angular intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The dispensing blade 589 is arranged between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 . The delivery blade 589 has a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape, and three blade pieces 589a are provided at angular intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The vane piece 589a protrudes into the payout passage 580a such that the distance between it and the side wall of the payout passage is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B at a portion extending toward the rotation shaft from above in the payout passage 580a and then extending rightward in rear view. The payout blade 589 has a ball housing portion 589b recessed in an arc with a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can restrict the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and can move the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b to the downstream side by rotating in the clockwise direction in the rear view.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially attached to the payout device rear cover 582 and the payout device front cover 583 so as to be rotatable together. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotating shaft of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the delivery blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the delivery gear member 588 that rotates together with the delivery blade 589 .

The upper end of the ball removing movable piece 592 is rotatably attached to the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a around an axis extending back and forth. The ball removing movable piece 592 is bent in a V-shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The ball removal movable piece 592 has a depth in the front-back direction smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and can project into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat outside the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 and to the left in the rear view. A portion of the ball removal lever 593 penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the lower end, the lower portion can come into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592, the rotation of the ball removal movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted, and the ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Further, by positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the upper end, the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be turned to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b to open the ball extraction passage 580b (see FIG. 89).

When the ball extracting lever 593 is lifted to make the ball extracting movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B which is in a state like a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball extracting movable piece 592 flows down to the ball extracting passage 580b side beyond the ball extracting movable piece 592.例文帳に追加At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a in a straight line, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side, and the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side. It will flow down faster than the passage 580a side.

In this way, in the state where the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball extraction passage 580b at a high speed, so that the game ball B vigorously contacts the lower end side of the ball extraction movable piece 592 protruding into the ball extraction passage 580b. Since the movable piece 592 can move outward from the inner surface of the ball extraction passage 580b through the contact force, the movable piece 592 will not be caught between the wall surface of the passage 580b and the game ball B, and the movable piece 592 will not be subjected to a strong force by the game ball B, and the durability of the movable piece 592 will be reduced or damaged due to the collision of the game ball B. can be suppressed.

Thus, since the ball removal movable piece 592 can be made difficult to break, more game balls B can be discharged to the island facility side on the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b more quickly, so the increase in the time required for replacement, maintenance, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

In addition, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b through the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, which is narrower than the game ball B. Therefore, when the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 projecting into the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball extracting movable piece 592 when moving to the outside through the space a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving to the outside by the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a which is narrower than the game ball B.

Since the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the subsequent movement of the ball removal movable piece 592 is due to inertia force, so that a strong force does not act on the ball removal movable piece 592, and the ball removal movable piece 592 can be made difficult to be damaged, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide can be made difficult to break. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated to the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is attached from behind to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550 . The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610 . The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 includes a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 attached to the dispensing base 551 and having an open rear side, a box-shaped upper full-tank cover 602 attached to the rear side of the upper full-tank base 601 and having an open front side, and a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full-tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full-tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in a front view, and has a back cover attachment portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 has an upper top surface near the left end in front view and extends downward along the left side to a height of about 2/3 of the total height. An upper ball storage path 600b communicates with the upper discharged ball receiving path 600a and extends rightward in front view by about 3/4 of the total width and extends downward to about 1/6 of the total height. An upper normal discharge passage 600c extending downward from the left-right center of the upper ball storage passage 600b in the front view and opening downward on the bottom surface, an upper full-fill discharge passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal discharge passage 600c and extending downward from the left-right center of the upper ball storage passage 600b in the front view and opening downward on the bottom surface, opening upward near the right end of the top surface when viewed from the front and extending substantially vertically downward and then extending substantially vertically to the right of the bottom surface. and an upper ball extraction passage 600e that opens downward near the end (see FIG. 91).

On the lower surface of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side in front view, an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full payout passage 600d, and an upper ball extraction passage 600e are arranged in order and open downward. When the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the upstream end of the upper dispensed ball receiving passage 600a is open directly below the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a in the dispensing device 580. As a result, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper putout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and is released downward from either the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full payout passage 600d. In addition, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank ball route unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87 and the like. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 and attached to the lower portion of the upper full ball path unit 600 . The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full ball path unit 610 has a lower normal dispensing passage 610a, a lower full dispensing passage 610b, and a lower ball removing passage 610c. and a payout passage open/close door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full payout passage 610b, and a closing spring 614 biasing the payout passage open/close door 613 in the direction of closing the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

The lower full ball path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c arranged in order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end, and the upstream end of each is opened upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b extend forward side by side and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball passage unit 610. As shown in FIG. The lower full-fill dispensing passage 610b extends forward while being slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower ball extraction passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full-tank dispensing passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the middle in the front-rear direction.

The payout passage open/close door 613 is rotatably mounted between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b. The payout passage open/close door 613 is biased clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state closes the front end openings (downstream end openings) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 has an operating protrusion 613a protruding forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed in a short circular arc shape centering on the center of rotation of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and the front end surface is inclined so as to protrude forward as it approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. The operating protrusion 613a is formed to contact the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4. As shown in FIG.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the lower normal dispensing passage 610a, the lower full dispensing path 610b, and the lower ball removing path 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal dispensing path 600c, the upper full dispensing path 600d, and the upper ball removing path 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600, respectively. As a result, the game balls B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flow through the lower normal payout passage 610a, the game balls B discharged downward from the upper full payout passage 600d flow through the lower full payout passage 610b, and the game balls B discharged downward from the upper ball discharge passage 600e flow through the lower ball discharge passage 610c.

In addition, the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, and the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are opened in the door frame 3 immediately after the through ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b of the foul cover unit 150. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball removal guide portion 627 opened leftward in the base unit 620b of the board unit 620. As shown in FIG.

In the normal state (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4), the lower full-tank ball path unit 610 rotates counterclockwise in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614 by contacting the operating projection 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 with the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are open, and communicate with the through ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b of the foul cover unit 150.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing abutting portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated clockwise in front view by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game balls B will not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of Game Ball B in Payout Unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the body frame. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 in the state assembled to the body frame 4 . In a normal state, the ball extraction lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is positioned at the lower end to close the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the dispensing passage 580a at the branched portion. Further, in the lower full-tank ball path unit 610, the dispensing passage open/close door 613 is in an open state.

A ball tank 552 opened upward is supplied with a predetermined number of game balls B from a game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on detection of a ball runout by a ball runout detection sensor 574 of a ball guidance unit 570. - 特許庁The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 and sent through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580.例文帳に追加When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout vane 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout vane 589.例文帳に追加

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570 a of the ball guide unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573 , and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573 . As a result, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589 .

In this state, when the payout vane 589 is rotated clockwise by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodation part 589b moves clockwise in the back view and is released downstream of the payout vane 589 in the payout passage 580a. After being detected by the payout detection sensor 591, the game ball B released from the payout vane 589 (ball housing portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The game balls B sent to the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 normally flow down to the upper normal pay-out passage 600c arranged directly under the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b. Then, the game balls B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c pass through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and are discharged into the upper tray 201 from the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 of the plate unit 200.

When a large number of game balls B are put out from the payout device 580 and the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a. 0a also accumulates in the upper normal dispensing passage 600c of the upper full ball path unit 600 communicating with 0a on the upstream side. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are further paid out, the game balls B start to stay in the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c, and the game balls B start to flow down to the upper full payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full ball payout passage 600d passes through the lower full ball payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 and is received by the full ball receiving opening 150b of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. After that, the game ball B received by the full ball socket 150b is discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball outlet 150d, and the lower tray ball supply opening 211c of the tray unit base 211. Thereby, when the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are put out, the game balls B can be automatically put out to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

When the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and the game balls B are further dispensed, the game balls B are retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. Then, when a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 is moved and detected by the full-fill detection sensor 154, and the player is informed that the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are full of game balls B (for example, "Please remove the ball!"), and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily turned on until the full-fill detection sensor 154 becomes non-detected. stop automatically.

When the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 are ejected from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball extraction lever 593 of the payout device 580 is slid upward from the position of the lower end to the position of the upper end. After that, the lower end side of the ball removal movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in the rear view, and the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a and is pushed out to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball extraction passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball extraction passage 580b.

At this time, at the position of the ball extraction movable piece 592, the falling game ball B contacts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball extraction movable piece 592, so the ball extraction movable piece 592 is less likely to be damaged.

Then, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After being released from the downstream end opening of the lower ball extraction passage 610c to the ball extraction guide portion 627 of the board unit 620, it passes through the ejected ball receiving portion 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the pachinko machine. 1 (island equipment side of the game hall).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96 and the like. FIG. 92(a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and FIG. 92(b) is a rear perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 93 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from below. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. FIG. 96 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 .

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board placing portion 501c, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from behind, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, and a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c. and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover part of the payout control unit 620d from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a includes a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board placing portion 501c, a main body frame speaker 622 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 near the left end in a front view and facing forward, and a container-shaped speaker box 623 that is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened forward.

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed by a plurality of vertically extending slits that pass through in the front-rear direction near the left end in front view, a space front recess 621b recessed on the right side of the speaker mounting portion 621a in front view so as to bulge forward from the rear, and a connection portion 621c that protrudes downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b, extends in the left-right direction, and opens obliquely downward and rearward. and has.

The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side so as to face forward. The connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs low frequencies.

The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container that is open forward, the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes rearward the most, and is formed so that the rearward projection becomes smaller in a stepwise manner toward the right side in front view. As a result, a sufficient space can be secured on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 when viewed from the front, so that the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620 a forms part of an enclosure 624 that encloses the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623 . In the enclosure 624, the speaker cover 621 is provided with a space front concave portion 621b that bulges forward on the right side of the speaker mounting portion 621a in a front view. Therefore, even if the speaker box 623 is formed in a stepped shape so that the rearward projection amount decreases as the speaker box 623 goes to the right, a sufficiently wide space on the right side of the main body frame speaker 622 is ensured.

In the speaker unit 620a, when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connection cylinder part 43a so as to sandwich the sealing member 48, and the space behind the body frame speaker 622 and the curtain board inner space 40a of the outer frame 2 are in communication. Therefore, the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front panel member 42, and the rear panel member 43 can form a wide enclosure 624 on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, and the sound output to the rear of the main panel speaker 622 can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the front panel member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) extends to the right in a front view with a relatively large depth, and is communicated with the outer frame lower assembly 40 via the connecting portion 621c and the connecting tube portion 43a. The transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the front panel member 42 .

At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a phase-inverted state, so that the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 resonates so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, a large sound with deep bass can be output.

In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds. As a result, the player can hear the sound having a rich bass by the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2.例文帳に追加

In addition, the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a has a through hole 621d that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b. When assembled into the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other, and the enclosure 624 is independent. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through-hole 621d and the through-cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a rear base 626 attached to the rear side of the front base 625 and having the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear surface.

In addition, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with a front base 625 and a rear base 626, and includes a ball ejection guide portion 627 that receives the game ball B released from the lower ball ejection passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and guides it to the right in front view, a discharge ball receiving portion 628 that opens upward on the right side in front view downstream of the ball ejection guide portion 627 and receives the game ball B ejected downward from the game board 5, and a ball ejection guide. A ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game ball B that has passed through the portion 627 and the discharge ball receiving portion 628 downward.

The ball ejection guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens leftward on the upper left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end that opens to the left end side of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 . The ball extraction guide part 627 is assembled in the main body frame 4, and the upstream end opening is opposed to the downstream end opening of the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, and the lower ball extraction passage 610c.

The ejected ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends laterally. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627 at the left end in front view, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B drawn from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right side in front view by the ball drawing guide part 627 and the discharged ball receiving part 628, and then discharges it downward from the ball discharge port 629, so that it is possible to easily secure a wide space on the left side from the center in the horizontal direction in front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer bass than that of the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover 631 attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (see FIG. 96). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to the pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 or the payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5, etc., and pays out the designated number of game balls B to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that traces of opening and closing remain. This makes it possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, thereby increasing the deterrence against fraud.

The interface unit 620e includes a substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and an interface substrate cover 636 attached to the substrate base 634 so as to cover the rear side of the interface substrate 635.

The circuit board base 634 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 623 at a portion that protrudes most rearward to the rear of the body-frame speaker 622 . The interface board 635 is connected to one end (body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503 . The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends rightward in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. back cover]
The back cover 640 of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. FIG. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501 b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 . The back cover 640 has its right side in a front view attached to the rear end of the vertically extending rearwardly extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable about the vertically extending axis, and its left side attached to the back cover attaching portion 551i of the dispensing base 551 and the back cover attaching portion 601a of the upper full-tank ball path unit 600.

The rear cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward when viewed from the front, and the rear surface thereof is formed so as to be positioned substantially flush with the rear surface of the upper portion 551d of the rear plate of the payout base 551 when assembled to the body frame 4.例文帳に追加The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the body frame 4 can be seen from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 .

[4-10. locking unit]
Locking unit 650 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 97(a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and FIG. 97(b) is a back perspective view of the locking unit. The locking unit 650 is attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame 4 and locks the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 .

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side of the rearwardly extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of being locked with the door frame 3, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and capable of being locked with the outer frame 2, and a front lower portion of the unit base 651 protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 for locking the door frame. and a transmission cylinder 654 for vertically moving the hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 .

The locking unit 650 also includes a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from a position above the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651 and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the body frame 4 , a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 , transmission cylinders 654 , and outer frame unlocking levers 656 protrude forward from the front surface of the body frame base 501 . The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501, and when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front end engages with the rotation transmission member 133 of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3, and the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are engaged with the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality of (two) outer frame hooks 653 are engaged with the upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated counterclockwise in front view, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 are moved upward through a transmission cylinder 654, and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the body frame 4.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in a front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654 to unlock the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 . When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 4 , sliding the outer frame unlocking lever 656 downward moves the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 downward to unlock the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 . Thus, locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the front end sides of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined so as to be narrow. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the hooking member 25 , it is locked by the biasing force of the lock spring 655 .

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper portion of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 98 to 105. FIG. FIG. 98(a) is a plan view of the body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a). FIG. 99 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper portion of the perspective view of the body frame as viewed from behind. FIG. 100(a) is a perspective view of the sphere tank assembled with tank rails and the like as viewed from above, and FIG. 100(b) is a perspective view of FIG. 100(a) viewed from below. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 100(a) exploded and viewed from the front. FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing a region in which game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper portion of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour path in the upper part of the body frame. FIG. 105 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind the hinge side.

As described above, the body frame 4 has a frame-shaped body frame base 501 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and is detachably and rotatably attached to the outer frame 2 by the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 so as to be able to support the outer periphery of the game board 5, an inverted L-shaped payout base 551 attached along the front view upper side and left side on the rear side of the body frame base 501, and the payout base 551. A sphere tank 552 that is attached and extends horizontally and has a box shape (container shape) that opens upward; a tank rail 553 that is attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 and extends leftward in a groove shape that opens upward; a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553; A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the covers 555, a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the payout base 551 and for putting out the game balls B to the player side are provided.

The sphere tank 552 has a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction when viewed from above, and has a bottom wall 552a inclined so that the left side is lower when viewed from the front, a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward from the front and rear sides of the bottom wall 552a, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a. formed. The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is cut from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f extends from the left side wall 552d end of the front wall 552b toward the opposite side (right side wall 552e side) of the front wall 552b over a length of about 3/4 of the left-right length of the front wall 552b.

The tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 on the right end side (upstream side) when viewed from the front, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552 . The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a which extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction orthogonal to the direction of circulation of the game ball B. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. Further, the main guiding portion 553a is formed in a crank shape extending from the right end to a position of about 1/10 of the total length in the horizontal direction from the right end in a plan view parallel to the axis extending in the horizontal direction from the right end side to the left, then obliquely extending from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the horizontal direction so as to move rearward toward the left, and extending from there to the left end in parallel with the axis extending in the horizontal direction. The main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 has a portion that extends from the left end to the right in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction and extends to the upper end with the same width. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the passage through which the game ball B circulates becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) in the part where the upper side is closed, and the downstream end is formed to a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) that allows only one game ball B to circulate.

In addition, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guiding portion 553a from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and has a bulging portion 553b that bulges out wider than the width of the main guiding portion 553a so that a plurality of game balls B are lined up in the width direction orthogonal to the direction of circulation of the game balls B, and that the width direction narrows from the upstream end toward the downstream side and changes to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. By this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as it goes downstream. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end toward the main guiding portion 553a downward. Thus, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing in the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction is aligned in a row toward the downstream side and downward side.

The center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is arranged on the inner side, and the bulging portion 553b is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is located above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 has a slightly chamfered corner at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. As a result, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b acts changes in various directions depending on the position of the bulging portion 553b in contact with the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends constantly, the game ball B flowing through the bulging portion 553b is always subjected to reaction force in a fixed direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b, making it difficult to disperse the reaction force. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b is formed as a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. By dispersing the directions in which the plurality of game balls B flowing inside are pushed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball jamming (ball jamming) can be prevented.

The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material so that the inside can be seen from the outside. As a result, even if ball clogging (ball jam) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the clogged place can be specified quickly. Therefore, the clogging of the balls in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, so that the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of clogging of the balls can be shortened as much as possible, and the loss of the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from behind through the tank rail 553. Therefore, when a problem occurs in the movement of the movable performance unit of the game board 5, the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be confirmed while the game board 5 is still attached to the main body frame 4, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

The body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552 and extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (the left side in the front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction extends outward (leftward) from the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game balls B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is inclined to be higher. The surface portion 501m extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b in which the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is inclined to be low, and the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left and right direction is inclined to be low. and a detour passage 552g for guiding.

In addition, the body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 among the left and right outer sides of the detour passage 552g. An external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear, and a terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558) and extending horizontally at a position higher than the overflow surface portion 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the body frame base 501 . The overflow surface portion 501m extends backward from a position two to four times the outer diameter of the game ball B from the upper side of the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, in a flat plate shape. The overflow surface portion 501m has a length in the left-right direction of about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in a front view is positioned to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction from the left end of the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the height from the front end to the rear end is about half the outer diameter of the game ball B. This overflow surface portion 501m forms a gap of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame upper member 30 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 .

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and extends in the front-rear direction in a band shape with the upper end higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o and the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o. , and a plurality of ribs 501p arranged in a row at intervals narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B in the horizontal direction. The left step portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. In addition, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end right corner is slightly lower when viewed from the front. The right stepped portion 501o is longer in the left-right direction than in the front-rear direction. Further, the right stepped portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

A plurality of ribs 501p of the body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the clearance between the outer frame 2 and the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 is formed to a height narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

The main body frame base 501 is assembled in the main body frame 4, and in front of the front view, the right end of the cross -style section 501m matches the right end of the cross -style 552F in the ball tank 552, and the left end of the 552 g of the 552 g is the left end of the 552 g of the 552 g of the 501m of the cross -style section. It matches, and the right end of the right step 501O matches the right side wall 552E of the ball tank 552 and the left and right direction.

The detour passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. As shown in FIG. In the following, the container-shaped area surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is simply referred to as the sphere tank 552 as well. The detour passage 552g extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in a flat plate shape, and has a passage surface 552h that slopes so that the front end is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is lower. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 at the left end side (dam portion 552i side) of the rear end side in a front view, and extends obliquely so as to move forward as it goes from the left end side to the right end side. In addition, the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be horizontally inclined in the horizontal direction.

The detour passage 552g has a rear end extending along the front end side of a portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a state assembled to the body frame 4 and extending obliquely in the left-right direction. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour passage 552g changes its circulation direction from the slanted rear end so as to be perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The obliquely extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 (distribution direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is released from the rear end of the detour passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the circulation direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the game ball B from the detour passage 552g can be received at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. In addition, since the game balls B are supplied from the detour passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a substantially vertical direction (perpendicular direction) to the circulation direction of the game balls B, it is possible to make it difficult for the game balls B from the detour passage 552g to clog the tank rail 553.

Since the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so as to move rearward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, when the game ball B is released from the detour passage 552g toward the tank rail 553, the obliquely extending rear end of the detour passage 552g can release the game ball B to the upstream side where the width is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrowed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball worms inside.

In addition, the portion where the game ball B is guided by the detour passage 552g corresponds to the rear portion of the left wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outer left portion of the rear wall 552c of the tank rail 553 in front view. A game ball B that passes under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) from inside the ball tank 552 flows through this portion. Therefore, at the rear part of the detour passage 552g in the tank rail 553, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction does not exceed the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (height of the wall of the tank rail 553). Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 on the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour 552g, a space (empty) capable of stacking the game balls B upward can be secured.

The sphere tank 552 has a flat plate-shaped guide surface portion 552j that extends downward to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f of the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j extends obliquely rearward from the left end of the front wall 552b to about 1/9 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction and about 1/2 of the total length of the left wall 552d in the front-rear direction from the left end of the front wall 552b. It extends to the vicinity of the wall 552c, and extends parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c.

The sphere tank 552 has an opening 552k penetrating vertically in a region surrounded by a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-described shape and the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side and the rear wall 552c side in a plan view. In addition, the ball tank 552 has flat plate-like flange portions 552l extending laterally outward and vertically on the same plane as the front wall 552b at the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the detour passage 552g. In the ball tank 552, the upper edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edge of the two flange portions 552l are higher than the upper edges of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (upper surfaces of the left stepped portion 501n and the right stepped portion 501o of the main body frame base 501).

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled together, the upstream end of the tank rail 553 (right end in front view) is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552 . Further, the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side thereof are positioned (protruded) behind the ball tank 552 . The rear end side of the left detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is positioned at the front end of the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. As shown in FIG. The discharge portion 551j extends rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side of the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 so as to be lowered in steps from a height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 in the state assembled to the main body frame 4, and then leftward along the tank rail 553 at a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (second rail cover 5). 55 in the left-right direction) and then extends rearward.

The external terminal plate 558 has a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a arranged in the lateral direction on the rear surface thereof. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the gripping portion can be opened by operating a lever to grip the tip of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554 , the second rail cover 555 and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state assembled to the body frame 4 . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. As shown in FIG. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552. As shown in FIG.

Next, the function and effect of the upper portion of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the bypass passage 552g are inclined such that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are lowered, as indicated by the white arrows in FIG. Also, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are inclined so that the left end side thereof becomes lower when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lowered.

Then, when the amount of the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases by being supplied from the island equipment, first of all, it is possible to flow out to the outside (forward) of the ball tank 552 beyond the lowest overflow portion 552f of the upper edge of the outer periphery, and the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can escape to the overflow surface portion 501m, and the game balls flowed out from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m ahead. B can be returned into the sphere tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface 501m (see FIG. 103). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from increasing further in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pushing each other (increase in ball pressure) in the ball tank 552, and to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball jam) due to the engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552.例文帳に追加

Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 104, the game balls B overflowing the overflow surface portion 501m from the ball tank 552 can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from exerting a strong backward pressure on the game balls B in the ball tank 552, thereby preventing clogging of the game balls B in the ball tank 552.例文帳に追加In addition, since the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g, it is possible to prevent the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the body frame 4. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to avoid the problem that the game ball B spilled outside the body frame 4 is caught between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and the body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Further, part of the game balls B overflowing the overflow surface portion 501m from the ball tank 552 can be guided downstream of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and since the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position along the left side away from the ball tank 552, the flow (pressure) of the game balls B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g is directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. It is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

In addition, since the height of the upper edge of the outer circumference of the ball tank 552 other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than the height of the overflow portion 552f, the upper edge of the left wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the ball tank 552 between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, the game ball B flowing from the overflow surface portion 501m to the detour passage 552g after overflowing from the ball tank 552 over the overflow portion 552f to the overflow surface portion 501m can be prevented from returning from the detour passage 552g to the ball tank 552 side by being blocked by the left wall 552d on one side of the ball tank 552, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552g side can be prevented from returning to the ball tank 5. It is possible to prevent clogging of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 by pressing the game balls B in the ball tank 52 .

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is higher than the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). As a result, it is possible to prevent the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) of the detour passage 552g, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552g can be made to flow in a constant direction from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side to the tank rail 553 on the rear end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided to the tank rail 553 from the detour passage 552g can be made in a constant direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pushing and biting each other due to the different directions of the pressure applied to the game balls B in the tank rail 553, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B can be prevented.

Further, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a and are arranged in a row in the left-right direction. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is provided with a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged in a portion where the upper side is open, the game balls B released from the rear end of the detour passage 552g can be reliably received, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

In addition, since the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction narrows from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guide portion 553a, a plurality of game balls B can be aligned in the width direction as they move toward the downstream side in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, since the part of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the passage through which the game balls B circulate becomes lower toward the downstream end, a plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction on the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) can be circulated downstream through the part of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed, so that the number of stages in the height direction can be reduced and they can be arranged in a line. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide a plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row.

Furthermore, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and since the tank rail 553 is provided with the bulging portion 553b, the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, so that more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

In addition, since an external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected and a terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558) are provided on the opposite side of the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j in between, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k are kept away from the ball tank 552 to which the game balls B are supplied from the island equipment. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island equipment bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface part 501m, it is possible to make it difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminal 558a, etc., and the contact of the game ball B will not cause a short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring.

In addition, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to get on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. It is possible to make it easier to avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 103) due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game ball B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, and prevent the game ball B from clogging in the ball tank 552.

In addition, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface 501m and rides on the left stepped portion 501n and the right stepped portion 501o on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g by the inclinations thereof as shown in FIG. It is possible to prevent problems from occurring due to dripping.

When the game balls B flow from the ball tank 552 to the side of the tank rail 553, the game balls B pass under the guide surface part 552j, so that the amount (height) of the game balls B stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 can be regulated by the guide surface part 552j so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface part 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) capable of stacking the game balls B upward can be secured, and the game balls B guided by the detour passage 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, the game ball B will not be received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B can be prevented from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[4-12-1. Second embodiment of tank rail, etc.]
Next, a second embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 110 and the like. FIG. 106 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine provided with the tank rails and the like of the second embodiment, viewed from behind and showing an enlarged portion of the tank rails. Fig. 107(a) is a plan view showing the assembled state of the tank rail and the like of Fig. 106 together with the ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of (a) as seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like of (a) as seen from the rear. Fig. 108(a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in Fig. 107 and viewed from the front, and Fig. 108(b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in Fig. 107 and viewed from the rear. FIG. 109 is a sectional view of the tank rail and the like taken along the carka line in FIG. 107(a). FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the tank rail of FIG. 107 in cross section. The tank rail 553A of the second embodiment, which is different from the above, differs from the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 of the above embodiment in the tank rail 553A, the first rail cover 554A, the second rail cover 555A, and the ball straightening member 556A.

The tank rail 553A of this embodiment rectifies the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 and delivers them to the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560 . The tank rail 553A extends leftward in a groove shape that opens upward. A first rail cover 554A is attached to the tank rail 553A so as to close the upper end side, a second rail cover 555A is provided on the left side of the first rail cover 554A when viewed from the front, and a ball straightening member 556A is provided on the upper side of the second rail cover 555A.

As shown in FIG. 107(a) and the like, the tank rail 553A has a meandering portion 553c meandering in the front-rear direction downstream of the bulging portion 553b. The circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c. The first rail cover 554A is attached upstream (on the ball tank 552 side) of the meandering portion 553c.

The second rail cover 555A extends in the left-right direction so as to cover the open upper end of the tank rail 553A from the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in front view) including the meandering portion 553c. The second rail cover 555A has a plate-shaped cover portion 555a that closes the upper end of the tank rail 553A, a pair of protective walls 555b that extend upward from both front and rear ends of the cover portion 555a on the upstream side from the center in the left-right direction, and an opening 555c that penetrates the cover portion 555a between the pair of protective walls 555b. The pair of protective walls 555b are formed in a meandering shape following the meandering portion 553c of the tank rail 553A at the portion where the meandering portion 553c is provided. Straightening pieces 556a of a ball straightening member 556A, which will be described later, are inserted through the openings 555c from above.

The ball rectifying member 556A extends back and forth at its upstream end side and is attached rotatably around an axis. The ball straightening member 556A is provided above the cover portion 555a of the second rail cover 555A and between the pair of protective walls 555b. The ball rectifying member 556A abuts on the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the tank rail 553A from above, thereby breaking the tiers of the game balls B so as to facilitate aligning them in a row, and suppressing the fast movement of the uppermost game balls B to the downstream side to prevent the occurrence of ball biting on the downstream side of the tank rail 553A.

According to the tank rail 553A and the like of this embodiment, in the assembled state, the ball straightening member 556A is positioned between the pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A and below the upper ends of the protective walls 555b. As a result, the electric wire (indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 106) connected to the wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal plate 558 provided on the front upper side of the portion of the tank rail 553A to which the ball straightening member 556A is attached can be prevented from contacting the ball straightening member 556A from above. By the way, if the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a contacts the ball rectifying member 556A from above, the weight of the electric wire may prevent the ball rectifying member 556A from rotating upward even if the game ball B contacts the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the contact of the electric wire connected to the wire connection terminal 558a with the ball straightening member 556A. Therefore, when the game ball B comes into contact with the straightening piece 556a of the ball straightening member 556A, the ball straightening member 556A can be rotated upward, and the straightening action can be sufficiently exerted to prevent the occurrence of ball jamming and ball clogging in the tank rail 553A. I can.

Further, since the meandering portion 553c is provided on the tank rail 553A, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c. By the way, in the tank rail 553A whose height becomes narrower toward the downstream side, if the upper game ball B among the game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages moves first to the downstream side, the ball is likely to be caught. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the meandering portion 553c can suppress the circulation speed of the game ball B, so that the upper game ball B can be suppressed from moving downstream first, and the occurrence of ball biting can be reduced.

In addition, as described above, the protective wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A prevents the electric wires from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A to prevent ball clogging. Therefore, the tank rail 553A can be arranged near the terminal plate (for example, the external terminal plate 558) or the control board to which many electric wires are connected, or the terminal plate or the control board to which many electric wires are connected can be arranged near the tank rail 553A. 552) and a pinball machine 1 with a high degree of freedom in arranging terminal boards and the like.

[4-12-2. Third embodiment of tank rail etc.]
Next, a third embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 111 to 118 and the like. FIG. 111 is a perspective view showing the body frame provided with the tank rail and the like of the third embodiment, with the tank rail portion enlarged, as seen from the rear right. FIG. 112 is a perspective view showing the body frame provided with the tank rail and the like of the third embodiment, with the tank rail portion enlarged, as viewed from the rear left. FIG. 113(a) is a rear view of the body frame showing an enlarged portion of the external terminal plate, and FIG. 113(b) is a left side view of the body frame showing an enlarged upper portion. 114(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 113(b), and FIG. 114(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 113(a). FIG. 115 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail in FIG. 114(b). 116(a) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of the third embodiment as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) as seen from the upper right rear, and (c) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) as seen from the lower right rear. FIG. 117 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. 116 and viewed from the front, and FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. 116 and viewed from the rear.

The tank rail etc. of the third embodiment has the structure of the tank rail etc. of the first embodiment (the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball straightening member 556, and the ball stop member 557), with a protective cover 559 covering the ball straightening member 556 from above.

The tank rail or the like of this embodiment includes a ball tank 552 that is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and that is open upward in a box shape that extends left and right, and a tank rail 553 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side of the portion extending left and right of the payout base 551, is open upward, and extends leftward in a groove shape.

The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length in the left-right direction approximately half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-rear direction shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a rightward position in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is formed in such a shape that it extends obliquely to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552 so that the depth in the front-rear direction extends from a depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B to approximately one depth, and then the depth in the front-rear direction extends straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The left end opening of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560 .

The tank rail 553 is inclined such that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left is lower at a steeper angle than the bottom with respect to the horizontal so that the height of the left end is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B.例文帳に追加The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a.

The tank rail 553 is formed with a plurality of openings 553d through which dirt, dust, etc., in the tank rail 553 can drop on the bottom surface of a portion extending straight to the left (a portion whose height decreases toward the downstream side). These openings 553d are provided at portions below a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, and a ball straightening member 556, which will be described later. The opening 553d is opened downward and rearward of the tank rail 553, extends to the left and right, and is formed in a size that the game ball B cannot pass through. When the game ball B exists on the tank rail 553, a part of the game ball B can be directly visually recognized from behind through the opening 553d. Also, the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be touched by the operator's finger, a thin stick, or the like through the opening 553d. As a result, ball clogging occurring at that portion can be eliminated through the opening 553d. In addition, through the opening 553d, the ball straightening member 556 can be lifted through the game ball B of the relevant portion, and the operation of the ball straightening member 556 can be confirmed.

A first rail cover 554 is located to the left of the sphere tank 552 and extends leftward at a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 554 closes a predetermined range from the right end to the left of the portion. A ball straightening member 556 provided at a portion, a ball stop member 557 provided near the left end of the lower surface of the tank rail 553, and a protective cover 559 covering the upper half of the second rail cover 555 in the left and right direction by straddling the ball straightening member 556 from the middle of the left and right direction of the first rail cover 554.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight leftward. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from widening or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 .

The ball straightening member 556 is attached at a portion between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553 so that the end on the first rail cover 554 side can rotate about an axis extending in the longitudinal direction. The ball rectifying member 556 has rectifying pieces 556a projecting into the tank rail 553 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114(a), etc.).

By the way, in the tank rail 553, the game balls B piled up and down are arranged in one row, but when the piled game balls B are reduced from two rows to one row, if the game balls B on the upper row try to overtake the game balls B on the lower row, the game balls B may mesh with each other and become stuck (so-called ball clogging). On the other hand, in the ball rectifying member 556 of the present embodiment, when the game balls B flow in the tank rail 553 in the upper and lower stages, the game balls B on the upper side come into contact with the rectifying pieces 556a, and the flow of the game balls B slows down, thereby preventing the game balls B on the lower side from being overtaken. As a result, the game balls B on the lower side first move to the downstream side, and the game balls B on the upper side move after that, so that the game balls B can be aligned in one row. At this time, since the game ball B on the upper side presses the straightening piece 556a from below, the ball straightening member 556 moves so that the straightening piece 556a moves upward, and the game ball B on the upper side can be pressed downward by its own weight. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging at a portion (a portion whose height decreases toward the downstream).

The ball stop member 557 is mounted slidably in the left-right direction near the left end in front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553, and by sliding it leftward, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, and the game balls B can be prevented from flowing to the payout unit side downstream from the tank rail 553.

The protective cover 559 has a strip-shaped top plate portion 559a extending left and right, a flat plate-shaped rear plate portion 559b extending downward from part of the rear side of the top plate portion 559a, a flat plate-shaped front plate portion 559c extending downward from the front and left sides of the top plate portion 559a, and a flat plate-shaped guide plate portion 559d extending forward from the front plate portion 559c. The top plate portion 559a and the guide plate portion 559d are inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The guide plate portion 559d is formed such that the left side of the top plate portion 559a wraps around from the front side to the left, and the rear end of this portion coincides with the rear end of the top plate portion 559a in the front-rear direction.

The protective cover 559 is positioned so that the top plate portion 559a covers the upper portion from the middle of the first rail cover 554 in the left-right direction to the middle of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction in a state assembled to the main body frame 4, forms a space between the protective cover 559 and the ball straightening member 556, and allows the ball straightening member 556 to swing up and down. The rear plate portion 559b extends to a position below the upper end of the tank rail 553 so as to cover the rear of the ball straightening member 556. As shown in FIG.

The front plate portion 559 c extends rightward from the top plate portion 559 a at its right end, and extends to the ball tank 552 along the tank rail 553 . The guide plate portion 559d projects forward from the front plate portion 559c with a length larger than the diameter of the game ball B, and is formed to guide the game ball B leftward. The guide plate portion 559d is inclined more gently than the upper end of the tank rail 553 is inclined. The front end of the guide plate portion 559d forms a slight gap between the rear surface of the payout base 551 and the game ball B, which cannot enter.

The protective cover 559 can prevent contact with the ball straightening member 556 from the outside in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. The operation of the ball rectifying member 556 can be confirmed by inserting a thin rod into the opening 553d of the tank rail 553 and contacting it from below, or by pushing the game ball B in the tank rail 553 upward with the operator's finger or the like through the opening 553d, thereby lifting the game ball B.

In addition, the protective cover 559 can guide the game ball B, which has entered behind the external terminal plate 558 for some reason, to the left by the guide plate portion 559 d to discharge it outside the left side surface of the body frame 4 .

In this embodiment, the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball straightening member 556, the protective cover 559, etc. are made of a transparent material, and the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be visually recognized from the outside.

In addition, since the upper side of the tank rail 553 is covered with the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559, it is possible to prevent dirt, dust, etc. from entering the tank rail 553 from above.

In addition, since the top of the tank rail 553 is covered by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the protective cover 559, the ball straightening member 556 and the game ball B cannot be touched from above. Therefore, if dirt or dust adheres to the game ball B or the like, it is necessary to remove the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the protective cover 559, and the like. More specifically, when dirt, dust, etc. are attached to the ball rectifying member 556 or the game ball B in the tank rail 553, the ball rectifying member 556 can be shaken via the game ball B or the game ball B by touching the game ball B inside through the opening 553d, so that the dirt, dust, etc. attached to the game ball B can be dropped. Garbage, dust, etc. dropped from the game ball B or the like can be discharged to the outside through the opening 553d.

By the way, in the body frame 4, since the portion where the tank rail 553 extends to the left with a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction is provided behind the external terminal plate 558, when the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal plate 558 contacts the ball rectifying member 556 from above, the weight of the electric wire may prevent the ball rectifying member 556 from rotating upward even if the game ball B contacts the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556. There is a possibility that the rectifying action of the game ball B by the sphere rectifying member 556 cannot be exhibited sufficiently.

In addition, since the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal plate 558 is connected to an electric wire whose tip is stripped, if the game ball B remains behind the external terminal plate 558 for some reason, the remaining game ball B may cause a short circuit if the connection (insertion) of the electric wire to the electric wire connection terminal 558a is insufficient.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the protective cover 559 covers the upper part of the ball straightening member 556, the protective cover 559 can prevent the electric wire connected to the wire connection terminal 558a from contacting the ball straightening member 556. Thus, when the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556, the ball rectifying member 556 can be rotated upward, and the rectifying action can be sufficiently exerted to prevent the occurrence of ball jamming and ball clogging in the tank rail 553.

By the way, when an electric wire is pulled out from the external terminal plate 558 for some reason and its tip touches the game ball B existing behind the external terminal plate 558, the computer in the game hall cannot receive necessary information due to the occurrence of a short circuit, resulting in an error in counting in the game hall. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the protective cover 559 is provided with the guide plate portion 559d, the game ball B that has entered the rear of the external terminal plate 558 for some reason can be guided leftward and discharged outside the left side surface of the body frame 4. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from remaining behind the external terminal plate 558, thereby preventing the occurrence of a short due to the remaining game ball B. Therefore, a pachinko machine 1 capable of suppressing the occurrence of counting errors in the game hall by making it possible for the computer (hall computer) of the game hall to surely receive the necessary information by avoiding the short circuit of the electric wire can be provided.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the guide plate portion 559d of the protective cover 559 discharges the game ball B to the left side of the main body frame 4, so that the game ball B can be prevented from coming into contact with various electric wires and wires provided on the rear side of the main body frame 4, causing disconnection or short circuit.

[4-13. Another Embodiment of Substrate Unit]
Subsequently, a substrate unit 620A of another embodiment (second embodiment) different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 119 to 124 and the like. 119(a) is a front view of a board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) viewed from the front right, and (c) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) viewed from the front left. 120(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) viewed from the lower right rear. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) as seen from the front, and FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119(a) as seen from the rear. 123(a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Keke line in FIG. 119(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Ku-ke line in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Keke line in (a). FIG. 124 is a bottom view showing a portion behind the door frame in the pachinko machine having the board unit of FIG. 119(a).

The board unit 620A of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear surface of the body frame base unit 500 in place of the board unit 620 described above. In the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 is significantly different from the base unit 620b of the board unit 620 described above. Here, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those of the board unit 620 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The board unit 620A includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board placing portion 501c, a base unit 660 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 660, and a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c. , and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover part of the payout control unit 620d from the rear.

The base unit 660 includes a front base 661 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, a rear base 662 attached to the rear side of the front base 661 and having the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear surface, and provided between the front base 661 and the rear base 662. An out ball passage 663 through which the game balls B ejected downward from the game board 5 circulates, and a game ball through the out ball passage 663. An out sensor 664 for detecting game balls B one by one, a ball extraction guide section 627 for receiving game balls B released from a lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and guiding them to the right in front view, a ball extraction discharge passage 665 provided behind the out ball passage 663 in the rear base 662, and a rear base so as to close the rear side of the ball extraction discharge passage 665. and a passageway wall member 666 attached to 662 .

The front base 661 is formed in the shape of a box that is open forward and elongated in the left and right directions. The rear base 662 has a flat plate-shaped partition wall portion 662a that extends left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction. An out-ball passage 663 and a ball removal guide portion 627 are formed on the front side of the partition wall portion 662a, and a ball removal discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a. The rear base 662 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a.

In the base unit 660, a front base 661, a rear base 662, and a passage wall member 666 are made of transparent members. Accordingly, the ball removal guide portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 are also formed transparent. Therefore, the inside of the ball removal guiding portion 627, the out-ball passage 663, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 can be well viewed from the upper or lower side of the base unit 660, making it easy to check ball clogging or the like.

The out-ball passage 663 is formed on the front side of a flat plate-like partition wall portion 662a extending left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction of the rear base 662, with the front end being open, and the open front end being closed by the front base 661.

The out-ball passage 663 includes a ball discharge receiving portion 663a that is open upward at a substantially central position in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1 and extends left and right, an out-ball straightening portion 663b that rectifies the game balls B received by the ball discharge receiving portion 663a into a line while making the game balls B meander greatly in the left-right direction, a downward guiding portion 663c that guides the game balls B straightened into a line downward by the out-ball straightening portion 663b, and a downward guiding portion 663. It has an out ball discharge port 663d which is open downward at the lower end of the base unit 660 and discharges the game ball B downward from the lower surface of the base unit 660. As shown in FIG. An out-ball discharge port 663d of the out-ball passage 663 is provided behind the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 124).

The ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The ball discharge receiving portion 663a is inclined at a gentle angle so that the right end side is lowered.

The out-ball straightening portion 663b is inclined at a gentle angle from a position to the right of the right end of the discharged ball receiving portion 663a toward the lower side of the discharged ball receiving portion 663a so that the left end side is lower. In addition, the out ball straightening portion 663b has a depth in the front-rear direction that narrows toward the downstream side (leftward), and has a depth that is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B near the downstream end below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a. In addition, the portion of the out-ball straightening portion 663b that is left of the right end of the ball discharge receiving portion 663a has a lower vertical height toward the downstream side (left side), and is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B near the downstream end. As a result, the game balls B can be aligned in a row in the out-ball straightening section 663b.

The downward guiding portion 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b, which is below the ball discharge receiving portion 663a, and is slightly curved rearward in a crank shape midway in the vertical direction so that the front wall and the rear wall (partition wall portion) are flush with each other. Thereby, the downstream end (out ball discharge port 663 d ) of the downward guiding portion 663 c is located behind the front surface of the partition wall portion 662 a of the rear base 662 . An out-sensor 664 is provided upstream of the cranked portion of the downward guiding portion 663c. Since the downward guiding portion 663c is formed in a curved shape so that the portion bent in a crank shape does not have a portion extending in the horizontal direction, even if the game ball B passes through the out sensor 664 and hits the portion bent in the crank shape, it does not bounce upward to the side of the out sensor 664, and one game ball B can be prevented from being detected twice by the out sensor 664.

The out sensor 664 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch with high durability and long life because the game ball B passes frequently.

The ball discharge guide portion 627 is provided to the left of the ball discharge receiving portion 663 a in the out ball passage 663 . The ball removal guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens toward the left in the upper part of the left side surface when viewed from the front, and a downstream side that bends rearward and extends to the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662, and is connected to the upstream end of the ball removal discharge passage 665 (see FIG. 123(a), etc.).

The ball extraction discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a in the rear base 662. As shown in FIG. The ball discharge passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 while being open rearward, and the rear end side is closed by a passage wall member 666 . The rear end of the ball discharge passage 665 is located forward of the rear end of the rear base 662 by about one outer diameter of the game ball B. In other words, between the ball discharge path 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662, a gap corresponding to one game ball B or more is formed.

The upstream end (left end) of the ball discharge passage 665 is connected to the downstream end of the ball discharge guide portion 627. A lateral guide portion 665a extends rightward from the ball discharge receiver portion 663a with the same inclination as the ball discharge receiver portion 663a of the out ball passage 663. and a ball discharge port 665c that opens downward at the downstream end (lower end) of the . The ball discharge port 665c is provided slightly behind the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 124).

The ball removal passage 665 has a plurality of projections 665d alternately protruding inward at regular intervals in the vertical direction on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guiding portion 665b. In the ball discharge passage 665, the game ball B circulating in the vertical guide portion 665b extending vertically downward contacts the plurality of protrusions 665d alternately, so that the game ball B flows down in a zigzag pattern, thereby suppressing an increase in the circulation speed and suppressing the speed of the game ball B discharged downward from the ball discharge port 665c.

Since the ball discharge passage 665 is formed into a simple L-shaped passage by the horizontal guiding part 665a and the vertical guiding part 665b, when the ball removing lever 593 is operated to discharge the game balls B in the ball tank 552, many game balls B can be smoothly guided and discharged.

According to the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the game ball B struck into the game area 5a and discharged from the game board 5 is received by the ball discharge receiving part 663a of the out ball passage 663, detected by the out sensor 664, and discharged to the island facility side of the game hall. On the other hand, in order to discharge (remove) the game ball B in the ball tank 552 or the like, the game ball B discharged to the ball removal passage 580b side by operating the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is discharged to the island facility side of the game hall through the ball removal guide portion 627 and the ball removal discharge passage 665 which are separated and independent from the out ball passage 663. Thus, only the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, so that only the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 can be accurately counted. Therefore, the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580 and the number of game balls B (out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 can be used to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of calculating an accurate payout rate (ball output rate) of the game balls B.

The number of game balls B counted by the out sensor 664 (the number of out balls) is the number of game balls B that have been hit into the game area 5a and accepted by the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the gate 2002, the second starting opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, the second big winning opening 2007, etc. It is the number of game balls B that are not received in the winning opening but are accepted in the out opening 1008 and discharged from the game board 5, and is the number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a (the number of shot balls).

Since the payout rate (ball payout rate) changes according to the gaming state, the payout rate within a predetermined period (for example, per unit time, per predetermined time period, per day, etc.) is calculated as follows: "number of payouts within a predetermined period/number of out balls within a predetermined period = payout rate within a predetermined period".

Further, according to this embodiment, the substrate unit 620A of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is detachably attached is provided with the out-ball passage 663 through which the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 circulates, and the game ball B circulating in the out-ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, so that the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected. , the configuration of the game board 5 can be simplified and the cost can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since a gap larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the rear end of the ball discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662, the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 are kept away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., and many game balls B circulate through the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the influence of electrical noise caused by static electricity, induced current, etc., on the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the circulation of the game balls B can be obtained.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the out sensor 664 detects the game ball B whose circulation speed is suppressed by the out ball straightening part 663b of the out ball passage 663, the impact applied to the out sensor 664 by the circulation of the game ball B can be weakened, so that the out sensor 664 can be reduced from being worn out early and damaged.

Furthermore, when the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so as to be visible to the player side, since the player desires to pay out a large number of game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is high, the player can immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is highly likely to pay out a large number of game balls B, making it easier for the player to select the pachinko machine 1 to play. can. When the payout rate is displayed so as to be visually recognizable from the player's side, the displayed payout rate becomes larger than usual when a fraudulent act such as paying out a large number of game balls B is carried out, so that other players or staff members of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice the fraudulent activity, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be made to hesitate to perform the fraudulent activity.

In addition, when the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed at a position invisible to the player side, the staff of the game hall or the like can see the fraud for the same reason as above. Also, when performing maintenance of the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, there is a possibility that there is a problem in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the obstacle nail N, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the relay board, the connector, the wiring cable, the various sensors, etc.).

Furthermore, since the out-ball passage 663 through which the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 circulate is provided with the out-ball passage 664, there is no need to provide a configuration (for example, an out-ball detection unit) for detecting the game balls B discharged to the game board 5, and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced. A pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) that entertains a player can be provided.

In addition, since the ball discharge passage 665 has a vertical guide portion 665b in which a plurality of projections 665d alternately protrude, the game ball B circulates through the vertical guide portion 665b, so that the circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed. I can.

In addition, the out-ball passage 663 is provided with a meandering out-ball rectifying portion 663b, and the ball removal and discharge passage 665 is provided with a vertical guide portion 665b having a plurality of projections 665d protruding. The influence on the control board 633 and the like can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the circulation of the game balls B can be provided.

In addition, since the out ball discharge port 663d and the ball discharge port 665c of the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 are opened downward, the game ball B is discharged downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665, so that the game ball B is less likely to collide with other pachinko machines, walls, etc. provided behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, and the other pachinko machines, walls, etc. Damage can be avoided. In addition, since the game balls B are discharged downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665, the discharged game balls B are less likely to scatter, and the recovery of the game balls B discharged from the out ball passage 663 and the ball discharge passage 665 can be facilitated on the island facility side.

Further, since the base unit 660 in which the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 are formed is provided below the portion of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is attached, the game ball B hit into the game area 5a can be delivered to the out ball passage 663 of the base unit 660 simply by discharging it downward. Therefore, the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

Further, since the ball discharge port 665c of the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, it is possible to prevent the game ball B discharged from the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 from colliding with the outer frame 2. To provide a pachinko machine 1 which can be prevented from being damaged and is hard to be damaged.

In addition, since the ball discharge port 665c of the ball discharge passage 665 and the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided behind the outer frame 2, there is no need to advance the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) for collecting the game balls B on the island facility side to a position overlapping the outer frame 2, and the labor for installing the pachinko machine 1 and the labor for moving the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

[4-13a. Another embodiment of ball ejection in the substrate unit]
Next, another embodiment of ball ejection in the substrate unit 620A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126 and the like. FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out-ball discharge port of the out-ball passage. FIG. 126(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out-sensor is detachable, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out-sensor is removed in (a).

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, a guiding piece 667 for guiding the game ball B rearward is provided at the out ball outlet 663d at the downstream end of the out ball passage 663 in the base unit 660 . More specifically, in this embodiment, in the vicinity of the downstream end of the out ball passage 663, there is a confluence portion 663e that joins the ball removal discharge passage 665. As shown in FIG. The merging portion 663e opens downward, and the opening end serves as an out-ball discharge port 663d (ball removal discharge port 665c). The guide piece 667 protrudes slightly rearward from the front wall of the out-ball outlet 663d.

According to the embodiment of FIG. 125, the game ball B discharged downward from the out ball discharge port 663d abuts against the guide piece 667, so that the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed obliquely backward and downward. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the game balls B can be easily released to the side of the part (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) for recovering the game balls B provided behind the front side of the island facility (inside the island facility), and the game balls B can be reliably recovered on the island facility side.

In addition, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, since the guide piece 667 can direct the discharge direction of the game ball B diagonally backward and downward, even if the out-ball discharge port 663d of the out-ball passage 663 is provided at a position close to directly below the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 (a position close to the front side in the island facility), the game ball B can be reliably received in a bucket or the like in the island facility. Therefore, since the out-ball passage 663 (out-ball discharge port 663d) can be arranged as far forward as possible, the space behind the out-ball passage 663 in the main body frame 4 can be widened. The influence on the control board 633 and the like can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 with less malfunction due to the circulation of the game balls B can be obtained.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, an out-ball sensor 664 can be attached to and detached from below at a portion of the out-ball discharge port 663d in the out-ball passage 663. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, a sensor mounting recess 663f that is formed at the downstream end of the downward guiding portion 663c in the out ball passage 663 and is open downward to accommodate the out sensor 664, and a sensor cover 668 that restricts the downward movement of the out sensor 664 that is housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f.

The sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the lower end portion of the downward guiding portion 663c connected to the downstream end of the out-ball straightening portion 663b in the out-ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. As shown in FIG. Also in this embodiment, the base unit 660 is formed of a transparent member, and the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from above or below the base unit 660 .

The sensor cover 668 includes a main body portion 668a that extends longer than the sensor mounting recess 663f and whose base end side is rotatably mounted to the base unit 660, a through hole 668b that allows the game ball B to pass through at a portion corresponding to the detection hole of the out sensor 664 that is housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f in the main body portion 668a, and an elastically deformable locking claw portion 668 that is provided on the opposite side of the base end of the main body portion 668a. and c.

The base end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the sensor mounting recess 663f of the base unit 660 on the outside of the sensor mounting recess 663f opposite to the out-ball rectifying portion 663b. An engaging claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is engaged with an engaging portion 663g provided outside the sensor mounting recessed portion 663f of the base unit 660 on the out-ball straightening portion 663b side.

The sensor cover 668 accommodates the out-sensor 664 in the sensor mounting recess 663f so that the detection hole of the out-sensor 664 coincides with the out-ball passage 663, and is rotated so that the locking claw portion 668c moves upward. Out sensor 664 can be attached to base unit 660 (see FIG. 126(a)). In this state, the through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 coincides with the detection hole of the out sensor 664, and the game ball B that has circulated through the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664 and then discharged downward through the through hole 668b. The through-hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 also serves as an out-ball outlet 663d of the out-ball passage 663. As shown in FIG.

When replacing (removing) the out-sensor 664, by operating the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668, the locking claw portion 668c is elastically deformed to release the locking with the locking portion 663g. Then, by rotating the sensor cover 668 around the proximal end of the main body 668a to open it so that the locking claw 668c moves downward, the main body 668a of the sensor cover 668 moves away from the lower surface of the out sensor 664, and the out sensor 664 can be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see FIG. 126(b)).

As shown in FIG. 126(b), in this embodiment, when the sensor cover 668 is rotated and opened, a certain amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the sensor cover 668 and the upper end of the contact-threatening object indicated by the two-dot chain line (for example, the upper end surface of the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the outer frame 2, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43, etc.) or the lower end of the main body frame 4. As a result, even when the body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 does not come into contact with a contact-threatening object, and damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented.

According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 126, the out-sensor 664 detects all the game balls B hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, so there is a risk that the out-sensor 664 will be quickly worn out and damaged due to the circulation of many game balls B. However, as described above, the out-sensor 664 can be attached and detached from below by opening the sensor cover 668, so that the out-sensor 664 can be easily replaced.

Further, according to this embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 does not come into contact with the outer frame 2 or other objects that pose a risk of contact, and damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented. More specifically, the sensor cover 668 supports the out-sensor 664 from below, but since many game balls B come into contact with the out-sensor 664 from above, the sensor cover 668 may open due to vibration caused by the contact of many game balls B, causing the sensor cover 668 to disengage the latching claw portion 668c. When the sensor cover 668 is opened and the out sensor 664 drops downward during the game, the game ball B is not detected by the out sensor 664 even though the game ball B is hit in the game area 5a, so that the main control board 1310 or the like notifies the occurrence of abnormality. When this abnormality is reported, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 in order for the staff of the game hall to confirm the abnormality, but since there is a gap between the lower end of the open sensor cover 668 and the contact-threatening object such as the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 can be opened without the sensor cover 668 coming into contact with the contact-threatening object, and damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented.

Furthermore, according to the embodiment of FIG. 126, the base end side of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 at a portion of the sensor mounting recess 663f on the outside opposite to the out-ball straightening portion 663b, and the base unit 660 is made transparent. Therefore, by opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out-sensor 664, the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be clearly viewed from below. Therefore, when the game balls B are clogged in the out-ball passage 663, the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the place where the game balls B are clogged can be identified at a glance, and the clogging of the game balls B can be eliminated early.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 is formed to be substantially flush with the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 in the outer frame 2, the pachinko machine 1 can be turned upside down to stand upright in an upside down state. 5 can be easily performed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, even if the out sensor 664 is damaged, the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced, so that the game interrupted due to the damage of the out sensor 664 can be quickly resumed, the frustration of the player due to the interruption of the game can be alleviated, the decrease in interest can be suppressed, the decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Furthermore, since one end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, even if the sensor cover 668 is opened when the out-sensor 664 is replaced, the sensor cover 668 hangs from the base unit 660 and does not fall off, thereby avoiding the loss of the sensor cover 668.

In addition, since the sensor cover 668 that holds the out sensor 664 from below is attached rotatably about the axis in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction) at the outer portion near the out ball passage 663 through which many game balls B circulate in the base unit 660, the distribution of the downward force applied to the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 due to the circulation of the game balls B is greatly applied to the side (one end side) rotatably attached to the base unit 660. Relatively, it is smaller on the locking claw portion 668c side (the other end side) locked by the locking portion 663g of the base unit 660 . Therefore, even if a downward force acts on the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664, most of the ball B can be received by one end side where the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached. Therefore, it becomes difficult to release the locking by the locking claw portion 668c on the other end side, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that the sensor cover 668 opens and the out sensor 664 falls off.

[4-14. Third Embodiment of Substrate Unit]
Next, a board unit 700 of a third embodiment, which is different from the above, will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 127 to 136 and the like. FIG. 127(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment, omitting the power supply unit, payout control unit, and interface unit, as seen from the front right, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) as seen from the front left. 128(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 127 viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) viewed from the lower right rear. 129(a) is a plan view of the substrate unit in FIG. 127, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the corrugated line in (a), (c) is a cross-sectional view cut along the saw line in (a), and FIG. 130 is a cross-sectional view cut along the sea line in FIG. 129(a).

131 is an exploded front perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 127, and FIG. 132 is an exploded rear perspective view of the substrate unit of FIG. 133(a) is a front perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. 127, and FIG. 133(b) is a back perspective view of the ball path member of the board unit of FIG. FIG. 134 is an explanatory view showing elimination of ball clogging in the substrate unit of FIG. 127; FIG. 135 is an explanatory view showing prevention of entry of a linear unauthorized tool in the substrate unit of FIG. 127. FIG. 136 is an explanatory diagram showing dust removal in the substrate unit of FIG. 127. FIG.

The substrate unit 700 of the third embodiment differs from the substrate unit 620 and the substrate unit 620A described above only in the configuration of the base unit 710, and the other configurations are the same. Therefore, here, the same configurations as those of the substrate unit 620 and the substrate unit 620A are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted. 127 to 136, illustration of the power supply unit 620c, the payout control unit 620d, and the interface unit 620e is omitted.

The board unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear surface of the body frame base unit 500 in place of the board unit 620 or the board unit 620A. The board unit 700 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board placing portion 501c, a base unit 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 710, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover part of the payout control unit 620d from the rear.

This board unit 700 includes: a first ball path 701 through which game balls B released downward from the game board 5 can flow; a second ball path 702 provided behind the first ball path 701 through which game balls B released downward from the game board 5 can flow; A ball extraction passage 705 through which the game balls B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full tank ball path unit 610 circulate is provided. The entrances of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are open upward, and the game balls B are detected one by one by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, respectively, and discharged downward.

In this embodiment, the game ball B received in the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022 on the game board 5 circulates through the first ball path 701, and the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, the first major winning port 2006, and the second major winning port 2007 on the game board 5 is transferred to the second ball path 7. 02. In other words, out balls flow through the first ball path 701 and safe balls flow through the second ball path 702. The first ball sensor 703 can count all out balls, and the second ball sensor 704 can count all safe balls. As a result, in the case where a winning opening (winning opening sensor) such as the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, and the second big winning opening 2007 of the game board 5 is tampered with, the number of safe balls on the game board 5 side and the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704 are different, and the cheating on the winning opening can be detected.

More specifically, the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 includes a front base 711 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, a rear base 712 attached to the rear side of the front base 711 and having a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear surface thereof and having a ball extraction passage 705, and a ball path provided between the front base 711 and the rear base 712 and having a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702. A crime prevention cover 714 provided openable and closable on the front base 711 and the rear base 712 in order to eliminate clogging of the game balls B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 and to prevent the entry of unauthorized tools, a passage wall member 715 attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closing the rear end side of the ball extraction passage 705, and a frame relay board 716 attached to the rear side of the rear base 712. In the base unit 710, the front base 711, the rear base 712, the ball path member 713, and the passage wall member 715 are transparent.

The front base 711 is formed in the shape of a box that is elongated in the left and right direction and is open rearwardly and upwardly. The ball path member 713 is housed inside the front base 711 from behind. The front base 711 closes the front end side of the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713 with a front wall. The front base 711 has a ball receiving opening 711a that is open in the left-right direction in the upper peripheral wall, and a release opening 711b that is open in the lower peripheral wall at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction. The front base 711 accommodates the ball path member 713 therein, and the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 face upward from the ball socket 711a. Further, the front base 711 supports the crime prevention cover 714 rotatably about an axis extending in the left-right direction at the front end side of the elimination opening 711b.

The rear base 712 is formed in the shape of a box that is open rearward and elongated in the left and right directions. The rear base 712 closes the rear end side of the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 with a front wall. The rear base 712 has a ball extraction passage 705 that receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, guides it to the right in the front view, and guides it downward to discharge it. The ball removal passage 705 is provided in a box-shaped rear base 712 and is entirely open rearward. The ball removal passage 705 is closed on the rear end side by a passage wall member 715 . A portion of the ball extraction passage 705 of the rear base 712 located above the speaker box 623 (a portion on the left end side in front view) penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the front end side is closed by the front base 711, and the rear side is closed by the passage wall member 715.

In addition, the rear base 712 has a first ejection guide portion 712a that receives the game ball B that has flowed through the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713, guides it backward, and then ejects it downward, and a second ejection guide portion 712b that receives the game ball B that has flowed through the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713, guides it backward, and then ejects it downward. The entrance sides of the first discharge guide portion 712a and the second discharge guide portion 712b project forward from the front wall of the rear base 712, the entrance of the first discharge guide portion 712a opens forward, and the entrance of the second discharge guide portion 712b opens upward. The outlets of the first ejection guide portion 712a and the second ejection guide portion 712b are provided at the same position in the front-rear direction. The first ejection guide portion 712 a and the second ejection guide portion 712 b are open rearward from the front wall, and are closed at the rear end side by the passage wall member 715 .

In the rear base 712, the outlets of the ball extraction passage 705, the first ejection guide portion 712a, and the second ejection guide portion 712b are located to the left of the release port 711b of the front base 711 in front view, and are arranged in order from left to right. The outlet of the ball removal passage 705 widens greatly forward on the front end side and slightly widens rearward on the rear end side with respect to the outlets of the first ejection guide portion 712a and the second ejection guide portion 712b (see FIG. 128(b)). That is, the outlet of the ball removal passage 705 is formed larger (broader) in the front-rear direction than the outlets of the first ejection guide portion 712a and the second ejection guide portion 712b.

The ball path member 713 is inserted into the box-shaped front base 711 from behind and accommodated therein. The ball path member 713 has a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702 . The ball path member 713 has a left wall portion 713a extending vertically downward from the upper end at the right end, an upper left shelf portion 713b inclined downward to the right from the lower end of the left wall portion 713a, a stepped wall portion 713c extending vertically downward from the right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b, and an upper right shelf portion 713 inclined downward to the right from the lower end of the stepped wall portion 713c. d, a straightening wall portion 713e extending obliquely downward to the left from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, a lower shelf portion 713f rising rightward from a position spaced rightward from the lower end of the straightening wall portion 713e and extending rightward beyond the upper right shelf portion 713d, and a right wall portion 713 extending vertically upward from the right end of the lower shelf portion 713f to substantially the same height as the upper end of the left wall portion 713a. an upper wall portion 713h extending leftward from the upper end of the right wall portion 713g to the same position as the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d; and a U-shaped groove wall portion 713i connected to the left end of the upper wall portion 713h and open upward. The left end of the groove wall portion 713i is positioned on the right side of the center of the upper right shelf portion 713d in the left-right direction.

The ball path member 713 includes a lower wall portion upper portion 713j extending leftward from the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e, an intermediate wall portion 713k extending vertically upward from the left end of the lower wall portion upper portion 713j to the lower surface of the upper left shelf portion 713b, an eaves portion 713l extending lower leftward from the middle of the left side surface of the intermediate wall portion 713k, and a downward portion near the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f. It has a hanging wall portion 713m that vertically extends short and vertically, and a lower wall portion 713n that extends leftward from the lower end of the hanging wall portion 713m in parallel with the upper lower wall portion 713j. A portion of the lower wall portion lower 713n located below between the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e and the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is notched vertically to a size through which the game ball B can pass.

Further, the ball path member 713 has a plurality of hindrance ribs 713o extending downward from the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h and spaced apart in the left-right direction. In addition, the ball path member 713 is a flat plate that partitions the space in front and back, which is surrounded by the left wall portion 713a, the upper left shelf portion 713b, the step wall portion 713c, the upper right shelf portion 713d, the straightening wall portion 713e, the lower shelf portion 713f, the right wall portion 713g, the groove wall portion 713i, the lower wall portion upper portion 713j, the middle wall portion 713k, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower wall portion lower portion 713n. It has a partition wall portion 713p having a shape.

Further, the ball path member 713 has a plurality of notches 713q that are recessed from the front and rear ends of the upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f toward the partition wall 713p. Each notch 713q is provided so that a gap in the front-rear direction smaller than the radius of the game ball B is formed between the front base 711 and the rear base 712 when assembled to the board unit 700, and dirt, dust, etc. in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be discharged downward through the gap.

Also, the ball path member 713 is provided at a portion between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f on the front surface of the partition wall portion 713p, and has a plurality of guide ribs 713r extending left and right.

Furthermore, the ball path member 713 is surrounded by a lower wall upper portion 713j, a hanging wall portion 713m, and a lower wall portion lower portion 713n on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p, and is surrounded by a lower wall portion upper portion 713j, a hanging wall portion 713m, and a lower wall portion lower portion 713n on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p, and a sensor housing portion front portion 713s in which the first ball sensor 703 is accommodated. 713 t after the sensor accommodating portion in which the ball sensor 704 is accommodated.

The first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are housed in the front 713s of the sensor housing portion and the rear 713t of the sensor housing portion so that the detection holes of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 are positioned below the portion between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, that is, with the detection holes on the right side. Although not shown, the wiring cables extending from the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 extend leftward from the inner wall portion 713k from the front 713s of the sensor housing portion and the rear 713t of the sensor housing portion.

The ball path member 713 is provided at a portion forward of the partition wall portion 713p on the lower surface of the bottom wall portion 713n, and has a first ball guiding portion 713u that protrudes downward and is open rearward. When the first ball guiding portion 713u is assembled to the board unit 700, the right half of the rear end side is closed by the front surface of the rear base 712, and the left half faces the inlet side of the first ejection guiding portion 712a of the rear base 712. In front of the partition wall portion 713p, the first ball guide portion 713u guides the game ball B that has flowed down from between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f to the right and then to the rear to deliver it to the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712.

On the other hand, on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p in the ball path member 713, below the portion of the lower wall portion lower portion 713n that opens downward (the portion of the detection hole of the second ball sensor 704 housed in the rear sensor housing portion 713t), the entrance that opens upward to the second ejection guide portion 712b of the rear base 712 is located. As a result, the game ball B flowing downward from between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f behind the partition wall portion 713p can be transferred to the second ejection guide portion 712b of the rear base 712.

The right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b is located slightly to the right of the left end of the dissolution opening 711b in the front base 711. As shown in FIG. The right end of the upper right shelf portion 713 d is positioned to the right of the right end of the dissolution opening 711 b of the front base 711 . The left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is positioned to the left of the left end of the dissolution opening 711b in the front base 711. As shown in FIG. Accordingly, the portion of the front base 711 immediately above the clearance opening 711b is covered with the rectifying wall portion 713e. The upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f are linearly inclined. On the other hand, the straightening wall portion 713e is inclined in a curved shape, and the left end side is curved downward vertically. The distance (height) between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is inclined so as to become narrower toward the left so that one game ball B can pass through on the left end side. The rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f can straighten a plurality of game balls B in a line and guide them downward.

As described above, the space between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is formed so that the vertical dimension becomes narrower toward the left (downstream direction in which the game balls B circulate). Therefore, depending on the amount of game balls B circulated, a plurality of game balls B may get caught between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, resulting in ball clogging (see FIG. 134). Since the straightening wall portion 713e is located above the clearing port 711b, when ball clogging occurs between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, the security cover 714 is opened to open the clearing port 711b. Ball clogging can be eliminated by thrusting the game ball B that is more bitten.

By the way, since the lower shelf 713f is provided with a notch 713q for eliminating ball clogging and for dropping dirt and dust downward, a linear unauthorized tool such as a piano wire or a catheter is allowed to enter above the lower shelf 713f (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702) through the notch 713q, and the tip of the unauthorized tool is pushed into the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702). ), and there is a risk that fraudulent acts will be carried out on the game board 5 provided above. Insertion of such an unauthorized tool is not limited to the lower shelf portion 713f, and there is a similar concern in the upper left shelf portion 713b and the upper right shelf portion 713d in which the notch portion 713q is provided.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since a plurality of tabular blocking ribs 713o are provided on the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h and are spaced apart in the left-right direction and extend downward, even if the tip of the linear unauthorized tool tries to move along the lower surface of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, the tip is prevented from moving by coming into contact with the blocking ribs 713o. and prevents further unauthorized tool insertion (see FIG. 135). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of cheating to the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), reduce the burden on the side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and provide the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against cheating.

In addition, in the right side of the middle wall portion 713k in the upper right shelf portion 713d and the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower part and the left and right sides thereof are closed by the rectifying wall portion 713e, the lower wall upper portion 713j, and the middle wall portion 713k, which are not provided with the notch portion 713q. Therefore, no fraudulent act is performed through the notch 713q of the relevant portion.

As described above, the ball path member 713 is provided with a plurality of cutouts 713q in the upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f, so dirt and dust can be discharged downward through the cutouts 713q (see FIG. 136). Dust discharged downward through the notch 713q positioned above the sensor housing front 713s and the sensor housing rear 713t in the upper left shelf 713b is stored in a space surrounded by the rectifying wall 713e, the lower wall 713j, and the middle wall 713k. As a result, dust or the like does not adhere to the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 704 housed in the front sensor housing portion 713s and the rear sensor housing portion 713t.

In addition, a wiring cable is connected by a connector to the left end side of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 housed in the sensor housing front 713s and the sensor housing rear 713t, and the wiring cable and the connector protrude leftward from the sensor housing front 713s and the sensor housing rear 713t. That is, the wiring cables and connectors of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 protrude leftward from the inner wall portion 713k. In this middle wall portion 713k, since the eaves portion 713l extends leftward from above the front 713s of the sensor housing portion and the rear 713t of the sensor housing portion on the left side, dirt and dust falling downward through the notch portion 713q formed in the upper left shelf portion 713b is guided leftward by the inclination of the eaves portion 713l, and the first sphere sensor 703 and the second sphere sensor 70 protruding leftward from the middle wall portion 713k. 4 can be prevented from falling on the distribution cable and connector, and the occurrence of problems caused by dust or the like can be avoided.

The base unit 710 is formed by the first ball path 713a, the upper left shelf 713b, the stepped wall 713c, the upper right shelf 713d, the straightening wall 713e, the lower shelf 713f, the right wall 713g, the groove wall 713i, the first ball guide 713u, and the first discharge guide 712a of the rear base 712. A second ball path 702 is formed by a left wall portion 713a on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p, an upper left shelf portion 713b, a stepped wall portion 713c, an upper right shelf portion 713d, a straightening wall portion 713e, a lower shelf portion 713f, a right wall portion 713g, a groove wall portion 713i, and a second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712 in the ball path member 713.

The crime prevention cover 714 is formed in a flat plate shape, and is attached near the front end of the release opening 711b of the front base 711 in a state where the front end side can rotate about an axis in the left-right direction. Moreover, the security cover 714 has an elastic locking portion 714a that is locked to the rear base 712 on the rear end side. As shown in FIG. 130, the security cover 714 closes the disengagement port 711b when the elastic engagement portion 714a is engaged with the rear base 712 and placed horizontally, and opens the disengagement opening 711b when the elastic engagement portion 714a is released and rotated so that the rear end side is positioned downward. In other words, the security cover 714 can open and close the dissolution opening 711b.

When the security cover 714 is closed, the removal opening 711b of the front base 711 can be closed, so that a linear unauthorized tool can be prevented from being inserted into the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702) through the removal opening 711b. In addition, when a ball jam occurs between the regulating wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f of the ball path member 713, the crime prevention cover 714 can be opened to open the clearing port 711b of the front base 711. Therefore, a bar-shaped tool is inserted between the regulating wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f from below through the clearing port 711b and the notch portion 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f. It is possible to eliminate ball clogging. This ball clogging elimination work is carried out with the body frame 4 opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2 .

The security cover 714 has its lower end (the end on the side of the elastic locking portion 714a) located below the height of the contact-threatening object (here, the connection cylinder portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the outer frame 2) (the height indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 130) when the release opening 711b is opened (in the vertical state). Therefore, after the body frame 4 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to eliminate the clogging of the game balls B in the ball path member 713, even if the body frame 4 is tried to be closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the security cover 714 is kept open, the opened security cover 714 comes into contact with the contact dangerous object (the connecting cylinder part 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43), and the body frame 4 cannot be closed. As a result, it is possible to avoid forgetting to close the security cover 714, and to securely close the security cover 714 so that the security cover 714 exhibits its crime prevention function.

In this embodiment, when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, if the security cover 714 is opened for some reason, even if the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 in that state, the security cover 714 will come into contact with the open security cover 714 from the front. The body frame 4 can be opened without being caught by the dangerous object, and damage to the crime prevention cover 714 and the contact dangerous object can be avoided.

The crime prevention cover 714 of the present embodiment rarely causes clogging of the game ball B between the regulating wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, and is basically kept closed.

The passage wall member 715 is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closes the rear end side of the ball removal passage 705 that is open rearward. In addition, the passage wall member 715 closes the portion of the rear base 712 that is open rearward on the exit side of the first ejection guide portion 712a and the second ejection guide portion 712b, so that the game ball B that has flowed through the first ejection guide portion 712a and the second ejection guide portion 712b can be ejected downward. Furthermore, the passage wall member 715 sandwiches the frame relay board 716 with the rear base 712 and covers the rear side of the frame relay board 716 .

The frame relay board 716 is sandwiched between the rear base 712 and the passage wall member 715 . The frame relay board 716 is for relaying connection between the handle touch sensor 192 of the door frame 3 , the single button operation sensor 194 , the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 and the main control board 1310 .

As shown in FIG. 129(a), the base unit 710 of this embodiment has an upper left shelf portion 713b and a part of an upper right shelf portion 713d of the ball path member 713 facing upward from the ball socket 711a of the front base 711, and can receive all the game balls B released downward from the game board 5. The game ball B dropped to the upper left shelf portion 713b or the upper right shelf portion 713d through the ball socket 711a rolls to the right and flows down from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d to the lower shelf portion 713f. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the lower shelf portion 713f rolls leftward on the lower shelf portion 713f. At this time, if a plurality of game balls B are piled up and down on the lower shelf 713f, they are collapsed by the upper rectifying wall 713e so as to form a line toward the left.

The game ball B that rolls leftward on the lower shelf 713f falls downward from the left end of the lower shelf 713f, and when it is forward of the partition wall 713p, it is detected by the first ball sensor 703 housed in the front sensor housing 713s, passes through the first ball guiding part 713u, and is discharged downward through the first discharge guiding part 712a of the rear base 712. On the other hand, in the case behind the partition wall portion 713p, after being detected by the second ball sensor 704 housed in the rear sensor housing portion 713t, the ball passes through the second discharge guiding portion 712b of the rear base 712 and is discharged downward.

As described above, in the base unit 710 of the present embodiment, the game balls B flow through paths separated from each other before and after the partition wall 713p of the ball path member 713 and are discharged downward. Therefore, the game ball B that has fallen from the game board 5 forward from the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 flows through the first ball path 701, is detected by the first ball sensor 703, and can be ejected downward. On the other hand, the game ball B that has fallen from the game board 5 behind the partition wall 713p of the ball path member 713 flows through the second ball path 702, is detected by the second ball sensor 704, and can be ejected downward.

In addition, the base unit 710 can discharge the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in order to extract the game ball B in the ball tank 552 downward through the ball extraction passage 705 of the rear base 712. The game ball B ejected downward from the first ejection guide portion 712a (first ball path 701), the second ejection guide portion 712b (second ball path 702), and the ball extraction passage 705 of the base unit 710 is delivered to a portion (out receiving portion, bucket, etc.) for collecting the game ball B on the island facility side.

According to the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 of the present embodiment, since the upper left shelf 713b, the upper right shelf 713d, and the lower shelf 713f are provided with a plurality of notches 713q, dirt and dust can be dropped through the notches 713q and removed from the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702. Therefore, it is possible to prevent dust and the like from interfering with the circulation of the game balls B, thereby suppressing the occurrence of clogging. I can.

In addition, since the front base 711, rear base 712, ball route member 713, and aisle wall member 715 are transparently formed, the door frame 3 is opened forward to the main unit frame 4, and the game board 5 is removed from the main unit frame 4, so the base unit 710 (board unit 700) is above. It is possible to easily confirm the presence or absence of a ballball B in the ball route member 713 (1st ball path 701 and the second ball path 702). A notch portion 713q is provided in the lower shelf portion 713f at a portion where the game balls B are aligned in a row by the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f in the ball path member 713. Therefore, when a ball jam occurs between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, the body frame 4 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2, and the crime prevention cover 714 is opened, thereby clearing the opening 711b and the notch portion 713q. A bar-shaped tool can be inserted from below between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, and ball clogging can be eliminated by the tool.

Furthermore, since a clearing port 711b that opens downward is provided in a portion below the rectifying wall portion 713e of the lower shelf portion 713f, and a security cover 714 that closes the clearing port 711b is provided, ball clogging can be eliminated as described above through the clearing port 711b. The pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being inserted into the second ball path 702 and has a high deterrent effect against fraud.

In addition, since the security cover 714 that opens and closes the release port 711b is opened and closed by rotating it about the axis in the left-right direction at the front end side, if the body frame 4 is to be closed against the outer frame 2 in a state where the security cover 714 is forgotten to be closed, the security cover 714 will come into contact with the contact-hazardous object (the connecting cylinder part 43a of the rear panel member 43) and the body frame 4 will not be able to be closed. can be reliably closed, and the crime prevention function of the crime prevention cover 714 can be exerted.

Furthermore, since a plurality of tabular blocking ribs 713o are provided on the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h and are separated from each other in the left-right direction and extend downward, even if the tip of the linear illegal tool tries to move along the lower surface of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, the tip can be prevented from moving by coming into contact with the blocking ribs 713o. can prevent the insertion of unauthorized tools. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of cheating to the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), reduce the burden on the side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and provide the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against cheating.

In addition, as described above, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 constitute a complicated circulation path that meanders and cranks by the first ejection guide portion 712a and the second ejection guide portion 712b of the rear base 712 and the ball path member 713. Therefore, even if a linear unauthorized tool is inserted from the exit side of the first ejection guide portion 712a or the second ejection guide portion 712b, the intrusion can be prevented by the complicated path. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game board 5 through the second ball path 702 .

In addition, since all the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected (counted) by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, there is no need to provide a configuration (for example, an out-ball detection unit) for detecting the game balls B discharged to the game board 5, and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced. By providing it, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be made more enjoyable for the player.

In addition, since out balls flow through the first ball path 701 and safe balls flow through the second ball path 702, it is possible to determine whether or not a fraudulent act is being performed on the game board 5 by comparing the number of safe balls counted on the game board 5 with the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704, and the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against fraud can be provided.

Furthermore, when the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so as to be visible to the player side, since the player desires to pay out a large number of game balls B, if the displayed payout rate is high, the player can immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is highly likely to pay out a large number of game balls B, making it easier for the player to select the pachinko machine 1 to play. can. When the payout rate is displayed so as to be visually recognizable from the player's side, the displayed payout rate becomes larger than usual when a fraudulent act such as paying out a large number of game balls B is carried out, so that other players or staff members of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice the fraudulent activity, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be made to hesitate to perform the fraudulent activity.

In addition, when the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed at a position invisible to the player side, the staff of the game hall or the like can see the fraud for the same reason as above. Also, when performing maintenance of the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, there is a possibility that there is a problem in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the obstacle nail N, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the relay board, the connector, the wiring cable, the various sensors, etc.).

In addition, since the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are separated from the ball extraction path 705 for discharging the game ball B in the ball tank 552, the game ball B without the ball is not counted by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704. Therefore, only the game balls B released from the game board 5 can be accurately counted by the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 .

In the above embodiment, out balls circulate through the first ball path 701 and safe balls circulate through the second ball path 702. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A safe ball may circulate through the first ball path 701 and an out ball may circulate through the second ball path 702, respectively.

Further, in the above embodiment, the security cover 714 is rotated to open and close the elimination opening 711b. However, the invention is not limited to this, and the elimination opening 711b may be opened and closed by sliding the security cover 714 forward and backward or left and right.

In the above-described embodiment, one partition wall 713p partitions the game ball B released downward from the game board 5 through either of the two ball paths divided into the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may make it discharge to.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 147. FIG. FIG. 137 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine in which the center accessories and the like are made opaque. 138 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 137 viewed from the front right, FIG. 139 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 137 viewed from the front left, and FIG. 140 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the rear. FIG. 141 is a schematic explanatory diagram of routing of wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. FIG. 142 is a front view of the game board with the center accessories and the like made transparent. 143 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the back. FIG. 145 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to expose the inside of the game area in which game balls circulate and the obstacle nails. 146 is an enlarged front view showing the left side of FIG. 145, and FIG. 147 is an enlarged front view showing the right side of FIG.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which game balls B are struck by the player operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. As shown in FIG. The game area 5a is provided with a general winning port 2001, a gate 2002, a variable winning port 2003, a first starting port 2004, a second starting port 2005, a first big winning port 2006, and a second big winning port 2007, which give a predetermined privilege (e.g., a predetermined number of game balls B payout) to the player by receiving or passing the game balls B. This game board 5 is a game in which the game ball B is received or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the gate 2002, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, the second big winning opening 2007, etc. in the game area 5a, and the operation of driving the handle 195 and the circulation of the game ball B in the game area 5a are enjoyed. It is for doing

The game board 5 includes a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, a plate-like game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 (see FIG. 160) that detect magnetism acting illegally in the game area 5a. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIGS. 145 to 147, etc.) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 within the game area 5a.

In addition, the game board 5 is provided with a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a main control unit 1300 having a main control substrate 1310 (see FIG. 160, etc.) attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and controlling game contents performed by hitting game balls B into the game area 5a.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, a peripheral control unit 1500 that is arranged behind the game panel 1100, an effect display device 1600 that is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and can display a predetermined effect image, and an effect display device 1600 that can display a predetermined effect image. It further comprises a panel relay board (not shown) arranged to relay the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a rear unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

A production display device 1600 is provided on the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is provided on the rear surface of the production display device 1600. - 特許庁

The table unit 2000 includes a plurality of (here, four) general winning holes 2001 which are always open to receive the game ball B hit into the game area 5a, a gate 2002 provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting the passage of the game ball B, and a variable winning opening 20 which can accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of the normal pattern drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate 2002. 03, a first start port 2004 and a second start port 2005 which are provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and are always open to accept the game ball B, a first big winning port 2006 and a first big winning port 2006 which are capable of receiving the game ball B according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005. It is provided at a position different from the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005, and according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol, the game ball B can be accepted.

The front unit 2000 further includes a first sub-out port 2021 and a second sub-out port 2022 which are provided at predetermined positions in the game area 5a and which are always open to accept the game ball B.

Furthermore, the front unit 2000 includes a starter unit 2100 that is attached directly above the lower end of the game area 5a in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and has a first starter opening 2004, a side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starter unit 2100 in front view and has four general winning openings 2001, and a side unit 2200 that is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 in front view. A side upper left unit 2300, a lower right unit 2400 that is provided on the right side of the starting port unit 2100 in the front view, which is the lower right corner in the front view in the game area 5a, and has a second starting port 2005 and a second sub-out port 2022, and is provided above the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the lower right unit 2400 and slightly above the center in the front view in the game region 5a. A frame-like center role 2500 having a prize hole 2006, a second big prize hole 2007 and a first sub-out hole 2021, and a gate member 2600 provided to the left of the center role 2500 and near the center in the vertical direction of the game area 5a and having a gate 2002 are provided.

The front unit 2000 is provided on the right side of the game area 5a, and has a specific obstacle nail group 2700 consisting of a plurality of obstacle nails N. As shown in FIG.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and is open at the front. The back box 3010 has a square opening 3010a in the back wall. 040 and.

In addition, the back unit 3000 is located at the bottom of the front end of the back box 3010 and is located at the back of the gaming panel 1100, and the back ball guide unit 3100, and the back box set near the front end of the back box 3010, and in the back box 3010. The front and rear directions in the upper part are the same position as the front -front -fronted edge decorative unit 3200, the backward front directing unit 3300, the back front -edge decorative unit 3200 in the back box 3010, the backward front direction unit 3400, and the back box 3010 behind the back box 3010. There is a backward directing unit 3500 (see Fig. 155, etc.) and a backward -backed directing unit 3600 in the back box 3010 in the back box 3010.

[5-1. Front component]
The front constituent member 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The front structural member 1000 is formed transparent as a whole. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front structural member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc from the lower left end of the center in the front view in the front view along the clockwise circumferential direction, passing through the upper end of the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extending to the upper right corner, an inner rail 1002 arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extending in an arc from the lower center in the left and right direction in the front view to the upper left diagonally in the front view, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in the front view. It is provided with an out guide part 1003 formed at the lowest position of the game area 5a and inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

The front structural member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front structural member 1000, a right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the lower right rail 1004 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front structural member 1000, the upper portion of which curves inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and a right rail. An impact part 1006 is provided which connects the upper end of 1005 and the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and contacts the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 .

The front structural member 1000 is also provided with a backflow prevention member 1007 which is rotatably pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, is rotatable only between a closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between it and the outer rail 1001, and an open position where it is opened from the outer rail 1001 by rotating clockwise in a front view, and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side.

Furthermore, the front structural member 1000 has an out port 1008 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view within the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide section 1003 passes through the out port 1008 and is discharged to the rear of the front constituent member 1000 (game panel 1100).

In addition, the front component 1000 is provided with security recesses 1009 recessed rearward from the front end on the outside of the portions extending substantially vertically from the lower ends of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, the lower sides of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer sides of the right rail 1005. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1009 is in a state in which a rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3 is inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front structural member 1000) is bent in a complicated manner by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front structural member 1000. Therefore, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the game board 5, the rear projection 172 or the security recess 1009 will be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front structural member 1000 also has a notch portion 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch 1010 is aligned with the notch 1122 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 face forward through the notch 1010 and the notch 1122.

Further, the front structural member 1000 includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 formed in the upper left corner in a front view, to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp pasting portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner.

In addition, the front structural member 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparent, so that the game panel 1100, the back unit 3000, and the like, which are arranged on the rear side, can be visually recognized from the front.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front structural member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 is provided with a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-like front component 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and a frame-like panel holder 1120 which holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110, is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 145, etc.).

A panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of the panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is set to the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is implanted in the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. In addition, in this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed through the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 thereon.

In addition, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes 1113 formed in the form of round holes and short elongated holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of engaging stepped portions 1114 which are separated from each other in the left-right direction at the upper edge and the lower edge and are formed thin (see FIG. 148). The positioning hole 1113 is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 . The engaging stepped portion 1114 is detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engaging claw (not shown) or an engaging piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 .

The panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for mounting the center accessory 2500 offset above the center in front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and the width orthogonal to the circulation direction of the game balls B (the circumferential direction of the frame shape) in a front view is a wide width on the left side, the right side, and the bottom side, except for the upper side of the center, in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged, and the upper side is a narrow width in which the plurality of game balls B cannot be arranged.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 is provided with a holding stepped portion (not shown) having approximately the same size as the panel plate 1110 and recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and a through hole 1121 penetrating the holding stepped portion in the front-rear direction with a size approximately equal to that of the play area 5a.

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has a notch portion 1122 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch 1122 is formed to match the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 face forward through the notch 1010 and the notch.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 extending upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 1008 and recessed forward from the rear surface. Out recessed portion 1123 communicates with out port 1008 at its upper portion.

Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 has a plurality of protruding pins projecting forward from the holding stepped portion and inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110, three engaging claws arranged outside the holding stepped portion and elastically engaged with the engaging stepped portions 1114 at the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and two engaging stepped portions at the lower side of the panel plate 1110 protruding upward from the lower outside of the holding stepped portion. 1114 and a pair of engagement pieces that engage with each other. The panel holder 1120 can be detachably mounted with the panel plate 1110 accommodated in the holding stepped portion by engaging the engaging stepped portion on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from the front obliquely upward, moving the upper portion of the panel plate 1110 rearward, and elastically engaging the engaging stepped portions 1114 at the upper and lower left inclined portions with the engaging claws. At this time, the protruding pins of the panel holder 1120 are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110 to position the panel plate 1110 at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120 .

Since the game panel 1100 is transparently formed together with the front constituent member 1000 attached to the front side, when assembled on the game board 5, the boundary of the game area 5a can be prevented from being clearly seen, and the player can be given a sense of openness, and the game area 5a can be made to appear larger (wider) to the player although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change.

Also, since the game panel 1100 is made transparent together with the front component 1000, light from the performance display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. can be reflected or refracted forward (to the player side) to make it appear as if it is emitting light, and the decorativeness of the entire game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is slanted downward toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is notched rearward from the front end at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the state assembled to the game board 5, and the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface.

When the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 , the ejecting portion 1201 is located directly above the ejected ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620 b of the substrate unit 620 of the body frame 4 . As a result, all the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000 can be received, and can be discharged downward from the discharge part 1201 formed on the bottom to the discharged ball receiving part 628 or the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 123). The game balls B discharged to the out ball passage 663 are detected (counted) one by one by the out sensor 664 .

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Main control unit 1300 in game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 160) that controls game content, payout of game balls B, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200.

The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and molded transparently. A main control board 1310 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are molded transparently from polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 (whether or not unauthorized modifications have been made, or whether or not an unauthorized IC is mounted) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. In addition, the main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the base body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism needs to be broken in order to open the main control board box 1320, and the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

A main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like. In addition, the main control board 1310 is connected to the function display unit 1400, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the gate sensor 2601, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the first big winning opening sensor 2525, the second big winning opening sensor 2561, the variable winning opening solenoid 2522, the first big winning opening solenoid 2524, the second big winning opening solenoid 2563, the magnetic sensor 1050, and the like.

A setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 includes a setting key switch 1311a capable of switching and confirming setting values of the pachinko machine 1, a setting switching button 1311b capable of selecting and switching setting values, and a setting change permission lamp 1311c indicating a state in which switching of the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connector-connected (board-to-board connection) with the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 may be electrically connected via a harness). By this connector connection (connection between boards), the signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310. FIG. The right and left sides of the setting change board 1311 have substantially the same vertical distance as the right and left sides of the main control board 1310, and the horizontal distance is shorter than the horizontal distance of the main control board 1310. There is a center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 and a center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311. match.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1311 so that the center of the vertical distance dimension is on the center line, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is arranged along the left side of the main control board 1310 so that the center of the vertical distance dimension is on the center line. A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated is arranged below the center line of the setting change board 1311. A setting change button 1311b having a push operation part is arranged above the center line of the setting change board 1311. A setting change that can emit light in a single color (for example, red) is on the center line of the setting change board 1311 and above the setting key switch 1311a (lower left of the setting change button 1311b). A permission lamp 1311c is provided. A setting display 1310g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is arranged above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN. A RAM clear switch 1310f is provided.

In this embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off as an initial position at a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion opening formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, at a position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion opening is along the vertical direction). When the setting key cylinder is at the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the insertion opening and can be pulled out from the insertion opening. In this embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the setting key is inserted into the insertion port, the distance dimension in the depth direction of the setting key switch 1311a is adopted so that the other members of the pachinko machine (or the members of the island facility of the game hall) and the setting key do not interfere with each other and are not damaged.

A setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, and this setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When the setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position and turned on for the second ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON for the decision key, and the decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the setting key cylinder 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a OFF. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to a certain initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder's rotational position for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . In this embodiment, two completely different functions, that is, the setting key ON function and the decision key ON function, can be realized by the setting key switch 1311a alone, depending on the direction in which the setting key cylinder is rotated.

Although the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f are exposed through the corresponding openings formed in the cover of the main control board box 1320, they are formed in the openings corresponding to the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f. In order to prevent a wire or the like from entering through the "gap" and altering the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310, a wire penetration prevention portion is molded in the cover body for these openings. The setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are housed in the inner space formed by the cover and the base and cannot be touched at all. However, since the cover is molded transparent as described above, the set value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be visually recognized through the cover.

In order to prevent unauthorized modification, a wiring pattern for transmitting a setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting a decision key ON signal for the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting an OFF signal for the setting key switch 1311a, and a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal from the setting changeover button 1311b are formed on the setting change board 1311 so as not to come close to each other (separately from each other). Connections to the terminals of the connector SMCN of the change board 1311 (the terminals of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) are also formed at a distance. A wiring pattern for transmitting a signal) and a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal from the setting switching button 1311b are also formed so as not to come close to each other (separated from each other), and a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is also formed so as not to come close to each other (separately from each other).

The setting key switch 1311a, the setting switching button 1311b, and the setting display 1310g will be briefly described. Here, first, the case of changing the settings of the set values will be briefly described, and the case of displaying the current set values for confirmation will be briefly described. In addition, since the setting key is an important key that can be used not only to change the setting value but also to check the current setting value, etc., only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, are allowed to possess it, and it is limited to 2 to 3 people.

When the setting value is changed, when power is restored to the pachinko machine 1 or power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. "Set value change permission condition" must be satisfied. In other words, the person who actually changes the set values first confirms that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, then inserts the setting key into the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, rotates it clockwise by 60 degrees, and performs the first ON operation to turn on the setting key switch 1311a. 1 is turned on. As the above-described "predetermined setting value change permission condition", it is also possible to set a condition that an operation signal is input by operating the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f. That is, when power is restored to the pachinko machine 1 or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure), the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a ON and operating the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f. The setting value may be changed when the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" is satisfied.

A person who changes the set value first confirms that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, inserts the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, rotates the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees, and performs the first ON operation to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. Subsequently, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by operating the power switch 630a (see FIG. 7). As a result, a setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a displays the current set value stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM (the set value among the set values 1 to 6 when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned ON) on the setting display 1310g, and switches the setting change permission lamp 1311c from the off state to the on state.

When a person who changes setting values presses the pressing operation portion of the setting change button 1311b, a detection signal from the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1311 is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Each time a person who changes the setting of the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a increases the current setting value by 1 based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1311. When the maximum setting value of 6 is reached, the setting value returns to the initial value of 1, increases again by 1, and displays the setting value on the setting display 1310g.

To determine the set value, the person who changes the set value rotates the setting key cylinder 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, turns the setting key switch 1311a counterclockwise 60 degrees so as to return the setting key cylinder from the setting key ON position to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then rotates the setting key cylinder 1311a counterclockwise 60 degrees to OFF. The second ON operation is performed by rotating the setting key switch 1311a by 0 degrees, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a to ON. This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value determined by changing the setting in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

When the setting key cylinder is rotated counterclockwise by 120 degrees (that is, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), the determination key ON signal may be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this case, the setting changeover button. After the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g by pressing the pressing operation portion 1311b, the setting value can be determined only by turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key can be pulled out from the setting key cylinder, thereby improving workability.

A person who changes the setting of the setting value turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return the setting key cylinder to the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder turning position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the setting key cylinder turning position where the enter key is turned on. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from displaying the setting values to not displaying them, and switches the setting change permission lamp 1311c from lighting to turning off.

A person who changes the setting values pulls out the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion opening of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and completes the setting value setting change operation.

In the case of confirming and displaying the set values currently set, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after power is restored after a power failure (an instantaneous power failure), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. Predetermined set value display permission condition” must be established. That is, the person who actually confirms and displays the currently set setting value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is in a power-on state (a state in which power has been restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure), then opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, then inserts the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, rotates it clockwise by 60 degrees, and performs the first ON operation to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. .

A person who confirms and displays the currently set set value first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (state that power has been restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure), then opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, then inserts the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, rotates it clockwise by 60 degrees, and performs the first ON operation to turn ON the setting key switch 1311a. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a displays the current set value (the set value among the set values 1 to 6 at the time when the set key cylinder of the set key switch 1311a is turned on for the first time) stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the setting change permission lamp 1311c remains extinguished, and even if a person who confirms and displays the setting value currently set presses the pressing operation part of the setting switching button 1311b, the setting value is not changed at all in response to this pressing operation, and the contents displayed on the setting display 1310g are also not changed.

After confirming the currently set value, the person who performs confirmation display of the currently set value turns the setting key switch 1311a counterclockwise 60 degrees so as to return it from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 .

The main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from displaying the setting value to not displaying the setting value.

A person who confirms and displays the set values currently set pulls out the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and completes the work of confirming and displaying the set values currently set.

As described above, the predetermined set value change permission condition is set when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn the setting key ON when the power is restored after power is restored to the pachinko machine 1 or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure). On the other hand, the predetermined setting value display permission condition is, as described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure), the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. is necessary. Thus, the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the predetermined setting value display permission condition have common requirements in that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation, whereby the setting key is turned ON. The difference is that the set value display permission condition requires "after power recovery".

Here, the setting value will be briefly explained. The "setting value" is the probability for lottery determination whether it is a big hit or not, the probability for lottery determination whether or not it is a small win, the probability for lottery determination when changing from the variable probability time to the normal time, and the distribution rate to the area advantageous to the player. It is set. In the present embodiment, setting values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are prepared in advance as setting values, and the probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player from setting value 1 to setting value 6 is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values (for example, a jackpot determination table that defines the ratio of the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, a jackpot pattern determination table that defines the ratio of the jackpot determination value, a small hit determination table that defines the ratio of the jackpot determination value that indicates that the jackpot has been won, and a small hit determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value for the determination of the jackpot pattern. A small hit pattern determination table that is defined, a normal transition determination table that defines the ratio of determination values for transition determination from variable probability to normal time, etc.), or various tables used with various allocation rates associated with set values (For example, select a distribution table that defines the time to distribute, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid, etc.). In various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values, various determination values are allocated at predetermined ratios. The various tables used in various lottery determinations are set so that at least some values differ from each other, and the various tables used in various sorting ratios are set so that at least some values differ from each other, and some are set so that the values differ based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of one electric drive source and the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of the other electric drive source. In addition, as the set values described above, six set values (integers) ranging from set value 1 to set value 6 were used, but a smaller range may be used, or a larger range may be used. For example, four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4 may be used, or eight setting values (integer) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8 may be used.

As described above, the setting display unit 1310g not only displays the set values, but also, when the main control MPU 1310a checks the contents of the internal RAM when the main control MPU 1310a recovers power, determines whether or not there is an abnormality, and if it determines that there is an abnormality, and if the main control side power supply interruption processing does not end normally when the power is turned off, the setting display unit 1310g displays an error indicating that the contents stored in the internal RAM are abnormal (or unreliable). In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error indication.

Next, the base monitor 1310h will be briefly described. The base monitor 1310h displays the number of game balls B that have been collected from the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a that is sectioned and formed on the game board 5, out of the game balls B shot into the game area 5a. Of the game balls B launched into the game area 5a, the game balls B collected by the out port 1008 are detected by the out sensor 664 (see FIG. 160, etc.), and this detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls B collected through the outlet 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees so as to return to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned on, is turned off, and is further rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON. Although the key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a' can be turned off by rotating the setting key switch 1311a' counterclockwise 60 degrees from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off), and then turning the setting key switch 1311a' OFF. 1310a (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be described as "determination key modification (1)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees so as to return to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned on, is turned off, and is further turned counterclockwise 60 degrees to perform a second ON operation, whereby the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Although the key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, instead of this, the setting change board 1311 may be provided with an enter key button having a pressing operation part. In this case, the press operation portion of the enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and a wire penetration prevention portion is molded in the cover body for the opening so that a wire or the like cannot enter through the "gap" formed between the press operation portion of the enter key button and the corresponding opening to modify the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. When the pressing operation portion of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the determination key button is being pressed based on the detection signal from the determination key button, and can determine that the determination key is not ON when the pressing portion of the determination key button is not being pressed.

The position where the enter key button is arranged on the setting change board 1311 may be near the setting key switch 1311a or near the setting switching button 1311b. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, a sticker printed with the name of each button is pasted on the position corresponding to the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b so that the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b are not confused (instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body). Also, in order not to confuse the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b, a button with a cover covering the depressing operation part of either the enter key button or the setting switching button 1311b (the cover must be opened in order to depress the depressing operation part) may be employed, or the press operating part may be of a different color, or the enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b may have different outer shapes or different press operating part shapes. A switch of another type that does not have a pressing operation part may be adopted as the switch. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the decision key button include various switches such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotary operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. When setting change board 1311 is provided with enter key button and setting change button 1311b, the wiring pattern for enter key button and the wiring pattern for setting change button 1311b are formed so as not to come close to each other on setting change board 1311 (separated from each other), and the connection to the terminal of connector SMCN of setting change board 1311 (the terminal of connector MSCN of main control board 1310) is also separated. Also in the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the enter key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are also formed so as not to approach each other (at a distance from each other). In addition, when the enter key button is provided on the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the mode of the enter key button (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "variation example (2) of the enter key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees so as to return to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned on, is turned off, and is further turned counterclockwise 60 degrees to perform a second ON operation, whereby the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. A key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 in the handle unit 180 that detects whether or not the palm or fingers are in contact with the handle 195, and a detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the will of the player are input to the payout control board 63. 3 and is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and based on these detection signals, it may be determined whether or not the OK key is ON. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the palm or fingers are in contact with the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, while it can determine that the enter key is not ON when the palm or fingers are not in contact with the handle 195, and/or can determine that the enter key is ON when the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194. When the shot is not forcibly stopped, it can be determined that the decision key is not ON (the aspect of the handle touch sensor (the aspect of the single button operation sensor may be included) may be referred to as "variation (3) of the decision key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees so as to return to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned on, is turned off, and is further turned counterclockwise 60 degrees to perform a second ON operation, whereby the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, a firing reference pulse is branched at the payout control board 633 from a firing timing control circuit provided in the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, which will be described later. It may be determined whether or not the key is ON. The launch reference pulse is a reference pulse that allows 100 game balls B to be launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and is generated based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the firing reference pulse from the payout control board 633 is input, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the firing reference pulse is not input (the mode of the firing reference pulse may be described as "determination key modification (4)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), is turned OFF, and is further rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. A key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, if a range sensor capable of detecting the motion of the player seated opposite the pachinko machine 1 is provided on the game board 5 and a detection signal from the range sensor is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the relay board, the detection signal from the range sensor is branched at the relay board and is transmitted to the main control board 13 via the relay board. 10 to the main control MPU 1310a, and based on this detection signal, it may be determined whether or not the determination key is ON. The light emitted from the light emitting part passes through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and is reflected by the player's arm or hand within a predetermined distance. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a, when a detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is input via the relay board, determines whether or not there is an action based on this detection signal, and if it determines that there is an action, it can determine that the Enter key is ON, and if it determines that there is no action, it can determine that the Enter key is not ON (the mode of the distance measuring sensor may be described as "Modified example (5) of the Enter key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by inputting the setting key ON signal from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and turning the setting key cylinder counterclockwise 60 degrees from the initial position to turn the setting key switch 1311a on. 1311a can be turned ON for the enter key, and the signal for this enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees so as to return the setting key cylinder from the rotational position at which the setting key was turned ON to the original position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the setting key cylinder 1311a clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the enter key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). A signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a may be provided with a serial output circuit capable of serially outputting the information indicating setting key ON, enter key ON, and OFF to the outside as serial information. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this serial output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1311, but may be provided on the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 633 instead. When the serial information serially output from this serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine from the received serial information which of setting key ON, enter key ON, and OFF is to be transmitted (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be described as "determination key modification (6)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to turn the setting key switch 1311a. 1311a can be turned ON for the enter key, and the signal for this enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the setting key cylinder from the rotational position at which the setting key was turned ON to the initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the setting key cylinder 1311a clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the enter key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). Although the signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the setting key switch 1311a may be provided with a pulse output circuit capable of outputting the information indicating setting key ON, enter key ON, and OFF as a pulse signal to the outside. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1311, but may be provided on the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 633 instead. The pulse signal output from the pulse output circuit has a pulse width of 1 ms when the information indicates that the setting key is ON, a pulse width of 3 ms when the information indicates the decision key is ON, and a pulse width of 5 ms when the information indicates OFF. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine from the input pulse signal which of the setting key ON, enter key ON, and OFF (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit is sometimes described as "determination key modification (7)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to turn the setting key switch 1311a. 1311a can be turned ON for the enter key, and the signal for this enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the setting key cylinder from the rotational position at which the setting key was turned ON to the initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the setting key cylinder 1311a clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the enter key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). Signals are input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the voltage level of the setting key ON signal, the decision key ON signal, and the voltage level of the OFF signal are set to an intermediate potential (for example, a potential of 2 V to 3 V in the range of 0 V to 5 V) between the boards from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310, and a comparator circuit in the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a may determine ON/OFF of the SET key ON signal, ON/OFF of the enter key ON signal, and ON/OFF of the OFF signal by inputting the comparison result by the comparator circuit to the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, it is possible to improve the security with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a (the mode of the setting key switch using the intermediate potential is sometimes described as "determination key modification (8)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees so as to return to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned on, is turned off, and is further turned counterclockwise 60 degrees to perform a second ON operation, whereby the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Although the key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, instead of this, the payout control board 633 may be provided with a determination key button having a pressing operation part. In this case, the pressing operation portion of the enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the enter key button, and a wire entry prevention portion is molded in the cover body for the opening so that a wire or the like cannot enter through the "gap" formed between the pressing operation portion of the enter key button and the opening corresponding thereto and modify the payout control board 633. When the pressing operation portion of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the determination key button is being pressed based on the detection signal from the determination key button, and can determine that the determination key is not ON when the pressing portion of the determination key button is not being pressed.

It should be noted that the position where the determination key button is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of an error release switch having a depressing operation section which will be described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, stickers printed with the names of the respective buttons are pasted at positions corresponding to the decision key button and the error cancellation switch so as not to confuse the decision key button and the error cancellation switch (instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body). Also, in order not to confuse the enter key button and the error cancel switch, a button with a cover covering the depressing operation part of either the enter key button or the error canceling switch (the cover must be opened in order to depress the depressing operation part) may be employed. Good. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the decision key button include various switches such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotary operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. When the payout control board 633 is provided with the decision key button and the error cancellation switch, the wiring pattern for the decision key button and the wiring pattern for the error cancellation switch are formed on the payout control board 633 so as not to approach each other (at a distance from each other) in order to prevent unauthorized modification. The wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the button is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the error canceling switch is transmitted are also formed so as not to approach each other (at a distance from each other). Further, when the enter key button is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the mode of the enter key button (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modification (9) of the enter key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees so as to return to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned on, is turned off, and is further turned counterclockwise 60 degrees to perform a second ON operation, whereby the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, a signal from an error release switch having a pressing operation part on the payout control board 633 may be branched at the payout control board 633 and inputted to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and whether or not the determination key is ON may be determined based on this signal. As described above, the error canceling switch is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, and when the system of the pachinko machine 1 completes startup after the power is restored (when the various control boards turn on the power supply and is in a state of interrupt processing) and no error occurs as the state of the pachinko machine 1, there is no need to operate the pressing operation part of the error canceling switch. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the error cancellation switch is operated based on the signal from the error cancellation switch, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the depression operation portion of the error cancellation switch is not operated based on the signal from the error cancellation switch. As a result, the security can be improved depending on whether or not the decision key is ON (the mode of the error canceling switch may be referred to as "the modification (10) of the decision key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), is turned OFF, and is further rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. The key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 monitors the logic of the signal from the error release switch having the pressing operation part in the payout control board 633 in the port input process of the payout control part power-on process described later, and creates the command, and the command created in the command transmission process of the payout control part power-on process described later. 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that received this command may determine whether or not the Enter key is ON. As described above, the error canceling switch is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, and when the system of the pachinko machine 1 is completely activated after the power is restored (when the power-on processing of various control boards is completed and interrupt processing is being performed) and no error has occurred as the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation part of the error canceling switch is not operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit is being operated based on a signal from the error release switch in the frame command reception processing in the main control timer interrupt processing to be described later, and receives a command to that effect. As a result, the security can be improved depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on (mode 2 of the error release switch may be referred to as "variation (11) of the enter key").

In the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned on. Thus, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON, and the decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead of this, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided in the payout control board 633, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is inputted to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and in the payout control board 633. It may be branched and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the determination key is ON based on the operation signal input. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when the depressing operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while depressing the depressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f), and when a setting change that can change and determine the setting value is performed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a is a predetermined area of the RAM built in itself (specified out of all areas of the RAM). area except area.) must be cleared. Therefore, since the main control MPU 1310a always clears the predetermined area of the RAM built in itself by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the RAM clear switch 1310f can be diverted as an enter key, and the main control MPU 1310a operates the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. is pressed, it can be determined that the determination key is ON, while based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, when the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the enter key ON.

The pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633 is exposed through an opening formed in the cover of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f. A wire penetration prevention part is molded in the cover body for the opening so that a wire or the like cannot enter through the "gap" formed between the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the opening corresponding thereto and modify the payout control board 633. structure.

The position where the RAM clear switch 1310f is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of an error release switch having a depressing operation portion which will be described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, a sticker printed with the name of each button is pasted on the position corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error cancellation switch so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error cancellation switch are not confused (instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body). In order not to confuse the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error cancel switch, a button with a cover covering the depressing operation part of either the RAM clear switch 1310f or the error canceling switch (the cover must be opened in order to depress the depressing operation part) may be employed, or the depressing operation part may be of a different color, or the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error canceling switch may have different outer shapes or different depressing operation parts. As 1310f, another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be employed. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the RAM clear switch 1310f include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotary operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Further, when the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error cancellation switch are provided on the payout control board 633, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern for the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern for the error cancellation switch are formed on the payout control board 633 so as not to come close to each other (at a distance from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector of the payout control board 633 (the terminal of the connector of the main control board 1310) is also formed at a distance. Also in the substrate 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the error canceling switch are also formed so as not to come close to each other (at a distance from each other). Further, when the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a may be set to a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the RAM clear switch mode (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may also be included) may be referred to as "determination key modification (12)" in some cases).

In the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned on. Thus, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the enter key ON, and the enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, a RAM clear switch 1310f is provided in the payout control board 633, and the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 processes the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f in the payout control unit power-on processing described later. A command is created by monitoring in the port input process, the command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later is transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that received this command may determine whether the decision key is ON. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when the depressing operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while depressing the depressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f), and when a setting change that can change and determine the setting value is performed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a is a predetermined area of the RAM built in itself (specified out of all areas of the RAM). area except area.) must be cleared. Therefore, since the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is performed while the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears the predetermined area of the RAM built in itself. Therefore, the RAM clear switch 1310f can be diverted as a decision key, and the main control MPU 1310a responds to the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 in the frame command reception processing in the main control timer interrupt processing described later. When the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is being operated based on this, and receives a command notifying that effect, it can determine that the decision key is ON. As a result, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the decision key ON (the RAM clear switch mode 2 (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be referred to as "the decision key modification (13)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees so as to return to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned on, is turned off, and is further turned counterclockwise 60 degrees to perform a second ON operation, whereby the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball cut detection sensor 574, or the payout detection sensor 591 is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and is branched at the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. 1310a, and based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on, or monitor the logic of the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball cut detection sensor 574, or the payout detection sensor 591. The command may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receiving this command may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the mode of the payout unit (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be referred to as "modification (16) of the enter key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees so as to return to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned on, is turned off, and is further turned counterclockwise 60 degrees to perform a second ON operation, whereby the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the body frame 4 remains open with respect to the outer frame 2. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the mode of the main body frame opening switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be referred to as "modification (17) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the set value must close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to turn on the enter key.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees so as to return to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned on, is turned off, and is further turned counterclockwise 60 degrees to perform a second ON operation, whereby the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Although the key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch, and can decide that the decision key is not ON when the door frame 3 remains closed with respect to the body frame 4. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the mode of the door frame opening switch (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be referred to as "modification (17) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the set value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the enter key.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and is then turned OFF by 60 degrees counterclockwise. The decision key can be turned on, and the decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, the setting key switch 1311a may be provided on the main control board 1310 (the mode of the setting key switch may be described as "the decision key modification (18)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and is then turned OFF by 60 degrees counterclockwise. The decision key can be turned ON, and the decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. This setting key switch 1311a is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by turning the setting key cylinder from the rotational position where the setting key switch 1311a is ON to the initial position and turning it OFF. By inputting the signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the Enter key is ON when the OFF signal is input, and can determine that the Enter key is not ON when the OFF signal is not input. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the setting key switch mode 2 (the setting key switch mode 1311a' may be included) may be referred to as "determination key modification (19)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees so as to return to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned on, is turned off, and is further turned counterclockwise 60 degrees to perform a second ON operation, whereby the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Although the key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, instead of this, the main control board 1310 may be provided with an enter key button having a pressing operation part. In this case, the push operation portion of the enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and a wire entry prevention portion is molded in the cover body for the opening so that a wire or the like cannot enter through the "gap" formed between the push operation portion of the enter key button and the opening corresponding thereto and modify the main control board 1310. When the pressing operation portion of the decision key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the determination key button is being pressed based on the detection signal from the determination key button, and can determine that the determination key is not ON when the pressing portion of the determination key button is not being pressed.

The position where the enter key button is arranged on the main control board 1310 may be in the vicinity of the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the cover body of the main control board box 1320, a sticker printed with the name of each button is pasted on the position corresponding to the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so as not to confuse the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f (instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body). Also, in order not to confuse the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f, a button with a cover covering the depressing operation part of either the decision key button or the RAM clear switch 1310f (the cover must be opened in order to press the depressing operation part) may be adopted, or the depressing operation part may have a different color, or the decision key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f may have different outer shapes or different depressing operation part shapes. A switch of another type that does not have a pressing operation part may be adopted as the switch. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the decision key button include various switches such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotary operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Further, when the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are provided on the main control board 1310, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern for the enter key button and the wiring pattern for the RAM clear switch 1310f are formed on the main control board 1310 so as not to approach each other (separate from each other). In addition, when the enter key button is provided on the main control board 1310, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the mode 2 of the determination key button (may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modification (20) of the determination key").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees so as to return to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned on, is turned off, and is further turned counterclockwise 60 degrees to perform a second ON operation, whereby the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Although the key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the Enter key is ON based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when the depressing operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while depressing the depressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f), and when a setting change that can change and determine the setting value is performed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a is a predetermined area of the RAM built in itself (specified out of all areas of the RAM). area except area.) must be cleared. Therefore, since the main control MPU 1310a always clears the predetermined area of the RAM built in itself by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is being pressed, the RAM clear switch 1310f can be diverted as an enter key. On the other hand, based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, when the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved with respect to the presence or absence of the enter key ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set to a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the RAM clear switch mode 3 (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be referred to as "determination key modification (21)"). It should be noted that the period in which the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, as will be described later.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees so as to return to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned on, is turned off, and is further turned counterclockwise 60 degrees to perform a second ON operation, whereby the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the gate sensor 2601 of the gate 2002 provided on the game board 5, various sensors of various winning holes (for example, general winning hole sensor 3001, first starting hole sensor 3002, second starting hole sensor 2401, variable winning hole sensor 2526, first big winning hole sensor 2525, The main control MPU 1310a, which receives detection signals from the second prize winning opening sensor 2561) and the out sensor 664 of the main body frame 4, may determine whether or not the enter key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (various types of sensors (the setting key switch 1311a' may also be included) may be referred to as "determination key modification (22)"). In this case, the person who changes the set value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, send the game ball B to the gate 2002, send the game ball B to various prize-winning ports, or send the game ball B to the out port 1008 in order to turn on the enter key.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees so as to return to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned on, is turned off, and is further turned counterclockwise 60 degrees to perform a second ON operation, whereby the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a controls the driving of the electric drive source such as a stepping motor, DC motor, solenoid, etc. to control the operation of the movable body (accessory), and determines the original position and the operating position of the movable body (accessory) based on the detection signal from the optical sensor (photo sensor, distance measuring sensor, etc.). The main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON based on the detection signal from the formula sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the aspect of the optical role sensor (may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "determination key modification (23)"). In this case, the person who changes the set value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and move the movable body (accessory object) so that the optical sensor detects the original position, the operating position, etc. of the movable body (accessory object) in order to turn the enter key ON.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees so as to return to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned on, is turned off, and is further turned counterclockwise 60 degrees to perform a second ON operation, whereby the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 for detecting illegal magnetism in the game area 5a is input may determine whether the determination key is ON based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the magnetic sensor aspect (the setting key switch 1311a' aspect may be included) may be referred to as "determination key modification (24)"). In this case, the person who changes the set value needs to bring the magnet close to the front of the game board 5 from the front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the enter key.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees so as to return to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned on, is turned off, and is further turned counterclockwise 60 degrees to perform a second ON operation, whereby the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5, and to enter various winning openings and gates (gate 2002) provided on the game board 5. When a vibration sensor for detection is provided on the game board 5, the main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence or absence of cheating based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor, and may determine whether the enter key is ON based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the vibration sensor mode (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be referred to as "determination key modification (25)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the decision key.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees so as to return to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned on, is turned off, and is further turned counterclockwise 60 degrees to perform a second ON operation, whereby the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, if the game board 5 or the payout device 580 is provided with a radio wave sensor for detecting a fraudulent act of illegally acquiring the game ball B by irradiating the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves to cause the various sensors of the various winning holes provided on the game board 5 or the various sensors provided on the payout device 580 to malfunction, the main control MPU 1 310a may determine the presence or absence of fraud based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and may determine the presence or absence of the enter key ON based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the radio wave sensor mode (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a' may also be included) may be referred to as "determination key modification (26)"). In this case, it is necessary for the person who changes the setting value to irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves in order to turn on the decision key.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees so as to return to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned on, is turned off, and is further turned counterclockwise 60 degrees to perform a second ON operation, whereby the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. A key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 , but instead of this, a detection signal from the press detection sensor 373 that detects the press operation of the press operation section 303 of the production operation section unit 350 and a detection signal from the contact detection sensor body 358 that detects contact of the contact operation section 302 of the production operation section unit 350 are inputted to the peripheral control board 1510 . It may be branched at 0 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the aspect of the effect operation button unit (the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a' may be included) may be referred to as "determination key modification (27)").

In the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are housed in the internal space of the main control board box 1320 composed of the cover body and the base body. In the main control board box 1320, the cover body and the base body are crimped by a one-way screw or the like of the crimping portion. This caulking part is a sealing mechanism, and has a plurality of them. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by crimping the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like of the crimping part using a single sealing mechanism. Next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism must be destroyed. That is, unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed, the cover cannot be removed from the base. Such a structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the push operation portion of the enter key button are exposed through the corresponding opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320. However, wire penetration is prevented from entering through the "gap" formed between the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the push operation portion of the enter key button and the opening corresponding to the push operation portion of the enter key button to alter the setting change board 1311. It becomes a structure in which the part is molded on the cover body. As the structure of the setting change board box, unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, if the cover can be opened or closed from the base, a setting change board cover open/close switch capable of detecting the opening of the cover with respect to the base may be provided. In this case, the detection signal from the setting change board cover opening/closing switch may be directly input to the main control board 1310, or (indirectly) input to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. Based on the detection signal from the opening/closing switch for the setting change board cover, the case where the cover is released from the base can be included in the above-described predetermined set value change permission conditions (the setting change board box mode may be described as "determination key modification (28)").

In the above-described embodiment, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are connected to each other, and in order to prevent unauthorized modification, a wiring pattern for transmitting a setting key ON signal for the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting a decision key ON signal for the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting an OFF signal for the setting key switch 1311a, and a setting switching button 1311. The wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the setting change board 1311 is formed so as not to come close to each other (separate from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed at a distance. , the wiring pattern for transmitting the ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, and the wiring pattern for transmitting the OFF signal for the setting key switch 1311a) and the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the setting changeover button 1311b (separated from each other). 1310 may be connected (inter-board connection) to another connector provided on the main control board 1310 separately from the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 via another connector provided on the setting change board 1311 separately from the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311. (The mode of routing the wiring pattern may be described as a “determination key modification (29)”).

In addition, it is also possible to adopt a mode in which one of the above-described modification examples (1) to (29) of the decision key is appropriately selected and combined (the selected combination mode of the modification example may be described as “the modification example (30) of the decision key”).

In addition, in the above-described set values, in addition to the probability for lottery determination whether it is a big hit or not, the probability for lottery determination when changing from the variable probability time to the normal time, the distribution rate to the area advantageous to the player, etc. can be changed. In the present embodiment, setting values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are prepared in advance as setting values, and the probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player from setting value 1 to setting value 6 is set in advance. By the way, although the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of set values ranging from set value 1 to set value 6, some other pachinko machines have a single set value in which the probability of being advantageous to the player (advantage degree) is preset. That is, there are game specifications such as the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in which the probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player exists as a plurality of set values in advance and the setting needs to be changed, and game specifications in which only a single set value of the probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player exists in advance and setting change is not necessary at all. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed according to such game specifications, and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are dependent on the game specifications, so that the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 have similar or different hardware configurations depending on the game specifications. Therefore, it is desired that the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be used in common without depending on the game specifications, that is, without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

For example, in a game specification in which there is only a single set value in advance for the probability of being advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) and no setting change is required, there is no need to use the set value as the probability of being advantageous to the player (degree of advantage).

For example, the main control MPU 1310a can set a plurality of actual machine confirmation operation patterns after clearing a predetermined area of the built-in RAM (an area excluding a specific area out of the entire area of the RAM). In this case, actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1 that designates "all operations (operation of movable body (character object), lighting of light emitter)" is assigned as setting value 1 for the operation of the movable body (character object) and lighting of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a. Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 is assigned as setting value 4, which specifies "detailed operations of the movable body (character object) (variation of movement speed, movement over the entire operation area, interference check with other structures and other movable bodies (character object), operation order with other movable bodies (character object), etc.)", and actual machine confirmation operation that designates "lighting of the light emitter per port (i.e., lighting of the light emitter by a predetermined output port unit (that is, each output port) of the main control MPU 1310a)" as the setting value 5. Pattern 5 is assigned, and actual machine confirmation operation pattern 6 that designates "no operation" as setting value 6 is assigned (the mode of change setting of actual machine confirmation operation after RAM clearing is sometimes described as "modification (1) by common hardware configuration"). In addition, the main control MPU 1310a performs the operation of the movable body (accessory) and the lighting of the light emitter such as the lamp and the LED by repeatedly performing the operation of confirming the real machine after clearing the RAM and the main control side timer interrupt processing described later. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, can operate the movable body (accessory) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 and light up the luminous body according to the contents (actual machine confirmation operation pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing and setting the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM, it is possible to provide variations in the method of starting the pachinko machine 1 after clearing the RAM.

Also, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of times from the end of the pattern fluctuation until the demonstration (demonstration effect performed while waiting for the player). In this case, time setting pattern 1 is assigned to specify "10 seconds" as setting value 1, time setting pattern 2 is assigned to specify "15 seconds" as setting value 2, time setting pattern 3 is assigned to specify "20 seconds" as setting value 3, time setting pattern 4 is assigned to specify "25 seconds" as setting value 4, time setting pattern 5 is assigned to specify "30 seconds" as setting value 5, and time setting pattern 6 is assigned to specify "35 seconds" as setting value 6. (The mode of changing the setting of the time from the end of the symbol variation to the player waiting state may be described as "modification (2) by common hardware configuration"). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing and setting the time from the completion of the symbol variation to the player waiting state, it is possible to provide variation in the time from the completion of the symbol variation to the demonstration.

In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of contents of a demonstration (demonstration performed in a waiting state for the player) to be performed after the pattern variation is completed. In this case, a setting value 1 is assigned a demonstration effect setting pattern 1 that specifies "comical effect", a setting value 2 is assigned a demonstration effect setting pattern 2 that specifies "comical effect, action effect of movable bodies (characters)", a setting value 3 is assigned a demonstration effect setting pattern 3 that specifies "serious effect", a setting value 4 is assigned a demonstration effect setting pattern 4 that specifies "serial effect, action effect of movable bodies (characters)", and a setting value 5 is "historical effect". A demonstration production setting pattern 5 is assigned, and a demonstration production setting pattern 6 specifying ``historical drama style production, movable body (role object)'' as a setting value 6 is assigned (the mode of change setting of the content of the demonstration presentation may be described as ``modification (3) by common hardware configuration''). In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can demonstrate with a demonstration effect (demonstration effect setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the manner of changing and setting the content of the demonstration effect, variations can be given to the content of the demonstration effect performed after the pattern variation is completed.

Also, for example, it can be used as a set value for setting a plurality of default sound volumes to be adjusted by the sound volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 . By rotating the volume control switch, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "volume 1" is assigned as setting value 1, volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "volume 2" is assigned as setting value 2, volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "volume 3" is assigned as setting value 3, volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" is assigned as setting value 4, volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "volume 5" is assigned as setting value 5, and volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "volume 6" is assigned as setting value 6 (change in default volume). The mode of setting may be described as "modified example (4) based on common hardware configuration"). It should be noted that the volume is set to increase from setting value 1 to setting value 6. FIG. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, sets the default sound volume (volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. In addition, the default volume of "volume 1" assigned to the set value 1 may be muted when the volume control switch is moved in the direction of decreasing the volume (moved in the direction opposite to the direction of increasing the volume) and completely moved to the end of the volume minimum side and adjusted to the minimum side volume, or the volume may be such that the sound can be recognized when the player stops in front of the pachinko machine. In addition, the default volume of "volume 6" assigned to the set value 6 may be the maximum volume or a predetermined percentage (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume when the volume control switch is moved in the direction of increasing the volume (moved in the direction opposite to the direction of decreasing the volume) and completely moved to the end of the maximum volume side and adjusted to the maximum side volume. This mode of changing and setting the default sound volume allows variation in the default sound volume adjusted by the sound volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 .

Also, for example, it can be used as a set value for setting a plurality of sound volumes of error notification sounds for error notification such as various problems, gotos, and errors. Various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, they are not dependent), and although the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound is easily noticed by the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall by maximizing the volume, it may be offensive to the players who are playing games with other pachinko machines. Therefore, there is also a demand for a device capable of adjusting the volume of various error notification sounds. In this case, error notification volume setting pattern 1 is assigned as setting value 1, error notification volume setting pattern 2 is assigned as setting value 2, error notification volume setting pattern 3 is assigned as setting value 3, error notification volume setting pattern 4 is assigned as setting value 4, and error notification volume setting pattern 5 is assigned as setting value 5. is assigned, and an error notification volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)" as the setting value 6 is assigned (the mode of changing the volume of the error notification sound may be described as "modification (5) by common hardware configuration"). The volume of the error notification sound is set so that the volume of the error notification sound increases from the set value 1 (the volume at which the error notification sound can be recognized when stopped in front of the pachinko machine emitting the error notification sound) to the set value 6 (the maximum volume and the volume at which the error notification sound can be sufficiently recognized even if the player is several meters away from the pachinko machine emitting the error notification sound). The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, performs control to emit an error notification sound at the error notification sound volume (error notification volume setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the manner of changing and setting the volume of the error notification sound, it is possible to provide variation in the volume of the error notification sound in the error notification.

Also, for example, it can be used as a set value for setting a plurality of default luminances of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs. It is possible to increase or decrease the brightness from the default brightness for the light emitters to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a. In this case, a default brightness setting pattern 1 specifying "brightness 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, a default brightness setting pattern 2 specifying "brightness 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, a default brightness setting pattern 3 specifying "brightness 3" is assigned as the setting value 3, a default brightness setting pattern 4 specifying "brightness 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, a default brightness setting pattern 5 specifying "brightness 5" is assigned as the setting value 5, and a default brightness setting pattern 6 specifying "brightness 6" is assigned as the setting value 6. (The mode of changing and setting the default luminance may be described as “modification (6) based on common hardware configuration”). Note that the main control MPU 1310a adjusts the luminance of the light emitters by repeatedly performing main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to change the default luminance, and perform lighting, blinking, gradation points, and the like of the light emitters. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, can adjust the brightness of the light emitters to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command, and perform lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitters. Variations can be given to the default brightness of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs by changing and setting the content of the default brightness.

In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of luminances of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs for reporting errors such as various defects, gotos, and errors. The lamp to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a is assigned an error notification luminance setting pattern 1 that designates "error notification luminance 1" as the setting value 1, an error notification luminance setting pattern 2 that designates "error notification luminance 2" as the setting value 2, an error notification luminance setting pattern 3 that designates "error notification luminance 3" as the setting value 3, an error notification luminance setting pattern 4 that designates "error notification luminance 4" as the setting value 4, and a setting value 5. An error notification luminance setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification luminance 5" is assigned, and an error notification luminance setting pattern 6 that specifies "error notification luminance 6 (maximum luminance)" is assigned as the setting value 6 (the mode of changing the luminance of the light emitter in error notification may be described as "modification (7) by common hardware configuration"). The brightness of the lamp is set so that it increases from setting value 1 (the brightness of the lamp is low so that an error notification can be recognized when the player stops in front of the pachinko machine even though it is not turned off) to setting value 6 (maximum brightness). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitters by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to change and set the brightness of the light emitters in error notification, and perform lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitters. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, can adjust the brightness of the light emitters to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification luminance (error notification luminance setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command, and perform lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitters. By changing and setting the luminance of the light emitters in this error notification, it is possible to provide variations in the luminance of the light emitters such as lamps and LEDs in the error notification.

In addition, the various setting values assigned to the modifications (1) to (7) based on the common hardware configuration described above are displayed on the setting display device 1310g when predetermined setting value display permission conditions are met in the setting value confirmation display processing described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a. )”).

Also, any one of the modifications (1) to (8) based on the above-described common hardware configuration may be appropriately selected and adopted as the above-described modification (30) of the enter key.

Further, the above-described predetermined setting value change permission condition requires that, when power is restored to the pachinko machine 1 or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure), the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission etc. In addition, when the above-described predetermined set value change permission condition is established at the time of power restoration of the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a performs setting change processing in the main control side power-on processing described later to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then proceed with the game by setting interrupt permission etc. In other words, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f, and when the above-described predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is restored, the main control MPU 1310a clears the entire area of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on process described later, and then proceeds with the game by setting the interrupt permission. Therefore, as the above-described predetermined setting value change permission condition, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (an instantaneous power failure), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. The pressing operation portion of 0f may be pressed (this may be described as "a modification of the predetermined setting value change permission condition").

In addition, the predetermined setting value display permission condition described above requires that when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after power is restored after a power failure (an instantaneous power failure), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation. When this predetermined setting value display permission condition is established, the main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value set on the setting display 1310g in the setting value confirmation display processing performed as one processing of the main control side timer interrupt processing described later. Moreover, as described above, the RAM clear switch 1310f needs to be pressed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and the period of pressing is limited. Therefore, as the above-described predetermined setting value display permission condition, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. The pressing operation portion of 0f does not have to be pressed (this may be described as "a modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition"). In this case, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform set value confirmation and display processing as part of the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, but performs the internal WDT initial setting and startup setting in the main control side power-on processing, which will be described later, and then performs the interrupt permission setting, etc., to proceed with the game. When the modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition is established and the setting value confirmation display processing is performed, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the interrupt permission setting yet, and therefore does not perform the main control side timer interrupt processing. The setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the turning position of the setting key cylinder (turning OFF) to perform the first ON operation. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a reads the detection signal from the body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a when the modification of the predetermined set value display permission condition is established and the set value confirmation display process is performed.

By adopting both the above-described modification of the predetermined set value change permission condition and the above-described modification of the predetermined set value display permission condition, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when the power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure), the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise 60 degrees to the first. On the premise that the setting key is ON by being ON-operated, when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is being pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs setting change processing in the main control side power-on processing to be described later to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission etc. 0a carries out set value confirmation display processing in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then proceeds with the game by performing interrupt permission setting and the like. By adopting this mode, the main control MPU 1310a never performs the set value confirmation display process once the progress of the game is started. In other words, the main control MPU 1310a never displays the currently set setting value on the setting display 1310g when the progress of the game is started by performing the interrupt permission setting or the like. The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls B collected by the out-ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4 through the out-ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4 through the out-port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 in the ball count processing of the main-control-side power-on processing to be described later, and outputs the number of game balls B collected by the out-port 1008 to the base monitor 1310h in the port output processing of the main-control-side power-on processing to be described later. Display at 310h. Therefore, the current set value displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the base monitor 1310h described above (this may be described as a "modification of the method of using the base monitor"). As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can use the base monitor 1310h to display the current setting values that have been set in the period from when the power is restored until the progress of the game is started by performing the interrupt permission setting, etc., and when the progress of the game is started by performing the interrupt permission setting after the power is restored, the number of game balls B collected by the outlet 1008 (out ball path 663 of the main body frame 4) can be displayed. It becomes unnecessary to provide 1310g, and can contribute to cost reduction.

Further, any one of the above-described modification of the predetermined setting value change permission condition, the modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, and the modification of the method of using the base monitor may be appropriately selected and adopted as the above-described modification of the enter key (30).

Further, any one of the above-described modification of the predetermined setting value change permission condition, the above-described modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, and the above-described modification of the method of using the base monitor may be selected as appropriate and employed in the above-described modifications (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 137 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the lottery result of normal symbols, the lottery result of special symbols, and the like.

Although not shown in detail, the function display unit 1400 is provided with a status indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game status, a normal symbol indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the gate 2002, and a normal holding indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the reception of the game ball B to the gate 2002.

In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display device consisting of eight LEDs that displays the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2004, a first special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting port 2004, and eight indicators that display the lottery result of the second special pattern drawn by accepting the game ball B into the second starting port 2005. It has a second special symbol indicator made up of LEDs and a second special reserved number indicator made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2005. - 特許庁

Further, the function display unit 1400 is provided with a round indicator consisting of five LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing patterns of the first big prize opening 2006 and the second big prize opening 2007 when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is "win" or the like.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc., can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 144 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is provided behind the performance display device 1600 provided behind the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 160) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling lighting effects, sound effects, movable effects, and the like, and an effect display control part 1512 for controlling effect images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the side of the door frame 3, the effect display device 1600, etc. (see FIG. 160).

The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the set plate 1650 that attaches the performance display device 1600 to the back box 3010, although the details will be described later.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 and the set plate 1650 . The effect display device 1600, which will be described later in detail, is attached to the front surface of a set plate 1650 detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the rear box 3010 (see FIGS. 151 to 153). The performance display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the transparent game panel 1100 and the frame-like center accessory 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 .

The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and is mounted vertically. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, with the front end projecting forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and the rear end partly projecting into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 .

The table unit 2000 includes a plurality of (here, four) general winning holes 2001 which are always open to receive the game ball B hit into the game area 5a, a gate 2002 provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting the passage of the game ball B, and a variable winning opening 20 which can accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of the normal pattern drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate 2002. 03, a first start port 2004 and a second start port 2005 which are provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and are always open to accept the game ball B, a first big winning port 2006 and a first big winning port 2006 which are capable of receiving the game ball B according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005. A second big prize winning opening 2007 is provided at a position different from the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005 and is capable of accepting the game ball B according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005.例文帳に追加

The front unit 2000 further includes a first sub-out port 2021 and a second sub-out port 2022 which are provided at predetermined positions in the game area 5a and which are always open to accept the game ball B.

A plurality of (here, four) general winning holes 2001 are arranged on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction in the lower part of the game area 5a. The gate 2002 is arranged near the left end in the front view in the game area 5a at a height slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction. The variable prize winning opening 2003 is arranged on the upper right side of the gate 2002 . The first starting port 2004 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowest end at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The second starting port 2005 is arranged above the first starting port 2004 on the right side of the first starting port 2004 in the lower part of the game area 5a. The first big prize winning opening 2006 is arranged directly above the variable winning opening 2003 at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom in the game area 5a. The second big winning opening 2007 is arranged close to the right end of the game area 5a slightly higher than the height of 3/4 from the bottom in the game area 5a.

The first sub-out port 2021 is arranged between the second big winning port 2007 and the left end of the game area 5a. The second sub-out port 2022 is arranged to the right of the second starting port 2005 .

The front unit 2000 includes a starter unit 2100 that is attached directly above the lower end of the game area 5a in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and has a first starter opening 2004, a side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starter unit 2100 in front view and has four general winning openings 2001, and a side unit 2200 that is provided slightly above the left side in front view. A unit 2300 and a lower right unit 2400 having a second starting port 2005 and a second sub-out port 2022 provided on the right side of the starting port unit 2100 in the front view, which is the lower right corner in the game area 5a.

In addition, the front unit 2000 is provided above the starter unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the lower right unit 2400 and slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a. A gate member 2600 having a gate 2002 is provided near the center of the area 5a in the vertical direction, and a specific obstacle nail group 2700 is provided in the right part of the game area 5a and consists of a plurality of obstacle nails N.

Although details will be described later, the lower right unit 2400 can receive the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2007, and has a pseudo big winning hole 2402 whose opening is larger than the second big winning hole 2007, and a pseudo out hole 2404 for discharging the game ball B not accepted in the pseudo big winning hole 2402 to the rear of the game panel 1100.例文帳に追加

[5-8a. starting unit]
Next, starting unit 2100 of front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 145 and the like. The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starter opening unit 2100 has a first starter opening 2004 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received.

By attaching the starting port unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first starting port 2004 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, is opened upward, and is positioned right below the center in the left-right direction of the center accessory 2500.例文帳に追加More specifically, the first starting port 2004 of the starting port unit 2100 is located directly below the center release portion 2513a of the stage 2513 in the center accessory 2500 in the assembled state on the game board 5. As a result, the game ball B released from the central release portion 2513a of the stage 2513 is received in the first start port 2004 with a high probability.

The starting port unit 2100 can guide the game ball B received in the first starting port 2004 to the rear of the game panel 1100 in a state attached to the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. - 特許庁The game ball B delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 is detected by the first starting hole sensor 3002 and discharged downward.

[5-8b. side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 145 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is provided with four general winning openings 2001 which are open to receive game balls B at all times. The four general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc along the inner rail 1002 . Each of the four general winning openings 2001 opens upward.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, the four general winning holes 2001 project forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁This side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 . The game ball B delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001 and discharged downward.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
Next, side upper left unit 2300 of front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 145 and the like. The side upper left unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 that slopes downward to the right.

When the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled on the game board 5, the shelf 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center role 2500 to the right side below the center role 2500 by the shelf part 2301 .

[5-8d. lower right unit]
Next, the lower right unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 147 and the like. The lower right unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a to the right of the starter unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in the front view, and is attached to the front of the game panel 1100 from the front. This lower right unit 2400 includes a second starting opening 2005, a second sub-out opening 2022, and a second starting opening sensor 2401 (see FIG. 149, etc.) for detecting the game ball B received in the second starting opening 2005.

In addition, the lower right unit 2400 has a pseudo big winning hole 2402 extending left and right over the full width in the horizontal direction, a pseudo big winning hole sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the pseudo big winning hole 2402, and a pseudo out hole 2404 provided below near the left end of the pseudo big winning hole 2402. The pseudo big prize winning opening 2402 and the pseudo out opening 2404 are open forward. The pseudo big prize winning opening 2402 is larger (wider) in the left and right than the second big winning opening 2007 . Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the width in the left-right direction of the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is about 170 mm, which is wider than the maximum width of 135 mm of the usually used big winning opening.

In addition, the lower right unit 2400 includes a pseudo big winning opening door 2405 that openably closes the pseudo big winning opening 2402, and a pseudo big winning opening solenoid 2406 (see FIG. 149 etc.) for opening and closing the pseudo big winning opening door 2405. The pseudo big prize winning door 2405 has a flat plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and its lower side is supported so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the horizontal direction.

In the lower right unit 2400, the second starting port 2005 is arranged to the right of the quasi-out port 2404 and right above the quasi-big prize winning port 2402, and the second sub-out port 2022 is arranged adjacent to the second activating port 2005 on the right side.

When the lower right unit 2400 is assembled on the game board 5, the left end is located near the right side of the out port 1008, the right end is close to the right rail 1005, and the length in the left-right direction covers most of the upper right rail 1004. - 特許庁

The lower right unit 2400 has a flat plate-like base plate 2407 that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a dividing portion 2410 that protrudes forward from the base plate 2407 and can form a space (pseudo game area 2010) independent of the game area 5a. The base plate 2407 and partition 2410 are made of a transparent material. The second starting opening 2005, the second sub-out opening 2022, the pseudo big winning opening 2402, and the pseudo big winning opening 2404 are provided so as to pass through the base plate 2407, and the pseudo big winning opening sensor 2403 is provided on the rear side of the base plate 2407. A pseudo big prize winning slot 2402 and a pseudo out slot 2404 are provided inside the delimiter 2410 .

The dividing portion 2410 includes a bottom wall portion 2411 that extends laterally over the entire width and is inclined so that the right end side is higher, a first standing wall portion 2412 that extends upward from the right end of the bottom wall portion 2411, a right inclined wall portion 2413 that extends diagonally to the lower left from the upper end of the first standing wall portion 2412, and a right inclined wall portion 2413 that extends horizontally from the lower end of the right inclined wall portion 2413 to the first standing wall portion 2412. a lateral wall portion 2414; a second standing wall portion 2415 which is separated leftward from the right lateral wall portion 2414 and extends upward from the first standing wall portion 2412 from a portion at the same height as the lower end of the right lateral wall portion 2414; A left horizontal wall portion 2417 extending horizontally from the lower end of the left inclined wall portion 2416 to the left beyond the second vertical wall portion 2415, an inclined wall portion 2418 extending diagonally to the lower left from the left end of the left horizontal wall portion 2417 to the same position as the left end of the bottom wall portion 2411, and a third vertical wall portion 2419 extending downward from the lower end of the inclined wall portion 2418 to a position below the left end of the bottom wall portion 2411 , has

The bottom wall portion 2411 is formed to have a length shorter than the length of the lower right rail 1004 in the left-right direction by about one game ball B. As shown in FIG. The horizontal interval between the first standing wall portion 2412 and the second standing wall portion 2415 is slightly shorter than the length of the second big winning opening 2007 in the horizontal direction. The distance between the lower end of the right slanted wall portion 2413 and the lower end of the left slanted wall portion 2416 is approximately half the length of the second big prize winning opening 2007 in the horizontal direction.

The second starting port 2005 and the second sub-out port 2022 are arranged at a portion between the second standing wall portion 2415 and the inclined wall portion 2418 in the left lateral wall portion 2417 . The pseudo big prize winning opening 2402 is arranged directly below the right lateral wall portion 2414, the left lateral wall portion 2417, and the inclined wall portion 2418, and opens forward in a shape in which a portion along the inclined wall portion 2418 is obliquely cut away from the oblong rectangle. Pseudo-out port 2404 is arranged adjacent to a portion where bottom wall portion 2411 and third standing wall portion 2419 intersect.

In addition, the lower right unit 2400 includes a flat lower right decorative portion 2431 that closes the front end side of a triangular frame formed by the first standing wall portion 2412, the right inclined wall portion 2413, and the right lateral wall portion 2414, the second standing wall portion 2415, the left inclined wall portion 2416, and the left lateral wall portion 2417. 22, and a lower right central decorative portion 2433 provided in the center between the lower right decorative portion 2431 and the lower right left decorative portion 2432 and protruding forward from the base plate 2407 in the shape of a downward arrow (see FIG. 137, etc.).

Furthermore, the lower right unit 2400 is provided behind the base plate 2407, and further has a lower right decoration board 2434 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of independently emitting light and decorating the pseudo big winning opening 2402, the lower right decoration part 2431, the lower right left decoration part 2432, and the lower right middle decoration part 2433 are mounted on the front surface.

Also, in the lower right unit 2400, transparent decorative seals are attached to the front surfaces of the pseudo grand prize winning door 2405, the lower right decorative portion 2431, the lower right left decorative portion 2432, and the lower right middle decorative portion 2433, respectively.

The lower right unit 2400 is provided in the lower right corner of the game area 5a in a state where the game balls B cannot flow to the right side and the lower side in a state assembled on the game board 5.例文帳に追加The front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is exposed forward around the upper portion of each of the right slanted wall portion 2413, the second standing wall portion 2415, and the left slanted wall portion 2416, and a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted there. A portion between the first standing wall portion 2412 and the second standing wall portion 2415 is located below the second prize winning opening 2007 of the center accessory 2500 . The upper end of the second standing wall portion 2415 is located near the lower end of the attacker left wall portion 2568 in the center accessory 2500, which will be described later, and the right side of the second standing wall portion 2415, that is, the inside of the partition portion 2410, is a space (pseudo game area 2010) independent of the game area 5a.

In the lower right unit 2400 assembled on the game board 5, the second starting port 2005 is positioned slightly to the right with respect to directly below the right discharge passage 2565 of the center accessory 2500, and the lower end (left end) of the inclined wall portion 2418 is positioned below the first starting port 2004. Above the second starting port 2005, the second sub-out port 2022, and the inclined wall portion 2418, the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is also exposed forward, and a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in this portion as well.

Further, in the lower right unit 2400 assembled on the game board 5, the pseudo out port 2404 is separated from the out port 1008 by about one game ball B to the upper right. In addition, the pseudo big prize opening sensor 2403 can be visually recognized from the front through the transparent base plate 2407 or the like.

The lower right unit 2400 can guide the game ball B received in the second starting hole 2005 to the rear of the game panel 1100, detect it by the second starting hole sensor 2401, and discharge it downward. Also, the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 can be guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and discharged downward.

The lower right unit 2400 has a pseudo big prize winning port 2402 and a pseudo out port 2404 inside the delimiter 2410 (pseudo game area 2010). Inside the partitioning portion 2410, only the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2007 is formed to circulate.

In the normal state, the lower right unit 2400 has the pseudo big winning door 2405 standing upright, and the pseudo big winning door 2402 is closed by the pseudo big winning door 2405 so that the game ball B cannot be received. In this state, the game ball B supplied to the inside of the partitioning portion 2410 (pseudo game area 2010) passes through the front of the pseudo large prize winning port door 2405 that closes the pseudo large prize winning port 2402, flows down onto the bottom wall portion 2411, rolls leftward along the slope of the bottom wall portion 2411, and is prevented from further rolling leftward by the third standing wall portion 2419. It is received in a pseudo-out port 2404 that opens forward. The game ball B received in the pseudo-out port 2404 is not returned into the game area 5a, but is discharged downward after being guided to the rear of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁

In the lower right unit 2400, the bottom wall portion 2411 is provided close to the lower right rail 1004, and the simulated out port 2404 is provided close to the out port 1008. Therefore, the game ball B rolled leftward on the bottom wall portion 2411 and received in the simulated out port 2404 gives the illusion that the game ball B rolls on the lower right rail 1004 and is received in the out port 1008. can be made

The pseudo large winning opening door 2405 closing the pseudo large winning opening 2402 rotates so that the upper end moves forward around the lower side and the upper end is positioned slightly above the lower end when the pseudo large winning opening solenoid 2406 is energized according to the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start opening 2004 or the second start opening 2005 or the lottery result of the second special symbol. Then, it protrudes forward from the base plate 2407 (game panel 1100) so that the rear becomes lower. In this state, the pseudo big winning opening 2402 can receive the game ball B. Then, when the game ball B flows down to the front of the pseudo big prize winning port 2402 when the pseudo big prize winning port 2402 is ready to receive the game ball B, it abuts on the pseudo big prize winning port door 2405 protruding forward, is guided backward by the inclination of the pseudo big prize prize port door 2405, and is received in the pseudo big prize winning port 2402.例文帳に追加

Since the pseudo big winning opening 2402 extends to the left below the right release passage 2565 for discharging downward from the center role 2500 without being accepted by the second big winning opening 2007, when the game ball B is released downward from the right discharging passage 2565 while the pseudo big winning opening 2402 (pseudo big winning opening door 2405) is opening and closing, the game ball B is also fake. The player can be tricked into thinking that he/she is being accepted in the big winning slot 2402.例文帳に追加

In addition, since it also extends to the left at a portion immediately below the second starting hole 2005 and the second sub-out hole 2022, when the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is opening and closing, the game ball B released downward from the right discharge passage 2565 of the center accessory 2500 without being accepted by the second big winning hole 2007 and received in the second starting hole 2005 and the second sub-out hole 2022 is a pseudo big winning hole. 2402 to create the illusion of acceptance.

The game ball B received in the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the pseudo big winning hole sensor 2403, and discharged downward. The pseudo big winning opening sensor 2403 can be visually recognized from the player side even through the open pseudo big winning opening 2402 . By visually recognizing the pseudo big winning hole sensor 2403, the player can be tricked into thinking that the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is a real big winning hole.

The pseudo big winning gate sensor 2403 is for executing a predetermined effect by detecting the game ball B, and opening and closing the pseudo big winning gate door 2405 by counting the number of the game balls B. By opening and closing the quasi-big prize door 2405 according to the number of game balls B received in the quasi-big prize mouth 2402, the illusion that the quasi-big prize mouth 2402 is a real big prize-winning hole can be made easier.

According to the lower right unit 2400 of the present embodiment, since it has a pseudo big winning hole 2402 that is wider than the maximum width of 135 mm, which is the maximum width of a big winning hole that is usually used, and extends long to the left and right, it is possible to give the player the illusion that it has a large big winning hole that has never been seen in a pachinko machine so far, to give a strong impact to the player, and to positively select the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play. It is possible to make it easier to play, and it is possible to enhance the appeal to the player.

Further, according to the lower right unit 2400, a right lateral wall portion 2414, a left lateral wall portion 2417, and an inclined wall portion 2418 are provided above the pseudo grand prize winning port 2402 in which the lateral direction of the pseudo grand prize winning port 2402 is larger than the lateral direction of the second grand prize winning port 2007, and the right lateral wall portion 2414 and the left lateral wall portion 241 are spaced apart by about half the distance in the lateral direction of the second grand prize winning port 2007. 7 (between the right slanted wall portion 2413 and the left slanted wall portion 2416), the game ball B is received by the pseudo big winning opening 2402.例文帳に追加As a result, a plurality of game balls B received in the second large prize winning port 2007 can be aggregated in a narrow range and directed to the pseudo big prize winning port 2402, so that the player can be given the illusion that a larger number of game balls B than the game balls B accepted in the second large prize winning port 2007 are accepted in the pseudo big prize winning port 2402, thereby greatly entertaining the player and suppressing a decline in interest. .

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 to 150 and the like. Figure 148(a) is a front view showing the right half of the front unit together with the panel plate and the obstructing nail, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front. 149(a) is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and the center right front plate in FIG. 148 and viewed from the front, and FIG. 149(b) is an exploded perspective view of the center right front plate seal and the center right front plate in FIG. 148 and viewed from the rear. 150 is an exploded perspective view from the front of FIG. 148 with only the center right front plate viewed from behind.

The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged above the starter unit 2100 in the game area 5a and slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The center accessory 2500 is formed in the shape of a transparent frame, and the effect display device 1600 provided behind the game panel 1100 and various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the front.

The center accessory 2500 will be described later in detail, but a variable winning opening 2003 that opens and closes to accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate 2002, and the first big winning opening that opens and closes to accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first start opening 2004 and the second start opening 2005 and the lottery result of the second special symbol. 2006 and a second prize winning opening 2007.

A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has a part (a part of a peripheral wall part 2501) projecting forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, so that the game ball B hit into the game area 5a cannot enter the frame.

The center accessory 2500 has a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, a flat plate-shaped flange portion 2502 that protrudes from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and contacts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and a flat plate-shaped support portion 2503 that protrudes from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward until the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is aligned with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 when assembled to the game board 5 . Moreover, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner circumference of the opening portion 1112 of the panel plate 1110 into which the center accessory 2500 is inserted. This peripheral wall part 2501 can prevent the game ball B from entering the inside of the frame from the outside of the center accessory 2500 in a state assembled to the game board 5 .

The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is formed thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 protrude from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same position in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2503 (flange portion 2502 ) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110 .

A plurality of support portions 2503 are partially provided on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501 . The support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not protrude, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501 . In addition, the support portion 2503 has an edge protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or in a linear shape, so that the support portion 2503 is inconspicuous. The support portion 2503 has a protrusion amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), thereby exerting a reinforcing effect and making it inconspicuous to the player.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2511 which is open to allow the game ball B in the game area 5a to enter, and a warp exit 2512 which is open to the rear side of the front surface of the game panel 1100 and opens in the frame behind the front surface of the game panel 1100 so that the game ball B entering the warp entrance 2511 can be released. , a stage 2513 capable of releasing the game ball B released from the warp exit 2512 into the game area 5a after rolling in the horizontal direction, and a stage cover 2515 provided to cover the upper part of the stage 2513 (see FIG. 146, etc.). The stage cover 2515 bounces back the game ball B bounced on the stage 2513 to the stage 2513 side, thereby preventing the game ball B from entering from outside the frame of the center accessory 2500 into the frame.

The stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 is curved with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) such that the position corresponding to the position directly above the first start-up port 2004 of the starter unit 2100, that is, the substantially central position in the left-right direction when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. The stage 2513 has a portion (central release portion 2513a) which is slightly higher than both left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction and the lowest portion (side release portion 2513b) on both left and right sides thereof, which is inclined so as to be lowered forward, and the game ball B can be released into the game area 5a from these portions.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5 , the raised part (central discharge part 2513 a ) at the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2513 is located directly above the first starter opening 2004 of the starter unit 2100 . As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central release portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, it is received in the first start port 2004 with a very high probability.

[5-8e-1. 1st Attacker Division]
The center accessory 2500 has a first attacker part 2520 having a variable winning opening 2003 and a first big winning opening 2006 above the warp entrance 2511 on the left outer side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall part 2501 . The first attacker part 2520 of the center accessory 2500 includes a variable winning opening door 2521 that can open and close the variable winning opening 2003, a variable winning opening solenoid 2522 (see FIG. 160, etc.) that is energized according to the lottery result of the normal pattern drawn by the passage of the game ball B through the gate 2002 and opens and closes the variable winning opening solenoid 2522 (see FIG. 160, etc.), and the game ball B received in the variable winning opening 2003. A variable winning opening sensor 2526 that detects

In addition, the first attacker part 2520 includes a first large winning opening door 2523 that can open and close the first large winning opening 2006, and a first large winning opening solenoid 2524 that opens and closes the first large winning opening door 2523 by being energized according to the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005 and the lottery result of the second special symbol (See FIG. 160 etc.) and a first big winning hole sensor 2525 for detecting the game ball B received in the first big winning hole 2006.例文帳に追加

Further, the first attacker section 2520 has a center left front plate 2527 in the form of a transparent flat plate provided in front of the variable winning opening 2003, the first big winning opening 2006, and the left second guide passage 2532 (see FIG. 137, etc.).

The center accessory 2500 is provided with a first attacker part 2520 above the warp entrance 2511 on the left outer side of the frame-shaped peripheral wall part 2501 . The first attacker section 2520 has a variable winning opening 2003 and a first big winning opening 2006 .

The variable winning opening 2003 is provided above the warp entrance 2511, and opens leftward in front of the flange portion 2502 extending outward from the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and near the center in the vertical direction of the center accessory 2500. In addition, the first big winning hole 2006 is opened upward with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B directly above the variable winning hole 2003 .

The variable winning opening door 2521 is rotatably supported on the lower end side around an axis extending back and forth, and can be closed so as to accept the game ball B with respect to the variable winning opening 2003 by putting it in an upright state (normal state). When the variable winning opening solenoid 2522 is energized, the variable winning opening door 2521 rotates so that the upper end moves leftward, and the variable winning opening 2003 can be put in a state (open state) in which the game ball B can be received. When the variable prize winning port door 2521 is in an open state, the upper end side is higher than the lower end side and is inclined to be lower rightward, so that the game ball B flowing down from above and contacting the upper surface can be guided to the variable winning port 2003 on the right side.

The game ball B received in the variable winning opening 2003 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and after being detected by the variable winning opening sensor 2526, is delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and discharged downward.

The first big prize winning opening door 2523 is in the form of a flat plate that is inclined downward to the left, and is provided so as to be able to move forward and backward from the front surface of the flange portion 2502 . In a normal state, the first big winning opening door 2523 protrudes forward from the flange portion 2502, making it impossible to accept the game ball B into the first big winning opening 2006.例文帳に追加In this state, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper side of the first big winning opening door 2523 is guided leftward by the inclination of the first big winning opening door 2523 and flows through the left second guide passage 2532 .

When the first big winning opening solenoid 2524 is energized, the front end of the first big winning opening door 2523 retreats rearward from the front surface of the flange part 2502, and the first big winning opening 2006 can receive the game ball B. In this state, the game ball B received in the first big winning hole 2006 flows down in front of the flange part 2502, is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2525 provided at a height between the first big winning hole 2006 and the variable winning hole 2003, and is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 right above the variable winning hole 2003. After that, the game ball B is delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and ejected downward.

[5-8e-2. Left guidance passage group]
The center accessory 2500 is provided in front of the flange portion 2502 on the left outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and has a left guide passage group 2530 consisting of a plurality of (here, two) passages through which the game balls B can flow. In other words, between the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and the inner rail 1002, a left guide passage group 2530 consisting of a plurality of (here, two) passages through which the game balls B can flow is provided. Therefore, when the game ball B hits the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B circulates, the game ball B always passes through the left guide path group 2530 .

The left guide passage group 2530 is provided below and to the left of the upper end of the inner rail 1002 when the game board 5 is assembled, and is located at a height of about 2/3 from the bottom of the game area 5a. The left guide passage group 2530 has a height approximately three times the diameter of the game ball B in the vertical direction. The left guide passage group 2530 is formed so that the game balls B in circulation can be visually recognized in good condition.

The left guide passage group 2530 is composed of a left first guide passage 2531 in contact with the inner rail 1002 and a left second guide passage 2532 provided on the right side of the left first guide passage 2531 . The left first guide passage 2531 and the left second guide passage 2532 are partitioned by a passage wall 2533 projecting forward from the flange portion 2502 .

A first big winning opening 2006 is provided downstream of the entrance of the left second guide passage 2532 . Therefore, when it is desired to receive the game ball B into the first big winning hole 2006 , it is necessary to perform a driving operation so that the game ball B enters the left second guide passage 2532 .

[5-8e-3. Right guidance passage group]
Further, the center accessory 2500 has a right guide passage group 2540 which is provided in the upper right corner and consists of a plurality of (here, two) passages through which the game balls B can circulate. When the center role 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end of the right guide path group 2540 (the end of the upper right corner of the center role 2500) is substantially in contact with the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5a (the right rail 1005 near the blocking portion 1006 of the front component 1000), so that the game ball B struck to the right above the center role 2500 must pass through the right guide path group 2540. formed.

The right guide passage group 2540 has a length in the vertical direction that is about 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. This right guide passage group 2540 allows the game balls B in circulation to be visually recognized in good condition.

The right guide passage group 2540 is provided on the right outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500, and is composed of a right first guide passage 2541 separated from the peripheral wall portion 2501 and a right second guide passage 2542 provided on the right side of the right first guide passage 2541. The entrance of the right first guide passage 2541 and the entrance of the right second guide passage 2542 are separated left and right.

The first right guide passage 2541 extends rearward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 at a portion immediately below the entrance, then extends downward, then extends forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 at a position right below the entrance, and the exit opens obliquely to the lower right. In addition, the right second guide passage 2542 extends downward from the entrance and then bends to the right, and the exit opens obliquely to the lower right while being aligned on the right side of the exit of the right first guide passage 2541 . In other words, the right first guide passage 2541 and the right second guide passage 2542 are twisted so that the left and right cross each other.

The right guide path group 2540 is located above the space forming part 2550 (specific obstacle nail group 2700) in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. As shown in FIG. In addition, the right first guide passage 2541 has the right end of its entrance located directly below the lower end of the impingement portion 1006 of the front component 1000, and is formed so that most of the game balls B that abut against the impingement portion 1006 enter the right first guide passage 2541.

The game ball B that has entered the right first guide passage 2541 is released to the side near the right peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and enters the first guide area 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, which will be described later. On the other hand, the game ball B that has entered the right second guide passage 2542 is released near the right rail 1005 and enters the second guide area 2712 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 described later. Although the details will be described later, since the game ball B that has entered the second guide area 2712 is more likely to be received by the first sub-out port 2021 provided downstream, if the game ball B is made to enter the right second guide passage 2542, it is more likely to be received by the first sub-out port 2021 than when it is made to enter the right first guide passage 2541.

This right guide passage group 2540 is provided with a circulation detection sensor 2543 capable of detecting the game ball B that is circulating in the right first guide passage 2541 (see FIG. 144). As a result, for example, when the number of game balls B detected by the circulation detection sensor 2543 is less than a predetermined number per hour in a game situation in which the player is forced to hit the right side, it is possible to prompt the player to hit the right side or instruct the strength of the ball to avoid entering the first sub-out port 2021 by entering the right second guide passage 2542 in order to make the game situation more enjoyable.

[5-8e-4. Space forming part]
The center accessory 2500 includes a space forming portion 2550 provided below the right guide passage group 2540 and a second attacker portion 2560 provided below the space forming portion 2550 (see FIG. 147, etc.). The space forming portion 2550 is provided between the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the right rail 1005, and is formed at a height approximately half of the total height of the game area 5a. The second attacker section 2560 has a second big winning opening 2007 and a first sub-out opening 2021 and is provided at the lower right corner of the center accessory 2500 .

In the space forming portion 2550 , the flange portion 2502 extending rightward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends to a position close to the right rail 1005 when the game board 5 is assembled. The space forming portion 2550 of the center accessory 2500 includes a right wall portion 2551 protruding forward from the right side of the flange portion 2502, a guide wall portion 2552 protruding forward from the flange portion 2502 and extending to the lower right from the lower portion of the space forming portion 2550 in the peripheral wall portion 2501, and the flange portion 2502 at a portion between the right wall portion 2551 and the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2552. and an opening 2553 penetrating back and forth.

The right wall portion 2551 extends along the right rail 1005 so as to form a slight gap with the right rail 1005 when the game board 5 is assembled. Further, the right wall portion 2551 is provided with a notch portion 2551a penetrating left and right in the vicinity of the upper portion thereof. The guide wall portion 2552 is provided so that a space of about three times the diameter of the game ball B is formed in the horizontal direction between the lower end (right end) and the right wall portion 2551 .

The opening 2553 extends vertically over substantially the entire height of the space forming portion 2550 . The opening 2553 has a side closer to the peripheral wall 2501 and the guide wall 2552 at a constant distance from the peripheral wall 2501, and a side closer to the right wall 2551 moves away from the right wall 2551 downward. That is, in the space forming portion 2550, the side of the flange portion 2502 close to the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2552 extends vertically with a constant width to the right from the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the guide wall portion 2552, and the side of the flange portion 2502 close to the right wall portion 2551 extends vertically so as to widen leftward as it goes downward.

When the game board 5 is assembled, some of the plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the front surface of the game panel 1100 are inserted through the opening 2553 from behind. The plurality of obstructing nails N inserted through the opening 2553 are a specific obstructing nail group 2700 implanted in a specific gauge arrangement, which will be described later in detail. That is, the space forming portion 2550 of the center accessory 2500 forms a space in which the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is arranged.

The space forming portion 2550 bulges forward from the flange portion 2502 and extends left and right, and has a plurality of rear projections 2554 spaced apart in the front-rear direction. The rear projections 2554 are provided at positions corresponding to a plurality of front projections 2555d of the center right front plate 2555, which will be described later, so that the front-rear direction is staggered. As a result, the game ball B flowing down in front of the flange portion 2502 in the space forming portion 2550 can be flowed down while meandering in the front-rear direction by the front ridge portion 2555d and the rear ridge portion 2554.

Further, the space forming portion 2550 has a transparent plate-like center right front plate 2555 that covers the area from the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the front end of the right wall portion 2551, and a translucent center right front plate seal 2556 attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555 (see FIG. 149, etc.). The center right front plate 2555 extends upward to the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540 and closes the front side of the right guide passage group 2540 .

The center right front plate 2555 has a plurality of first storage portions 2555a penetrating in the front-rear direction, each of which accommodates the head of a plurality of obstacle nails N (comb nail portion 2701), a second accommodation portion 2555b penetrating in the front-rear direction and in which the head of one obstacle nail N is accommodated, a peeling hole 2555c penetrating in the front-rear direction at a portion where the center right front plate seal 2556 is attached, and extending rearward from the rear surface and extending in the left-right direction at intervals. and a plurality of front projections 2555d that are spaced apart. The center right front plate 2555 is attached so that it cannot be removed from the center role 2500 unless the center role 2500 is removed from the game panel 1100 .

The first accommodating portion 2555a is provided in the shape of an elongated hole that forms a certain gap with respect to the circumferential line that surrounds and contacts the heads of the plurality of obstructing nails N (interlocking nail portion 2701) that are accommodated. In this embodiment, one first accommodating portion 2555a is formed to have a size to accommodate the heads of two obstructing nails N, and the center of the first accommodating portion 2555a is different (eccentric) with respect to the center of the obstructing nail N. The second accommodating portion 2555b is formed concentrically with the obstructing nail N. As shown in FIG. The first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b are provided at portions corresponding to respective obstructing nails N of a specific obstructing nail group 2700, which will be described later.

The gap between the front end (head) of the obstructing nail N in the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b is preferably in the range of 1 mm to 3 mm, more preferably in the range of 1.5 mm to 2.5 mm. If the clearance is smaller than this range, the obstacle nail N may be affected by the expansion and contraction of the center right front plate 2555 due to a change in the environment, and the obstacle nail N may be bent, and when the game board 5 is assembled, it may be difficult to accommodate the front end of the obstacle nail N in the first accommodation portion 2555a and the second accommodation portion 2555b, which may increase the cost. Also, if the gap is larger than this range, the degree of bending of the obstructing nail N when it is bent by the impact caused by the contact of the game ball B may exceed the permissible range, making it difficult to circulate the game ball B in an intended flow.

As a result, it is possible to restrict the movement of the heads of the obstacle nails N accommodated in the first accommodation portion 2555a and the second accommodation portion 2555b, thereby suppressing the deformation (bending) of the obstacle nail N due to the impact due to the circulation (contact) of the game ball B or the impact from the outside, and the game ball B flowing down in an unintended flow can be reduced, and the game ball B can be stably distributed in the specific obstacle nail group 2700. , the action effect of the specific obstacle peg group 2700 can be exhibited continuously, and the movement of the game ball B in the specific obstacle peg group 2700 can be entertained to suppress the deterioration of interest.

Further, as described above, deformation of the obstacle nail N can be suppressed by the first accommodation portion 2555a and the second accommodation portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555, so that the maintenance work of the obstacle nail N in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced.

In addition, in the state assembled to the game board 5, the front side of the first housing portion 2555a and the second housing portion 2555b is closed by the center right front plate seal 2556 stuck on the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, so that the obstacle nail N whose head is housed in the first housing portion 2555a and the second housing portion 2555b cannot be touched from the front. As a result, it is possible to avoid bending the obstructing nail N due to contact with a tool or the like during maintenance or intentionally bending the obstructing nail N. Further, when the obstacle nail N whose head is accommodated in the first accommodation portion 2555a and the second accommodation portion 2555b through the center right front plate seal 2556 is bent, the trace remains on the center right front plate seal 2556, so that the problem of the obstacle nail N can be easily noticed.

With the center right front plate seal 2556 attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, the stripping hole 2555c is formed by inserting a rod-shaped member such as a wire from the rear side, and pushing the center right front plate seal 2556 forward from behind with the rod-shaped member. Then, the center right front plate seal 2556 can be easily removed (peeled off) from the center right front plate 2555 by pulling the curled portion of the center right front plate seal 2556 by an operator. As a result, it is possible to improve workability such as re-sticking of the center right front plate seal 2556 at the time of manufacturing and sorting at the time of disposal.

Since this peeling hole 2555c is provided in front of a triangular portion surrounded by the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501, the guide wall portion 2552, and the closing wall portion 2566 when the game board 5 is assembled, it is possible to prevent a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire from being inserted through the peeling hole 2555c into the rear side of the game panel 1100 or the portion where the game ball B circulates, thereby preventing cheating. I can.

In addition, since the peeling hole 2555c is hidden from the front by attaching the center right front plate seal 2556 to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the appearance due to the peeling hole 2555c, make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the peeling hole 2555c, and make it difficult for the player to plan a fraudulent act using the peeling hole 2555c.

The plurality of front projections 2555 d are provided at positions corresponding to the plurality of rear projections 2554 protruding from the flange portion 2502 . The front ridges 2555d are provided so as to alternate in the vertical direction with respect to the rear ridges 2554. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B flowing down in front of the flange portion 2502 in the space forming portion 2550 can be flowed down while meandering in the front-rear direction by the front ridge portion 2555d and the rear ridge portion 2554.

[5-8e-5. Second Attacker Section]
The second attacker part 2560 of the center accessory 2500 has a second big winning hole 2007 which is elongated in the horizontal direction and opens upward, and a first sub-out hole 2021 provided on the right side of the second big winning hole 2007. - 特許庁The second big prize winning opening 2007 has a right end located at a portion slightly less than twice the diameter of the game ball B to the right from the right end (lower end) of the guide wall portion 2552, and a left end located at a portion about 1/3 from the right of the full width in the game area 5a. The second big prize winning opening 2007 is provided at a position higher than the upper end of the stage cover 2515 . The right wall of the first sub-out port 2021 is continuous with the right wall portion 2551 of the space forming portion 2550 .

In addition, the second attacker unit 2560 includes a second large winning opening sensor 2561 that detects a game ball B received in the second large winning opening 2007, a flat second large winning opening door 2562 that closes the second large winning opening 2007 by advancing and retreating in the forward and backward direction so that it can be opened and closed, and that is inclined so as to be lower leftward, and a lottery by accepting the game ball B into the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005. It also has a second large winning opening solenoid 2563 that is energized according to the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol to open and close the second large winning opening door 2562.

In addition, the second attacker part 2560 is provided above the second large winning opening door 2562 in front of the flange part 2502, an attacker passage 2564 through which the game ball B can flow leftward, a right release passage 2565 extending downward from the left end of the attacker passage 2564 on the left side of the second large winning opening 2007, and capable of releasing the game ball B downward, and protruding forward from the flange part 2502. and a closing wall portion 2566 forming part of the ceiling wall of the attacker passage 2564 and extending leftward from the lower end of the guide wall portion 2552 to the peripheral wall portion 2501 .

The attacker passage 2564 extends to the left with a height slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B, the ceiling wall is composed of a part of the peripheral wall part 2501 and the closing wall part 2566, and the floor wall is composed of the second big winning entrance door 2562. In this attacker passage 2564, a plurality of rear projections 2564a bulge forward, extend vertically, and are provided at intervals in the left-right direction at the location of the attacker passage 2564 in the flange portion 2502. At the location of the attacker passage 2564, a center lower right front plate 2572, which will be described later, bulge rearward, extend vertically, and extend horizontally so as to alternate with the plurality of rear projections 2564a. A plurality of spaced protrusions (not shown) are provided. Due to the plurality of front and rear ridges 2564a, the game ball B can be circulated leftward while meandering in the front-rear direction in the attacker passage 2564, and the circulation speed can be suppressed.

The right release passage 2565 extends vertically downward with a lateral width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B. Right discharge passage 2565 has an exit at a height between stage 2513 and the upper end of stage cover 2515 . The right discharge passage 2565 has a right wall formed by the attacker left wall portion 2568 and a left wall formed by a part of the peripheral wall portion 2501 .

Furthermore, the second attacker part 2560 projects forward from the flange part 2502 on the right side of the second big winning gate door 2562 and extends downward from a position higher than the right end of the second big winning gate door 2562 and slightly below the right end of the closing wall part 2566. An attacker left wall portion 2568 extending downward from a position lower than the left end of 562 , a right shelf portion 2569 extending downward to the left from the lower end of the attacker right wall portion 2567 , a left shelf portion 2570 extending downward to the right from near the upper end of the attacker left wall portion 2568 so as to form a gap in the horizontal direction between the right shelf portion 2569 , the left shelf portion 2570 and the right shelf portion 2 . 569 and a middle wall portion 2571 centrally provided between them.

The second big prize winning opening 2007 is defined in the lateral direction by the attacker right wall portion 2567 and the attacker left wall portion 2568 . That is, the lateral width between the attacker right wall portion 2567 and the attacker left wall portion 2568 is the lateral width of the second prize winning opening 2007 . Incidentally, in this embodiment, the width in the left-right direction of the second big winning opening 2007 is 131 mm.

The attacker left wall portion 2568 extends downward from the lower end of the attacker right wall portion 2567, and the lower end is bent short to the right. When the attacker left wall portion 2568 is assembled on the game board 5, the upper end of the second vertical wall portion 2415 of the lower right unit 2400 is close to the lower end, making it impossible for the game ball B to come and go between the left and right sides. The lower ends of the right shelf portion 2569 and the left shelf portion 2570 are positioned above the lower end of the attacker left wall portion 2568 . Between the lower end portion of the right shelf portion 2569 and the middle wall portion 2571 and between the lower end portion of the left shelf portion 2570 and the middle wall portion 2571, the second big winning opening sensor 2561 is provided. The middle wall portion 2571 is positioned directly above the lower right middle decorative portion 2433 of the lower right unit 2400 when assembled to the game board 5 .

The second attacker part 2560 further has a transparent plate-shaped center lower right front plate 2572 that closes the front of the space formed by the attacker passage 2564, the right discharge passage 2565, and the attacker right wall portion 2567, the attacker left wall portion 2568, the right shelf portion 2569, and the left shelf portion 2570 (see FIG. 137, etc.).

In the normal state, the second attacker part 2560 has the front end of the second big winning opening door 2562 protruding forward from the front surface of the flange part 2502, and closes the second big winning opening 2007 so that the game ball B cannot be received. A second big prize winning port door 2562 which openably closes the second big prize winning port 2007 is formed in a flat plate shape extending left and right and front and rear, so that it is difficult to see when viewed from the front and it is difficult to understand the open/closed state.

In this normal state, the game ball B that has been struck on the right side of the center accessory 2500 and flowed down the right guide path group 2540 and the space forming part 2550 (the specific obstacle nail group 2700) flows down from between the guide wall part 2552 and the right wall part 2551 to the second attacker part 2560 side. At this time, the game ball B flowing down along the right wall portion 2551 is received by the first sub-out port 2021 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2021 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and discharged downward.

The game ball B, which was not accepted by the first sub-out port 2021 and flowed down onto the second large winning opening door 2562, rolls to the left in the attacker passage 2564 while meandering in the front and rear direction of the plurality of ridges 2564a, enters the right discharge passage 2565 from the left end of the second large winning opening door 2562, and enters the game area from the lower end (exit) of the right discharge passage 2565. It will be returned within 5a.

The second attacker part 2560 of the center accessory 2500 is positioned directly above the lower right unit 2400 when assembled on the game board 5, and the upper end of the second standing wall part 2415 of the lower right unit 2400 is close to the lower end of the attacker left wall part 2568 forming the right wall of the right discharge passage 2565. As a result, between the right release passage 2565 side and the right side of the second standing wall portion 2415, the movement of the game ball B is blocked. In other words, an area (pseudo-game area 2010) that cannot be entered from the right release passage 2565 or the game area 5a is formed to the right of the second standing wall portion 2415.

In other words, a pseudo-game area 2010 partitioned by the front face of the game panel 1100, the delimiter 2410 of the lower right unit 2400, and the attacker left wall 2568, right shelf 2569 and left shelf 2570 in the second attacker part 2560 is formed. This pseudo-game area 2010 allows only the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2007 to circulate.

Then, when the second big prize winning port solenoid 2563 is energized according to the lottery result of the first special pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 or the lottery result of the second special pattern, the second big prize winning port door 2562 retreats and the second big prize winning port 2007 becomes ready to receive the game ball B. At this time, the game ball B flowing through the attacker passage 2564 and the game ball B flowing down from the space forming section 2550 to the second big prize opening 2007 are accepted by the second big prize opening 2007 .

After rolling on the right shelf 2569 or the left shelf 2570, the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2007 is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2561 and released into the pseudo game area 2010 below. In this second attacker part 2560, since two second big winning hole sensors 2561 are arranged on the left and right, even if many game balls B are received in the second big winning hole 2007 in a short time, they can be detected without delay.

According to the 2,500 center of the center of the present embodiment, the center right front plate 2555 has a first containment portion 2555a, which houses the head of the multiple obstacles Nails N of each group of 2701, which makes up a specific disability nail 2700, so the head of the nail nail N can be restricted, and it can be restricted that the head of the nail N nails will be moved. It is possible to suppress that the disability nail N is deformed (flexed) due to the impact of (overtake) or the external impact due to somehow. As a result, it is possible to reduce the unintended flow of the game ball B, to allow the game ball B to circulate in a stable state in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, to continuously exert the effect of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, to entertain the movement of the game ball B in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and to suppress the deterioration of interest.

In addition, according to the center accessory 2500, the second large prize winning opening door 2562 that opens and closes the second large winning opening 2007 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the presence of 7. As a result, the pseudo big winning opening 2402 (the pseudo big winning opening door 2405) provided below the second big winning opening 2007 can be made relatively conspicuous, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pseudo big winning opening 2402, and the pseudo big winning opening 2402 can be strongly illusioned as if it were a real big winning opening. Therefore, if the pachinko machine is provided with a large prize winning opening that has never been seen before, it is possible to make the player feel an illusion, to give a strong impact to the player, and to make the player positively select the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play, thereby enhancing the appealing power to the player.

Furthermore, according to the center accessory 2500, since the supporting portion 2503 protruding inward is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. As a result, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the outside of the part of the peripheral wall 2501 where the support part 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall 2501 can be prevented from being deformed or damaged. Further, since the strength of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by the support portion 2503, the center accessory 2500 can be removed from the injection mold without being deformed.

In addition, since the transparent support part 2503 protrudes short from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall part 2501 and is partially provided on the entire circumference of the peripheral wall part 2501, it is possible to reduce obstruction of the visibility of the decorative body of the back unit 3000 and the effect image of the effect display device 1600 provided behind the support part 2503. - 特許庁

Further, by providing the support portion 2503, since the portion where the flange portion 2502 projecting outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided, the obstacle nail N can be implanted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the portion near the support portion 2503 in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). As a result, the game area of the plurality of obstacle nails N can be made as wide as possible in the game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to enjoy the original game.

In addition, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has the same shape as the inner peripheral shape of the opening portion 1112 of the panel plate 1110, the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is flush with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and the support portion 2503 is provided substantially flush with the front surface of the panel plate 1110. Therefore, the support portion 2503 is inconspicuous to the player, and the center accessory 2500 is integrated with the panel plate 1110. You can make it look like you are.

Furthermore, since the support part 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center role object 2500, the frame of the center role object 2500 can be made wider and the display screen of the performance display device 1600 provided on the rear side can be made more visible as compared with the case where the support part 2503 is provided over the entire circumference. In other words, if the non-distribution area (inside the frame) defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center accessory 2500 is desired to be enlarged, the support portion 2503 may be provided on a part of the entire periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support portion 2503 has an extension amount that does not overlap the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided behind in a front view.

[5-8f. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2600 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The gate member 2600 of the front unit 2000 is arranged on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 . More specifically, the gate member 2600 is provided at a position below the variable prize winning opening 2003 of the center accessory 2500 slightly lower than the center skein in the vertical direction of the game area 5a. Immediately above the gate member 2600, the exit of the left guide passage group 2530 of the center accessory 2500 is arranged. In addition, at the lower right of the gate member 2600, the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 opens toward the left.

The gate member 2600 has a gate 2002 for performing a lottery of normal symbols for opening and closing the variable prize winning opening 2003 by passage of the game ball B, and a gate sensor 2601 for detecting the passage of the game ball B through the gate 2002.例文帳に追加In this embodiment, the detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2601 is the gate 2002 .

[5-8g. Specified obstacle nail group]
Next, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 among the plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The specific obstacle peg group 2700 is provided upstream of the second big winning opening 2007 in the right part of the game area 5a. The specific obstacle nail group 2700 of this embodiment is provided in the space formed by the space forming part 2550 of the center accessory 2500 .

The specific obstruction nail group 2700 has a plurality of interlocking nail parts 2701 in which a plurality of interfering nails N arranged adjacent to each other form one group, and the interlocking nail parts 2701 are arranged at intervals allowing one game ball B to pass therethrough. In this embodiment, the interlocking nail portion 2701 is composed of two obstructing nails N. As shown in FIG.

The specific obstacle nail group 2700 is provided so that the parts (gap parts) between a plurality of interlocking nail parts 2701 arranged at intervals are arranged in a predetermined pattern, and the game ball B can be guided by the plural interlocking nail parts 2701. - 特許庁Thus, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 forms a guiding area 2710 capable of guiding the game ball B from a specific position to a desired position with a predetermined probability.

The guide area 2710 formed by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can guide the game ball B to a desired position with a predetermined probability. The guiding area 2710 is composed of a first guiding area 2711 and a second guiding area 2712 provided on the right side of the first guiding area 2711 . The first guide area 2711 can guide the game ball B from the exit of the right first guide passage 2541 in the right guide passage group 2540 to the position on the left side from the center of the guide wall portion 2552 . The second guide area 2712 can guide the game ball B from the exit of the right second guide path 2542 in the right guide path group 2540 to the position of the right part from the center of the guide wall 2552 .

A first guide region 2711 and a second guide region 2712 formed by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 are provided in an arc shape such that the center in the vertical direction bulges rightward. More specifically, in the first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712, in the plurality of nail pegs 2701 forming the outer side of the arc, the arc formed by the plurality of peg sections 2701 forming the inner side of the arc is in contact with the straight line connecting the peg sections 2701 near the upper end and the lower end. That is, the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712 are formed so that the width in the left-right direction is the distance of two game balls B. As shown in FIG. Since the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712 extend in an arc shape, the portion extending vertically is reduced, making it easier for the game ball B to meander in the left-right direction.

In addition, in the plurality of nail groups 2701 forming the first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712, the nail group 2701 located below between the two nail groups 2701 separated from each other in the left and right direction is provided on the right side of the center between the upper two nail groups 2701 (the side farther from the center of the arc). This makes it difficult for the game ball B to move outward from each of the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712 .

Furthermore, the plurality of nail pegs 2701 that form the first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712 are arranged such that the gaps between the pegs 2701 arranged in an arc shape are positioned upward toward the right row. In other words, of the plurality of nail pegs 2701 forming the left and right walls of the first guide region 2711 and the second guide region 2712, the right peg 2701 is higher than the two pegs 2701 paired in the left-right direction. This makes it easier for the game ball B to meander in the left-right direction.

A guidance area 2710 formed by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can guide the game ball B downward with a sense of meandering in the left-right direction by means of a plurality of interlocking nail portions 2701 arranged at intervals. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball B can be suppressed and slowed compared to the area where the obstacle nail N is planted in a general arrangement, and the falling time (arrival time) of the game ball B to a predetermined position can be delayed. In addition, by combining two obstacle nails N into a pair in the nail assembly part 2701, the number of times of collision between the obstacle nail N and the game ball B can be increased compared to the case where one obstacle nail N is used, and the effect of delaying the fall of the game ball B is enhanced.

In the guidance area 2710, since the plurality of nail parts 2701 are arranged with intervals in the vertical direction, the guided game ball B may move to the left outer side or the right outer side through the part of the interval. That is, the game ball B may move from the first guide area 2711 to the second guide area 2712, move from the second guide area 2712 to the first guide area 2711, move left from the first guide area 2711, or move right from the second guide area 2712.

The game ball B guided to the lower end by the first guiding region 2711 and the second guiding region 2712 comes into contact with the guiding wall portion 2552, and flows down between the guiding wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567 (on the second big winning opening door 2562 or inside the second big winning opening 2007).

The game ball B that has moved to the left outside from the first guide area 2711 flows down while meandering in the front-back direction due to the plurality of rear projections 2554 provided on the flange portion 2502 and the plurality of front projections 2555d provided on the center right front plate 2555 between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. Then, it comes into contact with the guide wall portion 2552 and flows down between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker's right wall portion 2567 (on the second big prize winning port door 2562 or inside the second big prize winning port 2007).

The game ball B that has moved to the right outer side from the second guide region 2712 flows down while meandering in the front-rear direction due to the plurality of rear projections 2554 provided on the flange portion 2502 and the plurality of front projections 2555d provided on the center right front plate 2555 between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the right wall portion 2551. Then, it flows down to the first sub-out port 2021 or between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker's right wall portion 2567 (on the second big winning gate door 2562 or inside the second big winning gate 2007).

As a result, when the game ball B enters the right second guide passage 2542 in the right guide passage group 2540, it flows through the second guide area 2712, and when the game ball B moves to the right outside from the second guide area 2712, it may be received by the first sub-out port 2021. That is, in the present embodiment, in the right guide path group 2540 , the right second guide path 2542 has a higher probability of receiving the game ball B into the first sub-out port 2021 than the right first guide path 2541 . Therefore, it is possible for the player to perform a hitting operation such that the game ball B enters the right first guide passage 2541 . In other words, when hitting hard, the game ball B can easily enter the right first guide passage 2541 near the impinging part 1006, so that there is no need to hit the game ball B by delicate adjustment, and the hitting operation can be easily performed.

By the way, in the specific obstructing nail group 2700, if the interfering nail N is configured with only one obstructing nail N, the other obstructing nail N paired with the obstructing nail N to form a gap through which the game ball B can pass becomes obstructing nails N in all directions forming a clearance with the obstructing nail N as the center. In other words, one obstacle nail N is in charge of forming gaps in all directions. Thus, when the obstacle nail N is bent, the gap widens in one direction and narrows in the opposite direction, so that the deformation of one obstacle nail N greatly changes the probability of guiding the game ball B by the guiding area 2710, making it difficult to circulate the game ball B in a stable state. Further, when the obstructing nail N is bent, it is necessary to adjust the obstructing nail N provided in all directions so as to provide a clearance of a desired distance, which requires a great deal of time and effort for maintenance.

On the other hand, if the interfering nail portion 2701 is composed of a plurality of interfering nails N as in the present embodiment, the interfering nail N adjacent to the interfering nail N in the interfering nail portion 2701 is in charge of forming the gap. As a result, even if one obstructing nail N of the nail group 2701 is bent, the area of the gap affected is small, so that the change in the probability of guiding the game ball B by the guiding area 2710 can be suppressed. Further, when a certain obstructing nail N is bent, it is only necessary to adjust the gap to the obstructing nail N in a part of directions so as to have a desired distance, and compared with the case of adjusting the gaps in all directions, labor required for maintenance can be reduced.

When the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of this embodiment is assembled on the game board 5, the head of the obstacle nail N is inserted into the first accommodation portion 2555a or the second accommodation portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555 and accommodated. The interlocking nail portion 2701 composed of a plurality of obstructing nails N is housed in the first housing portion 2555a so as to surround the heads thereof.

As a result, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the obstacle nail N is accommodated in the first accommodation portion 2555a or the second accommodation portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555, so that it is possible to restrict the movement of the head of the obstacle nail N. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deformation (bending) of the obstacle nail N due to the impact due to the circulation (contact) of the game ball B or the impact from the outside, and it is possible to reduce the game ball B from flowing down in an unintended flow. At the same time, the game balls B can be circulated in a stable state in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the effects of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be exhibited continuously, and the movement of the game balls B in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be enjoyed to suppress the deterioration of interest.

In addition, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, as described above, the head of the obstacle nail N is accommodated in the first accommodation portion 2555a or the second accommodation portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555, thereby suppressing the deformation of the obstacle nail N. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the labor required for the maintenance of the obstacle nail N on the side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, in the specific obstructive nail group 2700, since the first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b that accommodate the heads of the obstructing nails N are closed by the center right front plate seal 2556 attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, the obstructing nail N cannot be touched from the front. As a result, it is possible to avoid bending the obstructing nail N due to contact with a tool or the like during maintenance or intentionally bending the obstructing nail N. Further, when the obstructing nail N of the specific obstructing nail group 2700 is bent from the front, its trace remains on the center right front plate seal 2556, so that the failure of the obstructing nail N can be easily noticed.

Further, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 has a function of distributing the inflowing game balls B to either the first sub-out port 2021 or the second prize winning port 2007 . This function is an important function that influences the payout rate. No nail adjustment is allowed in the game hall. Therefore, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700 of the present embodiment, as described above, unless the center accessory 2500 is removed from the game panel 1100, the center right front plate 2555 cannot be removed, and since the front side of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is covered by the center right front plate 2555 and the center right front plate seal 2556, the nails cannot be adjusted at all.

In the above-described embodiment, the plurality of interlocking nail portions 2701 forming the specific interfering nail group 2700 are shown as being composed of two interfering nails N, but are not limited to this, and may be composed of three or more interfering nails N. When the interlocking nail portion 2701 is composed of three or more obstructing nails N, the obstructing nails N may be arranged in a line, or may be arranged in a polygonal shape such as a triangle, quadrangle, pentagon, or hexagon.

In the above-described embodiment, the guidance region 2710 by the specific obstructive nail group 2700 is composed of two regions, the first guidance region 2711 and the second guidance region 2712. However, it is not limited to this, and may be composed of one or three or more regions.

According to the specific obstacle peg group 2700 of the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress and delay the flowing speed of the game ball B. Therefore, for example, in the second attacker section 2560 provided downstream, the second big winning hole 2007 is opened and closed in a short time so that the game ball B can be accepted according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol (for example, "small hit"). Even when trying to hit the game ball B so as to reach it at the timing when it becomes acceptable at 07, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can make it difficult for the game ball B to reach the second big winning hole 2007 at the desired timing, and the timing of hitting the game ball B can be made difficult. As a result, the degree of difficulty can be given to the operation of hitting the game ball B, so that the player can be entertained with a rewarding game, and the decline in interest can be suppressed. Further, in the above case, it is possible to make it difficult to accept the game ball B into the second big winning hole 2007, so that an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be suppressed.

In addition, according to the specific obstacle nail group 2700, since the circulation speed of the game ball B is suppressed by planting a plurality of obstacle nails N, the cost required for the configuration can be reduced and the increase in the cost required for the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the configuration is made of a synthetic resin member.

[5-8h. Pseudo-game area]
Next, the pseudo game area 2010 formed in front of the game panel 1100 by the front unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 147 and the like. The pseudo-game area 2010 is independent of the game area 5a, and is an area where only specific game balls B can circulate. Specifically, the pseudo game area 2010 is an area in which only the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2007 (so-called hit ball that no longer affects the game) can be distributed. This pseudo-game area 2010 is provided on the same plane as the game area 5a.

The pseudo game area 2010 includes a portion where the front surface of a flat plate-like game panel 1100 having a game area 5a provided in front thereof is exposed, a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the exposed portion of the game panel 1100, and a pseudo large prize winning opening 24 that can be opened and closed according to the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first start opening 2004 or the second start opening 2005 and the lottery result of the second special symbol. . In other words, the pseudo game area 2010 has a plurality of obstacle nails N, a pseudo big prize winning opening 2402 as a reception opening for receiving the game balls B, and a pseudo out opening 2404 for discharging the game balls B, and has a configuration similar to that in the game area 5a.

The pseudo game area 2010 is formed by the game panel 1100, the delimiter 2410 of the lower right unit 2400, and the second attacker part 2560 of the center accessory 2500. The pseudo-game area 2010 is partitioned at the upper end by the right shelf 2569 , the left shelf 2570 and the middle wall 2571 of the second attacker part 2560 . The pseudo game area 2010 is partitioned at the right end by the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the first vertical wall 2412 of the partition 2410 . The left end of the pseudo-game area 2010 is separated by the attacker left wall portion 2568 of the second attacker portion 2560, the second vertical wall portion 2415 of the dividing portion 2410, the left horizontal wall portion 2417, the inclined wall portion 2418, and the third vertical wall portion 2419. The lower end of the pseudo-game area 2010 is separated by the bottom wall portion 2411 of the partition portion 2410 .

In the simulated game area 2010, the front surface of the game panel 1100 is exposed forward between the second attacker part 2560 and the simulated big winning opening 2402, and a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in this part.

The second big winning opening 2007 as a supply source of game balls B to the pseudo game area 2010 is opened and closed by the second big winning opening door 2562 . Since the second large prize winning opening door 2562 is formed in a flat plate shape that advances and retreats in the front-rear direction, the second large winning prize opening door 2562 is difficult to see from the player side. The pseudo game area 2010 is provided on the same plane as the game area 5a, and the parts (partitioning part 2410, the attacker left wall part 2568 of the center accessory 2500, etc.) partitioned from the game area 5a are formed transparently, and since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the exposed part of the game panel 1100, the pseudo game area 2010 is provided to the player. You can create the illusion that you are part of it.

The pseudo big prize winning opening 2402 provided in the pseudo game area 2010 is formed longer in the horizontal direction than the second big winning prize opening 2007 provided above. In this embodiment, the lateral size of the second big prize winning opening 2007 is 131 mm, and the lateral size of the pseudo big winning prize opening 2402 is 170 mm. Since the pseudo big prize winning port 2402 is opened forward, the face of the pseudo big prize winning port 2405 for opening and closing the pseudo big prize winning port 2402 faces forward when the pseudo big prize winning port 2402 is closed (normal state), and the pseudo big prize winning port 2405 stands out from the player.

Thus, when the player looks at the pachinko machine 1, the pseudo big prize hole 2402 is more conspicuous than the second big prize hole 2007, so that the player can be made to think that the pachinko machine has a big prize hole that has never been seen before, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

In the pseudo game area 2010 of the present embodiment, the pseudo big prize door 2405 stands upright in a normal state, and the pseudo big prize door 2402 is closed by the pseudo big prize door 2405 so that the game ball B cannot be received. In addition, in a normal state, the second big winning opening 2007 is closed by the second big winning opening door 2562, so the game ball B that is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 and flows down to the second big winning opening door 2562 rolls leftward on the second big winning opening door 2562 and is discharged into the game area 5a through the right discharge passage 2565. Therefore, in a normal state, the game ball B does not circulate within the pseudo-game area 2010 .

When the second big prize winning port door 2562 retreats according to the lottery result of the first special pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 from the normal state, the lottery result of the second special pattern, etc., the state becomes possible to receive the game ball B in the second big prize winning port 2007.例文帳に追加In this state, when the game ball B is received in the second big winning hole 2007 , the game ball B is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2561 and supplied to the pseudo game area 2010 .

Then, the game ball B supplied to the simulated game area 2010 flows down while coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the front exposed portion of the game panel 1100 . At this time, if the pseudo big winning opening 2402 is closed by the pseudo big winning opening door 2405, the game ball B supplied into the pseudo game area 2010 passes in front of the pseudo big winning opening door 2405, flows down onto the bottom wall portion 2411, rolls leftward along the slope of the bottom wall portion 2411, and is prevented from further rolling leftward by the third standing wall portion 2419. , the pseudo-out port 2404 that is open forward at the corresponding portion is ejected to the rear of the game panel 1100 . In other words, it is discharged from the pseudo-game area 2010 .

Since the pseudo out port 2404 of the pseudo game area 2010 is provided close to the right side of the out port 1008, the player can have the illusion that the game ball B received in the pseudo out port 2404 is received in the out port 1008.例文帳に追加Thereby, it is possible to give the illusion that the pseudo-game area 2010 is part of the game area 5a.

Therefore, the game in which the game ball B passes in front of the pseudo big winning hole 2402 in the pseudo game area 2010 can be made to be the same as the game in which the game ball B passes through the big winning hole in the conventional pachinko machine, and the game ball B is not accepted in the pseudo big winning hole 2402, which makes the player disappointed. On the other hand, since the game balls B accepted in the second big winning hole 2007 circulate in the pseudo game area 2010, even if the game balls B are not accepted in the pseudo big winning hole 2402, a predetermined number of the game balls B are put out by receiving them in the second big winning hole 2007.例文帳に追加As a result, the game ball B is put out even though the game ball B has not been received in the pseudo big winning hole 2402, so that the player can be made to feel that he or she has won the game, and the player can be entertained to suppress the deterioration of interest.

By the way, when the pseudo big prize winning port 2402 is opened and closed, the large pseudo big prize winning port door 2405 conspicuous from the front opens and closes, so that the player can instantly notice that the pseudo big prize winning port 2402 can be received. As a result, the game ball B can be hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called “right hitting”) so that the game ball B can be received in the pseudo big winning opening 2402 . Further, the pseudo big prize winning opening 2402 may be opened and closed as a kind of advance notice, or the pseudo big prize winning opening 2402 may be opened and closed as one of the signals for instructing the player to hit to the right. Since this pseudo big prize winning slot 2402 is entered only when the player hits to the right, it is intuitively easy for the player to understand.

For this reason, for example, before the second big winning hole 2007 becomes receivable, the pseudo big winning hole 2402 may be opened and closed so that the player hits to the right. Thus, at the timing when the second big winning hole 2007 can be received, the game ball B hit to the right can easily reach the second big winning hole 2007, so that the player can be more entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

When the second big winning hole 2007 opens and closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern at the time of the "jackpot" game, if the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is also opened and closed, many game balls B can be supplied to the pseudo game area 2010 in a short time through the second big winning hole 2007, and many game balls B circulate in the pseudo game area 2010, so that the game balls in the pseudo game area 2010 are supplied to the player. B's movements and games can be enjoyed. At this time, when the pseudo big prize winning port 2402 opens and closes, the game ball B is received in the large pseudo big prize winning port 2402, so that the player can be greatly entertained and the decline of the player's interest can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, the pseudo big prize winning opening 2402 is formed to be larger in the horizontal direction than the second big winning prize opening 2007. Above the pseudo big winning prize opening 2402, a right lateral wall portion 2414, a left lateral wall portion 2417, and an inclined wall portion 2418 are provided between the right lateral wall portion 2414 and the left lateral wall portion 2417 (between the right inclined wall portion 2413 and the left inclined wall portion 2416). A game ball B that has passed through is accepted into the pseudo big winning opening 2402 . The distance between the right lateral wall portion 2414 and the left lateral wall portion 2417 is approximately half the distance of the second prize winning opening 2007 in the horizontal direction. As a result, a plurality of game balls B received in the second big prize-winning port 2007 are concentrated in a narrow range and headed to the pseudo big prize-winning port 2402, so that the player can be made to feel as if more game balls B than the game balls B received in the second big prize-winning port 2007 are accepted in the pseudo big prize-winning port 2402, and the player can be greatly entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

The pseudo big winning opening 2402 of the present embodiment does not pay out the game balls B by accepting the game balls B, or give a privilege to the player. Therefore, the pseudo grand prize winning port 2402 can be opened and closed in an opening/closing pattern (for example, 337 time signature, minuet, waltz, bossa nova, swing, 8 beat, 16 beat, BGM, predetermined music tempo, etc.) that cannot be seen in a conventional pachinko machine big prize winning port, and the player can be entertained.

In addition, in the pseudo-game area 2010, a windmill W may be provided in addition to the obstacle nail N. By making the windmill W exist in the pseudo game area 2010, it becomes more realistic, and it becomes difficult to distinguish between the pseudo game area 2010 and the game area 5a.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls within the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B within the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 to 147 and the like. In the state assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided substantially in the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in both the left and right outer portions and the lower portion of the center accessory 2500. As shown in FIG. In addition, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact is provided on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300 .

First, a left guide passage group 2530, a gate 2002 and a side upper left unit 2300 are arranged at intervals from above on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between them and above the left guide passage group 2530. - 特許庁A plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the left guide passage group 2530 are arranged so that game balls B are collected above the entrance of the left second guide passage 2532 . Thereby, when the game ball B is hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500, it can be distributed to the left second guide passage 2532 with a higher probability than the left first guide passage 2531. - 特許庁The game ball B that has circulated through the left second guide passage 2532 circulates downward while approaching the center accessory 2500, and flows down the left side of the variable winning opening 2003 with a high probability.

In the vicinity of the entrance in the left second guide passage 2532, a first big prize winning port 2006 which is closed unreceivably by the first big prize winning port door 2523 in a normal state is provided, and the game ball B entering the left second guiding passage 2532 rolls on the first big prize winning port door 2523 and flows down. When the game ball B enters the left second guide passage 2532 while the first big prize winning port door 2523 is retreating according to the lottery result of the first special pattern and the lottery result of the second special pattern drawn by the reception of the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005, it is accepted in the first big prize winning port 2006 with a high probability.

The game ball B received in the first big winning hole 2006 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 even after being detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2525 provided below, and discharged downward through the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. - 特許庁When the game ball B is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2525, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is provided.

A plurality of obstructing nails N planted between the left guide passage group 2530 and the gate 2002 are arranged so as to be gathered just above the gate 2002 at a portion below the variable prize winning opening 2003 . As a result, when the game ball B is hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500, it can pass through the gate 2002 with a certain probability. The gate 2002 is arranged so that the game ball B circulates downward on both the left outer side and the right outer side of the gate 2002 .

When the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, a normal symbol lottery is executed. Then, when the lottery result of the drawn normal symbols is "normal hit", the variable prize winning opening 2003 is in a state capable of receiving the game ball B for a predetermined time. When the variable prize winning port 2003 is in an acceptable state, the variable winning port door 2521 rotates to the left, so that the game ball B circulating through the left second guide passage 2532 is received by the variable winning port 2003 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the variable winning hole 2003 is guided backward of the game panel 1100, detected by the variable winning hole sensor 2526, delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and discharged downward. When the game ball B is detected by the variable winning hole sensor 2526, the privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is provided.

Between the gate 2002 and the side upper left unit 2300, a warp entrance 2511 and a windmill W are provided from above. The warp entrance 2511 opens leftward in the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 . The windmill W is arranged between the center accessory 2500 and the inner rail 1002 and closer to the center accessory 2500 .

A plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate 2002 and the windmill W are arranged so that the game ball B flowing through the gate 2002 and the right outside of the gate 2002 mainly flows down the part on the right side of the center of the windmill W. Therefore, the game ball B that has flowed through the gate 2002 and the right outside of the gate 2002 can enter the warp entrance 2511 with a certain degree of probability. On the other hand, the game ball B that has circulated outside the left side of the gate 2002 does not enter the warp entrance 2511 .

A game ball B entering a warp entrance 2511 passes through a warp passage and is supplied from a warp exit 2512 opening in the frame of the center role 2500 to a stage 2513 provided near the lower end of the center part in the left-right direction of the center role 2500.例文帳に追加The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls in the horizontal direction on the stage 2513 and is released so as to flow back into the game area 5a from either the central release portion 2513a or the side release portion 2513b.

Since the center release portion 2513a of the stage 2513 is provided directly above the first starting port 2004 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, the game ball B released from the center releasing portion 2513a is received by the first start port 2004 with a high probability. The game ball B released from the side release portions 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central release portion 2513a is received in the first starting port 2004 with a certain degree of probability.

The game ball B received in the first start opening 2004 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, passed to the rear ball guidance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, detected by the first start opening sensor 3002, and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first starting opening sensor 3002, a lottery for the first special symbol is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is provided.

The game ball B released from the stage 2513 and not received in the first starting port 2004 is received in the out port 1008 and discharged out of the game area 5a. The game ball B received in the out port 1008 is discharged downward after being guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 by the out guide section 1003 .

A game ball B that circulates on the right side of the center of the windmill W flows down onto a plurality of obstacle nails N on the upper side among a plurality of obstacle nails N diagonally arranged in two stages along the lower side of the center accessory 2500.例文帳に追加A game ball B that does not flow down on the plurality of obstacle nails N on the upper side through the right side of the windmill W flows down on the plurality of obstacle nails N on the lower side. On the other hand, the game ball B which circulates on the left side of the center of the windmill W flows down onto the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300, rolls right on the shelf 2301, and then falls onto the plurality of obstacle nails N on the lower side.

A game ball B that circulates on the right side of the center of the windmill W and flows down to the upper side of a plurality of obstructing nails N arranged diagonally is guided to the center (first starting port 2004) in the left-right direction of the game area 5a under the center accessory 2500, and may be received by the first starting port 2004. - 特許庁Further, on the upper side where a plurality of obstacle nails N are obliquely arranged, a gap through which one game ball B can pass is provided, so that it may flow down to the side unit 2200 through the gap and may be received in the general prize winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. - 特許庁The game ball B that has not been received by the general winning hole 2001 or the first starting hole 2004 is discharged from the out hole 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

On the other hand, the game ball B that has flowed down to the lower side of the plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally in the lower left part of the center accessory 2500 is guided to the center side in the left-right direction of the game area 5a by the plurality of obstacle nails N, is received by the out opening 1008 without being received by the first start opening 2004, and is discharged from the game area 5a. On the lower side, since a plurality of gaps through which one game ball B can pass are provided on the way, there is a possibility that the game ball B can be received in the general prize winning opening 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 through the gaps.

A game ball B received in a general winning hole 2001 of a side unit 2200 is guided backward of a game panel 1100, passed to a back ball guiding unit 3100 of a back unit 3000, detected by a general winning hole sensor 3001, and discharged downward. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is provided.

Next, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, a right guide passage group 2540, a space forming section 2550, a specific obstacle nail group 2700, a second attacker section 2560, and a lower right unit 2400 are arranged in order from the top. A specific obstacle nail group 2700 composed of a plurality of obstacle nails N is provided in a space forming portion 2550 between the right guide path group 2540 and the second attacker portion 2560 .

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is hit above the portion of the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 that is lowered toward the right from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction, the game ball B flows through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540.

A game ball B hit relatively strongly aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 contacts the impinging portion 1006 and enters the right first guide passage 2541 of the right guide passage group 2540 . On the other hand, the game ball B hit relatively weakly aiming at the right side of the center role 2500 rolls rightward on the upper surface of the upper end portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 and enters the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540. - 特許庁

The game ball B that has entered the right first guide passage 2541 is detected by the circulation detection sensor 2543, and is released downward from the side near the peripheral wall portion 2501 between the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and the right rail 1005. After passing through the right first guide passage 2541, the game ball B enters the first guide area 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 arranged in the space forming section 2550, and flows down while meandering in the left-right direction within the first guide area 2711. The game ball B that has circulated through the first guide area 2711 contacts the guide wall portion 2552 and circulates along the guide wall portion 2552 obliquely to the lower right.

A plurality of pegs 2701 forming the left and right walls of the first guide region 2711 form a gap between them in the vertical direction through which one game ball B can pass. The game ball B that has moved to the left outside from the first guide area 2711 flows down to the guide wall section 2552 through between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the peripheral wall section 2501 . At this time, due to the plurality of rear projections 2554 of the flange portion 2502 and the plurality of front projections 2555d of the center right front plate 2555, the water flows down while meandering in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that has flowed down to the guide wall portion 2552 circulates obliquely to the lower right along the guide wall portion 2552 . The game ball B that has moved to the right outside from the first guide area 2711 flows through the second guide area 2712 .

On the other hand, the game ball B that has entered the right second guide passage 2542 is released downward from the side near the right rail 1005 between the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and the right rail 1005 . After passing through the right second guide passage 2542, the game ball B enters the second guide area 2712 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 arranged in the space forming section 2550, and flows down while meandering in the left-right direction within the second guide area 2712. The game ball B that has circulated through the second guide area 2712 contacts the guide wall portion 2552 and circulates along the guide wall portion 2552 obliquely to the lower right.

A plurality of peg parts 2701 that constitute the walls on both the left and right sides of the second guide area 2712 form a gap between each other in the vertical direction through which one game ball B can pass. The game ball B that has moved leftward from the second guide area 2712 circulates through the first guide area 2711 . The game ball B that has moved to the right outside from the second guide area 2712 passes between the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the right rail 1005 or the right wall portion 2551 and flows down to the portion between the guide wall portion 2552 and the right wall portion 2551 . At this time, due to the plurality of rear projections 2554 of the flange portion 2502 and the plurality of front projections 2555d of the center right front plate 2555, the water flows down while meandering in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that has moved to the right outside from the second guide area 2712 is received by the first sub-out port 2021 with a high probability and is discharged outside the game area 5a. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2021 is guided backward of the game panel 1100 and then discharged downward through the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 .

The game balls B guided by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 flow down with a delay even at the same height because the game balls B are suppressed in circulation speed as compared with the part where the obstacle nails N are implanted in a general gauge arrangement.

A game ball B that has passed through the specific obstacle nail group 2700 (space forming part 2550) and has not been received by the first sub-out port 2021 enters the attacker passage 2564 provided above the second big prize winning port 2007 of the second attacker part 2560 from between the guide wall part 2552 and the attacker right wall part 2567. In a normal state, the second big winning opening door 2562 moves forward to close the second big winning opening 2007 so that it cannot be received, so the game ball B entering the attacker passage 2564 rolls leftward on the upper surface of the second big winning opening door 2562 and then is discharged downward through the right discharge passage 2565. - 特許庁In this attacker passage 2564, the game ball B meanders in the front-rear direction and rolls leftward due to the rear ridge portion 2564a of the flange portion 2502 and the front and rear ridge portion of the center lower right front plate 2572.

The game ball B discharged downward from the right discharge passage 2565 of the second attacker part 2560 flows down while contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the lower right unit 2400 (left lateral wall part 2417). Then, with a certain degree of probability, it is accepted by the second starting port 2005 that is always open upward below the right discharge passage 2565 . Also, although the probability of acceptance to the second starting port 2005 is lower than that of the second starting port 2005, it is accepted by the second sub-out port 2022 opened on the right side of the second starting port 2005 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received by the second starting hole 2005 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the second starting hole sensor 2401, and discharged downward. When the game ball B is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2401, a lottery for the second special symbol is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is provided. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 is discharged downward after being guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 .

The game ball B released from the right release passage 2565 and not received by either the second starting port 2005 or the second sub-out port 2022 rolls obliquely downward to the left on the inclined wall portion 2418 of the lower right unit 2400, and then is discharged out of the game area 5a through the out port 1008.

A game ball B circulating in an attacker passage 2564 of a second attacker part 2560 is received in a second big prize winning port 2007 with a high probability when a second big prize winning port door 2562 retreats according to the lottery result of the first special pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 or the lottery result of the second special pattern. The game ball B received in the second large winning opening 2007 is supplied to the pseudo game area 2010 after being detected by either of the two second large winning opening sensors 2561 provided below. When the game ball B is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2561, the privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is provided.

The game ball B supplied from the second big winning opening 2007 into the pseudo game area 2010 flows down while coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo game area 2010 . Then, when the pseudo big prize winning port 2402 is closed by the pseudo big prize winning port door 2405, it passes in front of the pseudo big prize winning port door 2405, flows down onto the bottom wall part 2411, rolls leftward along the inclination of the bottom wall part 2411, and is received in the pseudo out port 2404.例文帳に追加The game ball B received in the pseudo-out port 2404 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and discharged downward.

When the game ball B is circulating in the pseudo game area 2010, if the pseudo big winning opening door 2405 is rotated forward by the peripheral control board 1510 according to the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by the reception of the game ball B to the first starting opening 2004 or the second starting opening 2005 or the lottery result of the second special symbol, the pseudo big winning opening door 2405 contacts on the pseudo big winning opening door 2405 with a high probability and the rear pseudo big winning opening 24. 02 accepted. The game ball B received in the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, detected by the pseudo big winning hole sensor 2403, and discharged downward. By detecting the game ball B by the pseudo big winning opening sensor 2403, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect.

As a performance using the pseudo big winning hole 2402, when the second big winning hole 2007 is open according to the lottery result of the drawn first special pattern or the lottery result of the second special pattern (for example, according to "big win", "small win", etc.), the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is opened for the performance by the peripheral control board 1510.例文帳に追加At that time, since the peripheral control board 1510 can know the opening timing of the second big winning hole 2007, the degree to which the pseudo big winning hole 2402 picks up the game ball B can be adjusted by the peripheral control board 1510. Using this property, it is possible to suggest that when the pseudo big winning opening 2402 picks up a lot of game balls B, it will be in a high probability state (so-called probability variable state) after the "jackpot". Conversely, when there are many omissions at the pseudo big winning opening 2402, it can be suggested that a low-probability state (so-called normal non-variable state) occurs after the "jackpot". Furthermore, it is also possible to suggest a probability setting (generally, 6 levels of settings 1 to 6) based on such a state of failure.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if the game ball B is hit to the right side of the center role 2500 in the normal state, there is only a possibility that it will be accepted in the second start hole 2005 where a privilege is given, and there is no possibility that it will pass through the gate 2002 or be accepted in the general prize winning hole 2001 or the first start hole 2004.

In detail, the lottery result of the first special pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2004 and the lottery result of the second special pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2005 are set so that the special variation time for suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern to the player is set longer for the lottery result of the second special pattern than the lottery result of the first special pattern. Therefore, since it takes more time to consume the reserved number for the lottery result of the second special pattern, even if the number of game balls B received per unit time for the first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005 is the same, the number of the lottery result of the second special pattern to be executed for the second start port 2005 is smaller. Also, even if the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2005, the number of the game balls B to be paid out is one. Thus, in a normal state, even if the game ball B is hit to the right side of the center role 2500, there is a possibility that only the second starting port 2005 is accepted, and even if it is accepted in the second starting port 2005, the number of the game balls B paid out as a privilege is one, so that the player can easily drive the game ball B to the left side of the center role 2500.例文帳に追加

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first big prize hole 2006 or the second big prize hole 2007, the privilege that many game balls B are paid out is provided. In order to accept the game ball B into the first big winning hole 2006 and the second big winning hole 2007, it is necessary to make the first starting hole 2004 and the second starting hole 2005 accept the game ball B, and to draw the first special pattern and the second special pattern that can accept them.

For this reason, in a normal state, the player can be made to drive the game ball B so that the game ball B can be received by the first start port 2004 and flow down the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown to enjoy the original game of the pachinko machine 1, and the reception of the game ball B to the first start port 2004 can be enjoyed. It can raise expectations.

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first start opening 2004, and "hit" (for example, "small hit", "middle hit", "big hit", etc.) is drawn as a lottery result of the first special symbol, the first big winning opening 2006 or the second big winning opening 2007 opens and closes, so that the game ball B is accepted in the first big winning opening 2006 or the second big winning opening 2007. It is possible to entertain the loading operation and heighten expectations for receiving the game ball B into the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole 2007.例文帳に追加

Specifically, when the first big winning hole 2006 becomes receivable, it is possible to perform a driving operation so that the game ball B circulates to the left side of the center accessory 2500 . On the other hand, when the second big winning hole 2007 becomes acceptable, a hitting operation (“right hitting”) can be performed so that the game ball B circulates to the right side of the center accessory 2500 .

When hitting the game ball B to the right side of the center role 2500, the right side of the center role 2500 is provided with a right guide path group 2540 consisting of a right first guide path 2541 and a right second guide path 2542, and a guide area 2710 consisting of a first guide area 2711 and a second guide area 2712 by the specific obstruction nail group 2700, and is easily received in the second sub-out port 2022 by the circulating guide path. Therefore, the hitting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B flows through a desired guide passage (here, the first right guide passage 2541), and the player can enjoy the hitting operation of the game ball B.例文帳に追加

In addition, since the second big winning hole 2007 has a larger opening in the lateral direction than the first big winning hole 2006, the player can be made to recognize at a glance that the second big winning hole 2007 can accept more game balls B in a short time. As a result, when the second big winning hole 2007 can be accepted, the player can immediately change the hitting operation so that the game ball B circulates to the right side of the center accessory 2500, and the expectation for the reception of the game ball B into the second big winning hole 2007 can be heightened to suppress the decrease in interest.

Furthermore, when the game ball B is received in the second big winning hole 2007, the game ball B is supplied to the pseudo game area 2010 in which the pseudo big winning hole 2402 having a larger opening than the second big winning hole 2007 is provided. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144 and the like. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning hole sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received by the general winning hole 2001 and guided behind the game panel 1100, and a first starting hole sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received by the first starting hole 2004 and guided behind the game panel 1100.例文帳に追加The general winning opening sensor 3001 and the first starting opening sensor 3002 are provided in the back ball induction unit 3100 .

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and is open at the front. The back box 3010 has a square opening 3010a in the back wall. 040 and.

In addition, the back unit 3000 is located at the bottom of the front end of the back box 3010 and is located at the back of the gaming panel 1100, and the back ball guide unit 3100, and the back box set near the front end of the back box 3010, and in the back box 3010. The front and rear directions in the upper part are the same position as the front -front -fronted edge decorative unit 3200, the backward front directing unit 3300, the back front -edge decorative unit 3200 in the back box 3010, the backward front direction unit 3400, and the back box 3010 behind the back box 3010. There is a backward directing unit 3500 (see Fig. 155, etc.) and a backward -backed directing unit 3600 in the back box 3010 in the back box 3010.

[5-9a. Back box relation]
Next, the configuration of the back case 3010 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153 and the like. FIG. 151(a) is a front perspective view of the back box-related configuration of the back unit, and FIG. 151(b) is a rear perspective view of the back box-related configuration of the back unit. FIG. 152(a) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 151 with respect to the back case separated into main members and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the back. 153(a) is an exploded perspective view of the back box rear unit in FIG. 152 and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the rear.

The rear unit 3000 includes a box-shaped rear box 3010 opened forward, a rear box rear unit 3030 attached to the rear wall of the rear box 3010, and a rear board unit 3040 provided behind the rear box unit 3030 and attached to the rear side of the rear box 3010. - 特許庁The back box rear unit 3030 is detachably attached to the back box 3010 by a lock slider 3020 .

The back box 3010 has a box shape with an open front and a rectangular opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall, a mounting surface 3010b provided at the lower side of the opening 3010a on which the back box rear unit 3030 (set plate 1650) is mounted, two fixed grooves 3010c recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the opening 3010a, and the horizontal direction of the mounting surface 3010b. A lock mechanism portion 3010d is provided on the lower side near the center and to which the lock slider 3020 is attached so as to be slidable to the left and right.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed in a quadrangular shape with an aspect ratio of 3:4 when viewed from the front. The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size in the left-right direction as the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction. In addition, the opening 3010a is provided at a position that is vertically offset (eccentric) with respect to the center of the back box 3010 in the vertical direction. The opening 3010a is formed to have the same size as a 19-inch liquid crystal display device.

The upper fixing pieces 1651 of the set plate 1650 in the rear box unit 3030 are inserted into the two fixing grooves 3010c of the back box 3010 from below. Further, the lower fixing piece 1652 of the set plate 1650 can be inserted into the lock mechanism portion 3010d of the back case 3010 from behind while the lock slider 3020 is slid leftward in a rear view. With the lower fixing piece 1652 of the set plate 1650 inserted into the lock mechanism portion 3010d, when the lock slider 3020 is slid rightward in a rear view, the lock slider 3020 can prevent the lower fixing piece 1652 from moving rearward.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixing piece 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the back ball guide unit 3100 and the like at appropriate positions.

Further, the rear box 3010 has a pair of shaft supports 3010f capable of rotatably supporting the shaft portion 3041a of the rear board unit 3040 on the rear surface, and a locking portion 3010g provided on the rear surface on the side opposite to the pair of shaft supports 3010f in the left-right direction and engaging the locking claws 3041b of the rear board unit 3040.

The back box rear unit 3030 is detachably attached to the back wall so as to close the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 from behind. The back box rear unit 3030 is composed of a performance display device 1600 capable of displaying a prescribed performance image, a set plate 1650 to which the performance display device 1600 is attached on the front side and attached to the back box 3010, and a peripheral control unit 1500 which is attached to the rear surface of the set plate 1650 and accommodates a peripheral control board 1510.

The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch liquid crystal display device with an aspect ratio of 3:4.

The set plate 1650 is formed in the shape of a rectangular flat plate having the same size as the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 . The set plate 1650 has two upper fixed pieces 1651 protruding upward from the upper side in the left-right direction and one lower fixed piece 1652 protruding downward from near the center of the lower side in the left-right direction. The two upper fixing pieces 1651 are inserted into the fixing grooves 3010c of the back box 3010. As shown in FIG. The lower fixing piece 1652 is inserted into the lock mechanism portion 3010 d of the back box 3010 .

The set plate 1650 also has a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 1653 that opens forward on the front side. The liquid crystal mounting portion 1653 is formed in a size corresponding to the effect display device 1600, and the effect display device 1600 is fitted and attached from the front. In this embodiment, the center of the liquid crystal mounting portion 1653 and the center of the set plate 1650 match when viewed from the front. The set plate 1650 is transparent. As a result, the inside of the back case 3010 can be viewed from behind through the set plate 1650 .

The peripheral control unit 1500 is composed of a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 160, etc.) having a peripheral control section 1511 and an effect display control section 1512, and a peripheral control board box 1520 housing the peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of set plate 1650 so that the upper side of peripheral control board box 1520 is positioned slightly below the upper side of set plate 1650 . As a result, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the set plate 1650, a region with a height of about 1/3 of the total height of the set plate 1650 is formed between the lower end of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the lower end of the set plate 1650.

The back board unit 3040 includes a box-shaped board box 3041 that is L-shaped in front view and is thin in the front and back, and a panel relay board and a performance drive board (not shown) housed in the board box 3041. The board box 3041 has two shafts 3041a rotatably supported by the shaft support 3010f of the back box 3010 on the outer sides of the vertically extending L-shaped portion. Further, the circuit board box 3041 has locking claws 3041b that are locked to the locking portions 3010g of the back box 3010 at the ends of the L-shaped portions extending to the left and right.

The back substrate unit 3040 is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 across the opening 3010a (back box unit 3030). When assembled to the game board 5, the vertically extending L-shaped portion of the back board unit 3040 is positioned to the left of the peripheral control unit 1500 in rear view. In addition, the L-shaped portion of the back board unit 3040 extending to the left and right is positioned between the lower end of the rear side of the set plate 1650 and the lower end of the peripheral control unit 1500 .

The back board unit 3040 can be rotated so that the locking portion 3010g and the locking claw 3041b are disengaged and the locking claw 3041b moves rearward about the shaft portion 3041a, thereby opening the rear of the rear box unit 3030 and attaching/detaching the rear box unit 3030 to/from the back box 3010 without removing it from the back box 3010.

In this embodiment, an opening 3010a large enough to mount a 19-inch liquid crystal display device is provided in the rear wall of the back box 3010, a set plate 1650 is mounted in the opening 3010a, and a 15-inch performance display device 1600 is mounted in front of the set plate 1650. Thereby, when the performance display device 1600 has a size of 19 inches, the performance display device 1600 can be directly attached to the opening part 3010a of the back box 3010, and when the performance display device 1600 is smaller than 19 inches, it can be attached to the opening part 3010a of the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650 corresponding to the size of the performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加Therefore, the effect display device 1600 having a different size can be attached only by changing the set plate 1650 while leaving the back box 3010 as it is. In other words, in the conventional pachinko machine, the design of the back box 3010 is changed according to the model change, but in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the back box 3010 can be used as a common part even if the model is changed, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650, when the position of the effect display device 1600 is desired to be changed due to design change or the like, it can be easily handled by changing only the set plate 1650, and the cost required for the design change or the like can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the set plate 1650 is transparent, but is not limited to this, and may be colored, such as colored transparent, colored opaque, or the like. If the set board 1650 can be visually recognized from the player side, it is desirable to use an opaque color including black. As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 from being degraded due to the inside of the island equipment being seen from the player side or the light coming from behind. In this case, particularly, by making the set board 1650 black, even if the set board 1650 is visible from the player side, the set board 1650 can be made inconspicuous, so that the performance display device 1600 and other decorations in the pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous, and the performance effects thereof can be sufficiently exhibited.

[5-9b. back ball induction unit]
Next, the back ball guide unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The back ball guide unit 3100 is provided in the lower part near the front end inside the back box 3010 . The back ball guidance unit 3100 has a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening sensor 3002 for detecting the gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2004, and a magnetic sensor 1050 capable of detecting illegal magnetism acting on the game board 5 (see FIG. 160, etc.).

The back ball guiding unit 3100 receives the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, the second big winning opening 2007, the first sub-out opening 2021, and the second sub-out opening 2022, and guides the game ball B to the rear of the game panel 1100 near the center in the horizontal direction of the lower end. It has a discharge passage for discharging downward after guiding.

[5-9c. Back front edge decoration unit]
Next, the back front peripheral edge decorative unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The back front edge decoration unit 3200 is attached in the back box 3010 near the front end. The back front edge decoration unit 3200 includes a back front edge decoration body 3201 which is annularly formed along the edge of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5, and a back front edge decoration board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs for luminous decoration of the back front edge decoration body 3201 are mounted.

The back front peripheral decoration body 3201 is formed in a shape imitating a sumo wrestling ring. The back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201 is formed so as to have translucency, and can be decorated with light emitted from LEDs mounted on the back front peripheral edge decoration substrate.

According to the back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200, the peripheral edge of the game area 5a can be annularly decorated with the back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201, and the appearance of the game area 5a can be improved. In addition, by luminous decoration of the back front peripheral decoration body 3201, the peripheral edge of the game area 5a can be annularly illuminated, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game area 5a.

In addition, since the back front peripheral edge decoration body 3201 can independently illuminate and decorate a plurality of parts divided in the peripheral direction by a plurality of LEDs of the back front peripheral edge decoration substrate, the player can be shown a luminous effect in which the light rotates in the peripheral direction, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

[5-9d. Back upper front production unit]
Next, the back top front effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The back top front effect unit 3300 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 at substantially the same position as the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 in the front-rear direction. The back top front effect unit 3300 includes a back top front decoration body 3310 having a rectangular shape elongated in the horizontal direction in a front view, a back top front decoration board (not shown) provided behind the back top front decoration body 3310 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back top front lifting unit (not shown) for lifting and lowering the back top front decoration body 3310.

The back upper front decoration body 3310 is provided so that sumo rankings such as ``yokozuna'', ``ozeki'', and ``sekiwake'' are aligned from the left, and the LEDs of the back upper front decoration substrate can illuminate and decorate each ranking independently. The back upper front decoration 3310 is formed to have a length that crosses the front of the effect display device 1600 in the horizontal direction.

The back upper front decoration body 3310 is attached so as to be movable up and down, and can be lifted and lowered by the back upper front lifting unit. The front upper back decoration 3310 can move up and down within a range of substantially the same height as the front upper back decoration 3310 . In a normal state, the back upper front decoration 3310 is in a raised position where it is moved to the highest position. In this state, when the game board 5 is assembled, the center in the vertical direction is positioned at substantially the same height as the upper end of the inner rail 1002 in front view, and is positioned above the game area 5a. Most of the back upper front decoration 3310 can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the rest can be seen through the panel plate 1110 of the transparent game panel 1100 and the transparent center accessory 2500.

The back upper front decoration body 3310 can be moved downward from the normal raised position state to the lowered position state by the back upper front lifting unit. When the back upper front decoration 3310 is in the lowered position, the center in the vertical direction is positioned at substantially the same height as the upper end of the left guide passage group 2530 in the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 159). The back upper front decoration 3310 can be visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500 in the state of the lowered position.

According to this back upper front presentation unit 3300, the numbering of the back upper front decoration body 3310 can be decorated with light emission independently, so that, for example, after all the numberings are decorated with variable light emission, it is possible to perform light emission presentation such that only one numbering is decorated with light emission and the variation is stopped. As a result, when the ranking with a high rank is decorated with light, the player can be made to think that a chance has arrived, and the expectation for the game can be heightened, thereby suppressing the decline in interest.

In addition, according to the back upper front decoration 3310, it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation that an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game) will occur in which the player is advantageous, depending on the ranking order of the light-emitting decoration. Thus, when the variable luminous decoration of a plurality of rankings of the back upper front decoration body 3310 is started, the player can be made nervous and excited depending on whether or not the fluctuation is stopped at the desired ranking, and the player can be entertained and the decline of interest can be suppressed.

Further, when the back top front decoration body 3310 is moved from the raised position to the lowered position by the back top front lifting unit, the back top front decoration body 3310 moves to the center side of the game area 5a and blocks the upper part of the front face of the performance display device 1600, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the back top front decoration body 3310 and the back top front decoration body 3310 can be focused. As a result, it is possible to reliably show the player the light emission effect using the back upper front decoration body 3310 as described above, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest. Further, when the light emission performance as described above is executed at the lowered position rather than at the raised position, it is possible to enhance the sense of premium for the player, so that the reliability of the suggestion of the degree of expectation by the light emission presentation can be enhanced, the expectation for the game can be heightened, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

[5-9e. Back lower front production unit]
Next, the back bottom front effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 143 and the like. The back lower front effect unit 3400 is provided in the lower part in the back box 3010 behind the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 . The back-bottom front effect unit 3400 includes a back-bottom front decoration body 3410 elongated in the left-right direction, a back-bottom front decoration substrate (not shown) provided behind the back-bottom front decoration body 3410 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back-bottom front lifting unit (not-illustration) for lifting and lowering the back bottom front decoration body 3410. - 特許庁

The back bottom front decoration body 3410 can be decorated with light emission by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back bottom front decoration substrate. In addition, the underside front decorative body 3410 is provided so as to be able to move up and down between the lowest lowered position and the highest raised position by the lower back front elevating unit. The back lower front decoration 3410 is formed to have a length that crosses the front of the effect display device 1600 in the horizontal direction.

The back lower front decorative body 3410 has a base decorative body 3411 that is long in the left and right direction, a central decorative body 3412 that is provided in the center of the base decorative body 3411 in the horizontal direction, and front left decorative bodies 3413 and 3414 that are provided in front of the center in the horizontal direction of the base decorative body 3411 so as to be able to cover the central decorative body 3412 from the front (see FIG. 156, etc.).

The base decorative body 3411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape resembling a rope and has translucency. The central decorative body 3412 has a circular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with the characters of "gohan" in relief. The center decorative body 3412 is rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction around the center by a drive motor (not shown).

The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are positioned so as to be in contact with each other, and are provided so as to move away from each other in the horizontal direction. Each of the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 has translucency. The front left decorative body 3413 is formed with the character "heaven" in relief. The front right decorative body 3414 is formed with the character "rise" in relief.

The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are positioned in a closed position in close contact with each other in a normal state, and hide the central decorative body 3412 provided at the rear invisibly from the front. The front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 can move from the normal state to the open position separated from each other in the horizontal direction. In this open position state, the center decoration 3412 provided at the rear can be visually recognized from the front through the space between the front left decoration 3413 and the front right decoration 3414 .

In the normal state, the back bottom front effect unit 3400 has the back bottom front decoration body 3410 positioned at the lowered position. In addition, in a normal state, the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are positioned at the closed position, and the central decorative body 3412 is invisible from the front. When the back lower front decoration body 3410 in a normal state is assembled on the game board 5, the center in the vertical direction is located at a height slightly higher than the side upper left unit 2300, the lower end is located at substantially the same height as the lower end of the center accessory 2500, and the upper end is located at a height slightly lower than the warp entrance 2511.例文帳に追加A part of the back lower front decoration 3410 in the normal state is visible through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the rest is visible through the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the transparent center accessory 2500.例文帳に追加

The front lower back decoration 3410 can be moved from the lowered position to the raised position by the front lower back lifting unit. When the front lower back decoration body 3410 is in the raised position, the upper end is positioned slightly lower than the front upper back decoration body 3310 in the raised position (see FIG. 154). In other words, the center in the vertical direction of the back lower front decorative body 3410 at the raised position is positioned at substantially the same height as the first big prize winning opening 2006 . Further, the back lower front decoration 3410 can move the front left decoration 3413 and the front right decoration 3414 between the open position and the closed position at any position (height) between the lowered position and the raised position.

According to this back bottom front decoration body 3400, when the back bottom front decoration body 3410 is moved upward from the lowered position, it moves to the center side of the game area 5a and blocks a part of the performance display device 1600, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the back bottom front decoration body 3410 can be focused.

In addition, when the front left decoration 3413 and the front right decoration 3414 are moved from the closed position to the open position, the center decoration 3412 provided at the rear side of the back lower front decoration 3410 becomes visible (appears).

Further, in the back lower front decoration 3410, the central decoration 3412 can be rotated about the axis in the front-rear direction. Therefore, when the central decoration 3412 is rotated with the front left decoration 3413 and the front right decoration 3412 moved to the open position to make the central decoration 3412 appear, the player can be made to strongly feel that something good must happen, and the player's expectation can be further enhanced to suppress the decline in interest. Further, since the central decorative body 3412 can be rotated, when the central decorative body 3412 appears visibly, the player can be thrilled and excited depending on whether or not the central decorative body 3412 rotates, and the player can be entertained.

In addition, the back and front front effect unit 3400 appropriately combines the lifting and lowering of the back and bottom front decoration body 3410, the appearance of the center decoration body 3412 by moving the front left decoration body 3413 and the front right decoration body 3414, and the rotation of the center decoration body 3412, thereby making it possible to show the player a variety of movable performances, thereby making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing the decrease in interest.

Furthermore, in addition to the movable performance of the back bottom front decoration body 3410 as described above, the back bottom front performance unit 3400 enables the light emission performance by a plurality of LEDs of the back bottom front decoration board, so that the player can be shown various performances, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

[5-9f. Back side post production unit]
Next, the back up post effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described. The back top rear effect unit 3500 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 behind the back top front effect unit 3300 . The back top rear effect unit 3500 includes a back top rear decoration body 3510 (see FIG. 155 etc.) that is long in the left and right direction, a back top decoration board (not shown) provided behind the back top rear decoration body 3510 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back top and rear lifting unit (not shown) that raises and lowers the back top decoration body 3510.

The back upper decoration body 3510 has translucency, and can be decorated with light emission by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back upper decoration substrate. In addition, the rear upper back decorative body 3510 is provided so as to be able to move up and down between the highest raised position and the lowest lowered position by the rear upper back lifting unit. Furthermore, the back upper back decoration 3510 is provided behind the back lower front decoration 3410 .

The back upper rear decoration 3510 is formed in a shape that imitates the upper half of a winning cup, and the letter "Yu" is formed in relief in the center in the left-right direction. The rear upper back decoration 3510 can form one large winning cup by abutting the rear lower back decoration 3610 on the lower end (see FIG. 157, etc.). The upper back decoration 3510 has substantially the same height as the front upper back decoration 3310 .

In the normal state, the upper back rear effect unit 3500 has the upper back rear decorative body 3510 positioned at the raised position. In this state, the rear upper back decoration 3510 is positioned behind the front upper back decoration 3310 in the raised position, and is invisible from the front.

In the back top rear effect unit 3500, the bottom end of the back top back decoration 3510 is positioned at substantially the height of the vertical center of the game area 5a when the back top rear decoration 3510 is moved to the lowered position by the back top rear lifting unit. In a state in which the back upper rear decoration body 3510 is moved downward from the raised position, it is positioned in front of the effect display device 1600 . In this state, if the front upper back decoration 3310 or the front lower back decoration 3410 is not moved in front of the upper back decoration 3510, the upper back decoration 3510 can be visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500.例文帳に追加

According to the back top rear effect unit 3500, the top back decoration body 3510 can be visibly appeared from the front by raising and lowering the top back decoration body 3510, so that the player can be surprised by the appearance of the top back decoration body 3510, the player can be entertained, and the decline in interest can be suppressed. In addition, the upper back decoration body 3510 can form one large decoration by bringing it into contact with the rear lower back decoration body 3610, so that a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player can be made to think that a chance has arrived, thereby suppressing a decline in interest.

[5-9g. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Next, the rear lower post effect unit 3600 of the rear unit 3000 will be described. The back bottom post effect unit 3600 is provided behind the back bottom front effect unit 3400 in the lower part inside the back box 3010 . The back underside effect unit 3600 includes a back underside decoration 3610 (see FIG. 155 etc.) that is long in the left-right direction, a underside back decoration board (not shown) provided behind the back underside decoration 3610 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a bottom back lifting unit (not shown) that raises and lowers the underside decoration 3610.

The back underside decoration 3610 has translucency, and can be decorated with light emission by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back underside decoration substrate. In addition, the rear underside decorative body 3610 is provided so as to be able to move up and down between the lowest lowered position and the highest raised position by the lower back elevation unit.

The rear lower back decoration body 3610 is formed in a shape that imitates the lower half of a winning cup, and the letter "prize" is formed in relief in the center in the left-right direction. The rear lower back decorative body 3610 can form one large winning cup by abutting the upper rear decorative body 3510 on the upper end (see FIG. 157, etc.). The lower back decoration body 3610 has substantially the same height as the lower back front decoration body 3410 .

In the normal state, the underside post effect unit 3600 has the underside afterside decoration 3610 positioned at the lowered position. In this state, the rear lower back decoration body 3610 is located behind the front lower back decoration body 3410 in the lowered position, and is invisible from the front.

In the back bottom rear effect unit 3600, when the back bottom rear decoration body 3610 is moved to the raised position by the back bottom rear lifting unit, the top end of the back bottom back decoration body 3610 is positioned at a height at which the bottom end of the back top rear decoration body 3510 at the raised position substantially abuts. In the state in which the rear lower back decoration body 3610 is moved upward from the lowered position, it is positioned in front of the effect display device 1600 . In this state, if the front upper back decoration 3310 or the front lower back decoration 3410 is not moved in front of the lower back decoration 3610, the lower back decoration 3610 can be visually recognized through the frame of the center accessory 2500.例文帳に追加

According to the behind-the-back performance unit 3600, the behind-the-back decoration body 3610 can be visibly appeared from the front by raising and lowering the behind-the-back decoration body 3610, so that the player can be surprised by the appearance of the behind-the-back decoration body 3610, the player can be entertained, and the decline in interest can be suppressed. In addition, the lower back decoration 3610 can form one large decoration by bringing it into contact with the upper back decoration 3510, so that a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player can be made to think that a chance has arrived, thereby suppressing a decline in interest.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 154 to 159 and the like. FIG. 154 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-bottom front decoration of the back-bottom front effect unit and the back-bottom rear decoration of the back-bottom post-effect unit in the back unit are moved to their raised positions. FIG. 155 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the back-bottom front decoration of the back-bottom front effect unit in the back unit is moved to the center of the game area, the back-top rear decoration of the back-up post-production unit is moved to the upper side of the back-bottom front decoration, and the back-bottom rear decoration of the back-bottom rear effect unit is moved to the bottom of the back-bottom front decoration. 156 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front left decoration and the front right decoration in the back bottom front decoration of the back bottom front effect unit are moved to the open position to reveal the center decoration in the state of FIG. 155. FIG.

FIG. 157 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the back top rear decorative body of the back top rear effect unit in the back unit is moved to the lowered position, and the back bottom back decoration body of the back bottom rear effect unit rises and abuts on the back top rear decoration body. FIG. 158 is a front view of the game board showing the state of FIG. 157, in which the front left decoration and the front right decoration of the back bottom front decoration of the back bottom front effect unit are moved to the open position and the center decoration appears. FIG. 159 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the back top front decoration of the back top front effect unit in the back unit is moved to a lowered position, the back top rear decoration of the back top front effect unit is moved to the rear of the back top front decoration, the back bottom front decoration of the back bottom front effect unit is raised and moved below the back top front decoration, and the back bottom back decoration of the back bottom rear effect unit is raised and is in contact with the back top rear decoration behind the back bottom front decoration.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, the game panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the game area 5a, the starting unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the side upper left unit 2300, the lower right unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, and the gate member 2600 are substantially entirely transparent. 3201 of the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100, the top front decoration 3310 of the back top front effect unit 3300, and the back bottom front decoration 3410 of the back bottom front effect unit 3400, etc. can be visually recognized well. can be visually recognized.

More specifically, the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 of the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 is annularly provided along the peripheral edge of the game area 5a, and can be visually recognized through the transparent game panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the like. The back upper front decoration body 3310 of the back upper front effect unit 3300 is located above the upper end of the effect display device 1600 and positioned at a raised position where the center in the vertical direction is substantially the same height as the upper end of the inner rail 1002, most of which can be visually recognized through the frame of the center role 2500, and the remaining parts can be visually recognized through the transparent game panel 1100 and the transparent center role 2500.

In addition, the back bottom front decorative body 3410 of the back bottom front effect unit 3400 is located in a lowered position near the lower end of the effect display device 1600, where the center in the vertical direction is slightly higher than the side upper left unit 2300, and a part of it can be visually recognized through the frame of the center role 2500, and the rest can be visually recognized through the transparent game panel 1100 and the transparent center role 2500. The front left decoration 3413 and the front right decoration 3414 of the back lower front decoration 3410 are positioned directly above the center accessory 2500 near the stage 2513 . The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized well through the square area between the front upper back decoration 3310 and the front lower back decoration 3410 within the frame of the center accessory 2500 .

The back top rear decorative body 3510 of the back top rear effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 is positioned behind the back top front decoration body 3310 and cannot be visually recognized from the front. Further, the back bottom rear decorative body 3610 of the back bottom rear effect unit 3600 is positioned behind the back bottom front decoration body 3410 and cannot be visually recognized from the front.

In the game board 5, according to the lottery result of the first special pattern or the lottery result of the second special pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005, the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, the back top front effect unit 3300, the back bottom front effect unit 3400, the back top rear effect unit 3500, and the back bottom after effect unit 3600, etc., perform predetermined movable effects and light emitting effects. do In addition, the game board 5 performs an effect using the game ball B (here, a so-called hit ball that no longer affects the game) in the lower right unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 .

Specifically, for example, the back unit 3000 can be used to perform movable effects as shown in FIGS. First, as shown in FIG. 154, the back bottom front decoration 3410 of the back bottom front effect unit 3400 and the back bottom rear decoration 3610 of the back bottom post effect unit 3600 are moved together to the raised position. As a result, the back bottom front decoration 3410 crossing the performance display device 1600 moves upward so as to traverse the performance display device 1600, so that the player's interest can be drawn to the back bottom front decoration 3410 and the player can be made to think that something good will happen.

By the way, in FIG. 154, when only the front lower back decoration 3410 is moved upward, the rear lower back decoration 3610 in the lowered position becomes visible from the front, but since the rear lower back decoration 3610 is formed so as to be paired with the upper rear decoration 3510, if only the rear lower back decoration 3610 is visible, it may look unnatural and the appearance of the game area 5a may deteriorate. In addition, when the lower back decoration body 3610 is seen, some players may recognize that it is combined with another decoration body due to its imperfect shape, and when a joint movable performance with the upper back decoration body 3510 to be described later is executed, the impact given to the player may be reduced and sufficient performance effects may not be obtained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the rear lower back decoration 3610 is moved upward together with the front lower back decoration 3410, the rear lower back decoration 3610 can be kept hidden, thereby preventing the appearance of the game area 5a from deteriorating, making it difficult to notice the presence of the rear lower back decoration 3610, and sufficiently exerting the production effect of the joint movable presentation with the upper rear decoration 3510, which will be described later. I can.

Next, from the state shown in FIG. 154, as shown in FIG. 155, the front back decoration 3410 is moved to the center of the game area. At this time, for the same reason as described above, the rear lower back decoration 3610 is moved together with the front lower back decoration 3410 so that the front lower back decoration 3410 is positioned forward. In addition, the upper back decoration 3510 is moved to a portion between the front upper back decoration 3310 and the front lower back decoration 3410 , and the lower back decoration 3610 is moved to the lower side of the lower front decoration 3410 .

As a result, the front surface of the effect display device 1600 is substantially covered with the upper back decoration body 3510, the front lower back decoration body 3410 and the back lower decoration body 3610, so that a strong impact can be given to the player and the player can be made to strongly think that something good will happen. In this state, the upper rear decoration body 3510 and the rear lower rear decoration body 3610 forming one decoration (here, the winning cup) are vertically separated from each other, but since the front lower rear decoration body 3410 is positioned between them, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the middle of the vertically long winning cup is hidden by the front lower rear decoration body 3410, thereby avoiding the bad appearance.

Then, from the state shown in FIG. 155, as shown in FIG. 156, the front left decoration 3413 and the front right decoration 3414 of the back bottom front decoration 3410 are moved from the closed position where they are close to each other to the open position where they are separated from each other, so that the center decoration 3412 appears between the front left decoration 3413 and the front right decoration 3414 in a visible manner. Thus, by newly appearing the center decoration 3412 in the back lower front decoration 3410, the player can be made to think strongly that an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game state) in which the player is advantageous will occur, and the expectation for the advantageous game state can be heightened to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

When the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 are moved to the open position, they may be gradually moved or repeatedly opened and closed. Thus, depending on whether or not the front left decorative body 3413 and the front right decorative body 3414 open and the central decorative body 3412 appears, the player can be thrilled and entertained.

In the state shown in FIG. 156, the central decorative body 3412 of the back lower front decorative body 3410 may be further rotated. As a result, the rotation of the central decorative body 3412 can convince the player that an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game state) in which the player is advantageous will occur, and the expectation for the advantageous game state can be heightened to suppress the deterioration of interest.

156, the front left decoration 3413 and the front right decoration 3414 of the back bottom front decoration 3410 are moved to the closed position as shown in FIG. 155, and then the back bottom front decoration 3410 is moved to the lowered position as shown in FIG. As a result, a large winning cup appears in the center of the game area 5a, so that the player can be convinced that an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game state) in which the player is advantageous will occur, and the expectation for the advantageous game state can be heightened to suppress the decrease in interest.

Thereafter, from the state shown in FIG. 157, as shown in FIG. 158, the front left decoration 3413 and the front right decoration 3414 of the back bottom front decoration 3410 are moved from the closed position to the open position. As a result, the player can be strongly convinced that an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game state) in which the player is advantageous will occur, and the expectation for the advantageous game state can be heightened to suppress the decrease in interest.

In the state shown in FIG. 158, the center decoration 3412 of the back lower front decoration 3410 may be rotated. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the occurrence of an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game state) in which the player is advantageous is fixed, and the expectation for the advantageous game state can be heightened to suppress the deterioration of interest.

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 154, the front lower back decoration 3410 (the rear lower back decoration 3610) is moved to the raised position as the first operation, but the operation is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. The back bottom front decoration body 3410 may be moved to the lower side of the back top front decoration body 3310, and the back bottom back decoration body 3610 may be moved behind the back bottom front decoration body 3410 together with the back bottom front decoration body 3410.例文帳に追加Alternatively, the front bottom decoration 3410 may be moved together with the rear bottom decoration 3610 to the center of the game area 5a. These can also produce the same effect as the above.

Thus, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the series of effects as described above are executed according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005, and the player can be entertained. In addition, the series of performances are progressed to the end or terminated in the middle according to the lottery result of the first special pattern and the lottery result of the second special pattern, and by showing in multiple stages, the player is hardly bored.

In addition, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the above-described movable effect can be appropriately combined with the light emitting effect, and can also be combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. As a result, various patterns of performance can be presented to the player by appropriately combining the light emission performance, the display performance, etc., the player can be made less bored, the player can be entertained by various performances, and the decline of the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the movable effect as described above is executed according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005. However, it is not limited to this, and may be executed in response to the detection of the game ball B by the pseudo large winning port sensor 2403. As a result, even during the occurrence of an advantageous game state (for example, a ``jackpot'' game state) in which the player is advantageous, the movable presentation can be enjoyed, and the player is hardly bored, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 160 and the like. FIG. 160 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1, as shown, is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the body frame 4, and each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls game operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls display of effect images on the effect display device 1600 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls payout of the game ball B, and a launch control unit 633b that controls launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 195. FIG.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although not shown in detail, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game includes a main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor containing a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit that receives detection signals from various detection switches, a main control solenoid drive circuit that drives various solenoids, and the main control MPU 1310a. A RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in the RAM, a setting display 1310g for displaying set values and errors, and a base monitor 1310h for displaying the number of game balls B collected from an outlet 1008 provided in a game area 5a divided and formed on the game board 5 are provided. The main control MPU 1310a has built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM"), a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") for monitoring the operation (system), and functions for preventing fraud.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a to identify the individual (there is only one code in the world). Since the ID code assigned once is stored in a non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve the ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

The main control MPU 1310a also incorporates a circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as "internal reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and if the contents of the register change to inconsistent contents, it is a circuit that forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a as being affected by electrical noise. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be controlled and disabled by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main-control-side power-off processing, which will be described later, and the main-control-side power-on processing, which will be described later, is executed again. In this case, since the main control side power failure processing is not executed, as will be described later, a checksum (sum value) error will always occur in the main control built-in RAM, so the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased (cleared). Even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, since the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a does not output a reset signal to the payout control board 633, only the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) will be restarted, and the payout control board 633 is maintained in the started state.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a incorporates a hard random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in hard random number circuit”) for updating, by hardware, a jackpot determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game among various random numbers related to the game. This main control built-in hard random number circuit generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 65535 as the maximum value is preset), the predetermined value as the initial value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first uses one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the main control MPU 1310a), rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range one after another without duplication, and extracts all the values within the predetermined numerical range. Again, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another without duplication based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a jackpot determination random number.

The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various sensors are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. In other words, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit in which information based on detection signals from various sensors input to its various input terminals is not reset by a main control system reset, so that various signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes a first start opening sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first start opening 2004, a second start opening sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2005, a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and a gate sensor that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate 2002. 2601, a first big winning hole sensor 2525 that detects the game ball B received in the first big winning hole 2006, a second big winning hole sensor 2561 that detects the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2007, an out sensor 664 that detects the game ball B discharged from the game board 5, a magnetic sensor 1050 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and a vibration that detects vibration acting on the game board 5. A detection signal from a sensor or the like is inputted to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control input circuit.

Detection signals from setting key switches 1311a and setting switching buttons 1311b provided on the setting change board 1311 are input to input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

In addition, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch are respectively input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 (that is, directly without passing through the payout control input circuit and payout control output circuit, which will be described later), and are input to the input terminals of the predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The detection signals from the out sensor 664, the first starter sensor 3002, and the second starter sensor 2401 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without going through another board, and input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. On the other hand, detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2601, the first big winning opening sensor 2525, the second big winning opening sensor 2561, the magnetic sensor 1050, and the vibration sensor are input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board, that is, indirectly, and are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby outputting each drive signal from the main control solenoid drive circuit to the variable winning opening solenoid 2522, the first big winning opening solenoid 2524, and the second big winning opening solenoid 2563 via the panel relay board, that is, indirectly, or the state indicator of the function display unit 1400 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. , Ordinary pattern display device, Ordinary reserved display device, First special pattern display device, First special reserved number display device, Second special pattern display device, Second special reserved number display device, Round display device. Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c of the setting change board 1311 by outputting the drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, and outputs various information (game information) related to the game to the payout control board 633. By outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (power failure clear signal) to the power failure monitoring circuit, or a launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch the game ball B from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting, a launch permission signal is output to the payout control board 633 to notify that the launch of the game ball B is permitted. The logic of the launch permission signal that tells permission to launch is set to launch permission logic when launch is permitted, while it is set to launch stop logic (fire non-permission logic) which is the inverse of the launch permission logic when launch is not permitted. The logic of the firing permission signal is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic), which is the inversion of the firing permission logic, is set as an initial value (default) from when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power is restored) until the firing permission signal setting process in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is started.

In this embodiment, the first start sensor 3002, the second start sensor 2401, the variable winning sensor 2526, the gate sensor 2601, the first major winning sensor 2525, the second major winning sensor 2561, and the out sensor 664 use non-contact electromagnetic proximity switches, whereas the general winning sensor 3001 uses a contact ON/OFF mechanical switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first start hole 2004, the second start hole 2005, the variable winning hole 2003, and the gate 2002, so the detection of the game ball B by the first start hole sensor 3002, the second start hole sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2601 also occurs frequently. Therefore, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the variable winning opening sensor 2526, and the gate sensor 2601.

In addition, when an advantageous game state ("big hit" game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning hole 2006 is opened and the game ball B enters frequently, so the detection of the game ball B by the first big winning hole sensor 2525 also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is also used for the first prize winning opening sensor 2525 . In addition, since a large amount of the game balls B launched into the game area 5a are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5, detection of the game balls B by the out sensor 664 occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used for the out sensor 664 as well. On the other hand, detection by the general winning hole sensor 3001 does not occur frequently in the general winning hole 2001 into which the game ball B does not enter frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch is used for the general winning hole sensor 3001 . It should be noted that regardless of whether or not the game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001 frequently, a proximity switch with high durability and long life may be used.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. The main control MPU 1310 a , which will be described later in detail, receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 , shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511 .

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, although detailed description will be given later. A power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 includes an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when power is cut off. With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1310a can store various information in the RAM during power-off processing even when the power is off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633 .

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages become equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
The payout control board 633 for controlling the payout of the game balls B includes a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, a launch control unit 633b that controls the ball feed by the ball feed solenoid 145 as well as the launch control by the discharge solenoid 542, an error LED display that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that has a press operation unit for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display, and the ball tank 55 during maintenance. 2. A tank rail 553, a ball guiding unit 570, and a game ball B in a payout device 580 are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper tray 201), and a ball extracting switch for starting the ball extracting operation.

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
The payout control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to payout in the payout control board 633, has a payout control MPU, which is a microprocessor containing a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout motor 5 of the payout device 580. It has a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to 84 and a payout control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. The payout control MPU has built-in ROM and RAM as well as functions for preventing fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port. Detection signals from the output detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Detection signals from the door frame open switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591 of the dispensing device 580, the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310, and the error cancellation signal from the error cancellation switch are input to a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU via the dispensing control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, outputs a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display via the payout control I/O port, outputs a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port in a serial manner, and actually It outputs the number of game balls B put out to the external terminal plate 558 through the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

An error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that there is a "connection abnormality" (specifically, that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633). When the number "2" is displayed, it is notified that "the ball is caught" (specifically, based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, making it difficult to rotate the payout blade 589). When the number "5" is displayed, it is notified that there is a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries of the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit). When the number "7" is displayed, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (electrical connection is disconnected anywhere from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), and when the number "9" is displayed, it is notified that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

A ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and a return requesting signal for the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port and input to the payout control MPU. The CR unit updates the remaining degree of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls B, outputs a display signal of the remaining degree to the ball rental operation unit 220, and this signal is input to a ball rental display part 226 of the ball rental operation unit 220 and displayed.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The shooting control unit 633b performs shooting control by the shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit that receives detection signals from various detection switches related to firing, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for firing the game ball B toward the play area 5a based on this clock signal, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on this firing reference pulse, and a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the firing reference pulse. and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit for output. Based on the clock signal from the oscillating circuit, the shooting timing control circuit generates a shooting reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are shot toward the game area 5a per minute and outputs it to a shooting solenoid drive circuit, and also generates a ball feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputs it to a ball feeding solenoid driving circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, detection signals from a handle touch sensor 192 for detecting whether or not the palm or fingers are in contact with the handle 195, and a single-shot button operation sensor 194 for detecting whether or not the game ball B is forcibly stopped from being launched by the player's will are input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the firing control input circuit and the firing timing control circuit. A launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 for permitting launch of the game ball B is input to the launch timing control circuit after being input to the launch control input circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the intensity of hitting the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 195, is input to a launch solenoid drive circuit.

The firing timing control circuit does not output a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a unless firing condition 1 that the palm or finger is in contact with the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is satisfied, firing condition 2 that the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected based on the CR connection signal is satisfied, and firing condition 3 that the shooting of the game ball B is permitted based on the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 is not satisfied. Therefore, for example, the game ball B cannot be fired without the firing solenoid drive circuit outputting a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 .

Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the firing solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive current for shooting the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 195 to the firing solenoid 542 when the firing reference pulse is input. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, thereby receiving one game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 into the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is finished, the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 by stopping the output of the constant current. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is controlled to be constant.

In the present embodiment, the discharge control board 633 is equipped with a firing control section 633b that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. However, the power board 630 may be provided with the firing control section 633b. In this case, the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be directly input to the power supply board 630, may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board (not shown).

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 160, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls effects based on commands from the main control board 1310, and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1511 that performs performance control in the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control IC in which a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I/O interfaces, etc. are integrated on one semiconductor chip, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a sound source IC that performs high-quality performance, and a sound ROM that stores sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC.

In the peripheral control IC, a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. are integrated on one semiconductor chip. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC transmits game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED etc. provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to each decoration board of the game board 5 based on these various commands. The game board side drive data for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor that operates the various effect units provided in 5 is sent from the game board decoration drive board serial I / O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5, the door side drive data for outputting the drive signal to the vibration motor 356 provided in the door frame 3, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and the projection force adjustment drive motor 381 etc., and the lighting signal to the color LED etc. provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3, door-side light-emitting data for outputting a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal, and door-side driving light-emitting data composed of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving board is transmitted to the door frame 3 side, the control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512, and the control signal (sound command) for extracting the sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from the contact detection sensor main body 358, the pressure detection sensor 373, the elevation detection sensor 374, and the projecting force detection sensor 375 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a signal (operation signal) from the performance display control unit 1512 to inform that the performance display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and monitors the operation of the performance display control unit 1512 based on this operation signal.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound command) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and performs control so that sounds such as music and sound effects that match various performances are played from the top central speaker and top side speaker provided in the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, etc., the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, etc. The volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume control switch protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, by sending an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) to the top center speaker and the top side speaker of the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4, it is possible to present a sound effect (sound production) with a more realistic feeling than before.

The peripheral control unit 1511 has an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the CPU of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC uses both the built-in WDT and the external WDT to diagnose whether or not its own system is running out of control.

A display command output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by a serial input/output port, and in the present embodiment, a bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is set to 19.2 kilo (k) bps (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps"). On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting and blinking command, the game board side lighting and blinking command, the movable body driving command, etc., which are output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side, are performed by a plurality of serial input/output ports different from the display commands, and in this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

[6-3b. Effect display control section]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls drawing of the effect display device 1600 . Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) that controls the display of the effect display device 1600, an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM that transfers and copies the various data stored in the image ROM. , is equipped with

This display control MPU incorporates a parallel I/O port, a serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control drawing of the effect display device 1600 . When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to that effect. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores a plurality of programs for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, schedule data corresponding to the control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to the control data (display commands), and the like. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 . The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data in chronological order, which defines the order when various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. The non-resident area transfer data defines in advance the order of transferring various data from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM for the screen data to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

The display control MPU extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then extracts the screen data following the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs them to the VDP.

When screen data output from a display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from an image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on a performance display device 1600, and outputs the generated drawing data to the performance display device 1600. - 特許庁Also, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. Note that the VDP employs a line buffer system. This "line buffer system" is a system in which drawing data for one line for drawing in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in a line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is output to the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600 is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. The sprite data is base data, which is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

A “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600 . For example, when displaying various persons (characters) on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be made into one sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 after setting the position to be arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites are superimposed (hereinafter referred to as "sprite superimposition order").

A sprite is constructed by gluing together a plurality of rectangular areas of 64 pixels each in length and width. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". A small sprite can be expressed using one sprite character, and a relatively large sprite such as a person can be expressed using a total of 6 sprite characters arranged, for example, 2 horizontally by 3 vertically. Larger sprites such as backgrounds can be represented using more sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 is driven by main scanning for sequentially setting the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front, and sub-scanning for repeating the main scanning in a direction crossing the one direction. When drawing data for one line output from a performance display control part 1512 is input, the performance display device 1600 sequentially outputs the data to pixels for one line as main scanning from left to right when viewed from the front of the performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加When the output of one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, when the drawing data of the next line is input, the drawing data of the next line is sequentially output to the pixels of one line from the left to the right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as the main scanning based on the drawing data of the next line.

[7. Game content]
The contents of games played by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 147 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a player rotates a handle 195 of a handle unit 180 arranged at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 pass between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and are hit into the upper part of the game area 5a, and the game with the game balls B is started. The game ball B hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game balls B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 195, and the more the handle 195 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the more strongly the game balls B can be hit.

In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle pegs N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and when the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle peg N, the falling speed of the game ball B is suppressed and various movements are imparted to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500. As shown in FIG.

When the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 in a front view, it contacts with a plurality of obstacle nails N and flows through either the left first guide passage 2531 or the left second guide passage 2532 of the left guide passage group 2530 of the center role 2500. - 特許庁In the vicinity of the entrance in the left second guide passage 2532, a first big prize winning port 2006 which is closed unreceivably by the first big prize winning port door 2523 in a normal state is provided, and the game ball B entering the left second guiding passage 2532 rolls on the first big prize winning port door 2523 and flows down.

A game ball B that has circulated through the left guide path group 2530 is released above the gate 2002, hits a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the left guide path group 2530 and the gate 2002 on the left and right sides of the variable winning opening 2003 which is normally closed by the variable winning opening door 2521, and passes through the gate 2002 with a certain probability.

When the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 and is detected by the gate sensor 2601, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and when the lottery result of the lottery normal pattern is "normal winning", the variable winning opening 2003 closed by the variable winning opening door 2521 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the receiving of the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003 becomes possible.

In the present embodiment, since the variable prize winning port 2003 is provided at a portion near the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, the variable winning port 2003 is more likely to accept the left second guide passage 2532 than the left first guide passage 2531. - 特許庁Then, when the game ball B is received in the variable winning hole 2003, a predetermined number (for example, 1 to 5) of the game ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

In this embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by passing the game ball B through the gate 2002, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the suggestion of the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also called ordinary fluctuation time). The suggestion of the lottery result of this normal symbol is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5 . The variable winning opening 2003 is opened after the normal variable time has elapsed.

If the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 until the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 until the lottery result of the normal pattern is suggested, the suggestion of the lottery result of the normal pattern cannot be started. In addition, the upper limit of the number of reserved lottery results of normal symbols is up to four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating reservations.

At the site of this gate 2002 , the game ball B flows down either the gate 2002 , the left outside of the gate 2002 , or the right outside of the gate 2002 . Then, the game ball B flowing downward from the gate 2002 enters the warp entrance 2511 opened in the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 . In this embodiment, due to the plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the area between the gate 2002 and the windmill W, the game ball B that has passed the right outside of the gate 2002 enters the warp entrance 2511 with a high probability.

The game ball B entering the warp entrance 2511 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512 . The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth to the left and right, and is released forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the center release portion 2513a of the stage 2513, the center release portion 2513a is positioned directly above the first start port 2004, so it is accepted by the first start port 2004 with a high probability.

When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and the main control board 1310 displays the first special symbols (for example, "loss", "small hit", "2R big win", "5R big win", "15R big win"). , “Probability change (probability change) hit”, “Time saving (time reduction) hit”, “Probability change time saving hit”, “Probability change time saving no hit”, “Second big hit”, etc.) lottery is done. If the lottery result of the lottered first special symbol is other than "losing", an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol that has been drawn is indicated to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called special fluctuation time).

In this embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2004 during the period from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 (special fluctuation time), the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol cannot be started, so the start of the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn earlier is completed. The number of retained lottery results of the first special symbols to be retained is set to four as the upper limit for each of the first starting ports 2004, and the lottery results of the first special symbols are discarded without being retained even if the game balls B are accepted in the first starting port 2004 for more than four. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating reservations.

The game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first starting port 2004 of the starting port unit 2100 .

By the way, if the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it is moved to the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and there is a possibility that it will be accepted by the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 or the first starting opening 2004 of the starting opening unit 2100. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning hole 2001 , a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 .

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit above the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall part 2501 of the center role 2500, it passes through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540 of the center role 2500, and is released into the space forming part 2550 where the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is planted.

A right guide passage group 2540 of the center accessory 2500 is composed of a right first guide passage 2541 whose entrance is open in the vicinity of the blocking part 1006 and a right second guide passage 2542 whose entrance is opened with an interval to the left from the entrance of the right first guide passage 2541. - 特許庁As a result, when the game ball B is hit with the strength to contact the impingement part 1006 (so-called right hit), it enters the right first guide passage 2541, and when the game ball B is hit with strength not to contact the impingement part 1006 (somewhat weaker than the right hit), it enters the right second guide path 2542 with a high probability. In other words, the game ball B hit to the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 circulates through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 according to the hitting strength.

In this embodiment, the game ball B that has flowed through the right first guide passage 2541 is released to the first guide region 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the game ball B that has flowed through the right second guide passage 2542 is released to the second guide region 2712 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700.

The game ball B released to the specific obstacle nail group 2700 flows down while meandering in the horizontal direction along the guidance area 2710 . As a result, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the falling speed of the game ball B is suppressed compared to the normal area.

In the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712, the game ball B may deviate from the guide area 2710, and if it deviates to the right outside from the second guide area 2712, it will be accepted in the first sub-out port 2021 provided below with a high probability. When the game ball B is received in the first sub-out port 2021, it is discharged out of the game area 5a without a chance of being received in the second big winning port 2007 or the second starting port 2005 provided downstream.

In this embodiment, the first sub-out port 2021 has a higher probability of receiving the fluid through the right second guide passage 2542 than through the right first guide passage 2541 . As a result, it is possible for the player to perform the hitting operation of the game ball B so that the game ball B circulates through the right first guide passage 2541 when "right hitting". In other words, when the game ball B is struck to the right, it can be urged to rotate the handle 195 to a large extent so that the game ball B is struck with such strength that the game ball B abuts against the impingement part 1006, and the original game of the Pachinko machine 1 can be easily enjoyed by the comparatively easy hitting operation.

A game ball B that circulates through the specific obstacle nail group 2700 (space forming portion 2550) and is not received by the first sub-out port 2021 passes between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567 and enters the second attacker portion 2560. In a normal state, the second large winning opening 2007 provided in the second attacker part 2560 is closed by the second large winning opening door 2562 so that the game ball B cannot be received. After rolling down, it is discharged downward from the second attacker portion 2560 through the right discharge passage 2565 .

A second starting port 2005 is provided below the right discharge passage 2565, a second sub-out port 2022 is provided on the right side of the second starting port 2005, and an inclined wall portion 2418 of the lower right unit 2400 is provided on the left side of the second starting port 2005. A plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted between the outlet of the right discharge passage 2565 and the second starting port 2005, the second sub-out port 2022, and the inclined wall portion 2418. Therefore, the game ball B released downward from the right release passage 2565 is accepted by the second starting port 2005 with a certain degree of probability. In addition, the game ball B released downward from the right release passage 2565 is accepted by the second sub-out port 2022 with a probability lower than that of the second starting port 2005 . The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 is discharged out of the game area 5a.

Then, the game ball B released downward from the right release passage 2565 and not received by the second starting port 2005 or the second sub-out port 2022 flows down on the inclined wall portion 2418, rolls obliquely downward to the left along the inclination of the inclined wall portion 2418, is released leftward at a portion below the first starting port 2004, and is received by the out port 1008.

That is, in a normal state, when the game ball B is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 ("right hit"), the second starting port 2005 is the only opportunity for receiving the game ball B. As a result, in a normal state, the player can be made to positively perform the hitting operation so that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the center role 2500, and a premium feeling can be imparted to the right side of the center role 2500 ("right hitting").

When the game ball B hit to the right side of the center role 2500 is received in the second starting port 2005, a predetermined number (for example, one) of the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 to the upper tray 201, and the main control board 1310 displays the second special symbol (for example, "losing", "small hit", "2R big win", "5R big win"). "Hit", "15R big hit", "Variable probability (probability change) hit", "Time reduction (time reduction) hit", "Variable time reduction hit", "Variable probability without time reduction hit", "Second big hit", etc.) are drawn. If the lottery result of the lottered second special symbol is other than "losing", an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous occurs. The lottery result of the drawn second special symbol is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called special variation time) longer than the special variation time of the lottery result of the first special symbol.

In this embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2005 during the period from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B in the second starting port 2005 (special fluctuation time), the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol cannot be started, so the start of the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol is postponed until the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn earlier is completed. The number of retained lottery results of the second special symbols to be retained is set to four as the upper limit for each of the second start ports 2005, and the lottery results of the second special symbols are discarded without being retained even if the game balls B are accepted in the second start port 2005 for more than four. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating reservations.

The special variation time of the lottery result of the second special pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2005 is set longer than the special variation time of the lottery result of the first special pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B to the first starting port 2004.例文帳に追加As a result, it takes more time to consume the reserved number of the second special pattern lottery results, so even if the number of game balls B received per unit time for the first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005 is the same, the number of the second special pattern lottery results to be executed for the second start port 2005 is reduced. Therefore, even if the game ball B is hit to the right side of the center role 2500 in a normal state, there is a possibility that only the second starting port 2005 is accepted, and the frequency of execution of the lottery result of the second special pattern is low, so that the player can positively perform the hitting operation so that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the center role 2500.例文帳に追加

As described above, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start opening 2004 or the second start opening 2005, the first big prize opening 2006 and the second big prize opening 2007 are opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern, and the game ball B can be received.

When the first big winning hole 2006 can be accepted, the first big winning hole 2006 is provided in the left second guide passage 2532 on the left side of the center accessory 2500, so that the player can be made to perform the hitting operation so that the game ball B circulates through the left second guide passage 2532.例文帳に追加When the game ball B entering the left second guide passage 2532 is received by the first big winning hole 2006 when the first big winning hole 2006 is in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

On the other hand, when the second big winning hole 2007 can be accepted, the second big winning hole 2007 is provided below the right side of the center role 2500, so that the player can perform the hitting operation so that the game ball B circulates on the right side of the center role 2500.例文帳に追加Then, when the second large winning opening 2007 is in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B, when the game ball B that has entered the attacker path 2564 of the second attacker section 2560 from between the guiding wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567 is received by the second large winning opening 2007, a predetermined number (for example, 10 pieces, or 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 .

In this way, when the game balls B can be received by the first big winning hole 2006 and the second big winning hole 2007, a lot of the game balls B can be put out by allowing the first big winning hole 2006 and the second big winning hole 2007 to accept the game balls B, so that the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

By the way, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is, for example, "small win", the second big winning opening 2007 opens and closes rapidly in a short time so that the game ball B can be accepted (for example, small win rush). At this time, when the second big winning hole 2007 opens and the game ball B can be received, even if the game ball B is aimed at the second big winning hole 2007, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 capable of delaying the flowing speed of the game ball B is provided upstream of the second big winning hole 2007, so that the timing of hitting the game ball B is difficult. As a result, the difficulty level is given to the operation of hitting the game ball B, so that the game can be made worthwhile, the player can be entertained, and the loss of interest can be suppressed. Further, in the above case, it is possible to make it difficult for the second big winning hole 2007 to receive the game ball B, so it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In addition, when the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn is "big win", the second big winning opening 2007 is in an open state capable of accepting the game ball B, and a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds to 40 seconds) has elapsed, or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are accepted into the second big winning opening 2007. The opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) for the state is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for "2R big win", 5 rounds for "5R big win", and 15 rounds for "15R big win" are repeated to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player.

In the ``jackpot'', there is a ``hit'' to change the probability of drawing a first special pattern such as a ``jackpot'' or a second special pattern after the end of the jackpot game (``probable variable hit'') or to change the display time of a performance image suggesting the lottery result of the first special pattern or the lottery result of the second special pattern (``time-saving hit'').

When the lottery result of the first special pattern or the lottery result of the second special pattern (for example, the lottery result of the second special pattern) is a ``second big win'', after the first big prize winning port 2006 or the second big prize winning port 2007 makes it possible to accept the game ball B in a predetermined pattern, ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous game state. This ST maintains the state of probability variation and time saving during a predetermined specific number of variations.

In this embodiment, below the second big winning hole 2007, there is a pseudo game area 2010 in which only the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2007 can circulate. The game ball B received in the second large winning opening 2007 is detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2561 and then enters the pseudo game area 2010 . The game ball B entering the pseudo game area 2010 flows down while being in contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo game area 2010, and the game ball B is accepted in the pseudo big prize opening 2402 when the game ball B can be accepted by the pseudo big prize opening 2402.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the pseudo big winning hole 2402 cannot accept the game ball B, it passes in front of the pseudo big winning hole 2402 and is discharged from the pseudo out hole 2404 without being returned to the game area 5a.

This pseudo big winning hole 2402 can accept the game ball B in a predetermined opening/closing pattern when the second big winning hole 2007 can accept the game ball B in a predetermined opening/closing pattern due to the above-mentioned "jackpot" or the like. Since the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is set to be larger and conspicuous than the second big winning hole 2007, many game balls B received in the second big winning hole 2007 are received in the pseudo big winning hole 2402, so that the player can be entertained during the ``jackpot'' game without being bored, and the decline of the player's interest can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the special symbol lottery results (the first special symbol lottery result and the second special symbol lottery result). The function display unit 1400 suggests the lottery result of the special pattern by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing a plurality of LEDs and flickering them for a predetermined time, and then suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the result of the lottery of the special symbol is suggested as the effect image. A performance image suggesting a lottery result of a special pattern in a performance display device 1600 is displayed by arranging and displaying three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns in the horizontal direction, changing each pattern row, sequentially stop-displaying the pattern rows variably displayed, and stop-displaying each pattern row so that the patterns of the three pattern rows to be stop-displayed are combined corresponding to the lottery result of the special pattern. When the lottery result of the special pattern is other than ``losing'', after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and an advantageous game state (for example, a ``small hit'' game, a ``big hit'' game, etc.) corresponding to the lottery result of the drawn special pattern is generated.

The time indicating the lottery result of the special pattern in the function display unit 1400 (blinking time of the LED (special variation time)) and the time indicating the lottery result of the special pattern in the performance display device 1600 (the time until the pattern row fluctuates and the final image is displayed) are different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying a performance image for suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern by the performance display device 1600, it is possible to perform a player participation type performance for operating the contact operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the performance operation unit 301 in the performance operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the lottery result of the special pattern drawn. In the player-participation type performance, the pressing operation section 303 can be raised by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 to make it stand out, and the player-participation type performance can be enjoyed by operating the performance operation section 301 .

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board provided in the door frame 3, each decoration board provided in the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the lower right unit 2400, the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, the back top front effect unit 3300, the back bottom front effect unit 3400, the back top post effect unit 3500, the back bottom back effect unit 3600, etc. are used as appropriate to perform light emission effect, display effect, etc. The player can be entertained with various effects, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

Further, the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake in the operation to be operated or does not perform the operation in the player participation type presentation for operating the contact operation part 302 or the pressing operation part 303.例文帳に追加

[8. Second Embodiment of Game Board]
Next, the game board 5A of the second embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 161 to 166 and the like. FIG. 161 is a front view of the game board of the second embodiment showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the inside of the game area in which game balls circulate. FIG. 162(a) is a front perspective view of the center accessory on the game board of the second embodiment, and FIG. 162(b) is a rear perspective view of the center accessory on the game board of the second embodiment. 163(a) is an exploded perspective view of the right half of the center accessory shown in FIG. 162, with the center front right plate and ball guide unit exploded and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the rear. FIG. 164(a) is a front view of the ball guiding unit in the center accessory of FIG. 162, and (b) is a right side view of the ball guiding unit. 165(a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Sousse line in FIG. 164, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Sawse line in FIG. 164, (c) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Sawse line in FIG. 164, and (d) is a cross-sectional view cut along the Tarter line in FIG. 166(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit of FIG. 164 and viewed from the front right, and FIG. 166(b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit of FIG. 164 and viewed from the front left.

The game board 5A of the second embodiment differs only in the configuration of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and part of the front unit 2000. FIG. Other parts have the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment, and detailed descriptions of the parts having the same configuration are omitted.

In the game board 5A of the second embodiment, three general winning openings 2001 are provided. In addition, in the game board 5A, the second starting opening 2005 of the lower right unit 2400 in the game board 5 is used as the normal winning opening 2008 instead of the gate 2002, and the variable winning opening 2003 of the game board 5 is used as the second starting opening 2005 opened and closed according to the lottery result of the normal pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2008.例文帳に追加Furthermore, in the game board 5A, instead of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, a ball guiding unit 2580 capable of guiding the game ball B is provided.

Due to the above differences, in the game board 5A of the second embodiment, the variable winning opening sensor 2526 of the game board 5 is replaced with the second starting opening sensor, and the second starting opening sensor 2401 of the game board 5 is replaced with the normal winning opening sensor.

The center accessory 2500 of the game board 5A is provided in the space forming portion 2550 between the right guide passage group 2540 and the second attacker portion 2560, and includes a ball guiding unit 2580 capable of guiding the game ball B flowing through the right guide passage group 2540, and a flat plate-shaped center right front that extends vertically from the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540 to the upper end of the second attacker portion 2560 so as to cover the front of the ball guiding unit 2580. a plate 2590;

The space forming portion 2550 of the center accessory 2500 of the game board 5A has an opening 2553 penetrating a flange portion 2502 extending rightward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 in a vertically elongated rectangular shape, and a lower right first passage 2550a and a lower right second passage 2550b provided below the opening 2553 through which the game ball B guided by the ball guiding unit 2580 flows.

The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are formed in a crank shape that extends downward from the entrance, extends rightward, and then extends downward. A lower right second passage 2550b is provided on the right side of the lower right first passage 2550a. The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are open in front and closed by the center right front plate 2590. As shown in FIG. The lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b are positioned substantially in the vertical center of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5A.

A space exposing the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker part 2560, and a plurality of obstructing nails N are planted in the relevant portion of the panel plate 1110.

Right above the first sub-out port 2021, the lower right second passage 2550b opens downward. As a result, the game ball B released downward from the lower right second passage 2550b has a higher probability of being accepted by the first sub-out port 2021 than the lower right first passage 2550a. Since the game ball B that has passed through the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540 and the second guide passage 2580b of the ball guide unit 2580 circulates in this lower right second passage 2550b, in order to reduce the acceptance probability of the game ball B into the first sub-out port 2021, the player can be made to actively perform the hitting operation of entering the game ball B into the right first guide passage 2541. Therefore, when hitting hard, the game ball B can easily enter the right first guide passage 2541 near the impingement part 1006, so that there is no need to hit the game ball B by delicate adjustment, and the hitting operation can be easily performed.

[8-1. ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 2580 separately guides the game balls B that have flowed through the right first guide passage 2541 and the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540 in such a manner that they can be visually recognized from the front. The ball guide unit 2580 has a first guide path 2580a that guides the game ball B from the right first guide path 2541 and a second guide path 2580b that guides the game ball B from the right second guide path 2542. A second guide passage 2580b is provided on the right side of the first guide passage 2580a. The first guide path 2580a and the second guide path 2580b can guide the game ball B downward while rocking it in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction in a visible state.

The first guide passage 2580a of the ball guide unit 2580 has an inlet opening forward near the upper end and an outlet opening obliquely forward and downward at the lower end. The second guide passage 2580b has an entrance opening forward at a position slightly lower than the entrance of the first guide passage 2580a, and an exit opening obliquely forward and downward at the lower end.

The ball guide unit 2580 is composed of a left passage member 2581 provided with a first guide passage 2580a opening rightward, a right passage member 2582 attached to the right side of the left passage member 2581 and provided with a second guide passage 2580b opening rightward, and a flat passage closing plate 2583 attached to the right side of the right passage member 2582. The sphere guiding unit 2580 is made transparent.

The left passage member 2581 has a flat plate-shaped side wall portion 2581a that extends in the front-rear and up-down directions, and a plurality of inclined portions 2581b that protrude rightward from the right-facing surface of the side wall portion 2581a, are inclined so that one side in the front-rear direction is lower, and are provided at intervals in the vertical direction. The plurality of inclined portions 2581b are provided at intervals that allow the game ball B to flow in the vertical direction, and are provided so that the lower sides alternately differ in the upper and lower directions. In addition, the plurality of inclined portions 2581b are provided so that the upper end of the lower inclined portion 2581b extends outward in the front-rear direction from the lower end of the upper inclined portion 2581b with a gap that allows the game ball B to flow.

In addition, the left passage member 2581 has a standing wall portion 2581c extending upward from the upper end of each inclined portion 2581b above the upper inclined portion 2581b, and a top wall portion 2581d extending from the upper end of the standing wall portion 2581c above the upper inclined portion 2581b.
The ceiling wall portion 2581d extends in the front-rear direction substantially in parallel with the inclined portion 2581b above the inclined portion 2581b on which the standing wall portion 2581c rises. Further, the top wall portion 2581d extends in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the lower surface of the upper inclined portion 2581b and forms a gap with the further upper inclined portion 2581b.

Further, the left passage member 2581 has a plurality of first projecting portions 2581e projecting rightward from a portion between the vertically spaced inclined portions 2581b of the side wall portion 2581a, and a plurality of first projecting pieces 2581f projecting rightward from a portion of the side wall portion 2581a between the lower end of the inclined portion 2581b and the standing wall portion 2581c. The first projecting portion 2581e is provided at a position corresponding to the vicinity of the center of the inclined portion 2581b in the front-rear direction, and is formed in a flat plate shape extending parallel to the lower inclined portion 2581b and having a triangular shape with a tapered tip. The first protrusion 2581f extends vertically, has a lower end in contact with the upper surface of the inclined portion 2581b, and has an upper end inclined downward to the right.

In the left passage member 2581, the uppermost inclined portion 2581b is inclined so that the rear end is lowered, and the upper end extends upward in an arc shape to form the lower side of the entrance of the first guide passage 2580a. The lowermost inclined portion 2581b is inclined so that the front end is lower, and is located rearward from the front end of the upper inclined portion 2581b, forming the lower side of the exit of the first guide passage 2580a. Further, the lowermost ceiling wall portion 2581d does not extend from the upper end of the standing wall portion 2581c. The left passage member 2581 of this embodiment is provided with eight inclined portions 2581b.

The right passage member 2582 has a flat side wall portion 2582a that closes the first guide passage 2580a that opens to the right, and a plurality of first protrusions 2582b that protrude leftward from the leftward surface of the side wall portion 2582a. When the ball guide unit 2580 is assembled, the plurality of first protrusions 2582b are provided two by two in the front-rear direction on one inclined portion 2581b of the left passage member 2581 with the first protrusions 2581e interposed therebetween. The first projecting portion 2582b projects leftward in a triangular shape on the upstream side of the first projecting portion 2581e, and projects leftward in a trapezoidal shape in which the upstream end side of the first projecting portion 2581e is inclined and extends downstream to the vicinity of the standing wall portion 2581c.

In addition, the right passage member 2582 protrudes rightward from the rightward-facing surface of the side wall portion 2582a, is inclined so that one side in the front-rear direction is lower, and has a plurality of inclined portions 2582c provided at intervals in the vertical direction. The plurality of inclined portions 2582c are provided at intervals that allow the game ball B to flow in the vertical direction, and are provided so that the lower sides alternately differ in the upper and lower directions. In addition, the plurality of inclined portions 2582c are provided so that the upper end of the lower inclined portion 2582c extends outward in the front-rear direction from the lower end of the upper inclined portion 2582c with a gap that allows the game ball B to flow.

In addition, the right passage member 2582 has a vertical wall portion 2582d that extends upward from the upper end of each inclined portion 2582c above the upper inclined portion 2582c, and a top wall portion 2582e that extends from the upper end of the vertical wall portion 2582d above the upper inclined portion 2582c.
The ceiling wall portion 2582e extends in the front-rear direction substantially in parallel with the inclined portion 2582c above the inclined portion 2582c on which the standing wall portion 2582d rises. Further, the top wall portion 2582e extends in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the lower surface of the upper inclined portion 2582c and forms a gap with the further upper inclined portion 2582c.

Further, the right passage member 2582 has a plurality of second projecting portions 2582f projecting rightward from a portion between the vertically spaced inclined portions 2582c of the side wall portion 2582a, and a plurality of second projection portions 2582g projecting rightward from a portion between the lower end of the inclined portion 2582c and the standing wall portion 2582d of the side wall portion 2581a. The second protruding piece 2582g is provided at a position corresponding to the vicinity of the center of the inclined portion 2582c in the front-rear direction, and is formed in a flat plate shape extending parallel to the lower inclined portion 2582c and having a triangular shape with a tapered tip. The second projecting piece 2582g extends vertically, has a lower end in contact with the upper surface of the inclined portion 2582c, and has an upper end inclined downward to the right.

In the right passage member 2582, the uppermost inclined portion 2582c is inclined such that the rear end is lowered, and the front end forms the lower side of the entrance of the second guide passage 2580b. In addition, the lowermost inclined portion 2582c is inclined so that the front end is lowered, and is positioned rearward from the front end of the upper inclined portion 2582c, forming the lower side of the exit of the second guide passage 2580b. Further, the lowermost ceiling wall portion 2582e does not extend from the upper ends of the standing wall portions 2582d. The right passage member 2582 of this embodiment is provided with eight inclined portions 2582c.

The passage closing plate 2583 has a flat side wall portion 2583a that closes the second guide passage 2580b that opens to the right, and a plurality of second projecting portions 2583b that protrude leftward from the leftward surface of the side wall portion 2583a. When the ball guide unit 2580 is assembled, the plurality of second projections 2583b are provided two by two in the front-rear direction on one inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582 with the second projections 2582f therebetween. The second protruding portion 2583b protrudes leftward in a triangular shape on the upstream side of the second protruding portion 2582f, and protrudes leftward in a trapezoidal shape in which the upstream end side of the second protruding portion 2582f is inclined and extends downstream to the vicinity of the standing wall portion 2582d.

In the ball guide unit 2580 of this embodiment, when the game ball B enters the first guide path 2580a through the right first guide path 2541 of the right guide path group 2540, it rolls backward by the inclined portion 2581b of the left path member 2581. A first projecting portion 2581e projects from the left above the inclined portion 2581b, and two first projecting portions 2582b of the right passage member 2582 project from the right so as to be anteroposterior to the first projecting portion 2581e. As a result, the game ball B is guided leftward by the first projecting portion 2582b, then guided rightward by the next first projecting portion 2581e, and further guided leftward again by the next first projecting portion 2582b.

Then, it flows down from the lower end of the inclined portion 2581b to the lower inclined portion 2581b along the standing wall portion 2581c. At this time, the game ball B guided leftward by the first projecting portion 2582b is guided rightward by the first projecting piece portion 2581f projecting rightward and flows down to the lower inclined portion 2581b. As a result, the game ball B does not fall vertically from the upper inclined portion 2581b to the lower inclined portion 2581b.

The game ball B that has flowed down to the lower inclined portion 2581b rolls forward according to the inclination of the inclined portion 2581b. Also above this inclined portion 2581b, a first projecting portion 2581e projects from the left, and two first projecting portions 2582b of the right passage member 2582 project from the right so as to be anteroposterior to the first projecting portion 2581e. As a result, the game ball B guided to the right by the rear first projecting portion 2581f is guided leftward by the first projecting portion 2582b, then guided to the right by the next first projecting portion 2581e, further guided leftward again by the next first projecting portion 2582b, and rolls while meandering (swinging) in the horizontal direction to the front end of the inclined portion 2581b. After that, when flowing downward from the front end of the inclined portion 2581b, the game ball B is guided rightward by the first projecting portion 2581f on the front side and further flows down onto the inclined portion 2581b on the lower side, and the movement of the game ball B as described above is repeated until the exit of the first guide passage 2580a.

Also, in the ball guide unit 2580, when the game ball B enters the second guide path 2580b through the right second guide path 2542 of the right guide path group 2540, it rolls backward by the inclined portion 2582c of the right path member 2582. Also in this second guide path 2580b, similarly to the first guide path 2580a, the game ball B flows down while rocking in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction. More specifically, a second projecting portion 2582f projects from the left above the inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582, and two second projecting portions 2583b of the passage closing plate 2583 project from the right so as to be anteroposterior to the second projecting portion 2582f. As a result, the game ball B is guided leftward by the second projecting portion 2583b, then guided rightward by the next second projecting portion 2582f, and further leftward again by the next second projecting portion 2583b.

Then, it flows down from the lower end of the inclined portion 2582c to the lower inclined portion 2582c along the standing wall portion 2582d. At this time, the game ball B guided leftward by the second projecting portion 2583b is guided rightward by the second projecting piece portion 2582g projecting rightward and flows down to the lower inclined portion 2582c. As a result, the game ball B does not fall vertically from the upper inclined portion 2582c to the lower inclined portion 2582c.

The game ball B that has flowed down to the lower inclined portion 2582c rolls forward according to the inclination of the inclined portion 2582c. Also above the inclined portion 2582c, a second protrusion 2582f protrudes from the left, and two second protrusions 2583b of the passage closing plate 2583 protrude from the right so as to be anteroposterior to the second protrusion 2582f. As a result, the game ball B guided to the right by the second projecting piece 2582g on the rear side is guided leftward by the second projecting portion 2583b, then guided to the right by the next second projecting portion 2582f, further guided leftward again by the next second projecting portion 2583b, and rolls while meandering (swinging) in the horizontal direction to the front end of the inclined portion 2582c. After that, when flowing downward from the front end of the inclined portion 2582c, it is guided rightward by the second projecting piece portion 2582g on the front side and further flows down on the inclined portion 2582c on the lower side, and the movement of the game ball B as described above is repeated until the exit of the second guide passage 2580b.

As described above, according to the ball guiding unit 2580 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has passed through the right guide path group 2540 can be released downward after flowing down while swinging (meandering) in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction. Therefore, compared to the case where the game ball B is caused to flow down vertically or through a spiral path, the staying time (falling time) of the game ball B at the same height can be increased. As a result, the circulation speed of the game ball B becomes relatively slow, so that the game ball B can be easily seen by the player, and the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, according to the ball guiding unit 2580, since the game ball B is made to flow down while rocking (meandering) in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction, the game ball B moves more complicatedly than when it flows down through a spiral path.

Further, according to the ball guide unit 2580, the left side faces the frame of the center role 2500, so that by seeing through the frame of the center role 2500, the game ball B flowing in the ball guide unit 2580 meandering in the front-rear direction can be visually recognized in a good condition, and the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed.

Further, according to the ball guiding unit 2580, since the falling speed of the game ball B can be suppressed and delayed, the same effect as the specific obstacle nail group 2700 described above can be achieved. More specifically, for example, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start opening 2004 or the second start opening 2005 (for example, a "small hit" lottery), the second big winning opening 2007 of the second attacker section 2560 provided below the ball guiding unit 2580 is opened and closed in a short time so that the game ball B can be accepted (for example, a small win). Rush), the player performs the driving operation of the game ball B so that the game ball B reaches the second big winning hole 2007 at the timing when the second big winning hole 2007 becomes acceptable. At this time, even if the game ball B is to be hit at that timing, a ball guide unit 2580 capable of delaying the flow speed of the game ball B is provided upstream of the second big winning hole 2007, so that the timing of hitting the game ball B can be made difficult. As a result, a degree of difficulty can be imparted to the hitting operation of the game ball B, so that the game can be made worthwhile, the player can be entertained, and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the ball guide unit 2580, gaps are formed between the inclined portion 2581b and the ceiling wall portion 2581d and between the inclined portion 2582c and the ceiling wall portion 2582e. Therefore, when ball clogging occurs inside the first guide passage 2580a or the second guide passage 2580b, the ball clogging can be eliminated by inserting a thin rod-shaped member through the gap.

In addition, according to the ball guide unit 2580, the left passage member 2581, the right passage member 2582, and the passage closing plate 2583 form the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b for guiding the game ball B. Therefore, compared to the case where the passage is formed using a plurality of obstacle nails N, the passage of the game ball B does not deform the passage (deformation of the obstacle nail N), and the game ball B can be guided in a stable state.

[8-2. Center right front plate]
The center right front plate 2590 of the game board 5A is formed in a transparent flat plate shape, and is attached to the right outer front end of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 so as to cover the front from the vicinity of the upper end of the right guide passage group 2540 to the upper end of the second attacker portion 2560. The center right front plate 2590 covers the front of the right guide passage group 2540 and the space forming portion 2550 (including the ball guiding unit 2580).

The center right front plate 2590 has, at its lower portion, a plurality of first storage portions 2590a penetrating in the front-rear direction and each accommodating the head portion of a plurality of obstructing nails N, a second accommodating portion 2590b penetrating in the front-rear direction and accommodating the head portion of one obstructing nail N, and a peeling hole 2590c penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The first accommodation portion 2590a and the second accommodation portion 2590b accommodate the heads of a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 whose front surface is exposed between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker portion 2560.

The first receiving portion 2590a is provided in the shape of an elongated hole that forms a certain gap with respect to a peripheral line surrounding and in contact with the heads of a plurality of (not shown, but two or three in this embodiment) of the obstructing nails N that are housed. As a result, the center of the first accommodating portion 2590a is different (eccentric) from the center of the obstructing nail N. The second accommodation portion 2590b is formed concentrically with the obstructing nail N. As shown in FIG. The first receiving portion 2590a and the second receiving portion 2590b are provided at portions corresponding to the obstructing nails N implanted between the lower right first passage 2550a and the lower right second passage 2550b and the second attacker portion 2560, respectively.

As a result, it is possible to restrict the movement of the head of the obstacle nail N accommodated in the first accommodation portion 2590a or the second accommodation portion 2590b, so that deformation (bending) of the obstacle nail N due to the impact caused by the distribution (contact) of the game ball B or an impact from the outside can be suppressed, the game ball B can be prevented from flowing down in an unintended flow, and the game ball B can be distributed in a stable state, and the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as described above, deformation of the obstacle nail N can be suppressed by the first accommodation portion 2590a and the second accommodation portion 2590b of the center right front plate 2590, so that the maintenance work of the obstacle nail N at the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced.

The peeling hole 2590c of the center right front plate 2590 is provided in a mounting boss for mounting the center right front plate 2590 to the main body of the center accessory 2500, and is provided coaxially with the mounting hole of the mounting boss. When a sticker for decoration or protection is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590, this peeling hole 2590c can be partially rolled up from the center right front plate 2590 by inserting a rod-shaped member such as a wire from the rear side while the sticker is attached and pressing the sticker forward from the rear with the rod-shaped member. The seal can be easily removed (peeled off) from the center right front plate 2590 by an operator pulling the curled portion of the seal. As a result, it is possible to improve workability such as re-sticking of the seal during manufacturing and sorting during disposal.

Since the stripping hole 2590c is provided at the mounting boss, even if a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the stripping hole 2590c into the rear side of the game panel 1100 or the part through which the game ball B circulates, the rear side is closed by the mounting screw in the assembled state of the game board 5, so that the insertion of the illegal tool can be avoided and the fraudulent act can be prevented.

If a sticker is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590, the sticker can make it difficult to see the peeling hole 2590c from the front, thereby suppressing deterioration in the appearance due to the peeling hole 2590c, making it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the peeling hole 2590c, and making it difficult to plan a fraudulent act using the peeling hole 2590c.

In addition, if a sticker is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590, the sticker attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2590 can close the front side of the first storage portion 2590a and the second storage portion 2590b in the assembled state on the game board 5, so that the obstacle nail N whose head is stored in the first storage portion 2590a and the second storage portion 2590b cannot be touched from the front. As a result, it is possible to avoid bending the obstructing nail N due to contact with a tool or the like during maintenance or the like, or avoid intentional bending of the obstructing nail N. In addition, when the sticker is attached, when the obstacle nail N whose head is accommodated in the first accommodation part 2590a and the second accommodation part 2590b is bent through the sticker, the trace remains on the sticker, so that the failure of the obstacle nail N can be easily noticed.

[9. Relationship between the present invention and the embodiment]
The center right front plate 2555 of the center accessory 2500 in the game board 5 of the present embodiment corresponds to the holding plate of the present invention, the first storage portion 2555a and the second storage portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555 of the present embodiment correspond to the storage portions of the present invention, and the front ridge portion 2555d of the center right front plate 2555 of the present embodiment corresponds to the protrusion of the present invention.

[10. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B enters the specific obstacle nail group 2700 consisting of a plurality of obstacle nails N in the game area 5a of the game board 5, the game ball B can be guided along a predetermined guide area 2701 (first guide area 2711 or second guide area 2712) with a predetermined probability. The specific obstacle nail group 2700 is composed of at least a plurality of nail groups 2710 in which two obstacle nails N form a pair of nail groups 2710, and a space is provided between the plurality of nail groups 2710 so that the game ball B can pass. Only the formation of the gap in the non-directional direction will be in charge. In other words, in the peg part 2710, in one obstacle peg N, the direction in charge of forming the gap through which the game ball B can pass can be a part of the direction. Therefore, even if one obstacle nail N of the nail group 2710 is bent, the number of affected gaps is small compared to the number of gaps formed by the nail group 2710 paired with the nail group 2710. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the flow of the game ball B from greatly changing, and to facilitate the circulation of the game ball B in a desired and intended flow path in a stable state.

At this time, the front ends of the respective obstructing nails N of the plurality of interfering nail portions 2710 constituting the specific obstructing nail group 2700 are housed in the first containing portion 2555a of the center right front plate 2555, and the front ends of the individual obstructing nails N constituting the specific obstructing nail group 2700 are contained in the second containing portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555. In the combined nail part 2710, the front ends of two obstacle nails N planted close to each other are accommodated in one first accommodating part 2555a. Since the two obstacle nails N implanted close to each other are difficult to bend in the direction of approaching each other, by grouping them together and surrounding the parts in the directions not approaching each other with the first accommodating part 2555a, it is possible to make the obstacle nails N difficult to bend in any direction. On the other hand, since the front end of one obstacle nail N implanted alone is accommodated in the second accommodation portion 2555b, the obstacle nail N can be made difficult to bend by the second accommodation portion 2555b. For this reason, the obstacle nail N of the plurality of nail groups 2710 constituting the specific obstacle nail group 2700 and the single obstacle nail N are accommodated in the first accommodation portion 2555a and the second accommodation portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555. Therefore, even if the impact is applied to the obstacle nail N due to the contact of the game ball B or the contact of a tool or the like during maintenance, the front end of the obstacle nail N remains in the first accommodation portion 2555a or the second accommodation portion 255. By abutting on the peripheral wall of 5b, it is possible to prevent the (plural) obstacle nails N from further movement and to make it difficult to bend the (plurality) obstacle nails N, and the flow of the game ball B by the plurality of obstacle nails N (specific obstacle nail group 2700) can be maintained in the intended initial state (at the time of shipment). Therefore, since the plurality of first accommodating portions 2555a and second accommodating portions 2555b of the center right front plate 2555 can make it difficult for the plurality of obstacle nails N constituting the specific obstacle nail group 2700 to bend, the game ball B can be stably circulated in an intended flow, the game ball B can be continuously guided by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 with a predetermined probability, and the intended effect of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can be reliably exhibited. The performance expected by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 can be exhibited for a long time.

Further, since the specific obstruction nail group 2700 is composed of a plurality of nail parts 2710 and a single obstruction nail N, the number of implanted obstruction nails N can be relatively increased, and the game ball B can be brought into contact with more obstruction nails N. Therefore, by increasing the number of times of contact with the obstructing nail N, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be further suppressed and the circulation direction of the game ball B can be changed in various directions, so that the movement of the game ball B can be more enjoyed and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, the center right front plate 2555 is provided with a plurality of front ridges 2555d protruding rearward, and by contacting the game balls B with the front ridges 2555d of the center right front plate 2555, the circulation speed of the game balls B can be suppressed and the direction of circulation of the game balls B can be changed. can be suppressed. In addition, since the front 2555d of the ridge part of the center right front plate 2555 does not bend unlike the obstacle nail N, the flow of the game balls B can be stably maintained by the front 2555d of the ridge part, and the performance assumed by the manufacturer of the Pachinko machine 1 can be exhibited for a long time.

In addition, since the center right front plate 2555 is provided with the front ridge portion 2555d, the front 2555d of the ridge portion of the center right front plate 2555 can exert a function similar to that of the obstacle nail N, such as suppressing the circulation speed of the game ball B or changing the distribution direction. Therefore, the center right front plate 2555 can be extended to a portion in the game area 5a where the obstructing nail N is difficult to be implanted, and the protrusion front 2555d can be provided in the portion. As a result, the game ball B can be made to move in the same manner as the obstacle nail N by providing the front part 2555d of the projecting part instead of the obstacle nail N at the part where the obstacle nail N cannot be planted in the conventional pachinko machine or the part outside the specific obstacle nail group 2700, so that the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed by the player in a wider range and the decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

In addition, downstream of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, a second large prize winning opening 2007 is provided that opens and closes to accept the game ball B according to the progress of the game (lottery result of the first special symbol or lottery result of the second special symbol). Since the game ball B can be delayed to reach the second big winning hole 2007 provided downstream compared to the plurality of obstacle nails N, it is possible to make the timing of hitting the game ball B aimed at the second big winning hole 2007 difficult, and to impart a desired degree of difficulty to the driving operation of the game ball B.例文帳に追加At this time, since the obstacle nail N of the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is made difficult to bend by the center right front plate 2555 as described above, the game ball B can be continuously guided by the specific obstacle nail group 2700 with a predetermined probability, and the driving operation can be reliably set to a desired difficulty level, and the difficulty level of the driving operation as the performance assumed by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 can be maintained for a long time. Thus, the player can be motivated to perform the hitting operation, enjoy the hitting operation of the game ball B, and receive the game ball B in the second big winning hole 2007 to give a sense of accomplishment, thereby suppressing the decline of the player's interest. Further, as described above, since the specific obstacle nail group 2700 can impart a difficulty level to the driving operation, it is possible to make it difficult to accept the game ball B into the second big winning hole 2007, and by suppressing the chance of payout due to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second big winning hole 2007, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, since the plurality of first storage portions 2555a and second storage portions 2555b of the center right front plate 2555 have gaps between them and the front ends of the obstructing nails N stored therein, even if the center right front plate 2555 expands and contracts due to changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity, the gaps can absorb changes in the positions of the first storage portions 2555a and second storage portions 2555b and the obstructing nails N due to expansion and contraction. Therefore, even if the center right front plate 2555 expands and contracts, it is possible to avoid bending of the plurality of obstructing nails N and breakage of the center right front plate 2555 due to resistance from the plurality of obstructing nails N. As a result, by enlarging the center right front plate 2555, even if the change in the distance from one end to the other end becomes large due to expansion and contraction, the above-described effects can be achieved. Therefore, the center right front plate 2555 can be made large, and the plurality of hindrance nails N of the specific hindrance nail group 2700 planted in a wide range in the game area 5a can be reliably made difficult to bend. Therefore, the specific obstacle peg group 2700 can guide the game ball B to the downstream second big winning hole 2007 with an intended predetermined probability, the movement of the game ball B by the intended flow of the game ball B can be entertained, and the decline in interest can be suppressed, the flow of the game ball B by the specific obstacle peg group 2700 can be stably maintained, and the performance assumed by the manufacturer of the Pachinko machine 1 can be exhibited for a long time. As this large center right front plate 2555, for example, the height is in the range of 1/3 to 3/3 of the height of the game area 5a, and the left and right width is in the range of 1/10 to 10/10 of the width of the game area 5a.

In addition, since the plurality of first accommodating portions 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b of the center right front plate 2555 have a gap between the front ends of the plurality of obstructing nails N of the specific obstructing nail group 2700, the front ends of the planted obstructing nails N can be easily inserted into the corresponding first accommodating portion 2555a and the second accommodating portion 2555b when assembling the game board, thereby facilitating the assembly of the pachinko machine 1. This cost increase can be suppressed.

In addition, since the center right front plate seal 2556 for closing the first storage portion 2555a and the second storage portion 2555b is attached to the front surface of the center right front plate 2555, it is impossible to touch the obstacle nail N whose front end is stored in the first storage portion 2555a and the second storage portion 2555b from the front. Therefore, it is possible to avoid bending of the obstructing nail N due to contact with a tool or the like during maintenance or intentional bending of the obstructing nail N. Further, in this case, when the obstacle nail N whose front end is accommodated in the first accommodation portion 2555a or the second accommodation portion 2555b through the center right front plate seal 2556 is bent, the trace remains on the center right front plate seal 2556, so that the defect of the obstacle nail N can be easily noticed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the door frame 3 are supplied to the lower tray 202 through the ball removal guiding path 241c of the tray unit base 211, the vicinity of the front end of the lower tray ball supply port 211c that opens forward of the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 for supplying the game balls B that cannot be stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202 from behind. , the game ball B enters the storage passage 150e from the right side and rolls to the left side on the opposite side. On the left side opposite to the lower tray ball supply port 211c, there is provided a ball guide section 213 which is inclined so as to move in the other direction toward the front, so that the game ball B from the ball extraction guide path 241c rolls along the ball guide section 213, and easily rolls along the periphery of the lower tray 202, which is a high portion on the bottom surface of the lower tray 202. , and it is possible to prevent the supplied game ball B from immediately reaching the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. As described above, the game balls B can be rolled so as to revolve toward the lowest lower tray ball extraction hole 202a in the lower tray 202, so that the game balls B can be evenly stored in each direction centered on the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a, and the game balls B can be prevented from accumulating in the vicinity of the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the storage passage 150e. That is, since it is possible to reduce the clogging of the vicinity of the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the storage passage 150e (the ball extraction guideway 241c) with the game balls B at an early stage when the game balls B are stored in the lower tray 202, as many game balls B as possible can be stored even if the player does not level the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加Therefore, when the player is in an advantageous game state such as a ``jackpot'' game, frequent execution of guidance for prompting discharge of the game balls B in the lower tray 202 to the dollar box or the like can be reduced, so that the player can hardly feel annoyance and the decline in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, since the left side surface of the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the storage passage 150e is inclined so as to move toward the other side as the ball guiding portion 213 goes forward, even if a plurality of game balls B are accumulated in the lower tray 202 in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the storage passage 150e, a gap through which the game balls B can flow can be formed between the pool of the game balls B and the ball guiding portion 213 through the gap. The game balls B sent to the lower tray 202 without being stored in 1, the game balls B from the ball extraction guideway 241c, etc. can be sent to the left part of the lower tray 202, and as many game balls B as possible can be stored in the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

In addition, the center of the lower tray ball supply port 211c, which opens toward the front of the storage passage 150e, is located on the right side of the center of the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202. Compared to the case where the center of the outlet of the storage passage 150e in the horizontal direction coincides with the center of the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a (see FIG. 50(b)), the right side of the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a in the lower tray 202 is reduced. Since the region on the one side can be widened, the number of stored game balls B can be increased when the game balls B are stored until the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the storage passage 150e is closed in the lower tray 202. - 特許庁Therefore, in combination with the function and effect of the ball guiding part 213 as described above, it is possible to store as many game balls B as possible even if the player does not level them on the lower plate 202, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be provided which more easily exhibits the function and effect described above.

By the way, in the conventional pachinko machine 1 as shown in FIG. 50(b), even if the lower tray 202 has room to store the game balls B, the vicinity of the lower tray ball supply port 211j is clogged with the game balls B, so that the game balls B cannot be supplied to the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加As a result, although the lower tray 202 still has room, the full-tank detection sensor 154 is turned on, and the payout of the game balls B is stopped. Then, depending on the player, the payout is stopped despite the fact that the lower tray 202 has room to spare, and there is a risk that the player will have a sense of distrust and lose interest. Alternatively, if the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b is opened and the game ball B is moved to the cash box even though the lower tray 202 has room, the player may feel annoyed and lose interest. In contrast, according to the present embodiment, as described above, as many game balls B as possible can be stored in the lower tray 202 to a state close to full even if the player does not level the ball. Therefore, when the player looks at the lower tray 202 when the payout is stopped, the player can immediately recognize that the lower tray 202 has no room and is full. It is possible to make the player recognize that B is being paid out, and to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is stuck in the tank rail 553 of the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 (when a ball jam occurs), by touching the jammed game ball B from the outside through any of the plurality of openings 553d penetrating the bottom of the tank rail 553 (the main guide portion 553a), the game ball B can be broken and the jam can be eliminated. Therefore, since the clogged balls in the tank rail 553 can be easily eliminated, the interruption time of the game can be shortened as much as possible, so that the player's discomfort caused by the interruption of the game can be reduced, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, since the ball straightening member 556 which can swing vertically is provided on the upper part of the tank rail 553, when the ball straightening member 556 abuts on the game balls B stacked vertically on the tank rail 553 from above, when the game balls B circulate, the height of the game balls B stacked vertically changes. As the ball straightening member 556 swings in the vertical direction, resistance is applied to the upper game balls B in contact with the ball straightening member 556, and it is possible to prevent them from moving downstream faster than the lower game balls B, and to prevent the game balls B from meshing with each other by moving downward so as to cut into the row of the lower game balls B arranged in a line. Further, when the ball rectifying member 556 moves downward, the upper game balls B are hit downward, so that the upper game balls B can be collapsed and the game balls B stacked up and down can be collapsed, the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B can be suppressed, the interruption of the game due to clogging can be reduced as much as possible, and the decline in interest due to the interruption of the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, as described above, since the game ball B circulates in the tank rail 553, the game ball B can be hit downward from above by the ball straightening member 556, so that the hitting makes it possible to drop dust, dirt, etc. adhering to the game ball B, and the tank rail 553 can be vibrated to facilitate discharging the dust, dust, etc. in the tank rail 553 downward from the opening 553d. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of dirt, dust, etc. in the tank rail 553 as much as possible.

In addition, since at least one of the plurality of openings 553d is provided below the portion where the ball straightening member 556 is provided, it is possible to make it difficult for balls to become clogged due to dirt, dust, etc. in the portion below the ball straightening member 556 on the tank rail 553, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that more easily exhibits the above-described effects.

In addition, since a plurality of openings 553d having the above-described effects are provided in the direction in which the game ball B is guided on the tank rail 553, even if ball jamming occurs at any part in the tank rail 553, the ball jamming can be eliminated through the opening 553d at the nearest position, and the pachinko machine 1 capable of reliably exhibiting the above-mentioned effects can be provided.

Furthermore, since the opening 553d is extended in the guiding direction of the game ball B, the opening of the opening 553d can be made relatively large, and dirt, dust, etc. can be easily discharged downward from the game ball B rolling on the bottom of the tank rail 553.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to reduce dust, dust, etc. in the tank rail 553 as much as possible, and it is possible to easily embody the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects.

In addition, since the opening 553d is opened downward and rearward, the opening 553d can be made large enough to be contacted from the outside while making it difficult for the game ball B to pass through and hinder its rolling (circulation).

Furthermore, since the opening 553d is opened downward and rearward, the game ball B inside can be easily visually recognized through the opening 553d just by looking from the rear without looking in from below. Therefore, even if the tank rail 553 is opaque, the place where the clogged balls are generated can be easily identified, so that the clogged balls can be easily eliminated, and the pachinko machine 1 which surely exhibits the above-mentioned effects can be provided.

In addition, since at least one opening 553d is provided in a portion of the tank rail 553 below the ball straightening member 556, the ball straightening member 556 can be pushed upward through the plurality of game balls B by touching the game balls B from the outside through the opening 553d in a state where the tank rail 553 is filled with a plurality of game balls B. At this time, by confirming the upward movement of the ball straightening member 556, it is possible to confirm whether or not the ball straightening member 556 is in a swingable state, and the effect of aligning the game balls B as described above by the ball straightening member 556 can be surely exerted to suppress ball clogging. In addition, since the state of the ball straightening member 556 can be easily confirmed through the opening 553d, the workability in maintenance can be improved, and the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced.

In addition, since the transparent protective cover 559 covering the upper part of the tank rail 553 is provided so that the ball rectifying member 556 can swing in the vertical direction, the protective cover 559 can prevent dirt, dust, etc. from entering the tank rail 553 from above, and the pachinko machine 1 that can reliably exhibit the above-described effects can be provided.

Furthermore, since the protective cover 559 covering the ball straightening member 556 and the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the state of the ball straightening member 556 can be seen from the outside through the protective cover 559, and the state of the ball straightening member 556 can be easily confirmed. In addition, since the inside of the tank rail 553 can be seen through the protective cover 559, when ball clogging occurs, the location of the occurrence can be easily found. As a result, maintenance work can be reduced, and the effects described above can be reliably achieved.

In addition, as described above, by hitting the game ball B from above to below with the ball rectifying member 556, it is possible to drop the dust, dirt, etc. adhering to the game ball B, and the dirt, dust, etc. in the tank rail 553 can be discharged to the outside through the opening 553d. I can.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the payout base unit 550 of the main body frame 4, a ball tank 552 storing a plurality of game balls B is provided rightwardly adjacent to the external terminal plate 558558 to which the electric wire with the coating removed at the tip is connected from the rear, and a tank rail 553 for aligning and guiding the game balls B from the ball tank 552 to the payout device 580 is located below and behind the external terminal plate 558. A ball straightening member 556 extending in the left-right direction and swinging up and down capable of collapsing the game balls B stacked on top of the tank rail 553 is provided. A protective cover 559 having a top plate portion 559c that covers an upper part of the tank rail 553 and the top of the ball straightening member 556 and a guide plate portion 559d that can guide the game ball B outward in the left direction forwardly and below the top plate portion 559c is provided. As a result, since the guide plate portion 559d of the protective cover 559 is provided between the top plate portion 559c above the tank rail 553 and the external terminal plate 558 at a position lower than the top plate portion 559c, the electric wire that is connected to the external terminal plate 558 and hangs backward can be bridged between the external terminal plate 558 and the top plate portion 559c like a bridge, and the electric wire is loose below the guide plate portion 559d. A gap through which the game ball B can flow can be formed. Therefore, even if the electric wire connected to the external terminal plate 558 from the rear hangs down on the top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559, the guide plate portion 559d between the top plate portion 559c and the external terminal plate 558 can secure a gap in the height direction through which the game ball B can flow. With 9d, the game ball B near the external terminal plate 558 can be guided outward in the left direction away from the external terminal plate 558, and the game ball B can be reliably excluded from the rear of the external terminal plate 558 to prevent the game ball B from staying near the external terminal plate 558.例文帳に追加Therefore, even if the electric wire connected to the external terminal plate 558 is pulled out due to an incomplete insertion of the electric wire into the external terminal plate 558 or the electric wire is pulled backward for some reason, the game ball B with which the tip of the removed electric wire comes into contact does not exist in the vicinity of the external terminal plate 558, so that the tip of the electric wire does not contact the game ball B, and short-circuiting of the electric wire can be avoided. A pachinko machine 1 capable of suppressing the occurrence of counting errors in the game hall can be provided so that necessary information can be surely received by a computer (hall computer) in the game hall by avoiding short-circuiting of electric wires.

In addition, since the top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559 covers at least a part of the ball rectifying member 556 and the top plate portion 559c of the tank rail 553, even if the electric wire connected to the external terminal plate 558 is pulled out of the external terminal plate 558 for some reason, the top plate portion 559c can prevent the tip of the electric wire pulled out from coming into contact with the game ball B in the tank rail 553, thereby preventing the electric wire from short-circuiting due to contact with the game ball B, as described above. It is possible to achieve the effects of

In addition, as described above, it is possible to avoid the short circuit of the electric wire, so that the hole controller can receive the necessary information without fail due to the short circuit of the electric wire, so that the error does not occur in the counting.

Furthermore, since the game ball B is guided outward in the left direction by the guiding plate portion 559d of the protective cover 559, even if the game ball B falls onto the protective cover 559 for some reason, the game ball B can be dropped to the outside in the horizontal direction of the game machine, and the game ball B can be prevented from falling to the rear side of the game machine. Therefore, since the game ball B does not come into contact with the electric wire hanging down on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, the game ball B is not caught by the electric wire hanging down on the rear side and stays there, or the electric wire comes out of the external terminal plate 558 due to the game ball B coming into contact with the electric wire. .

By the way, in the tank rail 553, the game balls B piled up and down are arranged in one row, but when the piled game balls B are reduced from two rows to one row, if the game balls B on the upper row try to overtake the game balls B on the lower row, the game balls B may mesh with each other and become stuck (so-called ball clogging). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the ball straightening member 556 is provided above the tank rail 553, the ball straightening member 556 is in contact with the game balls B stacked vertically on the tank rail 553 from above. By swinging the ball straightening member 556 in the vertical direction, resistance is applied to the upper game balls B in contact with the ball straightening member 556, and it is possible to prevent the game balls B from overtaking the lower game balls B, and to prevent the game balls B from meshing with each other by moving downward so as to cut in behind the lower game balls B arranged in a line. In addition, when the ball rectifying member 556 moves downward, the upper game balls B are hit downward, so that the upper game balls B can be collapsed and the game balls B stacked up and down can be collapsed, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B can be prevented. The game ball B can be paid out without delay.

Since the top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559 covers the upper side of the ball straightening member 556, the electric wire hanging down from the external terminal plate 558 contacts the top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559, thereby preventing the ball straightening member 556 from hitting the ball straightening member 556, and preventing the ball straightening member 556 from being able to swing in the vertical direction due to the contact of the electric wire. Therefore, even if the electric wire hangs down from the external terminal plate 558 above the ball rectifying member 556, the ball rectifying member 556 is protected by the protective cover 559 so that the ball rectifying member 556 can swing vertically.

In addition, since the upper part of the ball straightening member 556 is covered by the top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559, even if the game ball B flows down toward the ball straightening member 556 for some reason, the game ball B can be guided away from the external terminal plate 558 by the top plate portion 559c of the protective cover 559 before coming into contact with the ball straightening member 556. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being put on the ball rectifying member 556 and prevent them from vertically swinging, and the ball rectifying member 556 causes the stacked game balls B to fall to prevent the occurrence of clogging.

Further, since the tank rail 553 is extended in the left-right direction so as to pass behind the external terminal plate 558, the volume of the tank rail 553 can be increased, and together with the ball tank 552, the storage amount of the game balls B to be paid out in the pachinko machine 1 can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, when the player is in an advantageous game state such as a ``jackpot'' game in which a large number of game balls B are put out, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the loss of the game balls B to be put out (so-called run out of balls), and to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a box-shaped back box 3000 having an opening 3010a penetrating back and forth is provided behind the game panel 1100 in front of which the game area 5a of the game board 5 is provided. When it is smaller than the opening 3010a, it is detachably attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650, so when the size of the performance display device 1600 is smaller than the opening 3010a, the performance display device 1600 can be attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650.例文帳に追加More specifically, in this embodiment, the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is sized to accommodate a 19-inch performance display device, and the 15-inch performance display device 1600 is attached to a 19-inch set plate 1650 corresponding to the opening 3010a. As a result, the 15-inch performance display device 1600 can be attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650 .

Therefore, when the size of the performance display device 1600 is changed due to model change or design change, since the performance display device 1600 can be attached by the set plate 1650 matching the size of the performance display device 1600 without changing the back box 3010, the back box 3010 can be used as it is, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. As a result, the performance display device 1600 having a size different from that of the conventional one can be provided while suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1, so that the pachinko machine 1 having an appearance different from that of the conventional pachinko machine can be easily made by the difference in the size of the performance display device 1600, thereby strongly attracting the interest of the players, and the pachinko machine 1 having high appeal to the players can be provided.

In addition, since the back box 3010 is box-shaped, and the strength and rigidity of the back box 3010 are high, even if a large (heavy) effect display device 1600 is attached, it can be sufficiently supported. Therefore, the opening 3010a to which the effect display device 1600 is attached can be made as large as possible, and the largest (here, 19 inch) effect display device 1600 can be attached to the back box 3010 (pachinko machine). In addition, when the range visible from the front is changed by providing a back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200, a back top front effect unit 3300, a back bottom front effect unit 3400, a back top rear effect unit 3500, and a back bottom back effect unit 3600 as various decorations and effect devices in front of the effect display device 1600 due to model change or design change, the effect display device 1600 (here, 15 inch) having an optimum size for the range is set to the set plate 1. It can be attached to the backing box 3010 via 650 . Therefore, by using the set plate 1650, the performance display devices 1600 of various sizes can be attached, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being provided with an unnecessary large performance display device 1600, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the effect display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010 via the set plate 1650 arranged at the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, when the position of the effect display device 1600 with respect to the back box 3010 is changed due to a design change or the like, the position of the effect display device 1600 can be changed only by changing the set plate 1650 without changing the back box 3010, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the performance display device 1600 can be provided at a more effective position, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the players can be provided.

Further, when the performance display device 1600 is smaller than the opening 3010a, the performance display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010 through the set plate 1650, so that the set plate 1650 can close the space between the performance display device 1600 and the opening 3010a. Therefore, in the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, it is possible to prevent dust, garbage, game balls B, etc. from entering the pachinko machine 1 through the gap between the effect display device 1600 and the opening 3010a, to avoid the occurrence of troubles that cause the interruption of the game, to prevent the player from losing interest due to the interruption of the game, and to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest. .

Further, since the set plate 1650 for mounting the performance display device 1600 to the back box 3010 is made transparent and flat, when the performance display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010 through the set plate 1650, the front to rear or the rear to the front can be visually recognized through the space between the performance display device 1600 and the opening 3010a. Therefore, the inside of the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed from the outside, and the inside of the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be confirmed from the inside of the pachinko machine 1, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced by facilitating maintenance.

In addition, since the set plate 1650 is formed in a flat plate shape, the space occupied by the set plate 1650 in the front-rear direction can be reduced, so that it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging a decoration, a production device, etc. in the relatively box-shaped back box 3010, and a back front peripheral edge decoration unit 3200, a back top front effect unit 3300, a back bottom front effect unit 3400, and a back top rear effect as a decoration, a production device, etc., from which a higher effect can be expected. It is possible to provide the unit 3500 and the backside post effect unit 3600, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the players.

Furthermore, since the back box 3010 is provided behind the game panel 1100 with the game area 5a provided in front, the performance image by the performance display device 1600 attached to the back box 3010 can be visually recognized through the game panel 1100 when viewed from the front, and the player can enjoy the performance image. In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 can be made to have a feeling similar to that of a conventional pachinko machine in which a performance image can be seen in the game area 5a, it is possible to give a sense of security to a player accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine and to make the player easily select this pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

Further, since the pachinko machine can be characterized by the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200, the back top front effect unit 3300, the back bottom front effect unit 3400, the back top post effect unit 3500, and the back bottom after effect unit 3600 arranged inside the back box 3010, the pachinko machine 1 can easily attract the interest of the players, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the players can be provided. In addition, the player can be entertained by the effects of the back front edge decoration unit 3200, the back top front effect unit 3300, the back bottom front effect unit 3400, the back top back effect unit 3500, and the back bottom back effect unit 3600 arranged inside the back box 3010, and the back front edge decoration unit 3200, the back top front effect unit 3300, the back bottom front effect unit 3400, the back top after effect unit 3500, and the back effect effect unit 3600. By appropriately combining the performance of the back side post performance unit 3600 and the performance image of the performance display device 1600, the player can be shown various performances, and the player is hardly bored and the decline of interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the performance display device 1600 is detachably attached to the back box 3010, the performance display device 1600 can be easily removed from the back box 3010 when the performance display device 1600 breaks down, and the labor required for maintenance can be reduced to reduce the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game area 5a of the game board 5A where the game is played with the game ball B, there are the first guide path 2580a and the second guide path 2580b provided in the left-right direction in the ball guide unit 2580 of the center accessory 2500 through which the game ball B can flow, and the progress of the game (lottery result of the special symbols drawn) on the downstream side of the first guide path 2580a and the second guide path 2580b. Therefore, when the second large winning hole 2007 becomes acceptable according to the lottery result of the drawn special symbol, in order to make the second large winning hole 2007 accept the game ball B, the player is hit the game ball B into the game area 5a so that the game ball B flows through the first guide path 2580a or the second guide path 2580b. In addition, the game ball B hit into the game area 5a can be guided by the desired first guide path 2580a that is easily accepted by the second big winning opening 2007. This can make the player nervous and excited, increasing the player's expectation and excitement. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of taste. In addition, at the timing when the second big winning hole 2007 can be received, the game ball B passing through the first guide path 2580a or the second guiding path 2580b can reach the second big winning hole 2007 by urging the player to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a, and the hitting operation of the game ball B can be enjoyed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Then, when the game ball B enters the first guide path 2580a or the second guide path 2580b, the sides that are inclined so that one side in the front-rear direction is lowered alternately, and the inclined portion 2581b of the left passage member 2581 or the inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582 provided in the vertical direction, and the standing wall portion 2 extending upward from the lower end of each inclined portion 2581b or the inclined portion 2582c. With 581c and the standing wall portion 2582d, the game ball B is guided downward in a zigzag shape in the front-rear direction, and the side wall portion 2581a and the side wall portion 2582a are projected from the upper side of each inclined portion 2581b and the inclined portion 2582c. The game ball B is guided in a meandering manner in the horizontal direction by the first protruding piece 2581f and the second protruding piece 2582g projecting from the side wall portion 2581a and the side wall portion 2582a at a portion between the lower end of the 2581b or the inclined portion 2582c and the upper end of the lower inclined portion 2581b or the inclined portion 2582c. As a result, the game ball B is guided downward while swinging in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction in a visible state, so that the player can see the movement of the game ball B that has never been seen in the conventional pachinko machine 1, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B and suppress the deterioration of interest.

At this time, the side wall portions 2581a, 2582a, and 2583a provided on the left and right sides of the inclined portion 2581b and the inclined portion 2582c can restrict the movement of the game ball B to the left and right outside from the inclined portion 2581b and the inclined portion 2582c, and the vertical wall portion 2581c and the vertical wall extending upward from the upper end of the lower inclined portion 2581b and the inclined portion 2582c. The portion 2582d can prevent the game ball B moving from the upper inclined portion 2581b and the inclined portion 2582c to the lower inclined portion 2581b and the inclined portion 2582c from dropping outward in the front-rear direction, so that the game ball B can be guided along the plurality of inclined portions 2581b and 2582c, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

Since the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b have a plurality of inclined portions 2581b and 2582c that are inclined so that one side in the front-rear direction is lower, when the game ball B guided by the inclined portions 2581b and 2582c is viewed from the front, the flowing speed is slower than that of free flowing, and the position of the game ball B in the front-rear direction appears unclear to the player. It is possible to make the game ball B look as if it is slowly flowing down against the gravity, and the player can see the movement of the game ball B which could not be seen in the conventional pachinko machines, and the player can be amused and the decline of interest can be suppressed.

In this way, since the game ball B can be guided downward while rocking in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction by the first guide path 2580a and the second guide path 2580b, compared to the case where the game ball B is allowed to flow freely, the downflow speed of the game ball B can be relatively slowed down (delayed). As a result, the staying time of the game ball B in the game area 5a can be lengthened, so that the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B for a long period of time, and the player can hardly get tired of the game, thereby suppressing the deterioration of interest.

By the way, when the game ball B spirally flows down as the guide passage, the spirally flowing game ball B passes through the most front part of the spiral many times. Therefore, when a ``small win'' or the like can be made, the game ball B can be relatively easily accepted into the downstream second big winning hole 2007, so there is a possibility that some players may get bored with the driving operation of the game ball B at an early stage and lose interest. On the other hand, in the ball guiding unit 2580 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is guided by the first guide path 2580a and the second guide path 2580b, the game ball B swings in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction in the first guide path 2580a and the second guide path 2580b, thereby suppressing the circulation speed. , the timing of hitting the game ball B aimed at the second big winning hole 2007 can be made difficult, and a degree of difficulty can be imparted to the hitting operation. As a result, the player can be motivated to perform the hitting operation, enjoy the hitting operation of the game ball B, and receive a game ball B in the second big winning hole 2007 to give a sense of accomplishment, thereby suppressing the decline of the player's interest.

In addition, since the first guide path 2580a and the second guide path 2580b can impart a degree of difficulty to the driving operation of the game ball B aimed at the second big winning hole 2007, it is possible to make it difficult to accept the game ball B into the second big winning hole 2007.例文帳に追加As a result, since it is difficult to accept the game balls B into the second large prize winning port 2007 through the first guide passage 2580a and the second guide passage 2580b, it is possible to reduce the chances of receiving the game balls B into the second large prize winning port 2007 to pay out a predetermined number of the game balls B, thereby suppressing an increase in the burden on the side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, when the game ball B is clogged in the first guide passage 2580a or the second guide passage 2580b (when a ball clog occurs), a thin rod-shaped member is inserted from the outside through the gap between the inclined portion 2581b of the left passage member 2581 as a communication portion and the ceiling wall portion 2581d, and the gap between the inclined portion 2582c of the right passage member 2582 and the ceiling wall portion 2582e to hit the game ball B. and can be easily cleared. Therefore, even if a ball jam occurs in the first guide passage 2580a or the second guide passage 2580b during the game, it can be eliminated at an early stage, so that the game interruption time can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, since the first guide path 2580a and the second guide path 2580b are provided in the left-right direction, the game ball B guided in the first guide path 2580a and the second guide path 2580b can be shown to the player, and the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed to suppress the deterioration of interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player hits the game ball B into the game area 5a for playing a game, the game ball B flows down while making various movements due to the plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the game area 5a, and the game ball B that has flowed down to the downstream end in the game area 5a is discharged from the out port 1008. In the game area 5a, there is provided a second large prize winning port 2007 that opens and closes according to the progress of the game (the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 or the lottery result of the second special symbol). After the ball B is detected by the second big winning opening sensor 2561, it circulates in the pseudo game area 2010. - 特許庁Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are also planted in this pseudo game area 2010, the game ball B flows down while making various movements due to these obstacle nails N, and the game ball B that has flowed down to the downstream end in the pseudo game area 2010 is discharged from a pseudo out port 2404 adjacent to the out port 1008.例文帳に追加A pseudo big winning hole 2402 having a larger opening than the second big winning hole 2007 is provided in the pseudo game area 2010, so that the pseudo big winning hole 2402 becomes capable of receiving the game ball B according to the progress of the game, and the game ball B received in the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2561.例文帳に追加

Thus, since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the game area 5a and the pseudo-game area 2010 respectively, the game ball B flows down while making complicated movements due to the plurality of obstacle nails N, so that the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B and the player can hardly get bored. Further, since the out port 1008 of the game area 5a and the pseudo out port 2404 of the pseudo game area 2010 are adjacent to each other, the player can be given the illusion that the pseudo game area 2010 is part of the game area 5a. Furthermore, since the second large winning opening door 2562 of the second large winning opening 2007 is moved in the front-rear direction, the presence of the second large winning opening door 2562 can be made difficult to understand when viewed from the front (a player), and the openable and closable pseudo large winning opening 2402 (pseudo large winning opening door 2405) can be made stand out relatively. Since the opening of the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is made larger than the second big winning hole 2007, the illusion that the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2007 circulates again in the game area 5a and the illusion that the game area 5a is provided with a huge big winning hole that has never been seen in the pachinko machine so far can be given, so that a strong impact can be given to the player and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted. In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of game balls B in the pseudo game area 2010, the player can be strongly focused on the pseudo game area 2010, and the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player can be provided.

In addition, since the opening of the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is made larger than the second big winning hole 2007, when the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is in a state capable of receiving the game ball B, it is possible for the player to instantly recognize that many game balls B can be received in a short time, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pseudo big winning hole 2402, and the game ball B to the pseudo big winning hole 2402 can be made to instantly recognize. It is possible to heighten the expectation for acceptance and suppress the decline of interest, and to make the player think that the pseudo big winning hole 2402 provided in the pseudo game area 2010 is the real big winning hole provided in the game area 5a. In addition, when the game ball B is received in the normally closed pseudo big winning hole 2402, the player can be made to strongly think that a predetermined privilege (for example, the game ball B is paid out, the occurrence of an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous, etc.) will be given, and the player's expectation for the game can be enhanced.

Thus, when the second big winning hole 2007 and the pseudo big winning hole 2402 are opened according to the progress of the game and the game ball B can be received, the player can be made to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a aiming at the second big winning hole 2007, and the player can be entertained. Then, when the game ball B is received in the open second big winning hole 2007 and supplied to the pseudo game area 2010, the game ball B flows down while making various movements by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo game area 2010, and the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed, and depending on whether or not the game ball B is accepted in the pseudo big winning hole 2402, the player is nervous and excited. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, when the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is opened according to the progress of the game and the game ball B can be accepted, the player can be made to think that a chance has arrived, and the player can be made to drive the game ball B aiming at the pseudo big winning hole 2402 (second big winning hole 2007). It is possible to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the opening of the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is larger than that of the second big winning hole 2007, it is possible to make the player mistakenly think that it has a huge big winning hole that has never been seen in the past pachinko machines, to give a strong impact to the player to make him strongly interested in the pachinko machine 1, and to make it easy for him to select the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play, thereby increasing the appeal to the player. An expensive pachinko machine 1 can be provided. Then, when the second big winning hole 2007 opens and closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern and the pseudo big winning hole 2402 opens and closes due to a "jackpot" or the like, as described above, the player can be made to drive the game ball B aiming at the second big winning hole 2007 (pseudo big winning hole 2402) by the arrival of a chance, and the player can be greatly entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed. At this time, since the gaming ball B, which distributed the pseudo game area 2010, is accepted by the second Great General Express 2007 and has finished the game (so -called dead ball that has no effect on the game), even if it is accepted at the pseudo -large prize 2402, a privilege is given to the players like the player. It does not happen, and it can suppress the increase in the burden on the gaming hall side that installs this pachinko machine 1. In addition, since all the game balls B received in the second big winning opening 2007 are put out, the player can be given the illusion that the game balls B are being put out by receiving the game balls B in the pseudo big winning opening 2402, and the reception of the game balls B in the pseudo big winning opening 2402 can be enjoyed. Furthermore, since all the game balls B received in the second big winning port 2007 are paid out, the game balls B not received in the pseudo big winning port 2402 on the downstream side of the second big winning port 2007 are also paid out. It is possible to make the player feel that he or she has gained a sense of achievement, amuse the player, and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, the pseudo big winning opening 2402 may be opened and closed to accept the game ball B as a notice of a "big hit" or an advantageous gaming state for the player. Thus, by opening and closing the pseudo big winning opening 2402, it is possible to suggest the arrival of a chance to the player, to heighten the player's expectation for the game and to suppress the decline in interest. As this advance notice, for example, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation for an advantageous gaming state based on the opening/closing speed and the number of opening/closing times of the pseudo big prize winning opening 2402 . Alternatively, by opening and closing the pseudo-big prize opening 2402 with a rhythm such as 337 rhythm or a musical rhythm in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation or the game state after the "jackpot" (for example, a time-saving state, a variable probability state, etc.). In this way, the opening and closing operation of the pseudo big winning opening 2402 can present a variety of effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored.

Furthermore, in a normal state, the second big winning hole 2007 is closed and the game ball B cannot be received, so even if the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is open, the game ball B cannot be distributed to the pseudo game area 2010 in which the pseudo big winning hole 2402 is provided. The player's expectation can be increased so that the mouth 2007 can be accepted.

In addition, since the game ball B supplied to the pseudo game area 2010 from the second big winning port 2007 is discharged from the pseudo out port 2404 without being returned to the game area 5a, it is possible to make the player strongly think that the pseudo game area 2010 is a special area (premium area) independent of the game area 5a. When the pseudo big prize winning port 2402 is opened and closed according to the progress of the game, the game ball B can be actively hit aiming at the second big prize winning port 2007 in order to circulate the game ball B in the pseudo game area 2010, and the player can be entertained and the decline of interest can be suppressed.

In addition, when the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2007 and supplied into the pseudo game area 2010 is not received in the pseudo big winning hole 2402, since it is discharged from the pseudo out hole 2404 at the downstream end in the pseudo game area 2010, the pseudo out hole 2404 is made to make the player think that it is similar to the out hole 1008 provided at the downstream end in the game area 5a. The reception of the game ball B into the pseudo big winning hole 2402 can be enjoyed without a sense of incongruity in the same way as the openable and closable second big winning hole 2007 provided in the game area 5a, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the pseudo-out port 2404 for discharging the game ball B not accepted in the pseudo-big winning port 2402 is provided adjacent to the out-port 1008 provided at the downstream end in the game area 5a, it seems as if the game ball B supplied from the second big winning port 2007 to the pseudo-game area 2010 and not accepted in the pseudo-big winning port 2402 is discharged from the out port 1008. can be shown to

Further, the pseudo game area 2010 is supplied with the game ball B that has finished the game after being detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2561 (so-called dead ball that no longer affects the game), so that the game ball B that no longer affects the game is used in the pseudo game area 2010 for presentation. Therefore, for example, compared with a performance device in which pseudo game balls similar to game balls B are sealed, there is no need to provide a mechanism for circulating pseudo game balls for presentation, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the pseudo big prize winning hole sensor 2403 can detect the reception of the game ball B into the pseudo big prize winning hole 2402, the detection of the game ball B can execute a predetermined performance, and the pachinko machine 1 capable of entertaining the player more and suppressing the decline of interest can be provided.

In addition, since the pseudo big winning hole sensor 2403 is made visible to the player, even if the game ball B (the so-called hit ball that no longer affects the game) circulates in the pseudo game area 2010, the player can be under the illusion that the fake big winning hole 2402 is a real big winning hole. It is possible to make the player strongly desire to accept the ball B, and it is possible to make the player enjoy hitting the game ball B aiming at the second big winning hole 2007 (pseudo big winning hole 2402), thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

[11. Various control processing of the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 167 to 172. FIG. 167 is a flow chart showing an example of main control side power-on processing, FIG. 168 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 167, FIG. 169 is a flow chart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing, FIG. 170 is a flow chart showing an example of setting change processing, FIG. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, followed by the movement of the initial value update type counter, main control side power on processing, main control side timer interrupt processing, setting change processing, set value confirmation display processing, and error display processing.

[11-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a special random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big win game or a small win game, a hit determination initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of this special random number, a reach determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a reach (reach loss) when not generating a big win game, and a first special symbol display device and a second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 A variable display pattern random number to be used for determining the variable display pattern of the special symbols to be variably displayed in , a symbol random number to be used to determine the big winning symbols and the small winning symbols derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 when generating the big winning game (determining the winning type), and a big winning symbol initial value determining random number to be used to determine the initial value of the symbol random number are prepared. In addition to these random numbers, a normal symbol hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to open and close the variable winning entrance door 2521 capable of guiding the game ball B to the variable winning opening 2003, a normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, and a normal symbol display pattern variably displayed on the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400. Random numbers and the like for pattern variation display patterns are prepared.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the special random numbers are updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

[11-2. Movement of initial value update type counter]
For example, the special random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hard random number circuit built into the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first uses one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and then rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Based on this, other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a special random number.

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for judging a normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by adding 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is performed. This counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter updating method is called an "initial value updating type counter". The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch (RWM switch 633d) of the payout control board 633 is operated when the power is turned on, or when the checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the total of the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a in the main control side power-on processing, which will be described later, is calculated as a numerical value. When clearing all areas of the control built-in RAM except for a specific area, the main control MPU 1310a extracts the ID code from the non-volatile RAM that the main control MPU 1310a incorporates, and based on the extracted ID code, executes an initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination, and the derived fixed value is set. That is, the initial value determination random number for determining a normal per symbol is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. In this way, the value set to the initial value determination random number for determining the normal per symbol is derived using the ID code, and the first security measure that the ID code is stored in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a The ID code cannot be rewritten even using an external device. A second security measure of deriving a fixed value and a two-step security measure are taken to prevent analysis.

Here, the advantage of taking out the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the taken out ID code as the initial value determination random number for normal per symbol determination will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains game balls to be paid out as prize balls obtains and disassembles the game board 5 in some way, illegally acquires the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and can grasp the timing when the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination matches the normal symbol hit determination value. The ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value is completely different from that of the obtained game board 5'. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained gaming board 5 is a completely useless thing in other gaming boards 5 ', in other pachinko machines 1', so it generates instant stops at each prescribed interval that has been disassembled and analyzed, and passes the game ball at the gate 2002 for each fixed interval. Even if it is, it is not possible to open and operate the variable entry entrance door 2521 to create a playball ball B to the variable entry prize 2003.

[11-3. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1310a is circuit-configured such that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or an address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine.

Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, as shown in FIGS. 167 and 168, main control side power-on processing is performed. When this main-control-side power-on process is started, the main control MPU 1310a sets RAM access permission (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, it is possible to update the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S10, the main control MPU 1310a performs power failure clear processing (step S12). In this power failure clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure (phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when it becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until it rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer).

Following step S12, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S14). The RAM clear switch has three functions (RAM clear switch, setting switch button, and error cancel switch), and here, it operates as a RAM clear switch function for completely erasing information stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear is to be performed when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch is not operated. It should be noted that the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing of this routine to the determination of step S14 is extremely short, so in reality, the person who presses the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S14 that the RAM clear switch has been operated, it sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S14 that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, it sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). That is, the main control MPU 1310a makes it possible to perform RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. The above-described RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not to erase various information including game information related to games such as probability variation, unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize number information output determination counter) stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S16A and S16B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not the body frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a receives a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key switch 1311a is set by inserting the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder to turn off the setting key switch 1311a), and turning on the setting key switch 1311a. This is done based on the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a when the key is turned ON. It should be noted that the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing of this routine to the determination in step S18 is extremely short, so in practice, the person who turns on the setting key switch 1311a turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 after turning on the setting key switch 1311a.

In the determination of step S18, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main control MPU 1310a is open with respect to the outer frame 2 from the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 4b, and sets the value 1 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG when determining that the setting key switch 1311a is set key ON from the setting key ON signal (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination of step S18, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 from the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b and/or determines that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on from the setting key ON signal, sets the value 0 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20B). The setting key ON flag CS-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not to permit setting change and confirmation display of the current setting value (the value set among the setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON) stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a (a setting value dedicated area in a specific area, which will be described later). The value is set to 0 when changing the setting of the value and displaying the confirmation are not permitted. The value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG set in steps S20A and S20B is stored in the general storage element (general purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU 1310a performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the process waits until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 is ready to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) when the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process. In addition, when the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process, the payout control board 633 completes booting in a short time compared to the peripheral control board 1510, so the payout control board 633 is in a state where it can receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a).

Following step S22, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage drops below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure warning signal. When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has been input, it returns to step S24 and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. A detailed description of the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22 will be given later.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1 (step S25). The main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is established by determining that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S25 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not 1, it determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0 (step S26). The main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0. Therefore, although the predetermined set value change permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a determines to erase various information in the same manner as when the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S26 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not 0, it calculates a checksum (step S29). This checksum is calculated by regarding the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S29, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (at power-off) described later (step S30). When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S30 that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not game backup information such as various information, checksum values (sum values), and backup flag BK-FLG values is stored in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power failure processing described later. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, the calculation of the checksum in step S29 and the determination in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection will be described in detail later.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S30 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in step S32 when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, when it determines that the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally, it performs error display processing (step S33) and enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is terminated is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally when the power is cut off, an error display is made to inform that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or unreliable). In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

In addition, the power supply of pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the main unit frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is initialized (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position of the setting key switch 1311a is turned 60 degrees and operated 60 degrees to the clock. By operating the pressing pressure operation portion of the RAM clear switch of the board 633 while operating the power of the pachinko machine 1, the processing of the main control side power is installed again again. The main control MPU 1310a determines in step S14 that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch is being operated, sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to 1 in step S16A, determines that the body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the body frame open switch 4b in step S18, and turns on the setting key switch 1311a by the setting key ON signal. Since the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 1 in step S20A, it is determined that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1 in step S25, and that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied. By removing and clearing the area, it is possible to cancel the RAM error and proceed with the game (hereinafter referred to as "first RAM error canceling method").

As a method different from the first RAM error canceling method, the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, the setting key cylinder remains in the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position for turning off the setting key switch 1311a), and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the RAM clear switch pressing portion of the payout control board 633. By doing so, the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, is started again. The main control MPU 1310a determines in step S14 that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch is being operated, sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above, and determines in step S18 that the body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the body frame open switch 4b, and/or turns the setting key switch 1311a ON by the signal of the setting key ON. Since the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 0 in step S20B, it is determined that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S26. By clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, the RAM error can be canceled and the game can proceed (hereinafter referred to as a "second RAM error canceling method").

As described above, in this embodiment, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in the determination in step S30 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination in step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, when it determines that the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally, an error display is performed in step S33, and the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are displayed. When it is reported that there is an abnormality (or it is unreliable), two methods of canceling a RAM error, a first RAM error canceling method and a second RAM error canceling method, can be used. As a result, when there is no need to change the settings of the set values, the RAM error can be cleared by performing the second RAM error clearing method using the RAM clear switch.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S32 that the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it determines that the main control side power failure processing has been normally completed, it sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as when power is restored (step S34). For this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read out from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU 1310a progresses the game based on the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. It should be noted that "recovery of power" includes, in addition to the state in which the power was turned off and then turned on, the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or momentary power failure, and the state in which the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset and then restored after the main control board 1310 is irradiated with high frequency waves from a high frequency output device hidden under the arm of a fraudulent person.

After step S34, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 0 (step S36). As a result, various types of information, checksum values (sum values), etc. are changed as a result of subsequent various processing. Therefore, if the backup flag BK-FLG is not set to 1 after the main control side power failure processing (to be described later) is normally completed, all areas of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared except for a specific area, as will be described later.

Following the determination in step S36, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1 (step S27). The main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied by determining that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S27 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, and that the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a performs set value confirmation display processing (step S28). In this set value confirmation display process, which will be described later in detail, the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM are displayed on the setting display 1310g.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S25 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, that is, if it determines that a predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, it performs setting change processing (step S37). This setting change process, which will be detailed later, is performed based on a signal from the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633 . As described above, the RAM clear switch has three functions (the RAM clear switch, the setting switching button, and the error canceling switch). Here, it functions as a setting switching button for selecting and switching setting values. A signal (set value selection switching signal) is input each time the depressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch is operated, and the set value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g. When the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned from ON to OFF, the changed setting value is determined based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0, that is, when it determines that various information is to be erased in the same manner as when the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, although the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied, the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for the specific region (step S3 8). Here, the main control MPU 1310a writes the value 0 to a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (all areas of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area). In this embodiment, when the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, and when the setting change process is completed, all the areas of the main control built-in RAM, excluding a specific area (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (all areas of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area)), are always cleared. Here, the "specific area" is composed of a set value exclusive area in which set values are stored, and an out ball count exclusive area in which the counting result (total number) of game balls collected by the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 is stored. The set value dedicated area stores the set values to be changed in the setting change process described later, and the out ball count dedicated area stores the count result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 counted in the ball number counting process described later.

The main control MPU 1310a may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a takes out a unique ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and judges a normal pattern hit based on the taken-out ID code when erasing various kinds of information, when the sum value does not match, or when the main control-side power-off processing is not normally completed because the logic of the signal (RAM clearing signal) that tells that the depressing operation part of the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633 has been operated indicates that the RAM clearing switch has been operated. An initial value deriving process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of a counter for updating random numbers is performed, and this fixed value is set as an initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination for use in determining the initial value of the normal symbol hit determination random number.

Following step S38, the main control MPU 1310a sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as initial setting (step S40). This setting is carried out by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main prize number information output determination counter is set (set) to 0, which is the initial value. Further, the main control MPU 1310a progresses the game based on the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following steps S36, S28 or step S40, the main control MPU 1310a performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, in order to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as "WDT control register") built into the main control MPU 1310a is set to a timer setting value, the main control built-in WDT is activated, and time measurement is started until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT is activated, the main control built-in WDT starts clocking, and if the timer clear setting value is not set in the watchdog timer clear register (hereinafter referred to as "WDT clear register") built into the main control MPU 1310a by the time the measured time reaches the time set by the timer set value, the main control built-in WDT forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is started and time measurement is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the measured time reaches the time set by the timer set value, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and the time measurement is started again. In this way, by repeating the process of clearing the clocking by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer set value is reached and starting the clocking again, it is possible to monitor whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally.

Following step S41, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built in the main control MPU 1310a (for example, the serial input/output port (receiving channel and transmitting channel) for the payout control board 633, the serial input/output port (receiving channel and transmitting channel) for the peripheral control board 1510 Corresponding to the transmission serial port prescaler, the transmission speed setting and parity setting are performed, and the transmission serial port control register is set for initialization of the transmission circuit and for transmission permission.

After step S44, the main control MPU 1310a initializes the test signal output port (step S46). Here, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various test information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on in the game machine testing facility.

Following step S46, the main control MPU 1310a performs activation setting of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, among the various random numbers related to the game, a special random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big win game is set to latch and acquire the random number in the hardware random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a in order to update the hardware, and the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit is set in the hardware random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without overlapping, and when all the values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and when this latch signal is input, the main control built-in hard random number circuit extracts the random number (random value) from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU 1310a performs reservation setting of commands to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, in order to notify that the power has been turned on (power restored), a power-on state command, a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output when power is turned on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this various information may be stored. In such a case, first, after completion of transmission of various commands corresponding to game information among various information, a state command at power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining output of main prize number information at power-on are transmitted. These commands are transmitted in main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. A detailed description of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be given later.

Following step S50, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). By this setting, the main control-side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period set at step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure forecast. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S54 that there is no input of the power failure warning signal, the main control MPU 1310a performs a non-hit/fall random number update process (step S56). In this non-hit-lose random number update process, the above-described ready-to-win determination random number, variable display pattern random number, big win symbol initial value determination random number, small winning symbol initial value determination random number, etc. are updated. In this way, in the non-hit-lose random number update process, software updates the random numbers that are not related to the hit-lose determination (big hit determination). Incidentally, the above-described random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random numbers, normal symbol variation display pattern random numbers, etc. are also updated by this non-hit-lose random number update process.

After step S56, the process returns to step S54, and the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If the power failure warning signal has not been input, non-hit-loss random number update processing is performed in step S56, and steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processing of steps S54 to S56 is called "main control side main processing".

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S54 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, preventing writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protecting the above-mentioned game information and various information including other information from being rewritten.

Following step S58, the main control MPU 1310a starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting to output the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S12 is performed.

Following step S60, the main control MPU 1310a stops driving signals output to, for example, various displays of the function display unit 1400, the variable winning opening solenoid 2522, the first large winning opening solenoid 2524, the second large winning opening solenoid 2563, the special monitor, etc. (step S62).

After step S62, the main control MPU 1310a calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, as numerical values.

After step S64, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU 1310a sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This setting of RAM access prohibition disables access to the main control built-in RAM, thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S41, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared so that the main control built-in WDT cannot restart the time measurement, so that the main control built-in WDT forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a. After that, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power-on process again. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power failure processing".

As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is affected by electrical noise, it is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a cannot perform the determination of step S54, and cannot perform the main control side power failure processing. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main-control-side power-off processing, and executes the main-control-side power-on processing again. In other words, since the main control side power failure processing is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power failure processing immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is applied is not stored. A checksum (sum value) error occurs, and in the process of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area.

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure.

In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S32, it is checked whether or not the main control side power failure processing has been normally completed. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information has been stored by fraud.

Further, when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in the determination of step S25, that is, when the setting change of the setting value is permitted, the setting change process is performed in step S37, and in the process of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area. When determined, in the process of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area. In this way, when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when powering on the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch), when making a setting change that can change and decide the setting value (when the main control MPU 1310a performs setting change processing), the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. This is because, when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch is pressed, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a state advantageous to the player (for example, a state in which the probability fluctuates (probability variation) hits, etc.) when the operation of the game hall ends, it is necessary for the above-described game backup information to be erased (cleared) before the next operation starts. In addition, in the case of deciding to change the setting value, it is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information including various information such as game information obtained from the setting value before the setting change process is performed from the main control built-in RAM. Possession is permitted and limited to 2 to 3 people.In this embodiment, even if the setting value is not determined to be changed, that is, even if there is no setting key possessed only by a limited specific person, a staff member such as a game hall clerk can erase (clear) the game backup information from the main control built-in RAM by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the push operation unit of the RAM clear switch when it is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information.

Here, it will be described that the determination of the presence/absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24, that is, after the wait time standby process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 to proceed with subsequent processing. Problems will be described.

To the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as described above, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power failure or momentary power failure. In other words, even if the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the electrical charge charged in the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V, so that the main control side power interruption processing can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off. When a player is playing a game, that is, when a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process to be described later is performed, and a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off, the main control side power failure process can be completed without fail.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process of step S22 at the time of power restoration, the standby time (boot timer: in this embodiment, 2.5 seconds is set) until the system that controls drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is started (booted). If an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs immediately before reaching the standby time, the electric charge charged in the hardware such as the electrolytic capacitor MC2 to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a will be +. Although the voltage is applied as 5 V, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Therefore, even if the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, it may not be possible to complete the main control side power failure processing in the main control side power on processing. Therefore, the main control side power-on processing is started again when the power is restored without storing the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, when the power is restored this time, the main control side power-on processing is started, and the wait time standby processing of step S22 is completed without an instantaneous power failure or power failure. After that, when the checksum value calculated based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is compared with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred in step S30, the checksum value cannot match. to clear. In other words, there is a problem that the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared) even if the RAM clear switch is operated by a staff member such as a game hall staff member when power is restored and the staff member such as a staff member of the game hall does not indicate the intention of clearing the RAM.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and the determination of step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the game cannot be progressed. Before performing the wait time waiting process of step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in step S16A or step S16B, but the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a as described above.

In this way, immediately after the wait time waiting process of step S22, the process of determining whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, when it is determined by the determination of step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process of step S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is repeated. , it is possible to prevent the progress of the game and prevent various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of the number of main prize balls information) from being updated, so that the calculation result of the checksum does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation and stored value in step S64, so that the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is not initialized. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure from being initialized.

Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, when it is determined by the determination of step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process of step S22), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is running the game, and the pachinko machine is operated. 1, the supply of power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, causes the main control MPU 1310 to perform backup processing for storing various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of the number of main prize balls information), which is backup processing for storing various information including the processing of steps S58 to S68, and the processing at the time of main control side power failure, which is composed of an infinite loop. 10a can be completed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the checksum calculation and stored value in step S64) match when restarting, so the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by restoring the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

Furthermore, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT, so that the main control side power failure process can be started again without updating the contents of the main control built-in RAM at all. The main control side power failure processing can be reliably completed within the "power failure or power failure period". In other words, in this embodiment, when power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure during main control side power-on processing at the time of power restoration, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power failure or momentary power failure. If the main control side power failure processing cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period", it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal is input in step S24 immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22.

By preventing the progress of the game by such software, the progress to the step after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission is set in step S52 to start the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later) is blocked. We have adopted a mechanism that allows In this way, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (such as information indicating the value of the main prize number information output determination counter)) are not changed at all. etc.) are not changed at all, and the content of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of the number of main prize balls)) can be reliably prevented from being changed.

Next, a description will be given of the fact that a command to be transmitted at power-on is reserved in step S50. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, in order to notify that the power has been turned on (power restored), a power-on state command classified as power on, a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output when power is turned on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. This main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the driving state of the variable winning opening solenoid 2522, information instructing the driving state of the first large winning opening solenoid 2524, and information instructing the driving state of the second large winning opening solenoid 2563. Here, first, the problem when the power-on main control return destination command does not include the information indicating the driving state of the variable winning opening solenoid 2522, the information indicating the driving state of the first large winning opening solenoid 2524, and the information indicating the driving state of the second large winning opening solenoid 2563, that is, the problem when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is not performed in step S50.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of the big win game screen (for example, the big win game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the second big winning opening solenoid 2563 and when the second big winning opening 2007 is opened by the opening and closing member, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored. Based on the power restoration information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting, the game state immediately before the occurrence of the momentary power failure or power failure is restored, so that the driving of the second large prize winning port solenoid 2563 is started and the second large prize winning port 2007 shifts from the state closed by the opening and closing member to the state opened.

However, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored. Therefore, when power is restored after an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs while the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot game as a game state, and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. I can't. That is, for example, a game ball enters the second big winning hole 2007 and is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2561, and even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives a large winning hole 1 count display command that conveys the number of game balls that have entered the second big winning hole 2007, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second big winning hole 2007 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number of game balls entered in the game can be displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, which round (that is, what round) of the big win game can not be displayed at all.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310, for example, when finishing four rounds (fourth round) of the jackpot game, stops driving the second big winning hole solenoid 2563, and transmits a large winning hole 1 closed display command to the peripheral control board 1510 to instruct that the second big winning hole 2007 shifts from the state in which it is opened by the opening/closing member to the state in which it is closed (that is, starts closing the second big winning hole 2007 between rounds). Then, when the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the jackpot game, the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 the fifth large winning opening opening display command for instructing the second large winning opening solenoid 2563 to start driving and the second large winning opening 2007 to shift from the closed state to the open state by the opening/closing member (that is, start opening the fifth round of the second large winning opening 2007). . As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of the start of the 5th round of the jackpot game from the screen according to the probability and time saving state described above and displays it in the display area of the effect display device 1600 .

Further, for example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display area of the effect display device 1600 to display a screen (for example, a screen that tells the player that the variable winning gate 2521 is open) to the effect that the game ball can be received into the second starting gate 2005 and the game state is advantageous to the player, the main control board 1310 drives the variable winning gate solenoid 2522 to open the variable winning gate 2521. A momentary power failure or power failure occurs when the game ball B can be guided to the second start port 2005, and then when the power is restored, the main control board 1310 is restored to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. A transition is made to a state in which the second starting port 2005 is closed.

However, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a game state in which game balls can be accepted into the variable winning opening 2003 as a game state and is generating a game state advantageous to the player, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored. Even if it can be displayed in the display area and returned, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600 at all to inform the game state that the game ball can be received into the variable winning hole 2003 and the game state is advantageous to the player. For this reason, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine may be surprised at the momentary power failure or power failure, and may forget that when the power is restored, the game ball can be received in the variable winning hole 2003 just before the power failure or power failure occurs. Since the screen for instructing the game (that is, the screen for instructing the game of entering the game ball into the variable prize winning opening 2003) is not displayed in the display area, there is also a problem that the player does not know what kind of game to play.

As described above, in the two examples described above, there is a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine has a problem that, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that the system has failed.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order for the main control board 1310 to transmit a power-on state command and a main control return destination command at power-on to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on (including when the power is restored due to power failure or momentary power failure), in step S50, a power-on state command, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls at power-on are created as transmission information. It is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 receives from the main control board 1310 the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, for example, in the above-described example, in the 4th round of the jackpot game, when the momentary power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 starts to drive the second big winning opening solenoid 2563, and the second big winning opening 2007 is opened from the state closed by the opening and closing member. Since it is possible to tell the peripheral control board 1510 to shift, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen specifying that there are four rounds of the jackpot game (that is, a screen indicating how many rounds) in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The second big winning hole is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the second big winning hole.") is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 to instruct the player seated in front of the pachinko machine to enter the game ball into the second big winning hole 2007 after power is restored. When the main control board 1310 recovers after an instantaneous power failure or power failure in a state in which the game ball can be accepted and the game state is advantageous to the player, the main control board 1310 returns to the main control board 1310. When the main control board 1310 is restored, the variable winning gate solenoid 2522 is started to be driven to open the variable winning gate 2521 to guide the game ball B to the variable winning gate 2003. Please play the game so as to make the ball.") is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 by the peripheral control board 1510, and the player seated in front of the pachinko machine can be instructed to enter the game ball into the variable prize winning opening 2003 after power is restored.

As a result, when power is restored after an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the main control board 1310 can give detailed instructions on the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 . Therefore, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be quickly restored after power is restored. In other words, a player seated in front of the pachinko machine can be prevented from mistakenly thinking that the system of the pachinko machine is in a lumped state, a so-called frozen state, and has failed when power is restored after an instantaneous power failure or power failure.

Next, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the power of the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and the main control side power-off processing consisting of an infinite loop. Therefore, in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are always cleared except for a specific area.

As a result, when the command to be transmitted at power-on is reserved in step S50, a power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main control prize information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. It will be stored in the transmission information storage area. In the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, these commands are such that a power-on status command is first transmitted, followed by a main control return destination command at power-on, and then a counter notification command for determining the output of main prize number information output at power-on. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board 1310 sends a power-on state command as the first command to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, the power-on state command is the information that instructs when the RAM clear switch is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure). It consists of information indicating which state (probability and time saving state) to return from among the short states, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem in the case where the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine is not included in the power-on state command will be described.

The model code of the pachinko machine is the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310), when each of the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type is created, what kind of game specification (for example, if a probability change occurs, the state will continue until the next big win game occurs) In addition to the game specification that the state will continue until the next big win game occurs, the game that the probability change occurs in a state where the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). It is possible to specify whether it is a specification (such as a so-called ST machine))).

In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control boards 1310, there are cases where the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed. Then, the worker of the production line cannot understand which main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture the main control board 1310 for which of the copyrights of multiple types of works (for example, the copyright of the work Movie A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F). 0 is flowing to the production line, there is also an assumption or misunderstanding that the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line in order to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called Manga F).

Therefore, if the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works coexist when the main control boards 1310 are manufactured on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, the worker on the production line cannot confirm which work the main control boards 1310 manufactured on the production line are for. (When probability fluctuation occurs, it is not possible to confirm whether it is a game specification or ST machine that the state is continued until the next big hit game occurs).

As a result, when the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed when manufacturing the main control boards 1310 on the production line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of the plurality of types of works are sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control boards 1310 to the game board 5 while they are mixed. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line sometimes attaches to the game board 5 the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 with respect to the copyright of the work. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order for the main control board 1310 to transmit a power-on state command including information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure), in step S50, a power-on state command classified as a power-on, a main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls when the power is turned on are created and transmitted. The information is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, an operator on the production line of the maker who manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the power of the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, and based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received by the inspection device from the main control board 1310, that is, the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work; and a game specification code for specifying a game specification (for example, a game specification that, if a probability change occurs, the state continues until the next big win game occurs, and a game specification that the probability change occurs with a limited number of special symbol changes (ST machine), etc.). It is possible to discriminate which work the 0 is for the copyright, and even for the copyright of the same work, it is possible to discriminate which model type (maximum type, middle type, and sweet digital type) and what kind of game specifications (game specifications and ST machines such that when a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big win game occurs).

As a result, even if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works coexist when manufacturing the main control boards 1310 on the production line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, the operator in the main control board inspection process of the production line can visually determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications accurately by looking at the inspection monitor. can be sent to the line. The worker of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and can prevent the production efficiency of the game board 5 from being lowered by the work of attaching the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5 .

[11-4. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, main control side timer interrupt processing will be described. This main-control-side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed for each interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 167 and 168 .

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1310a switches register banks as shown in FIG. 169 (step S100). The general-purpose storage elements (general-purpose registers) of the main control MPU 1310a have two register banks consisting of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control-side timer interrupt processing of this routine, the register bank is switched from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control-side power-on processing to the second register bank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine is started, it is not necessary to save each register to the stack.

Following step S100, the main control MPU 1310a performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to the variation display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric role product control processing described later, the time when the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric role product control processing described later, Various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are paid out. Time management such as ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the payer ACK signal indicating that the control board 633 has received the signal normally has been input is performed. Specifically, when the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms, so that the variation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction processing is performed, and the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes 0.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control MPU 1310a performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a, for example, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2601, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401, the detection signal from the variable winning opening sensor 2526, the detection signal from the first big winning opening sensor 2524, the detection signal from the second big winning opening sensor 2561, the detection signal from the out sensor 664, Detection signals from the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, detection signals from the magnetic sensor 1050, operation signals from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), detection signals from the door frame open switch, detection signals from the main body frame open switch 4b, signals from the setting key switch 1311a, signals from the setting switching buttons, and a payout control board 633 that indicates that the payout control board 633 has normally received a prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. , are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, when the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401 are read, the corresponding starting opening winning command classified as others is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In other words, when there is a detection signal from the first start sensor 3002, a corresponding start win prize command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and when there is a detection signal from the second start gate sensor 2401, a corresponding start win prize command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

In the present embodiment, when the switch input process is started, the state in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are input (including those subjected to empty terminal processing) is read first, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has passed, it is read again for the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. A determination is made as to whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the third time, and the result of the third reading is compared with the result of the second reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the fourth time, and the result of the fourth reading is compared with the result of the third reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball or as if the input is ignored.

In this way, in the switch input process, the status of input to all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (including those subjected to vacant terminal processing) is read twice for a total of two readings by comparing the first to third times and by comparing the second to fourth times. signal, detection signal from general winning opening sensor 3001, detection signal from first starting opening sensor 3002, detection signal from second starting opening sensor 2401, detection signal from variable winning opening sensor 2526, detection signal from first big winning opening sensor 2524, detection signal from second big winning opening sensor 2561, detection signal from out sensor 664, first ball sensor 703 and second ball sensor 704, detection signal from magnetic sensor 1050, RAM An operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the clear switch, a detection signal from the door frame opening switch, a detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b, a signal from the setting key switch 1311a, a signal from the setting switching button, and a payout control board 633 that informs that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later can be improved in reliability.

Following step S104, the main control MPU 1310a performs input terminal malfunction monitoring processing (step S105). In this input terminal defect monitoring process, the state of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a that have undergone empty terminal processing is checked based on the information acquired in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to the ground (GND) as an idle terminal processing, so the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, it is determined whether or not the logic state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal processing is performed among the input terminals of the various input ports is LOW based on the information acquired in the switch input process of step S104. When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the logic state of the input terminal subjected to idle terminal processing is not LOW, the main control MPU 1310a stores, as transmission information, in a transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, a defect command classified as a notification display for notifying that a peripheral circuit of the main control MPU 1310a has a defect.

Following step S105, the main control MPU 1310a performs win/lose random number update processing (step S106). In this winning/losing random number update process, the above-described symbol random number is updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the big-hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small-hit symbol, which are updated in the non-hit-lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 168, are also updated. These big-hit symbol initial value determination random numbers and small-hit symbol initial value determination random numbers are updated in the main control side main process and this main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby enhancing the randomness. On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number related to win/lose determination (win/lose determination), each counter counts up only each time this win/lose random number update process is performed. Incidentally, the above-described normal symbol hit determination random number and normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number are also updated by this win-lose random number update process.

For example, the counter for updating the random number for judging a normal symbol hit is, as described above, an initial value update type counter, which is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and counts up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value by adding 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the minimum value is counted up toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the hit determination initial value determination random number is updated by this win/lose random number update process. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big-hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small-hit symbol are updated in the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. If the number of executions of the non-win/lose random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the game is completed, the random number for determining the initial value of the big win symbol and the random number for determining the initial value of the small win symbol may be updated only in the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU 1310a performs ball count processing (step S107). In this ball counting process, the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the detection signal from the out sensor 664 is input, and the game ball discharged from the game board 5 and circulating in the out ball passage 663 (the game ball hit into the game area 5a and received in the winning opening such as the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the second big winning opening 2007, etc.) When the out sensor 664 detects a game ball that has been entered and discharged from the game board 5, or a game ball that has been discharged from the game board 5 without being accepted by any of the winning holes after being hit into the game area 5a, and accepted by any of the out hole 1008, the first sub-out hole 2021, and the second sub-out hole 2022), an operation is performed to add (increment) the value of the total collected ball counter by 1, and detection from the first ball sensor 703 is performed. When the signal is input and the first ball sensor 703 detects a game ball received by the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 and circulating in the first ball path 701, the value of the out ball counter that counts the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022, the so-called out balls, is calculated by adding 1 (incrementing), A detection signal from the second ball sensor 704 is input and is driven into the game area 5a. When the second ball sensor 704 detects a game ball received by a winning opening such as the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the second large winning opening 2007, etc. and flowing through the second ball path 702, the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003 and the first starting opening are detected. 2004, a value 1 is added (incremented) to the value of a safe ball counter that counts the number of game balls received in winning openings such as the second starting opening 2005, the second big winning opening 2007, etc. (increase). That is, in the ball counting process, the out sensor 664 detects both the game balls received in the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the second major winning opening 2007, and the game balls received in the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021 and the second sub-out opening 2022, and the first ball sensor 703 detects the out opening 100. 8. The game balls collected by the first sub-out port 2021 and the second sub-out port 2022 are detected, and the second ball sensor 704 detects the game balls received in the winning ports such as the general winning port 2001, the variable winning port 2003, the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005, and the second big winning port 2007.

Then, the main control MPU 1310a specifies the value of the total collected ball counter, which is the calculation result, as the total number of the game balls received in the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the second big winning opening 2007, and the game balls received in the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021 and the second sub-out opening 2022, in the main control built-in RAM. The value of the out ball counter is stored in the out ball counting exclusive area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM as the total number of out balls collected by the out exit 1008, the first sub-out exit 2021 and the second sub out exit 2022, and the value of the safe ball counter is stored in the general winning entry 2001, variable winning entry 2003, first starting entry 2004, second starting entry 2005, second big winning entry 2007, etc. The total number of safe balls accepted in the winning slot is stored in the safe ball counting dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Also, the ratio of the number of payouts (total number of paid out prize balls) to the value of the total collected ball counter, that is, the ratio of the number of payouts to the total number of game balls (total number of paid out prize balls) is calculated, and the calculated result is stored in a base calculation area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

In addition, when the value of the total collected ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, the main control MPU 1310a, whenever the total number of game balls collected at the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the second big winning opening 2007, etc., the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021 and the second sub-out opening 2022 reaches 10, A ball recovery command is created to notify that effect, and is stored in the output information storage area as transmission information. The main control MPU 1310a, when the recovered ball counter value, the out ball counter value, and the safe ball counter value, which are the calculation results, each reach the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value is 65535), and the value of the recovered ball counter, the out ball counter, and the safe ball counter is incremented by 1, the values of the recovered ball counter, the out ball counter, and the safe ball counter overflow and become the value 0, and the calculation is performed to add from this value 0.

Following step S107, the main control MPU 1310a performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on this input information, or a self-check command for checking the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is created. Then, the generated prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the second big winning hole 2007, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 prize balls, and since the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify that effect, the output information is stored in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633, or the payout control board 633 normally receives this prize ball command. When a payer ACK signal notifying that the reception is completed is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check command for checking the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is created and transmitted to the payout control board 633.

In the prize ball control process of step S108, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, when the number of game balls scheduled to be put out as prize balls reaches 10, a main prize number information output command classified into others is created to notify that fact, and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize number information output determination counter. The value of the counter for determining the output of the number of main prize balls is determined based on the input information read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, that is, based on the input information, i.e., the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the second big winning opening 2007, etc. provided on the game board 5 (hereinafter referred to as "various winning openings provided on the game board 5"). It counts the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls, and is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control process of step S108. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added to the read value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. When the number of balls has reached 10 balls), a main prize number information output command is created to notify that fact, and is stored as transmission information in the output information storage area, and a value indicating the exceeded number of balls is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the value of the main prize number information output determination counter.

Following step S108, the main control MPU 1310a performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (eg, frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into state displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to notify the payout control board 633 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified by status display (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command)), and stores them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S110, the main control MPU 1310a performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraudulent act detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize balls is checked. If it is determined that a fraudulent act by radio wave irradiation (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave irradiation") is being performed, the value of the radio wave irradiation counter is incremented by one. The value of this radio wave counter is incremented each time radio wave irradiation is determined in the fraudulent act detection process, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. When the value of the radio wave irradiation counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle at which the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed in the fraud detection processing), a radio wave irradiation notification command classified as a notification display to the effect that radio wave irradiation is being performed is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Further, in the fraud detection process in step S112, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input, it is determined that fraudulent activity using a magnet (hereinafter referred to as "magnet goto") is being performed, and the value of the magnet goto counter is incremented by one. The value of this magnet counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio wave irradiation is performed in fraud detection processing, is included in game backup information, and is set to 0 (zero) as an initial value when the RAM is cleared. When the value of the magnet goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the upper limit value is set to 250 based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle at which the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed in the fraudulent activity detection process), a magnet goto notification command classified as a notification display to the effect that radio wave irradiation is being performed is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In the present embodiment, by reliably detecting and notifying the magnetic goto with such a mechanism, it is possible to contribute to the fact that staff members such as store clerks in game halls can discover the magnetic goto at an early stage.

Further, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and when the detection signal from the first big winning hole sensor 2525 or the second big winning hole sensor 2561 is input when the game is not a big winning game (when the game ball enters the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole 2007), etc., when the big winning hole abnormal winning occurs, a winning abnormal display command classified as a notification display as an abnormal state is issued. The total number of gaming balls created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above or stored in the safe ball counting dedicated area is the total number of game balls detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, the variable winning opening sensor 2526, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the first major winning opening sensor 2525, and the second large winning opening sensor 2561, that is, the actual general winning opening 2001 and the variable winning opening 2003. , the first starting hole 2004, the second starting hole 2005, the first big winning hole 2006, the second big winning hole 2007, etc., and the total number of the game balls received in the winning holes is different, a winning abnormal display command classified as a notification display as an abnormal state is created and stored as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

In the fraud detection process in step S112, when the radio wave irradiation goto and/or the magnet goto are detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value of 1 as fraud detection. This fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and is set to 0 (zero) as an initial value when the RAM is cleared. Further, when detecting the occurrence of an abnormal winning of a large winning opening, the value 1 may be set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as detection of fraud.

Following step S112, the main control MPU 1310a performs firing enable signal setting processing (step S113). In this firing permission signal setting process, the logic of the firing permission signal that tells the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 to allow the firing of the game ball B is set. Specifically, based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG, when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that fraud has not been detected, the main control MPU 1310a sets the logic of the firing permission signal to the firing permission logic and stores it as output information in the output information storage area described above. As the logic of the permission signal, the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) obtained by inverting the firing permission logic is set, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. The main control MPU 1310a reads the input information from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, when the door frame open switch detects that the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4 when the detection signal is input from the door frame open switch, when the main body frame open switch 4b detects that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 when the detection signal is input from the main body frame open switch 4b, the fire stop logic (fire non-fire) is used as the logic of the fire permission signal. permission logic) and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. The logic of the firing permission signal is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing permission logic is set to the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) that is the inversion of the firing permission logic (fire non-permission logic) as an initial value (default) from when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power is restored) until the firing permission signal setting process of step S113 in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine is started.

Following step S113, the main control MPU 1310a performs special symbol and special electric accessary product control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random number) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the acquired random number is set as a special random number. Then, a special random number (that is, a random value obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) and a big hit determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM are matched (determined whether or not to generate a big hit game (referred to as "special lottery")). It determines whether or not it matches (determines the hit type).

When these determination results (lottery results) are from the first start opening sensor 3002, various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect are created, while when the determination results (lottery results) are from the second start opening sensor 2401, various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning effect are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the variable display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number for the variable display pattern described above, and the function display unit is determined according to the determined variable display pattern of the special symbol. Set the output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 so as to light the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator of 1400, and store it as output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, according to the game state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a big win game, various commands (big win opening command, big win 1 open Nth time display command, big win 1 closed display command, big win 1 count display command, big win ending command, and big win pattern display command) are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, or, for example, a drive signal to the second big win opening solenoid 2563 to open and close the opening and closing member. Set the output and store it in the output information storage area as output information, set the output of the lighting signal to the 2 round display lamp so as to light the 2 round display lamp of the round display device of the function display unit 1400 when the number of times (rounds) that the second big winning hole 2007 changes from the closed state to the open state (round) is 2 times, store it in the output information storage region as output information, or when the number of rounds is 15 rounds, 15 rounds so as to light the 15 round display lamp of the round display device of the function display unit 1400. Set the output of the lighting signal to the display lamp and store it in the output information storage area as output information, or set the output of the lighting signal to the status indicator of the function display unit 1400 so that the presence or absence of the time saving occurrence is lit in a predetermined color, and store it in the output information storage area as the output information.

Following step S114, the main control MPU 1310a performs normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the normal winning opening winning process is performed based on this input information. In this normal winning opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 2601 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port based on the result of this determination, the value of the counter for updating the random number for judging the normal symbol winning is extracted and stored as normal winning opening winning information in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

0th to 3rd divisions (four divisions) are provided in the normal winning opening winning information storage area, and normal winning opening winning information is stored in order of the 0th division, the first division, the second division and the third division. For example, when the normal winning opening prize information is stored in the 0th to second divisions of the normal winning opening winning information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2601 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the third partition of the ordinary winning opening winning information storage.

The normal winning opening winning information stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When the normal winning entry winning information is set, the normal winning entry winning information in the first section of the normal winning entry winning information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the normal winning entry winning information storage, the normal winning entry winning information in the second section of the normal winning entry winning information storage is shifted to the first section of the normal winning entry winning information storage, and the normal winning entry winning information in the third section of the normal winning entry winning information storage is shifted to the second section of the normal winning entry winning information storage. The third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the normal winning entry winning information is stored in the first and second sections of the normal winning entry winning information storage, the normal winning entry winning information in the first section of the normal winning entry winning information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the normal winning entry winning information storage, and the normal winning entry winning information in the second section of the normal winning entry winning information storage is shifted to the first section of the normal winning entry winning information storage, respectively. The third section of winning prize information storage becomes an empty area. Here, when the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first to third sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the output of the lighting signal of the normal holding display of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-described normal winning opening winning information so as to light the normal holding display of the function display unit 1400 with the total number of the stored normal winning opening winning information as the reserved ball, and stored as the output information in the above-described output information storage area.

Following normal winning opening winning processing, normal winning opening winning information set in a work area of a main control built-in RAM is read, a value of a random number for determining a normal winning opening is taken out from the read normal winning opening winning information, and it is determined whether or not it coincides with a normal winning opening judgment value pre-stored in a main control built-in ROM (referred to as "ordinary lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the variable winning opening door 2521 is determined based on this determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening/closing operation is performed by this determination, the variable winning opening door 2521 is opened, and the game ball can be received into the variable winning opening 2003, which is advantageous to the player. The normal symbol variation display pattern corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-described random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect are created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, and the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, and stored as output information in the output information storage area. .

Further, for example, when the value of the normal symbol hit determination random number taken out matches the normal symbol hit determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to normal electric role performance are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. When the value does not coincide with the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the above-described random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, various commands classified into the normal symbol synchronization performance related are created, and stored as transmission information in the above-described transmission information storage area. is set and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. In this example, the probability of winning the normal lottery (probability of winning a normal prize) is 1/2.

Following step S116, the main control MPU 1310a performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the above-described output information storage area from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control MPU 1310a, for example, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information, output the main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 633 when the various commands from the payout control board 633 is normally received, or when it is a jackpot game, the first big winning opening solenoid 2524 and the second big winning opening solenoid 2524 for opening and closing the opening and closing members of the first big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening 2007 In addition to outputting a drive signal to the winning opening solenoid 2563 and outputting a driving signal to the variable winning opening solenoid 2522 that performs the opening and closing operation of the variable winning opening door 2521 for opening and closing the second starting opening 2005, 15 rounds big hit information output signal, 2 rounds big hit information output signal, small hit information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, starting entrance winning information output signal etc. Various information (game information) signals are output to the payout control board 633, a firing permission signal set to the firing permission logic or firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) is output to the payout control board 633, a display signal is output to a special monitor that displays the ratio of the number of payouts to the total number of game balls (total number of paid out prize balls), and the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is displayed on the setting display 1310g. It outputs a lighting signal.

Following step S118, the main control MPU 1310a performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands categorized as related to the special figure 1 tuning effect, various commands categorized as related to the special figure 2 synchronous effect, various commands classified as related to the special figure 2 synchronized effect, various commands classified as being related to the big win (for example, a large winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to the large winning opening count command based on the detection signal from the second large winning opening sensor 2561 when the game ball that entered the second large winning opening 2007 is detected), various commands classified as turning on the power, and general commands. Various commands categorized as related to figure-synchronization effect, various commands as categorized as normal electric role effect, various commands as categorized as notification display, various commands as categorized as status display, various commands as categorized as test-related, and various commands as categorized as others (for example, the main control board 1310 outputs a main prize ball number information signal every time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entering various prize openings provided on the game board 5 reaches 10, as main prize ball number information. main winning ball number information output command that instructs to transmit to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 558), and various commands classified by specific history (for example, general winning opening 2001, variable winning opening 2003, first starting opening 2004, second starting opening 2005, first big winning opening 2006, second big winning opening 2007, etc. winning openings and outlets 1008, first sub-outing 2021 and second sub-outing 2022 Each time the number of collected game balls reaches 10, a ball recovery command that informs that the number of balls has reached 10, a setting change command that informs that the setting value has been changed, an error display command that informs that there is an abnormality (or is unreliable) stored in the main control built-in RAM, a setting key ON operation command that informs that the set value stored in a set value dedicated area described later in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM is stored. One packet of the main circumferential serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main-circumference serial data consists of a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of the effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a sum value calculated by regarding the status and mode as numerical values and calculating the sum of the values. This sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, status, mode, and sum value, which constitute various commands as main peripheral serial data, are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is applied with +5 V of electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a can at least transfer the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit, and complete the transmission from the transmission shift register as main peripheral serial data. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs after the power is turned on, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main control power-on process shown in FIG. Since it is stored, as the main peripheral serial data, it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the state command at power-on, in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the main control return destination command at power-on. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on processing, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this various information may be stored. In such a case, first, after completion of transmission of various commands corresponding to game information among various information, a state command at power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining output of main prize number information at power-on are transmitted.

In addition, every time the number of game balls collected at the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, the second big winning opening 2007, the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021 and the second sub-out opening 2022 reaches 10 balls, a ball recovery command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, The CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of game balls collected at the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, the second big winning opening 2007, the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021, and the second sub-out opening 2022 for each received ball collection command, not shown. The ball collection information stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (the total number of game balls collected in the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, the second big winning opening 2007, etc., the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021, and the second sub-out opening 2022) is associated with the updated date and time. information). In addition, when the ball recovery command is not received and the pachinko machine 1 is powered off at the end of the game hall business hours, as a result, the last counted value (that is, the general winning opening 2001, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004, the second starting opening 2005, the first big winning opening 2006, the second big winning opening 2007, etc., the winning opening and the out opening 1008, the first sub-out opening 2021 and the second sub-out opening 2 Ball collection information in which the total number of game balls collected at 022) and the updated date and time are associated is stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on when the game hall starts operating, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 creates the ball recovery information stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) from the day when the business starts, and the ball recovery information is stored and held as ball recovery history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). The counted value stored as ball collection information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) may be the value counted from 0 (zero) on the day, or both the value counted from 0 (zero) on the day and the sum of the counted values so far may be used.

Following step S120, the main control MPU 1310a clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122) and terminates this routine. The clearing of the main control built-in WDT in step S122 is performed by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, by restarting the clocking by the main control built-in WDT, the main control MPU 1310a can be prevented from being forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

As described above, the main control board 1310 can perform and complete the above-described backup processing for storing the game information according to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing, and at the time of power restoration, based on the game information for which the backup processing has been executed, as a return destination for the progress of the game by the main control board 1310, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off in step S118 in this routine. It is possible to output to the peripheral control board 1510 a main control return destination command at power-on that indicates the driving state of the variable winning opening solenoid 2522, the first big winning opening solenoid 2524, and the second big winning opening solenoid 2563, which are the electrical drive sources by the port output process. That is, the main control board 1310, in order to notify that the power has been turned on (recovery), based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the processing shown in FIG. A main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the state command at power-on. The status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the main prize number information output determination counter notification command, are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order.

Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration in the display area of the effect display device 1600 based on the main control return destination command at power-on from the main control board 1310. As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while the player is playing a game and power is subsequently restored, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be quickly restored after the power is restored, and the destination of the return of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, thereby notifying the player that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and is mistaken for failure. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding a malfunction by quickly returning to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power is restored.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, in step S38 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is made in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same processing shown in FIG. Only three commands, the information output determination counter notification command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the status, mode, and sum value constituting the power-on state command are transmitted as main peripheral serial data to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value. When the power is turned on, the status, the mode, and the sum value, which constitute the main prize number information output determination counter notification command, are transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in this order. The inspection device of the main control board inspection process is based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310, that is, the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, which constitutes the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Detailed model information is displayed on an inspection monitor in a main control board inspection process based on a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which a probability variation occurs in a state where the number of variations of special symbols is limited, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until a trick occurs.

[11-5. Setting change process]
Next, setting change processing will be described. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG.

When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the current setting values as shown in FIG. 170 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When acquiring this setting value, it may be read out or taken out. When the setting value is taken out, the taken out setting value is set in a predetermined area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is calculated by considering various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total thereof, and is the same processing as the checksum calculation performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 167.

Following step S202, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main-control-side power-off processing (power-off) in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 168 (step S204). When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S204 that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 167, respectively. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not game backup information such as various information, checksum values (sum values), and values of the backup flag BK-FLG is stored in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power failure processing described later.

In the judgment of step S204, the main control MPU1310A determines that the value (sam value) of the checksum does not match, or in step S206 judgment, the main control MPU1310a is not a values 1 (value 0), that is, when the main control MPU1310A is not a value 1, that is When determining that the reason has not been completed properly, it is determined whether the setting value obtained in the step S200 is in the normal range (step S208). Here, the "normal range" is a value that can be set and changed, and in the present embodiment, set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 are set in advance. When the flowchart advances to the determination of step S208, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing is not normally completed when the power is turned off. Therefore, in the determination of step S208, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM obtained in step S200 is any value from setting value 1 to setting value 6, which is the normal range.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is out of the normal range in the determination of step S208, it sets the set value 1, which is the initial value, to the set value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In the determination of step S208, it is determined whether or not the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM obtained in step S200 is any value among the setting values 1 to 6 that are in the normal range. , the main control MPU 1310a may proceed to step S210 when the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally, and may set the setting value 1, which is the initial value, to the setting value acquired in step S200.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S206 that the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it determines that the main control side power failure processing has ended normally, or when it determines in step S208 that the main control MPU 1310a is within the normal range, or following step S210, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to turn on the setting change permission lamp. 1310z is turned on (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214).

Following step S214, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the setting switching button has been operated (step S216). This determination reads the detection signal from the setting switching button, and determines whether or not the detection signal from the setting switching button is input. A main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button is operated when the detection signal from the setting switching button is input, and determines that the setting switching button is not operated when the detection signal from the setting switching button is not input.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S216 that the setting switching button has been operated, the main control MPU 1310a updates the setting value by adding (incrementing) the value by 1 (step S218). At this time, when the setting value is acquired in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted and set in the predetermined area, the setting value set in the predetermined area is incremented by 1.

Following step S218, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting display 1310g, and displays the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S220).

Following step S220 or in the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button has not been operated, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the enter key has been operated (step S222). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a detects that the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned 120 degrees counterclockwise from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (that is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned to the initial position (that is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned on. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder (rotational position of the setting key cylinder) to turn it off, and then rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise. When the determination key ON signal is not input from the switch 1311a, it is determined that the determination key has not been operated.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S222 that the enter key has not been operated, it returns to the determination in step S216 to determine whether or not the setting switching button has been operated. When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S216 that the setting switching button has been operated, the main control MPU 1310a performs the processing of steps S218 and S220 again, performs the determination of step S222, and when it determines that the enter key has not been operated, returns to the determination of step S216 again. If the setting switching button is not operated, the setting value updated by operating the setting switching button immediately before is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored before it is determined in step S222 that the enter key has been operated, the setting values updated immediately before the power failure or momentary power failure occur are not stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S222 that the decision key has been operated, it stores the updated set value in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, when the set value is acquired in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, the set value set in this predetermined area is updated, so the updated set value is returned to the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. After completion of the processing in step S224, even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored, the updated set value when the decision key is operated before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

After step S224, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key (step S226). In this judgment, the main control MPU 1310a rotates the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return the setting key cylinder to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. When the OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S226 that the setting key has not been turned OFF, the main control MPU 1310a returns to the determination in step S226 and repeats the determination in step S226 until the setting key is turned OFF.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S226 that the setting key has been turned off, the main control MPU 1310a stops outputting the lighting signal for displaying the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g and hides the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S228).

After step S228, the main control MPU 1310a stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to turn off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

After step S230, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to 0 (step S232). As described above, this setting change permission flag CS-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not to permit the current setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the value set among the setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON for the first time). set. In the process of step S232, the value 0 is set to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG, thereby disallowing the setting change of the setting values thereafter.

After step S232, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The “normal range” is the same as that of the determination in step S208, and as described above, in the present embodiment, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 are set in advance. In the determination of step S233, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM in step S224 is any value from set value 1 to set value 6, which is the normal range, in order to reconfirm whether the set value is an abnormal value.

In the determination of step S233, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is within the normal range, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initialization (step S234), then creates a setting change command and sets transmission information (step S236), then performs peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing for transmitting the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data (step S238), and ends this routine. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 168, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. Here, in the serial communication initialization of step S234, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S238 prior to the serial communication initialization of step S44. This is to inform the peripheral control board 1510 of the setting change command. The setting change command is a command for notifying the changed setting value and the completion of storing the setting value. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it updates the setting value history information (information that associates the setting value with the date and time) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown).

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S233 that it is not within the normal range, it performs error display processing (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is terminated is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally when the power is cut off, an error display is made to inform that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or unreliable). In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[11-6. Setting value confirmation display process]
Next, setting value confirmation display processing will be described. This setting value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S117 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

When the setting value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0 (step S350), as shown in FIG. This confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and is set to a value of 1 when the setting value is being confirmed and displayed, and set to a value of 0 when the setting value is not being displayed for confirmation.

In the determination of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0, that is, when the setting value is not displayed for confirmation, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the body frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned on (step S352). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key being inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder turning 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder turning off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by the first ON operation by the turning operation, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a determines that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. By determining that the setting key switch 1311a is ON with the setting key ON signal, it is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is established. and/or by determining that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on by the setting key ON signal, it is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S352 that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a terminates this routine as it is, and when it determines that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied, it sets the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG to 1 to confirm and display the setting value (step S354), and then acquires the current setting value (step S356). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S356, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the set value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The “normal range” is the same as the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change process of FIG. In the determination of step S357, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the set value acquired in step S356 (that is, the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM) is within the normal range of set values 1 to 6, and when it is determined to be in the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

In the determination of step S357, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting value obtained in step S356 is within the normal range, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S358).

Following step S360, the main control MPU 1310a creates a setting key ON operation command, stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, sets the setting key ON operation command (step S360), and ends this routine. This setting key ON operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. The ON operation command of the setting key is a command to notify that the setting value confirmation display processing of this routine has started (that is, to confirm the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM).

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, it updates the ON operation history information of the setting key stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) (information that associates the confirmation of the setting value with the date and time).

Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, a predetermined specific history information display permission condition is established that the specific history information such as the ball collection history information, the set value history information, the error display history information, and the setting key ON operation history information can be displayed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 performs control to switch from the image that has been displayed so far to a specific history information display image that selectively displays the specific history information and to display it in the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the person who confirms the specific history information rotates the contact operation unit 302 and presses the pressing operation unit 303 in a state where the predetermined specific history information display permission condition is satisfied.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return the setting key cylinder from the rotational position at which the decision key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). When the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. When the setting key switch 1311a receives an off signal, it is determined that the setting key has been turned off.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S362 that the setting key has not been turned off, it terminates this routine as it is, while if it determines that the setting key has been turned off, it sets the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG to 0 (step S364) and sets the value of the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG to 0 (step S364). The output to g is stopped and the acquired setting value is not displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S366), then a setting key OFF operation command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the setting key OFF operation command is set (step S368), and this routine ends. This setting key OFF operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. The setting key OFF operation command is a command to inform that the setting value confirmation display processing of this routine has ended (that is, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM has been confirmed).

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key OFF operation command, the above-described predetermined specific history information display permission condition is not satisfied. At this time, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 performs control to display the above-described specific history information display image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it performs control to switch back to the image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 immediately before switching to the specific history information display image.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is not within the normal range in the determination of step S357, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt non-permission setting (step S370). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 169, which has been repeatedly performed every 4 ms, is stopped.

After step S370, the main control MPU 1310a performs error display processing (step S372), and then enters an infinite loop in which the main control built-in WDT continues to be cleared (step S374). Due to this infinite loop, the main control built-in WDT continues to be cleared, but this cannot be stopped once the main control built-in WDT is started. Therefore, by continuing to clear the main control built-in WDT, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a, thereby clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT, and by restarting the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT, the main control built-in WDT starts the main control MPU 13. 10a is not forced to reset. In addition, the infinite loop keeps the state in which the error display processing is finished, so that the game cannot be progressed at all, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally when the power is cut off, an error display is made to inform that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or unreliable). In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[11-7. Error display processing]
Next, error display processing will be described. This error display process is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 167, a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG.

When the error display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a stops the firing permission signal as shown in FIG. 172 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal informs the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted. When the logic is set to the launch permission logic, the launch permission signal can be transmitted.

When the error display process, which is this routine, is started as a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 167 or a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. cannot be performed, the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 169 cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting processing of step S113 in the same processing cannot be performed. Since the firing permission signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with reset function, when power is restored, the main control output circuit with reset function is reset, and its logic is the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) that is the inversion of the firing permission logic.

Therefore, when the error display process, which is this routine, is started as one of the processes performed in step S33 of the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 167 or step S37 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. In order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being shot even after the shooting, the logic of the shooting permission signal is set to shooting stop logic (shooting non-permission logic), and is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the shooting control section 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function.

When the error display process, which is this routine, is started as the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 171, the main control MPU 1310a determines that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM in the determination of step S357 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a has already performed the interrupt permission setting in step S52 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. The firing permission signal setting process of step S113 in the same process cannot be performed.

Therefore, when the error display process of this routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 171, the main control MPU 1310a sets the logic of the launch permission signal to the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) in step S400 in order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being fired in a state where there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM. It is output to the firing control section 633b of the substrate 633. FIG.

Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display is output to the setting display 1310g to display an error on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU 1310a displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In this step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various indicators of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400. FIG.

Following step S404, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initialization (step S406), then creates an error display command and sets transmission information (step S408), then performs peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing for transmitting the transmission information (error display command) set in step S406 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data (step S410), and ends this routine.

The serial communication initial setting in step S406 is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 170 and the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120. When the error display processing of this routine is started and completed as the processing performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 167, the processing performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on processing illustrated in FIG. , the state in which the error display process is completed is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, serial communication initialization is performed in step S406, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S410.

The error display command is a command to notify that there is an abnormality (or that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is unreliable). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, it updates the error display history information (information that associates the error display command with the received date and time) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown).

In addition, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, it performs control to display a message image of white characters "RAM error has occurred. Please call the staff." is forcibly set to , and is controlled to be played from various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, body frame speaker of the body frame 4, etc.). The processing of notifying the RAM error by the error display command is the processing with the highest priority, and when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command after receiving the command notifying other errors, the RAM error notification is performed with the highest priority.

[12. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 to 176. FIG. FIG. 173 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout control unit power-on processing, FIG. 174 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the payout control unit power-on processing of FIG. 173, FIG. 175 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the payout control unit power-on processing following FIG. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described.

[12-1. Dispensing control unit power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control section 633a in the payout control board 633, as shown in FIGS. When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode is for setting the priority of the interrupt of the payout control MPU. In the present embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is set to have the highest priority.

Following step S500, the payout control MPU performs input/output setting (input/output setting of I/O) (step S502). In this I/O input/output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506), and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure (phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when it becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage after the power is turned on until it rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 . Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage after the power is turned on and stabilized. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer). The determination in step S508 is performed based on a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. FIG.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633 is operated (step S512). Based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, it is determined that the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is not operated to instruct the RAM clear, and the RAM clear switch is determined not to be operated.

When the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch has been operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU makes it possible to perform RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM (that is, payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on.

On the other hand, when the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to 0 (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in prize ball information storage area, and PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, etc., stored in CR communication information storage area) This is a flag indicating whether or not to erase the payout information related to the payout, and is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is to be erased and a value of 0 when the payout information is not to be erased. Note that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs setting to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM can be performed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read.

After step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or an address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. At step S520, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the register contents, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

After step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the payout information is erased, and to the value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

In the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it determines not to erase the payout information (step S524). This checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in payout control unit power-off processing (at power-off) described later (step S526). When the payout control MPU determines that they match in step S526, it determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored in the payout control built-in RAM in payout control unit power failure processing described later.

In the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is the value 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power failure processing has been normally completed, set the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as power recovery (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, the information at the time of power recovery is read from the ROM (that is, the payout control built-in ROM) built in the payout control MPU, and this information at the time of power recovery is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, which are the aforementioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, mismatch counter reset determination time stored in the time management information storage area, etc., stored in the CR communication information storage area. ), information used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout. Note that "recovery of power" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, but also the state in which the power has been restored after a power failure or momentary power failure.

On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (it is 1) in the determination of step S522, that is, when it determines to erase the payout information, or when it determines in the determination of step S526 that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not 1 (is 0). ), that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power-off processing has not ended normally, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets the working area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). For this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is to set the interrupt period when the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the payout control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). Due to this setting, the interrupt period set in step S536, that is, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every 2 ms.

Following step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting value A, value B and value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in this order.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input as a power failure forecast from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. - 特許庁The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

In the determination of step S540, when the payout control MPU determines that there is no power failure warning signal input, it determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later, and is set to a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed.

In the determination of step S542, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, the payout control MPU returns to step S540, and the payout control MPU determines whether a power failure warning signal has been input.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU sets the value 0 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, ie, 2 ms has elapsed (step S544).

After step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, a value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, various types of information are stored, such as payout ACK information that indicates that various commands related to payout (a prize ball command and a self-check command) from the main control board 1310 have been normally received, drive information for performing drive control to the payout motor 584, prize ball number information on the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information to be displayed on an error LED display. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310, a drive signal is output to the payout motor 584, and the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is output to the external terminal board 558 as a prize ball number information output signal (in this embodiment, the external terminal board 558 is output every time the payout motor 584 actually pays out 10 game balls. It outputs the pitch information output signal.

Specifically, a winning ball number information output determination counter for determining whether or not to output the winning ball number information is provided. This winning ball number information output determination counter counts the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550, which will be described later. ) is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

In the processing (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584, the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value of the prize ball information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 to be described later, and the memory is updated.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the winning ball number information output determination counter is read from the winning ball information storage area, and when the read value of the winning ball number information output determination counter exceeds the value 10 (that is, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10), a winning ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 (at this time, the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is output to the winning ball number information output determination counter value. The value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM), and a display signal is output to the error LED display.

Following step S548, the payout control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, the operation signal of the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal from the CR unit, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that tells that the various commands sent in the command transmission process described later are normally received by the main control board 1310. memorize to

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, the ball jam determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball jam state has occurred due to the payout vane 589 to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, the skip determination time set when not determining the fixed position of the payout vane 589, the full tank determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether the lower tray 202 is full of game balls stored, and the ball exhaustion detection sensor 57. In addition to time management such as the out-of-ball determination time set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 by the detection signal from 4 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, inconsistent games due to discrepancies between the number of game balls received by the ball housing portion 589b of the payout vane 589 and paid out and the number of balls actually detected by the payout detection sensor 591 When determining whether or not to reset an inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not a game ball is repeatedly put out, time management of the inconsistency counter reset judgment time set as the judgment condition is performed. For example, when the ball sticking determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms, so the ball sticking determination time is subtracted by 2 ms every time this timer update processing is performed, and the ball sticking determination time is accurately measured by the subtraction result becoming a value of 0. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, it is determined whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various information stored in the various information storage areas (for example, prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY signal in which the logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area is set) Information used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout (output setting information, etc.).

By this process, for example, even if there is an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration can be restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the power failure or power failure, which are stored as payout backup information. Thus, even if the putting-out operation of the game balls by the putting-out device 580 cannot be continued due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the putting-out operation can be continued when the power is restored, so that the game balls can be put out to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication process, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit, and when game balls are being put out to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202, even if the exchange of various signals with the CR unit is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power failure and the game balls cannot be continued to be dispensed, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration are stored as payout backup information. In addition, by restoring the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. just before the momentary power failure or power failure, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be continued from the time of power restoration, and the game balls can be continuously paid out immediately before the power failure or power failure.

In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit is designed to be restored to the state immediately before the momentary power failure or stop when power is restored even if the power is interrupted or stopped, so that the various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit are not changed by the influence of the momentary power failure or stop. Therefore, the reliability of exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be enhanced.

Various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when the power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. If the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out the ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is output to the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. to the CR unit. Then, in, for example, a retry operation monitoring process performed as one process of the main operation setting process, based on the value of the mismatch counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM included in the payout backup information, it is determined whether or not the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH. When it is determined that the operation is in an abnormal state, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value of 1, and in the put-out ball gait operation determination setting process, as the setting of the output of the error state to the CR unit, for example, when the CR unit is not in communication, the logic state (LOW) of the PRDY signal that tells that the put-out operation for putting out the rented ball is impossible is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication process, the logic state of the PRDY signal is read out from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt after power recovery, and the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit. In this way, for example, if the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before an instantaneous power failure, the state is restored when the power is restored. Therefore, at an extremely early stage after the power is restored, the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is impossible can be output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, and the CR unit is notified to the effect that the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state. I can tell you. As a result, it is possible to prevent the CR unit from outputting BRDY, which is a useless ball rental request signal, at an extremely early stage after power is restored.

In the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on this CR connection signal, when the logic is HI, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to HI in order to notify that the payout operation for paying out the ball is possible. While outputting from the output terminal of a predetermined output port to the CR unit, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the Pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to LOW and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit in order to inform that the payout operation for paying out the balls is impossible. In addition, the logic state of the EXS signal that tells that one payout operation has started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and the CR connection signal that tells whether or not the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing (step S556). In this full tank and out of ball check processing, input information is read out from the above input information storage area, and based on this input information, it is determined from the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 whether or not the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls, and based on the detection signal from the ball exhaust detection sensor 574, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. For example, the determination as to whether or not the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls is made using a timer interrupt period of 2 ms. When the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned ON in the current full tank and ball empty check process and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned OFF in the previous (2 ms ago) full tank and ball empty check process, that is, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 transitions from OFF to ON, step S55. In the timer update process of 2, timing of the above-mentioned full tank determination time is started. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in the full tank and bulb out check process. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the lower tray 202 is determined to be full of game balls and full-tank information is stored in the above-described state information storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is not full of stored game balls, and full tank information is stored in the state information storage area.

Determination of whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also performed using the timer interrupt period of 2 ms. In the timer updating process of S552, the timing of the ball-out determination time described above is started. When the dead ball determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the dead ball determination time is reached, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the dead ball detection sensor 574 is ON in the full tank and dead ball check process. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is ON, the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and the out-of-ball information is stored in the state information storage area. The dead ball information is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (prize ball command and self-check command) are received. When these various commands are normally received, payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, connection abnormality information is stored in the above-described state information storage area to inform that there is an abnormality in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (abnormality has occurred in various command signals).

Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs main action setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize ball, ball rental, ball draw and ball gambling are performed, retry operation is judged, and the number of unpaid balls (the number of prize balls in stock) is monitored.

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-described state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633 is created, and stored as LED display information in the above-described output information storage area. For example, the above-mentioned out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, and based on this out-of-ball information, when the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not a predetermined number or more, the corresponding display data (in this embodiment, the display value 1 (number "1")) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command transmission process, various types of information are read out from the above-described state information storage area, various commands classified into state displays (frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) are created based on the various types of information and transmitted to the main control board 1310. For example, when out-of-ball information is read out from the state information storage area, a frame state 1 command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310 based on this out-of-ball information when the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number.

After step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

Following step S568, returning to step S539 again, the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input in step S540, determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 in step S542 if the power failure warning signal has not been input, and determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, 2 ms has elapsed. At step S544, the value 0 is set to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, the value B is set to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL at step S546, the port output process is performed at step S548, the port input process is performed at step S550, the timer update process is performed at step S552, the CR communication process is performed at step S554, the full tank and ball out check process is performed at step S556, and the command reception process is performed at step S558. , command analysis processing is performed in step S560, main operation setting processing is performed in step S562, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeatedly performed. The processing of steps S539 to S568 is called "payout control section main processing".

Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310, the processing contents of the payout control unit main processing differ. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU will fluctuate. Therefore, the payout control MPU, in the port output process of step S548, preferentially outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal that indicates that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received. Thereby, the payout control MPU secures the processing time so as to sufficiently perform other processing that fluctuates.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S540 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the payout control MPU sets interrupt prohibition (step S570). Due to this setting, the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt processing is not performed, preventing writing to the payout control built-in RAM and protecting the rewriting of the payout information described above.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). As a result, the payout of game balls is stopped.

Following step S574, the payout control MPU clears the watchdog timer (step S576). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

After step S576, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, as numerical values.

After step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU performs prohibition setting of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading become impossible, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not cleared because the watchdog timer clear register HWCL is not set to the values A, B and C in that order. Therefore, the payout control MPU is reset, and thereafter, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed again. It should be noted that the processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power failure processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure, and the payout control unit power-on processing is performed by the subsequent restoration of power.

In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S528, it is checked whether or not the payout control unit power-off processing has been normally completed. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information has been stored by fraud.

[22-2. Dispensing Control Unit Timer Interrupt Processing]
Next, the payout control section timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt period (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 173 to 175.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU, as shown in FIG. 176, disables the timer interrupt and switches (saves) the register (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the payout control unit main processing described above is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of general-purpose registers used in the payout control unit main processing.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms each time this payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and is set to a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed.

After step S592, the payout control MPU switches (restores) the register (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing.

Following step S594, the payout control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[13. Various control processing of the peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 177 to 181. FIG. FIG. 177 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 178 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, FIG. 179 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, FIG. 180 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. First, peripheral controller power-on processing will be described, followed by peripheral controller V-blank interrupt processing, peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral controller power failure notice signal interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, as the priority of interrupt processing, peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority, followed by peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing.

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510") has the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I/O interfaces, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip, as described above.

[13-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs initial setting processing (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the peripheral control IC itself is initialized, hot start/cold start determination process, wait timer setting process after reset, and various control information (peripheral data) transfer processes are performed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs processing to initialize the peripheral control IC itself, but the time required for the processing to initialize the peripheral control IC is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC can be initialized in an extremely short time. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is in a state in which the interrupt permission is set, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, various commands such as a command related to the control of the game effect and a command related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 output from the main control board 1310. Can be received.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current calendar information and current time information are set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires calendar information and time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when power is turned on. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after executing the current time information acquisition processing so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a peripheral control unit steady process, which will be described later. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in peripheral control unit V-blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, which is executed when a V-blank signal is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to indicate that screen data (information specifying the configuration of the screen) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. After setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), it returns to step S1006 and repeatedly determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. By repeating such determinations, a standby state is established until the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. After determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, that is, when it determines that the peripheral control unit steady processing is to be executed, it sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 1 (step S1008). The steady-processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs 1ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start processing, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing to be described later is started, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started is set to 1 to initialize the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In the effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the rotation (rotation direction) of the contact operation unit 302 and the operation of the press operation unit 303 are performed based on the detection signals from various detection sensors such as the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, the press detection sensor 373, and the elevation detection sensor 374 provided in the effect operation unit 300 (hereinafter referred to as "various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300"). (For example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the contact operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, operation history information of the press operation unit 303, etc.) is set. determine as appropriate. Specifically, if the sound volume is adjusted in the presentation operation unit information acquisition process, the schedule data for sound generation is rewritten according to the volume after adjustment, and if the luminance is adjusted, the schedule data for light emission mode generation is rewritten according to the luminance after adjustment. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and brightness is reflected in real time, and the performance proceeds with the adjusted volume and brightness.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of LEDs used as direct light and the luminance of LEDs used as indirect light are respectively set based on a lamp palette setting table composed of luminance designation values, normal palette values, and special palette values. During the progress of the effect, the lamp palette setting process is executed, and the player (or the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall) operates the effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302, press operation unit 303) When one luminance specified value ranging from the first specified brightness value to the 31st specified brightness value that is the maximum brightness is set, the above-described gradation information set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC can be updated so as to become the specified brightness value.

Here, the brightness designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value that constitute the lamp palette setting table will be briefly described. The brightness specified value is a value that can set one brightness specified value in a range of 32 levels from the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (lights off) to the 31st brightness specified value that is the maximum brightness, and a normal palette value and a special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance corresponding to the 0th (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value, respectively. A player (or an attendant such as a store clerk in a game hall) operates an operable effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to set one brightness specified value ranging from the first brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value which is the maximum brightness.

For example, when the player (or an attendant such as a store clerk in a game hall) rotates the contact operation unit 302 clockwise, and the current brightness is set to the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest level of brightness after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value, which is the minimum brightness (lights off), it is used as indirect light along a predetermined formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve) from the first brightness specified value toward the 31st brightness specified value, which is the maximum brightness. While the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed to be higher, when the contact operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise and the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed to be lowered from the 31st brightness specified value, which is the maximum brightness, toward the first brightness specified value along a predetermined formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve). do. When the player (or an attendant such as a game hall clerk) rotates the contact operation unit 302 to select a desired luminance and presses the push operation unit 303, the selected desired luminance is confirmed. In this embodiment, a case is prepared in advance where the player (or an attendant such as a store clerk of the game hall) can set the brightness while the effect is in progress. In addition, when the player (or a staff member such as a staff member of the game hall) operates the touch operation unit 302 at a predetermined position of the display area of the performance display device 1600 during the progress of the performance, a bar-shaped indicator indicating the position from the first brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, the 14th luminance specified value is set as an initial value (default).

Normally, the pallet value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and the various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side, which are directly irradiated as light. For the normal palette value, one level is selected from among 17 levels in 5% increments from the minimum palette value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum palette value (100%), which is the maximum value. Among the 32-level range from the 0th (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value, the palette value corresponding to one brightness specification is set according to a predetermined formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve). .

The minimum palette value (20%) is 20% of the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation in the 32-level range from the 0th (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, which is the luminance designation value described above. It is the value for the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to the brightness specification.

In this embodiment, the maximum palette value (100%) is pre-selected and set as the above-described gradation information for the various decorative substrates provided on the game board side that are directly irradiated as light and the various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side.

The special palette value is set as the gradation information described above for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light. Unlike the normal palette value, the special palette value has only one level, and the palette value corresponding to one luminance designation in the 32-level range from the 0 (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, which is the luminance designation value described above, is set as the above-mentioned gradation information along a predetermined formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve-like tone curve).

As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate is darker than the direct light. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special palette value instead of using the normal palette value set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. The first brightness specified value, which is the next highest level of brightness after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (turned off), is the lowest brightness that allows the light guide plate to emit light with indirect light. They are set to approximately equal values, and a palette value corresponding to one luminance designation value in the range from the first luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value is set according to a predetermined formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

In this way, in the lamp palette setting process, when setting the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the specified brightness value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value, the brightness of the LED used as direct light is set according to the normal palette value corresponding to the brightness specified value by the operation of the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 by the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk), while it is used as indirect light. A game player (or an attendant such as a store clerk in a game hall) sets the brightness of the LEDs to be set according to the specified brightness value and the corresponding special palette value by operating the touch operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 . As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as direct light is dazzling and sets the brightness by operating the touch operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 to set the brightness, the brightness of the LED used as direct light is set to the lowest brightness (i.e., the first brightness specified value that is the next highest level of brightness after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (turned off)). 0 (zero) luminance designated value, which is the next highest luminance level), the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value substantially equal to the 18th luminance designated value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). Therefore, the lowest luminance that allows the light guide plate to emit light with indirect light is set.

In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode can set the light emission mode according to the flow of the production without individually setting the brightness of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side for the LEDs used as direct light. By setting the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for the other decorative substrates and setting the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) for the other decorative substrates, the balance of the overall light emission mode can be changed extremely easily. In other words, even if the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall) operates the operable effect operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302, press operation unit 303) to set a single brightness specified value ranging from the first specified brightness value to the 31st specified brightness value, which is the maximum brightness, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to the specified brightness value is set for a specific decoration board, whereas the maximum palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to the specified brightness value is set for the other decoration boards. 100%) are set for each, the brightness can be adjusted very easily without destroying the mutually set relationship between the light emission modes (bright or dark).

Furthermore, although it is difficult to adjust the brightness of indirect light from the light guide plate compared to direct light, the brightness of LEDs used as indirect light can be set using a special palette value that differs from the normal palette value (that is, is independent of the normal palette value). As a result, the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is managed by the special palette value, and the luminance of the LED used as direct light is managed by the normal palette value, so that the luminance of the LED used as indirect light and the luminance of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads the image data from the SDRAM based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC and outputs the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC to the liquid crystal output board 1530 in the display data creation process to be described later. As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600 . In the display data output process, when drawing is performed in excess of the drawing capability of the VDP of the peripheral control IC, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is cancelled. As a result, it is possible to prevent a delay in the processing time. However, although so-called dropped frames may occur, it is possible to give priority to the production sound such as music and sound effects according to various productions from various speakers such as the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 (hereinafter referred to as "various speakers") by the sound data output process described later.

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads sound data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs the data to various speakers from the set output channels in the sound data creation process described later. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects are played from various speakers in accordance with various presentations.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, the pointer is updated to indicate which screen data from the first screen data among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

Further, in the scheduler updating process, a pointer is updated in order to indicate which number of light emission data from the top light emission data is to be output among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for light emission mode generation.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the sound data of dramatic sounds such as music and sound effects arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation, and the sound command data indicating the sound data of notification sounds and announcement sounds, a pointer is updated to indicate what order of the sound command data from the first sound command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC.

In the scheduler update process, a pointer is updated to indicate which drive data from the head of the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, which are arranged in time series and constitute the electric drive source schedule data, are updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is repeatedly executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. In the motor and solenoid drive processing, which is repeatedly executed each time the 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time its own processing is executed. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Therefore, even if the pointer in the motor and solenoid drive process for some reason indicates other drive data than the drive data that should have been originally indicated, the drive data that should have been originally indicated is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing to be described later, and the received various commands are analyzed. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In this received command analysis processing, the various commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are analyzed. Based on the analyzed various commands, the CPU of the peripheral control IC reads (extracts) schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of the LED used as direct light and the luminance of the LED used as indirect light are set based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the above-described luminance designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads out (extracts) the schedule data for generating the lighting mode from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, executes the lamp pallet setting process, and the player (or staff such as a store clerk at the game hall) operates the effect operation section 301 (contact operation section 302, pressing operation section 303) to set one luminance ranging from the first luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value, which is the maximum luminance. When a specified value is set, the grayscale information described above can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so that the brightness specified value is set.

In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives commands from the main control board 1310 in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, a starting winning prize command for instructing the start of the starting winning prize effect, a normal symbol storage command for identifying the number of pending normal symbols (0 to 4), a variation pattern command for instructing the start of variable performance such as variable display of decorative symbols in the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, and a symbol output when the number of starting pending changes. It analyzes whether it is a storage command, a big winning hole 1 count display command output each time a game ball is accepted in the first big winning hole 206 or the second big winning hole 2007, and recognizes which game state it is at present.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the received command analysis process, the various commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are analyzed. Various commands include various commands classified as special figure 1 tuning effect related, various commands classified as special figure 2 tuning effect related, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power on, various commands classified as normal figure synchronized effect related, various commands classified as ordinary electric role effect related, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display, various commands classified as test related, and various commands classified as others. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 executes lottery processing related to advance notice and the like based on the received command, and based on the result of the lottery, reads (extracts) schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, electric drive source schedule data, and the like from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. As a result, an effect corresponding to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

The peripheral control ROM stores in advance the peripheral control unit 1511, various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511 and the like, various data, various control data, and various schedule data. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating various LED light emission modes, sound generation schedule data for generating effects sounds such as music and sound effects, and electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 . The schedule data for generating the lighting mode is configured by arranging the lighting mode data defining the lighting modes of various LEDs in chronological order. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data defines an output channel number for indicating which of the plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC is to be used, and a track number for indicating in which track among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC the sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines operations of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 include various commands classified as notification displays, the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notification, are read out (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In addition, in the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormalities are reported in descending order of pre-registered priority, and the abnormalities are automatically changed to other remaining abnormalities after the abnormality is resolved. Thus, a plurality of abnormalities can be monitored at the same time without losing the information that another abnormality has occurred after the occurrence of one abnormality and before the abnormality is resolved.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. By this RCT acquisition information updating process, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, are updated, and based on this updated time information, the date, which is the calendar information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, is updated.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in time series that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation, the screen data indicated by the pointer is read out (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads the image data from the SDRAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn (displayed) on the performance display device 1600 in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data generation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation, the sound command data indicated by the pointer is read out (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When the sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM, incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and sets the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is specified based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the sound volume corresponds to the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch, and in the sound data output process of step S1018, the sound data is output from the output channel set in the sound data creation process to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects are played from various speakers in accordance with various presentations.

Specifically, the resistance value is varied by rotating the volume control switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into a value in 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the values of 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and the music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the body frame speaker for low tone of the body frame 4. - 特許庁In this way, music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the body frame speaker for bass sound of the body frame 4 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the volume control switch.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC include sound data for effect sounds such as music and sound effects and a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume, as well as sound data for a notification sound for notifying the hall clerk of the occurrence of a problem with the pachinko machine 1 and a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume.

Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device). Except until 0.5 seconds have passed after the start and until 0.5 seconds have passed after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit and after the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed), the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 300 can be adjusted by operating.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device). Except until 0.5 seconds after the start of pattern variation display and until 0.5 seconds after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit and after the decoration pattern is confirmed and displayed), by operating the contact operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch in the sound data creation process is converted into 7 levels of substrate volume 0 to 6, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the contact operation part 302 or the pressing operation part 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the value of the substrate volume is increased or decreased to set the substrate volume, thereby adjusting the sub-volume value of the effect sound.

In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the plurality of output channels of the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC synthesize the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used out of the plurality of tracks of the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is actually played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4. The volume is amplified to the master volume value, and the amplified production sound is serialized and output as audio data.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the volume is amplified to the master volume value, so that the volume flowing from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker for low bass of the main body frame 4 is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC and the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume control switch set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is actually amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the top central speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4, and amplified. The production sound is serialized and output as audio data, and for the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and the maximum volume set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized with the maximum volume independent of the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the top central speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker for bass of the main body frame 4. The amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data.

Here, a brief description will be given of the control of emitting the notification sound in order to notify the pachinko hall clerk of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the illegal act to the pachinko machine 1 when the production sound is being played from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body frame speaker for bass sound of the main body frame 4. First, the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is embedded is forcibly set to mute, the sound data of the track in which the production sound is embedded, the sub-volume value set to mute, and the track in which the notification sound is embedded. The sound data and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized, the volume of the synthesized performance sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually amplified to a master volume value corresponding to the volume flowing from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the body frame speaker for bass of the body frame 4, and the amplified performance sound and the notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. In other words, only the notification sound with the maximum volume is actually emitted from the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the body frame speaker for bass sound of the body frame 4. At this time, since the production sound is muted, the production sound does not flow from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker for bass sound of the main body frame 4, but the production sound progresses according to the above-mentioned schedule data for sound generation.

In this embodiment, the notification sound flows from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3 and the bass speaker of the main body frame 4 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). After this predetermined period has elapsed, the volume of the production sound that has been forcibly set to mute and progressing according to the schedule data for generating sound is set again as the sub-volume value by the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch (at this time, the contact operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit of the production operation unit 300). When the sound volume of the performance sound is adjusted by operating the 303, the sub-volume value of the adjusted performance sound is set), and the sound flows from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the body frame speaker for bass sound of the body frame 4. - 特許庁

In this way, when the effect sound is being played from the top center speaker, the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body frame speaker for bass sound of the main body frame 4, when the notification sound is played to notify the pachinko machine 1 of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the clerk of the pachinko machine 1, the volume of the effect sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the main body frame speaker for the low sound of the main body frame 4, but this muted effect sound is according to the sound generation schedule. Since the notification sound progresses according to the data, when the notification sound stops flowing from the top central speaker on the side of the door frame 3, the top side speaker, and the bass speaker of the body frame 4 after the lapse of a predetermined period, the effect sound does not start to flow again from the point where the notification sound started to flow, but starts to flow again from the point where it progressed according to the schedule data for sound generation until the predetermined period has passed since the notification sound started to flow.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound flow without being dependent on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC can control the sound source of the peripheral control IC to adjust the volume from mute to maximum volume by a program. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if an attendant such as a store clerk in a game hall rotates a volume control switch to set the volume to a low volume, the notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played when there is a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is committing fraud, although the performance sounds such as music and sound effects played from various speakers are reduced. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for staff members such as store clerks in the game hall to notice the occurrence of a problem or the player's dishonesty.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a regular processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied to a regular process backup area provided in the SDRAM for backup.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

Following the step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is set in the regular processing SP -FLG (Step S1038), returns to step S1004, sets a value 0 in the V -blank signal detection flag VB -FLG. However, in the peripheral control unit V -blank signal interrupt processing described later, the step S1006 is repeatedly determined until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB -FLG. That is, in step S1006, the process waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and if it is determined in step S1006 that the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process of steps S1008 to S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004. In this way, when it is determined that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1006, steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1008 to step S1038 is called "peripheral control unit regular processing".

In this peripheral control unit steady processing, first, in step S1008, the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 1 assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. In step S1010, 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing is performed, and in step S1014, . . The peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1006. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later, which is executed when the V blank signal indicating that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is ready to accept screen data from the VDP of the peripheral control IC is input to the CPU of the peripheral control IC. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). In other words, the peripheral controller steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[13-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing that is executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to indicate that it is ready to receive screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the steady process flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 178 (step S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1045 that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1), ie, that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, the CPU ends this routine. On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1045 that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, when it determines that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, it sets the value 1 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050), and ends this routine. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is not executed.

In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed. When the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. 177, the peripheral control unit steady processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is to be executed in the determination of step S1006 in the processing when the peripheral control unit power is turned on in FIG. This routine is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to the effect that it is being executed, and the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to 0 at step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. It is determined whether or not FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral controller steady-state processing has been completed. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the peripheral controller steady-state processing cannot be completed until the next V-blank signal is input after the V-blank signal is input.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing, if the processing cannot be completed within a time of about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the determination in step S1006 in the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit in FIG. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral controller steady-state processing that has failed is approximately 66.6 ms. Normally, in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 177, the 1 ms timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activating the 1 ms interrupt timer. Although the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady processing, if there is the above-described peripheral control unit steady processing that failed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times instead of 64 times. are In other words, even when the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing which is the timer interrupt control are not broken. Therefore, even if the peripheral controller steady-state processing fails, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the presentation.

[13-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer at step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 177 will be described. When this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33, as shown in FIG. 179 (step S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is a counter that counts the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer start processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times before the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second, .

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 times, that is, determines that the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing has started, the CPU ends this routine. If the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to occur before the next V blank signal occurs, in the present embodiment, as the priority of interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is set higher than the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. In other words, in this embodiment, the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, it adds 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increments it, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer start processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid driving process, the electric driving sources such as motors and solenoids are driven according to the driving data indicated by the pointer among the driving data of the electric driving sources such as motors and solenoids which are arranged in time series making up the electric driving source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. As a result, electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, electrical drive sources provided in the door frame 3 and electrical drive sources provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5) are driven according to the electrical drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs movable body information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input, thereby creating history information (for example, original position history information, movable position history information, etc.) of detection signals from various sensors and setting it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC grasps the movable positions by setting the original positions (standby positions) of the various movable bodies provided in the various performance units provided on the game board 5 and by acquiring the movable positions based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs effect operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input or not, thereby creating history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the contact operation unit 302, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) and setting it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Whether or not the contact operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 has been operated can be obtained from history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by operating the effect operation unit 301, it is possible to adjust the volume of the effect sound output from the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker of the main body frame 4, and to adjust the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a 1ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied to a 1ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the SDRAM for backup. In the present embodiment, the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set in different regions, and the backup region for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAM and the backup region for regular processing provided in the SDRAM are set in different regions.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes relating to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 are executed within a period of 1ms as the progress of the effects. On the other hand, in the peripheral controller steady-state processing in the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. 177, various processes relating to the presentation of steps S1014 to S1032 are executed as the presentation progresses within a period of about 33.3 ms. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated. After forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started by generating the first 1 ms timer interrupt. That is, consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is prevented from collapsing. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the production.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary slightly even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly changes, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt, it is possible to absorb the time lag due to the slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[13-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 start to be sent as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses this as a trigger to capture 1-byte (8-bit) information from the main peripheral serial data at the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC into the reception buffer, and when this capture is completed, an interrupt occurs with this as a trigger to perform peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. One packet of the main-circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the sum value calculated by considering the status and the mode as numerical values is assigned as the 3rd byte.

When the peripheral controller command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral controller IC determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 180 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1200 that the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, that it is within the period during which it is possible to receive 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC takes in the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC (step S1202), and adds 1 to the reception counter SRXC (increments, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times data has been taken out from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 1; when the mode, which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2; An initial value of 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, followed by the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, are sequentially taken out from the reception buffer.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1206 that the value of the reception counter SRXC is not 3, that is, if it determines that the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, have not been sequentially extracted from the reception buffer, it sets a 1-byte reception period timer (step S1208), and ends this routine. A 1-byte reception period timer is set in step S1208, thereby setting a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1206 that the receive counter SRXC is 3, that is, if it determines that the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, followed by the mode, which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, are sequentially read from the receive buffer, it sets the initial value of 0 to the receive counter SRXC (step S1210), and calculates the sum value (step S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values, and the total (sum value) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310, so it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island facility of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become electrified, electrostatic discharge occurs to generate noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is under the influence of the noise and under a rough environment.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the side of the peripheral control board 1510, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are regarded as numerical values, and the total (sum value) is calculated. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC can determine whether or not the main peripheral serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 has been affected by noise and has changed to non-normal main peripheral serial data.

In the judgment of Step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is the third -byte of the main serial data of the main serial data that has already been taken out of the receiving buffer in the step S1202, and the thumb value calculated in step S1212, and assigns to the 1st part of the main serial data received. The status and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data are memorized in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216), and this routine ends.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1200 that the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, when it determines that the period for receiving 1-byte (8-bit) information out of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 has exceeded, or in the determination of step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212. If it is determined that the sum value does not match, the routine ends.

[13-5. Peripheral control unit blackout warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral controller power outage warning signal interrupt process executed when the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 as a trigger. 181, the CPU of the peripheral control IC starts a 2-microsecond timer (step S1300) and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S1302). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it ends this routine.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that the power failure warning signal has been input, it determines whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. In the determination in step S1304, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC has not passed 2 microseconds, it returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input.If it determines that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it terminates this routine as it is. In other words, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1304 that the power failure warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlight of the performance display device 1600 is extinguished, the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5 is extinguished, and various LEDs are extinguished, etc., thereby suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, thereby ensuring stable operation for a period of 20 milliseconds during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is interrupted.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control ICs wait for at least a period of 17 milliseconds so that the commands being transmitted can be received. When the command is received, the above-described peripheral control section command reception interrupt processing is started and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command backup processing (step S1310). In this command backup process, commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and backed up.

After step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S1312). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has been input, it performs WDT clear processing (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. In other words, it continues infinitely to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this manner, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it becomes unable to output a clear signal to the external WDT and resets the CPU of the peripheral control IC. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 177 is started again.

In this manner, when the input of the power failure warning signal continues in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset immediately before the power failure state by executing the WDT clearing process in step S1314. On the other hand, if the determination in step S1312 indicates that the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop, the WDT clearing process is not executed, so the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. As a result, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing of this routine is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and even if the determination in step S1302 is passed due to the occurrence of the noise exceeding the period of 2 microseconds, if the power failure warning signal input is not continued in an infinite loop and canceled in step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. It is now possible to respond.

[Game content]
Next, game contents by the game board 5 of the third embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 182 is a front view of the game board of the third embodiment.

In the game board 5 of the third embodiment, one of the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the left area of the center role 2500 of the first embodiment is the second starting opening 2005, and the second starting opening 2005 provided in the right area of the center role 2500 of the first embodiment is the general winning opening 2001. Other parts have the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment, and detailed descriptions of the parts having the same configuration are omitted.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a player rotates a handle 195 of a handle unit 180 arranged at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 pass between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and are hit into the upper part of the game area 5a, and the game with the game balls B is started. The game ball B hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The striking strength of the game balls B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 195, and the more the handle 195 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the more strongly the game balls B can be hit.

In addition, in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, a variable winning opening 2003, a first starting opening 2004, a second starting opening 2005, and a first big winning opening 2006 are provided as ball openings into which the game ball B can enter, and a second big winning opening 2007 is provided in the area on the right side of the center role 2500 as a ball opening into which the game ball B can enter. Of these, the first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005 are always open at the top and are always capable of receiving the game ball B. On the other hand, the variable winning port 2003, the first big winning port 2006 and the second big winning port 2007 are closed in a normal state and are opened when a predetermined condition is established, so that the game ball B can be received.

In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle pegs N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and when the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle peg N, the falling speed of the game ball B is suppressed and various movements are imparted to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500. As shown in FIG.

When the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 in a front view, it contacts with a plurality of obstacle nails N and flows through either the left first guide passage 2531 or the left second guide passage 2532 of the left guide passage group 2530 of the center role 2500. - 特許庁In the vicinity of the entrance in the left second guide passage 2532, a first big prize winning port 2006 which is closed unreceivably by the first big prize winning port door 2523 in a normal state is provided, and the game ball B entering the left second guiding passage 2532 rolls on the first big prize winning port door 2523 and flows down.

A game ball B that has circulated through the left guide path group 2530 is released above the gate 2002, hits a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the left guide path group 2530 and the gate 2002 on the left and right sides of the variable winning opening 2003 which is normally closed by the variable winning opening door 2521, and passes through the gate 2002 with a certain probability.

When the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 and is detected by the gate sensor 2601, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and when the lottery result of the lottery normal pattern is "normal winning", the variable winning opening 2003 closed by the variable winning opening door 2521 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the receiving of the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003 becomes possible. In this example, the probability that the lottery result of the normal pattern in the normal lottery in the low-probability non-time-saving state and the high-probability non-time-saving state is ``normal hit'' is set to 0/100, and the probability that the lottery result of the normal pattern is ``normal hit'' in the normal lottery in other game states (high-probability time-saving state, low-probability time-saving state A, low-probability time-saving state B, low-probability time-saving state C) is set to 100/100. That is, in the low-probability non-time-saving state and high-probability non-time-saving state, except for some peculiar situations (high-probability time-saving state, low-probability time-saving state A, low-probability time-saving state B, low-probability time-saving state C), the possibility that the game ball B is accepted in the variable winning mouth 2003 is set to be extremely low, and the high probability time-saving state, low probability time-saving state A, low probability time-saving state B , In the low probability time saving state C, the possibility of receiving the game ball B in the variable winning opening 2003 is set to be higher than the low probability non time saving state and the high probability non time saving state.

In the present embodiment, since the variable prize winning port 2003 is provided at a portion near the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, the variable winning port 2003 is more likely to accept the left second guide passage 2532 than the left first guide passage 2531. - 特許庁Then, when the game ball B is received in the variable winning hole 2003, a predetermined number (for example, 1 to 5) of the game ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

In this embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by passing the game ball B through the gate 2002, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the indication of the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also called ordinary fluctuation time). The suggestion of the lottery result of this normal symbol is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5 . The variable winning opening 2003 is opened after the normal variable time has elapsed.

If the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 until the game ball B passes through the gate 2002 until the lottery result of the normal pattern is suggested, the suggestion of the lottery result of the normal pattern cannot be started. In addition, the upper limit of the number of reserved lottery results of normal symbols is up to four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate 2002, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating reservations.

At the site of this gate 2002 , the game ball B flows down either the gate 2002 , the left outside of the gate 2002 , or the right outside of the gate 2002 . Then, the game ball B flowing downward from the gate 2002 enters the warp entrance 2511 opened in the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 . In this embodiment, due to the plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the area between the gate 2002 and the windmill W, the game ball B that has passed the right outside of the gate 2002 enters the warp entrance 2511 with a high probability.

The game ball B entering the warp entrance 2511 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512 . The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth to the left and right, and is released forward from the central portion in the left and right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the central release part 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, the center release part 2513a is positioned directly above the first start port 2004, so it is accepted by the first start port 2004 with a high probability.

When the game ball B hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500 is received in the first starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 to the upper tray 201, and the main control board 1310 outputs the first special symbol (for example, "off", "small win", "big win", "immediate short win", etc.). ) will be drawn. If the lottery result of the lottered first special symbol is other than "missing", an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol that has been drawn is indicated to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called special fluctuation time).

By the way, if the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it is moved to the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and there is a possibility that it will be accepted by the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200, the second starting opening 2005, or the first starting opening 2004 of the starting opening unit 2100. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general prize winning opening 2001 , a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 .

Regarding the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005, the upper part is always open, and the reception of the game ball B is always possible. However, the game ball B released into the game area 5a from the stage 2513 of the center role 2500 is accepted in the first start hole 2004 with a high probability, but the game ball B released into the game area 5a from the stage 2513 of the center role 2500 is unlikely to be accepted in the second start hole 2005. Therefore, the game ball B hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500 is received by the first starting hole 2004 with a higher probability than the second starting hole 2005.例文帳に追加

When the game ball B hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500 is accepted in the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning port 2003, a predetermined number (for example, one) of the game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 to the upper tray 201, and the main control board 1310 displays the second special symbols (eg, "off", "small hit", "big hit"). , “immediate short hit”, etc.) will be held. If the lottery result of the lottered second special symbol is other than "loss", an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the lottery second special symbol is suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called special fluctuation time).

In this embodiment, in the order of acceptance to the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning port 2003, the lottery of the first special symbol by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 and the second special symbol lottery by accepting the game ball B to the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning port 2003 are performed. In other words, the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2004 and the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol by accepting the game ball B to the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning port 2003 are performed in the order of acceptance to the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning port 2003.

By accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2004, the second start port 2005 or the variable winning port 2003, from the start of the special lottery until the lottery result of the drawn special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern) is suggested (special fluctuation time) When the game ball B is accepted in the first start port 2004, since the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special pattern cannot be started, the previously drawn special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) The start of the suggestion of the lottery result of the first special symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the pattern) is completed. The number of reserved lottery results of the first special pattern to be reserved is set to four as the upper limit for the first start port 2004, and the lottery result of the first special pattern is discarded without being reserved even if the game ball B is accepted in the first start port 2004 for more than 4.例文帳に追加As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

Similarly, when the game ball B is accepted in the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning port 2003 during the time (special fluctuation time) until the lottery result of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) drawn from the start of the special lottery due to the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting port 2004, the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning port 2003 is suggested, the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the lottery result of the second special symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is completed. The number of retained lottery results of the second special symbols to be retained is set to four as the upper limit for the second starting port 2005 and the variable winning port 2003, and for more than that, even if the game ball B is accepted in the second starting port 2005 or the variable winning port 2003, the lottery results of the second special symbols are discarded without being retained. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating reservations.

In a normal state, even if the game ball B is hit to the right side of the center role 2500, there is no possibility that it will be received in the first starting hole 2004, the second starting hole 2005 or the variable prize winning hole 2003, so that the player can positively perform the hitting operation so that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the center role 2500.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall part 2501 of the center role 2500, it passes through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 of the right guide passage group 2540 of the center role 2500, and is released into the space forming part 2550 where the specific obstacle nail group 2700 is planted.

A right guide passage group 2540 of the center accessory 2500 is composed of a right first guide passage 2541 whose entrance is open in the vicinity of the impingement part 1006 and a right second guide passage 2542 whose entrance is opened with an interval to the left from the entrance of the right first guide passage 2541. - 特許庁As a result, when the game ball B is hit with the strength to contact the impingement part 1006 (so-called right hit), it enters the right first guide path 2541, and when the game ball B is hit with strength not to contact the impingement part 1006 (somewhat weaker than the right hit), it enters the right second guide path 2542 with a high probability. In other words, the game ball B hit to the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 flows through either the right first guide passage 2541 or the right second guide passage 2542 according to the hitting strength.

In this embodiment, the game ball B that has flowed through the right first guide passage 2541 is released to the first guide region 2711 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700, and the game ball B that has flowed through the right second guide passage 2542 is released to the second guide region 2712 of the specific obstacle nail group 2700.

The game ball B released to the specific obstacle nail group 2700 flows down while meandering in the horizontal direction along the guidance area 2710 . As a result, in the specific obstacle nail group 2700, the falling speed of the game ball B is suppressed compared to the normal area.

In the first guide area 2711 and the second guide area 2712, the game ball B may deviate from the guide area 2710, and if it deviates to the right outside from the second guide area 2712, it will be accepted in the first sub-out port 2021 provided below with a high probability. When the game ball B is received in the first sub-out port 2021, it is discharged out of the game area 5a without a chance of being received in the second big winning port 2007 or the second starting port 2005 provided downstream.

In this embodiment, the first sub-out port 2021 has a higher probability of receiving the fluid through the right second guide passage 2542 than through the right first guide passage 2541 . As a result, it is possible for the player to perform the hitting operation of the game ball B so that the game ball B circulates through the right first guide passage 2541 when "right hitting". In other words, when the game ball B is struck to the right, it can be urged to rotate the handle 195 to a large extent so that the game ball B is struck with such strength that the game ball B abuts against the impingement part 1006, and the original game of the Pachinko machine 1 can be easily enjoyed by the comparatively easy hitting operation.

A game ball B that has flowed through the specific obstacle nail group 2700 (space forming portion 2550) and has not been received by the first sub-out port 2021 passes between the guide wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567 and enters the second attacker portion 2560. In a normal state, the second large winning opening 2007 provided in the second attacker part 2560 is closed by the second large winning opening door 2562 so that the game ball B cannot be received. After rolling down, it is discharged downward from the second attacker portion 2560 through the right discharge passage 2565 .

A general starting port 2001 is provided below the right discharge passage 2565, a second sub-out port 2022 is provided on the right side of the general starting port 2001, and an inclined wall portion 2418 of the lower right unit 2400 is provided on the left side of the general starting port 2001. A plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted between the exit of the right discharge passage 2565 and the general starting opening 2001, the second sub-out opening 2022, and the inclined wall portion 2418. Therefore, the game ball B released downward from the right release passage 2565 is accepted by the general starting port 2001 with a certain degree of probability. In addition, the game ball B released downward from the right release passage 2565 is received in the second sub-out port 2022 with a probability lower than that of the general start port 2001 . The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2022 is discharged out of the game area 5a.

Then, the game ball B released downward from the right release passage 2565 and not received in the general starting port 2001 or the second sub-out port 2022 flows down on the inclined wall portion 2418, rolls obliquely downward to the left along the inclination of the inclined wall portion 2418, is released leftward at a portion below the first starting port 2004, and is received in the out port 1008.

That is, in a normal state, if the game ball B is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 ("right hit"), there is no opportunity to receive it into the first starting hole 2004, the second starting hole 2005 or the variable winning hole 2003. As a result, in a normal state, the player can be made to positively perform the hitting operation so that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the center role 2500, and a premium feeling can be imparted to the right side of the center role 2500 ("right hitting").

As described above, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start opening 2004 or the second start opening 2005, the first big prize opening 2006 and the second big prize opening 2007 are opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern, and the game ball B can be received.

When the first big winning hole 2006 can be accepted, the first big winning hole 2006 is provided in the left second guide passage 2532 on the left side of the center accessory 2500, so that the player can be made to perform the hitting operation so that the game ball B circulates through the left second guide passage 2532.例文帳に追加When the game ball B entering the left second guide passage 2532 is received by the first big winning opening 2006 when the first big winning opening 2006 is open to receive the game ball B, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of the game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

On the other hand, when the second big winning hole 2007 can be accepted, the second big winning hole 2007 is provided below the right side of the center role 2500, so that the player can perform the hitting operation so that the game ball B circulates on the right side of the center role 2500.例文帳に追加Then, when the second large winning opening 2007 is in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B, when the game ball B that has entered the attacker path 2564 of the second attacker section 2560 from between the guiding wall portion 2552 and the attacker right wall portion 2567 is received by the second large winning opening 2007, a predetermined number (for example, 10 pieces, or 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 .

In this way, when the game balls B can be received by the first big winning hole 2006 and the second big winning hole 2007, a lot of the game balls B can be put out by allowing the first big winning hole 2006 and the second big winning hole 2007 to accept the game balls B, so that the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

By the way, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn or the lottery result of the second special symbol is "big win", the second big winning opening 2007, as a big winning game, after a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds to 40 seconds) has passed after being in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B, or the acceptance of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B to the second big winning opening 2007 Satisfies either condition. Then, the opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is called one round) in which the game ball B is in the closed state is repeated for a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, 5 rounds are repeated for a "5R jackpot", and 10 rounds are repeated for a "10R jackpot" to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player. At this time, when the second big winning hole 2007 opens and the game ball B can be received, even if the game ball B is aimed at the second big winning hole 2007, the specific obstacle nail group 2700 capable of delaying the flowing speed of the game ball B is provided upstream of the second big winning hole 2007, so that the timing of hitting the game ball B is difficult. As a result, the difficulty level is given to the operation of hitting the game ball B, so that the game can be made worthwhile, the player can be entertained, and the loss of interest can be suppressed. Further, in the above case, it is possible to make it difficult for the second big winning hole 2007 to receive the game ball B, so it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In the ``jackpot'', there is a ``hit'' in which the probability of drawing a first special pattern or a second special pattern such as a ``jackpot'' is increased after the end of the jackpot game (``variable odds''), or a change is made to make it easier to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003 (``short-time hit''). For example, when the normal lottery is carried out, the probability that the lottery result of the normal pattern becomes a ``normal hit'' is increased, and when the lottery result of the normal pattern is a ``normal hit'', the time and the number of times the variable prize winning port 2003 closed by the variable prize winning port door 2521 is opened are increased to facilitate the reception of the game ball B into the variable winning port 2003.例文帳に追加

In addition, when the lottery result of the first special pattern or the lottery result of the second special pattern is "small win", the first big prize winning port 2006 is opened and closed in a short time so that the game ball B can be accepted as a small win game (for example, a small win rush).

When the lottery result of the first special pattern or the lottery result of the second special pattern is "immediate short winning", the big winning game and the small winning game are not executed, and the first big winning hole 2006 or the second big winning hole 2007 is not opened to accept the game ball B, but after that, the time saving state is maintained as an advantageous game state for a predetermined specific number of fluctuations.

In this embodiment, below the second big winning hole 2007, there is a pseudo game area 2010 in which only the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2007 can circulate. The game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2007 enters the pseudo game area 2010 after being detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2561 . The game ball B entering the pseudo game area 2010 flows down while contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in the pseudo game area 2010, and the game ball B is received in the pseudo big prize opening 2402 when the game ball B can be accepted by the pseudo big prize opening 2402.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the pseudo big winning opening 2402 cannot receive the game ball B, it passes in front of the pseudo big winning opening 2402 and is discharged from the pseudo out opening 2404 without being returned to the game area 5a.

This pseudo big winning hole 2402 can accept the game ball B in a predetermined opening/closing pattern when the second big winning hole 2007 can accept the game ball B in a predetermined opening/closing pattern due to the above-mentioned "jackpot" or the like. Since this pseudo big winning hole 2402 is provided so as to be larger and conspicuous than the second big winning hole 2007, many game balls B received in the second big winning hole 2007 are received in the pseudo big winning hole 2402, so that the player can be entertained during the ``jackpot'' game without being bored, and the decline of the player's interest can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the special symbol lottery results (the first special symbol lottery result and the second special symbol lottery result). The function display unit 1400 suggests the lottery result of the special pattern by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing a plurality of LEDs and flickering them for a predetermined time, and then suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the result of the lottery for the special symbol is suggested as the effect image. A performance image suggesting a lottery result of a special pattern in a performance display device 1600 is displayed by arranging and displaying three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns in the horizontal direction, changing each pattern row, sequentially stop-displaying the pattern rows variably displayed, and stop-displaying each pattern row so that the patterns of the three pattern rows to be stop-displayed are combined corresponding to the lottery result of the special pattern. When the lottery result of the special pattern is other than "loss", after the three pattern rows are stopped and the respective patterns are stopped and displayed, a finalized image suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and an advantageous game state (for example, a "small win" game, a "big hit" game, a "time-saving" game, etc.) is generated according to the lottery result of the drawn special pattern.

The time indicating the lottery result of the special pattern in the function display unit 1400 (blinking time of the LED (special variation time)) and the time indicating the lottery result of the special pattern in the performance display device 1600 (the time until the pattern row fluctuates and the final image is displayed) are different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying a performance image for suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern by the performance display device 1600, it is possible to perform a player participation type performance for operating the contact operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the performance operation unit 301 in the performance operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the lottery result of the special pattern drawn. In the player-participation type performance, the pressing operation section 303 can be raised by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 to make it stand out, and the player-participation type performance can be enjoyed by operating the performance operation section 301 .

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board provided in the door frame 3, each decoration board provided in the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the lower right unit 2400, the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, the back top front effect unit 3300, the back bottom front effect unit 3400, the back top post effect unit 3500, the back bottom back effect unit 3600, etc. are used as appropriate to perform light emission effect, display effect, etc. The player can be entertained with various effects, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

Further, the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake in the operation to be operated or does not perform the operation in the player participation type presentation for operating the contact operation part 302 or the pressing operation part 303.例文帳に追加

[Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (especially the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. FIG. 183 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessary product control process (step S114).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. 183, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the first special random number of the first special symbol from the random number counter on the condition that the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the first starting port 2004) (step S231), and stores it in the first random number counter of the RAM. A first start opening passing process such as storing in a special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S232). Also, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting opening sensor 2401 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting opening 2005) (step S233), the second starting opening passing processing such as acquiring the second special random number of the second special symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM is executed (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether or not a big win execution flag indicating that the big win game is being controlled is set (step S235), and if the big win execution flag is set, a big win control process (step S240) for controlling the big win game is executed. In the big win control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) becomes a mode suggesting "big win A", the process of controlling the opening and closing of the second big winning opening 2007 according to the 10R big win game is executed. In addition, when the mode of suggesting ``big win B'' comes, a process of opening and closing the second big prize winning port 2007 is executed according to the 5R big win game, and when the mode of suggesting ``big win C'' comes, processing of controlling the opening and closing of the second big prize winning port 2007 according to the 10R big win game is executed.

Also, in the big hit control process (step S240), after performing the opening control of the second big winning opening 2007, each set process of the high probability flag, the time saving flag, and the time saving number counter is executed. The high-probability flag is a flag indicating a high-probability state, and is set when ending a 10R big win game based on a mode suggesting a ``big win A'' as a result of lottery processing when the fluctuation of special symbols is stopped, and when ending a 5R big win game based on a mode suggesting a ``big win B''. Then, the high probability flag is reset by special symbol stop processing shown in FIG.

The time-saving flag is a flag indicating a time-saving state, and is set when the 10R big win game is ended based on the mode of suggesting 'big win A' or 'big win C' as a result of lottery processing when the variation of special symbols is stopped, and when 'immediate short wins A to C' are suggested. Then, the time saving flag is reset by the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 194 to be described later when the next big hit or when the counter value of the time saving number counter becomes "0".

In addition, the time saving number counter is a counter indicating the remaining number of variable display of special patterns (first special pattern and second special pattern) as the number of times of continuation of the time saving state, and when the 10R big win game based on the mode of suggesting ``jackpot A'' or ``jackpot C'' is ended, the number of times of continuation of the time saving state is set when the mode of suggesting ``immediate short wins A to C'' is reached. The time-saving frequency counter is counted down every time the variable display of the special pattern is executed until the counter value reaches ``0'', but when the next big hit occurs before the counter value reaches ``0'', it is reset by the special pattern stop processing shown in FIG.

Further, if the big win execution flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the small win execution flag indicating that the small winning game is being controlled is set (step S236), and if the small winning execution flag is set, the small winning control processing (step S239) for controlling the small winning game is executed. In the small winning control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) when the variable display is stopped becomes a mode suggesting "small winning", the processing of controlling the opening and closing of the first big winning port 2006 according to the small winning game is executed.

Further, if the flag during execution of a small hit is not set, a special symbol process including a lottery process related to a display mode when the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is executed (step S238). In this example, when the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter and the second special random number of the second special symbol is acquired from the random number counter, both are stored in a common special symbol reservation storage area, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed in the order stored in the special symbol reservation storage area.

FIG. 184 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first starting port passing process (step S232).

Now, in the process of step S231, if it is determined that the first starting hole sensor 3002 is in the ON state and the game ball has entered the first starting hole 2004, as shown in FIG. Get from

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires from the main control built-in RAM the counter value of the first special reservation number counter indicating the number of the first special random numbers stored in the special symbol reservation storage area, and based on this counter value, determines whether the first reservation storage number is the maximum value (upper limit) "4" (step S242). In the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to S245 are performed in order to newly suspend the variable display control of the first special symbol. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S244, each random number obtained in step S241 is stored in the special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the sum of the counter value by the first special reservation number counter and the counter value by the second special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is a big hit, a small hit, or an immediate short hit based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the fluctuation random number acquired in step S241. When a big win, a small win, or an immediate short win is not achieved, a ready-to-win performance is executed as a game performance executed by a performance display device 1600, or performance preliminary determination processing for determining prior determination information such as the mode type (variation pattern type) of the game performance to be executed is executed before starting the variable display according to the start winning (step S245), and then the processing is terminated.

However, in the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S243 to S245, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended.

In addition, when the number of first reserved memories changes based on the gaming ball entering the first starting port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reserved number display device in the function display unit 1400 is updated so as to correspond to the number of first reserved memories, and the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) command for instructing the number of first reserved memories (first reserved number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 memory command 0 to 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. . In addition, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation command 0-4 (special symbol 1 memory command 0-4).

FIG. 185 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random number obtained in the above step S241 or the random number obtained in the step S251 described later, specifically the special random number (first special random number, second special random number), pattern random number (first pattern random number, second pattern random number), reach random number, fluctuation random number. Whether or not, the type of big win in the case of a big win, the type of a small win in the case of a small win, the type of an immediate short win in the case of an immediate short win, the type of a ready-to-win performance as a game performance executed by a performance display device 1600 or the type of game performance to be executed (type of variation pattern) are specified (step S261).

Then, the specified pre-determination information (whether to hit the big hit, the small hit, or the immediate short hit, the type of the big hit if it becomes a big hit, the type of the small hit if it becomes a small hit, the type of the immediate short hit if it becomes an immediate short hit, whether to execute the reach production as the game production executed by the production display device 1600, or the type of game production to be executed (variation pattern type), etc.) and the acquired special. A pre-determination command is set according to the type of random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the reserved memory number (value of the reserved number counter) stored corresponding to the obtained special random number. For example, in the effect pre-determination process for the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first starting port passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first reservation memory number (the value of the first special reservation number counter) are set. The value of the second special reservation number counter) and the corresponding second special symbol pre-determination command are set (step S262).

Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), the pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and in addition to the number of pending memories stored corresponding to the first start port 2004 and the second start port 2005 where the start winning prize has occurred, whether the display result of the variable display of the special symbol based on the generated starting win is a big win, a small win, or an immediate short win, and if it is a big win, the type of big win and a small win. A peripheral control IC mounted on a peripheral control board 1510 can grasp prejudgment information such as the kind of a small winning when winning, the kind of an immediate short winning when an immediate short winning, the big winning, a small winning, and the immediate short winning when not going to execute a ready-to-win performance as a game performance executed by a performance display device 1600, or the mode type (variation pattern type) of a game performance to be executed, before starting the variable display according to the start winning.

When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a reserved storage area for storing pre-determination information regarding variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol).

The reserved storage area has 1 to 8 storage areas corresponding to the sum of the number of first reserved storage areas and the number of second reserved storage areas, and the peripheral control IC stores the advance determination information indicated by the received advance determination command in order from the first (earliest) storage area. Then, when the pre-determination command is received when the pre-determination information is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 7) storage area, the notified pre-determination information is stored in the n + 1-th (n = 1 to 7) storage area, and when the variation pattern command (first variation pattern command, second variation pattern command) for notifying the start of the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is received, the pre-determination information stored in the first storage area of the reserved storage area is discarded in accordance with the received variation pattern command. Move the prior determination information stored in the (N=2 to 8) storage areas to the N-1th (N=2 to 8) storage areas (shift the prior determination information stored in the reserved storage areas). As a result, the pre-determination information of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stored so as to specify the order in which the start of the variable display is postponed, and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information.

At the time when the variable display control is placed in a suspended state in this way, although the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (suspended state), the degree of expectation for a big hit (pseudo-winning probability) of the variable display control can be notified in advance, for example, at a predetermined timing, such as when the suspended display is newly output or when the suspended display is shifted according to the pending consumption.

FIG. 186 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second start opening passing process (step S234).

Now, in the process of step S233, if it is determined that the second starting hole sensor 2401 is in the ON state and the game ball has entered the second starting hole 2005, as shown in FIG. Get from

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reservation storage number is its maximum value (upper limit). In the process of step S252, when it is determined that the second pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S253 to S255 are performed in order to newly suspend the variable display control of the second special symbol. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S254, each random number obtained in step S251 is stored in the special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the sum of the counter value by the first special reservation number counter and the counter value by the second special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol is a big hit, a small hit, or an immediate short hit based on the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the fluctuation random number acquired in step S251. When a big win, a small win, or an immediate short win is not achieved, a ready-to-win performance is executed as a game performance executed by a performance display device 1600, or performance preliminary determination processing for determining the type of game performance to be executed (variation pattern type) before starting the variable display according to the start winning is executed (step S255), and then the processing is terminated.

However, in the process of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S253 to S255, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended.

In addition, when the second reserved memory number changes based on the game ball entering the second start port 2005, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special reserved number display device in the function display unit 1400 is updated so as to correspond to the second reserved memory number, and the command for instructing the second reserved memory number (second reserved number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 2 memory command 0 to 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). . In addition, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation command 0-4 (special symbol 2 memory command 0-4).

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the number of first reserved memories based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 2004 is set to "4", and the upper limit of the number of second reserved memories based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 2005 is set to "4". During the time-saving state, it is easier to accept the game ball B into the variable prize-winning port 2003 than in the normal state, so that the period in which the second reserved memory number is the upper limit continues for a long time, so that even if the game ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005, the player is prevented from being in a disadvantageous state in which he or she cannot get a chance to win a lottery.

FIG. 187 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the special symbol process (step S238). In the special symbol process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed according to the above-described special symbol process flag.

1. Read out the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, based on the read special random number, special symbol normal processing (step S280) in which lottery processing, etc. are performed for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the special symbol is stopped.
2. Special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) in which determination processing of the mode when the variation control of the special symbol is stopped is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control of the special symbol is stopped.
3. Fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S282) in which lottery processing is performed on the fluctuation mode of the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the performance display executed on the performance display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbols.
4. Special symbol variation processing (step S283) to wait until the special symbol variation display on the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
5. A special symbol stop process (step S284) for stopping the variable display of the special symbol so that the mode of the special symbol when the variation control is stopped is displayed on the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control of the special symbol is stopped.

The special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed in the main control side power-on process (see FIG. 167).

FIG. 188 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol normal process (step S280).

When the special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 188, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines whether or not there is variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special random number) in the pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter and the counter value of the second special pending number counter as the process of step S301. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the special symbols in the pending state, then as the process of step S302, random numbers related to the display mode of the special symbols stored in the special symbol holding storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a number is read from the same RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, when the read special random number is the first special random number, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and when the read special random number is the second special random number, the second special reserved number counter is counted down, and the special symbol stored in each storage area of the special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is a random number related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped (special random number (first special random number, second special random number), symbol random number (First symbol random number, second symbol random number), reach random number, variable random number) are shifted in a First-In First-Out manner.

Specifically, the special symbol reservation storage area has 8 storage areas 1 to 8, and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning in order from the first (first) area. When the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 7) storage area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1-7) storage area, and when the condition for starting the variable display based on the random number stored in the 1st storage area is satisfied, the various random numbers stored in the 1st storage area are read out, and the various random numbers stored in the N-th (N=2-8) storage area are stored in the N-1th (N=2-8) storage area. move to the area. As a result, the order in which the variable display control of the special symbols has been suspended is memorized so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension).

After that, as the processing of step S305, the winning determination processing, which is the lottery processing for winning and losing the big win, the small win and the immediate short win, is performed based on the first special random number when the read special random number is the first special random number, and the second special random number when the read special random number is the second special random number. After that, when the above-mentioned special symbol process flag is updated (step S306) so as to shift to the special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281), this process is terminated.

FIG. 189 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the hit determination process (step S305).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state) (step S311), select the lottery table at the time of high probability shown in FIG. A table is selected (step S313), and the selected lottery table and the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) read in step S302 of the special symbol normal process are compared (step S314).

The lottery tables shown in FIGS. 190 (A) and (B) are for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number), when the game state is low probability (low probability non-time saving state (normal state), low probability time saving state), and a lottery table at high probability used when the game state is high probability (high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state). In the low-probability lottery table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, the first special random number coincides with the jackpot determination value indicating that the first special random number has won a big hit with a big hit probability of 1/319 when the set value is 1, 1/309 when the set value is 2, 1/299 when the set value is 3, 1/289 when the set value is 4, 1/279 when the set value is 5, and 1/269 when the set value is 6. Then, the first special random numbers are associated with each other so that the first special random number coincides with the immediate short winning determination value indicating that the instant short winning is won with the instant short winning probability of 3/319 which is the same for any of the set values 1 to 6, and the other first special random numbers are matched with the outlier determination value indicating the outlier. In addition, in the low-probability lottery table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, the second special random number matches the jackpot determination value indicating that the second special random number has won a big hit with a jackpot probability of 1/319 when the set value is 1, 1/309 when the set value is 2, 1/299 when the set value is 3, 1/289 when the set value is 4, 1/279 when the set value is 5, and 1/269 when the set value is 6. Then, the second special random numbers are associated with each other so that the second special random number matches the small hit determination value indicating that the small hit is won with the small hit probability of 144/319, which is the same for any of the set values 1 to 6, and the other second special random numbers match the outlier determination value indicating that the second special random number is out. In addition, the lottery table for the high probability is constructed such that the probability of a big win for each set value is ten times higher than that for the lottery table for the low probability.

In the above, the lottery table referred to for comparison with the first special random number does not have a small hit determination value, whereas the lottery table referred to for comparison with the second special random number has a small hit determination value. Thus, in the time-saving state, it becomes easy to accept the game ball B into the variable winning port 2003, and in addition to the fact that the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning to the variable winning port 2003 is easily executed, there is a possibility of winning a small prize by the starting winning to the variable winning port 2003, so that the game can be played without reducing the number of balls held by the player.

The lottery table referred to for comparison with the first special random number is provided with an immediate short winning determination value, whereas the lottery table referred to for comparison with the second special random number is not provided with an immediate short winning determination value. Thus, in the non-time-saving state, it is difficult to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003, and the variation display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning to the first starting hole 2004 is the mainstream, but since there is a possibility of winning immediately in a short time by the starting winning to the first starting hole 2004, even in the state where the disadvantageous game is played in the non-time-saving state, the game can be played with expectation.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the lottery table with the special random numbers (the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) read in step S302 of the special symbol normal process), and when it is determined to be one of the big win, small win, and immediate short win (step S315), a win flag (big win flag) indicating that the change is won in any of the big win, small win, and immediate short win. , small hit flag, immediate short hit flag) are set (step S316), and the hit determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if none of the big win, small win, or immediate short win is won, that is, if it is determined to be out, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S317).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and includes a reach determination table for the time saving state used when the game state is the time saving state and a reach determination table for the non time saving state used when the game state is the non time saving state. In the reach determination table in the time saving state, the reach random numbers are associated so that one type of reach random number matches the reach determination value indicating reach, and 71 types of reach random numbers match with the reach determination value indicating not reach.

In addition, in the reach determination table in the non-time saving state, the reach determination value indicating that 5 types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time saving state match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached. Thus, in this embodiment, in the non-time saving state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is increased more than in the time saving state.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S317), and when it is determined that the reach is out of reach (step S318), sets a reach flag indicating that the change is reach and ends the process (step S319).

FIG. 191 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the special symbol process flag indicates that the special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 191, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines the result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305). The determination of the result of the lottery process is performed by determining whether or not the big hit flag, the small hit flag and the immediate short hit flag are set (step S321).

If the big hit flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a compares the symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) read out in step S302 of the special symbol normal process with the symbol determination table at the time of the big hit shown in FIG. The stop pattern of the pattern) is determined (step S323).

in particular,
1. After the second big winning hole 2007 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second big winning hole sensor 2561 detects that 10 game balls have entered the second big winning hole 2007, the closing pattern is repeated 10 times (10 rounds) to control the 10R big win game in which the game balls can (easily) enter the second big winning hole 2007 until the next big win comes after the big winning game is over. , Jackpot A that controls to a high probability time saving state
2. After the second big winning hole 2007 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second big winning hole sensor 2561 detects that 10 game balls have entered the second big winning hole 2007, the opening/closing pattern to be closed is repeated 5 times (5 rounds) to control the 5R big win game in which the game balls can (easily) enter the second big winning hole 2007, and the next big win after the big winning game is finished, with a high probability. Jackpot B to control in a non-time saving state
3. After the second big winning hole 2007 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second big winning hole sensor 2561 detects that 10 game balls have entered the second big winning hole 2007, the opening and closing pattern to be closed is repeated 10 times (10 rounds) to control the game ball to enter the second big winning hole 2007 (easy) 10R big win game, and after the big winning game ends, a special symbol (first special A big hit C controlled to a low-probability time-saving state A in which the time-saving state is terminated if the big hit does not occur until the variation display of the pattern, second special pattern) is executed 100 times.
4. After the second big winning hole 2007 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second big winning hole sensor 2561 detects that 10 game balls have entered the second big winning hole 2007, the opening and closing pattern to be closed is repeated 10 times (10 rounds) to control the game ball to enter the second big winning hole 2007 (easy) 10R big win game, and after the big winning game ends, a special symbol (first special A jackpot D controlled to a low-probability time-saving state A in which the time-saving state is terminated if the big hit is not achieved before the variable display of symbols, second special patterns) is executed 599 times.
One of the four types of jackpots is determined.

The symbol determination table at the time of the big win, which is compared with the first symbol random number, assigns judgment values to the big win A, the big win B, the big win C and the big win D. Specifically, for the first symbol random number (for example, a random number of 1 to 100), the determination value is distributed at a ratio of "jackpot A: jackpot B: jackpot C: jackpot D = 25:25:49:1". On the other hand, in the big win symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number, the judgment values are sorted to the big wins A and C, but the judgment values are not sorted to the big wins B and D. Specifically, the judgment value is distributed to the second symbol random number (for example, a random number of 1 to 100) at a ratio of "jackpot A:jackpot C=70:30". In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number is more likely to be determined as a jackpot A than the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number. It is designed to be advantageous to the technician.

Further, when the type of the big win is determined, a stop pattern corresponding to the type of the big win is determined as a mode when the special symbols are stopped. Specifically, when the big win A is determined, the big win A pattern is determined as the big win pattern, when the big win B is determined, the big win B pattern is determined as the big win pattern, when the big win C is determined, the big win C pattern is determined as the big win pattern, and when the big win D is determined, the big win D pattern is determined as the big win pattern.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the immediate short hit flag is set in step S321, by comparing the symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) read in step S302 of the special symbol normal process with the symbol determination table at the time of the immediate short hit shown in FIG. A mode (a stop design of a special design) at the time of fluctuation control stop of the corresponding special design is determined (step S323).

in particular,
1. Immediate short win A is controlled to a low-probability time-saving state C in which the time-saving state is terminated unless a big win is achieved until the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 100 times without controlling to a big-win game or a small-win game.
2. Immediate short win B is controlled to a low probability time saving state C in which a time saving state is terminated unless a big win is achieved before variable display of special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) is executed 40 times without controlling to a big winning game or a small winning game.
3. Immediate short win C is controlled to a low-probability time-saving state C in which the time-saving state is terminated if the variable display of special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) does not become a big hit until the variable display of special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) is executed 20 times without controlling to a big-hit game or a small-hit game.
Any one of the three types of immediate short hits is determined.

In addition, in the symbol determination table at the time of immediate short winning which is compared with the first symbol random number, determination values are distributed to immediate short winning A, immediate short winning B and immediate short winning C. Specifically, for the first symbol random number (for example, a random value of 1 to 100), the determination value is distributed at a ratio of "immediate short hit A: immediate short hit B: immediate short hit C = 10:20:70". On the other hand, since an immediate short win is not won by lottery based on the second special random number, the pattern determination table for the immediate short win to be compared with the second random number does not allocate judgment values to the immediate short win A, the immediate short win B and the immediate short win C.例文帳に追加However, an immediate short win is won by a lottery based on the second special random number, and a pattern determination table at the time of the immediate short win compared with the second random number may also be arranged so that the determination values are distributed to the immediate short win A, the immediate short win B and the immediate short win C at a ratio of ``immediate short win A: immediate short win B: immediate short win C=10:20:70''. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, after an immediate short win is won by a lottery based on special random numbers, the type of immediate short win is determined using a symbol determination table for instant short win compared with the symbol random numbers, but in the lottery table referred to for comparison with the special random numbers, the judgment value for immediate short win A, the judgment value for immediate short win B, and the judgment value for immediate short win C are set, and when the respective judgment values and the special symbols match, the immediate short win. It may be decided to win a win A, an immediate short win B, and an immediate short win C. That is, the type of immediate short winning may be determined only by lottery based on special random numbers.

Further, when the type of immediate short winning is determined, a stop pattern corresponding to the type of immediate short winning is determined as a mode of stopping the special symbols. Specifically, when the immediate short winning A pattern is determined, the immediate short winning A pattern is determined as the immediate short winning pattern, when the immediate short winning B is determined, the immediate short winning B pattern is determined as the immediate short winning pattern, and when the immediate short winning C is determined, the immediate short winning C pattern is determined as the immediate short winning pattern.

Further, if the small hit flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) read out in step S302 of the special symbol normal process with the symbol determination table at the time of the small hit shown in FIG. The pattern variation control stop mode (stop pattern of the special pattern) is determined (step S323).

in particular,
1. An opening/closing pattern in which the first big winning hole 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed twice to determine a small winning game in which a game ball can (easily) enter the first big winning hole 2006. - 特許庁

In addition, the judgment value is distributed to the small hit in the small hit design determination table compared with the second design random number. Specifically, a determination value is set for selecting one type of "small hit" for all of the second symbol random numbers (for example, random numbers of 1 to 100). On the other hand, since no small win is won by lottery based on the first special random number, the symbol determination table at the time of the small win compared with the first symbol random number does not distribute the determination value to the small win. However, a small win may be won by lottery based on the first special random number, and a judgment value may be distributed to the small win in the symbol determination table at the time of the small win compared with the first symbol random number. In addition, although only one type of small win is set in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a plurality of types of small wins with different opening times and opening times of the first big winning port 2006 may be set, and one of a plurality of types of small wins may be determined using a pattern determination table at the time of a small win compared with a random number of symbols.

Further, when the type of the small win is determined, the stop pattern corresponding to the type of the small win is determined as the mode of the stop of the first special symbol. Specifically, when it is determined to be a small hit, it is determined to be a small hit symbol.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when none of the big hit flag, the small hit flag and the immediate short hit flag is set, determines the design to be out (step S324). After the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a judgment result notification command corresponding to each lottery result so that the lottery result (instruction of the type of big hit, the type of immediate short win, small win, out of reach, or out (may be one to instruct the mode of the stop symbol of the special symbol)) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as the process of step S328 ( step S328). After that, as the process of step S329, this process is terminated when the special symbol process flag is updated so as to shift to the variation pattern setting process (step S282).

The peripheral control unit 1511 controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are variably displayed, and the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the order of left, right, and middle decorative patterns (the left, middle, and right decorative patterns may be synchronously variably displayed with the same pattern and stopped and displayed at the same time)). Specifically, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines a jackpot A pattern (a combination of identical odd-numbered patterns among left, middle, and right decorative patterns "0" to "9") when a jackpot A is specified from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop pattern) when the variation of the decorative patterns displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped. 579" pattern), when determined as a jackpot C, the jackpot C pattern (a combination in which the left, middle and right decorative patterns are the same even-numbered patterns among patterns of ``0'' to ``9'') is decided, and when determined as the jackpot D, the jackpot D pattern (a combination in which the left, middle and right decorative patterns are the same even-numbered patterns among the patterns of ``0'' to ``9'') is decided. When the big win C and the big win D are determined, a combination of common even-numbered patterns can be displayed, and at the stage of displaying the combination of patterns, the player is not clearly shown which one is the winning, and the expectation of the big win D is imparted to the player so as to continue the game. Also, if it is determined to be an immediate short hit A, it is determined to be an immediate short hit A pattern (a combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are "549" patterns), and if it is determined to be an immediate short hit B, it is determined to be an immediate short hit B pattern (a combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are "549" patterns). (combination to become a pattern) is determined. When the immediate short winning A, the immediate short winning B, and the immediate short winning C are determined, the common combination of ``549'' can be displayed, and at the stage of displaying the symbol combination, which winning is not clearly indicated to the player, and the expectation of the more advantageous immediate short winning is given to the player to continue the game. In addition, when it is determined to be a small hit, it is determined to be a small winning pattern (a combination in which the left, middle and right decorative patterns are "135"). In addition, when the reach off is specified, the off pattern with reach (a combination of patterns with the same left and right decorative patterns "0" to "9" but with different middle decorative patterns; reach off pattern) is determined, and when the off is specified, the off pattern without reach (at least the left and right decorative patterns of the left, middle and right decorative patterns are different patterns. However, the immediate short hit B pattern and the immediate short hit C pattern. , excluding small winning symbols), and display control of the determined stop symbols on the performance display device 1600 when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has passed (at the end of the game performance). In addition, although it will be described later in detail, in this embodiment, even if it is determined to be an immediate short hit A, an immediate short hit B, or an immediate short hit C, even if the game state at that time is a game state other than the low probability non-short working hours state (high probability short working hours state, high probability non-short working hours state, low probability short working hours state) If, the processing of setting the time saving flag or the time saving number counter corresponding to the immediate short hit A, the immediate short hit B, the immediate short hit C is not executed, so the game other than the low probability non-short working hours state In the skill state, even if an immediate short win A, an immediate short win B, and an immediate short win C are determined, the above-described ``loose pattern without reach'' is determined without determining the immediate short win A to C patterns (a combination of left, middle and right decorative patterns of ``549'').

FIG. 192 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the special symbol process flag indicates that the variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 192, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the big hit according to the type of the big win and the game state determined in the step S323 of the special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S342), if the big hit flag is set (step S342), If the hit flag is set (step S341), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the small hit determined in step S325 of the special symbol stop symbol setting process and the variation pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the game state is selected (step S342). A pattern table (not shown) is selected (step S342). If the ready-to-win flag is set (step S343), a change pattern table for ready-to-win (not shown) is selected (step S344), and if none of the big hit flag, small win flag, immediate short flag, and ready-to-win flag are set, that is, if the normal loss (not to execute the ready-to-win performance) occurs, the change pattern table for losing (not shown) is selected (step S345).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S302 of the special symbol normal processing (step S348), and the variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 to start the determined variation pattern is set to start the variation display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) displayed on the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device, second special display device) of the function display unit 1400 (step S348). S349). In addition, the main control MPU 1310a sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the variation timer (step S350). As a result, the effect control is performed by the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 only for the fluctuation time thus determined.

In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). Further, in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are stored in a form associated with the variation random numbers respectively. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a compares the selected variation pattern table among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number and the variation random number read in step S302 of the special symbol normal process, and acquires the variation time information associated with the read variation random number from this table, thereby determining the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the fluctuation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of ready-to-win in this example, it is set so as to determine the mode type of ready-to-win performance to be executed by comparing a judgment value indicating which ready-to-win performance is to be executed with a fluctuation random number. For example, in the super ready-to-win performance among the ready-to-win performances, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than that in the normal ready-to-win performance, and when the super ready-to-win performance is executed, the player's degree of expectation for the big winning game is increased.

Further, as will be described in detail later, when the special symbol variation display reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) in a low probability state after the power is turned on with RAM clearing or after the execution of the jackpot game, a specific variation pattern table is selected when a predetermined condition is established, and when the specific variation pattern table is selected, a specific variation pattern (variation pattern for help mode L portent effect described later) is determined. Then, when the specific variation pattern is determined, the help mode L omen performance which is executed only when the special symbol variation display reaches 600 times (rescue frequency counter=600) in the low probability state is executed.

Further, when the variable display control of the special symbols is started, next, as the process of step S351, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the time saving number counter for setting the number of continuations of the time saving state is "0". Then, if this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time saving number counter (step S352), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous shortening number counter is "0" (step S353). As a result, if the counter value is "0", a time saving end flag indicating that the control of the time saving state (time saving control) ends is set (step S354).

If it is determined that the counter value of the time saving number counter is "0" in the process of step S351, and if it is determined that the time saving number counter is not "0" in the process of step S353, the process proceeds to step S355 at that time. Then, when the above special symbol process flag is updated so as to shift to the special symbol variation process (step S283), this process is terminated.

FIG. 193 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol variation process (step S283).

When the special symbol process flag indicates that the special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 193, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first subtracts 1 from the variation timer in which the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern lottery process (step S282) is set as the process of step S371. When it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the selected variable time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of this step S373, this process is terminated when the above-mentioned special symbol process flag is updated so as to shift to the special symbol stop process (step S284).

FIG. 194 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol stop process (step S284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 194, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs display control for displaying the stop symbol determined by the special symbol stop symbol setting process on the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 as the process of step S381, and displays the special symbol on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing derived display of the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

Next, when the time saving end flag is set, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving end flag and resets the time saving flag (step S384). As a result, when the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) are variably displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, times corresponding to various time saving states such as 100 times, 40 times, 20 times, etc.), time saving control (time saving state control) is terminated and non-time saving control (normal state control) is started.

In addition, when the jackpot flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game is started (step S387), sets a jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed (step S388), waits until the jackpot game starts (displays the start of the jackpot game, etc.). time) is set in the interval timer (step S389). In step S389, a process of setting the number of rounds corresponding to the type of big win to the number of big wins counter indicating the number of remaining rounds is also executed. A big win number counter is decremented by one each time a round is executed in a big win control process (step S240), and when the big win number counter becomes '0', a main control MPU 1310a of a main control board 1310 judges that the prescribed number of rounds has been executed, and controls to end the big win game. When the big win flag is set (step S386), when the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, when the time saving flag is set, the time saving flag is reset, and when the counter value of the time saving number counter is not "0", the counter value is reset (returned to "0").

The jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S387, a jackpot start command (jackpot A start command, jackpot B start command, jackpot C start command, jackpot D start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D) is set. As a result, the effect of the big win game corresponding to the kind of the big win instructed by the big win start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like. Incidentally, in this embodiment, a common effect (the effect executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, etc. is the same) is set as the effect of the big win game corresponding to the big win C start command and the big win D start command. In addition, if the performance of the big win game corresponding to the big win C start command and the big win D start command is to be a common performance, the big win C start command and the big win D start command may be set to the same command instead of different commands.

In addition, when the big win running flag indicating that the big win game is being executed, when the big win game is ended, specifically, the opening and closing control of the second big winning hole 2007 according to the type of big win in the big win control process (step S240) (for example, after the second big winning hole 2007 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when 10 game balls have won in the second big winning hole 2007 is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 252. It is reset when the opening/closing control that repeats the opening/closing pattern 10 times or 5 times when it is detected in 5) is completed (all rounds that can be executed in the big win game). By resetting the jackpot execution flag, the jackpot control processing (step S240) is not executed in the special pattern and special electric role product control processing (step S114), while the variable display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 and the second special pattern display on the second special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 can be performed.

Further, if the small hit flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a small hit start command indicating that the small hit game is started (step S387), sets a small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed (step S388), waits until the start of the small hit game (time for displaying the start of the small hit game, etc.) ) is set in the interval timer (step S389). In addition, the small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the kind of the small hit. In step S389, a small-hit start command is set according to the type of small-hit. As a result, the production of the small-hit game corresponding to the kind of the small-hit instructed by the small-hit start command is executed by the production display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like.

Further, the small winning execution flag indicating that the small winning game is being executed is reset when the small winning game is finished, specifically, when the opening/closing control of the first big winning opening 2006 corresponding to the kind of the small winning (for example, the opening/closing pattern of opening the first big winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it is repeated twice) is finished. While the small winning control process (step S2341) is not executed in the special symbol and special electric role product control process (step S114) by resetting the small winning running flag, it becomes possible to perform the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400.

Further, when the big hit flag or the small hit flag is not set, if the immediate short hit flag is set (step S390), it is determined whether or not the high probability flag and the time saving flag are not set and the low probability non-time saving state is set (step S391). Then, if it is a low-probability non-time-reduction state, a time-reduction flag is set, and the number of continuations of the time-reduction state corresponding to the type of immediate reduction win is set in a time-reduction number counter indicating the remaining number of variable display of special symbols (first special design and second special design) as the number of continuations of the time-reduction state (step S392). Specifically, the time saving number counter is set to ``100'' in the case of an immediate short win A, the time saving number counter is set to ``40'' in the case of an immediate short win B, and the time saving number counter is set to ``20'' in the case of an immediate short win C.例文帳に追加On the other hand, if the gaming state other than the low probability non-time saving state is a high probability time saving state, a high probability non time saving state, or a low probability time saving state, the process of setting the time saving flag or the time saving counter is not executed.

As described above, in the low probability state, when it becomes an immediate short hit, it is controlled to the time saving state based on the immediate short hit, whereas in the high probability state, when it becomes the immediate short state, it is not controlled to the time saving state based on the immediate short hit. In this way, the ``immediate short winning'' is intended to relieve the disadvantageous game being played in a low probability state, and in the time saving state based on the immediate short winning, it becomes easy to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003, so that the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls he has.

In addition, in the time saving state, when it becomes an immediate short hit, the already controlled time saving state is continued without newly controlling to the time saving state based on the immediate short hit. In this way, the ``immediate short win'' is intended to relieve a disadvantageous game being played in a non-working time saving state, and in the state already controlled to the time saving state, it is not newly controlled to the time saving state based on the immediate short win. As another example, in the time-saving state, when an immediate short-time hit occurs, the already-controlled time-shortening state may be ended, and a new time-saving state based on the immediate short time may be controlled. As another example, in the time saving state, when the immediate hit is achieved, the remaining number of times of time saving in the already controlled time saving state is compared with the number of times of time saving in the time saving state based on the immediate time saving hit, and the number of times of time saving may be controlled to be larger. Further, as another example, in the time saving state, when the immediate winning is achieved, control may be performed so as to add the number of times of the time saving state based on the immediate saving hit to the remaining number of times of the time saving times of the already controlled working time saving state.

In addition, in a low probability state, when an immediate short winning pattern is obtained, the immediate short winning pattern is stopped and displayed, and a time saving flag is set, but the timing of setting the time saving flag may be the start or end of the fixed time, which is the time for keeping the immediate short winning pattern stopped. Among these, when a time saving flag is set at the start of fixed time, control is performed to a time saving state based on an immediate short win, and a state in which the game balls B are easily accepted into the variable prize winning opening 2003 can be quickly provided. When a time saving flag is set at the end of the fixed time, the fixed time after the stop of the immediate short winning pattern can be used to execute the performance of notifying the start of the time saving state based on the immediate short winning pattern, and during the variable display of the special pattern before the immediate short winning pattern is stopped, the win/lose performance can be specialized. In the case of executing the performance for notifying the start of the time saving state based on the immediate short win, the fixed time after the stop of the immediate short win pattern is set to a specific fixed time (for example, 10 seconds) longer than the normal fixed time (for example, 1 second).

When the big win flag or the small win flag is not set, i.e., when it becomes an immediate short win or a loss, the big win game or the small win game is not executed, so the waiting time (the time during which the special symbols are stopped) is set in the interval timer (step S392), and the process proceeds to step S393. In the present embodiment, a common standby time is set in the interval timer when an immediate short hit or a loss occurs, but a special standby time longer than that when an immediate short win occurs may be set in the interval timer. As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize that it is not a miss but an immediate short hit by the difference in the length of the waiting time. In addition, when a special waiting time is provided in this way, an effect may be executed during this special waiting time for the player to recognize that it is an immediate short win rather than a loss.

When the processing of steps S386 to S393 is executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not to control to a time saving state by establishment of a predetermined condition regarding the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. Executes the relief number count process (step S394), and when the special symbol process flag is updated so as to be processed to the special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S395), this process ends.

FIG. 195 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the relief number counting process (step S394).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the initial value of the relief number counter, which is added and counted according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low-probability state, to "0" after power-on with RAM clear. Also, when the big hit flag is set (step S3941), the count value of the rescue number counter indicating the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is reset to the initial value "0" (step S3942).

Also, when the big hit flag is not set, it is determined whether the high probability flag is not set and the low probability state (low probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state) (step S3943). Then, if the probability is low, +1 is added to the count value of the relief number counter (step S3944), and when the count value of the relief number counter reaches "600" (step S3945), the time saving flag is set, and the time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuation display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuations of the time saving state is set (step S3946). Specifically, when the count value of the relief number counter reaches "600", the time saving number counter is set to "700". In addition, although not shown, in a part of the low-probability non-time-saving state among the low-probability states, +1 is not added to the count value of the relief counter.

As described above, the relief number counter counts each time the variable display of the special symbols is executed in the low probability state, and when the number of variations of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 times, the time saving state is controlled. In addition, if the relief frequency counter is in a low probability state, regardless of whether it is a non-working time saving state or a working hours saving state, it counts the variable display of special symbols. Further, in the main control board 1310, when transmitting the symbol determination command toward the peripheral control board 1510, the relief number counter counts up the number of variations of the special symbol. On the other hand, the number-of-rescues counter does not count even if the variable display of special symbols in the high-probability state is executed. In this way, the control of the time saving state by establishment of the predetermined condition regarding the number of times of variation of the special symbols aims at relieving the disadvantageous game being played in the low probability state, and in the time saving state, since it is easy to accept the game ball B into the variable prize winning port 2003, the game can be played without reducing the number of balls possessed by the player. In addition, 700 times are set as the number of times of shortening of working hours, and the probability of obtaining the next ``big hit'' is very high before the variable display of the special pattern reaches 700 times in the shortening of working hours, so that the player can play the game with anticipation in the shortened working hours. In addition, 700 times as the number of times of shortening the time is set to the number of times that the next ``big win'' is not necessarily obtained even if the set value is 1/269 of the set value 6, and the game can be continued by giving a feeling of tension to the player even in a long-time shortening state of 700 times. For this reason, it is preferable to set the number of times of time saving provided by ``control of the time saving state by establishment of a predetermined condition regarding the number of fluctuations of special symbols'' using the counter of the number of times of relief, to the extent that the possibility of obtaining the next ``jackpot'' is high, but the tension is not completely eliminated (the number of times that the possibility of not obtaining the big win is at least 3% or more). In addition, the number of times of time saving provided by ``control of the time saving state by establishment of a predetermined condition regarding the number of times of variation of special symbols'' using the number of times of relief counter is equal to or greater than the limit value of the number of times of relief (the number of times of variation practiced by the player), so that the player can be given a sense of satisfaction that dispels the feeling of disappointment given to the player until the limit value of the counter of times of relief is reached.

Further, when a big win is achieved, the number of relief counters are reset, whereas when a small win or an immediate short win is achieved, the number of relief counters are not reset. That is, unless a big hit is achieved, the counting of the number of variations of the special symbols in the low probability state is continued. Thus, the control of the time saving state by establishment of the predetermined condition regarding the number of times of variation of the special symbols is intended to relieve the continuation of the state in which no big winning game is performed, and in the time saving state, since it is easy to accept the game ball B into the variable prize winning port 2003, the game can be played without reducing the number of balls possessed by the player. In addition, 700 times are set as the number of times of shortening of working hours, and the probability of obtaining the next ``big hit'' is very high before the variable display of the special pattern reaches 700 times in the shortening of working hours, so that the player can play the game with anticipation in the shortened working hours.

The relief number counter is reset not only when a big win is achieved but also when power is turned on with RAM clearing. That is, when the setting value is changed when the power is turned on, or when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 1310f is being operated, the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area of the built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the RAM, excluding a specific area), thereby resetting the relief count counter. In this way, the relief number counter can be reset by the hall manager as appropriate. On the other hand, when the setting of the set value is confirmed when the power is turned on, or when the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, the RAM is not cleared, so the count of the number of fluctuations in the special design in the low probability state is not reset, and after the power is turned on, the counting is restarted from the count of the number of fluctuations in the special design in the low probability state stored when the power is turned off.

In addition, in the variable display in which the number of times of variation of the special pattern reaches 600 times in the low probability state, when the instant short win is achieved, the time saving state based on the instant short win is prioritized, and the time saving state based on the number of times of variation of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times is controlled. While the time saving state based on the immediate short winning is the time saving grant until the special pattern variation display reaches 20 to 100 times, the time saving state based on the special pattern variation display reaching 600 times in the low probability state is the time saving grant until the special pattern variation display reaches 700 times, and priority is given to the time saving grant advantageous to the player. However, in the variable display in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, when the immediate short winning is achieved, control may be performed to the time saving state based on the immediate short winning.

[Transition of game state]
FIG. 196 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of game states. As shown in FIG. 196, the gaming state is roughly divided into a low probability state and a high probability state, and a non-time saving state and a time saving state. In addition, when the power is turned on, the game state is in a low probability non-time saving state.

In the high-probability state, the probability of a big hit is set to be higher than in the low-probability state. In addition, regarding the transition from the low probability state to the high probability state, it is possible to shift when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a "big hit". It should be noted that the jackpot probability can also be changed by switching the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 . On the other hand, the small-hit probability and the immediate short-hit probability do not change between the low-probability state and the high-probability state, and do not change even when the set value of the pachinko machine 1 is switched.

In the time-saving state, it is set so that the reception of the game ball B to the variable winning opening 2003 becomes easier than in the non-time-saving state. For example, when the normal lottery is carried out, the probability that the lottery result of the normal pattern becomes a ``normal win'' is increased, and when the lottery result of the normal pattern is a ``normal win'', the time and number of times the variable prize winning port 2003 closed by the variable prize winning port door 2521 is opened is increased, thereby facilitating the reception of the game ball B into the variable winning port 2003.例文帳に追加As a result, in the non-time saving state, it is difficult or impossible to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003, so the game of entering the game ball B into the first starting hole 2004 or the second starting hole 2005 becomes mainstream. On the other hand, in the time saving state, the acceptance of the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003 is easier than in the non-time saving state, so the game of entering the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003 is mainstream. . Also, in the time-saving state, it is easier to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003 than in the non-time-saving state.

In addition, regarding the transition from the non-time-saving state to the time-saving state, it is possible to shift when the lottery result of the special pattern becomes "big hit" or "immediate short hit". When the lottery result of the special pattern is ``big hit'', it shifts to the time saving state after executing the big win game, whereas when the lottery result of the special pattern is ``immediate short win'', it is different in that the big win game is not executed and it shifts to the time saving state. In addition, even if the lottery result of the special pattern does not result in a ``big hit'' or an ``immediate short hit'', a prescribed condition regarding the number of times of variation of the special pattern is satisfied, thereby making it possible to shift from the non-working time saving state to the working time saving state. In this example, after the power is turned on or after the execution of the big win game, the number of times of variation of the special pattern in the low probability state is counted, and when the number of times of variation of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times, it is possible to shift from the non-time-saving state to the time-saving state.

Specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbols is "big hit A", control is performed in a high probability time saving state after the execution of the 10R big win game until the next "big hit". Further, when the lottery result of the special symbols is "big hit B", the game is controlled to a high probability non-time-saving state after the execution of the 5R big win game until the next "big win". In addition, when the lottery result of the special pattern is "big hit C", the game is controlled to the low-probability time-saving state A until the variable display of the special pattern reaches 100 times after the execution of the 10R big win game. However, when the lottery result of the special symbols becomes a "jackpot" before the variable display of the special symbols reaches 100 times, the low-probability time-saving state A is ended at that point. In addition, when the lottery result of the special pattern is "big win D", the low probability time saving state A is controlled until the variable display of the special pattern reaches 599 times after the execution of the 10R big win game. However, when the lottery result of the special symbols becomes a "jackpot" before the variable display of the special symbols reaches 599 times, the low-probability time-saving state A is terminated at that time. In addition, when the variable display of the special pattern reaches 599 times, the number of times of variation of the special pattern reaches 600 times immediately after that, thereby making it possible to shift again from the non-time-saving state to the time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state B), thereby making it possible to progress the game from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state B in a substantially continuous manner. In addition, when the lottery result of the special pattern is "jackpot A" or "jackpot B", the period until the next "jackpot" is set as the period for controlling the high probability time saving state or the high probability non-time saving state, but such a period is set, for example, until the fluctuation display of the special pattern reaches 10000 times. It is good also as the number of times which is high.

Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "small win", after the execution of the small win game, the game state before the small win game is controlled. In other words, the game state does not change when the lottery result of the special symbols becomes a "minor win". In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "small win", the game state before the small win game may be continuously controlled even during the small win game. In this case as well, the game state does not change when the result of the lottery for the special symbols becomes a "minor win".

Further, when the lottery result of the special pattern is "immediate short win", the big win game is not executed, and the low probability time saving state C is controlled until the variable display of the special pattern reaches a predetermined number of times. Here, the predetermined number of times is set to 100 times when the lottery result of the special pattern is ``immediate short winning A'', 40 times when it is ``immediate short winning B'', and 20 times when it is ``immediate short winning C''. However, when the lottery result of the special symbols becomes a ``big hit'' before the variable display of the special symbols reaches a predetermined number of times, the low-probability time-saving state C is terminated at that time.

In the above, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, control to the low-probability time-saving state C is performed only when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short hit". On the other hand, in the game states other than the low-probability non-time-saving state, the high-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability short-time working state, low-probability short-time working state A, low-probability short-time working state B, and low-probability short-time working state C are not necessarily controlled to the low-probability short-time state C when the special symbol lottery result is ``immediate short-hit'', and the game state before the special symbol lottery result is ``immediate short-hit'' is maintained. In other words, the game states other than the low-probability non-time-saving state are set as an ``immediate short-hit pattern invalid period'' in which control is not performed to the low-probability time-saving state C when the lottery result of the special pattern becomes ``immediate short-hit''. In this way, the ``immediate short hit'' aims to relieve the disadvantageous game being played in the low probability non-time saving state, and in the low probability time saving state C triggered by the ``immediate short hit'', the game ball B is easily accepted into the variable winning hole 2003, so that the game can be played without reducing the number of balls held by the player.

In this example, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "immediate short hit" in the low probability non-time saving state, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state C, but in a part of the low probability non time saving state, it is set as an "immediate short winning pattern invalid period" in which the low probability of time saving state C is not controlled when the special symbol lottery result becomes "immediate short hit". Details will be described later.

In the above description, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, control to the low-probability time-saving state C is performed only when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short-hit" in the low-probability state. In other words, not only in the low-probability non-time-saving state but also in the low-probability time-saving states A to C, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "immediate short-time hit", the already controlled low-probability time-saving states A to C may be terminated and the low-probability time-saving state C may be controlled. As another example, in the low-probability time-saving states A to C, when the lottery result of the special pattern is ``immediate short hit'', the remaining number of times of time-saving in the already controlled low-probability time-saving states A to C is compared with the number of times of time-saving in the low-probability time-saving state C triggered by the special pattern lottery result becoming ``immediate short hit'', and control may be performed so that the number of times of time-saving is greater. As another example, in the low-probability time-saving states A to C, when the lottery result of the special pattern is "immediate short hit", the number of time-saving times of the low-probability time-saving state C triggered by the special pattern lottery result becoming "immediate short win" may be added to the remaining number of times of the time-saving times of the already controlled low-probability time-saving states A to C.

In addition, in the above, when the lottery result of the special pattern is "immediate short hit", the number of times of time saving (variation number of special patterns to be controlled to the low probability time saving state C) is changed depending on the type of immediate short win, but the content of the low probability time saving state C may be different depending on the type of immediate short win. Specifically, depending on the type of immediate short win, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning hole 2003 that can accept the game ball B when the lottery result of the normal pattern is "normal winning" may be different, and both the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning hole 2003 and the number of times of time reduction may be different.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special design becomes "immediate short winning", in the variable display of the special symbols in the function display unit 1400, a unique immediate short winning symbol (which may be different in the immediate short winning A to C symbols) different from the other stopping symbols is stop-displayed as the stop symbol of the special symbol, and in the variable display of the decorative symbols of the effect display device 1600, the common immediate short winning symbol ("549") is used as the stop symbol of the decorative symbols. symbol combination) is to be stopped and displayed. However, in game states other than the low-probability non-time-saving state (high-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability time-saving state A, low-probability time-saving state B, low-probability time-saving state C) and in the "immediate short-hit design invalid period", when the lottery result of the special design becomes "immediate short-hit", in the variable display of the special design on the function display unit 1400, the immediate short-hit design is stopped and displayed as the stop design of the special design, while the effect display device 160 In the variable display of the decorative pattern at 0, the immediate short winning pattern (symbol combination of '549') is not stopped and displayed as the stop pattern of the decorative pattern, and the pattern different from the immediate short winning pattern (in this example, the lost pattern) is stopped and displayed. In this way, in game states other than the low-probability non-time-saving state (high-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability time-saving state A, low-probability time-saving state B, low-probability time-saving state C) and ``immediate short-hit design invalid period'', when the lottery result of the special symbol is ``immediate short-hit'', the stopped design of the decorative pattern on the effect display device 1600 does not suggest that effect. It is possible to make it difficult to lose and reduce the feeling of loss for the invalidation of the "immediate short hit".

Even when the lottery result of the special pattern does not result in a ``big win'' or an ``immediate short win'', a big win game is not executed by establishing a predetermined condition regarding the number of times of variation of the special pattern, and the low probability time saving state B is controlled until the variation display of the special pattern reaches a predetermined number of times. Here, 700 times is set as the predetermined number of times. However, when the lottery result of the special symbols becomes a ``big hit'' before the variable display of the special symbols reaches a predetermined number of times, the low-probability time-saving state B is ended at that time.

In the above, after turning on the power with RAM clearing or after executing a big hit game, the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol in the low probability state is counted by adding from the initial value "0" using the above-mentioned relief number counter, and when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state B. Here, only the number of times of variation of special symbols in a low probability state is counted after power-on accompanied by RAM clearing or execution of a jackpot game, and in a high probability state, a 'count suppression period' is set in which the number of times of variation of special symbols is not counted. On the other hand, if it is in a low probability state, regardless of whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state, the number of times of variation of special symbols is counted. In addition, when a jackpot game is executed with the result of the lottery of the special symbols becoming "big win", the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbols in the low probability state is reset. In this way, the control of the low-probability time-saving state B by establishment of a predetermined condition regarding the number of times of variation of the special symbols is aimed at relieving the fact that a disadvantageous game is being performed in a low-probability state or the continuation of a state in which no big winning game is being performed, and in the low-probability time-saving state B, since it is easy to accept the game ball B into the variable winning opening 2003, the game can be played without reducing the number of balls held by the player. In addition, 700 times is set as the predetermined number of times, and the probability of obtaining the next ``jackpot'' is very high before the variable display of the special pattern reaches 700 times in the low-probability time-saving state B, so that the game can be played with expectation in the low-probability time-saving state B.例文帳に追加

In this example, after turning on the power with clearing the RAM or after executing the jackpot game, the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state (the number of variations other than the first special symbol and the second special symbol jackpot) is counted. However, in a part of the low probability non-time saving state among the low probability states, it is set as a "count suppression period" that does not count the number of variations of the special symbol. Details will be described later.

Also, in this example, when the number of fluctuations of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times, the control is performed to the low probability time saving state B, but the number of fluctuations of the special pattern in the low probability state is set to be larger than the expected value of the number of fluctuations of the special pattern until the big hit calculated from the big hit probability (for example, 319 times if the big hit probability is 1/319). Therefore, the probability of obtaining the next ``big win'' is high before the number of variations of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times after turning on the power with clearing the RAM or after executing the big win game.

In addition, in this example, not only when the jackpot game is executed, but also when the power is turned on with RAM clearing, the count of the number of variations of the special symbols in the low probability state is reset. That is, when the setting value is changed when the power is turned on, or when the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a clears the predetermined area of the RAM (all areas of the RAM excluding the specific area), so the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state is reset. In this way, the relief number counter can be reset by the hall manager as appropriate. On the other hand, when the setting of the set value is confirmed when the power is turned on, or when the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, the RAM is not cleared, so the count of the number of fluctuations in the special design in the low probability state is not reset, and after the power is turned on, the counting is restarted from the count of the number of fluctuations in the special design in the low probability state stored when the power is turned off.

In addition, after power-on accompanied by RAM clearing or after execution of the jackpot game, in the variable display in which the number of fluctuations of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times, when the lottery result of the special pattern is ``jackpot'', after the jackpot game is executed, the game state corresponding to the type of the jackpot (high-probability short-time state, high-probability non-time-shortening state, low-probability short-time state A) is controlled, and after execution of the jackpot game, the low-probability time-shortening state. It is assumed that B is not controlled.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special pattern becomes a ``small win'' in the variation display in which the number of times of variation of the special pattern reaches 600 times in the low probability state after turning on the power with clearing of the RAM or after executing the big winning game, the control is performed to the low probability time saving state B after the execution of the small winning game.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special pattern becomes ``immediate short winning'' in the variation display in which the number of times of variation of the special pattern reaches 600 times in the low probability state after turning on the power with clearing of the RAM or after executing the jackpot game, control is performed to the low probability time saving state B.例文帳に追加While the low-probability time-saving state C triggered by the lottery result of the special pattern becoming an ``immediate short hit'' provides time-savings until the fluctuation display of the special patterns reaches 20 to 100 times, the low-probability time-saving state B due to the establishment of a predetermined condition regarding the number of times of special pattern variation is time-savings until reaching 700 times, and priority is given to the time-saving provision that is advantageous to the player. However, when the special pattern lottery result is ``immediate short winning'' in the variable display in which the number of times of variation of the special pattern reaches 600 times in the low probability state after turning on the power with RAM clearing or after executing the big winning game, control may be performed to the low probability non-time-saving state C triggered by the ``immediate short winning'' of the special pattern lottery result.

In addition, when controlling to the low-probability time-saving state B when the number of times of variation of the special symbols in the low-probability state reaches 600 after turning on the power with RAM clearing or after executing the jackpot game, the performance display device 1600 notifies that the low-probability time-saving state B is started. For example, at the start of the low probability time saving state B, or in the variation display when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol in the low probability state has reached 600 times, it may be notified that the low probability time saving state B is started.

By the way, it is assumed that the time saving state is ended when the condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied. In this example, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B and the low-probability time-saving state C, when the variable display of the special pattern reaches a predetermined number of times (the prescribed number of times set when the lottery result of the special pattern becomes a "big win" or "immediate short-time hit"), the state is shifted to a low-probability non-time-saving state. In addition to this, for example, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B and the low-probability time-saving state C, a termination lottery for whether or not to end the time-saving state is performed each time the variable display of the special symbol is performed, and when the end of the time-saving state is determined by the end lottery, or when the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol is a "small hit" reaches a predetermined number of times, the condition for terminating the time-saving state may be established.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 is provided with a status indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game status, a normal symbol indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the gate 2002, and a normal holding indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the reception of the game ball B to the gate 2002. In such a state display device, when the lottery result of the special pattern is ``big win'' or ``minor win'', the ``status display LED corresponding to time saving'' is emitted at the end of the big win game or the minor win game without emitting ``state display LED corresponding to time saving'' at the same time when the variable display of the special pattern is stopped (when the big win pattern or minor win pattern is stopped). On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special pattern is ``immediate short winning'', the ``state display LED corresponding to time saving'' is lighted at the same time when the variable display of the special pattern is stopped (when the immediate short winning pattern is stopped), so that the winning other than the big winning and the small winning can be easily recognized outside.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special pattern is ``losing'', the ``state display LED corresponding to time saving'' is not illuminated at the same time when the variable display of the special pattern is stopped (when the missing pattern is stopped). On the other hand, after turning on the power with clearing the RAM or after executing the jackpot game, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol other than the jackpot) in the low probability state is counted by adding from the initial value "0", and when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, the low probability time saving state B is controlled. When executing the variable display of the special symbols in such a low-probability state where the number of variations of the special symbols has reached 600 times, the ``status display LED corresponding to time saving'' is lighted at the same time when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped (when the lost symbols are stopped), so that the outside can be easily recognized that it is not normal deviation.

[Example of production related to time saving control when the number of relief times is reached]
In this example, after turning on the power with clearing the RAM or after executing the jackpot game, the number of variations of the special symbols in the low probability state (the number of variations other than the first special symbol and the second special symbol big hit) in the low probability state is counted, and the number of variations of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 times. Predetermined effects are being executed for variable display. Here, with reference to FIG. 197, a specific production example until the number of variations of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 197(A), when a variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the variation display of the decorative pattern 1600a is executed in the central part of the effect display device 1600. FIG. Specifically, until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command elapses, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns 1600a are variably displayed, and are stopped and displayed in the order of the left decorative design→right decorative design→middle decorative design. As the stop design of the decorative design 1600a, the design corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed.

Further, when a variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600, a variable display of an identification pattern 1600b that is smaller than the decorative pattern and is less noticeable is executed. Specifically, until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command elapses, the identification symbol 1600b is variably displayed as ◯ and x, and is stopped at either ◯ or x. As the stop symbol of the identification symbol 1600b, ◯ is displayed when the lottery result is a hit (big hit, small hit, or immediate short win), and x is stop-displayed when the lottery result is a loss. In addition to this example, when the purpose is to conceal the fact that the lottery result is an immediate short win as much as possible, as the stop symbol of the identification symbol 1600b, when the lottery result is a big win or a small win, ◯ is stop-displayed, and when the lottery result is an immediate short win or a loss, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize that it is an immediate short win from the stop symbol of the identification symbol 1600b.

In addition, in the lower part of the effect display device 1600, a first special symbol pending display 1600c (a state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is on standby) and a second special symbol pending display 1600d (a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is on standby) are enabled. Specifically, the reserved display 1600c of the first special symbol is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display device 1600 by the number of reservations, and the reserved display 1600d of the second special symbol is displayed in the lower right part of the production display device 1600 by the number of reservations. Then, when the variable display of the reserved symbols is started, the reserved displays 1600c and 1600d for the start are erased. However, the reserved displays 1600c and 1600d of the special symbols may be continuously displayed after the start of the variable display of the reserved special symbols until the end of the variable display of the special symbols.

Also, in the upper left part of the effect display device 1600, a state display indicating the current game state is executed. In this example, the current gaming state is a low probability non-time saving state, and displays "normally" corresponding to the low probability non-working time saving state.

In addition, as a period before the number of fluctuations of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times, every time the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is stopped from the 500th fluctuation display of the special pattern, a count performance for notifying the number of fluctuations of the special pattern in the low probability state is executed in the upper part of the performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加In this example, it is the time when the 500th variation display of the special symbol is stopped, and the relief notice image A of "500 variation" corresponding to the 500th variation of the special symbol in the low probability state is displayed. In this way, by executing the count effect, it is possible to play the game with anticipation that the number of variations of the special symbols in the low-probability state approaches 600 times.

Specifically, when the special symbols are stopped from fluctuating, the main control board 1310 transmits a symbol determination command to the peripheral control board 1510 to stop the variable display of the decorative symbols 1600a in the effect display device 1600. However, when the number of special symbol variations in the low probability state reaches 500, when the symbol determination command is transmitted, the main control board 1310 sends a relief count command to the peripheral control board 1510 separately from the symbol determination command. are This relief count command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 each time the symbol confirmation command is transmitted, while the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state is 500 to 600 times. The peripheral control board 1510 has a dedicated counter for counting the number of times the relief count command is received, and stores the number of times the relief count command is received. In this way, the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the relief count command is received, and recognizes that the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state has reached 500 times by receiving the relief count command for the first time, and recognizes that the number of times of variation of the special symbol in the low probability state has reached 501 times by receiving the relief count command for the second time. Based on the calculated number of fluctuations, when stopping the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a in the production display device 1600, it is possible to execute a count production for notifying how many times the special pattern has changed in the low probability state. In addition, the relief count command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is not limited to the above-described mode, and a different command may be sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 each time a design determination command is transmitted while the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state is 500 to 600 times. Even in this case, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the relief count command 1 to recognize that the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state has reached 500 times, and by receiving the relief count command 2, recognizes that the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state has reached 501 times.

As shown in FIGS. 197(B) and (C), as a period before the number of fluctuations of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 times, from the 597th fluctuation display of the special symbols, every time the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special design) is stopped, as a count effect, the stop design of the decorative design 1600a indicating how many times the special symbols have changed in the low probability state is stopped and displayed. In this example, when the number of times of variation of the special pattern in the low probability state is 597, on the condition that the lottery result of the special pattern is lost, the pattern combination for relief notice ``597'' is selected and set as the stop pattern of the decorative pattern 1600a, and is stopped and displayed in place of the normal stop pattern of failure. This pattern combination for relief notice can be displayed both when the ready-to-win effect is not executed and when the ready-to-win effect is executed, and when the ready-to-win effect is executed (in the case of the ready-to-reach effect), the above-mentioned out-of-reach pattern (combination of the same left and right decorative patterns "0" to "9" but different middle decorative patterns; the out-of-reach pattern) is temporarily displayed as a result of the variable display, but then "597" etc. It is changed and displayed to the symbol combination for the relief notice of . Further, from the 597th variable display of the special pattern, a rescue notice image B of ``help is imminent!'' is displayed in the upper part of the performance display device 1600, indicating that the ``help mode'' to be executed when the number of times of variation of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times is imminent.

In addition, in the period before the number of fluctuations of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 times, if there is a special symbol suspension that will execute a variation display that the lottery result will be lost as the 600th special symbol variation display, a special symbol suspension display that will execute the 600th special symbol variation display as a first special symbol suspension display 1600c (lower left of Fig. 197 (C) to (G)) face hold) is displayed. As a result, the player can know in advance that the ``help mode'' will be entered by executing the variable display of the special pattern corresponding to the reserved display of the special pattern in a period before the number of times of variation of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times.

As shown in FIGS. 197(D) and (E), when the number of times of variation of the special symbols in the low probability state is 598, on the condition that the lottery result of the special symbols is lost, the symbol combination for relief notice "598" is selected and set as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1600a, and is stopped and displayed instead of the normal stop symbol of failure.

As shown in FIGS. 197(F) and (G), when the number of times of variation of the special symbols in the low probability state is 599, on the condition that the lottery result of the special symbols is lost, the symbol combination "599" for relief notice is selected and set as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1600a, and is stopped and displayed in place of the normal stop symbol of failure.

As shown in FIGS. 197(H) and (I), when the number of changes of the special symbols in the low probability state is the 600th, on the condition that the lottery result of the special symbols is lost, a symbol combination for relief notice of "600" is selectively set as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1600a, and is stopped and displayed in place of the normal stop symbol of failure. Further, at the time of stopping the 600th variation display of the special symbols, a remedy suggesting image "CHANCE!" indicating that the number of variations of the special symbols in the low probability state has reached 600 times is displayed in the upper part of the performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加

When the lottery result of the special pattern becomes a big hit during the period from when the number of times of variation of the special pattern exceeds 500 times to when it reaches the 600th time (while the count performance is being executed) in a low probability state, the count performance is finished after the variation display of the special pattern which has become the big win.

As shown in FIG. 197 (J), when the number of fluctuations in the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, control is performed to the low probability time saving state B, and a dedicated time saving state is given. In this example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 times, and after that, the special symbols are displayed 700 times (the total number of fluctuations of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 1300 times). In the performance display device 1600, when the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is stopped for the 600th time, a relief confirmation image of 'Enter the help mode L!!' is displayed so as to notify the entry into the 'help mode L'. In FIG. 197(J), by moving and enlarging the face hold displayed in the lower left of FIGS.

As shown in FIG. 197(K), after entering the "help mode L", if there is no suspension of the special pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is not immediately started, and a volume adjustment bar indicating the currently set volume level and a light amount adjustment bar indicating the currently set light amount level are displayed at the bottom of the effect display device 1600. The volume adjustment bar can change the memory display as the volume button is operated to change the volume level, and the light amount adjustment bar can change the memory display as the light amount button is operated to change the light amount level. In addition, during variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) and during non-variable display of the decorative pattern (special pattern), it is possible to change the volume level and the light quantity level. In this way, after the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is stopped, when the special pattern is not suspended and the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is not executed, by displaying the volume adjustment bar and the light amount adjustment bar, it is possible to know that the volume level and the light amount level can be changed.

In addition, after entering the ``help mode L'', the upper left part of the performance display device 1600 displays a relief image ``in the help mode L'' indicating that the low-probability time-saving state B is being controlled as a state display indicating the current game state. In addition, in the low-probability time-saving state B, it is easy to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003, so in the upper right part of the performance display device 1600, an arrow bar of "left hit!" The rescue image and the arrow bar can be continuously displayed even when the variable display of the decoration pattern 1600a (special pattern) is not executed, and are continuously displayed at a display position not hidden (or overlapped) with the sound volume adjustment bar or the light amount adjustment bar, so that the player is prevented from leaving the seat by mistake in spite of the low-probability time-saving state B.例文帳に追加In addition, the display of the rescue notice image B called "Appearance of Helping!" And the "CHANCE!" Simable image can be displayed continuously when the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern 1600A (special pattern) has not been executed, and these images are not hidden in the volume adjustment bar or light volume adjustment bar. Or it is continuously displayed in the display position (not overlapping, so that the player is not accidentally separated even though the low -probability time -saving state B is close.

As shown in FIG. 197(L), after entering the "help mode L", if there is no suspension of special symbols and there is no entry into various winning holes for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), the effect display device 1600 performs a demonstration to introduce the concept of the pachinko machine 1. At the end of the demonstration effect, an "addiction prevention display" (not shown) is also executed to prevent the player from becoming too addicted to the game. The rescue image and the arrow bar can be continuously displayed even during the demonstration performance, and are continuously displayed at display positions that are not hidden (or overlapped) by the demonstration performance or the ``addiction prevention display'' to prevent the player from accidentally leaving the seat even in the low-probability time-saving state B.例文帳に追加In addition, the display of the relief notice image B "Help is imminent!" and the relief suggestion image "CHANCE!"

As shown in FIG. 197(M), after entering the "helper mode L", when a ball enters various winning openings such as the variable winning opening 2003, a variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a is executed. During execution of the demonstration effect, if a ball is entered into various winning holes such as the variable winning hole 2003, only the demonstration effect is terminated at that point, and the image during relief and the arrow bar continue to be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 197 (N), during the execution of the "help mode L", that is, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, when the 700th decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) fluctuation display is executed (when the total number of fluctuations in the special pattern in the low-probability state reaches 1300 times), in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600, the last decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) during the execution of the "help mode L" Fluctuation. A relief end image of "Help Last!" is displayed to notify that the display is on.

As shown in FIG. 197 (O), after execution of "help mode L", that is, after stopping the variable display of the 700th decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) during the control of the low probability time saving state B (after the stop of the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) of the 1300th total fluctuation number of special symbols in the low probability state), the low probability time saving state B is terminated and the transition to the low probability non-time saving state is performed. In the upper left part of 1600, "normal" is displayed to notify that the current game state is a low-probability non-time-saving state through "help mode L". Also, in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600, a rescue history image of "help L: 1 time" is displayed so that it can be grasped from the outside that the "help mode L" has been executed once. During the execution of the ``help mode L'', that is, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, before the variable display of the 700th decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is executed, if the lottery result becomes a ``jackpot'', the low-probability time-saving state B is ended and the game state corresponding to the type of ``jackpot'' is shifted to, so that the ``help mode L'' is ended at that point.

(Restrictions on count effects when a ball enters the second starting hole)
As described above, as a period before the number of fluctuations of the special symbols in the low probability state (the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol other than the big hit) reaches 600 times, for the 500th to 600th special symbol variation display, every time the variation display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) is stopped, a count effect is performed to notify how many times the special symbol has changed in the low probability state. However, when entering the second starting port 2005, the variable display of the second special symbol (decorative symbol) is performed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the entering ball. In addition, when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, although the counter for the number of rescues in the main control board 1310 is counted up, it is executed so as not to increase the number of variations of the special symbol notified by the count effect. Restrictions on the count effect when the ball enters the second starting port 2005 will be described below.

In this example, in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, a variable winning opening 2003, a first starting opening 2004, a second starting opening 2005, and a first big winning opening 2006 are provided as ball entrances into which the game ball B can enter. Of these, the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005 are always open at the top, so it is possible to enter both in the low probability non-time saving state. However, the game ball B released into the game area 5a from the stage 2513 of the center role 2500 is accepted in the first start hole 2004 with a high probability, but the second start hole 2005 has no possibility of accepting the game ball B released into the game area 5a from the stage 2513 of the center role 2500. Therefore, the game ball B hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the first starting hole 2004 with a higher probability than the second starting hole 2005 . In addition, since the second starting port 2005 has the same shape as the general winning port 2001 and is inconspicuous with respect to the first starting port 2004, in a low probability non-time saving state, it is difficult to notice even if there is a ball entering the second starting port 2005.

Also, when the ball enters the first starting port 2004, the first special symbol is displayed variably, and when the ball enters the second starting port 2005, the second special symbol is variably displayed.

In addition, in a low-probability non-time-saving state, when the ball enters the first starting port 2004 and the lottery for the first special pattern is lost, the variable display of the first special pattern is executed, and the variable display of the decoration pattern is executed on the performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加Also, the variation time of the first special symbol (decorative symbol) is set to about 5 to 10 seconds (in the case of deviation without reach). That is, in a low-probability non-time-saving state, when the ball enters the first starting port 2004 and the lottery for the first special pattern is lost, the variable display of the first special pattern (decorative pattern) is performed in a manner in which the ball is easily recognized.

On the other hand, in a low-probability non-time-saving state, when the ball enters the second starting port 2005 and the lottery of the second special pattern is lost or a small hit is made, the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, but the performance display device 1600 limits the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern. In addition, as the variation time of the second special symbol, about 0.1 second (in the case of loss without reach), which is extremely shorter than the variation time of the first special symbol, is set. In addition, during the variable display of the first special pattern, the performance sound associated with the variable display of the decorative pattern in the performance display device 1600 is output from the speaker, while the performance display device 1600 does not output the performance sound associated with the variable display of the decorative pattern in the performance display device 1600 during the variable display of the second special pattern. That is, in a low-probability non-time-saving state, when a ball is entered into the second starting port 2005 and the lottery of the second special pattern is lost or a small hit is made, the variable display of the second special pattern is executed in a manner in which it is difficult to recognize the entry. Thereby, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, it becomes difficult to notice the ball entering the second starting port 2005, and it is possible to make it difficult to grasp how many times the special symbol changes in the low-probability state. In the low-probability non-time-saving state, when the ball enters the second starting port 2005 and the lottery of the second special pattern is a big hit, the variation accompanying the reach as in the first special pattern and the output of the performance sound accompanying the variable display of the decorative pattern in the performance display device 1600 are executed without limiting the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern in the performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加

In this example, as described above, when the fluctuation of the special symbols is stopped, the main control board 1310 transmits the symbol confirmation command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the symbol confirmation command, thereby stopping the variable display of the decorative symbols in the effect display device 1600. However, when the number of times the special symbols fluctuate in the low probability state reaches 500 times, when the symbol confirmation command is transmitted, the main control board 1310 is sent separately from the symbol confirmation command. , a relief count command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . This relief count command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 each time a symbol determination command is transmitted while the number of special symbol variations in the low probability state is 500 to 600 times. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the relief count command is received to grasp how many times the special pattern changes in the low probability state, and when stopping the variable display of the decorative pattern in the performance display device 1600, the count performance for notifying the number of times the special pattern changes in the low probability state is executed.

Here, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, when the ball enters the first starting port 2004, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, but when the variation of the first special symbol stops, the relief count command A is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a relief count command. Then, the main control board 1310 counts up the relief number counter, and the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the relief count command A is received, thereby grasping how many times the first special symbol changes in the low probability state, and when the variation display of the first special symbol (decorative symbol) is stopped, the number of variations of the special symbol notified by the count performance is increased.

On the other hand, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, when the ball enters the second starting port 2005, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, but when the variation of the second special symbol stops, the relief count command B is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a relief count command. Then, the main control board 1310 counts up the relief number counter, and the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the relief count command B is received, thereby grasping how many times the second special symbol changes in the low probability state, but when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped, the number of variations of the special symbols notified by the count performance is not increased, and a deviation from the actual number of variations of the special symbols is caused. In other words, when the ball enters the second starting port 2005 during the execution of the count performance, the number of variations of the special symbols by the relief number counter on the main control board 1310 does not match the number of variations of the special symbols notified by the count performance on the peripheral control board 1510.例文帳に追加In this way, when the ball enters the second start port 2005 during execution of the count performance, the counter of the number of times of relief in the main control board 1310 is counted up, but the number of variations of the special symbols notified by the count performance is not increased, so that it becomes difficult to notice the ball entering the second start port 2005, and from the count performance, it is difficult to grasp how many times the actual number of variations of the special symbols is.

The peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the relief count command B is received, and the number of times the relief count command B is received is added to the number of variations of the special pattern notified by the count performance at a predetermined timing during execution of the count performance. In this example, among the 500th to 600th variation display of the special symbols during the execution of the count performance, 520 times, 540 times, 560 times, 580 times and 596 times are set as the predetermined timing, and when these times are reached, the number of times of receiving the relief count command B (difference accumulated without addition) is added to the number of variations of the special symbols notified by the count performance. That is, for example, when the number of variations of the special symbol notified by the count effect is 520 times, the number of balls entered into the second starting port 2005 during the 500th to 520th variation display of the special symbol corresponds to "the number of times the relief count command B is received (difference accumulated without addition)", and the number of times is added to the number of times of variation of the special symbol notified by the count effect. As a result, there is a possibility that the number of variations of the special symbols notified by the count effect may suddenly increase at once, so that the count effect can be paid attention to with anticipation. The number of times the relief count command B is received may be calculated by calculating a difference, or a counter may be separately provided to count only the number of times the relief count command B is received, and the value may be referred to and cleared at each predetermined timing.

In the above, as the predetermined timing, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol notified by the count effect is a predetermined number, the number of times of receiving the relief count command B is added to the number of times of variation of the special symbol notified by the count effect. It may be when the knowledge is dissolved.

FIG. 198 is a concrete example of effect when the ball enters the second start hole 2005 during execution of the count effect.

As shown in FIG. 198(A), as a period before the number of variations of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 times, from the 500th variation display of the special symbols, every time the variation display of the decorative symbol 1600a (special symbol) is stopped, a count effect is executed in the upper part of the effect display device 1600 to notify how many times the number of variations of the special symbols in the low probability state is. In this example, it is the time when the 505th variation display of the special symbol is stopped, and the relief notice image A of "505 variation" corresponding to the 505th variation of the special symbol in the low probability state is displayed. It should be noted that, during the variable display of the special symbol (decorative symbol 1600a), when there is a ball entering the second starting port 2005, the second special symbol pending display 1600d (second special symbol variable display is waiting) is displayed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the ball entering the second start opening 2005 during execution of the count effect. Also, from the viewpoint of making it more difficult to notice the ball entering the second starting port 2005 during the execution of the count effect, the second special symbol pending display 1600d may not be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

As shown in FIGS. 198B and 198C, during the execution of the count effect, as the 506th special symbol variable display, when the second special symbol variable display based on the ball entering the second starting port 2005 is performed, the decorative symbol 1600a is not displayed variable and the decorative symbol 1600a is continuously displayed until 0.1 seconds have elapsed as the second special symbol variable time. However, regarding the identification symbol 1600b displayed in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600, the variable display is performed until 0.1 seconds elapse as the variation time of the second special symbol. When the variable display of such a second special symbol is stopped, it is executed so as not to be added to the number of variations of the special symbol notified by the count effect. That is, although the number of times of variation of the special pattern in the low probability state is the 506th time (relief number counter=506), the number of times of variation of the special pattern notified by the count performance remains ``505 variation'' and does not change, and the variation of unadded (difference) is ``1''.

As shown in FIGS. 198(D) and (E), during the execution of the count effect, as the 507th special symbol variation display, when the first special symbol variation display based on the ball entering the first starting port 2004 is performed, when the variation of the first special symbol (decorative symbol 1600a) is stopped, the number of variations of the special symbol notified in the count effect is added. In other words, although the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 507th (relief counter=507), "506 variation" is displayed as the number of variations of the special symbol notified in the count effect. Here, too, the state in which the unadded (difference) variation is "1" is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 198(F), during execution of the count effect, as the 521st special symbol variation display, when the first special symbol variation display based on the ball entering the first starting port 2004 is performed, when the variation of the first special symbol (decorative symbol 1600a) is stopped, the number of variations of the special symbol notified in the count effect is added. In this example, although the number of special symbol variations in the low-probability state is the 521st (relief number counter=521), "519 variation" is displayed as the number of special symbol variations notified in the count effect. That is, here, there is a state in which there are "2" fluctuations that have not been added (differences).

As shown in FIGS. 198(G) and (H), during execution of the count effect, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting port 2004 as the 522nd special symbol variable display, an increase effect image "Increase chance!" When the number of balls entered into the second start port 2005 is 2 (there is ``2'' variation of the unadded (difference)) during the variation display of the special symbols in which the number of variations of the special symbols notified by the count performance is 500 to 520, +2 is added to the number of variations of the special symbols notified by the count performance when the variation of the first special symbol (decorative symbol 1600a) is stopped. That is, while the number of times of variation of special symbols in the low probability state is the 522nd time (relief frequency counter=522), ``520 variations + 2 variations!'' is displayed as the number of times of variations of special symbols notified in the count performance, and the number of times of variation of special symbols coincides, and the variation of unadded (difference) becomes ``0''.

As shown in FIGS. 198(I) and (J), during the execution of the count effect, as the 523rd special symbol variable display, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting port 2004, when the variation of the first special symbol (decorative symbol 1600a) is stopped, it is executed so as to be added to the number of variations of the special symbol notified in the count effect. That is, while the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is the 523rd (relief number counter=523), "523 variation" is displayed as the number of variations of the special symbol notified by the count effect.

As described above in detail, during the execution of the count performance, in the 597th to 600th variable display of the special symbols, every time the variable display of the decorative symbols 1600a (special symbols) is stopped, the stop symbol (relief notice image B) of the decorative symbols 1600a indicating how many times the special symbols have changed in the low probability state is stopped and displayed as the count performance. In such a period, even when the variable display of the second special pattern based on the ball entering the second starting port 2005 is executed, the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a is not executed, and the stop pattern of the decorative pattern 1600a indicating how many times the special pattern is changed in the low probability state is not displayed. However, except for the case where the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, the stop pattern (relief notice image B) of the decorative pattern 1600a indicating the actual number of times the special pattern fluctuates in the low probability state is stopped and displayed. For example, during the execution of the count effect, of the 597th to 600th special symbol variation displays, only the 598th special symbol variation display is the second special symbol variation display, and the other special symbol variation display is the first special symbol variation display. 00”, and the count effect proceeds in the form of excluding the 598th special symbol variable display (second special symbol variable display). It should be noted that if all the 597th to 600th special symbol variation displays during the execution of the count effect are the second special symbol variation displays, the relief confirmation image shown in FIG. 197 (J) will be displayed in the 600th special symbol variation display without any stop symbol (relief advance notice image B) of the decorative symbol 1600a indicating how many times the special symbol variation is in the low probability state. In such a case, it is possible to give the player another surprise that the "help mode L" is suddenly started, and it is possible to avoid a decrease in interest even if the count effect is not executed.

Further, as described above, during the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) and during the non-variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern), the volume level can be changed by operating the volume button, and the light quantity level can be changed by operating the light quantity button. In this respect, if there is no suspension of the special pattern after the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is stopped, the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a is not executed, and when the volume button and the light amount button are operated, the operation sound is output from the speaker. On the other hand, when executing the variable display of the second special pattern based on the ball entering the second starting port 2005 during the execution of the count performance, even though the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a is not executed, when the volume button and the light amount button are operated, the operation sound is restricted so as not to be output from the speaker. As a result, when executing the variable display of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 2005 during the execution of the count performance, the performance sound during the game is not disturbed by the operation sound when the sound volume button and the light amount button are operated. In addition, when the volume button and the light amount button are operated while the decorative pattern 1600a is being non-variably displayed, whether or not the second special pattern is being variably displayed can be confirmed by whether or not the operation sound is output from the speaker.

In this example, when the ball enters the first starting port 2004, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, and when the ball enters the second starting port 2005, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. On the other hand, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be performed at the same time. Specifically, the second starting port 2005 is arranged so as to enter a large amount of balls in a low-probability non-time-saving state. At this time, the second start port 2005 is frequently entered, but the variation time of the second special symbol based on the second start port 2005 is set to a very long time (for example, 180 seconds) in a low probability non-time saving state. In other words, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 2005 is not frequently executed in the low-probability non-time-saving state, so that the ball is entered into the first starting port 2004 and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. This is the mainstream of the game. In such a configuration, when executing the variable display of the second special pattern, the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a in the performance display device 1600 is restricted, and when the variable display of the second special pattern is stopped, the number of fluctuations of the special pattern notified by the count performance is not increased. Further, the number of variations of the second special symbol not notified by the count performance is added to the number of variations of the special symbol notified by the count performance at a predetermined timing during execution of the count performance. Thereby, there can exist an effect similar to the above. After a special jackpot game (jackpot controlled to a non-time-saving state after the jackpot game) or after the number of times of variation of special symbols reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 600 variations after power-on), the variation time of the second special symbols based on the ball entering the second starting port 2005 is shortened so that the variation display of the second special symbols based on the ball entering the second starting port 2005 is frequently executed. This makes it possible to shift from the non-time-saving state to the time-saving state by reaching 600 times (relief counter = 600) in the number of fluctuations of the special symbols in the low-probability state. (Relief number counter=600) can be easily approached, and the game can be continued with anticipation.

In the above, the probability that the lottery result of the normal pattern in the normal lottery in the low probability non-time saving state and the high probability non-time saving state is “normal hit” is 0/100, and the probability that the lottery result of the normal pattern is “normal hit” in the normal lottery in other game states (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state A, low probability time saving state B, low probability time saving state C) is set to 100/100, but not limited to this, low probability non The probability that the lottery result of the normal pattern in the normal lottery in the time saving state and the high probability non-working time saving state is ``normal hit'' is set to 1/100, and the probability that the lottery result of the normal pattern is ``normal win'' in the other game states (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state A, low probability time saving state B, low probability time saving state C) may be set to 100/100. In this case, the possibility of receiving the game ball B in the variable winning opening 2003 in the low probability non-time saving state increases slightly, and the frequency of sending the relief count command B increases (not only when the second special symbol variation display due to the ball entering the second start opening 2005 is stopped, but also when the second special symbol variation display due to the ball entering the variable winning opening 2003 is stopped). Therefore, as described above, the number of times the relief count command B is received is predetermined. It is possible to further increase the range of addition in the performance to be added at the timing of , thereby further improving the amusement of the game. In addition, when there is a possibility that the game ball B may be received in the variable winning opening 2003 in a low-probability non-time-saving state, it is not always necessary to provide the second starting opening 2005 whose upper side is always open, and only the relief count command B caused by the ball entering the variable winning opening 2003 may be used to add the number of times it is received at a predetermined timing.

In the above description, the gate 2002, the variable winning opening 2003, the first starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening 2005 are provided in the area on the left side of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a. Even in such a case, there is a possibility that the launch ball, etc. that the players accidentally hit the right hit at the normal time (low -probability non -time short -time state) may enter at the 2003 or the second start of 2005, and send the rescue count command B even when the fluctuation display of the second special picture associated with such a ball is suspended. As such, the same gaming effect can be performed as the above by performing the effect of adding the number of times the rescue count command B receives at the predetermined timing.

In addition, in the above, when the variable display of the second special pattern is stopped, the number of variations of the special symbols notified by the count performance is not increased, and a deviation from the actual number of variations of the special symbols is caused, and it is desirable to make the players aware of the deviation as much as possible. In view of this point, it is desirable that the player is difficult to see the general data display provided in the game hall when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in a normal posture. For example, since the general data display provided in the game hall is positioned above the pachinko machine 1, it is preferable to decorate the door frame top unit 450 of the pachinko machine 1 so that the upper side cannot be seen through, and to design the amount of protrusion to the player side (front side) to such an extent that the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 does not look up and the data display is difficult to see. If the door frame top unit 450 is protruded to such an extent that the data display becomes difficult to see, it may become difficult to operate the attendant call button provided in a general data display.

(Modification)
Next, a modified example that is partially different from the above-described effect example will be described below. In the modified example, after the power is turned on with clearing of the RAM or after the execution of the jackpot game, the number of variations of the special symbols in the low probability state (the number of variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol other than the jackpot) in the low probability state is counted against the relief number counter, and when the number of variations of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), it is the same in that it is controlled to the low probability time saving state B, but the relief number counter is the same in that it is controlled not only when the special symbol is displayed. , It is possible to count even when special symbols are displayed non-variably.

In the modified example, when the fluctuation of the special symbols is stopped, the pattern confirmation command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 to stop the variable display of the decorative symbols in the effect display device 1600. However, when the number of times the special symbols are changed in the low probability state reaches 500 times, when the symbol confirmation command is transmitted, the main control board 1310 transmits the relief count command A to the peripheral control board 1510 separately from the symbol confirmation command. This relief count command A is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 each time a symbol confirmation command is transmitted, while the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state is 500 to 600 times. The peripheral control board 1510 has a dedicated counter for counting the number of times the relief count command A is received, and stores the number of times the relief count command A is received. In this way, the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the relief count command A is received, and recognizes that the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state has reached 500 times by receiving the relief count command for the first time, and recognizes that the number of times of variation of the special symbol in the low probability state has reached 501 times by receiving the relief count command for the second time. Based on the grasped number of fluctuations, it is possible to increase the number of fluctuations of the special symbols notified by the count production when the variable display of the decorative symbols in the production display device 1600 is stopped.

In the modified example, when a specific condition such as entering a winning hole (for example, the general winning hole 2001) for which variable display of special symbols is not executed is established, the variable display of special symbols is not executed, but the main control board 1310 counts up the relief number counter. In other words, in the modified example, since the variable display of the special pattern is not executed, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed either, and only when the specific condition is established, the number of times of variation of the special pattern can be counted up by the counter of the number of times of relief. At this time, the pattern confirmation command is not transmitted, but the relief count command B is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 . This relief count command B is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 each time a specific condition is satisfied while the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state is 500 to 600 times. Then, the main control board 1310 counts up the number of times of variation of the special symbols by the relief number counter, and the peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the relief count command B is received, thereby grasping how many times the specific condition is met. In other words, when a specific condition is established during the execution of the count performance, the number of variations of the special symbols by the relief frequency counter on the main control board 1310 does not match the number of variations of the special symbols notified by the count performance on the peripheral control board 1510.例文帳に追加In this way, when a specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the count performance, the number of times of variation of the special symbols is counted up by the counter of the number of times of relief in the main control board 1310, but the number of times of variation of the special symbols notified by the count performance is not increased.

In the above description, the specific condition is satisfied when the ball enters a winning opening (for example, the general winning opening 2001) in which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed.

The peripheral control board 1510 counts the number of times the relief count command B is received, and the number of times the relief count command B is received is added to the number of variations of the special pattern notified by the count performance at a predetermined timing during execution of the count performance. In this example, among the 500th to 600th special symbol variation displays during execution of the count performance, 520 times, 540 times, 560 times, 580 times, and 596 times of the special symbol variation times notified by the count performance are set as predetermined timing, and when these times are reached, the number of times of receiving the relief count command B (difference accumulated without addition) is added to the special symbol variation times notified by the count performance. That is, for example, when the number of times of variation of the special symbols notified by the count performance is 520 times, the number of times that the specific condition is met during the 500th to 520th variation display of the special symbols corresponds to "the number of times the relief count command B is received (difference accumulated without addition)", and the number of times is added to the number of times of variation of the special symbols notified by the count performance. As a result, there is a possibility that the number of fluctuations of the special symbols notified in the count effect may suddenly increase at once, so that the count effect can be paid attention to with anticipation. The number of times the relief count command B is received may be calculated by calculating a difference, or a counter may be separately provided to count only the number of times the relief count command B is received, and the value may be referred to and cleared at each predetermined timing.

In the above, as the predetermined timing, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol notified by the count effect is a predetermined number, the number of times of receiving the relief count command B is added to the number of times of variation of the special symbol notified by the count effect. It may be when the knowledge is canceled or the like.

When the variation of the special symbols and the decorative symbols is stopped, the number of times of variation of the special symbols is counted up by the relief frequency counter of the main control board 1310, and the information about the number of variations of the special symbols by the relief frequency counter is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 558.例文帳に追加Similarly, even when a specific condition is established, the number of special symbol variations is counted up by the relief number counter on the main control board 1310, and information on the number of special symbol variations by the relief number counter is output to the outside through the external terminal board 558. As a result, when the specific condition is established, the number of fluctuations of the special pattern by the counter for the number of relief is counted up, but the number of fluctuations of the special pattern notified by the count performance is not increased, so that the number of times of variation of the special symbols by the number of relief counter of the main control board 1310 cannot be grasped from the count performance, but the number of times of variation of the special pattern by the counter of the number of relief of the main control board 1310 can be grasped from the outside. In other words, the hall manager can monitor whether or not an act of illegally establishing a specific condition is performed by checking whether or not the number of fluctuations of the special symbol by the relief number counter on the main control board 1310 is abnormally increased.

Further, when a special abnormality such as detection of a magnet or vibration occurs in the pachinko machine 1, progress of the game is stopped. In other words, when a special abnormality occurs, even if a ball is entered into the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005, the special symbol and the decorative symbol are not changed and displayed, and the number of special symbol variations is not counted up by the relief number counter in the main control board 1310, and the information before the occurrence of the special abnormality (the number of special symbol variations by the relief number counter in the main control board 1310) is held. Similarly, when a special abnormality occurs, even if a specific condition is satisfied, the number of times of variation of the special pattern is not counted up by the counter of the number of times of relief in the main control board 1310, and the information before the occurrence of the special abnormality (the number of times of variation of the special pattern by the counter of the number of relief of the main control board 1310) is held. As a result, when a special abnormality occurs, it is possible to prevent an act of illegally counting up the number of fluctuations of the special symbol by the relief number counter on the main control board 1310 .

[Example of directing for immediate short hit]
In the present example, in the low probability non-shortening working hours state, when the lottery result becomes "immediate short hit", it is controlled to the low probability short working hours state C. Here, with reference to FIG. 199, a specific example of effect until the lottery result becomes "immediate short hit" will be described.

As shown in FIG. 199(A), when a variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the variation display of the decorative pattern 1600a is executed in the central part of the effect display device 1600. FIG. Specifically, until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command elapses, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns 1600a are variably displayed, and are stopped and displayed in the order of the left decorative design→right decorative design→middle decorative design. As the stop design of the decorative design 1600a, the design corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed.

Further, when a variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600, a variable display of an identification pattern 1600b that is smaller than the decorative pattern and is less noticeable is executed. Specifically, until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command elapses, the identification symbol 1600b is variably displayed as ◯ and x, and is stopped at either ◯ or x. As the stop symbol of the identification symbol 1600b, ◯ is displayed when the lottery result is a hit (big hit, small hit, or immediate short win), and x is stop-displayed when the lottery result is a loss. In addition to this example, when the purpose is to conceal the fact that the lottery result is an immediate short win as much as possible, as the stop symbol of the identification symbol 1600b, when the lottery result is a big win or a small win, ◯ is stop-displayed, and when the lottery result is an immediate short win or a loss, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize that it is an immediate short win from the stop symbol of the identification symbol 1600b.

In addition, in the lower part of the effect display device 1600, a first special symbol pending display 1600c (a state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is on standby) and a second special symbol pending display 1600d (a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is on standby) are enabled. Specifically, the reserved display 1600c of the first special symbol is displayed in the lower left corner of the effect display device 1600 by the number of reservations, and the reserved display 1600d of the second special symbol is displayed in the lower right part of the production display device 1600 by the number of reservations. Then, when the variable display of the reserved symbols is started, the reserved displays 1600c and 1600d for the start are erased. However, the reserved displays 1600c and 1600d of the special symbols may be continuously displayed after the start of the variable display of the reserved special symbols until the end of the variable display of the special symbols.

Also, in the upper left part of the effect display device 1600, a state display indicating the current game state is executed. In this example, the current gaming state is a low probability non-time saving state, and displays "normally" corresponding to the low probability non-working time saving state.

As shown in FIGS. 199(B) and (C), during the variable display of the decorative design 1600a (special design), when there is a reservation of the special design where the ball enters the first starting port 2004 and the lottery result is "immediate short hit", a special design reservation display (at the bottom left of FIGS. 199(B) and (C)) indicating that the special design with the lottery result is "immediate short hit" is reserved as the first special design reservation display 1600c. Displaying face hold). In addition, when a special pattern is displayed on hold, a balloon comment "Shall I help you?" Thus, it is possible to know in advance that a ``help mode'' will be entered by executing the variable display of the special pattern corresponding to the reserved display of the special pattern in a period before the start of the variable display of the special pattern in which the lottery result is ``immediate short win''. In addition, in this example, the special pattern pending display (face pending displayed at the bottom left of FIGS. 197(C) to (G)) and the special pattern pending display (face pending displayed at the bottom left of FIGS. 199(B) and (C)) indicating that the special pattern is pending where the lottery result is "immediate short win" (FIG. 199(B), (C)). Although images are used, it is possible to distinguish whether ``the 600th special pattern variable display'' is intended or ``immediate short hit'' is intended depending on the presence or absence of a balloon comment ``Do you want to help?''. In addition, if it is possible to more reliably distinguish whether the intended ``fluctuation display of the special pattern for the 600th time'' or the intended ``immediate short hit'' is intended, it is preferable to make the reserved images of common patterns different in color pattern or to make the reserved images of patterns different in shape from each other.

In this example, as a specific example of displaying a special pattern pending display that suggests that a special pattern that will be an "immediate short hit" is reserved, when a ball enters various winning ports such as the first start port 2004, a pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. The kind of small winning in the case of winning, the kind of immediate short winning in the case of immediate short winning, the big winning, the small winning, and the type of immediate short winning in the case of no immediate short winning, execution of ready-to-win performance as the game performance executed by the performance display device 1600, or the mode type of the game performance to be executed (type of variation pattern) are specified. When the immediate short win is specified as the advance determination information, a special pattern is displayed as the hold display when the hold display is displayed, and a look-ahead performance is executed to suggest that the lottery result is the holding of the special pattern of 'immediate short win'. In addition, regarding the reserved display of the special pattern, the pattern may be changed according to the type of immediate short hit. Further, the reservation display of the special pattern may be displayed not only when it is specified as the advance judgment information that it will become an immediate short win, but also when it will not become an immediate short win, and even if such a reservation display of a special pattern is displayed, a fake performance may be executed so that the short win does not occur immediately. In addition, when the pending display of the special pattern is displayed by specifying that the immediate short win is to be performed as the advance determination information, the pending display of the special pattern may be immediately displayed on the performance display device 1600, or after once displaying the normal pending image (such as the above-mentioned pending image of "○") on the performance display device 1600, a predetermined change performance with voice, vibration, character image, etc. is performed at a predetermined timing, and the normal pending image is changed to the pending display of the special pattern. You may do so. In addition, when it is not specified that it will be an immediate short hit as the advance determination information, after temporarily displaying a normal pending image (such as the above-mentioned pending image of "○"), at a predetermined timing, voice, vibration, character image, etc. A predetermined change effect is performed, and after such a change effect, the normal pending image is maintained (not changed to a pending display of a special pattern).

As described above, when it is specified as the advance determination information that it will be an immediate short win, when the reservation display is displayed, a prefetching effect is executed that suggests that the lottery result is an ``immediate short win'' and that the special symbol is reserved. Specifically, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, when an immediate short-hit win occurs, the low-probability time-saving state C is controlled until the variable display of the special pattern reaches a predetermined number of times (20, 40, or 100 times in this example), but after the immediate short-hit pattern corresponding to such an immediate short-hit is stopped, the execution of the look-ahead performance suggesting an "immediate short-hit" is restricted. Here, as game states other than the low-probability non-time-saving state, in the high-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability short-time working state, low-probability short-time working state A, low-probability short-time working state B, and low-probability short-time working state C, an ``immediate short-win pattern invalid period'' in which control to the low-probability short-working-time state C is not performed when an immediate short-win occurs is set. In other words, in the low-probability time-saving state C after the stop of the immediate short-win pattern corresponding to the immediate short-win, there is a possibility that the lottery result will be 'immediate short-win', but the lottery result will be 'immediate short-win' so that the low-probability time-saving state C is not controlled again. In addition, when an immediate short winning occurs during the immediate short winning design invalid period, in the variable display of the special symbols in the function display unit 1400, the immediate short winning symbols are stopped and displayed as the stop symbols of the special symbols. . In this regard, in this example, even if it is specified as the preliminary determination information that the immediate short winning will be realized after the immediate short winning pattern corresponding to the immediate short winning is stopped, by not executing the look-ahead performance suggesting the ``immediate short winning'', it is possible to reduce the sense of loss caused by the immediate short winning becoming invalid without grasping that the immediate short winning becomes invalid during the immediate short winning pattern invalid period.

In addition, in the game states other than the low-probability non-time-saving state set as the ``immediate short-time winning symbol invalid period'' that is not controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C (high-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low probability time-saving state A, low probability time-saving state B, low-probability time-saving state C), the execution of the look-ahead performance suggesting ``immediate short win'' is restricted even for the holding of the first start port 2004 that is to be displayed in a variable display after the final variable display. For example, when it is controlled to a low-probability time-saving state C of 100 times in response to an immediate short win A, even if four game balls enter the first starting port 2004 during the final (100th) special symbol variation display, and even if the lottery result includes a special symbol hold in which the lottery result is an "immediate short win", a look-ahead performance suggesting an "immediate short win" is not executed for all the holds occurring during the final round of variable display. However, regarding the suspension of the first starting port 2004, which will be displayed in a variable display after the final variable display, since the variable display is performed after the end of the "immediate short winning design invalid period", execution of the look-ahead effect suggesting "immediate short winning" is restricted. In addition to stop-displaying the winning design, in the variable display of the decorative design 1600a on the performance display device 1600, the immediate short winning design (combination of "547" design) is stop-displayed as the stop design of the decorative design 1600a. As a result, while preventing the execution of the look-ahead performance suggesting the ``immediate short winning pattern invalid period'' within the ``immediate short winning pattern invalid period'', after the ``immediate short winning pattern invalid period'' ends, the player can grasp the occurrence of the immediate short winning as in the case of the immediate short winning during the normal game.

In the low-probability non-time-saving state, when an immediate short-time hit occurs, the low-probability time-saving state C is controlled until the variable display of the special pattern reaches a predetermined number of times (in this example, either 20 times, 40 times, or 100 times), but after the variable display of the special pattern reaches the predetermined number of times, the state is shifted to the low-probability non-time-saving state. After the stop of the immediate short winning pattern corresponding to the immediate short winning, and after the variable display of the special pattern reaches a predetermined number of times, it is possible to execute the look-ahead performance suggesting the ``immediate short winning'' when specifying the immediate short winning as the preliminary judgment information. Thus, after stopping the immediate short winning pattern corresponding to the immediate short winning, after the variable display of the special pattern reaches the prescribed number of times, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the look-ahead performance suggesting the ``immediate short winning'' is executed.

In addition, as the look-ahead performance, when it is specified as the advance determination information that the immediate short win will occur, when the reservation displays 1600c and 1600d are displayed, the lottery result is ``immediate short win''. A look-ahead effect that suggests that it is on hold is being executed. After the immediate short winning pattern corresponding to the immediate short winning is stopped, the execution of the look-ahead performance suggesting the ``immediate short winning'' is restricted, whereas the execution of the look-ahead performance suggesting the ``big win'' is not restricted. In this way, after the immediate short winning pattern corresponding to the immediate short winning is stopped, all the look-ahead performance is not restricted, but only the execution of the look-ahead performance suggesting the ``immediate short winning'' is restricted, so that the player can pay attention to whether or not the look-ahead performance is executed with expectation.

As shown in FIGS. 199(D) and (E), when the variable display of the decorative pattern (special pattern) in which the lottery result is "immediate short winning" is executed, the stop pattern of the decorative pattern 1600a is stopped at the pattern of "547" (a specific pattern among the missing patterns), and the picture patterns associated with the number patterns are stopped and displayed to be the same pattern.

As shown in FIG. 199 (F), in the low probability non-time saving state, when the lottery result becomes "immediate short hit", it is controlled to the low probability time saving state C and time saving is given. In this example, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, the lottery result becomes ``immediate short-time hit'', so that the low-probability time-saving state C is controlled until the variable display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times, and the period of control to such a low-probability time-saving state C is called a ``help mode S''. In the performance display device 1600, when the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) where the lottery result is ``immediate short win'' is stopped, a relief fixed image ``entering the help mode S!!'' is displayed so as to notify the entry into the ``help mode S''. The predetermined number of times is set to 100 times when the lottery result is ``immediate short win A'', 40 times when ``immediate short win B'', and 20 times when ``immediate short win C''.

As shown in FIG. 199(G), after entering the "help mode S", if there is no suspension of the special pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is not immediately started, and a volume adjustment bar indicating the currently set volume level and a light amount adjustment bar indicating the currently set light amount level are displayed at the bottom of the effect display device 1600. The volume adjustment bar can change the memory display as the volume button is operated to change the volume level, and the light amount adjustment bar can change the memory display as the light amount button is operated to change the light amount level. In addition, during variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) and during non-variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern), it is possible to change the sound volume level and the light amount level. In this way, after the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is stopped, when the special pattern is not suspended and the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is not executed, by displaying the volume adjustment bar and the light amount adjustment bar, it is possible to know that the volume level and the light amount level can be changed.

In addition, after entering the ``help mode S'', the upper left part of the performance display device 1600 displays a relief image ``in the help mode S'' indicating that the low-probability time-saving state C is being controlled as a state display indicating the current game state. In addition, in the low-probability time-saving state C, it becomes easy to accept the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003, so in the upper right part of the performance display device 1600, an arrow bar of "left hit!" The rescue image and the arrow bar can be continuously displayed even when the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is not executed, and are continuously displayed at a display position not hidden (or overlapped) with the sound volume adjustment bar or the light amount adjustment bar, so that the player does not accidentally leave the seat even in the low-probability time-saving state C.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 199(H), after entering the "help mode S", if there is no suspension of special symbols and there is no entry into various winning holes for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), a demonstration to introduce the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is executed in the effect display device 1600. At the end of the demonstration effect, an "addiction prevention display (not shown)" is also executed to prevent the player from becoming too addicted to the game. The image during relief and the arrow bar can be continuously displayed even during the demonstration performance, and are continuously displayed at a display position not hidden (or overlapped) by the demonstration performance and the "prevention display for immersion", so that the player is prevented from accidentally leaving the seat despite the low-probability time-saving state C.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 199(I), after entering the "help mode S", when a ball enters various prize winning openings such as the variable winning opening 2003, the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a is performed. During execution of the demonstration effect, if a ball is entered into various winning holes such as the variable winning hole 2003, only the demonstration effect is terminated at that point, and the image during relief and the arrow bar are continued to be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 199 (J), during the execution of the "help mode S", that is, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C, when the variable display of the decorative design 1600a (special design) for the predetermined number of times (for example, the 100th time when the lottery result is "immediate short hit A") is executed, in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600, the last decorative design 1600a (special design) during the execution of the "help mode S" is the variable display. A rescue end image is displayed that says "Help last!"

As shown in FIG. 199 (K), after the execution of "help mode S", that is, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C, a predetermined number of times (for example, the 100th time when the lottery result is "immediate short-time hit A") After the stop of the variable display of the decorative symbol (special design), the low-probability time-saving state C is terminated and the transition is made to the low-probability non-time-saving state. "Normal" is displayed to notify you that you are in a low-probability non-time-saving state. Also, in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600, a relief history image of "Help S: 1 time" is displayed so that the player can recognize from the outside that the "Help mode S" has been executed once. During the execution of the ``help mode S'', i.e., during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C, before the variable display of the decorative pattern 1600a (special pattern) is executed for the predetermined number of times, if the lottery result becomes a ``jackpot'', the low-probability time-saving state C is terminated and the game state shifts to the game state corresponding to the type of ``jackpot'', so the ``help mode S'' is ended at that point.

[Regarding the count suppression period]
In this example, after power-on accompanied by RAM clearing or execution of a big win game, the number of variations of special symbols in the low probability state (rescue number counter) is counted, and when the number of variations of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter=600), the low probability time saving state B is controlled. Here, only the number of variations of special symbols in a low probability state is counted after power-on accompanied by RAM clearing or after execution of a big win game, and in a high probability state, a 'count suppression period' is set in which the number of variations of special symbols is not counted. On the other hand, in the low probability state, regardless of whether it is a non-time saving state or a time saving state, the number of times of special pattern fluctuation is counted. However, part of the low probability non-time saving state among the low probability states is set as a "count suppression period" in which the number of times of special pattern fluctuation is not counted. With reference to FIG. 200, the count suppression period set to a part of low-probability non-shortening of working hours state among such low-probability states is demonstrated. FIG. 200 is a time chart showing the count suppression period.

First, in the count effective period, when entering the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 in the low probability non-time saving state and executing the variable display of the special symbol, the relief number counter in the main control board 1310 is counted up and updated to approach the relief number counter = 600 that will be controlled to the low probability time saving state B. On the other hand, in the count suppression period, when entering the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 in the low probability non-time saving state and executing the variable display of the special symbol, the relief number counter in the main control board 1310 is not counted up.

In addition, a plurality of types of count suppression periods are provided. Regarding the count suppression period A, in a low-probability non-time-saving state, when the ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 and the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the relief number counter in the main control board 1310 is not counted up, and the relief number counter is maintained. In addition, regarding the count suppression period B, when entering the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 in the low probability non-time saving state and executing the variable display of the special symbol, the relief number counter in the main control board 1310 is counted down and updated to move away from the relief number counter = 600 that will be controlled to the low probability time saving state B. In other words, the count suppression period B is farther from the relief number counter = 600 that is controlled to the low probability time saving state B, and it becomes difficult to reach the relief number counter = 600 after that, so it is a period more disadvantageous than the count suppression period A.

In addition, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, when it is determined by lottery to generate the count suppression period, the start condition of the count suppression period is established, and the count suppression period is generated. In this example, when it is decided by lottery to generate the count suppression period, the count suppression period is suddenly generated by not notifying the fact. Therefore, at the start of the count suppression period, it is difficult to notice whether or not the count suppression period has started. However, when it is determined by lottery that the count suppression period should be generated, the fact may be notified. In this example, when it is determined by lottery to generate the count suppression period in the low probability non-time saving state, the start condition of the count suppression period is satisfied.

Further, after the start of the count suppression period, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the end condition of the count suppression period is established, and the count suppression period is terminated. However, in addition to this, for example, after the start of the count suppression period, the end condition of the count suppression period may be established when it is determined by lottery to end the count suppression period.

As shown in FIG. 200, in the count effective period in the low-probability non-time-saving state, each time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the special symbol is displayed, the relief counter in the main control board 1310 is counted up. In this example, when the variable displays A to C of the special symbols are executed, the relief number counter in the main control board 1310 is counted up, and the relief number counter changes from 450→451→452.

In addition, in the count valid period in the low probability non-time saving state, every time the player enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and executes the variable display of the special symbol, the information on the number of times the special symbol is changed is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal unit 558. Specifically, a hall computer and an external information device provided on the top of the pachinko machine 1 are connected via the external terminal portion 558 . The external display device displays information about the number of times the special symbol changes, information about the number of big hits, and the like. In this example, when executing the variable displays A to C of the special symbols, the information on the number of times of variation of the special symbols is output toward the external display device, and the number of times of variation of the special symbols displayed on the external display device is changed from 450→451→452.

In addition, in the count effective period in the low-probability non-time-saving state, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variable display of the special pattern is executed, the normal performance is executed when the performance corresponding to the variation pattern is executed in the performance display device 1600.

Next, in the count suppression period A, which is started when the start condition of the count suppression period A is established, each time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the relief number counter in the main control board 1310 is not counted up, and the relief number counter is maintained. In this example, during the count suppression period A, when the variable displays D, E, etc. of the special symbols are executed, the relief number counter in the main control board 1310 is not counted up, and the relief number counter is maintained at 452.

In addition, in the count suppression period A, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the special symbol variation display is executed, information regarding the number of variations of the special symbol is output to the external display device. In this example, during the count suppression period A, when performing the variation displays D, E, etc. of the special symbols, information on the number of variations of the special symbols is output toward the external display device, and the number of variations of the special symbols displayed on the external display device changes from 453→454→(+1 per 1 variation).

In addition, in the count suppression period A, the performance display device 1600 performs different performances such as a special symbol variation display D that is the first variation display of the special symbols and a special symbol variation display E that is the second and subsequent special symbol variation displays. Here, during the execution of the special symbol variation display D during the execution of the first special symbol variation display in the count suppression period A, when the performance corresponding to the variation pattern is performed, the special symbol variation display A to C in the count effective period and the common performance that is the same in terms of the background image and the like are performed. Thus, when the count suppression period A starts, it is not clearly notified, so it is difficult to recognize whether it is the count valid period or the count suppression period A, and it is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice that a period more disadvantageous than the count valid period has started.

On the other hand, in the count suppression period A, during the execution of the special symbol variation display E during the execution of the second and subsequent special symbol variation displays, a pinch performance 1 (specific performance) suggesting that it is the count suppression period A is performed when performing the performance corresponding to the variation pattern. Here, as the pinch performance 1, a background image suggesting that it is the count suppression period A (a background image that is different from the variable displays A to C of the special symbols during the count valid period) or a mini character is displayed, or a performance of outputting a sound or light emission suggesting that it is the count suppression period A is executed. As described above, in the count suppression period A, it can be assumed that it is the count suppression period A since it is suggested except for the first variable display of the special symbol. In addition, the start of the count suppression period A can be prevented from being noticed early by not executing the pinch performance 1 only during the execution of the first variable display of the special symbols in the count suppression period A.例文帳に追加

In the above, the pinch performance 1 (specific performance) is not executed at the start of the count suppression period A (during the execution of the variable display D of the special symbol), but the pinch performance 1 may be executed from the start of the count suppression period A.

Next, in the count effective period that starts when the end condition of the count suppression period A is established, the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005, and the relief number counter in the main control board 1310 is counted up every time the variable display of the special symbol is executed. In this example, when executing the variable displays F to H of the special symbols, the relief number counter in the main control board 1310 is counted up, and the relief number counter changes from 453→454→455.

In addition, in the count valid period, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the special symbol variation display is executed, the information regarding the number of variations of the special symbol is output to the external display device. In this example, when executing the variable displays F to H of the special symbols during the valid count period, the information on the number of times of variation of the special symbols is output toward the external display device, and the number of times of variation of the special symbols displayed on the external display device is changed from 463 to 464 to 465.

In addition, in the count effective period, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the normal performance is executed when the performance corresponding to the variation pattern is executed in the performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加

Next, in the count suppression period B that is started when the start condition of the count suppression period B is established, the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005, and each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the relief number counter in the main control board 1310 is counted down. In this example, during the count suppression period B, when executing the variation display I of the special symbols, etc., the relief number counter in the main control board 1310 is counted down, and the relief number counter changes from 454 to (-1 per 1 variation).

In addition, in the count suppression period B, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the special symbol variation display is executed, information regarding the number of special symbol variations is output to the external display device. In this example, during the count suppression period B, when performing the variable display I of the special symbols, the information on the number of variations of the special symbols is output toward the external display device, and the number of variations of the special symbols displayed on the external display device is changed from 466→(+1 per 1 variation).

In addition, in the count suppression period B, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variation display of the special symbol is performed, the performance corresponding to the variation pattern is performed, but when the performance corresponding to the variation pattern is performed, the common performance that is the same as the variation display F to H of the special symbol in the count effective period in terms of the background image etc. is performed. In this way, when the count suppression period B is executed, since the fact is not clearly notified, it is difficult to recognize whether it is the count effective period or the count suppression period B, and it is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice that a period more disadvantageous than the count effective period is being executed.

Next, in the valid count period which is started when the end condition of the count suppression period B is established, each time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the relief number counter in the main control board 1310 is counted up. In this example, when the variable display J of the special symbol is executed, the relief number counter in the main control board 1310 is counted up, and the relief number counter is changed to 443.

In addition, in the count valid period, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the special symbol variation display is executed, the information regarding the number of variations of the special symbol is output to the external display device. In this example, when executing the variable display J of the special symbols during the valid count period, the information on the number of times of variation of the special symbols is output toward the external display device, and the number of times of variation of the special symbols displayed on the external display device is changed to 476.

In addition, in the count effective period, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the normal performance is executed when the performance corresponding to the variation pattern is executed in the performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加

As described above, when the count suppression period A or the count suppression period B occurs, the information about the number of fluctuations of the special symbols displayed on the external display device does not match the relief number counter in the main control board 1310. In other words, even if the information on the number of fluctuations of the special pattern displayed on the external display device is visually recognized, it is not possible to grasp the number of fluctuations of the number of relief counters for the number of relief counters = 600 to be controlled to the low-probability time-saving state B. Therefore, the information on the number of fluctuations of the special pattern displayed on the external display device can only serve as a guideline for the relief number counter=600 to be controlled to the low-probability time-saving state B, and it is possible to give a pleasure of guessing what number the relief number counter is.

In addition, in the count suppression period B, the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005, and the number of relief counters in the main control board 1310 is counted down each time the special symbol is displayed. It is configured so that the probability that the conditions are satisfied is high). Here, the relief number counter counts the number of variations of the special symbol in the count valid period in the low probability non-time saving state, and in the low probability non-time saving state, by reaching the relief number counter = 600, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state B. Then, in the low-probability time-saving state B, when the variable display of the special symbols is executed 700 times without a big hit, the low-probability non-time-saving state is controlled again, and the number-of-relief counter can be counted up. In this regard, in the low-probability non-working-time saving state after the relief number counter = 600 is reached and the low-probability working-time saving state B is controlled once, the second low-probability time-saving state B is more difficult to acquire than the first time. In other words, in the low-probability non-work-shortening state after the number of times of relief counter=600 is reached and the low-probability short-time work state B is controlled, by increasing the execution rate of the count suppression period B, it becomes difficult to acquire the low-probability short-time work state B more than the first time, and excessive relief can be suppressed.

In addition, the count suppression period A and the count suppression period B can be forcibly terminated by the hall manager's operation. Specifically, when the power is turned off during the count suppression period A or the count suppression period B and then the power is turned on with the RAM cleared, the counting valid period is resumed. Thus, when the player avoids playing the game due to the occurrence of the count suppression period A or the count suppression period B, the count suppression period A or the count suppression period B can be terminated by the operation of the hall manager, and by returning to the count valid period, the player can newly participate in the game with expectation.

[About immediate short winning design invalid period]
In this example, in the low-probability non-time-saving state, it is assumed to be controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C when it becomes an immediate short hit. Here, as game states other than the low-probability non-time-saving state, in the high-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability short-time working state, low-probability short-time working state A, low-probability short-time working state B, and low-probability short-time working state C, an ``immediate short-win pattern invalid period'' in which control to the low-probability short-working-time state C is not performed when an immediate short-win occurs is set. In addition, for a part of the low-probability non-time-saving state, when it becomes an immediate short-time hit, it is set as an "immediate short-time winning symbol invalid period" that is not controlled to the low-probability time-saving state C. The immediate short per design invalid period which is set to the part of such low probability non time saving state, referring to Figure 201 you explain. Figure 201 is a time chart showing an immediate short winning symbol invalid period.

First, in the immediate short hit design effective period, in the low probability non-time saving state, when it becomes an immediate short hit, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state C. On the other hand, in the immediate short winning pattern invalid period, when the instant short winning occurs in the low probability non working hours saving state, the low probability non working hours saving state is maintained as the game state before the immediate short winning without controlling to the low probability working hours saving state C.例文帳に追加

In addition, a plurality of types are provided as the immediate short winning symbol invalid period. As for the immediate short winning design invalid period A, compared with the immediate short winning design invalid period B, the starting condition is the same and the ending condition is different.

In addition, the immediate short winning pattern invalid period is generated when the generation of the immediate short winning pattern invalid period is determined by a lottery in a low probability non-time saving state, and the conditions for starting the immediate short winning pattern invalid period are established. In this example, when it is decided to generate an immediate short winning design invalid period by lottery, the immediate short winning design invalid period is suddenly generated by not notifying that effect. Therefore, at the start of the immediate short winning design invalid period, it is difficult to notice whether or not the immediate short winning design invalid period has started. However, when it is determined by lottery to generate an immediate short winning symbol invalid period, it may be notified to that effect. In the present example, when it is determined by lottery to generate the immediate short winning design invalid period in the low probability non-working time saving state, the conditions for starting the immediate short winning design invalid period are met. In addition, for example, in the low probability non working hours state, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbols reaches a predetermined number (for example, 200 times), the starting condition for the immediate short winning design invalid period may be met.

In addition, after the start of the immediate short winning pattern invalid period A in the immediate short winning pattern invalid period A, when the number of times of variation of the special pattern reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the end condition of the immediate short winning pattern invalid period A is established and the immediate short winning pattern invalid period A is terminated. On the other hand, after the start of the immediate short winning pattern invalid period B, when the termination of the immediate short winning pattern invalid period B is determined by lottery, the termination condition of the immediate short winning pattern invalid period B is satisfied and the immediate short winning pattern invalid period B is terminated.

When an immediate short winning pattern occurs during the immediate short winning pattern effective period, the immediate short winning pattern is stop-displayed as a stop pattern of the special pattern in the variable display of the special pattern in the function display unit 1400, and the immediate short-hit pattern is stop-displayed as the stop pattern of the decorative pattern in the variable display of the decorative pattern in the performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加On the other hand, in the immediate short-hit design invalid period, when it becomes an immediate short-hit, in the variable display of the special symbols in the function display unit 1400, the immediate short-hit design is stop-displayed as the stop design of the special design, while in the variable display of the decorative design in the effect display device 1600, the immediate short-hit design is not stop-displayed as the stop design of the decorative design, and the design different from the immediate short-hit design (in this example, the missing design) is stop-displayed. . Thus, in the immediate short winning pattern invalid period, when the immediate short winning is realized, the stop pattern of the decorative pattern in the performance display device 1600 does not suggest that effect, so that the sense of loss caused by the invalidation of the immediate short winning can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 201, in the immediate short per design valid period in the low probability non-time saving state, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005, the special symbol variation display AC is executed. In such an immediate short-hit symbol effective period, it is possible to output information regarding the stoppage of the immediate short-hit symbol to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal portion 558 . That is, in the immediate short winning pattern effective period, when the immediate short winning pattern is realized, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short winning pattern is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, whereas when the immediate short winning pattern is not obtained, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short winning pattern is not output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加A hall computer and an external information device provided on the top of the pachinko machine 1 are connected via the external terminal portion 558 . The external display device displays information on the number of variations of special symbols, information on the number of big hits, information on the number of instant short hits, and the like. Thus, by outputting the information about the immediate short winning pattern stop to the hall computer, the hall manager can know the immediate short winning pattern, and by outputting the information about the immediate short winning pattern stop to the external display device, the player can know the immediate short winning pattern.

In addition, in the immediate short winning pattern effective period in the low probability non-time saving state, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the variable display A to C of the special pattern is executed, the normal performance is executed when the performance corresponding to the variation pattern is executed in the performance display device 1600.

Next, in the immediate short winning design invalid period A which is started when the conditions for starting the immediate short winning symbol invalid period A are established, the variable displays D, E, etc. of the special symbols are executed each time the ball enters the first start opening 2004 or the second start opening 2005.例文帳に追加In such an immediate short-hit design invalid period A, it is impossible to output information about the stop of the immediate short-hit design to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal portion 558 . That is, in the immediate short winning design invalid period A, when the immediate short winning is achieved, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short winning symbol is not output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加In this way, even when the immediate short winning pattern is invalidated during the immediate short winning pattern invalid period A, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short winning pattern is not output to the hall computer, so that the hall manager cannot know that the immediate short winning pattern has been stopped, and the information about the stop of the immediate short winning pattern is not output to the external display device, so that the player cannot know the immediate short winning.

In addition, in the immediate short winning pattern invalid period A, the performance display device 1600 performs different performances such as a special symbol variation display D that is the first variation display of the special symbols and a special symbol variation display E that is the second and subsequent special symbol variation displays. Here, during the execution of the special symbol variation display D during the execution of the first special symbol variation display in the immediate short winning symbol invalid period A, when performing the performance corresponding to the variation pattern, the common performance which is the same as the special symbol variation display A to C in the immediate short winning symbol valid period in terms of the background image or the like is performed. In this way, when the immediate short winning pattern invalid period A is started, since the fact is not clearly notified, it is difficult to recognize whether it is the immediate short winning pattern valid period or the immediate short winning pattern invalid period A, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the period disadvantageous to the immediate short winning pattern valid period has started.

On the other hand, in the immediate short winning pattern invalid period A, during the execution of the special symbol variable display E, etc., during the execution of the second and later special symbol variable display, the pinch performance 2 (invalid corresponding performance) suggesting that it is the immediate short winning pattern invalid period A is executed when the performance corresponding to the variation pattern is executed. Here, as the pinch performance 2, a performance of displaying a background image suggesting the immediate short winning pattern invalid period A (a background image different from the variable display A to C of the special symbols in the immediate short winning pattern valid period) or a mini character, or outputting a voice or light emitting suggesting the immediate short winning pattern invalid period A is executed. In this way, the immediate short winning design invalid period A is suggested except for the first variable display of the special symbols, so that it can be presumed to be the immediate short winning symbol invalid period A. - 特許庁In addition, the start of the immediate short winning pattern invalid period A can be prevented from being noticed early by not executing the pinch performance 2 only during the execution of the first variable display of the special pattern in the immediate short winning pattern invalid period A. - 特許庁

In the above description, the pinch performance 2 (ineffective corresponding performance) is not executed at the start of the immediate short winning design invalid period A (during execution of the variable display D of the special symbols), but the pinch performance 2 may be executed from the start of the immediate short winning design invalid period A.

In addition, in the immediate short winning design invalid period A, when the number of fluctuation times of the special symbols reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the end condition of the immediate short winning design invalid period A is satisfied, and the immediate short winning design invalid period A is ended. A count display showing the remaining number of times of the special symbol variation display up to is displayed. Thereby, the game can be continued with anticipation until the immediate short winning symbol invalid period A ends.

Next, in the immediate short winning symbol effective period started when the end condition of the immediate short winning symbol invalid period A is satisfied, every time the ball enters the first start opening 2004 or the second start opening 2005, the special symbol variation display F to H is executed. In such an immediate short-hit symbol effective period, it is possible to output information regarding the stoppage of the immediate short-hit symbol to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal portion 558 . That is, in the immediate short winning pattern effective period, when the immediate short winning pattern is realized, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short winning pattern is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, whereas when the immediate short winning pattern is not obtained, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short winning pattern is not output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the immediate short winning pattern valid period, every time the player enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and executes the variation display F to H of the special symbol, the performance display device 1600 executes the normal performance when executing the performance corresponding to the variation pattern.

Next, in the immediate short winning design invalid period B which is started when the conditions for starting the immediate short winning symbol invalid period B are satisfied, every time the ball is entered into the first start opening 2004 or the second start opening 2005, the variable display I of the special symbol is executed. In such an immediate short-hit design invalid period B, it is impossible to output information about the stop of the immediate short-hit design to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal portion 558 . That is, in the immediate short winning design invalid period B, when the immediate short winning is achieved, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short winning symbol is not output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加In this way, even when the immediate short winning pattern is invalidated during the immediate short winning pattern invalid period B, the information regarding the immediate short winning pattern stop is not output to the hall computer, so that the hall manager cannot know the immediate short winning pattern, and the information regarding the immediate short winning pattern stop is not output to the external display device, so that the player cannot know the immediate short winning pattern.

Further, in the immediate short winning pattern invalid period B, the performance display device 1600 performs different performances between the special symbol variable display I which is the first variable display of the special symbols and the special symbol variable display which is the second and subsequent special symbol variable displays. Here, during the execution of the variable display I of the special symbols during the execution of the first variable display of the special symbols during the execution of the variable display I of the special symbols in the immediate short winning symbol invalid period B, when executing the performance corresponding to the variation pattern, the common performance that is the same as the variable display F to G of the special symbols in the immediate short winning symbol valid period in terms of the background image or the like is executed. In this way, when the immediate short winning pattern invalid period B is started, since the fact is not clearly notified, it is difficult to recognize whether it is the immediate short winning pattern valid period or the immediate short winning pattern invalid period B, and it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the period disadvantageous to the immediate short winning pattern valid period has started.

On the other hand, during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols during the execution of the second and later variable display of the special symbols in the immediate short winning pattern invalid period B, a pinch performance 2 (invalid corresponding performance) suggesting that it is the immediate short winning symbol invalid period B is executed when the performance corresponding to the variation pattern is executed. Here, as the pinch performance 2, a performance of displaying a background image suggesting the immediate short winning pattern invalid period B (a background image different from the variable display A to C of the special symbols in the immediate short winning pattern valid period) or a mini character, or outputting a voice or light emission suggesting the immediate short winning pattern invalid period B is executed. In this way, the immediate short winning design invalid period B is suggested except for the variable display of the first special symbol, so that it can be presumed to be the immediate short winning symbol invalid period B. In addition, the start of the immediate short winning pattern invalid period B can be prevented from being noticed early by not executing the pinch performance 2 only during the execution of the first variable display of the special pattern in the immediate short winning pattern invalid period A. - 特許庁The pinch performance 2 suggesting the immediate short winning pattern invalid period B is the same as the pinch performance 2 suggesting the immediate short winning pattern invalid period A, but the performance contents may be changed.

In the above description, the pinch performance 2 (ineffective corresponding performance) is not executed at the start of the immediate short winning pattern invalid period B (during the execution of the variable display I of the special symbols), but the pinch performance 2 may be executed from the start of the immediate short winning pattern invalid period B.

In addition, in the immediate short winning pattern invalid period B, when termination of the immediate short winning pattern invalid period B is determined by lottery, the condition for ending the immediate short winning pattern invalid period B is satisfied and the immediate short winning pattern invalid period B is terminated, but before the termination condition of the immediate short winning pattern invalid period B is satisfied, the count display executed before the immediate short winning pattern invalid period A is not displayed in the performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加This is because the end condition of the immediate short winning pattern invalid period B is when it is determined by lottery that the immediate short winning pattern invalid period B is ended, so that the end timing of the immediate short winning pattern invalid period B cannot be discriminated in advance.

Next, in the immediate short winning design effective period started when the end condition of the immediate short winning design invalid period B is established, when the ball enters the first start opening 2004 or the second start opening 2005, the special symbol variation display J is executed. In such an immediate short-hit symbol effective period, it is possible to output information regarding the stoppage of the immediate short-hit symbol to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the external terminal portion 558 . That is, in the immediate short winning pattern effective period, when the immediate short winning pattern is realized, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short winning pattern is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, whereas when the immediate short winning pattern is not obtained, the information regarding the stop of the immediate short winning pattern is not output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

In addition, during the immediate short winning pattern valid period, when the ball enters the first starting port 2004 or the second starting port 2005 and the variable display J of the special pattern is executed, the normal performance is executed when the performance corresponding to the variation pattern is executed in the performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加

As described above, in the immediate short-hit design invalid period A, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbols reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the conditions for ending the immediate short-hit design invalid period A are satisfied, and the immediate short-hit design invalid period A is terminated. , The immediate short winning symbol invalid period A may be forcibly terminated. In this example, in the variable display of the special symbols several times (for example, 4 variations) before the end condition of the immediate short winning design invalid period A is established, the count display indicating the remaining number of times of the special symbol variable display until the immediate short winning design invalid period A ends is displayed in the production display device 1600. However, when the immediate short winning design invalid period A is forcibly terminated, the count display is forcibly terminated even if the count display is in the middle without waiting for the end of the count display. .

Further, the immediate short winning symbol invalid period A and the immediate short winning symbol invalid period B can be forcibly terminated by the hall manager's operation. Specifically, in the immediate short winning pattern invalid period A or the immediate short winning pattern invalid period B, when the power is turned off and the power is turned on with RAM clearing, the immediate short winning pattern valid period is restored. As a result, when the player avoids the game due to the occurrence of the immediate short winning pattern invalid period A or the immediate short winning pattern invalid period B, the immediate short winning pattern invalid period A or the immediate short winning pattern invalid period B may be terminated by the operation of the hall manager, and the player can newly participate in the game with expectation by returning to the immediate short winning pattern valid period.

As described above, for a part of the low probability non-time saving state among the low probability states, it is set as a "count suppression period" that does not count the number of times of variation of special symbols. Then, in the count suppression period A of the count suppression period, when the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 in a low-probability non-time-saving state and the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the relief number counter in the main control board 1310 is not counted up, and the relief number counter is maintained. In such a count suppression period A, an "immediate short-hit symbol invalid period" in which control is not performed to the low-probability time-saving state C even when an immediate short-hit occurs may be generated at the same time. A case where such a count suppression period A and an immediate short winning symbol invalid period are used together will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 202 is a time chart showing the combined use of the count suppression period A and the immediate short winning symbol invalid period.

As shown in FIG. 202, in the count effective period, since the immediate short winning pattern effective period is generated at the same time, in such a count effective period, when the immediate short winning occurs, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state C.

In addition, in the count suppression period A, an immediate short winning symbol invalid period is generated at the same time. In other words, in the count suppression period A, when an immediate short winning occurs, the low probability non-working time saving state is maintained as the game state before the immediate short winning without controlling to the low probability short working time state C.例文帳に追加Here, during the execution of the special symbol variation display D during the execution of the first special symbol variation display in the count suppression period A and the immediate short winning symbol invalid period, when performing the performance corresponding to the variation pattern, the common performance that is the same as the special symbol variation display A to C in the count valid period in terms of the background image or the like is performed. On the other hand, out of the count suppression period A and the immediate short winning symbol invalid period, during the execution of the special symbol variation display E in which the special symbol variation display is being executed for the second time or later, when the performance corresponding to the variation pattern is executed, the pinch performance 2 (invalid corresponding performance) suggesting the count suppression period A and the immediate short winning symbol invalid period is executed.

On the other hand, during the count suppression period B, the immediate short winning symbol invalid period is not generated at the same time. That is, in the count suppression period B, when it becomes an immediate short hit, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state C. Here, in the count suppression period B, every time the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and the special symbol variation display is performed, the performance corresponding to the variation pattern is performed, but when the performance corresponding to the variation pattern is performed, the common performance that is the same as the special symbol variation display F to H in the count valid period in terms of the background image etc. is performed.

As described above, for the count suppression period B, in the low probability non-time saving state, when entering the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005 and executing the variable display of the special symbol, the relief number counter in the main control board 1310 is counted down and updated to move away from the relief number counter = 600 that will be controlled to the low probability time saving state B. In other words, the count suppression period B is farther from the relief number counter = 600 that is controlled to the low probability time saving state B, and it becomes difficult to reach the relief number counter = 600 after that, so it is a period more disadvantageous than the count suppression period A. Then, if the immediate short winning pattern invalid period is generated at the same time in the count suppression period B, it becomes difficult not only to reach the counter of relief times=600, but also even in the case of an immediate short winning, control to the low probability short working time state C is lost and the probability of obtaining the low probability short working time state (low probability short working time state B, low probability short working time state C) becomes extremely low. In this regard, in this example, in the count suppression period B, by not generating the immediate short winning symbol invalid period at the same time, it is possible to prevent an extremely disadvantageous period from occurring.

[Regarding the priority of RTC production]
In this example, when the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 acquires calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and sets the current calendar information and current time information in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, using such RTC (real time clock) information, every time a predetermined period (for example, 3 hours) elapses after the power is turned on, the RTC performance is executed separately from the pattern variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern). In this RTC performance, a dedicated performance different from the pattern variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern) is executed by the performance display of the performance display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the light emission of the lamp, and the sound output, so that enjoyment different from the pattern variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern) can be given, and an increase in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 can be expected.

Both the RTC performance and the pattern variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern) are for executing the performance display of the performance display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the light emission of the lamp, and the sound output, and the performance elements used for the performance overlap (at least partially overlap). Here, since the RTC performance is executed every time a predetermined period (for example, 3 hours) elapses after the power is turned on, the execution timing of the RTC performance and the execution timing of the performance before and after the variable display of the special pattern to be controlled to the low-probability time-saving state B reaches 600 times (relief frequency counter=600) may overlap. Similarly, the execution timing of the production before and after the immediate short hit to be controlled to the low probability time saving state C may overlap. In such a case, priority is given to the execution of the RTC performance, and the performance before and after the variable display of the special pattern reaches 600 times (relief frequency counter=600) and part of the performance before and after the immediate short win are restricted. First, the RTC performance and the performance before and after the variable display of special symbols reaches 600 times (relief frequency counter=600) are explained, and then the case where the conditions for starting the RTC performance are established before the variable display of special symbols reaches 600 times (relief frequency counter = 600) and the case where the start conditions for the RTC performance are established after the variable display of special symbols reaches 600 times (relief frequency counter = 600) are explained. After explaining the performances before and after the immediate short winning, the case where the starting condition of the RTC performance is established before the immediate short winning becomes and the case where the starting condition of the RTC performance is established after the immediate short winning is explained.

FIG. 203 is a time chart showing the progress of the RTC presentation. As shown in FIG. 203, the RTC performance is not executed before t1 when a predetermined time (for example, 3 hours) elapses after the power is turned on and the start condition of the RTC performance is established, and the normal performance state in which the pattern variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern) can be executed is set. In the normal effect state, when the symbol variation (for example, symbol variation A) is executed, the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is executed as the symbol variation effect. In the pattern variation effect, the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the light emission of the lamp, the light emission of the sound, etc. are set to a variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310, and based on the variation pattern, the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the light emission of the lamp, the light emission of the sound, etc. are executed.

Incidentally, the effect display device 1600 executes the variable display of the decorative symbols as the symbol variable effect, and also executes the effect display suggesting the result of the lottery. Further, the movable bodies A to C are made to move at a predetermined timing in conjunction with the effect display suggesting the result of the lottery. Further, in the lamp light emission, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emit light at a predetermined timing in conjunction with the effect display suggesting the result of the lottery. In the audio output, BGM is output from the speaker during the effect display suggesting the result of the lottery.

Next, at t1, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 hours) has passed since the power was turned on and the conditions for starting the RTC presentation are met, the RTC presentation state is set to execute the RTC presentation. When t1 arrives during the execution of the symbol variation B, the execution of the symbol variation performance is restricted and the RTC performance is preferentially executed. In the RTC effect, the effect contents for the RTC are executed with respect to the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the motion of the movable bodies A to C, the light emission of the lamp, the light emission of the sound, and the like. The RTC performance state continues execution until t4 when the RTC performance end condition is satisfied after a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) has passed from t1 when the RTC performance start condition is satisfied, and the RTC performance state is shifted to the normal performance state at t4.

Specifically, the effect display device 1600 first executes an RTC countdown display that counts down (for example, 3→2→1) until the start of the RTC effect from t1 to t2. The RTC countdown display is started at t1 regardless of the pattern variation, and ends at t2 after 3 seconds have elapsed from t1, regardless of the pattern variation. That is, the RTC countdown display is performed for three seconds from t1 to t2. During the period from t2 to tx, the RTC start display is executed to notify the start of the RTC presentation. The RTC start display is started at t2 without depending on the pattern variation, executed at least from t2 to t3 when 5 seconds have passed, and finished at the time tx when the first pattern variation (design variation D) is started after t3 depending on the pattern variation. That is, the RTC start display is executed for a variable time of 5 seconds+α from t2 to tx. If there is a period in which the symbol variation (symbol variation performance) does not start after t3, the RTC start display is finished after waiting for the symbol variation D to start after t3.

The effect display device 1600 executes the RTC effect display that is not executed except for the RTC effect from tx to t4 when the RTC effect end condition is satisfied. Since the performance display for RTC is started after waiting for the pattern variation (pattern variation D) to start first after t3, the game can be played with the desire to start the pattern variation D as soon as possible after t3.

As for the movable bodies A to C, the movable bodies A to C are made to move sequentially in accordance with the execution of the RTC start display on the effect display device 1600 from t2 to t3. Specifically, from t2 to t3, the RTC start operation of the movable body A, the RTC start operation of the movable body B, and the RTC start operation of the movable body C are sequentially executed. On the other hand, the movable bodies A to C are not used in the RTC performance except for the period of t2 to t3 in the RTC performance state t1 to t4, and the movable bodies A to C perform the action specified by the pattern variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern).

Further, in the lamp light emission, the LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emit light in the light emission pattern for RTC during the period from t1 to t4 as the RTC effect is executed. Also, in audio output, BGM for RTC is output from a speaker during the period from t1 to t4 as the RTC effect is executed.

(Limitation of help mode L production)
FIG. 204 is a time chart showing the progress of the effect before and after the variable display of special symbols reaches 600 times (relief number counter=600). As shown in FIG. 204, after turning on the power with clearing the RAM or after executing the jackpot game, when executing the symbol variation B, the variation display of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), At the time t5 when the symbol variation B is stopped, the low probability non-time saving state is shifted to the low probability time saving state B. In addition, before t5, the help mode L precursor performance state for executing the ``help mode L precursor performance'' indicating that the ``help mode L'' is imminent is set, whereas from t5, the state shifts to the help mode L performance state for executing the ``help mode L performance'' indicating that the ``help mode L'' is being executed. In this example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), and until the fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches 700 times, the low probability It is controlled to the time saving state B, and the period of control to such a low probability time saving state B is called "help mode L". Then, the help mode L performance state is shifted from the low probability time saving state B to the low probability non-time saving state and from the help mode L performance state to the normal performance state at time t6 when the 700th pattern variation X is stopped if the big hit is not achieved until the variable display of the special pattern in the low probability time saving state B reaches 700 times.

In the above-described effect example, when the variable display of the decorative symbols is stopped in the effect display device 1600, until the variable display of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 500 to 600 times, a count effect is executed to notify how many times the special symbol has changed in the low probability state. Such a count effect corresponds to the "help mode L omen effect". In addition, after starting the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, the performance display device 1600 displays ``help mode L in progress'' indicating that the low-probability time-saving state B is being controlled, but such a display corresponds to ``help mode L performance''.

Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, before t5, the effect display for the help mode L precursor is executed to count down until the start of the help mode L effect (for example, the count effect to notify how many times the special symbol changes in the low probability state). Then, after t5, the effect display for the help mode L indicating that the help mode L is being executed (during control of the low-probability time-saving state B) is executed. Incidentally, even when a period (for example, between the pattern variation C and the pattern variation D) in which the pattern variation (the pattern variation performance) is not started after t5 occurs, the performance display for the help mode L is continuously executed in that period.

Further, as for the movable bodies A to C, the movable bodies A to C are not used in the help mode L premonition performance before t5 and the help mode L performance after t5, and the motion specified by the pattern variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern) is executed.

In addition, in lamp light emission, the LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit light in the light emission pattern for the help mode L precursor before t5 with the execution of the help mode L precursor performance, and after t5, with the execution of the help mode L performance, they are made to emit light in the light emission pattern for the help mode L. In the voice output, the BGM for the help mode L precursor is output from the speaker before t5 with the execution of the help mode L precursor performance, and after t5, the BGM for the help mode L is output from the speaker with the execution of the help mode L performance.

FIG. 205 is a time chart showing the progress of the effect when the condition for starting the RTC effect is established before the variable display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief number counter=600). In this example, at time t1 when a predetermined time (for example, 3 hours) elapses after the power is turned on and the conditions for starting the RTC performance are established, it is determined whether it is a help mode L precursor performance state, a help mode L performance state, or a normal performance state other than the help mode L precursor performance state or the help mode L performance state. In the above description, the case where it is determined to be in the normal performance state at time t1 is described, and in the following description, the case in which it is determined that the help mode L premonitory performance state or the help mode L performance state is determined at time t1 is described.

As shown in FIG. 205, at the time t1 at which the start condition of the RTC presentation is satisfied, if the help mode L precursor presentation state is reached, the help mode L precursor presentation state is shifted to the RTC presentation state. In addition, after power-on accompanied by RAM clearing or execution of a big winning game, when executing the symbol variation B, the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter=600), the transition from the low probability non-reduction of working hours state to the low probability of reduction of working hours state B occurs at time t5 when the symbol variation B is stopped.

Specifically, at time t1, the effect display device 1600 is executing the effect display for the help mode L sign that counts down to the start of the help mode L effect (for example, a count effect that notifies how many times the special symbol has changed in the low probability state). The effect display for is continuously executed. After t5, since control is performed to the low-probability time-saving state C, the performance display for the help mode L indicating that the help mode L is being executed (controlling the low-probability time-saving state B) is executed. That is, during the period from t1 to tx, the RTC countdown display and the RTC start display as RTC effects are not executed.

Further, the performance display device 1600 executes the performance display for the RTC which is not executed except for the RTC performance, in addition to the performance display for the help mode L, from tx to t4 when the end condition of the RTC performance is satisfied. The effect display for RTC is started after waiting for the first symbol variation (symbol variation D) to start after t3. In such a state, for example, the performance display for the RTC is executed using the entire display area, and the performance display for the help mode L is executed so as to display ``during the help mode L'' indicating that the low-probability time-saving state B is being controlled in the upper left part of the display area.

Further, as for the movable bodies A to C, the movable bodies A to C are made to operate sequentially even though the RTC start display is not executed on the effect display device 1600 from t2 to t3. Specifically, from t2 to t3, the RTC start operation of the movable body A, the RTC start operation of the movable body B, and the RTC start operation of the movable body C are sequentially executed. In this way, during the execution of the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter=600), when t2 for starting the RTC start motion of the movable bodies A to C arrives, the motion designated by the pattern variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern) is terminated, and the RTC start motion of the movable bodies A to C is forcibly started. Then, during the execution of the RTC start motions of the movable bodies A to C, when t5 when the pattern variation B is stopped when the special pattern variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter=600), the RTC start motions of the movable bodies A to C being executed are continued without ending. Further, among t1 to t4 in the RTC performance state, for t2 to t3, the movable bodies A to C are not subjected to the action designated by the symbol variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern), but except for the period of t2 to t3, the movable bodies A to C are not used in the RTC performance, and the movable bodies A to C are being subjected to the motion specified by the symbol variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern).

Further, in the lamp light emission, although the RTC countdown display and the RTC start display are not executed on the performance display device 1600 from t1 to t3, the LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit light in the light emission pattern for RTC, and until t4, light is continuously emitted in the light emission pattern for RTC. In other words, during the period from t1 to t3, although the effect display for the help mode L omen and the effect display for the help mode L are executed in the effect display device 1600, the LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 do not emit light in the light emission pattern for the help mode L omen or the light emission pattern for the help mode L. In addition, in voice output, BGM for RTC is output from a speaker even though RTC countdown display and RTC start display are not executed in the performance display device 1600 from t1 to t3, and BGM for RTC is continuously output until t4. In other words, during the period from t1 to t3, the BGM for the help mode L omen and the BGM for the help mode L are not output from the speaker although the effect display for the help mode L omen and the effect display for the help mode L are executed in the effect display device 1600.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the execution of the RTC start motions of the movable bodies A to C, when t5, which is the time when the symbol variation B stops, reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) of the special symbol variation display in the low probability state, the RTC start motions of the movable bodies A to C being executed are continued without ending. As a result, the RTC start display is not executed on the performance display device 1600 during the period from t1 to t2, but the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C is completely executed without ending in the middle, so that the start of the RTC performance can be notified to the outside, and the start of the RTC performance can be prevented from being unrecognized.

In addition, the RTC effect and the pattern variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) are all performed by the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the movement of the movable bodies A to C, the light emission of the lamp, and the sound output, and the effect elements used for the effect overlap (at least partially overlap). At this time, at the time t1 when the RTC performance start condition is established, in the case of the help mode L precursor performance state, the performance display of the performance display device 1600 used in the help mode L precursor performance is executed, while the operation of the movable bodies A to C used in the help mode L precursor performance, the lamp emission and the voice output are restricted. That is, the execution of some of the effect elements used in the help mode L omen effect is restricted. Similarly, after t1, when t5, which is the stopping time of symbol variation B when the variation display of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue count counter=600), it is the timing to execute the help mode L effect. . That is, the execution of some of the effect elements used in the help mode L effect is restricted. As a result, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the light emission of the lamp and the voice output can be used in the RTC performance from the time t1 at which the start condition of the RTC performance is established, so that the fact that the RTC performance is being executed can be notified to the outside and the execution of the RTC performance can be prevented from being unrecognized.

On the other hand, the effect display of the effect display device 1600 is used in the help mode L precursor effect and the help mode L effect from the time t1 at which the RTC effect start condition is established. Since the effect display device 1600 is provided in the central part of the game board 5, it is the part that the player pays the most attention to, and since the help mode L precursor effect display and the help mode L effect display are executed for such effect display device 1600, the change display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief counter = 600) and the control to the low probability time reduction state B is not overlooked, and the control start of the low probability time reduction state B is performed. You can prevent being unrecognized.

As the movable bodies A to C, there are movable bodies that can be contacted by the player and movable bodies that cannot be contacted by the player. Specifically, the movable body A is an upper back front presentation unit 3300 attached to the game board 5, the movable body B is a lower back front presentation unit 3400 attached to the game board 5, and the player cannot touch these movable bodies. On the other hand, the movable body C is the effect operation section 301 of the effect operation unit 300 attached to the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, and can be touched by the player. Then, the movable bodies A to C sequentially execute the RTC start motion during the execution of the RTC effect, so that each movable body operates. Here, whether or not the movable bodies A to C operate normally is monitored, but when an abnormality occurs in which the movable body C does not operate normally, there is a high possibility that the movable body C will not operate normally due to the player's mischief. Therefore, when the movable body C does not operate normally during the execution of the RTC performance, the period during which the execution of a part of the performance elements used in the help mode L precursor performance and the help mode L performance is restricted is extended as a penalty for the player. In other words, even after t4 when the end condition of the RTC performance is established, the state of restricting the execution of a part of the performance elements used in the help mode L premonitory performance and the help mode L performance is continued. As a penalty for the player, it is sufficient to increase the degree of restriction in a state where the execution of some of the performance elements used in the help mode L portent effect and the help mode L effect is restricted. In this way, when an abnormality occurs in which the movable body C does not operate normally during the execution of the RTC presentation, the player is given a penalty, so that the player can be encouraged not to mischief the movable body C.例文帳に追加

FIG. 206 is a time chart showing the progress of the effect when the conditions for starting the RTC effect are satisfied after the variable display of the special symbol reaches 600 times (relief number counter=600). As shown in FIG. 206, at the time t1 at which the condition for starting the RTC effect is established, if the help mode L effect state is reached, the help mode L effect state is shifted to the RTC effect state. Moreover, when t1 when the start condition of RTC production|presentation is satisfied arrives, it is already controlled by the low probability time saving state B. FIG.

Specifically, the effect display device 1600 executes the effect display for the help mode L indicating that the help mode L is being executed (the low-probability time-saving state B is being controlled) at time t1, but in the period from t1 to t2, in addition to the effect display for the help mode L, the RTC countdown display that counts down (for example, 3→2→1) until the start of the RTC effect is executed. Also, during the period from t2 to tx, the RTC start display is executed to notify the start of the RTC presentation. Between tx and tx, from tx to t4 when the end condition of the RTC performance is satisfied, in addition to the performance display for the help mode L, the performance display for the RTC that is not executed except for the RTC performance is executed. The effect display for RTC is started after waiting for the first symbol variation (symbol variation D) to start after t3. In such a state, for example, an RTC countdown display, an RTC start display, and an effect display for the RTC are executed using the entire display area, and the effect display for the help mode L is executed so as to display 'help mode L in progress' indicating that the low-probability time-saving state B is being controlled in the upper left part of the display area.

As for the movable bodies A to C, the movable bodies A to C are made to move sequentially in accordance with the execution of the RTC start display on the effect display device 1600 from t2 to t3. Specifically, from t2 to t3, the RTC start operation of the movable body A, the RTC start operation of the movable body B, and the RTC start operation of the movable body C are sequentially executed. In this way, when t2 for starting the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C arrives during the execution of the symbol variation B during the execution of the help mode L (during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B), the operation designated by the symbol variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern) is terminated, and the RTC start motion of the movable bodies A to C is forcibly started. Further, among t1 to t4 in the RTC performance state, for t2 to t3, the movable bodies A to C are not subjected to the action designated by the symbol variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern), but except for the period of t2 to t3, the movable bodies A to C are not used in the RTC performance, and the movable bodies A to C are being subjected to the motion specified by the symbol variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern).

Further, in the lamp light emission, the LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emit light in the light emission pattern for RTC during the period from t1 to t4 as the RTC effect is executed. In other words, during the period from t1 to t3, although the effect display for the help mode L is executed by the effect display device 1600, the LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 do not emit light in the light emission pattern for the help mode L. Also, in audio output, BGM for RTC is output from a speaker during the period from t1 to t4 as the RTC effect is executed. In other words, during the period from t1 to t3, the BGM for the help mode L is not output from the speaker even though the effect display for the help mode L is being performed on the effect display device 1600 .

As described above, the RTC effect and the pattern variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) are both performed by the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the movement of the movable bodies A to C, the light emission of the lamp, and the sound output, and the effect elements used for the effect overlap (at least partially overlap). At this time, at the time t1 at which the start condition of the RTC performance is established, in the case of the help mode L performance state, the performance display of the performance display device 1600 used in the help mode L performance is executed, while the operation of the movable bodies A to C used in the help mode L performance, lamp light emission and voice output are restricted. That is, the execution of some of the effect elements used in the help mode L effect is restricted. As a result, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the light emission of the lamp and the voice output can be used in the RTC performance from the time t1 at which the start condition of the RTC performance is established, so that the fact that the RTC performance is being executed can be notified to the outside and the execution of the RTC performance can be prevented from being unrecognized.

On the other hand, during the execution of the help mode L (during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B), the effect display of the effect display device 1600 is used in the help mode L effect from the time t1 when the condition for starting the RTC effect is satisfied. Since the performance display device 1600 is provided in the central part of the game board 5, it is the part that the player pays the most attention to, and since the help mode L performance display is executed for such a performance display device 1600, the effect that the help mode L is being executed (the low-probability time-saving state B is being controlled) is not overlooked, and the fact that the help mode L is being executed (the low-probability time-saving state B is being controlled) can be prevented from being recognized.

(Limitation of help mode S production)
FIG. 207 is a time chart showing the performance progress before and after the instant short hit. As shown in FIG. 207, in the case of executing the symbol variation B that becomes an immediate short hit, at time t5 when the symbol variation B is stopped, the low-probability non-time-saving state transitions to the low-probability time-saving state C. Further, before t5, during the execution of the symbol variation B that becomes an immediate short win, the help mode S sign performance state for executing the ``help mode S precursor performance'' suggesting entering the ``help mode S'' is set, whereas from t5, the game shifts to the help mode S performance state for executing the ``help mode S performance'' indicating that the ``help mode S'' is being performed. In this example, by becoming an immediate short hit, until the variable display of the special symbol reaches 20 to 100 times, it is controlled to the low probability time saving state C. The period of control to such a low probability time saving state C is called "help mode S". Then, the help mode S performance state shifts from the low probability time saving state C to the low probability non-time saving state and shifts from the help mode S performance state to the normal performance state at t6 when the 20th to 100th pattern variation X is stopped if the big hit is not achieved, and at the time t6 when the big hit pattern variation is stopped until the special pattern variation display reaches 20 to 100 times in the low probability time saving state C. It's like

In the above-described production example, as the pattern fluctuation production (production corresponding to the fluctuation pattern) that becomes an immediate short hit, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed, and the production display that stops at the stop pattern of the immediate short hit is executed. In addition, after starting the control of the low-probability time-saving state C, the performance display device 1600 displays ``in help mode S'' indicating that the low-probability time-saving state C is under control, but such a display corresponds to ``help mode S performance''.

Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, before t5, during the execution of the symbol variation B that becomes an immediate short hit, the effect display for the help mode S precursor is executed as the symbol variation effect. After t5, the effect display for the help mode S indicating that the help mode S is being executed (the low-probability time-saving state C is under control) is executed. Incidentally, even when a period (for example, between the pattern variation C and the pattern variation D) in which the pattern variation (the pattern variation performance) is not started after t5 occurs, the performance display for the help mode S is continuously executed during that period.

Further, as for the movable bodies A to C, the movable bodies A to C are not used in the help mode S effect after t5, and the motion specified by the symbol variation effect (the effect corresponding to the variation pattern) is executed.

In addition, in lamp light emission, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of a game board 5 and a door frame 3 are caused to emit light in a light emission pattern for the help mode S sign before t5 with the execution of the help mode S sign performance during execution of the symbol variation B that becomes an immediate short hit, and after t5, light is emitted in the light emission pattern for the help mode S with the execution of the help mode S performance. In the voice output, before t5, the BGM for the help mode S precursor is output from the speaker with the execution of the help mode S precursor performance during the execution of the pattern variation B that becomes an immediate short hit, and after t5, the BGM for the help mode S is output from the speaker with the execution of the help mode S performance.

FIG. 208 is a time chart showing the progress of the performance when the conditions for starting the RTC performance are met before the immediate short win. In this example, at time t1 when a predetermined time (for example, 3 hours) elapses after the power is turned on and the condition for starting the RTC performance is established, it is determined whether it is a help mode S portent performance state, a help mode S performance state, or a normal performance state other than the help mode S portent performance state or the help mode S performance state. In the above description, the case where it is determined to be in the normal performance state at time t1 is described, and in the following description, the case in which it is determined that the help mode S precursor performance state or the help mode S performance state is determined at time t1 is described.

As shown in FIG. 208, at the time t1 at which the start condition of the RTC presentation is established, if the help mode S precursor presentation state is reached, the help mode S precursor presentation state is shifted to the RTC presentation state. In addition, when executing the symbol variation B that becomes an immediate short hit, the low probability non-time saving state changes to the low probability time saving state C at time t5 when the symbol variation B is stopped.

Specifically, in the performance display device 1600, the performance display for the help mode S precursor is being executed as the pattern variation performance at time t1, and the performance display for the help mode S precursor is continuously executed from t1 to t5 when the pattern variation B that becomes an immediate short win is stopped. After t5, since control is performed to the low-probability time-saving state C, the performance display for the help mode S indicating that the help mode S is being executed (the low-probability time-saving state C is being controlled) is executed. That is, during the period from t1 to tx, RTC countdown display and RTC start display as RTC effects are not executed.

Further, the performance display device 1600 executes the performance display for the RTC which is not executed except for the RTC performance in addition to the performance display for the help mode S from tx to t4 when the end condition of the RTC performance is satisfied. The effect display for RTC is started after waiting for the pattern variation (symbol variation D) to start after t3. In such a state, for example, the performance display for the RTC is executed using the entire display area, and the performance display for the help mode S is executed so as to display "under help mode S" indicating that the low-probability time-saving state C is being controlled in the upper left part of the display area.

Further, as for the movable bodies A to C, the movable bodies A to C are made to operate sequentially even though the RTC start display is not executed on the effect display device 1600 from t2 to t3. Specifically, from t2 to t3, the RTC start operation of the movable body A, the RTC start operation of the movable body B, and the RTC start operation of the movable body C are sequentially executed. In this way, when the time t2 for starting the RTC start motion of the movable bodies A to C is reached during the execution of the pattern variation B which becomes an immediate short hit, the motion specified by the pattern variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern) is terminated, and the RTC start motion of the movable bodies A to C is forcibly started. Then, during the execution of the RTC start motions of the movable bodies A to C, when t5, which is the stop time of the pattern variation B which becomes an immediate short hit, arrives, the RTC start motions of the movable bodies A to C under execution are continuously executed without ending. Further, in t2 to t3 of the RTC performance states t1 to t4, the movable bodies A to C are not subjected to the action designated by the pattern variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern), but except for the period of t2 to t3, the movable bodies A to C are not used in the RTC performance, and the movable bodies A to C are subjected to the motion specified by the symbol variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern).

In the lamp light emission, although the RTC countdown display and the RTC start display are not executed on the performance display device 1600 from t1 to t3, the LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit light in the light emission pattern for RTC, and until t4, light is continuously emitted in the light emission pattern for RTC. In other words, during the period from t1 to t3, even though the effect display for the help mode S omen and the effect display for the help mode S are executed in the effect display device 1600, the LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 do not emit light in the light emission pattern for the help mode S omen and the light emission pattern for the help mode S. In addition, in voice output, BGM for RTC is output from a speaker even though RTC countdown display and RTC start display are not executed in the performance display device 1600 from t1 to t3, and BGM for RTC is continuously output until t4. In other words, during the period from t1 to t3, the BGM for the help mode S precursor and the BGM for the help mode S are not output from the speaker although the effect display for the help mode S precursor and the effect display for the help mode S are executed in the production display device 1600. - 特許庁

As described above, during the execution of the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C, when t5, which is the time when the symbol variation B that becomes an immediate short win, stops, the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C being executed is continued without ending. As a result, the RTC start display is not executed on the performance display device 1600 from t1 to t2, but by executing the entire RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C without ending in the middle, the start of the RTC performance can be notified to the outside, and the start of the RTC performance can be prevented from being unrecognized.

In addition, the RTC effect and the pattern variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) are all performed by the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the movement of the movable bodies A to C, the light emission of the lamp, and the sound output, and the effect elements used for the effect overlap (at least partially overlap). At this time, at the time t1 when the RTC performance start condition is established, in the help mode S precursor performance state, the performance display of the performance display device 1600 used in the help mode S precursor performance is executed, while the operation of the movable bodies A to C used in the help mode S precursor performance, the lamp emission, and the voice output are restricted. That is, the execution of some of the effect elements used in the help mode S omen effect is restricted. Similarly, when t5, which is the stopping time of the symbol variation B that becomes an immediate short hit, arrives after t1, it is the timing to execute the help mode S performance, but while the performance display of the performance display device 1600 used in the help mode S performance is being executed, the operation of the movable bodies A to C used in the help mode S performance, the light emission of the lamp, and the voice output are restricted. That is, the execution of some of the effect elements used in the help mode S effect is restricted. As a result, since the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the light emission of the lamp and the voice output can be used in the RTC performance from the time t1 at which the start condition of the RTC performance is established, it is possible to inform the outside that the RTC performance is being executed and prevent the execution of the RTC performance from being unrecognized.

On the other hand, the effect display of the effect display device 1600 is used in the help mode S precursor effect and the help mode S effect from the time t1 at which the RTC effect start condition is established. Since the performance display device 1600 is provided in the central part of the game board 5, it is the part that the player pays most attention to, and since the help mode S precursor performance display and the help mode S performance display are executed for such a performance display device 1600, it is possible to prevent overlooking the control to the low-probability time-saving state C due to an immediate short win and to prevent the start of control of the low-probability time-saving state C from not being recognized.

The above movable bodies A to C include movable bodies that can be contacted by the player and movable bodies that cannot be contacted by the player. Specifically, the movable body A is an upper back front presentation unit 3300 attached to the game board 5, the movable body B is a lower back front presentation unit 3400 attached to the game board 5, and the player cannot touch these movable bodies. On the other hand, the movable body C is the effect operation section 301 of the effect operation unit 300 attached to the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, and can be touched by the player. Then, the movable bodies A to C sequentially execute the RTC start motion during the execution of the RTC effect, so that each movable body operates. Here, whether or not the movable bodies A to C operate normally is monitored, but when an abnormality occurs in which the movable body C does not operate normally, there is a high possibility that the movable body C will not operate normally due to the player's mischief. Therefore, when the movable body C does not operate normally during the execution of the RTC performance, the period during which the execution of a part of the performance elements used in the help mode S precursor performance and the help mode S performance is restricted is extended as a penalty for the player. In other words, even after t4 when the end condition of the RTC performance is established, the state of restricting the execution of a part of the performance elements used in the help mode S premonitory performance and the help mode S performance is continued. As a penalty for the player, the degree of restriction may be strengthened in a state in which the execution of some of the performance elements used in the help mode S portent effect and the help mode S effect is restricted. In this way, when an abnormality occurs in which the movable body C does not operate normally during the execution of the RTC presentation, the player is given a penalty, so that the player can be encouraged not to mischief the movable body C.例文帳に追加

FIG. 209 is a time chart showing the progress of the performance when the conditions for starting the RTC performance are established after the immediate short win. As shown in FIG. 209, at the time t1 at which the condition for starting the RTC effect is established, if the help mode S effect state is reached, the help mode S effect state is shifted to the RTC effect state. Moreover, when t1 when the start condition of RTC production|presentation is satisfied arrives, it is already controlled by the low probability time saving state C. FIG.

Specifically, the effect display device 1600 executes the effect display for the help mode S indicating that the help mode S is being executed (the low-probability time-saving state C is being controlled) at time t1, but in the period from t1 to t2, in addition to the effect display for the help mode S, the RTC countdown display that counts down (for example, 3→2→1) until the start of the RTC effect is executed. Also, during the period from t2 to tx, the RTC start display is executed to notify the start of the RTC presentation. Between tx and tx, from tx to t4 when the end condition of the RTC performance is established, in addition to the performance display for the help mode S, the performance display for the RTC which is not executed except for the RTC performance is executed. The effect display for RTC is started after waiting for the first symbol variation (symbol variation D) to start after t3. In such a state, for example, an RTC countdown display, an RTC start display, and an effect display for the RTC are executed using the entire display area, and the effect display for the help mode S is executed so as to display 'help mode S in progress' indicating that the low-probability time-saving state C is being controlled in the upper left part of the display area.

As for the movable bodies A to C, the movable bodies A to C are made to move sequentially in accordance with the execution of the RTC start display on the effect display device 1600 from t2 to t3. Specifically, from t2 to t3, the RTC start operation of the movable body A, the RTC start operation of the movable body B, and the RTC start operation of the movable body C are sequentially executed. In this way, when t2 for starting the RTC start operation of the movable bodies A to C arrives during the execution of the symbol variation B during the execution of the help mode S (during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C), the operation designated by the symbol variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern) is terminated, and the RTC start motion of the movable bodies A to C is forcibly started. Further, in t2 to t3 of the RTC performance states t1 to t4, the movable bodies A to C are not subjected to the action designated by the pattern variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern), but except for the period of t2 to t3, the movable bodies A to C are not used in the RTC performance, and the movable bodies A to C are subjected to the motion specified by the symbol variation performance (performance corresponding to the variation pattern).

Further, in the lamp light emission, the LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emit light in the light emission pattern for RTC during the period from t1 to t4 as the RTC effect is executed. In other words, during the period from t1 to t3, although the performance display for the help mode S is executed by the performance display device 1600, the LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 do not emit light in the light emission pattern for the help mode S. Also, in audio output, BGM for RTC is output from a speaker during the period from t1 to t4 as the RTC effect is executed. In other words, during the period from t1 to t3, BGM for the help mode S is not output from the speaker even though the effect display for the help mode S is being executed on the effect display device 1600. FIG.

As described above, the RTC effect and the pattern variation effect (effect corresponding to the variation pattern) are both performed by the effect display of the effect display device 1600, the movement of the movable bodies A to C, the light emission of the lamp, and the sound output, and the effect elements used for the effect overlap (at least partially overlap). At this time, at the time t1 when the RTC performance start condition is established, in the help mode S performance state, the performance display of the performance display device 1600 used in the help mode S performance is executed, while the operation of the movable bodies A to C used in the help mode S performance, lamp light emission and voice output are restricted. That is, the execution of some of the effect elements used in the help mode S effect is restricted. As a result, the operation of the movable bodies A to C, the light emission of the lamp and the voice output can be used in the RTC performance from the time t1 at which the start condition of the RTC performance is established, so that the fact that the RTC performance is being executed can be notified to the outside and the execution of the RTC performance can be prevented from being unrecognized.

On the other hand, during the execution of the help mode S (during the control of the low-probability time-saving state C), the effect display of the effect display device 1600 is used in the help mode S effect from the time t1 when the condition for starting the RTC effect is satisfied. Since the performance display device 1600 is provided in the central part of the game board 5, it is the part that the player pays most attention to, and since the help mode S performance display is executed for such a performance display device 1600, it is possible to prevent that the fact that the help mode S is being executed (the low probability time saving state C is being controlled) is not overlooked and that the help mode S is being executed (the low probability time saving state C is being controlled) is not recognized.

(Restriction of help mode L omen production)
As explained in FIG. 204, after the power is turned on with RAM clearing or after the execution of the jackpot game, when the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), when the symbol variation B is executed, at the time t5 when the symbol variation B is stopped, the low probability non-time saving state is shifted to the low probability time saving state B. In addition, before t5, the help mode L precursor performance state for executing the ``help mode L precursor performance'' indicating that the ``help mode L'' is imminent is set, whereas from t5, the state shifts to the help mode L performance state for executing the ``help mode L performance'' indicating that the ``help mode L'' is being executed. In this example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), and until the fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches 700 times, the low probability It is controlled to the time saving state B, and the period of control to such a low probability time saving state B is called "help mode L".

In the above-described effect example, when the variable display of the decorative symbols is stopped in the effect display device 1600, until the variable display of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 500 to 600 times, a count effect is executed to notify how many times the special symbol has changed in the low probability state. With respect to such a count effect, the main control board 1310 counts up the number of relief counters when the fluctuation of the special symbols stops in the low probability state, and the main control board 1310 transmits information (relief count command) on the number of relief counters to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 grasps how many times the special symbols have changed in the low probability state. A count effect is executed to notify how many times the number of times is. That is, the count effect is executed as the effect determined by the peripheral control board 1510 separately from the effect indicated by the variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310 .

In this example, after the power is turned on with RAM clearing or after the execution of the jackpot game, when the symbol variation B is executed, the variation display of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter=600), as the variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310, the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect can be determined. Here, in the case of carrying out the symbol variation in which the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state does not reach 600 times (relief frequency counter=600), the normal variation pattern is determined as the variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310, and the variation pattern for the help mode L omen performance is not determined. Then, when the variation pattern for the help mode L portent performance is determined, by executing the help mode L portent performance which is executed only in the pattern variation B where the variable display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue frequency counter=600), it is possible to know in advance that the "help mode L" controlled to the low probability time saving state B will be executed.

In the case where the above-described count effect is not executed as the "help mode L foreshadowing effect", when the symbol variation B in which the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief counter = 600) is executed, if the variation pattern for the help mode L foreshadowing effect is determined, the effect corresponding to the variation pattern (help mode L foreshadowing effect) is executed, whereby it is possible to know in advance that the "help mode L" controlled to the low probability time saving state B will be executed. On the other hand, when a normal variation pattern is determined without determining a variation pattern for the help mode L portent performance, performance corresponding to the variation pattern (performance other than the help mode L portent performance) is executed, so that it is not possible to know in advance that the 'help mode L' controlled to the low-probability time-saving state B will be executed. In this example, the count performance is not executed as the ``help mode L precursor performance'', but the count performance may be executed regardless of whether or not the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor performance is determined. Further, in this example, when the symbol variation B is executed when the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (the number of relief counter = 600), the variation pattern for the help mode L omen effect can be determined. 0 times), the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect may be determined.

In addition, in this example, when executing the symbol variation B in which the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter=600), a specific variation pattern execution button (not shown), which is a special operation unit for determining the variation pattern (specific variation pattern) for the help mode L portent effect, is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the specific variation pattern execution button may be an operation unit that is provided in a place where the player cannot operate or visually recognize it, apart from the power switch 630a related to turning on the power. Of these, if the operation unit is operated by inserting a special tool (such as a thin stick) possessed by the administrator or by inserting a key, unintentional erroneous operations in the hall can be suppressed.

Specifically, when a specific variation pattern execution button is operated when the power is turned on, the variation pattern for the help mode L omen performance is determined when the variation display of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief frequency counter=600) and the symbol variation B is executed. On the other hand, when the specific variation pattern execution button is not operated when the power is turned on, when the variation display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief frequency counter=600) and the symbol variation B is executed, the variation pattern for the help mode L omen performance is not determined, but the normal variation pattern is determined. That is, depending on whether or not the hall manager operates the specific variation pattern execution button when the power is turned on, it is possible to select whether or not to determine the variation pattern for the help mode L omen performance when performing the symbol variation B when the variation display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief frequency counter=600). In this way, when the specific variation pattern execution button is not operated when the power is turned on, the help mode L foreshadowing effect corresponding to the variation pattern for the help mode L foreshadowing effect is not performed, and the help mode L effect, which indicates that the help mode L is being executed (low-probability time-saving state B is being controlled), is suddenly executed in the next symbol variation C when the symbol variation B is executed when the special pattern variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600). , You can give a strong impact that saves time without being hit.

During the execution of the help mode L (during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B), the variation pattern for the help mode L performance is determined as the variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310 when performing the pattern variation. That is, after the start of control of the low-probability time saving state B, the pattern variation until the special symbol variation display in the low-probability time saving state B reaches 700 times determines the variation pattern for the help mode L production. The variation pattern for the help mode L presentation is determined during the execution of the help mode L (during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B) regardless of whether or not the specific variation pattern execution button is operated when the power is turned on. That is, when a specific variation pattern execution button is operated at the time of turning on the power, before and after the variation display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief frequency counter=600), before shifting to the low probability time saving state B, the help mode L precursor performance is executed, and after shifting to the low probability time saving state B, the help mode L performance is executed. On the other hand, when the specific variation pattern execution button is not operated when the power is turned on, before and after the variable display of the special pattern in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief frequency counter=600), the help mode L precursor performance is not executed before shifting to the low probability time saving state B, and the help mode L performance is executed after shifting to the low probability time saving state B. In this way, when the specific variation pattern execution button is not operated when the power is turned on, the help mode L precursor performance is not executed before shifting to the low-probability time-saving state B, and the help-mode L performance is suddenly executed after shifting to the low-probability time-saving state B, so that the impact of giving the time-saving without getting hit can be given strongly.

Also, even when the power switch 630a is operated while operating the RAM clear switch 1310f at the time of power-on and the power is turned on with RAM clear, if the specific variation pattern execution button different from the RAM clear switch 1310f and the power switch 630a is not operated at the time of power-on, the variation pattern for the help mode L omen effect is not determined when the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) when the symbol variation B is executed. (determines normal fluctuation patterns). In other words, whether or not the hall manager turns on the power with clearing the RAM alone does not change whether or not to determine the variation pattern for the help mode L omen effect when executing the symbol variation B when the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (rescue number counter = 600). make it possible to

In the above, depending on whether or not the hall manager operates the specific variation pattern execution button when the power is turned on, when the special symbol variation display in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), the symbol variation B is executed. Specifically, when a big win (jackpot game) is already obtained after turning on the power, and after that, when the variable display of special symbols in a low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), when the symbol variation B reaching 600 times (relief number counter = 600) is executed, the variation pattern for the help mode L omen performance is determined. On the other hand, when the variation display of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief frequency counter = 600) in a state where no big win (big winning game) is obtained after the power is turned on, the normal variation pattern is determined without determining the variation pattern for the help mode L omen performance when executing the symbol variation B reaching the 600 times (relief frequency counter = 600). That is, depending on whether or not a big win (jackpot game) is already obtained before the variable display of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter=600), it is determined whether or not the variation pattern for the help mode L omen performance is determined when the symbol variation B reaching 600 times (relief number counter=600) is executed. In such a configuration, it is possible to execute the help mode L precursor performance before shifting to the low-probability time-saving state B as compensation for the already obtained big win (jackpot game), and the help mode L precursor performance can be enjoyed.

In addition, in the above description, when the specific variation pattern execution button is not operated when the power is turned on, the variation display of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), and the normal variation pattern is determined without determining the variation pattern for the help mode L omen effect. Specifically, when the variable display of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) after the power is turned on, the transition from the low probability non-working time saving state to the low probability working time saving state B is performed. In the second and later low-probability time-saving state B (help mode L) after the input, the variation pattern for the help mode L precursor effect is determined before shifting to the low-probability time-saving state B. That is, depending on whether or not it is the first low-probability time-saving state B (help mode L) after power-on, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern for the help mode L portent performance is determined when the pattern variation B before shifting to the low-probability time-saving state B is executed. In such a configuration, it is known that in the first low-probability time-saving state B (help mode L) after power-on, it is already possible to shift from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B, and in the second and subsequent low-probability time-saving state B (helping mode L) after power-on, the effect can be prevented from becoming monotonous by newly executing the help mode L precursor performance before shifting to the low-probability time-saving state B.

[Regarding resetting the relief counter]
In the above, after turning on the power with clearing the RAM or after executing a big hit game, the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol in the low probability state is counted from the initial value "0" using the relief number counter in the main control board 1310, and when the number of times of variation of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), it is controlled to the low probability time saving state B. With respect to such a relief number counter, when power is turned on with RAM clearing or when a jackpot game is executed, the count of the number of fluctuations of special symbols in a low probability state is reset. However, since the number of fluctuations of the special symbols in the low-probability state is directly linked to whether to transition from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the low-probability time-saving state B, whether or not to reset the count of the relief number counter is preferably configured so that the hall manager can select when the power is turned on, regardless of whether the power is turned on with RAM clearing. In this example, a configuration that enables whether or not to reset the counter for the number of repairs when the power is turned on will be described below.

In this example, a relief maintenance button (not shown), which is a special operation unit for resetting the count of the relief number counter when the power is turned on, is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 . The relief maintenance button may be an operation unit that is provided at a location that the player cannot operate or visually recognize, apart from the power switch 630a related to turning on the power. Of these, if the operation unit is operated by inserting a special tool (such as a thin stick) possessed by the administrator or by inserting a key, unintentional erroneous operations in the hall can be suppressed.

Specifically, when the relief maintenance button is operated when the power is turned on, the count of the number of special symbol variations (relief number counter) in the low probability state is maintained without being reset. On the other hand, when the relief maintenance button is not operated when the power is turned on, the count of the number of variations of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is reset. That is, depending on whether or not the hall manager operates the relief maintenance button, it is possible to select whether or not to reset the count of the number of variations of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state. In this way, when the relief maintenance button is operated when the power is turned on, the count of the number of special symbol variations (relief counter) in the low probability state is maintained, so that the special symbol variation display in the low probability state from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B is reduced. Variable display of the special symbols in the low probability state is required many times before shifting to the time saving state B, and the hall manager can select whether or not to reset according to the hall environment.

FIG. 210 is a list of RAM clear conditions indicating power-on operations for executing RAM clear. In this example, when the power is turned on (when the power switch 630a is operated), if a RAM clear operation is performed by operating the RAM clear switch 1310f, or if a setting change operation is performed by turning on the setting key switch 1311a (it may be a setting change operation by turning on the RAM clear switch 1310f and the setting key switch 1311a), the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is cleared to initialize the game state. (Set to low-probability non-time-saving state). In addition, the set values are stored in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control board 1310a, and when the setting change operation is performed, the set values that have already been set (the set values when the power is turned off before the power is turned on) can be changed. In addition, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state is stored in the second specific area of the RAM built in the main control board 1310a, and the count can be maintained when the relief maintenance button is operated when the power is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 210, during the RAM clear operation, if the relief maintenance button is operated, RAM clear for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is executed to initialize the game state. In addition, since the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 is not backed up when the power is turned off, the rendering state is returned to the initial state. In addition, the setting value is not changed or displayed for confirmation, and the already set setting value (the setting value when the power is turned off before the power is turned on) is maintained. In addition, regarding the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state, the count is maintained. Also, the initialization of the game state is executed at the timing when the RAM clear signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined to be ON after the RAM clear operation. In addition, as a notification mode to be notified to the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit blue light from the timing when the RAM clear signal is determined to be ON until a predetermined period has passed, and a voice saying "The game state has been cleared. The set value and the number of times of relief are maintained." Therefore, when the relief maintenance button is operated at the time of RAM clearing operation, the set value already set is maintained, and the counting of the number of variations of the special pattern (relief number counter) in the low probability state is continued from the time of the power shutdown.

Since the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 is not backed up when the power is turned off, the information about the effect being executed is lost when the power is turned off.

Also, during the RAM clearing operation, if the relief maintenance button is not operated, RAM clearing for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is executed to initialize the game state. In addition, since the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 is not backed up when the power is turned off, the rendering state is returned to the initial state. In addition, the setting value is not changed or displayed for confirmation, and the already set setting value (the setting value when the power is turned off before the power is turned on) is maintained. In addition, regarding the count of the number of variations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state, the count is reset. In addition, initialization of the game state and resetting of the count are executed at the timing when the RAM clear signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is determined to be ON after the RAM clear operation. In addition, as a notification mode to be notified to the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit yellow light from the timing when the RAM clear signal is determined to be ON until a predetermined period has passed, and the sound "The game state and the number of reliefs have been cleared. The set value is maintained" is output from the speaker. Therefore, when the relief maintenance button is not operated at the time of the RAM clearing operation, the set value already set is maintained, and the number of variations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state is counted from the initial value "0".

On the other hand, when the relief maintenance button is operated at the time of setting change operation, RAM clear for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is executed to initialize the game state. In addition, since the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 is not backed up when the power is turned off, the rendering state is returned to the initial state. In addition, it is possible to change the setting of the setting value, and when changing the setting of the setting value, it is possible to increase the value by 1 every time the setting switching button 1311b is operated from the state in which the already set setting value (the setting value when the power is turned off before the power is turned on) is maintained, and when the maximum value of the setting value 6 is reached, the setting value returns to the initial value of 1, and is increased by 1 again. In addition, regarding the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state, the count is maintained. Also, the initialization of the game state is executed at the timing when it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF after the setting change operation and the setting change operation is completed (input timing is the setting key OFF signal input to the main control MPU 1310a). At the timing when it is determined that the setting change operation is completed, the set value decided by the setting change is stored in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. In addition, as a notification mode to be notified to the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit green light from the timing when it is determined that the setting change operation is completed until a predetermined period elapses, and a voice saying "The set value has been changed and the game state has been cleared. The set value is maintained" is output from the speaker. Therefore, when the relief maintenance button is operated at the time of setting change operation, the setting change of the set value is enabled, and the number of times of variation of the special pattern (relief number counter) in the low probability state is counted from the continuation of the power shutdown.

Also, during the setting change operation, if the relief maintenance button is not operated, RAM clear for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is executed to initialize the game state. In addition, since the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 is not backed up when the power is turned off, the rendering state is returned to the initial state. In addition, it is possible to change the setting of the setting value, and when changing the setting of the setting value, it is possible to increase the value by 1 every time the setting switching button 1311b is operated from the state in which the already set setting value (the setting value when the power is turned off before the power is turned on) is maintained, and when the maximum value of the setting value 6 is reached, the setting value returns to the initial value of 1, and is increased by 1 again. In addition, regarding the count of the number of variations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state, the count is reset. In addition, the initialization of the game state and the resetting of the count are performed at the timing when it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF after the setting change operation and the setting change operation is completed (the input timing is the setting key OFF signal input to the main control MPU 1310a). At the timing when it is determined that the setting change operation is completed, the set value decided by the setting change is stored in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. In addition, as a notification mode to be notified to the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit white light from the timing when it is determined that the setting change operation is completed until a predetermined period passes, and the sound "The set value has been changed and the game state and the number of times of relief have been cleared" are output from the speaker. Therefore, when the relief maintenance button is not operated at the time of the setting change operation, the setting change of the setting value is enabled, and the number of times of variation of the special pattern (relief number counter) in the low probability state is counted from the initial value "0".

In addition, as described above in detail, when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM when the power is turned on, or when it is determined that the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off, an error is displayed to inform that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or unreliable). When such a RAM error occurs, a specific abnormality flag is turned ON, power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and when the power is turned on again, a setting change operation is performed to release the RAM error and proceed with the game. Specifically, when a specific abnormality flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), if a setting change operation is performed, the game state is initialized and the setting value can be changed regardless of whether or not the relief maintenance button is operated at the time of the setting change operation. In the setting change of the setting value, the initial minimum setting value 1 is temporarily set, and each time the setting switching button 1311b is operated, the value is increased by 1. When the maximum setting value 6 is reached, the setting value returns to the initial setting value 1, and can be increased by 1 again. In addition, regarding the count of the number of variations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state, the count is reset. In addition, the initialization of the game state and the resetting of the count are performed at the timing when it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF after the setting change operation and the setting change operation is completed (the input timing is the setting key OFF signal input to the main control MPU 1310a). At the timing when it is determined that the setting change operation is completed, the set value decided by the setting change is stored in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

In the above, when the setting change operation is performed when the specific abnormality flag is ON (when the RAM error occurs), regardless of whether the relief maintenance button is operated at the time of the setting change operation, the count of the number of variations of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state is reset. When a RAM error occurs, there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM, and there is a possibility that there is also an abnormality in the count of the number of special symbol variations (relief number counter) in a low probability state, so that the fairness of the game can be maintained by resetting the count. When the specific error flag is ON (when a RAM error occurs), if power is turned on without setting change operation, the specific error flag remains ON without canceling the RAM error.

In this example, when the relief maintenance button is operated at the time of power-on, when the relief maintenance button is operated during the RAM clear operation, the set value that has already been set is maintained, and the number of special symbol fluctuations (relief counter) in the low probability state is counted from the continuation of the power shutdown. It is designed to count from the continuation. In addition, as a case where the relief maintenance button is not operated when the power is turned on, when the relief maintenance button is not operated during the RAM clearing operation, the already set value is maintained, and the number of special symbol fluctuations (relief number counter) in the low probability state is counted from the initial value "0". is counted from "0". In other words, when the power is turned on, depending on whether or not to change the setting of the set value and whether or not to maintain the count of the number of variations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low-probability state, the hall manager only has to operate a predetermined operation unit, and the hall manager can selectively execute from four patterns according to the hall environment. For example, when the relief maintenance button is operated when the power is turned on at the start of the hall business, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbols in the low probability state (relief count counter) is maintained, so that the number of times of fluctuation display of the special symbols in the low probability state until the transition from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B is small. On the other hand, if the relief maintenance button is not operated when the power is turned on at the start of the hall business, the count of the number of times of variation of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state is reset, so that the variable display of the special symbols in the low probability state is required many times until the transition from the low probability non-time saving state to the low probability time saving state B, and the transition to the low probability time saving state B does not occur early after the opening of the hall, and the expectation of the player does not rise early.

It should be noted that regardless of whether or not the relief maintenance button is operated at the time of power-on, if normal power-on (only power switch 630a is operated without turning on RAM clear switch 1310f and setting key switch 1311a) without RAM clear operation or setting change operation is performed, RAM clear for initializing the RAM built in main control MPU 1310a is not executed, and the game state is returned to the state at the time of power-off based on the backup created at the time of power-off. In addition, since the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 is not backed up when the power is turned off, the rendering state is returned to the initial state. In addition, the setting value is not changed or displayed for confirmation, and the already set setting value (the setting value when the power is turned off before the power is turned on) is maintained. In addition, regarding the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state, the count is maintained. In addition, as a notification mode to inform the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit purple light from the timing when the RAM clear signal is determined to be ON until a predetermined period elapses, and the sound "The game state has been restored. The set value and the number of times of relief are maintained" are output from the speaker. Therefore, when the power is normally turned on, the set value already set is maintained, and the number of variations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state is counted from the continuation of the power cutoff, and the game state is also returned to the state at the power cutoff.

In addition, in this example, when the game state is initialized, the notification mode to be notified to the outside is made different depending on whether the count of the number of variations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state is maintained or reset. Thus, for example, even when the hall manager erroneously operates the relief maintenance button at the time of power-on and maintains the count of the number of variations of the special symbol (relief number counter) in the low probability state, the mistake can be noticed by the notification mode to be notified to the outside, and the hall manager can be prevented from unintentionally maintaining the count.

In the above, the configuration is such that the relief maintenance button is provided. For example, even if the configuration is not provided with the relief maintenance button, when the power is turned on, it is preferable that the hole manager can select whether or not to maintain the counting of the number of special symbol variations (relief counter) according to the hall environment. In such a configuration, for example, when a RAM clear operation is performed without turning ON the setting key switch 1311a, the set value that has already been set is maintained, and the number of special symbol fluctuations (relief counter) in the low probability state is counted from the continuation of the power shutdown. , counting from the initial value “0”. Thus, only when the hall manager performs the RAM clearing operation instead of the setting change operation, the count of the number of fluctuations (relief number counter) of the special pattern in the low probability state can be maintained without being reset, and the needs of the hall manager can be met.

Also, even if the configuration is such that the relief maintenance button is not provided, when the power is turned on, if it is desired to maintain the count of the number of special symbol variations (relief number counter) in the low probability state, it is preferable that the hall manager operate some kind of operation unit. Specifically, the ON operation of the setting key switch 1311a as a setting change operation may be used as some operation unit. In such a configuration, when a setting change operation is performed by turning on the setting key switch 1311a at the time of power-on, the setting value can be changed while the number of special symbol variations (relief number counter) in the low probability state is counted from the continuation of the power shutdown. On the other hand, when the RAM clearing operation without turning on the setting key switch 1311a is performed, the already set value is maintained. The count is counted from the initial value "0". Thus, when the power is turned on, if the hall manager does not turn on the setting key switch 1311a, the count of the number of variations of special patterns (relief number counter) in a low probability state is reset, and the hall manager can prevent the count from being maintained unintentionally.

In the case where the relief maintenance button is provided, it is possible for the hall manager to selectively execute one of the four patterns depending on whether to operate the RAM clearing operation or the setting change operation and whether or not the relief maintenance button is operated. For this reason, when the pachinko machine 1 is not provided with a relief maintenance button, an operation unit that can be operated on the hall side may be provided to increase the patterns that can be selected by the hall manager.

In this example, in the variable display of the special symbols on the function display unit 1400, the stop symbols of the special symbols are stop-displayed, and in the variable display of the decorative symbols on the performance display device 1600, the stop symbols of the decorative symbols are stop-displayed. And, regarding the counting of the number of variations of the special symbols in the low-probability state (relief number counter), it is counted when the special symbols are stopped. When a big win is achieved, the big win pattern is stop-displayed as the stop pattern of the special pattern in the variable display of the special pattern in the function display unit 1400, and the big win pattern is stop-displayed as the stop pattern of the decorative pattern in the variable display of the decorative pattern in the performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加After the big win pattern is stopped, the big win game is executed, but the count of the number of variations of the special pattern (rescue number counter) in the low probability state is reset when the big win pattern is stopped before the start of the big win game. In such a configuration, when the power is cut off during execution of the variable display of the special symbols, and when the RAM clear operation or setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on after that, the RAM is cleared to initialize the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the variable state is initialized (the variable display is not performed). In addition, if the power is cut off during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols based on the big win before the big win game is executed, and if the RAM clear operation or the setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on after that, the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is initialized and the variable state is initialized (the variable display is not performed). No techniques are performed.

In the above configuration, if the power is cut off during execution of the special symbol variation display based on the big win, and the relief maintenance button is operated during the RAM clear operation when the power is turned on after that, when the game state is initialized, the special symbol variation display based on the big win during execution is initialized, and while maintaining the set value already set, the number of special symbol variations (relief counter) in the low probability state is counted from the continuation of the power shutdown, while the relief is maintained when the setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on. When the button is operated, when the game state is initialized, the variation display of the special symbols based on the big hit being executed is initialized, and while the set value can be changed, the number of variations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state is counted from the continuation of the power shutdown. In addition, if the power is cut off during execution of the variable display of the special symbols based on the big win, and if the relief maintenance button is not operated when the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on after that, the variable display of the special symbols based on the big win is initialized when the game state is initialized, and while maintaining the set value already set, the count for the number of variations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state is counted from the initial value "0", while the relief is maintained when the setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on. When the button is not operated, when the game state is initialized, the variation display of the special symbols based on the big win being executed is initialized, and while the setting value can be changed, the number of variations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state is counted from the initial value "0". In other words, the power is cut off during execution of the special symbol variation display based on the big win, and when the power is turned on after that (during RAM clear operation, setting change operation), when the game state is initialized, the special symbol variation display based on the big win being executed is initialized, but the hall manager may operate a predetermined operation unit depending on whether the setting value is to be changed and the number of special symbol variations (relief number counter) in the low probability state is to be maintained. can be selectively executed from four patterns according to the hall environment.

In addition, in this example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (the number of fluctuations other than the first special symbol and the second special symbol big hit) is counted, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times, so that it is controlled to the low probability time saving state B. For example, if a configuration for initializing all the controls related to the progress of the game like the RAM clearing process of the conventional pachinko machine 1 is added, the RAM clearing process is performed during the variable display of the special symbol. Even the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state is reset, and it may be difficult to confirm the shift to the low probability time saving state B in the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1 or the like. In this regard, in this example, even if a big win is achieved and the special symbol variation display based on the big win is executed before the special symbol variation count reaches 600 times in the low probability state, the power is cut off during the execution of the special symbol variation display based on the big win, and the relief maintenance button is operated when the power is turned on after that (when the RAM is cleared or when the setting is changed). As for the count for the number of fluctuations of the special patterns (relief number counter) in the low probability state, it can be counted from the continuation of the power shutdown, and in the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to perform the fluctuation display of the special patterns again, and it is possible to easily confirm the shift to the low probability time saving state B.

In addition, in the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, if you want to check various effects when shifting to the low-probability time-saving state B, even if you are out, during the fluctuation display when the number of fluctuations in the special pattern in the low-probability state reaches 600 times or during the fluctuation display immediately before that, the power is turned off regardless of whether it will be a big hit or not. The count for the number of times of variation of special symbols in the low probability state (relief number counter) can be counted from the continuation of the power shutdown, and in the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the 600th special symbol variation display etc. can be performed again, and the performance confirmation of the process of shifting to the low probability time saving state B can be facilitated.

In addition, when initializing the variable display of the special symbol being executed, by also initializing the stored information related to various reservations (reservation of the lottery result of the first special symbol, reservation of the lottery result of the second special symbol), when confirming the transition to the low probability time saving state B and confirming the production of the process of transitioning to the low probability time saving state B, the operator selects which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol to execute The variation display reaching the 600th time, and the immediately preceding. The variable display can be executed at any timing, and the degree of freedom of confirmation work can be increased. In addition, this work can be repeatedly executed by operating the relief maintenance button when the power is turned on (during RAM clear operation, setting change operation), and in this respect also, the degree of freedom in confirmation work can be increased.

In the above, the configuration is such that the relief maintenance button is provided. However, even if the configuration is not provided with the relief maintenance button, it is preferable that the hall manager can select according to the hall environment whether the power is cut off during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols up to 600 times or the variable display of the special symbols based on the big hit, and then when the power is turned on (when the RAM is cleared or when the settings are changed), the count of the number of variations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state is maintained or not. In such a configuration, only when the hall manager performs either the setting change operation or the RAM clear operation, while the variation display being executed is erased, the count of the number of variations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state is maintained without being reset, so that the needs of the hall manager can be met.

In this example, if the power is turned off during control of the time saving state, and the relief maintenance button is operated during the RAM clear operation at the time of power on after that, when initializing the variable display during execution, while maintaining the set value that has already been set, the number of special symbol fluctuations (relief counter) in the low probability state is counted from the continuation of the power shutdown. While the state is initialized to a low-probability non-time-saving state and the set value can be changed, the count of the number of fluctuations of the special pattern (relief number counter) in the low-probability state is continued after the power is cut off. Also, if the power is cut off during control of the time saving state and the relief maintenance button is not operated when the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on after that, when initializing the variable display during execution, it is initialized from the time saving state to the low probability non-time saving state, and while maintaining the set value already set, the count for the number of special symbol fluctuations (relief counter) in the low probability state is counted from the initial value “0”. When initializing the variable display in the middle, the time-saving state is initialized to the low-probability non-time-saving state, and while the setting value can be changed, the number of times of variation of the special pattern (relief number counter) in the low-probability state is counted from the initial value "0". In other words, the power is turned off during control of the time saving state, and when the power is turned on after that (during RAM clearing operation, setting change operation), when initializing the variable display being executed, the setting value is initialized from the time saving state to the low probability non-time saving state. can be selectively executed from

In the above description, in the case of a big win, the big win game is executed after the big win symbols are stopped, and the count of the number of special symbol variations (relief counter) in the low probability state is reset when the big win symbols stop. It may be reset when the ending period set after the end of the final round has passed, for example). In other words, in the case of a loss or a small win, the number of times of variation of special symbols (relief number counter) in a low probability state is counted when the special symbols are stopped, but in the case of a big win, the timing of resetting the number of times of variation of special symbols (relief number counter) in a low probability state may be delayed until the end of the subsequent big win game instead of the time of stopping the special symbols. In such a configuration, when the power is cut off during execution of the jackpot game, and when the RAM clearing operation or setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on after that, RAM clearing for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is executed, and the game state is initialized so as to erase the jackpot game (set to a low-probability non-time-saving state), so that the jackpot game under execution is not returned.

In the above-described configuration, if the power is cut off during execution of the jackpot game and the relief maintenance button is operated when the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on after that, when the game state is initialized, the jackpot game that is being executed is initialized, and while maintaining the set value that has already been set, the number of variations of the special symbol in the low probability state (relief counter) is counted from the continuation of the power cutoff. When the game is initialized, the jackpot game under execution is initialized and the set values can be changed, while the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state is continued from the time when the power supply is cut off. In addition, if the power is cut off during execution of the jackpot game and the relief maintenance button is not operated when the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on after that, the jackpot game being executed is initialized when the game state is initialized, and while maintaining the set value that has already been set, the count for the number of special symbol fluctuations (relief number counter) in the low probability state is counted from the initial value "0". At the time of initialization, the jackpot game under execution is initialized, and the number of times of variation of special symbols (relief number counter) in a low-probability state is counted from '0', which is the initial value, while making it possible to change the setting of set values. In other words, the power is turned off during execution of the jackpot game, and when the power is turned on after that (at the time of RAM clearing operation, setting change operation), when the game state is initialized, the jackpot game being executed is initialized, but the setting of the setting value is changed. can be executed.

In addition, in this example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state (the number of fluctuations other than the first special symbol and the second special symbol big hit) is counted, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the low probability state reaches 600 times. Even the count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbols in the probability state (relief number counter) is reset, and it may be difficult to confirm the shift to the low-probability time-saving state B in the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1 or the like. In this regard, if a big hit occurs and a jackpot game occurs before the number of fluctuations of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 times, the power is cut off during the execution of the jackpot game, and the relief maintenance button is operated when the power is turned on after that (when the RAM is cleared or when the setting is changed). It is possible to count from the continuation of the time, and in the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to facilitate confirmation of transition to the low-probability time-saving state B.

In the above, the configuration is such that the relief maintenance button is provided. However, even if the configuration is not provided with the relief maintenance button, it is preferable that the hole manager can select according to the hall environment whether or not to maintain the count of the number of variations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state when the power is turned off during execution of the jackpot game and the power is turned on thereafter (during RAM clearing operation, setting change operation). In such a configuration, only when the hall manager performs either the setting change operation or the RAM clear operation, the count of the number of variations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state is maintained without being reset, so that the needs of the hall manager can be met.

In the above, the configuration is such that the relief maintenance button is provided, but for example, even if the configuration is not provided with the relief maintenance button, it is preferable that the hall manager can select according to the hall environment whether or not to maintain the count of the number of special symbol variations (relief number counter) in the low probability state when the power is turned off during the jackpot game and the power is turned on after that (during RAM clearing operation, setting change operation). In such a configuration, only when the hall manager performs either setting change operation or RAM clear operation, the count of the number of variations of the special symbols (relief number counter) in the low probability state is maintained without being reset while erasing the jackpot game, so that the needs of the hall manager can be met.

Further, as described above in detail, the performance display device 1600 executes a count performance for notifying how many times the special symbols have changed in the low probability state as the ``help mode L omen performance'' until the variation display of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 500 to 600 times. The current count of the number of fluctuations of special symbols (relief number counter) in such a low probability state is displayed even during the period when the setting value is changed and the display confirmation of the setting value is performed so that the hall manager can confirm whether or not to reset the count even if the special symbol variation display in the low probability state is other than 500 to 600 times, so that the hall manager can confirm. In the following, the history display displayed during a period in which the setting value is changed or the display of the setting value is being checked will be described.

FIG. 211 shows a history display that can be displayed during a period in which the setting value is being changed or the display of the setting value is being checked. This example shows a state in which a setting change operation is performed without the relief maintenance button being operated when the power is turned on, and the setting value is being changed. When the setting change operation is performed, the already set set value (the set value when the power is turned off before the power is turned on) can be changed.

FIGS. 211A and 211B show the display screen of effect display device 1600 in a state in which the setting value is being changed. FIG. 211A shows the display screen immediately after the start of setting change of the setting value. In the center of the screen, a message image of "setting change in progress" is displayed, and a guide image for switching to the history display (operation image showing effect operation unit 310) is displayed below it. FIG. 211(B) is a history display image switched from the display screen of FIG. 211(A) when the effect operation section 310 is operated.

In FIG. 211(B), a first history display section is displayed in which the history of the past 12 times can be checked line by line on a single screen. "Date and time information" based on RTC information, "Information on game state" indicating whether or not the game state has been initialized, including the variable display of the above-mentioned special symbols and jackpot games, "Information on setting value" indicating the current setting value, "Information on count value of relief number counter", and "Work information such as RAM clear operation and setting change operation". are recorded from left to right. These pieces of information are stored in a specific storage area of the main control board 1310 so as not to be erased even if a RAM clear operation or a setting change operation is performed. 211A and 211B are effect images generated and developed by the peripheral control board 1510 by transmitting various information stored in the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 during the period in which the setting value is being changed or the display of the setting value is being checked.

Also, in FIG. 211B, the history (2020/3/9 7:15:00) shown in the bottom line of the first history display portion is a display related to the current setting change operation, and the information "under change" is recorded in the "information on setting value", and is updated when the setting value is confirmed. Also, at the lower left of the first history display section, a guide image (operation image showing the effect operation section 310) for returning to the display screen shown in FIG.

The current ``information on the count value of the relief number counter'' includes two types, ``the number of variations after clearing the RAM'' and ``the number of variations after the big hit'', and the ``number of variations after RAM clear'' displays the total number of variations counted from the initial value when the count value of the relief number counter is reset to the initial value by performing the RAM clearing operation or the setting change operation without operating the relief maintenance button. Further, in the ``number of fluctuations after the big win'', when the big win game is executed in the process of progressing the game and the count value of the relief number counter is reset to the initial value, the number of fluctuations counted from the initial value is displayed. In other words, when the jackpot game is not executed in the process of progressing the game, 'the number of fluctuations after the big win' is displayed as zero, and the numerical value is recorded only in the 'the number of fluctuations after clearing the RAM'. The example of FIG. 211(B) shows a case where a jackpot game is executed in the process of progressing the game, "412" is recorded in the "number of fluctuations after the jackpot", and only "2995" is recorded in the "number of fluctuations after clearing the RAM", and the hall manager can recognize the count value of the relief number counter by "412", which is the "number of fluctuations after the jackpot".

In this example, since the setting change operation is performed without the relief maintenance button being operated when the power is turned on, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off and the setting change operation is completed, the RAM is cleared, and the count value of the relief counter is reset to the initial value. That is, before the count value of the relief number counter is reset to the initial value, the hall manager can recognize the count value (count value before initialization) of the relief number counter by '412' which is the 'variation number after the big win'. Then, when it is desired to maintain the count value of the remedy number counter after recognizing the count value of the remedy number counter (the count value before initialization), it is sufficient to turn off the power without ending the setting change operation (without turning off the setting key switch 1311a), and then operate the remedy maintenance button when the power is turned on to maintain the count value of the remedy number counter.

FIG. 211(C) shows the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in a state where the setting change operation is finished, and the history display image is displayed continuously from the display screen of FIG. 211(B). The display screen of FIG. 211(C) is displayed until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the setting key switch 1311a is turned off and the setting change operation is completed. After the elapse of the predetermined time, the history display screen is erased. Further, in FIG. 211(C), in the portion of "Information about setting value" in the history (March 9, 2020 7:15:00) shown in the bottom line of the first history display portion, since the setting value has been finalized by the end of the setting change operation, the finalized value ("4" in this example) is updated and displayed. Also, in this example, the setting change operation is performed without the relief maintenance button being operated when the power is turned on. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned off and the setting change operation is completed, the RAM is cleared and the count value of the relief counter is reset to the initial value. Note that the date and time information may also be updated and displayed when the setting change operation is completed.

In addition, when the relief maintenance button is operated at the time of setting change operation, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off and the setting change operation is completed, the count value of the relief number counter is maintained while executing RAM clearing. Therefore, the values displayed during the setting change operation ("2995" for "number of fluctuations after RAM clear" and "412" for "number of fluctuations after big win") that were displayed during the setting change operation continue without being updated. is displayed.

As described above, during the period in which setting values are changed and setting values are displayed and confirmed, the hall manager can perform any operation to confirm the current count of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (relief number counter) in a low probability state, and can determine whether the hall manager resets the count value of the relief number counter without carelessly leaking it to the surroundings. That is, when the hall manager wants to reset the count value of the relief number counter, the count of the number of special symbol fluctuations (relief number counter) in the low probability state may be reset without operating the relief maintenance button when the power is turned on after the power is shut off.

Further, in the second history display unit, in addition to the above, for example, the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief counter = 600), and the number of times the low probability time saving state B is controlled may be displayed.

In addition, during the period in which the setting of the set value is changed or the display of the set value is being checked, the ball launching device 540 is in a state in which the game ball B is not controlled to be shot. This displays the current count (the count at the start of changing the setting of the set value or confirming the display of the set value) for the number of times the special symbol changes in the low probability state (relief number counter) during the period when the setting value is changed or the display confirmation of the set value is performed. When the game ball B is enabled to be shot from the ball launching device 540 during such a period, the number of times the special symbol changes (relief number counter) in the low probability state is counted up when the ball enters the first start port 2004 or the second start port 2005. This causes a discrepancy with the count being displayed. In this respect, during the period when the setting of the set value is changed or the display of the set value is confirmed, by making the state in which the ball shooting device 540 cannot perform the shooting control for shooting the game ball B, the count being displayed does not deviate and the hall manager can accurately grasp the current count.

[Regarding the return of the short-time production at the time of power failure]
In the above, low probability time saving state AC is set as the low probability time saving state. Specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit C", the low probability time saving state A is controlled until the next "big hit" after the execution of the 10R big win game. After the power is turned on with RAM clearing or after the execution of the jackpot game, the number of variations of the special symbols in the low probability state (relief number counter) is counted, and when the number of variations of the special symbols in the low probability state does not reach 600 times (relief number counter = 600) and the number of variations of the special symbols in the low probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), even though the lottery results of the special symbols are not winning, the subsequent special symbols are displayed. Until the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times (700 times in this example), it is controlled to the low probability short working hours state B. Further, when the lottery result of the special pattern is ``immediate short win'', the big win game is not executed, and the low probability time saving state C is controlled until the number of fluctuations of the special pattern reaches a prescribed number of times (20 to 100 times in this example) after the stop of the immediate short win pattern.

In addition, during the period of control to the low-probability time-saving states A to C, production corresponding to each time-saving state is executed. Specifically, as an effect corresponding to the low-probability time-saving state A, a “time-saving effect” indicating that the low-probability time-saving state A is under control is executed, for example, “time-saving game” is displayed in the upper left part of the display area of the effect display device 1600. In addition, as an effect corresponding to the low-probability time-saving state B, a “helping mode L effect” indicating that the help mode L is being executed (low-probability time-saving state B is being controlled) is executed. In addition, as an effect corresponding to the low-probability time-saving state C, a “helping mode S effect” indicating that the help mode S is being executed (controlling the low-probability time-saving state C) is executed. In addition to this, in "time saving effect", "help mode L effect", and "help mode S effect", it is possible to display background images and mini characters unique to each effect, and to output sound and light.

In this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered off (power off), the type of low-probability time-saving state being executed is stored in the main control built-in RAM, and when the power is turned on again, a command corresponding to the type of low-probability state being executed is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, after the power is turned on again, the performance corresponding to the time saving state executed before the power interruption is restored, and even after the power is turned on again, it is possible to know which one of the low-probability time saving states A to C is being controlled. Specifically, at the time of power failure, when the "time saving effect" is being executed as the effect corresponding to the low probability time saving state A, when the power is turned on again, the command corresponding to the low probability time saving state A is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and after the power is turned on again, the "time saving effect" is executed. Further, at the time of power failure, when the "help mode L performance" is being executed as the performance corresponding to the low-probability time-saving state B, when the power is turned on again, the command corresponding to the low-probability time-saving state B is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and after the power is turned on again, the "help mode L performance" is executed. Further, at the time of power failure, when the "help mode S performance" is being executed as the performance corresponding to the low-probability time-saving state C, when the power is turned on again, the command corresponding to the low-probability time-saving state C is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and after the power is turned on again, the "help mode S performance" is executed.

Further, when the ``help mode S performance'' is being executed as a performance corresponding to the low-probability time-saving state C among the low-probability time-saving states A to C at the time of power failure, the ``helping mode S performance'' is performed after the power is turned on again, but when the ``helping mode S performance'' is restored, a part of the ``helping mode S performance'' is performed so as not to return. For example, during the execution of the "help mode S effect", as shown in the above-described effect example, "help mode S in progress" is displayed in the upper left part of the display area of the effect display device 1600. However, when the "help mode S effect" is restored, the display of "help mode S in progress" is restricted so as not to display the background image and mini characters specific to the effect, and the output of sound and light emission are restored. As for the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state C, the number of variations of the special symbols during the control of the time-saving state is as small as 20 to 100 times, and compared with the low-probability time-saving state A and the low-probability time-saving state B, a game disadvantageous to the player is performed. In this respect, when the ``help mode S performance'' is returned, by restricting the performance display device 1600 not to display ``help mode S'', it becomes difficult to grasp that the control of the low-probability time-saving state C has been resumed, and dissatisfaction with disadvantageous games in the low-probability time-saving state C can be suppressed.

After the power is turned on again, the performance corresponding to the time-saving state executed before the power failure is restored, but before returning to the performance corresponding to the time-saving state, the performance display device 1600 temporarily displays a common return image (in this example, an arrow bar display of ``Left shot!'' In other words, when returning to any of the ``time saving performance'', ``help mode L performance'', and ``help mode S performance'' as the performance corresponding to the time saving state, the common return image is temporarily displayed, so at that time it is not possible to grasp which performance to return to. In this way, when the common return image is temporarily displayed, it is not possible to grasp whether the low-probability time-saving state A is being controlled, the low-probability time-saving state B is being controlled, or the low-probability time-saving state C is being controlled. It should be noted that the timing of returning to any of the ``time saving performance'', ``help mode L performance'', and ``help mode S performance'' is preferably the timing of starting the variable display of the next special pattern after displaying the common return image. Note that this common return image is not displayed after the power is turned off and the power is turned on in a state other than the time saving state.

In addition, as described above in detail, when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM when the power is turned on, or when it is determined that the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off, an error is displayed to inform that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or unreliable). At the time of power failure, the performance corresponding to the time saving state is being executed, and when such a RAM error occurs after the power is turned on again, the performance corresponding to the time saving state executed before the power failure is not returned. This is because there is a possibility that a RAM error has occurred at the time of power-on due to unauthorized transition of the game state before power interruption, and when such a RAM error occurs, the player is given a penalty of not returning to the performance corresponding to the time saving state executed before the power interruption and not notifying which of the time saving states it is, so that the player is prevented from committing fraudulent actions such as illegally shifting the game state.

[Regarding the handling of immediate short hits during time saving control]
In the above, in the time saving state, when it becomes an immediate short win, it is assumed that the already controlled time saving state is continued without newly controlling to the time saving state based on the immediate short win, but as a modification, when it becomes an immediate short win in the time saving state, the remaining number of variable display of the special symbols executable in the already controlled time short state and the number of variable display of the special symbols executable in the new time short state based on the immediate short win are compared, and according to the comparison result. You may make it determine the game progress mode after that. Specifically, when the number of times of variable display of special symbols executable in a new time-saving state based on an immediate short-time hit is greater than the remaining number of times of variable display of special symbols executable in the already-controlled time-saving state, control for switching from the already-controlled time-saving state to a new time-saving state based on an immediate short-time win can be exemplified. Such modifications will be described below.

FIG. 212 shows the lottery table and symbol determination table of the modification. As shown in FIG. 212 (A), the low probability lottery table referred to for comparison with the second special random number is provided with an immediate short hit determination value, unlike FIG. There is. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 212 (B), the lottery table at the time of high probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number is provided with an immediate short-hit determination value, unlike FIG. is the same as As a result, in the time saving state, it becomes easy to accept the game ball B into the variable winning port 2003, and in addition to the fact that the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning to the variable winning port 2003 is easily executed, there is a possibility of winning an immediate short win by the starting winning to the variable winning port 2003, so even in the state where the advantageous game is played in the time saving state, the game can be played with expectation.

Also, as shown in FIG. 212(D), in the symbol determination table for the immediate short winning that is compared with the second symbol random number, the determination value is sorted into the immediate short winning A, the immediate short winning B, and the immediate short winning C, which is different from FIG. That is, after the winning of the immediate short winning by the lottery based on the second special random number, the type of the immediate short winning (any one of the immediate short winning A, the immediate short winning B, and the immediate short winning C) is determined by using the symbol determination table for the instant short winning to be compared with the second symbol random number. The symbol determination table for the big win shown in FIG. 212(C) and the symbol determination table for the small win shown in FIG. 212(E) are the same as the symbol determination table for the big win shown in FIG.

In this example, low probability time saving state AC is set as the low probability time saving state. Specifically, when the lottery result of the special pattern is ``big hit C'', the game is controlled to the low-probability time-saving state A until the number of fluctuations of the special pattern reaches 100 times after execution of the 10R big prize game. In addition, when the lottery result of the special pattern is ``big hit D'', the game is controlled to the low-probability time-saving state A until the number of fluctuations of the special pattern reaches 599 times after the execution of the 10R big win game. After power-on accompanied by RAM clearing or execution of the jackpot game, the number of times of variation of the special symbols in the low-probability state (relief number counter) is counted, and when the number of variations of the special symbols in the low-probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600) without causing a big hit, and when the number of variations of the special symbols in the low-probability state reaches 600 times (relief number counter = 600), the subsequent variation of the special symbols does not occur even though the big win game is not executed. Until the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times (in this example, 700 times), it is controlled to the low probability short working hours state B. In addition, when the lottery result of the special pattern is ``immediate short winning'', despite the fact that the big winning game is not executed, it is controlled to the low-probability time saving state C until the number of fluctuations of the special pattern reaches a predetermined number of times (in this example, 20 times, 40 times, or 100 times according to the type of the immediate short winning pattern) after the stop of the immediate short winning pattern. The number of times of variable display of the special symbols in the low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short win is set to 100 times in the case of the "immediate short win A", 40 times in the case of the "immediate short win B", and 20 times in the case of the "immediate short win C".

FIG. 213 is a time chart showing an immediate short hit during control of the low probability time saving state B. FIG. First, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, the remaining number of variable display of special patterns executable in the low-probability time-saving state B and the number of variable display of special symbols executable in the low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short-time hit are compared when the immediate short-time winning occurs. When the number of times of variable display of special patterns executable in the low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short-time winning is greater than the remaining number of times of variable display of the special patterns executable in the low-probability time-saving state B, control is performed to switch from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C (switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is enabled) after stopping the immediate short-time winning pattern. In addition, when switching from the low-probability short-time work state B to the low-probability short-time work state C, the remaining number of variable display of special patterns executable in the low-probability short-time work state B is discarded, and the number of variable display of special patterns executable in the low-probability short-time work state C (20 times, 40 times, 100 times according to the type of the immediate short winning pattern) is controlled to newly count. That is, when switching from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C, the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state is extended more than the number of times of variable display of special symbols that should be executed in the low-probability time-saving state B. On the other hand, if the remaining number of variable display of the special symbols executable in the low-probability short-time state B is larger than the number of variable display of the special symbols executable in the low-probability short-time state C based on the immediate short hit, the low-probability short-time work state B is maintained without switching to the low-probability short-time state C after the immediate short-hit design is stopped, and the low-probability short-time work state B is controlled to continue for the remaining number of variable display of the special symbols executable in the low-probability short-time state B (at the time of low probability). disable switching to short state C). In this way, when an immediate short hit occurs during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, the low-probability time-saving state with a larger number of times of variable display of the special pattern is selected and executed, so that the advantageous state can be executed as long as possible without giving the player a feeling of regret or loss, and the game can be continued with expectation.

As shown in FIG. 213, during the control of the low probability time saving state B, when it becomes "immediate short hit A" in the Nth special symbol variation display, "700-N<100" (N = low probability It is controlled to switch from the low probability time saving state B to the low probability time saving state C after the stop of the immediate short winning A symbol when the switching condition of "number of times of variable display of the special symbol already executed in the low probability state B) is satisfied. That is, when the ``immediate short win A'' occurs during execution of the variable display of the 601st to 700th special patterns in the low probability time saving state B, the low probability time saving state B is controlled to switch to the low probability time saving state C after the immediate short win A pattern is stopped. On the other hand, when the ``immediate short hit A'' occurs during the execution of the variable display of the 1st to 600th special patterns in the low probability time saving state B, the low probability time saving state B is maintained after the immediate short win A pattern is stopped. In this way, during the execution of the 1st to 600th special symbol variation display in the low probability short working hours state B, switching to the low probability short working hours state C is disabled when "immediate short winning A" is set. On the other hand, during the execution of the 601st to 700th special symbol variation display in the low probability short working hours state B, it is set as a period in which switching to the low probability short working hours state C is effective when "immediate short winning A" occurs.

In addition, during the control of the low-probability time saving state B, when the N-th special pattern variation display results in ``immediate short-time winning B'', when the switching condition of ``700-N<40'' (N = the number of times of variable display of the special pattern already executed in the low-probability time-saving state B) is satisfied, control is performed to switch from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short winning B pattern is stopped. That is, when the ``immediate short winning B'' occurs during execution of the variable display of the 661st to 700th special patterns in the low probability short working time state B, the low probability short working time state B is controlled to switch to the low probability short working time state C after the immediate short winning B pattern is stopped. On the other hand, when ``immediate short hit B'' occurs during the execution of the variable display of the 1st to 660th special patterns in the low probability time saving state B, the low probability time saving state B is maintained after the immediate short winning B pattern is stopped. In this way, during the execution of the 1st to 660th special symbol variation display in the low probability short working hours state B, switching to the low probability short working hours state C is invalidated when the "immediate short winning B" is set. On the other hand, during the execution of the 661st to 700th special symbol variation display in the low probability short working hours state B, it is set as a period in which switching to the low probability short working hours state C is valid when the "immediate short winning B" occurs.

Further, during the control of the low-probability time saving state B, when the N-th special pattern variation display results in ``immediate short-time winning C'', when the switching condition of ``700-N<20'' (N = the number of times of variable display of special symbols already executed in the low-probability time-saving state B) is satisfied, control is performed to switch from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short winning C pattern is stopped. That is, when the ``immediate short winning C'' occurs during execution of the variable display of the 681st to 700th special patterns in the low probability short working time state B, the low probability short working time state B is controlled to switch to the low probability short working time state C after the immediate short winning C pattern is stopped. On the other hand, when the ``immediate short hit C'' occurs during execution of the variable display of the 1st to 680th special symbols in the low probability time saving state B, the low probability time saving state B is maintained after the immediate short winning C pattern is stopped. In this way, during the execution of the 1st to 680th special symbol variation display in the low probability short working hours state B, switching to the low probability short working hours state C is invalidated when the "immediate short winning C" is set. On the other hand, during the execution of the 681st to 700th special symbol variation display in the low probability short working hours state B, it is set as a period in which switching to the low probability short working hours state C is valid when the "immediate short winning C" occurs.

Next, the production progress before and after the immediate short hit during the control of the low probability time saving state B will be described. In this example, out of the 601st to 700th special symbol variation displays during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, at the time of the N-th special symbol variation display (symbol variation Z), it becomes "immediate short-time hit A", and the case of controlling to switch from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short-time-saving A symbol is stopped.

Specifically, during the execution of the variable display of the 1st to 600th special symbols during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is disabled when the "immediate short-time hit A" is set. Then, the period during which the switching to the low-probability short working hours state C is invalid is set as a non-executable period of the extended acquisition performance to be described later, since the remaining number of times of variable display of the special symbols during the control of the low-probable short working hours state B is not extended when the ``immediate short-time winning A'' occurs, and the period for controlling to the low-probable short working hours condition is not extended. In addition, during a period in which the switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is invalid, a 'helping mode L performance' indicating that the 'helping mode L' is being executed (the low-probability time-saving state B is being controlled) is executed.

Also, during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols after the 681st time during the control of the low probability time saving state B, it is set as a period in which switching to the low probability time saving state C is effective when "immediate short winning A" occurs. Then, in the period in which the switching to the low-probability short working hours state C is effective, when the ``immediate short hit A'' is reached, the control is performed to switch from the low-probable short working hours state B to the low-probable short working hours state C, and since the period of control to the low-probable short working hours state is extended, it is set as an executable period of the extended acquisition performance described later. In addition, during the period in which the switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is effective, the “help mode L performance” indicating that the “help mode L” is being executed (the low-probability time-saving state B is being controlled) is executed. Here, the “extension chance display” can be exemplified by an effect display in which a message image regarding the extension (“If character X appears, the time may be extended for a shorter time...”) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (not shown). As a result, during the execution of the "extension chance display", attention can be paid to whether or not the extension acquisition effect described later is to be executed, and the player can enjoy whether or not the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state is extended.

In addition, when the symbol variation Z, which is the variation display of the N-th special symbol, is executed for the 681st and later special symbol variation displays during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, when an immediate short win occurs, an ``extended acquisition performance'' is executed to control switching from the low-probability time-saving state B to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short-time winning A pattern is stopped, thereby extending the period of control to the low probability state. Here, the ``extended acquisition effect'' is a display that encourages whether or not the character X appears from the end of the screen of the effect display device 1600, and a pattern of either a success pattern in which the character X appears in the center of the screen of the effect display device 1600 (an effect that succeeds in extending the period of control to the low probability time saving state) or a failure pattern in which the character X does not appear from the end of the screen of the effect display device 1600 (an effect that fails to extend the period of control to the low probability time saving state). not shown). During the execution of the pattern variation Z, an extended acquisition performance is set as an executable period, and an ``extended acquisition performance'' for notifying whether or not the period for controlling to the low-probability time-saving state is extended is performed, and in the ``extended acquisition performance'' executed when an immediate short win occurs, a performance for successfully extending the period for controlling to the low-probability time-saving state (extension acquisition performance of a successful pattern) is performed. As a result, during the execution of the "extended acquisition performance", it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state will be extended.

When an immediate short win occurs during control of the low-probability non-time-saving state, control is performed to the low-probability short-time winning state C after stopping the immediate short-time winning pattern, but the ``extension acquisition performance'' is a performance that is not executed when an immediate short win occurs during control of the low-probability non-time-saving state. Thereby, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, it is possible to enjoy an effect different from the low-probability non-time-saving state.

In addition, during the execution of variable display of the special symbols after the 681st time during the control of the low-probability time-saving state B, it is set as an executable period of the extension acquisition performance, and even when the short winning does not occur immediately, the "extension acquisition performance" for notifying whether or not the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state is extended can be executed. In this example, during the execution of the pattern variation X which is the N-2th special symbol variation display during the control of the low probability time saving state B, the ``extension acquisition performance'' is executed although the short winning does not occur immediately, and in the ``extension acquisition performance'' executed when the immediate short winning does not occur, the fake performance (extension acquisition performance of the failure pattern) is performed in which the period of control to the low probability time saving state fails to be extended. While the symbol variation X is being executed, the "extended acquisition effect" is executed, but since the immediate short winning pattern is not executed, the immediate short winning pattern is not stopped and displayed.

In addition, after switching from the low-probability short-time working state B to the low-probable short-working-hours state C, it is set as a period in which switching to a new low-probable short-working-hours state C becomes effective when further "immediate short hit" occurs. Even in such a case, the remaining number of times of variable display of special patterns executable in the low-probability time saving state C and the number of times of variable display of special patterns executable in the new low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short win are compared, and when the number of times of variable display of the special patterns executable in the new low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short win is greater, control is performed to switch from the low-probability time-saving state C to the new low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short win pattern is stopped. . In other words, when the number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the new low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short hit is greater, the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state is extended. In addition, during the period in which switching to the new low-probability short working hours state C is effective, it is set as an executable period of the extended acquisition effect.

In addition, when switching from the low-probability shortening working hours state B to the low-probability shortening working hours state C, the ``helping mode L presentation'' that has been performed in the low-probability shortening working hours state B is continuously performed without switching to the ``helping mode S performance'' indicating that the ``help mode S'' corresponding to the low-probability shortening working hours state C is being executed during the control of the low-probability shortening working hours state C. In this way, before and after switching from the low-probability short working hours state B to the low-probable short working hours state C, there is no change in that the ``help mode L performance'' is executed, so it can be seen as if the control of the low-probable short working hours state B is continued (extended). In addition, after switching from the low-probability shortening working hours state B to the low-probability shortening working hours state C, the period in which the switching to the new low-probability shortening working hours state C becomes effective when the ``immediate short hit'' occurs is set.

FIG. 214 is a time chart showing an immediate short hit during control of 100 low-probability short working hours state A started with a big hit C as a trigger. First, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A, the remaining number of variable display of special symbols executable in the low-probability time-saving state A and the number of variable display of the special symbols executable in the low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short-time hit are compared when an immediate short-time hit occurs. When the number of variable display of special patterns executable in the low probability time saving state C based on the immediate short winning is greater than the remaining number of variable display of the special symbols executable in the low probability time saving state A, control is performed to switch from the low probability time saving state A to the low probability time saving state C after the immediate short winning pattern is stopped (switching to the low probability time saving state C is enabled). Further, when switching from the low-probability shortening working hours state A to the low-probability shortening working hours state C, the remaining number of variable display of special symbols executable in the low-probability shortening working hours state A is discarded, and the number of variable display of special symbols executable in the low-probability shortening working hours state C (20 times, 40 times, 100 times according to the type of immediate short winning symbol) is controlled to newly count. In other words, when switching from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C, the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state is extended more than the number of times of variable display of special symbols that should have been executed in the low-probability time-saving state A. On the other hand, when the remaining number of variable display of the special symbols executable in the low-probability time-saving state A is larger than the number of variable display of the special symbols executable in the low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short hit, the low-probability time-saving state A is maintained without switching to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short-hit design is stopped, and the low-probability time-saving state A is controlled to continue for the remaining number of times of the special symbol variable display executable in the low-probability time-saving state A (at low probability). disable switching to short state C). In this way, when an immediate short win occurs during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A, the low-probability time-saving state with a larger number of times of variable display of the special pattern is selected and executed, so that the advantageous state can be executed as long as possible without giving the player a sense of regret or loss, and the game can be continued with expectation.

As shown in FIG. 214, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A, when it becomes "immediate short-time hit A" in the N-th special symbol variation display, "100-N<100" (N = low probability time-saving state B Control is performed to switch from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short-time hit A symbol stops when the switching condition of "100-N<100" (the number of times of variable display of the special symbol already executed in B) is satisfied. In other words, when the ``immediate short win A'' occurs during execution of the variable display of the 1st to 100th special patterns in the low probability time saving state A, control is performed to switch from the low probability time saving state A to the low probability time saving state C after the immediate short winning A pattern is stopped. In this way, during the execution of the variable display of the 1st to 100th special symbols in the low-probability time-saving state A, switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is effective when the "immediate short-time hit A" is set.

In addition, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A, when the N-th special pattern variation display results in ``immediate short-time winning B'', when the switching condition of ``100-N<40'' (N = the number of times of variable display of the special pattern in the low-probability time-saving state A already executed in the low-probability time-saving state B) is satisfied, control is performed to switch from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short-time winning B pattern is stopped. In other words, when the ``immediate short hit B'' occurs during execution of the 61st to 100th special pattern variable display in the low probability time saving state A, the low probability time saving state A is controlled to be switched to the low probability time saving state C after the immediate short winning B pattern is stopped. On the other hand, when ``immediate short hit B'' occurs during execution of the variable display of the special symbols for the 1st to 60th times in the low probability time saving state A, the low probability time saving state A is maintained after the immediate short winning B pattern is stopped. In this way, during the execution of the 1st to 60th special symbol variation display in the low probability short working hours state A, switching to the low probability short working hours state C is invalidated when the "immediate short winning B" is set. On the other hand, during the execution of the 61st to 100th special symbol variable display in the low probability short working hours state A, it is set as a period in which switching to the low probability short working hours state C is valid when the "immediate short winning B" occurs.

In addition, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A, when the N-th special pattern variation display results in ``immediate short-time winning C'', when the switching condition of ``100-N<20'' (N = the number of times of variable display of the special pattern in the low-probability time-saving state A already executed in the low-probability time-saving state B) is satisfied, control is performed to switch from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short-time winning C pattern is stopped. In other words, when the ``immediate short win C'' occurs during execution of the 81st to 100th special pattern variable display in the low probability time saving state A, the low probability time saving state A is controlled to be switched to the low probability time saving state C after the immediate short winning C pattern is stopped. On the other hand, when the ``immediate short hit C'' occurs during execution of the variable display of the 1st to 80th special symbols in the low probability time saving state A, the low probability time saving state A is maintained after the immediate short winning C pattern is stopped. In this way, during the execution of the 1st to 80th special symbol variation display in the low-probability time saving state A, switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is invalidated when the "immediate short-time hit C" is set. On the other hand, during the execution of the 81st to 100th special symbol variation display in the low-probability time-saving state A, it is set as a period in which switching to the low-probability time saving state C is valid when the "immediate short win C" occurs.

Next, the production progress before and after the immediate short hit during the control of the low probability time saving state A will be described. In this example, among the 1st to 100th special symbol variation displays during the control of the low probability time saving state A, at the time of the Nth special symbol variation display (symbol variation Z), it becomes "immediate short hit A", and after stopping the immediate short winning A pattern, control is performed to switch from the low probability time saving state A to the low probability time saving state C.

Specifically, during the execution of the variable display of the 1st to 100th special symbols during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A, switching to the low-probability time-saving state C when it becomes "immediate short-time hit A" is set as a valid period. Then, the period during which the switching to the low-probability short working hours state C is effective is set as an executable period of the extended acquisition presentation since the control is performed to switch from the low-probable short working hours state A to the low-probable short working hours state C when the ``immediate short win A'' is obtained, and the period of control to the low-probable short working hours state is extended. In addition, during the period in which switching to the low-probability time-saving state C is valid, in addition to executing a "pull-back mode effect" indicating that the low-probability time-saving state A is under control, the effect display device 1600 executes an "extension chance display" indicating that the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state can be extended. Here, the "extension chance display" can be exemplified by an effect display in which a message image regarding the extension ("If character X appears, the time may be extended for a shorter time...") is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (not shown). As a result, during execution of the "extension chance display", attention can be paid to whether or not the extension acquisition performance is to be executed, and the player can enjoy whether or not the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state is extended.

In addition, among the 1st to 100th special symbol variation displays during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A, during the execution of the symbol variation Z, which is the N-th special symbol variation display, when an immediate short win occurs, an ``extended acquisition performance'' is executed, and after the immediate short-time winning A pattern is stopped, control is performed to switch from the low-probability time-saving state A to the low-probability time-saving state C, thereby extending the period of control to the low-probability state. Here, the ``extended acquisition effect'' is a display that encourages whether or not the character X appears from the end of the screen of the effect display device 1600, and a pattern of either a success pattern in which the character X appears in the center of the screen of the effect display device 1600 (an effect that succeeds in extending the period of control to the low probability time saving state) or a failure pattern in which the character X does not appear from the end of the screen of the effect display device 1600 (an effect that fails to extend the period of control to the low probability time saving state). not shown). During the execution of the pattern variation Z, an extended acquisition performance is set as an executable period, and an ``extended acquisition performance'' for notifying whether or not the period for controlling to the low-probability time-saving state is extended is performed, and in the ``extended acquisition performance'' executed when an immediate short win occurs, a performance for successfully extending the period for controlling to the low-probability time-saving state (extension acquisition performance of a successful pattern) is performed. As a result, during the execution of the "extended acquisition effect", it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state will be extended.

When an immediate short win occurs during control of the low-probability non-time-saving state, control is performed to the low-probability short-time winning state C after stopping the immediate short-time winning pattern, but the ``extension acquisition performance'' is a performance that is not executed when an immediate short win occurs during control of the low-probability non-time-saving state. Thereby, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A, it is possible to enjoy an effect different from the low-probability non-time-saving state.

In addition, during the execution of the variable display of the special symbols for the 1st to 100th times during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A, it is set as an executable period of the extended acquisition performance, and even when the short hit does not occur immediately, the ``extension-acquisition performance'' for notifying whether or not the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state is extended can be executed. In this example, during the execution of the pattern variation X which is the N-2th special symbol variation display during the control of the low probability time saving state A, the ``extension acquisition performance'' is executed although the short winning does not occur immediately, and in the ``extension acquisition performance'' executed when the immediate short winning does not occur, the false performance (extension acquisition performance of the failure pattern) is performed in which the period of control to the low probability time saving state fails to be extended. While the symbol variation X is being executed, the "extended acquisition effect" is executed, but since the immediate short winning pattern is not executed, the immediate short winning pattern is not stopped and displayed.

In addition, after switching from the low-probability short-time working state A to the low-probable short-working-hours state C, it is set as a period in which switching to a new low-probable short-working-hours state C becomes effective when further "immediate short hit" occurs. Even in such a case, the remaining number of times of variable display of special patterns executable in the low-probability time saving state C and the number of times of variable display of special patterns executable in the new low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short win are compared, and when the number of times of variable display of the special patterns executable in the new low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short win is greater, control is performed to switch from the low-probability time-saving state C to the new low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short win pattern is stopped. . In other words, when the number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the new low-probability time-saving state C based on the immediate short hit is greater, the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state is extended. In addition, during the period in which switching to the new low-probability short working hours state C is effective, it is set as an executable period of the extended acquisition effect.

Further, when switching from the low-probability shortening working hours state A to the low-probability shortening working hours state C, during the control of the low-probability shortening working hours state C, the ``help mode S performance'' indicating that the ``help mode S'' corresponding to the low-probability shortening working hours state C is being executed is not switched, and the ``pull-back mode presentation'' executed in the low-probability shortening working hours state A is continuously performed. In this way, before and after switching from the low-probability shortening working hours state A to the low-probability shortening working hours state C, there is no change in that the ``pull-back mode performance'' is executed, so it can be seen as if the control of the low-probability shortening working hours state A was continued (extended). In addition, after switching from the low-probability short-time working state A to the low-probable short-working-hours state C, the period in which switching to the new low-probable short-working-hours state C becomes effective when the "immediate short hit" occurs is set.

In the above, during the execution of the symbol variation Z, which is the N-th special symbol variation display during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A or the low-probability time-saving state B, when an immediate short hit occurs, an "extended acquisition effect" (extended acquisition effect of a successful pattern) is executed to notify that the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state will be extended at the time of the immediate short hit. However, the "extended acquisition effect" may be executed at the following timing. That is, after switching to the low-probability time-saving state C without executing the ``extension-acquisition performance'' at the time of the pattern fluctuation Z that becomes an immediate short-hit, the ``extension-acquisition performance'' (extension-acquisition performance of the successful pattern) may be performed at the timing when the number of variable display times of the special symbols that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state A or the low-probability time-saving state B set before the immediate short-hit is completed. For example, the number of times of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state A is set to 100 times, and during execution of the symbol variation Z, which is the 80th special symbol-variation display during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A, when an immediate short hit occurs, after switching to the low-probability time-saving state C, at the timing when the number of variable display of the special symbols executable in the low-probability time-saving state A set before the immediate short hit reaches 100 times, an “extended acquisition effect” is performed. ” is executed, and the remaining number of variable display of special symbols that can be executed in the low-probability time-saving state C at that time is notified. As a result, it is possible to make it look as if the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state is suddenly extended without noticing the immediate short-time winning until the ``extended acquisition performance'' is executed.

In addition, during the execution of the symbol variation Z, which is the N-th special symbol variation display during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A or the low-probability time-saving state B, when an immediate short-time hit occurs, at the time of the symbol variation Z that becomes an immediate short-time hit, an "extended acquisition effect" (extended acquisition effect of a successful pattern) is executed to notify that the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state is extended. A return process for execution of the "extended acquisition effect" is performed. In this way, even when power failure occurs during the execution of the ``extension acquisition performance'', by executing the ``extension acquisition performance'' after the power is turned on again, it is possible to recognize that the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state is extended, and it is possible to prevent the inability to grasp how long the period of control to the low-probability time-saving state continues.

Next, the immediate short hit time during the control of the low probability time saving state A of 599 times started in the wake of the big hit D will be described. In order to prevent confusion with "100 low-probability time-saving state A started in the wake of the jackpot C" described earlier, 599 low-probability time-saving states A that were started in the wake of the jackpot D are described as "low-probability time-saving state A2".

During the control of the low-probability time-saving state A2, when it becomes an immediate short-time hit, the low-probability time-saving state A2 is maintained without switching to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short-time hitting design is stopped regardless of the remaining number of variable display of the special pattern executable in the low-probability time-saving state A2, and the low-probability time-saving state A2 is controlled to continue for the remaining number of times of the variable display of the special pattern executable in the low-probability time-saving state A2 (switching to the low-probability time-saving state C). ). That is, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A2, the above-described "immediate short-hit design invalid period (low-probability time-saving state C triggered by the special symbol lottery result becoming "immediate short hit". The same control as the control is performed. As described above, the low-probability time-saving state A2 continues continuously to the low-probability time-saving state B through the variable display of the special symbols 599 times, and if it switches to the low-probability time-saving state C in the middle of such a low-probability time-saving state A2, there is a risk that continuity with the low-probability time-saving state B will be cut off depending on the timing, but in this example, such a disadvantageous situation for the player can be avoided. In addition, for example, when switching to the low-probability time-saving state C 100 times in the variable display of the special symbol after the 501st time, the above-described disadvantageous situation does not occur, but the low-probability time-saving state C does not result in any profit.

In the above, the low probability of reducing working hours state A and the low probability of reducing working hours state C, the low probability of reducing working hours state B and the low probability of reducing working hours state C are set to the same reduction of working hours performance. That is, in the low-probability time-saving states A to C, when the normal lottery is performed, the probability that the lottery result of the normal pattern is "normal hit" is increased, or when the lottery result of the normal pattern is "normal hit", By increasing the time and the number of times that the variable winning hole 2003 closed by the variable winning hole door 2521 is in an open state, acceptance of the game ball B into the variable winning hole 2003 is facilitated. The probability of "ordinary winning" and the time and number of times that the variable winning opening 2003 is open are set to be the same. On the other hand, the low probability of reducing working hours state A and the low probability of reducing working hours state C, the low probability of reducing working hours state B and the low probability of reducing working hours state C may be configured to be set to different time saving performances. In such a configuration, the higher the probability that the lottery result of the normal pattern becomes ``normal winning'', and the greater the time and number of times that the variable prize winning port 2003 is open, the easier it is to accept the game ball B into the variable prize winning port 2003, and the higher the time saving performance.

Specifically, the first time-saving control in the low-probability time-saving state A and the low-probability time-saving state B, and the second time-saving control in the low-probability time-saving state C are set. It is controlled to switch to the time saving state C. On the other hand, when the first time-saving control has a higher time-saving performance than the second time-saving control, when an immediate short-time hit occurs during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A or the low-probability time-saving state B, control is performed so as to maintain the low-probability time-saving state A or the low-probability time-saving state B without switching to the low-probability time-saving state C after the immediate short-hit pattern is stopped. As a result, during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A and the low-probability time-saving state B, it is possible to enjoy whether the player can switch to the low-probability time-saving state C, which is time-saving performance advantageous to the player.

Further, in the above, when the first time-saving control has higher time-saving performance than the second time-saving control, when the immediate short-time hit occurs during the control of the low-probability time-saving state A or the low-probability time-saving state B, the immediate short-time winning pattern is stopped after the low-probability time-saving state A or the low probability time-saving state B is maintained. The remaining number of times of display is compared with the number of times of variable display of special patterns executable in low-probability short working hours state C based on immediate short winning, and when the number of variable display of special patterns executable in low-probable short working hours state C based on immediate short winning is greater, control may be performed to switch from low-probability short-working hours state A or low-probability short-working hours state B to low-probable short-working hours state C after immediate short winning symbols are stopped. As a result, when the remaining number of variable display of special patterns executable in the low-probability short-time working state A or B is small, it is possible to enjoy whether or not it is switched to the low-probable short-time working state C in which the period of control to the low-probable short-working-hour state is extended.

In the above description, the low-probability time-saving state C is controlled with the same time-saving performance for the same period and the same time-saving performance in the case of the immediate short-hit in the low-probability non-time-saving state and the case of the low-probability time-saving state A and the low-probability time-saving state B, but apart from this, the period of the low-probability time-saving state C and the time-saving performance may be varied according to the game state when the immediate short win occurs. For example, when an instant shortage A in a 100 -time low -probability, a low -probability, a low -probability of a low -probability, a low -probability time -saving state c based on the immediate short hitting A, which is an opportunity for a large hit C. In the case of a short hit A, the low -probability time -saving state C based on this immediate short hit A may be switched to 120 low -probability time -saving state C and controlled. Also, for example, when it becomes an immediate short hit A in a low probability non-time saving state A 100 times triggered by the jackpot C, it switches to the low probability short working time state C with the first time saving control described above as a low probability short working time state C based on this immediate short hit A. On the other hand, when it becomes an immediate short hit A in the low probability non short working time state C based on this immediate short hit A, it changes to a low probability short working time state C with the second short time control. Switching may be controlled.

As another example, when it becomes an immediate short hit A in a low probability non-time saving state A 100 times triggered by a big hit C, it is controlled to switch to the low probability short working time state C 100 times as described above as a low probability short working time state C based on this immediate short hit A. On the other hand, when it becomes an immediate short hit A again in a low probability short working time state C based on the immediate short hit A, 120 times as a low probability short working time state C based on this second immediate short hit A. You may make it switch-control to the low probability time saving state C of. Also, for example, when the immediate short hit A occurs in the 100th low-probability non-time-saving state A triggered by the big hit C, the low-probability short-time work state C based on the immediate short-time hit A is switched to the low-probability short-time state C accompanied by the second time-saving control. You may make it switch-control to the low probability time saving state C with control (time saving control whose time saving performance is higher than 2nd time saving control).

In this way, the period of the low-probability time-saving state C and the time-saving performance are differentiated according to the game state when the instant short-time winning occurs, so that the game property using the instant short-time winning can be further diversified and the amusement can be improved.

[Restrictions on setting suggestion effects when ID codes do not match]
(About ID code)
In the present embodiment, a game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that the game area 5a can be viewed from the front, and a door frame top unit 450 (decorative member) attached to the front upper part of the door frame base unit 100 and a production operation unit 300 (operating device) attached to the front surfaces of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operable by the player are attached to the door frame 3. As shown in FIG. 215, the game board 5, the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit 300 can be attached and detached while the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the game island in the hall. That is, when changing to a new model series, the game board 5, the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 corresponding to the model series before the change are removed in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the game island in the hall, and then the game board 5, the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 corresponding to the new model series are installed. By adopting such a configuration, when not only the game performance but also the appearance of the game machine is to be renewed at the time of model change, the cost for changing the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 (door frame base unit 100) can be suppressed, and the game performance and the appearance of the game machine can be efficiently renewed.

A peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5 is electrically connected to a door frame top relay board (not shown) attached to the door frame top unit 450 . The door frame top relay board relays connection between the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, the door frame top right decorative board 457, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame base unit 100. As a result, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 can control light emission of various LEDs mounted on, for example, the door frame top center decoration board 455, the door frame top left decoration board 456, and the door frame top right decoration board 457 via the door frame top relay board.

Also, the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5 is electrically connected to the operation section relay board 332 attached to the effect operation unit 300 . The operation part relay board 332 includes the effect operation part peripheral decoration board 320 (the front decoration board 321 and the rear decoration board 322), the button outer decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the contact detection sensor main body 358, the button inside decoration board 364, the operation button elevation drive motor 367, the pressure detection sensor 373, the elevation detection sensor 374, the projection force detection sensor 375, the projection force adjustment drive motor 381, and the plate unit relay substrate 214 of the plate base unit 210. It is for relaying connections between Thereby, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 can control light emission of various LEDs mounted on the front decoration board 321 and the rear decoration board 322 via the operation part relay board 332, for example.

As shown in FIG. 216, the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450 and the operation section relay board 332 attached to the effect operation unit 300 store in advance a unique ID code, which is special information with a unique code (the only code that exists in the world) for identifying the model series. This ID code is unique to each model series and cannot be rewritten using an external device. The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 can take out the ID code from the door frame top relay board and the operation part relay board 332 and refer to it. The RAM built in the peripheral controller 1511 stores a table for referring to the ID code attached to the door frame top relay board and the operation part relay board 332 . The ID code stored in this table matches the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450 whose model series matches with the game board 5 and the ID code of the operation part relay board 332 attached to the performance operation unit 300 whose model series matches.

When the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 determines within a predetermined determination period whether the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450, and whether the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the operation section relay board 332 attached to the effect operation unit 300. Here, when the door frame top unit 450 whose model series matches (regular relationship) is attached to the game board 5, the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450. On the other hand, when the door frame top unit 450 whose model series does not match (no regular relationship) is attached to the game board 5, the respective ID codes do not match. Similarly, when the effect operation unit 300 whose model series matches (regular relationship) is attached to the game board 5, the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the operating part relay board 332 attached to the effect operation unit 300. On the other hand, when the effect operation unit 300 whose model series does not match (no regular relationship) is attached to the game board 5, the ID code stored in the reference table and the effect operation unit 300 are attached. The ID code of the attached operation section relay board 332 does not match.

Further, when only the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 does not match the game board 5, the effect display device 1600 is used to execute an error informing pattern 1 (for example, display of ``Please check the type of the door frame top unit'') for notifying that the performance operation unit 300 whose model series does not match is installed. Further, when only the ID code of the performance operation unit 300 does not match the game board 5, the performance display device 1600 is used to execute an error informing pattern 2 (for example, display of ``please confirm the type of the performance operation unit'') for notifying that the performance operation unit 300 whose model series does not match is installed. Further, when the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 and the ID code of the performance operation unit 300 do not match with the game board 5, the performance display device 1600 is used to execute an error informing pattern 3 (for example, display of ``Please confirm the type of the door frame top unit and the performance operation unit'') for notifying that the door frame top unit 450 whose model series does not match and the performance operation unit 300 whose model series does not match are attached.

On the other hand, when the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 are not attached to the door frame 3, the peripheral control part 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 cannot extract and refer to the ID code from the door frame top relay board or the operation part relay board 332 when the power is turned on. In such a case, when power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450, and whether the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the operation section relay board 332 attached to the effect operation unit 300. There is no ID code input to 1, and the ID code cannot be confirmed. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the device is not connected if the ID code is not input from the door frame top relay board or the operation part relay board 332 even after a predetermined determination period has passed.

Further, when only the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 cannot be confirmed (cannot be obtained) with respect to the game board 5, the performance display device 1600 is used to execute an error informing pattern 4 (for example, display of "Please check the connection of the door frame top unit") for notifying that the performance operation unit 300 is not attached. Also, when only the ID code of the performance operation unit 300 cannot be confirmed (cannot be acquired) with respect to the game board 5, the performance display device 1600 is used to execute an error informing pattern 5 (for example, display of ``Please check the connection of the performance operation unit'') for notifying that the performance operation unit 300 is not attached. When neither the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 nor the ID code of the effect operation unit 300 can be confirmed (acquired) with respect to the game board 5, the effect display device 1600 is used to execute an error informing pattern 6 (for example, display of "Please check the connection between the door frame top unit and the effect operation unit") for notifying that the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 are not attached.

Here, regarding the game board 5, regardless of whether or not the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450 and the ID code of the operating part relay board 332 attached to the performance operation unit 300 match or not, various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5 can be controlled to emit light when the normal performance (variation performance or non-variation performance) is executed. Similarly, regarding the game board 5, even if there are parts whose ID code cannot be confirmed among the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300, various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5 can be controlled to emit light when performing normal performance (performance during fluctuation or performance during non-variation).

In addition, when the ID code stored in the reference table of the door frame top unit 450 matches the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 450, it is possible to control light emission of various LEDs mounted on, for example, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 through the door frame top relay board during execution of normal effects (variation effects and non-varying effects). On the other hand, when they do not match, the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame top unit 450 whose series do not match (there is no regular relationship) are not controlled to emit light, and the various LEDs are extinguished. When the door frame top unit 450 is not attached and the ID code of the door frame top relay board cannot be confirmed, the light emission of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame top unit 450 is not controlled.

Similarly, for the effect operation unit 300, when the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the operation part relay board 332 attached to the effect operation unit 300 match, it is possible to control light emission of various LEDs mounted on, for example, the front decoration board 321 and the rear decoration board 322 via the operation part relay board 332 at the time of execution of normal effects (varying effects and non-varying effects). The various LEDs mounted on the light emitting substrates of the effect operation unit 300 that do not match (not in a regular relationship) are not controlled to emit light, and the various LEDs are turned off. Further, when the effect operation unit 300 is not attached and the operation part relay board 332 is not confirmed, the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the effect operation unit 300 are not controlled.

Further, when a predetermined execution condition is established, when controlling light emission of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5, light emission control of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame top unit 450 and various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the effect operation unit 300 as members positioned around the game board 5 is performed in cooperation. As a result, not only the game board 5 but also the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 can be used to perform an integrated light emitting effect. However, among the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300, the parts whose ID codes do not match the game board 5 cannot participate in the light emission performance because the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting boards of the parts that do not match do not control the light emission. Similarly, among the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300, the parts which are not attached to the door frame 3 and whose ID codes cannot be confirmed cannot participate in the light emission performance because the light emission of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting boards of the unconfirmed parts is not controlled.

In this example, the game board 5 can be attached to and detached from the body frame 4, and the game board 5 can be installed on the body frame 4 determined in advance. The peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5 is electrically connected to the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 . The interface board 635 of the body frame 4 includes a left plate decorative board 273, a right plate decorative board 278, an upper door frame left side decorative board 422, a left door frame lower decorative board 423, a door frame right side upper decorative board 432, a door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and a door frame top center decorative board 455 provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 via the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3. , door frame top left decoration board 456 and door frame top right decoration board 457 . As a result, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 outputs the plate left decorative board 273, the plate right decorative board 278, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the main body frame 4, and the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3. Light emission of various LEDs mounted on the right side lower decorative board 433, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 can be controlled.

As shown in FIG. 216, the interface board 635 of the body frame 4 is pre-stored with a unique ID code, which is special information with a unique code (the only code that exists in the world) for identifying the model series. This ID code is unique to each model series and cannot be rewritten using an external device. The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 can take out the ID code from the interface board 635 and refer to it. A RAM built in the peripheral controller 1511 stores a table for referring to the ID code attached to the interface board 635 . The ID code stored in this table matches the ID code of the interface board 635 of the body frame 4 that matches the model series.

When the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 determines within a predetermined determination period whether or not the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. Here, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 whose model series match (regular relationship), the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 whose model series does not match (no regular relationship), the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 do not match. When the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 do not match, the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 whose model series does not match (there is no regular relationship), so that the shooting control for shooting the game ball B from the ball shooting device 540 cannot be performed, and the game is stopped.

As described above, when a predetermined execution condition is established, when controlling the light emission of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5, light emission control of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the door frame top unit 450 and various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the effect operation unit 300 as members positioned around the game board 5 is performed in cooperation. As a result, not only the game board 5, the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300, but also the door frame 3 can be used to perform an integrated light emitting effect.

(About setting suggestion production)
In this embodiment, while the symbols are changing or not changing, various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the game board 5, various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the door frame top unit 450, various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the effect operation unit 300, various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the door frame 3, etc. are used to execute the setting suggesting effect that suggests the currently set setting value. The currently set values are stored in the RAM of the main control board 1310, and by sending a command related to the currently set values to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing (when the change of the set values is completed, when the pattern starts to change, etc.), the currently set values can be grasped on the side of the peripheral control board 1510.

In the setting suggesting effect, any one of the suggesting effects A to D is executed as the effect corresponding to the set value currently set. Specifically, an execution determination (execution lottery) is performed to determine which of the suggestion effects A to D is to be executed. In the execution determination, the peripheral control MPU acquires a predetermined random value X when it is determined to execute a suggestive effect. One of the suggestive effects D suggesting that the possibility of 5) is high is determined according to the currently set set value and the random value X.

Here, when the set value currently set is the set value 1, a suggestive performance distribution table 1 for determining a suggestive performance D with a high probability (suggestive performance A: suggestive performance B: suggestive performance C: suggestive performance D=0:1:1:8) is referred to, and the performance is determined according to the random value X. Further, when the currently set set value is the set value 2, a suggestive performance distribution table 2 for determining the suggestive performance C with a high probability (suggestive performance A: suggestive performance B: suggestive performance C: suggestive performance D=0:1:8:1) is referred to, and the performance determination according to the random value X is performed. Further, when the set value currently set is the set value 3, a suggestive performance distribution table 3 for determining a suggestive performance D with a high probability (suggestive performance A: suggestive performance B: suggestive performance C: suggestive performance D=0:1:1:8) is referred to, and the performance determination corresponding to the random value X is performed. When the set value currently set is the set value 4, the performance determination corresponding to the random value X is performed by referring to a suggestive performance distribution table 4 for determining the suggestive performance B and the suggestive performance C with a high probability (suggestive performance A: suggestive performance B: suggestive performance C: suggestive performance D=0:5:4:1). When the set value currently set is the set value 5, the performance determination corresponding to the random value X is performed by referring to a suggestive performance distribution table 5 for determining the suggestive performance B and the suggestive performance D with a high probability (suggestive performance A: suggestive performance B: suggestive performance C: suggestive performance D=0:5:1:4). Further, when the set value currently set is the set value 6, the performance determination corresponding to the random value X is performed with reference to a suggestive performance distribution table 6 for determining the suggestive performance A to D including the suggestive performance A suggesting the set value 6 which is not determined when the set values are 1 to 5 with a predetermined probability (suggestive performance A: suggestive performance B: suggestive performance C: suggestive performance D=3:4:2:1). That is, since the suggestive performances A to D may be output regardless of the current set values, the set values are not determined, but when the suggestive performance A is executed, the set value set at present is determined to be the set value 6.例文帳に追加In this way, when the suggestive effect is executed, the player can have an expectation corresponding to the suggestion of the set value that can be grasped from the suggestive effect.

When the suggestive performance is executed, various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the game board 5, various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the door frame top unit 450, various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the performance operation unit 300, various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the door frame 3, etc. are controlled by using performance data for emitting light in a predetermined emission color for each type of suggestive performance. Specifically, as the suggestion effect A that suggests a set value of 6, lighting is performed in a rainbow light emission mode (rainbow color), as the suggestion effect B that suggests that the possibility of a high set value (set values 4 to 6) is high, blinks in red, as the suggestion effect C that suggests that the even set values (set values 2, 4, and 6) are likely, flashes in blue, and as the suggestion effect D that suggests that the odd set values (1, 3, 5) are likely, flashes in green. Light emission is controlled.

As shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the game board 5, various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the door frame top unit 450, various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the effect operation unit 300, and various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the door frame 3 can be divided into a plurality of groups, and light emission can be controlled for each group, and each group can emit light in a predetermined color.

First, as described above in detail, the back front peripheral decoration unit 3200 attached to the game board 5 includes a back front peripheral decoration body 3201 which is formed in an annular shape along the periphery of the game area 5a when assembled to the game board 5, and a back front peripheral decoration substrate (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs for luminous decoration of the back front peripheral decoration body 3201 are mounted. A plurality of LEDs on the decoration substrate enable each divided portion in the circumferential direction to emit light independently. As shown in FIG. 217, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front peripheral decoration substrate as the light emitting substrate of the game board 5 includes, among the back front peripheral decorations 3201, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front peripheral decoration substrate for luminous decoration on the upper left part is LED1, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front peripheral decoration substrate for luminous decoration on the lower left part is LED2, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front peripheral decoration substrate for luminous decoration on the lower right part is LED3, and the upper right part. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front peripheral edge decoration board for luminous decoration are divided into LEDs 4, and the LEDs in the same group can be controlled to emit light in the same color by controlling the light emission of the LEDs for each group of the LEDs 1 to 4.

As shown in FIG. 218, the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting substrate of the door frame top unit 450 are divided into LED5 for a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, LED6 for a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, and LED7 for a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. It is possible to control the emission of LEDs for each group of LEDs 5 to 7 so that the LEDs in the same group emit the same color.

Further, the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the effect operation unit 300 are divided into LED8, which is a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front decoration board 321, and LED9, which are a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear decoration board 322, among the effect operation part peripheral decoration board 320, and it is possible to control the light emission of the LEDs of the same group to the same color by controlling the light emission of the LEDs for each group of the LEDs 8 to 9.

The various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting substrate of the door frame 3 include LED 10, which is a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper decorative substrate 422 of the left side of the door frame of the left side unit 420, LED 11, which is a plurality of LEDs mounted on a lower decorative substrate 423 of the left side of the door frame of the left side unit 420, left decorative substrate 273 provided behind the left dish lens 272, and right decorative substrate 278 provided behind the right decorative lens 277. is divided into LED 12, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 of the door frame right side unit 430 is LED 13, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 of the door frame right side unit 430 is LED 14, and it is possible to control the emission of LEDs for each group of LEDs 11 to 14 and control the emission of the LEDs in the same group to the same color.

Further, as the light emitting substrate of the game board 5, in addition to the back front peripheral decoration substrate described above, a variable winning opening decoration substrate (not shown) for luminous decoration of the variable winning opening 2003, a first starting opening decoration substrate (not illustrated) for luminous decoration of the first starting opening 2004, and a second starting opening decoration substrate (not illustrated) for luminous decoration of the second starting opening 2005 are provided. In this example, among the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting substrate of the game board 5, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the variable prize winning opening decoration substrate is LED 15, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first start opening decoration substrate is LED 16, and the plurality of LEDs mounted on the second start opening decoration substrate is divided into LED 17, and it is possible to control the light emission of each group of LEDs 15 to 17 and control the light emission of the same group of LEDs in the same color.

FIG. 219 is a timing chart showing an example of a suggestive effect executed as an effect during symbol variation. Here, when the power is turned on, the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 match those of the game board 5, and the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed as the suggestion performance A suggesting the set value 6 during the fluctuation of the pattern will be explained below.

First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, as an effect corresponding to the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command, the effect display device 1600 starts a variable effect such as a variable display of decorative symbols in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. 9. Control the light emission of the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 (timing t0). Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern reaches a predetermined timing, the performance display device 1600 executes the button operation promotion performance for prompting the performance operation part 301 of the performance operation unit 300 (for example, ``press the performance operation button!'').

Then, at timing t1, when the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed by the player or the button valid period (for example, 5 seconds) passes without the effect operation unit 301 being pressed, LEDs 1 and 2 of the game board 5 are set to "red", LEDs 3 to 4 of the game board 5 are set to "purple", LEDs 5 to 6 of the door frame top unit 450 are set to "blue", LED 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LED 8 of the door frame 3. , the LED 9 of the door frame 3 and the LED 10 of the door frame 3 are "orange", the LEDs 11-12 of the door frame 3 are "yellow", and the LEDs 13-14 of the door frame 3 are "white". That is, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are caused to emit light of different colors for each two groups.

As for LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, the LEDs emitting "red" light are "purple", the "purple" light emitting LEDs are "green", and the "green" light emitting LEDs are "orange" and "orange" at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.1 seconds). The LED is changed to "yellow", the LED emitting "yellow" is changed to "white", and the LED emitting "white" is changed to "red". In this way, the LEDs 1-4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5-7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8-9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3 are changed in a predetermined order of "red→purple→blue→green→orange→yellow→white→red" every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds), and until timing t10 is reached (for example, 5 seconds), such regular operation is performed. I keep making changes.

In this way, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are controlled so as to sequentially switch the respective emission colors to a plurality of emission colors in a short unit emission time, so that these LEDs can be visually recognized as if the rainbow emission mode is being emitted in cooperation with each other, and an impactful emission effect can be executed. In addition, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are controlled by interlocking the LEDs 1 to 14 so that the LEDs 1 to 14 are caused to emit light in a plurality of colors so that the LEDs 1 to 14 emit light in different light colors for each of the two groups, and the light emission colors are switched in a short period of time, so that the light emission performance with more impact than usual can be executed.

In this example, as light emission in the rainbow light emission mode, seven colors are caused to appear at the same time using a plurality of LEDs, and the respective emission colors are switched regularly.

On the other hand, when executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode as the suggestive effect A suggesting the set value 6, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved, whereas the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 are not involved. As for the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5, during the execution period of the suggestive effect A, the light emitting effect corresponding to the variation pattern is continued regardless of the light emitting colors constituting the rainbow light emitting mode.

Further, as a suggesting performance A suggesting the set value 6, during the execution period of the light emitting performance lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode, the display area of the performance display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and a rainbow mode performance image is displayed in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color. In such a rainbow effect image, the display colors displayed in each of the plurality of display areas are changed in a predetermined order of ``red→purple→blue→green→orange→yellow→white→red” every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second), and such regular changes are repeated until timing t10 is reached (for example, 5 seconds). The target for displaying the effect image in the rainbow mode may be an effect image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, such as a background image, or may be an effect image displayed in a part of the display area of the effect display device 1600, such as an effect image such as a character or an item.

In addition, as described above in detail, the back top front effect unit 3300 attached to the game board 5 includes a back top front decoration body 3310 which is long in the left and right direction when viewed from the front, a back top front decoration board (not shown) provided behind the back top front decoration body 3310 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back top front lifting unit (not shown) for raising and lowering the back top front decoration body 3310. The back upper front decoration body 3310 is provided so that seven sumo rankings such as ``yokozuna'', ``ozeki'', and ``sekiwake'' are aligned from the left, and each of the seven rankings can be independently illuminated and decorated by the LED of the back upper front decoration substrate. In this example, as a suggesting effect A suggesting a set value 6, seven numbered display bodies are lit in a rainbow light emitting mode of emitting different light colors during the execution period of the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode. In such a rainbow luminous display, the luminous colors emitted in each of the seven numbers are changed in a predetermined order of ``red→purple→blue→green→orange→yellow→white→red”, and such regular changes are repeated until timing t10 (for example, 5 seconds).

As described above, when the suggestive effect A suggesting the set value 6 is executed during the variation of the pattern, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to execute the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. That is, when executing the suggestive effect B suggesting that the possibility of a high set value (set values 4 to 6) is high, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to execute the light emission effect of blinking in red. ∼ 14 are involved to execute a blue flashing light emission performance, and when a suggestive performance D suggesting that there is a high possibility of an odd set value (1, 3, 5) is executed, a green flashing light emission performance is also executed with the involvement of the LEDs 1 to 14.

Specifically, in the case of executing a suggestive effect B suggesting that there is a high possibility of a high set value (set values 4 to 6), when the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed by the player at timing t1, or when the button effective period (for example, 5 seconds) passes without the effect operation unit 301 being pressed, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 8 of the effect operation unit 300. 9. Light the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 so as to blink in "red". Also, in the case of executing the suggestion effect C suggesting that there is a high possibility of even-numbered set values (set values 2, 4, and 6), the LEDs 1 to 14 are similarly caused to flash in "blue". Also, when executing the suggestive effect D suggesting that the probability of odd set values (1, 3, 5) is high, the LEDs 1 to 14 are likewise flashed in "green". That is, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are caused to flash in the same color for each group.

(Restrictions on setting suggestion effects when ID codes do not match)
In the above description, when the power is turned on, the case where both the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 match the game board 5 is explained. However, when either one or both of the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 do not match the game board 5, at least a part of the light emission performance in the luminescent colors corresponding to the suggestion performances A to D is restricted when executing the suggestion performance. Similarly, when one or both of the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 are not connected to the door frame 3, at least a part of the light emitting performance in the luminescent colors corresponding to the suggestive performances A to D is restricted when executing the suggestive performance.

In this example, when the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 matches the game board 5, the light emission of the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 can be controlled, whereas when the ID codes do not match, the light emission of the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 is not controlled, and the LEDs 5 to 7 are turned off. Similarly, when the ID code of the performance operation unit 300 matches the game board 5, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300 can be controlled to emit light, whereas when the ID codes do not match, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300 are not controlled to emit light, and the LEDs 8 to 9 are extinguished. That is, among the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300, for parts whose ID codes do not match with the game board 5, various LEDs mounted on the light emitting substrates of the parts that do not match are not controlled in light emission, and the LEDs are extinguished while the patterns are fluctuating or not fluctuating.

FIG. 220 is a timing chart showing an example of a suggestive effect that is executed as an effect during symbol fluctuation when there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5 . Here, when the power is turned on, the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 out of the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 does not match with the game board 5, and the execution of the light emission performance lighting up in the rainbow light emission mode as the suggestion performance A suggesting the set value 6 during the variation of the pattern is decided. When the ID code of the performance operation unit 300 does not match the game board 5, or when the ID codes of both the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 do not match the game board 5, the same control is performed during the execution period of the suggestive performance.

First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, as an effect corresponding to the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command, the effect display device 1600 starts a variable effect such as a variable display of decorative symbols in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. Light emission is controlled (timing t0). At this time, for the door frame top unit 450 whose ID code does not match the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 are not controlled to emit light, and the LEDs 5 to 7 are extinguished. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern reaches a predetermined timing, the performance display device 1600 executes a button operation prompting performance for prompting the operation of the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 (for example, ``press the performance operation button!'') (timing tA).

Then, when the button operation promotion effect is started at timing tA, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, not only LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 whose ID code does not match the game board 5, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 whose ID code matches the game board 5, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, and the door. The LEDs 10 to 14 in frame 3 are also turned off. That is, when the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 does not match the game board 5, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are turned off so that not only the door frame top unit 450 but also the effect operation unit 300 whose ID code matches the game board 5 is included.

Then, at timing t1, when the effect operation part 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed by the player or the button effective period (e.g., 5 seconds) passes without the effect operation part 301 of the effect operation unit 300 being pressed, the light emission effect of lighting up in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed until the timing t10 (for example, 5 seconds) although it is the timing to execute the light emission effect of lighting up in the rainbow light emission mode as the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6. Specifically, among the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, not only the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 whose ID code does not match the game board 5, but also the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 whose ID code matches the game board 5 and the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 are turned off. That is, when the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 does not match the game board 5, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are turned off so that not only the door frame top unit 450 but also the effect operation unit 300 whose ID code matches the game board 5 is included.

On the other hand, from timing t1 to timing t10, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300 are turned off, while LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are turned on in red. In other words, when the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 does not match that of the game board 5, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in the light emission effect of lighting in red.

As described above, when there is no part whose ID code does not match the game board 5 (all parts match), the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6. In contrast, the ID code matches the game board 5. If there is a part that does not, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestive effect A suggesting the set value 6, the execution of the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the LEDs 1 to 14 is suppressed. If the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 does not match that of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 cannot be controlled to emit light. Therefore, if the other LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) are used to perform the lighting effects in the rainbow light emission mode, part of the light emission colors that make up the rainbow light emission mode is lacking, resulting in an incomplete state of the rainbow light emission mode. Light will be emitted in a manner that does not hold. Therefore, when there is a component whose ID code does not match with the game board 5, the execution of the light emitting performance of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode including the component whose ID code matches the game board 5 is suppressed during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestive performance A suggesting the set value 6, thereby preventing the light emitting in a mode in which the rainbow light emitting mode is not established and preventing the occurrence of a situation in which it is impossible to determine whether or not the suggestive performance A suggesting the set value 6 is being executed.

Further, as described above, when there is no part whose ID code does not match the game board 5 (all parts match), the execution of the effect corresponding to the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command is stopped at the timing t1 at which the suggestive effect A suggesting the set value 6 is executed. The game is stopped, and the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 are turned off. Thus, in the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion performance A suggesting the set value 6, it is possible to inform in advance that the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode cannot be executed using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3.

Further, as described above, when there is no component whose ID code does not match the game board 5 (all components match), the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are caused to emit light so as to change in some of the emission colors that constitute the rainbow light emission mode during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestive effect A suggesting the set value 6. On the other hand, if there is a component whose ID code does not match the game board 5, the execution period of the suggestive effect A suggesting the set value 6 (timing t1 to t10). 3, the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are illuminated in red without changing the emission color. Here, when there is no part whose ID code does not match with the game board 5 (all the parts match), when executing a suggestion performance B suggesting that there is a high possibility of a high set value (set values 4 to 6), the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are made to emit red blinking light. In other words, when there is a part whose ID code does not match with the game board 5, instead of the light emitting performance of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode as the suggestive performance A, the light emitting performance of lighting in red similar to the suggestive performance B is executed for the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3.例文帳に追加Thus, in the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestive effect A suggesting the set value 6, since the light emitting effect lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is not executed, it is not possible to notify that the set value is 6. However, by executing the light emitting effect of lighting in red using the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, it is possible to notify as if the high set value (set value 4 to 6) is highly likely, and to prevent the occurrence of an unexpected situation.

If there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect B suggesting that there is a high possibility of a high set value (set values 4 to 6). It is involved and is executing a luminous effect that lights up in red. In addition, when there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect C suggesting that there is a high possibility of even-numbered set values (set values 2, 4, and 6). 14 is involved in performing a light emitting effect of lighting in blue. In addition, when there is no part whose ID code does not match the game board 5 (all parts match), during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect D suggesting that the odd set values (1, 3, 5) are highly likely, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to replace the green flashing light emission effect. 3 LEDs 10 to 14 are involved in performing a green lighting effect.

In this example, when there is no part whose ID code does not match the game board 5 (all parts match), the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 participate in the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6. As for 17, regardless of the luminescent colors that make up the rainbow luminous mode, the luminous effect according to the variation pattern is continued. On the other hand, even when there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 do not turn off like the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300 during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion performance A suggesting the set value 6, and the light emission performance corresponding to the variation pattern is continued. Thus, in the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestion performance A suggesting the set value 6, although the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 continue the light emission performance corresponding to the variation pattern, thereby maintaining a state in which the light emission performance corresponding to the variation pattern is expected.

Among the various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting substrate of the game board 5, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the variable winning opening decoration substrate are LED 15, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first start opening decoration substrate are LED 16, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the second start opening decoration substrate are LED 17. The LED mounting surfaces of these decoration substrates are coated with a white solder resist (protective material) to increase the reflection efficiency. Therefore, even when a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting full-color light are emitted in a wide variety of colors, it is possible to uniformly reflect all the light and to make it brightly colored, and it is possible to brighten and brightly (clearly) light-embellish the variable prize-winning port 2003 by the LED 15, the first start-up port 2004 by the LED 16, and the second start-up port 2005 by the LED 17, thereby enhancing the production effect. In addition, for the LEDs 15 to 17, an LED that emits light only in a single color (for example, red) may be used, and even when such an LED is used, the variable winning opening 2003 by the LED 15, the first opening 2004 by the LED 16, and the second opening 2005 by the LED 17 can be brighter and vividly (clearly) luminous and decorated, and the production effect can be enhanced.

Further, in this example, when there is a component whose ID code does not match the game board 5, as in the case where there is no component whose ID code does not match the game board 5 (all components match), during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestive effect A suggesting the set value 6, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and a rainbow mode effect image is displayed in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color. In other words, when there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, the lighting effects in which the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are not executed in the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, whereas the effect display device 1600 displays a rainbow effect image. are As a result, as long as attention is paid to the light emitting area (light emission by LEDs 1 to 14) around the display area of the effect display device 1600, it cannot be determined whether or not the suggestive effect A suggesting the set value 6 is being executed, but by paying attention to the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is possible to grasp that the set value 6 is suggested by the effect image in the rainbow mode.

Further, in this example, when there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, similarly to the case where there is no part whose ID code does not match the game board 5 (all parts match), during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion performance A suggesting the setting value 6, each of the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decoration body 3310 is lit in a rainbow luminous mode that emits light of different luminescent colors. In other words, when there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, the lighting effects in which the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6 are not executed. are lit in a rainbow luminescence mode that emits light of different luminous colors. As a result, as long as attention is paid to the light emitting area (light emission by the LEDs 1 to 14) around the display area of the effect display device 1600, it cannot be determined whether or not the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6 is being executed, but by paying attention to the back upper front decoration body 3310 above the display region of the effect display device 1600, it is possible to grasp that the set value 6 is suggested by light emission in the rainbow light emission mode.

Also, in this example, when there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, at the timing tA before the timing t1 at which the suggestive effect A suggesting the setting value 6 is executed, the effect corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is stopped, and the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 are extinguished. 1, for example, from the start of pattern fluctuation (timing t0) to execute the suggestive effect, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 may be turned off. In such a configuration, even if LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light as an advance notice effect to anticipate the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode from the start of pattern variation to the execution of the suggestive effect, such notice effect is not executed, and the player's expectations for the light emission effect of lighting up in the rainbow light emission mode can be suppressed. In addition, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300 may be extinguished from the pattern variation display before the pattern variation display to execute the suggestive performance. In such a configuration, even if the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light as a look-ahead effect to anticipate the light-emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light-emitting mode before the variable display of the pattern to execute the suggestive effect, such a look-ahead effect is not executed, and the player's expectation of the light-emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light-emitting mode can be suppressed.

In this example, when there is a part whose ID code does not match the game board 5, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 are extinguished during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestive effect A suggesting the set value 6. 4. The state in which the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450 and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 are turned off may be continued. With such a configuration, after the suggestive effect is completed, for example, when a winning pattern becomes a winning pattern when the pattern fluctuation stops, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed again, or even when the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode again during the winning game after the winning pattern is realized, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 are turned off. Collectively, it is possible to prevent light emission in a mode in which the rainbow light emission mode is not established.

In this example, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 match with the game board 5. Even when the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 are not connected to the game board 5, the same processing as when there is a part whose ID code does not match with the game board 5 is performed. That is, when the power is turned on, when the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 are not connected to the game board 5, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, similarly to the case where there is a component whose ID code does not match the game board 5. Execution of the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is suppressed.

Regarding the above, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 match those of the game board 5 (including determination of whether or not they are connected). If removed, it cannot be detected. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the LEDs of the parts removed from the game board 5 are extinguished, but the LEDs of the other parts are subjected to the lighting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestion performance A suggesting the set value 6, and light is emitted in a mode in which the rainbow light emission mode is not established. That is, when the power is turned on, if the ID code of the door frame top unit 450 or the effect operation unit 300 does not match the game board 5 (including the case that they are not connected), the execution of the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is restricted during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A that suggests the set value 6. On the other hand, if the door frame top unit 450 or the effect operation unit 300 is removed from the game board 5 after the power is turned on (if they are not connected). ), during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestive effect A suggesting the set value 6, light is emitted in a manner in which the rainbow light emission manner is not established. Thus, when the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 are detached from the game board 5 (including the case where they are not connected) after the power is turned on, the traces thereof are notified to the outside, so that it is possible to inform the outside of the occurrence of trouble in the connection of the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300.例文帳に追加

After the power is turned on and the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 are detached from the game board 5, even if a component whose ID code matches the game board 5 is connected to the removed part, it cannot be detected that the component whose ID code matches is connected. As a result, the LEDs of the components connected to the game board 5 with matching ID codes are turned off, but the LEDs of the other components are subjected to the rainbow light emission mode during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestion performance A suggesting the set value 6, and the rainbow light emission mode is not established. On the other hand, after the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 are detached from the game board 5 after the power is turned on, when a component whose ID code does not match the game board 5 is connected to the removed part, it cannot be detected that the component whose ID code does not match is connected. As a result, the LEDs of the parts connected to the game board 5 that do not match the ID code are turned off, but the LEDs of the other parts are subjected to the rainbow light emission mode during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestion performance A suggesting the set value 6, and the rainbow light emission mode is not established. As a result, when the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 are removed from the game board 5 after the power is turned on (including when they are not connected), regardless of whether a component with a matching ID code or a component with a non-matching ID code is subsequently connected to the game board 5, traces of the removal of the door frame top unit 450 or the effect operation unit 300 from the game board 5 are notified to the outside. It is possible to inform the outside of the fact that it is necessary to take measures to prevent the connection of the operation unit 300 from reoccurring.

In this example, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 match those of the game board 5 (including determination of whether or not they are connected). (including determination of whether or not it is connected). Further, an operation switch for determining whether or not the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 match those of the game board 5 (including determination of whether or not they are connected) may be provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and when the operation switch is operated after the power is turned on, it may be determined whether or not the ID codes of the door frame top unit 450 and the performance operation unit 300 match those of the game board 5 (including determination of whether or not they are connected). According to such a configuration, when the door frame top unit 450 or the performance operation unit 300 is removed from the game board 5 after turning on the power, the removal can be detected by operating the operation switch after that. That is, when the operation switch is operated, if the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 are not connected to the game board 5, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are executed during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the suggestion effect A suggesting the set value 6, similarly to the case where there is a component whose ID code does not match the game board 5. is used to suppress the execution of the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode.

Further, in this example, when the suggestive effect A suggesting the set value 6 is executed, the rainbow light emitting effect is executed using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. However, such a light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode may be executed in an effect other than the suggestive effect. It may be executed with a high-expectation performance suggesting that. Even in such a configuration, if there is no part whose ID code does not match the game board 5 (all the parts match), the high-expectation effect is executed in which the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to light up in a rainbow light emission mode. , it is suppressed so as not to perform the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode.

In this example, the game board 5, the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit 300 can be changed when the model is changed, but other modes may be adopted. For example, not only the door frame top unit 450 and the effect operation unit 300 but also other decoration units for the door frame 3 (door frame base unit 100) can be changed when the model is changed. An example is an upper decoration unit positioned above the door window 101a provided on the door frame 3 (similar to the door frame top unit 450 of the above embodiment), a right decoration unit positioned to the right of the door window 101a, a left decoration unit positioned to the left of the door window 101a, and a door. At least four decoration units, such as the lower decoration unit (similar to the effect operation unit 300 of the above embodiment) located below the window 101a, may be changed when the model is changed. As a result, it is possible to further increase the change in the appearance of the gaming machine due to the model change, and to provide the player with a newer sense of freshness. A plurality of LEDs are provided for each of these four decoration units, an ID code is set for each, and match/mismatch/non-attachment determination is performed in the same manner as described above, so that the above-described processing can be performed with respect to the above-described light-emitting effect such as the rainbow light-emitting mode, and the same game effect as described above can be achieved.

[The win-or-lose button effect when the rainbow effect is executed]
In this embodiment, during the variable display of symbols, a rainbow effect (luminous effect of lighting in a rainbow luminous mode) is executed as a high expectation effect suggesting that there is a high possibility of winning. Only by executing the rainbow performance, it is not possible to determine whether or not the player will win, but when operating a predetermined operation part during the execution of the rainbow performance, the player's operation performance (button performance) capable of determining whether or not the player will win is executed.

In this example, as a performance corresponding to the variation pattern, a rainbow performance can be executed as a high-expectation performance during the variable display of the patterns, and a rainbow performance at the time of winning is derived as a result of the variable display of the patterns, and a rainbow performance at the time of loss is derived as a result of the variable display of the patterns although the rainbow performance is executed during the variable display of the patterns. In other words, it is possible to determine the variation pattern for executing the rainbow performance at the time of winning, and to determine the variation pattern for executing the rainbow performance at the time of losing at the time of loss. By lowering the ratio of determining the variation pattern for executing the rainbow performance at the time of failure to the variation pattern for executing other performances at the time of failure, the frequency of execution of the rainbow performance at the time of failure is made lower than the performance at the time of other failure. As a result, when the rainbow performance is executed, it cannot be determined whether it is the rainbow performance at the time of winning or the rainbow performance at the time of losing, but the ratio of the rainbow performance at the time of winning is high, suggesting that the possibility of winning is high.

In addition, in this example, during the variable display of the pattern, it is possible to execute the effect of suggesting the set value 6 as the above-mentioned suggestive effect A, and the rainbow effect as the high expectation effect is the same in that the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed. That is, when executing the rainbow effect as a high-expectation effect, similarly to when executing the suggestive effect A, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 in conjunction with the display of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of decorative symbols reaches a predetermined timing (timing different from the execution timing of suggestion effect A suggesting set value 6) (timing t1), LEDs 1-2 of game board 5 are set to "red", LEDs 3-4 of game board 5 are set to "purple", LEDs 5-6 of door frame top unit 450 are set to "blue", LED 7 of door frame top unit 450 and LED 8 of door frame 3 are set to "green", door frame 3. and the LED 10 of the door frame 3 are "orange", the LEDs 11-12 of the door frame 3 are "yellow", and the LEDs 13-14 of the door frame 3 are "white". That is, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are caused to emit light of different colors for each two groups.

As for the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, the LEDs emitting "red" light are "purple", the "purple" light emitting LEDs are "green", and the "green" light emitting LEDs are "orange" and "orange" at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.1 seconds). The LED is changed to "yellow", the LED emitting "yellow" is changed to "white", and the LED emitting "white" is changed to "red". In this way, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are changed in a predetermined order of "red→purple→blue→green→orange→yellow→white→red" every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds), and such a rule is applied until the timing t10 (for example, 10 seconds). I'm trying to repeat the changes.

In this way, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are controlled so as to sequentially switch the respective emission colors to a plurality of emission colors in a short unit emission time, so that these LEDs can be visually recognized as if the rainbow emission mode is being emitted in cooperation with each other, and an impactful emission effect can be executed. In addition, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are controlled by interlocking the LEDs 1 to 14 so that the LEDs 1 to 14 are caused to emit light in a plurality of colors so that the LEDs 1 to 14 emit light in different light colors for each of the two groups, and the light emission colors are switched in a short period of time, so that the light emission performance with more impact than usual can be executed.

In this example, as light emission in the rainbow light emission mode, seven colors are caused to appear at the same time using a plurality of LEDs, and the respective emission colors are switched regularly.

Further, during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and a rainbow mode effect image is displayed in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color. In such a rainbow mode effect image, the display colors displayed in each of the plurality of display areas are changed in a predetermined order of ``red→purple→blue→green→orange→yellow→white→red” every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds), and such regular changes are repeated until timing t10 is reached (for example, 5 seconds). The target for displaying the effect image in the rainbow mode may be a effect image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, such as a background image, or may be a effect image displayed in a part of the display area of the effect display device 1600, such as a character, an item, or the like.

In this example, for the purpose of further enhancing the fun of the rainbow performance and further improving the amusement of the game, when operating a predetermined operation part during the execution of the rainbow performance, a button performance capable of judging whether or not the game will win is executed, and any one of the button performances A to C is executed. Here, a case of executing each of the rainbow effect with the button effect A, the rainbow effect with the button effect B, and the rainbow effect with the button effect C will be described below.

(Rainbow effect with button effect A)
First, the plate unit 200 is provided with a light amount adjustment button 228 that can be operated by the player on the right side of the effect operation section 301 in the effect operation unit 300 . As for the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 can be adjusted step by step by performing a light amount adjustment operation using the light amount adjustment button 228. For example, it is possible to adjust the level of the light amount of the LED from 1 (minimum light amount)→2→3→4→5 (maximum light amount), and the light amount of the LED increases as the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated upward to increase the stage, and the LED light amount decreases as the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated downward to decrease the stage. As for the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations, it is possible to adjust the amount of light both during the pattern change and during the non-change.

In the button production A, when the light quantity button 228 is operated during the Rainbow production, the LED of the light -emitting decorative provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5, at least a Rainbow -emitting optical form (the LED 1 to 4 of the Gameproof 5, the top unit 45, the door frame is 45. It is possible to adjust whether the light amount can be adjusted in the LED5 to 7 of 0, the production operation unit 300 LED8-9, the LED10 to 14) of the door frame 3, and determine whether it will be hit. In this example, when the rainbow performance at the time of winning is being executed, the light quantity can be adjusted when the light quantity adjusting button 228 is operated, and the hit can be grasped.

FIG. 221 is a timing chart showing an example of button effect A during execution of rainbow effect. First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, as a performance corresponding to the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command, the performance display device 1600 starts the variable performance such as the variable display of the decorative pattern in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. Then, when the variation pattern at the time of winning to execute the rainbow effect at the time of winning is determined, or when the variation pattern at the time of losing to execute the rainbow effect at the time of winning is determined, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation display of the symbols reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit in a rainbow light emission mode. A light emission effect (rainbow effect) is started, and the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is continued until timing t10 is reached (for example, 10 seconds).

In addition, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), the effect display device 1600 executes a button operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228 (for example, "Push the light amount adjustment button!"), and displays a win when the light amount can be adjusted by operating the light amount adjustment button 228, and a loss when the light amount cannot be adjusted (for example, "If the light amount can be adjusted, you will win! If the light amount cannot be adjusted, you will lose. !”) is executed.

When the variation pattern at the time of winning to execute the rainbow performance at the time of winning is determined, the light quantity adjustable period in which the light quantity can be adjusted by operating a light quantity adjusting button 228 is set in the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow performance at the time of winning. During this light amount adjustable period, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, at least the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) that constitute the rainbow light emitting mode among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 change. As a result, when the light quantity is adjusted during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow performance, it is possible to grasp that the variable display of the pattern being executed will be a hit, and to encourage positive operation of the light quantity adjustment button 228 in order to know whether it will be a hit or not.

On the other hand, when the variation pattern for performing the rainbow performance at the time of failure is determined, the period of execution of the rainbow performance at the time of failure (timings t1 to t10) is set to a light quantity adjustment disabled period in which the light quantity cannot be adjusted by operating a light quantity adjustment button 228.例文帳に追加During this light amount adjustment unadjustable period, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, at least the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3), among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, do not change in light amount. As a result, when the light quantity cannot be adjusted during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow performance, it is possible to grasp that the variation display of the pattern being executed will be lost, and to know whether or not it is a hit, the user can be encouraged to actively operate the light quantity adjustment button 228.例文帳に追加

In this example, among the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) are allowed to adjust the light amount. It emits light with a certain amount of light. As a result, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), if the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed, the light amount of the LED whose light amount is variable (the LED that constitutes the rainbow light emission mode) changes relative to the LED whose light amount is unchanged (the LED that does not constitute the rainbow light emission mode). The amount of light of the LEDs constituting the light emission mode changes relatively. Therefore, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow presentation, it is possible to easily recognize whether or not the light amount has been adjusted, and it is possible to clearly grasp whether or not the variable display of the pattern being executed is successful.

In the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow performance at the time of failure, when the light quantity cannot be adjusted even though the light quantity adjustment button 228 is operated, after the rainbow performance at the time of failure is performed, the performance display device 1600 displays a specific image that does not make it possible to recognize that the variable display of the pattern being executed will be a win. Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, a display (for example, "Sorry!") is displayed to notify that the variable display of the pattern being executed is not correct, and a display to notify that the state in which the light amount cannot be adjusted is returned to a state in which the light amount can be adjusted when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated (for example, "You can now adjust the light amount!"). Thus, even if it is not possible to recognize whether or not the light quantity has been adjusted when the light quantity adjusting button 228 is operated during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow performance, the specific image displayed after the execution of the rainbow performance makes it possible to clearly grasp that the variation display of the pattern being executed is not correct.

In this example, in the execution period of the rainbow performance (timings t1 to t10), when the rainbow performance at the time of failure is executed, until a specific period (for example, 3 minutes) elapses after the rainbow performance at the time of failure is completed, the fluctuation pattern for executing the rainbow performance at the time of failure is not determined, and the rainbow performance at the time of failure is not performed again. On the other hand, it is possible to determine a winning variation pattern for executing the winning rainbow performance until a specific period (for example, 3 minutes) elapses after finishing the winning rainbow performance, and does not limit the execution of the winning rainbow performance. As a result, the rainbow performance at the time of failure is not repeated in a short period such as a specific period, and the reliability of the rainbow performance executed as a high-expectation performance suggesting a high probability of winning is not lost, and the next rainbow performance can be waited for with pleasure.

In this example, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), regardless of whether or not the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, the rainbow effect ends when the predetermined time elapses. However, when the rainbow effect at the time of failure is executed, the rainbow effect at the time of failure is recognized at the time when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated to recognize that the light amount cannot be adjusted even before the predetermined time has elapsed (when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated). may be terminated. As a result, after recognizing that the light quantity cannot be adjusted by operating the light quantity adjusting button 228, the rainbow performance is not continued, and the unpleasant feeling that the rainbow performance is being executed in spite of the fact that the variable display of the pattern being executed is off can be reduced.

Further, in this example, the effect display device 1600 executes a button operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228 (for example, "press the light amount adjustment button!") during the rainbow effect execution period (timings t1 to t10). It is also possible not to execute the button operation prompting effect for prompting display (for example, "press the light amount adjustment button!"). As a result, the above effect functions as a "hidden effect" during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), allowing the player who usually positively operates the light amount adjustment button 228 to know early whether or not they will win, and for the player who does not usually actively operate the light amount adjustment button 228, the result of the variation display of the pattern after the rainbow effect is executed. ) will be displayed, and you can entertain yourself to see if you will win.

Also, in this example, if the light amount cannot be adjusted despite the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228 during the execution period of the rainbow effect at the time of failure (timings t1 to t10), after the rainbow effect at the time of failure is executed, a specific image is displayed in the effect display device 1600 so that the variation display of the symbol being executed will not be recognized as a win. When the provided volume control button 227 is operated, the specific image may be displayed in the same manner as when the light amount control button 228 is operated. As a result, even if the player mistakenly operates the volume control button 227 instead of the light quantity adjustment button 228 during a limited execution period (timing t1 to t10), the performance can proceed by considering that the player intends to operate the light quantity adjustment button 228, and the same performance effect as when the light quantity adjustment button 228 is operated can be exhibited. In this case, when the volume control button 227 is operated instead of the light amount control button 228 during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the light amount of the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) constituting the rainbow light emission mode does not change, but in such a case, the light amount control button 228 is operated. It is preferable to issue a special notification (for example, "That's not the light amount adjustment!") that is not performed when the operation is performed, to prompt that it is an erroneous operation.

In addition, in this example, the rainbow performance accompanied by the button performance A is executed as the performance during the variable display of the patterns, but the rainbow performance accompanied by the button performance A may be executed during a specific period such as a winning game when the patterns are not variable displayed. In this case, the player should be made to recognize whether or not some kind of game profit (probability fluctuation, time reduction, etc.) is provided after the winning game being executed according to the rainbow performance situation (whether or not the light quantity is adjusted) by the button performance A.例文帳に追加

Further, in this example, the rainbow performance accompanied by the button performance A is executed as the performance during the variable display of the patterns associated with the start winning, but the rainbow performance accompanied by the button performance A may be executed as the performance without being accompanied by the start winning. Specifically, when a situation in which the starting prize does not occur for a long time continues, the player is disgusted and irritated, and as a part of alleviating this, a dummy performance simulating the variable display of patterns is started when a certain period of time elapses without the start winning being generated, and a rainbow performance accompanied by the button performance A is executed in the performance. In this case, the rainbow performance at the time of losing is executed as the rainbow performance accompanying the button performance A, and during the execution period of the rainbow performance (timings t1 to t10), the light quantity cannot be adjusted even if the light quantity adjustment button 228 is operated, so that the player can be made to recognize that the dummy performance does not result in winning.

(Rainbow effect with button effect B)
In the button effect B, when the effect operation part 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated during the execution of the rainbow effect, among the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) that constitute the rainbow light emitting mode are used to execute the effect of whether or not to continue the rainbow effect. can determine whether. In this example, when the rainbow performance at the time of winning is being executed, the rainbow performance is continued until a predetermined time elapses without ending the rainbow performance when the performance operation part 301 is operated, and the hit can be grasped.

FIG. 222 is a timing chart showing an example of button effect B during execution of rainbow effect. First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, as the performance corresponding to the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command, the performance display device 1600 starts the variable performance such as the variable display of the decorative pattern in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. Then, when the variation pattern at the time of winning to execute the rainbow effect at the time of winning is determined, or when the variation pattern at the time of losing to execute the rainbow effect at the time of winning is determined, when the elapsed time from the start of the symbol variation display reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit in a rainbow light emission mode. A light emission effect (rainbow effect) is started, and the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is continued until timing t10 is reached (for example, 10 seconds).

In addition, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), the effect display device 1600 executes a button operation prompting effect that prompts the user to operate the effect operation unit 301 (for example, "Press the effect operation button!"), and displays that a win is achieved when the rainbow effect being executed continues even after the operation of the effect operation unit 301, and a loss occurs when the rainbow effect that is being executed ends when the effect operation unit 301 is operated (for example, "If the rainbow continues, you win! Rainbow."). If it doesn't continue, you're out!") is executed.

When the winning variation pattern for executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning is determined, even if the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution period of the rainbow effect at the time of winning (timing t1 to t10), among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 1 of the door frame 3). The rainbow effect using 4) is continued without ending. Thus, in the execution period of the rainbow performance (timings t1 to t10), when the rainbow performance being executed continues even after the operation of the performance operation part 301, it is possible to grasp that the variable display of the pattern being executed will be a hit, and to encourage positive operation to the performance operation part 301 in order to know whether it will be a win or not.

On the other hand, when the variation pattern for the rainbow effect at the time of failure is determined, during the execution period of the rainbow effect at the time of failure (timing t1 to t10), when the effect operation unit 301 is operated, among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3). is terminated, and the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emission mode are switched from light emission in the rainbow light emission mode to non-light emission, or to light emission in a single color. Thus, in the execution period of the rainbow performance (timings t1 to t10), when the rainbow performance being executed is completed when the performance operation part 301 is operated, it is possible to grasp that the variation display of the pattern being executed will be lost, and it is possible to encourage the user to positively operate the performance operation part 301 in order to know whether or not the player will win.

In this example, during the execution period of the Rainbow production (timing T1 to T10), the LED1-4 of the gaming board 5, the LED5 to 7 of the top unit unit 450, the LED8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300, and the LED10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved, so we will turn on the rainbow empty format. In contrast to the LED15 to 17 of the playing board 5, the light emission production is executed according to the fluctuation pattern, regardless of the light emission color that makes up a rainbow emission form. Then, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) are switched from light emission in the rainbow light emission mode to non-light emission or single color light emission. LEDs 15 to 17) continue to emit light in a predetermined mode by executing a light emission effect according to the variation pattern. As a result, when the performance operation unit 301 is operated during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow performance at the time of loss, for example, if all the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are switched from light emission in the rainbow light-emitting mode to non-light-emission, all the LEDs may be extinguished and the pachinko machine 1 may be misunderstood as being out of order. By continuing to emit light in a predetermined mode, it is possible to prevent such misrecognition.

In this example, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), by operating the effect operation unit 301, it is possible to confirm whether or not to continue the rainbow effect that is being executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the interest of the button production B by mistakenly operating a part other than the production operation unit 301 during the execution period of the rainbow production (timings t1 to t10). Incidentally, the operation units for a plurality of effects may include, for example, a light amount adjustment button 228 that can be operated by the player to adjust the amount of light, and a volume adjustment button 227 that can be operated by the player to adjust the volume.

In this example, when the rainbow effect accompanying the button effect A cannot be adjusted even though the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, after the rainbow effect at the time of failure is executed, a specific image is displayed in the effect display device 1600 to prevent the recognition that the variation display of the symbol being executed will be a win. A specific image may be displayed to prevent recognition of the fact. Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, a display (for example, "Sorry!") may be executed to notify that the variable display of the symbol being executed is out of order, resulting in a disappointing result. As a result, in the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow performance, even if the performance operation part 301 is operated just before the end of the performance operation part 301 and it cannot be recognized whether or not the rainbow performance has been completed by the operation of the performance operation part 301, it is possible to clearly grasp that the variation display of the pattern being executed is off by the specific image displayed after the execution of the rainbow performance.

In this example, the effect display device 1600 performs a display prompting the operation of the effect operation unit 301 (for example, “press the effect operation button!”) in the effect display device 1600 during the rainbow effect execution period (timings t1 to t10). "Press the effect operation button!") may not be executed. As a result, the above-mentioned effect functions as a ``hidden effect'' during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timing t1 to t10), so that the player who usually positively operates the effect operation part 301 can quickly grasp whether or not he/she will win, and the player who does not usually actively operate the effect operation part 301 can see the winning result as a result of the variable display of the pattern after the execution of the rainbow effect. You can make them pay attention to whether or not is displayed, and enjoy thoroughly whether it will be a hit or not.

In addition, in this example, the rainbow performance accompanied by the button performance B is executed as the performance during the variable display of the patterns, but the rainbow performance accompanied by the button performance B may be executed during a specific period such as a winning game when the patterns are not variable displayed. In this case, the player should be made to recognize whether or not some kind of game profit (probability variation, time reduction, etc.) is provided after the winning game being executed according to the state of the rainbow performance by the button performance B (whether it is terminated in the middle or not).

In addition, in this example, the rainbow performance accompanied by the button performance B is executed as the performance during the variable display of the patterns accompanying the start winning, but the rainbow performance accompanied by the button performance B may be executed as the performance without being accompanied by the start winning. Specifically, when a situation in which the starting prize does not occur for a long time continues, the player is disgusted and irritated, and as a part of alleviating this, a dummy performance imitating the variable display of patterns is started when a fixed period elapses without the start winning occurring, and a rainbow performance accompanied by a button performance B is executed in the performance. In this case, the rainbow performance at the time of loss is executed as the rainbow performance accompanied by the button performance B, and during the execution period of the rainbow performance (timings t1 to t10), the rainbow performance is ended when the performance operation part 301 is operated, so that the player can be made to recognize that the dummy performance does not result in winning.

(Rainbow effect with button effect C)
First, the plate unit 200 is provided with a volume control button 227 that can be operated by the player on the right side of the effect operation section 301 in the effect operation unit 300 . The sound output from various speakers (main body frame speaker 622, etc.) can be adjusted step by step by performing a volume adjustment operation using the volume adjustment button 227. FIG. For example, it is possible to adjust the level of the volume output from various speakers in the order of 1 (minimum volume) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum volume), and as the volume control button 227 is operated upward to increase the level, the volume output from the various speakers increases, and as the volume control button 227 is operated downward to decrease the level, the volume output from the various speakers decreases. In this example, the volume of the lowest level (1) is zero volume, and all the production sounds are inaudible. In addition, the volume of sounds output from various speakers can be adjusted both while the patterns are changing and when they are not changing.

In this example, during the execution of the rainbow performance accompanied by the button performance C, the volume is forcibly set to the lowest level (1) regardless of the volume control button 227 by the player, and with the start of the rainbow performance this time, the performance sounds including the performance sounds such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow performance are forcibly changed to an inaudible state in which the player cannot recognize. Although the details will be described later, in the button effect C of this example, when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated upward in such an inaudible state to raise the level of the volume, an effect is executed to determine whether or not the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from the inaudible state to the audible state, thereby making it possible to determine whether or not the player will win. In this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed, the effect sound such as the BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from an inaudible state to an audible state when the volume control button 227 is operated, whereby the player can grasp that the player has won the game.

In addition to the above, when the volume control button 227 is operated to change the level of the volume in this example, a specific sound (for example, beep) is output as an operation confirmation sound. However, in the rainbow effect accompanying the button effect C, whether or not the operation confirmation sound is output when the volume control button 227 is operated is also used to determine whether or not the player will win. In this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed, even if the volume control button 227 is operated, a specific sound (e.g., beep) is not output from various speakers, thereby allowing the player to know that the game is a win.

In other words, in this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed, when the volume control button 227 is operated, the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from an inaudible state to an audible state, but in this case, a specific sound (for example, beep) as an operation confirmation sound is not output in response to the operation of the volume control button 227. - 特許庁On the other hand, when the in-bow effect at the time of failure is being executed, even if the volume control button 227 is operated, the effect sound such as the BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect is kept inaudible, but in this case, only a specific sound (for example, beep) as an operation confirmation sound is output according to the operation of the volume control button 227.例文帳に追加The details of such effects will be described below.

FIG. 223 is a timing chart showing an example of the button effect C during execution of the rainbow effect. First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, as a performance corresponding to the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command, the performance display device 1600 starts the variable performance such as the variable display of the decorative pattern in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. Then, when the variation pattern at the time of winning to execute the rainbow effect at the time of winning is determined, or when the variation pattern at the time of losing to execute the rainbow effect at the time of winning is determined, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation display of the symbols reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit in a rainbow light emission mode. A light emission effect (rainbow effect) is started, and the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is continued until timing t10 is reached (for example, 10 seconds).

In addition, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), the effect display device 1600 executes a button operation promotion effect in which a display prompting the operation of the volume control button 227 (for example, "press the volume control button!") is executed. When the performance sound is maintained in an inaudible state (does not change to an audible state), an explanation performance is executed to display a display explaining the loss (for example, "If it changes to an audible state, you win! If it does not change to an audible state, you lose!").

When a winning variation pattern for executing the rainbow performance at the time of winning is determined, performance sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow performance is changed from an inaudible state to an audible state when a volume control button 227 is operated during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow performance at the time of winning. In other words, it is necessary to operate the volume control button 227 in order to confirm whether the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from the non-audible state to the audible state. Note that a specific sound (for example, beep-beep) as the operation confirmation sound is not output when the volume control button 227 is operated. As a result, when the performance sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow performance is changed from an inaudible state to an audible state by operating the volume control button 227 in the execution period of the rainbow performance (timings t1 to t10), it is possible to grasp that the variable display of the pattern being executed will be a hit, and to encourage positive operation of the volume control button 227 in order to know whether or not it will be a win.

On the other hand, when the variation pattern for executing the rainbow performance at the time of failure is determined, when the volume control button 227 is operated during the execution period of the rainbow performance at the time of failure (timings t1 to t10), the performance sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow performance is maintained in an inaudible state (not changed to an audible state). In other words, it is necessary to operate the volume control button 227 in order to confirm whether or not the non-audible state of the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect is maintained (not changed to the audible state). Further, when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated, a specific sound (for example, beep-beep) is output as an operation confirmation sound. As a result, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), the volume control button 227 is operated to maintain the non-audible state of the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect (does not change to the audible state), and when a specific sound (for example, beep) is output as the operation confirmation sound, it can be grasped that the variable display of the pattern being executed will be canceled, and the user can be encouraged to actively operate the volume control button 227 in order to know whether it will be lost. .

As described above, when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of loss, the non-audible state of the effect sound such as the BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect is maintained (does not change to an audible state), and a specific sound (for example, beep-beep) is output as an operation confirmation sound. As a result, if no sound is output when the volume control button 227 is operated during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow presentation at the time of failure, it is not possible to confirm whether the operation has been accepted or not.

In this example, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), regardless of whether the volume control button 227 is operated or not, the rainbow effect is terminated when a predetermined time elapses. However, when the rainbow effect is executed, the volume control button 227 is operated to maintain the non-audible state of the effect sound such as the BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect (does not change to the audible state) even before the predetermined time elapses. At the point of time (when the volume control button 227 is operated), the rainbow effect at the time of disconnection may end. Thus, after recognizing that the non-audible state of the performance sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow performance is maintained (does not change to the audible state) by operating the volume control button 227, the rainbow performance is not continued, and the unpleasant feeling that the rainbow performance is being executed in spite of the fact that the variable display of the pattern being executed is off can be reduced.

Further, in this example, as the button effect C during execution of the rainbow effect, an effect is executed to determine whether the effect sound such as the BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect changes from an inaudible state to an audible state when the volume control button 227 is operated, and when the effect sound such as the BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect does not change from an inaudible state to an audible state, a specific sound (for example, beep) is output as the operation confirmation sound. It may be configured to perform only the performance of whether or not to output a specific sound (for example, beep) as an operation confirmation sound when operating the volume control button 227 without executing the performance of whether the performance sound such as GM changes from the non-audible state to the audible state. In such a configuration, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed, a specific sound (for example, beep) is not output as an operation confirmation sound when the volume control button 227 is operated, so that the player can know that the player has won the game. In addition to this, regarding the effect of whether or not to output a specific sound (for example, beep) as the operation confirmation sound, not only the volume control button 227 but also a plurality of operation units including the volume control button 227 (the effect operation unit 301, the light amount control button 228, and the volume control button 227) may be used. In such a configuration, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed, no specific sound (for example, beep) is output as an operation confirmation sound even if any of the plurality of operation units (effect operation unit 301, light amount adjustment button 228, volume control button 227) is operated, and it is possible to grasp that it is a win. When the button is operated, a specific sound (for example, beep-beep) is output as an operation confirmation sound, so that it is possible to grasp that it is off.

In the above configuration, during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, even if any of the plurality of operation units (the effect operation unit 301, the light amount adjustment button 228, the volume adjustment button 227) is operated, a specific sound (for example, beep) is not output from the various speakers. Similarly, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of detachment, out of the plurality of operation units (the effect operation unit 301, the light amount adjustment button 228, and the volume adjustment button 227), a specific sound (for example, Beep Beep) is not output from the various speakers regardless of the operation of any of the operation units except for the operation unit that outputs a specific sound from the various speakers. Therefore, in the performance display device 1600, when each of the plurality of operation units (the performance operation unit 301, the light amount adjustment button 228, the volume adjustment button 227) is operated, a display corresponding to the operation (for example, "You have operated a button") is performed. As a result, if any sound is not output when any one of a plurality of operation parts (the effect operation part 301, the light amount adjustment button 228, and the volume adjustment button 227) is operated during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect, it is not possible to confirm whether or not the operation has been accepted, but such confirmation can be properly performed by displaying the display corresponding to the operation.

Further, in this example, the effect display device 1600 executes a button operation prompting effect that prompts the operation of the volume control button 227 (for example, “press the volume control button!”) during the rainbow effect execution period (timings t1 to t10). "Press the volume control button!") may not be executed. As a result, the above-mentioned effect functions as a ``hidden effect'' during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), so that the player who usually positively operates the volume control button 227 can quickly grasp whether or not the player will win, and the player who does not usually actively operate the volume control button 227 can see the winning result as a result of the variable display of the pattern after the execution of the rainbow effect. You can make them pay attention to whether is displayed, and enjoy thoroughly whether it will be a hit or not.

Also, in this example, when the rainbow effect accompanying the button effect A cannot be adjusted despite the operation of the light amount adjustment button 228, after the rainbow effect at the time of failure is executed, a specific image is displayed in the effect display device 1600 to prevent recognition that the variable display of the symbol being executed will be a win. If the audible state does not change, after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of loss, a specific image may be displayed that does not make the player recognize that the variable display of the symbols being executed will be a hit. Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, a display (for example, "Sorry!") notifying that the variable display of the pattern being executed is out of order, and a display notifying that the volume adjustment button 227 is operated to return the volume to an adjustable state (for example, "You can now adjust the volume!") may be performed. Thus, even if it is not possible to recognize whether or not the performance sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow performance has changed from the inaudible state to the audible state when the sound volume control button 227 is operated during the execution period of the rainbow performance (timings t1 to t10), the specific image displayed after the execution of the rainbow performance makes it possible to clearly grasp that the variation display of the pattern being executed is off.

In the above-described configuration, in the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect when losing, if the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect does not change from an inaudible state to an audible state despite the operation of the volume control button 227, after the execution of the rainbow effect when losing, the specific image is displayed in the effect display device 1600 to prevent the recognition that the fluctuation display of the symbol being executed will be a win. From t10), when the light amount adjustment button 228 provided near the volume adjustment button 227 is operated, the specific image may be displayed in the same manner as when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated. Thus, even if the player erroneously operates the light amount adjusting button 228 instead of the volume adjusting button 227 during a limited execution period (timings t1 to t10), it is possible to proceed with the presentation assuming that the player intends to operate the volume adjusting button 227, and the same presentation effect as in the case of operating the volume adjusting button 227 can be exhibited. In this case, if the light amount control button 228 is operated instead of the volume control button 227 during the execution period (timing t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the effect sound such as the BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect does not change from the non-audible state to the audible state. is preferred.

In addition, in this example, the rainbow performance accompanied by the button performance C is executed as the performance during the variable display of the patterns, but the rainbow performance accompanied by the button performance C may be executed during a specific period such as during a winning game when the patterns are not variable displayed. In this case, the player may be made to recognize whether or not some game profit (probability variation, time reduction, etc.) is given after the winning game being executed, depending on the state of voice output by the button performance C (whether or not the performance sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow performance changes from an inaudible state to an audible state, or whether or not a specific voice (for example, beep) is output as the operation confirmation sound).

In addition, in this example, the rainbow performance accompanied by the button performance C is executed as the performance during the variable display of the patterns associated with the start winning, but the rainbow performance accompanied by the button performance C may be executed as the performance without being accompanied by the start winning. Specifically, when a situation in which the start prize does not occur for a long time continues, the player is disgusted and irritated, and as part of alleviating this, a dummy performance simulating the variable display of patterns is started when a fixed period elapses without the start win occurring, and a rainbow performance accompanied by a button performance C is executed in the performance. In this case, a rainbow effect is executed as a rainbow effect accompanying the button effect C, and during the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), the effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect does not change from an inaudible state to an audible state even if the volume control button 227 is operated, or a specific sound (for example, beeping) is output as an operation confirmation sound when the volume control button 227 is operated, so that the dummy effect is not successful as a result of the dummy effect. It is enough to let the technician recognize it.

In the above description, the rainbow performance with the button performance A, the rainbow performance with the button performance B, and the rainbow performance with the button performance C are executed as individual performances, but the rainbow performance may be executed by combining these button performances. For example, a rainbow effect with a composite button effect D including elements of button effect A and button effect B, a rainbow effect with compound button effect E including elements of button effect A and button effect C, a rainbow effect with compound button effect F including elements of button effect B and button effect C, and a rainbow effect with compound button effect G including elements of button effect A, button effect B and button effect C may be executed. More specifically, for example, in the rainbow effect accompanying the compound button effect G, depending on the object operated by the player among the plurality of operation units (the light amount adjustment button 228, the effect operation unit 301, and the volume control button 227), an effect of whether or not the amount of light changes (an element of the button effect A using the light amount control button 228), an effect of whether to continue the rainbow effect (an element of the button effect B using the effect operation unit 301), and an inaudible effect sound such as BGM corresponding to the rainbow effect. Effect of whether or not to change from state to audible state (element of button effect C using volume control button 227) to be executed is changed, and any one of a plurality of operation units (light amount control button 228, effect operation unit 301, volume control button 227) is operated, and the result of effect corresponding to the operation is derived. Other composite button effects are obtained by missing a part of the effect elements from the composite button effect G, and the objects operated by the player are more limited than the composite button effect G. In other words, only when some of the plurality of operation units (the light amount adjustment button 228, the effect operation unit 301, the volume control button 227) are operated, the result of the effect corresponding to the operation is derived. In such a composite button performance, the player is given room for selection as to which button performance is to be executed for the rainbow performance (in which button performance the rainbow performance is to be advanced), so that the player can arbitrarily select the progress mode of the rainbow performance. Therefore, it is possible not only to obtain the same effect as the various button effects described above, but also to further enhance the interest of the rainbow effect.

(Specific alert message after button effect)
As described above in detail, in the button effect B of the button effects A to C, when the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated during execution of the rainbow effect, among the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, among the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the game board 5, LEDs constituting the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) are used to continue the rainbow effect. It is possible to determine whether or not the game is a hit by executing the effect of whether or not. In this example, when the rainbow performance at the time of winning is being executed, the rainbow performance is continued until a predetermined time elapses without ending the rainbow performance when the performance operation part 301 is operated, and the hit can be grasped.

FIG. 224 is a timing chart showing an example in which the effect operation section 301 is not operated in the button effect B during execution of the rainbow effect. In the above, when the variation pattern at the time of winning to execute the rainbow effect at the time of winning is determined, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution period of the rainbow effect at the time of winning (timing t1 to t10), among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LED 10 of the door frame 3 14) is continued without ending, even when the performance operation part 301 is not operated, the rainbow performance is finished after waiting for the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow performance at the time of winning to elapse. In addition, when the variation pattern for executing the rainbow effect at the time of failure is determined, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the execution period of the rainbow effect at the time of failure (timing t1 to t10), among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3). While the rainbow performance using is ended, when the performance operation part 301 is desired to be operated, the rainbow performance is finished after waiting for the execution period of the rainbow performance at the time of failure (timings t1 to t10) to pass. That is, when the performance operation part 301 is not operated during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow performance, the rainbow performance is finished after waiting for the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow performance to pass, so that it is impossible to recognize whether the rainbow performance was the rainbow performance at the time of winning or the rainbow performance at the time of loss at the time of the completion of the rainbow performance.

In this regard, in this example, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect when failing, without operating the effect operation unit 301, after the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect when failing has passed, the effect display device 1600 notifies that the executed rainbow effect is the rainbow effect when failing, and displays a warning message when failing corresponding to the rainbow effect when failing (for example, "This rainbow is a fake, so don't complain to the clerk"). do. In this way, after the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow performance at the time of winning has passed without operating the performance operation part 301, by notifying that the rainbow performance being executed is the rainbow performance at the time of winning, it is not misidentified as the rainbow performance at the time of winning. In addition, since the rainbow performance is executed as a high-expectation performance that suggests a high probability of winning, the player's dissatisfaction may be directed to the outside (hall staff) only by notifying that it is a rainbow performance at the time of failure.

As described above, after the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of failure has passed without operating the effect operation unit 301, the effect display device 1600 notifies that the rainbow effect being executed is the rainbow effect at the time of failure, and displays a warning message for the time of failure corresponding to the rainbow effect at the time of failure (for example, "This rainbow is a fake, so don't complain to the clerk"). The number of colors is less than the number of colors (seven colors in this example). As a result, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of failure, the motivation to play is improved by the number of colors constituting the rainbow light emission mode, but after the execution of the rainbow performance at the time of failure, the improved motivation to play can be reduced by displaying with the number of colors that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (seven colors in this example), and the display of a warning message or the like at the time of failure can be effectively notified. In the execution period of the rainbow effect (timings t1 to t10), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and a rainbow mode effect image is displayed by displaying each of the plurality of display areas in different display colors, and after the rainbow effect execution period (timings t1 to t10) has passed, the rainbow mode effect image is erased.

In this example, after the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of failure has elapsed without operating the effect operation unit 301, the effect display device 1600 notifies that the rainbow effect being executed is the rainbow effect at the time of failure, and also displays a warning message at the time of failure corresponding to the rainbow effect at the time of failure (for example, "This rainbow is a fake, so don't complain to the clerk"). When the unit 301 is operated, it is possible to erase the display of the warning message or the like at the time of detachment. As a result, during the display of a warning message or the like at the time of loss, the state of declining desire to play continues, but such a state can be terminated by operating the performance operation part 301 according to the player's will. In this example, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the display of the caution message, etc., for the time of detachment, the display of the caution message, etc., for the time of detachment is erased. A display such as a message calling attention to the time may be configured to be difficult or invisible to the player. Even with such a configuration, by operating the performance operation part 301 according to the player's will, the display of a warning message or the like at the time of detachment can be made invisible or invisible to the player, and the state in which the desire to play is reduced can be terminated.

On the other hand, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow performance at the time of winning, regardless of whether or not the performance operation part 301 is operated, after the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow performance at the time of winning has passed, display ("This rainbow is a win!") is executed to notify that the variable display of the pattern being executed will be a win. Then, after a predetermined period has passed, a display for preventing excessive immersion in the game (for example, ``This rainbow is a win, but don't get addicted'') is executed as an attention calling message at the time of winning corresponding to the rainbow performance at the time of winning. As a result, the rainbow effect is executed as a high-expectation effect suggesting that the possibility of winning is high, and by notifying that the rainbow effect is the rainbow effect at the time of winning, a state occurs in which the player's willingness to play is excessively increased. It is possible to prevent excessive immersion in the game.

As described above, after the execution of the rainbow performance at the time of winning, the performance display device 1600 executes the display of notifying the attention calling message at the time of winning, whereas after the execution of the rainbow performance at the time of winning, the performance display device 1600 executes the display of notifying the attention calling message at the time of winning. However, immediately after the execution of the rainbow performance at the time of winning, the display of notifying the attention calling message at the time of winning is executed immediately after that, whereas after the execution of the rainbow performance at the time of winning, the display of notifying that the fluctuation display of the pattern being executed will be a win is executed, and then the display of notifying the attention calling message at the time of winning is executed. As a result, if the display of notifying the attention-calling message at the winning time is executed immediately after the execution of the rainbow performance at the winning time, the reverberation for the fact that the rainbow performance was the rainbow performance at the winning time cannot be enjoyed.

Further, in this example, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the display of the caution message at the time of winning, the effect display device 1600 displays a predetermined display object (display corresponding to the operation of the effect operation unit 301) in front of the display of the caution message at the time of winning, and hides at least a part of the display of the caution message at the time of winning, thereby making the display of the caution message at the time of winning difficult or invisible to the player. Good. With such a configuration, the state in which the player's willingness to play is excessively increased during the display of the warning message or the like at the time of winning is ended, but the display of the warning message or the like at the time of winning can be made difficult or invisible to the player by operating the performance operation unit 301 according to the player's will, so that such a state does not continue excessively.

In this example, the case where the button effect B is executed while the rainbow effect is being executed has been described. Similarly, in the case of executing the button effect A or the button effect C, after the rainbow effect execution period (timings t1 to t10) has elapsed without operating the effect operation unit 301 during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect at the time of failure, the effect display device 1600 may be configured to display a warning message for notifying the attention at the time of failure corresponding to the rainbow effect at the time of failure. Good.

Further, in this example, regardless of whether or not the performance operation unit 301 is operated during the execution period of the rainbow effect at the time of winning (timings t1 to t10), after the execution period of the rainbow effect at the time of winning (timings t1 to t10) has passed, after the execution of the display notifying that the fluctuation display of the symbol being executed will be a win, the display of notifying the attention calling message at the time of winning corresponding to the rainbow performance at the time of winning is executed. It is preferable that the execution period of the display for notifying the warning message at the time of disconnection is longer than the execution period of the display. Thus, after the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow performance at the time of failure has passed without operating the performance operation part 301, by notifying the attention calling message at the time of failure, it is possible to recognize that the rainbow performance being executed is the rainbow performance at the time of failure, but such recognition can be ensured by lengthening the execution period of the display for notifying the warning message at the time of failure. In addition, it is preferable that the execution period of the display for notifying the attention calling message at the time of winning and the execution period of the display for notifying the attention calling message at the time of losing are shorter than the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow performance to be executed before. As a result, the state in which the player's willingness to play is reduced continues during the display of the alerting message at the time of winning and the alerting message at the time of loss, but by shortening the execution period for displaying these alerting messages, the state in which the willingness to play is excessively reduced can be prevented from continuing.

[Simulated rainbow effect]
There are many effects (such as the above-mentioned rainbow effect) that a player rarely encounters and cannot experience in the effects performed during the variable display of patterns, and in recent years, the operation of the game machine has been lowered without the players experiencing the fun of these effects. Therefore, in this embodiment, as a specific period during which the player can recognize such an effect, an "effect introduction period" is generated during the standby state during non-variable display of symbols. In the performance introduction period of the present embodiment, in addition to the model introduction such as the specs of the pachinko machine 1, a simulated rainbow performance of lighting up in a rainbow light emission mode simulating the rainbow performance at the time of winning is executed even though the patterns are being displayed in a non-variable manner. This performance introduction period is started when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses of a state in which the patterns are not variably displayed after the completion of the variable display of the patterns, and the simulated rainbow performance is executed at a predetermined time of the period.

In this example, during the variable display of the symbols, it is possible to execute a performance suggesting a set value of 6 as the aforementioned suggestive performance A, and the rainbow performance and the simulated rainbow performance at the time of winning are the same in that the light-emitting performance of lighting up in the rainbow light-emitting mode is executed. In other words, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning or the simulated rainbow effect is executed, in conjunction with the display of the effect display device 1600, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to light up in the rainbow luminescence mode in the same way as when the suggestive effect A is executed. Specifically, when it is time to execute the rainbow effect at the time of winning, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of decorative patterns reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), LEDs 1 and 2 of the game board 5 are set to "red", LEDs 3 to 4 of the game board 5 are set to "purple", LEDs 5 to 6 of the door frame top unit 450 are set to "blue", LEDs 7 of the door frame top unit 450 and LED 8 of the door frame 3 are set to "green", LED 9 of the door frame 3, and so on. The LED 10 of the door frame 3 is "orange", the LEDs 11-12 of the door frame 3 are "yellow", and the LEDs 13-14 of the door frame 3 are "white". Further, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, when the elapsed time from the start of the effect introduction period reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), LEDs 1 and 2 of the game board 5 are set to "red", LEDs 3 to 4 of the game board 5 are set to "purple", LEDs 5 to 6 of the door frame top unit 450 are set to "blue", LED 7 of the door frame top unit 450 and LED 8 of the door frame 3 are set to "green", LED 9 of the door frame 3 and LED 10 of the door frame 3. LEDs 11-12 of the door frame 3 are "orange", LEDs 13-14 of the door frame 3 are "white". That is, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are caused to emit light of different colors for each two groups.

As for LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, the LEDs emitting "red" light are "purple", the "purple" light emitting LEDs are "green", and the "green" light emitting LEDs are "orange" and "orange" at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.1 seconds). The LED is changed to "yellow", the LED emitting "yellow" is changed to "white", and the LED emitting "white" is changed to "red". In this way, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are changed in a predetermined order of "red→purple→blue→green→orange→yellow→white→red" every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds), and such a rule is applied until timing t10 (for example, 10 seconds). I'm trying to repeat the changes.

In this way, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are controlled so as to sequentially switch their emission colors to a plurality of emission colors in a short unit emission time, so that these LEDs can be visually recognized as if they are emitting light in a rainbow emission mode, and an impactful emission effect can be executed. Further, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are controlled in conjunction with the LEDs 1 to 14 so that the LEDs 1 to 14 are caused to emit light in a plurality of colors so that the LEDs 1 to 14 emit light in different light colors for each two groups, and furthermore, the light emission colors are switched in a short time, whereby a light emission performance with more impact than usual can be executed.

In this example, as light emission in the rainbow light emission mode, seven colors are caused to appear at the same time using a plurality of LEDs, and the respective emission colors are switched regularly.

Further, the display contents displayed on the effect display device 1600 may differ between when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed and when the simulated rainbow effect is executed. For example, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed, the patterns are displayed in parallel, but when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the patterns may not be displayed in parallel. As a result, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, there is no possibility of erroneously recognizing that the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed. Note that the display content displayed on the effect display device 1600 is not limited to this, and for example, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, a display such as "simulating" may be executed.

In addition, the rainbow effect and the simulated rainbow effect at the time of winning are the same in that the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, but it is preferable to provide a control program for another effect instead of the control program for the same effect, and to execute these control programs. That is, the control program for the rainbow effect at the time of winning and the control program for the simulated rainbow effect are stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510 as control programs for different effects. Thus, even if an abnormality occurs in one of the control program for the rainbow performance at the time of winning and the control program for the simulated rainbow performance, the control program can be normally executed for the other, and non-execution of the performance at the time of occurrence of the abnormality can be minimized.

In this way, by executing the simulated rainbow performance lighting up in a rainbow light-emitting mode simulating the rainbow performance at the time of winning even during the standby state during the non-variation display of the patterns, the player can experience the rainbow performance that the player rarely encounters and experiences during the standby state during the non-variation display of the patterns, and the player can be made aware that the rainbow performance at the time of the winning can be executed during the variable display of the patterns.

(Regarding the display of a warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" after the simulated rainbow effect ends)
When the simulated rainbow effect is performed during the effect introduction period as described above, there is a risk that the player's desire to play will be excessively heightened beyond the introduction of the effect, such as "I will play the game until I encounter that effect", and the player will become "addicted" to the game. Therefore, in this example, the following special processing is performed in order to prevent the simulated rainbow effect from causing the player to become “addicted” to the game.

FIG. 225 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the immersion prevention display is executed after execution of the simulated rainbow effect. In this example, the rainbow performance at the time of winning is executed as the winning determination performance for determining the winning during the variable display of the patterns, but any one of the rainbow performances A to C at the time of winning is executed as the rainbow performance at the time of winning. In addition, while the simulated rainbow effect is being executed during the performance introduction period during which the symbols are displayed in a non-variable manner, any one of the simulated rainbow effects A to C is executed as the simulated rainbow effect. Each of the rainbow effects A to C at the time of winning and each of the simulated rainbow effects A to C is the same in that the rainbow effect lighting is performed using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 during the execution period of the rainbow effect. The seven numbered display bodies in the upper front decorative body 3310 differ in whether or not they are lit in a rainbow luminous mode in which they emit light of different luminous colors. As described above in detail, the back top front effect unit 3300 attached to the game board 5 includes a back top front decoration body 3310 that is long in the left and right direction when viewed from the front, a back top front decoration board (not shown) provided behind the back top front decoration body 3310 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back top front lifting unit (not shown) that raises and lowers the back top front decoration body 3310 (not shown). By moving the top front decoration 3310 from the initial position to the appearance position, the back top front decoration 3310 can appear on the front side of the performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加

Specifically, in the rainbow performance A at the time of winning and the simulated rainbow performance A, during the execution period of the rainbow performance (timings t1 to t10), the front upper back decoration body 3310 is maintained at the initial position without moving from the initial position to the appearance position, and the front upper back decoration body 3310 is prevented from lighting in the rainbow luminescence mode by using each of seven numbered display bodies. Further, in the rainbow performance B at the time of winning and the simulated rainbow performance B, during the execution period of the rainbow performance (timings t1 to t10), the front upper back decoration body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position, and the front upper back decoration body 3310 is lit in the rainbow luminescence mode by using each of seven numbered display bodies. Further, in the rainbow performance C at the time of winning and the simulated rainbow performance C, during the execution period of the rainbow performance (timings t1 to t10), the front upper back decoration body 3310 is maintained at the initial position without moving from the initial position to the appearance position, and the front upper back decoration body 3310 is lit in the rainbow luminous mode by using each of seven numbered display bodies.

In this example, after the completion of the variable display of symbols, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in which the symbols are not variably displayed, the effect introduction period is started. During the effect introduction period, the effect display device 1600 is used to display (movie) the model introduction of the pachinko machine 1, etc., and at the end stage, the logo of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. At this time, during the display of the logo of the model title of the pachinko machine 1, one of the simulated rainbow performances A to C is executed, and during the execution period of the simulated rainbow performances A to C, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to perform the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. While the logo of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is being displayed, a rainbow effect image is displayed for the logo of the model title. That is, the display of the logo of the model title is divided into a plurality of display areas, and a rainbow effect image is displayed in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color. In such a rainbow effect image, the display colors displayed in each of the plurality of display areas are changed in a predetermined order of ``red→purple→blue→green→orange→yellow→white→red” every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second), and such regular changes are repeated until timing t10 is reached (for example, 5 seconds).

Next, when the logo display of the model title ends, one of the simulated rainbow effects A to C being executed is ended, and after the logo display of the model title ends, the logo of the manufacturer that manufactured the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and thereafter, a warning message regarding ``prevention of addiction'' (for example, ``Pachinko is something to be enjoyed moderately. . Then, by executing the display of a warning message regarding "prevention of addiction", the effect introduction period is terminated. Here, when the simulated rainbow performances A to C are executed, since the same performances as the rainbow performances A to C at the time of winning are executed as the win confirmation performances in which the winning is confirmed, the player's willingness to play may be excessively increased. can be prevented from being excessively absorbed in the game.

As described above, in the simulated rainbow effect A, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effect A, the front upper back decoration 3310 is maintained at the initial position without moving from the initial position to the appearance position, and the front upper back decoration 3310 is prevented from lighting in the rainbow luminescence mode by using each of the seven numbered display bodies. Therefore, after execution of the simulated rainbow performance A, there is no need for an operation to return the front upper back decoration body 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position, and the period until the start of the display of the warning message regarding ``prevention of immersion'' is short. That is, after execution of the simulated rainbow effect A, the execution period of displaying the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 is short, and the start timing of displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is early.

On the other hand, in the simulated rainbow performance B, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow performance B, the front upper back decoration body 3310 moves from the initial position to the appearance position, and the front upper back decoration body 3310 is lit in a rainbow luminescence mode by using each of seven numbered display bodies. Here, after execution of the simulated rainbow performance B, an operation for returning the front upper back decoration 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position is required, and the operation for returning the front upper back decoration 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position is performed during the execution period of displaying the logo of the model title executed before the display of the warning message regarding ``prevention of immersion''. For this reason, after the simulated rainbow effect B is executed, it takes a long time to start displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction". That is, after execution of the simulated rainbow effect B, the execution period of displaying the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 is long, and the start timing of displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is late.

Further, in the simulated rainbow performance C, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow performance C, the back upper front decoration body 3310 is maintained at the initial position without moving from the initial position to the appearance position, and the back upper front decoration body 3310 is lit in a rainbow luminescence mode using each of seven numbered display bodies. Here, since the simulated rainbow effect C is the same as the simulated rainbow effect B in that each of the seven numbered display bodies in the back top front decoration body 3310 is used to light up in the rainbow light emitting mode, when the simulated rainbow effect C is executed, although the back top front decoration body 3310 is maintained at the initial position, attention is paid to whether the back top front decoration body 3310 moves from the initial position to the appearance position. For this reason, there is a possibility that attention is paid to the back upper front decoration body 3310 after execution of the simulated rainbow performance C, and if a warning message regarding ``prevention of immersion'' is displayed at an early timing, there is a possibility that the warning message about ``prevention of immersion'' will be overlooked. In this respect, after execution of the simulated rainbow effect C, it is not necessary to return the front upper back decorative body 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position during the execution period of displaying the logo of the model title, but the period until the start of the display of the warning message regarding ``prevention of immersion'' is long, as is the case after the execution of the simulated rainbow effect B. In other words, after execution of the simulated rainbow performance C, the execution period of displaying the logo of the maker of the pachinko machine 1 is long, and by delaying the start timing of displaying the warning message regarding "addiction prevention", the warning message regarding "addiction prevention" can be prevented from being overlooked.

In this example, in the simulated rainbow effects A to C, during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effects A to C, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to light up in a rainbow light emitting mode. In addition, in the simulated rainbow effect A, each of the seven numbered display bodies of the back upper front decoration 3310 is not lit in the rainbow light emission mode during the execution period of the simulated rainbow effect A (timings t1 to t10), whereas in the simulated rainbow effects B and C, each of the seven numbered display bodies of the back upper front decoration 3310 is used to light up in the rainbow light emission mode during the execution period of the simulated rainbow effects B and C (timings t1 to t10). That is, the simulated rainbow effects B and C are configured so that there are more members (light-emitting areas) involved in the light emitting effect that is lit in the rainbow light emitting mode than the simulated rainbow effect A. In the simulated rainbow effects B and C, the start timing of displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is later than in the simulated rainbow effect A. - 特許庁In this way, when the simulated rainbow performances B and C are executed, the start timing of displaying the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" to be executed thereafter is delayed, so that the state in which the desire to play is high due to the large number of members (light emitting areas) involved in the light emission performance lit in the rainbow light emission mode can be moderately entertained until the warning message is displayed.

In this example, in the simulated rainbow effect B, the front upper back decoration 3310 moves from the initial position to the appearance position during the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow effect B, but the distance that the front upper back decoration 3310 moves from the initial position as the appearance position can be changed in a plurality of stages. For this reason, after execution of the simulated rainbow effect B, since the movement distance for returning the upper back front decoration body 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position is different, the period until the start of the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersion" (execution period of the logo display of the model title) is made variable according to the movement distance. For example, in the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the simulated rainbow performance B, when the back upper front decoration body 3310 moves from the initial position as the appearance position is long, the period until the start of the display of the warning message regarding ``prevention of addiction'' is lengthened after the simulated rainbow performance B is performed. On the other hand, in simulated rainbow effect A, during the execution period of simulated rainbow effect A (timings t1 to t10), the front upper back decoration 3310 does not move from the initial position to the appearance position and is maintained at the initial position. Therefore, after the execution of simulated rainbow effect A, there is no need for an operation to return the front upper back decoration 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position, and the period until the warning message regarding "prevention of immersion" starts to be displayed (execution period of logo display of the model title). It is fixed.

In this example, the execution periods of the simulated rainbow effect A and the simulated rainbow effect B are the same, and the period of executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is the same. Further, as described above, after execution of the simulated rainbow effect B, the period until the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of immersion" (execution period of displaying the logo of the model title) is variable according to the moving distance of the back upper front decoration body 3310 to return from the appearance position to the initial position. Thus, even when the execution period of the simulated rainbow performance B is lengthened, by making the period until the start of the display of the warning message regarding "addiction prevention" (execution period of the logo display of the model title) variable, the completion timing of the series of performance introduction periods by the end of the display of the warning message regarding "addiction prevention" can be made as early as possible, and the execution period of the series of performance introduction periods can be prevented from becoming unnecessarily long.

In addition, in this example, after execution of the simulated rainbow performances A to C, the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is started after a predetermined period of time has passed. As a result, when the rainbow performances A to C at the time of winning are executed, since they are executed as winning fixed performances in which winning is determined, a state in which the player's willingness to play the game is excessively increased may occur, but by executing the display of a warning message regarding ``prevention of addiction'' after the execution of the rainbow performances A to C at the time of winning, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively absorbed in the game in subsequent games.

In the above, after the execution of the rainbow effects A to C at the time of winning, the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is executed, but it is preferable that the execution period of the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" after the execution of the simulated rainbow effects A to C is longer than the execution period of the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" after the execution of the rainbow effects A to C at the time of the win. As a result, when the simulated rainbow performances A to C are executed, the player's willingness to play may be excessively increased despite the fact that the performance is not fixed, but by lengthening the execution period of the display of the warning message concerning ``prevention of addiction,'' such a state in which the eagerness to play is excessively increased can be reliably reduced. In addition, it is preferable to configure the display execution period of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" to be shorter than the execution period (timings t1 to t10) of the rainbow effect executed before it. As a result, the state in which the player's desire to play is excessively increased is reduced during the display of the warning message about "prevention of addiction", but by shortening the execution period for displaying the warning message, it is possible to prevent excessive reduction of the player's desire to play.

(Regarding erasing the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" after the end of the simulated rainbow effect A)
In this example, in the simulated rainbow effect A, during the execution period of the simulated rainbow effect A (timings t1 to t10), the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to perform a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emission mode. For object 3310, each of the seven numbered indicators are used to prevent lighting in a rainbow-emitting manner. During the execution of the simulated rainbow performance A, the player's desire to play is not excessively improved compared to the simulated rainbow performances B and C, and after the simulated rainbow performance A is executed, the player does not feel the need to execute the display of a warning message regarding ``prevention of addiction''. Therefore, in this example, only after execution of the simulated rainbow performance A, when the performance operation part 301 is operated during the display of the attention calling message regarding "prevention of addiction", the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" can be erased.

FIG. 226 is a timing chart showing an example of erasing the immersion prevention display after execution of the simulated rainbow effect. As described above, after the simulated rainbow effect A is executed, the display of the attention-calling message on "prevention of addiction" is executed, but during the display of the attention-calling message on such "prevention of addiction", it is possible to erase the display of the attention-calling message on "prevention of addiction" by operating the effect operation unit 301. As a result, while the simulated rainbow performance A is being executed, the desire to play the game is enhanced by the execution of the light emitting performance lighting up in the rainbow light emission mode, but after the simulated rainbow performance A is executed, by executing the display of the warning message regarding the ``prevention of addiction'', the increased desire to play can be reduced, and the display of the warning message regarding the ``prevention of addiction'' can be effectively notified. In addition, during the display of the attention calling message regarding "prevention of addiction", the display of the attention calling message regarding "prevention of addiction" can be erased by operating the performance operation part 301 by the player's will, and the continuation of the state in which the desire to play is excessively reduced can be prevented.

On the other hand, in the simulated rainbow effect B, in the execution period of the simulated rainbow effect B (timing t1 to t10), LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to perform a light emission effect in which the front upper back decoration 3310 moves from the initial position to the appearance position. Each of the seven numbered indicators is used to light up in a rainbow luminescence mode. In other words, during execution of the simulated rainbow performance B, there are more members (light-emitting areas) involved in the light emitting performance lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode than in the simulated rainbow performance A, and the play motivation is excessively enhanced. Therefore, after execution of the simulated rainbow performance B, a warning message regarding ``prevention of addiction'' is displayed, but during the display of the warning message regarding ``prevention of addiction'', even if the performance operation part 301 is operated, the display of the warning message about ``prevention of addiction'' cannot be erased. As a result, after execution of the simulated rainbow performance B, regardless of whether or not the performance operation part 301 is operated, the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is executed for a predetermined period, so that the state in which the desire to play is excessively increased can be reliably reduced, and the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" can be effectively notified.

In this example, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" after execution of the simulated rainbow effect A, it is possible to erase the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction". It is possible to erase (not execute) the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of penetration". Thus, by operating the performance operation part 301 according to the will of the player before starting the display of the attention calling message on "addiction prevention", the display of the attention calling message on "addiction prevention" can be made non-display, and the occurrence of a state in which the player's willingness to play is reduced due to the display of the attention calling message on "addiction prevention" can be prevented in advance. Similarly, when the performance operation part 301 is operated during the execution of the simulated rainbow performance A, it is possible to erase (not execute) the display of the warning message regarding ``prevention of immersion'' after the execution of the simulated rainbow performance A.例文帳に追加Even with such a configuration, the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" can be hidden by operating the effect operation part 301 according to the player's will before the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is started, and the occurrence of a state in which the player's motivation to play is reduced due to the display of the message that calls attention regarding "prevention of addiction" can be prevented in advance.

(Regarding execution restrictions for simulated rainbow effects)
In this example, during execution of the performance introducing period during non-variable display of the pattern, light emission performance lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed as the simulated rainbow performances A to C, and after the simulated rainbow performances A to C are executed, a warning message regarding ``prevention of immersion'' is displayed. During the execution of such simulated rainbow performances A to C, since the player's willingness to play is improved, there is a danger of executing the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode for the player who is easily absorbed in the game. Therefore, in this example, a predetermined operating section that can be operated by the player is newly provided in addition to the performance operating section 301, and by restricting the execution of the simulated rainbow presentations A to C when a specific action is detected in the predetermined operating section, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming more motivated to play.

FIG. 227 is a timing chart showing an example of limiting the execution of the simulated rainbow effect. First, on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, an "addiction prevention switch" (not shown) that can be operated by the player is provided. The anti-immersion switch adopts a knock type that is configured to maintain the depressed position when pushed all the way down the first time, and return to the initial position when pushed all the way down the second time. Then, when the immersion prevention switch is operated to be maintained at the depressed position and the specific action A is detected, when the execution timing of the simulated rainbow performances A to C arrives, the simulated rainbow performances A to C are not executed, and the lighting performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 is restricted. In addition, when the specific action A is not detected, after the simulated rainbow effect A is executed, the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is executed, but when the specific action A is detected, the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is restricted so as not to be displayed. Further, when the specific action A is detected, the game is controlled to a state in which the game cannot be played, for example, a state in which the game ball B is not shot from the ball shooting device 540 even if the handle 195 is operated, or a state in which the variable display of the pattern is not started even if the game ball B enters various ball entrances such as the first start opening 2004.例文帳に追加

The immersion prevention switch is provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and can be operated by the player, but is assumed to be operated by the player's family or persons involved in the hall. Then, when the player's family or hall officials judge that the player is absorbed in the game, the player's family or hall officials may operate the addiction prevention switch so as to stop the game. Here, during the execution of the simulated rainbow performances A to C, the desire to play the game is enhanced by the execution of the light emitting performance lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode, but by operating the addiction prevention switch by the player's family or hall officials, the simulated rainbow performances A to C are not executed, and the player can be prevented from being absorbed in the game. In addition, since the purpose is to stop the game in the first place when the player's family member or a person related to the hall operates the addiction prevention switch, not only the simulated rainbow performances A to C are not executed, but also the display of the warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" after the simulated rainbow performances A to C is not executed.

Further, on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the "addiction prevention switch", an "addiction prevention switch" (not shown) that can be operated by the player is provided. Similar to the immersion prevention switch, the immersion prevention switch uses a knock type that is configured to maintain the depressed position when pushed all the way down the first time, and return to the initial position when pushed all the way down the second time. Then, when specific action B is detected by operating the addiction prevention switch to maintain it at the depressed position, similar to the case where specific action A is detected by operating the addiction prevention switch to maintain it at the depressed position, when the execution timing of simulated rainbow productions A to C arrives, simulated rainbow productions A to C are not executed, LEDs 1 to 4 of game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 1 of door frame 3. 4 is used to limit the execution of the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode. However, when specific action B is detected by operating the addiction prevention switch to maintain it at the depressed position, unlike the case where specific action A is detected by operating the addiction prevention switch to maintain it at the depressed position, a warning message regarding "prevention of addiction" is displayed.

The addiction prevention switch is provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and is assumed to be operated by a player. When the player fears that he or she will become addicted to the game, the player himself/herself operates the addiction prevention switch so as not to generate an effect that causes the player to become addicted to the game. Here, while the simulated rainbow performances A to C are being executed, the player's desire to play the game is enhanced by the execution of the light emitting performance lighting up in the rainbow light emitting mode, but by operating the addiction prevention switch by the player himself/herself, the simulated rainbow performances A to C are not executed, and the player's immersion in the game can be prevented in advance. In addition, while the simulated rainbow performances A to C are not executed, the display of the attention calling message regarding the ``prevention of addiction'' after the execution of the simulated rainbow performances A to C is executed, thereby preventing the player from becoming addicted to the game due to the display of the attention calling message regarding the ``prevention of addiction''.

In this example, a "strong immersion prevention switch" and a "weak immersion prevention switch" are provided as "immersion prevention switches" for restricting execution of the simulated rainbow effects A to C. The strong immersion prevention switch is maintained at the depressed position when it is pushed all the way down for the first time, and in a state where the simulated rainbow performances A to C are restricted so as not to be executed, even if it is returned to the initial position by being pushed all the way down for the second time, the state in which the simulated rainbow performances A to C are restricted not to be executed is not released and continues unless the power is turned on again. As a result, even if the player operates the addiction prevention switch after the family member of the player or a person related to the hall operates the addiction prevention switch, the simulated rainbow performances A to C are not executed and the state in which the game cannot be played continues, so that the game can be surely stopped. On the other hand, the weak penetration prevention switch is maintained at the depressed position when it is pushed all the way to the back for the first time, and in a state in which it is restricted not to execute the simulated rainbow performances A to C, when it is returned to the initial position by being pushed all the way to the back for the second time, the restricted state to prevent the simulated rainbow performances A to C from being executed can be released.

In addition, the immersion prevention switch is provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and can be operated not only by the player's family members and persons involved in the hall, but also by the player. As a result, even when the player is seated on the pachinko machine 1, the player's family member or a person involved in the hall can detect the specific action A by operating a remote control or the like from a position away from the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加Further, when the addiction prevention switch is not provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 but is provided on a remote controller or the like, the player cannot arbitrarily operate the addiction prevention switch, so that the player cannot cancel the state in which the simulated rainbow performances A to C are restricted so as to stop the game.

Also, in this example, the ``weak immersion prevention switch'' and the ``immersion prevention switch'' are maintained at the depressed position the first time they are pushed all the way to the back, and in a state in which the simulated rainbow effects A to C are restricted so as not to be executed, when they are returned to the initial position by being pushed all the way back for the second time, the restricted state is not released immediately, and the restricted state is released after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed. In other words, the state in which the simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed continues until the predetermined period elapses after the key is pushed all the way down for the second time to return to the initial position. Thus, immediately before the execution timing of the simulated rainbow performances A to C, even if the player is returned to the initial position by pressing all the way to the back for the second time, the simulated rainbow performances A to C are not executed, and the player can be effectively prevented from becoming absorbed in the game.

In addition, while the "addiction prevention switch" or "addiction prevention switch" is being operated (unreleased state), simulated rainbow effects A to C are not executed, and LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to limit the execution of the lighting effects in the rainbow light emission mode. , LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, at least part of which are lit in a single color to inform the outside that the ``addiction prevention switch'' or ``addiction prevention switch'' is being operated. Further, for each type of ``addiction prevention switch'' or ``addiction prevention switch'', the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 may be configured to light up at least a part. Thus, it is possible to easily grasp from the outside that the ``addiction prevention switch'' or the ``addiction prevention switch'' is being operated, and that the simulated rainbow performances A to C are restricted so as not to be executed.

[Confirmation of rainbow emission]
In the present embodiment, a rainbow performance at the time of winning (light emitting performance of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode) is executed as a winning determination performance for determining the winning during variable display of patterns, but if the rainbow performance at the time of winning is not appropriately executed due to some trouble, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be lowered. In particular, since the appearance rate of the rainbow effect at the time of winning is extremely low, it has been difficult even in halls, factories, etc. to confirm whether or not the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode can be normally executed. Therefore, in this example, it is made possible to confirm the rainbow light emitting mode at a timing different from the rainbow effect at the time of winning. Concretely, during execution of the performance introduction period during non-variable display of the pattern, as the simulated rainbow performance, the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed in the same way as the rainbow performance at the time of winning, so that whether the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed can be easily confirmed in a hall, a factory, or the like. The performance introduction period is a performance that is started when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the variable display of the symbols is finished, and a simulated rainbow performance is executed in addition to the introduction of the model of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加In this example, the simulated rainbow effect is the same as the rainbow effect at the time of winning in that the rainbow effect is performed by using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 during the execution period of the rainbow effect. .

In this example, during the variable display of the symbols, it is possible to execute a performance suggesting a set value of 6 as the aforementioned suggestive performance A, and the rainbow performance and the simulated rainbow performance at the time of winning are the same in that the light-emitting performance of lighting up in the rainbow light-emitting mode is executed. In other words, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning or the simulated rainbow effect is executed, in conjunction with the display of the effect display device 1600, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to light up in the rainbow luminescence mode in the same way as when the suggestive effect A is executed. Specifically, when it is time to execute the rainbow effect at the time of winning, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of decorative patterns reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), LEDs 1 and 2 of the game board 5 are set to "red", LEDs 3 to 4 of the game board 5 are set to "purple", LEDs 5 to 6 of the door frame top unit 450 are set to "blue", LEDs 7 of the door frame top unit 450 and LED 8 of the door frame 3 are set to "green", LED 9 of the door frame 3, and so on. The LED 10 of the door frame 3 is "orange", the LEDs 11-12 of the door frame 3 are "yellow", and the LEDs 13-14 of the door frame 3 are "white". Further, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, when the elapsed time from the start of the effect introduction period reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), LEDs 1 and 2 of the game board 5 are set to "red", LEDs 3 to 4 of the game board 5 are set to "purple", LEDs 5 to 6 of the door frame top unit 450 are set to "blue", LED 7 of the door frame top unit 450 and LED 8 of the door frame 3 are set to "green", LED 9 of the door frame 3 and LED 10 of the door frame 3. LEDs 11-12 of the door frame 3 are "orange", LEDs 13-14 of the door frame 3 are "white". That is, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are caused to emit light of different colors for each two groups.

As for the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, the LEDs emitting "red" light are "purple", the "purple" light emitting LEDs are "green", and the "green" light emitting LEDs are "orange" and "orange" at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.1 seconds). The LED is changed to "yellow", the LED emitting "yellow" is changed to "white", and the LED emitting "white" is changed to "red". In this way, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are changed in a predetermined order of "red→purple→blue→green→orange→yellow→white→red" every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds), and such a rule is applied until the timing t10 (for example, 10 seconds). I'm trying to repeat the changes.

In this example, not only the rainbow performance at the time of winning is executed during the variable display of the patterns, but also during the execution of the performance introduction period during the non-variable display of the patterns, as the simulated rainbow performance, the lighting performance of lighting in the same rainbow light-emitting mode as the rainbow performance at the time of winning is executed. Thus, when executing the simulated rainbow effect, it can be confirmed whether or not the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode can be normally executed using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. Further, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, by observing the state in which the light emission colors of the LEDs are changed in a predetermined order of "red→purple→blue→green→orange→yellow→white→red" as needed, it is possible to confirm whether or not each of the LEDs 1 to 14 can normally emit light in each of the emission colors constituting the rainbow light emission mode, and it is possible to easily find out whether an abnormality has occurred in the light emission of any of the LEDs.

In addition, in the rainbow effect at the time of winning, if there is no abnormality in the light emission of any of the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, each light emission color is controlled to sequentially switch to a plurality of light emission colors in a short unit light emission time. A certain lighting effect can be executed. In addition, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are controlled by interlocking the LEDs 1 to 14 so that the LEDs 1 to 14 are caused to emit light in a plurality of colors so that the LEDs 1 to 14 emit light in different light colors for each of the two groups, and the light emission colors are switched in a short period of time, so that the light emission performance with more impact than usual can be executed.

In this example, as light emission in the rainbow light emission mode, seven colors are emitted at the same time using a plurality of LEDs, and the respective emission colors are regularly switched.

Further, the display contents displayed on the effect display device 1600 may differ between when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed and when the simulated rainbow effect is executed. For example, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed, the patterns are displayed in parallel, but when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the patterns may not be displayed in parallel. As a result, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, there is no possibility of erroneously recognizing that the rainbow effect at the time of winning is being executed. Note that the display content displayed on the effect display device 1600 is not limited to this, and for example, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, a display such as "simulating" may be executed.

In addition, the rainbow effect and the simulated rainbow effect at the time of winning are the same in that the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, but it is preferable to provide a control program for another effect instead of the control program for the same effect, and to execute these control programs. That is, the control program for the rainbow effect at the time of winning and the control program for the simulated rainbow effect are stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510 as control programs for different effects. Thus, even if an abnormality occurs in one of the control program for the rainbow performance at the time of winning and the control program for the simulated rainbow performance, the control program can be normally executed for the other, and non-execution of the performance at the time of occurrence of the abnormality can be minimized.

FIG. 228 is a timing chart showing an example of the case where LED light emission confirmation is performed during execution of the simulated rainbow effect. In this example, for the LEDs 1-4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5-7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8-9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3, the light emission colors of the LEDs in each of the two groups are changed in a predetermined order of "red→purple→blue→green→orange→yellow→white→red" every predetermined period. On the other hand, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is started so that the light emission color of the LED can be switched at a speed slower than the normal speed (for example, 1 second). In other words, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is started so that the intervals at which the light emission colors of the LEDs are switched are longer than in the rainbow effect at the time of winning. After the start of the simulated rainbow performance, the luminescent colors of the LEDs are switched, and after at least all the luminescent colors constituting the rainbow luminescent mode appear for each of the LEDs 1 to 14, the luminescent performance of lighting in the rainbow luminescent mode is performed so that the luminescent colors of the LEDs are switched at a normal speed (for example, 0.1 second) as in the case of the rainbow performance at the time of winning. In this way, at the start of the simulated rainbow presentation, since the intervals at which the luminescent colors of the LEDs are switched are long, it is possible to slowly confirm whether each of the LEDs 1 to 14 can normally emit light in each of the luminescent colors constituting the rainbow light emission mode, and easily find out whether there is an abnormality in the light emission of any of the LEDs. In addition, after the start of the simulated rainbow effect, by returning the interval at which the luminescent color of the LED is switched to the normal speed, it can be confirmed that the luminescent color of the LED can be switched at the normal speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) like the rainbow effect at the time of winning.

As described above in detail, the effect introduction period is started when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in which the symbols are not variably displayed after completion of the variable display of the symbols (may be after the power is turned on). During the effect introduction period, the effect display device 1600 is used to display (movie) the model introduction of the pachinko machine 1, etc., and at the end stage, the logo of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. At this time, while the logo of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 is being displayed, the simulated rainbow performance is executed, and during the execution period of the simulated rainbow performance, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to perform light emission performance lighting in a rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, during execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the effect display device 1600 does not display the logo of the model title of the pachinko machine 1 . As a result, when executing the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode, it is possible to grasp whether or not the rainbow performance being executed is a simulated rainbow performance by visually checking whether the logo display of the model title of the Pachinko machine 1 is being executed in the performance display device 1600, and furthermore, it is possible to grasp that the performance is for confirming whether or not an abnormality occurs in the light emission of the LEDs.

In this example, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the effect image in the rainbow mode is displayed for the effect image (for example, background image) displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 and the effect image (for example, effect image of characters, items, etc.) displayed in part of the display area of the effect display device 1600. On the other hand, during execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the effect display device 1600 is configured not to display the rainbow mode effect image for the model title logo display, background image, characters, items, and the like. As a result, when executing the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the rainbow performance being executed is a simulated rainbow performance by visually recognizing whether or not the performance image of the rainbow mode is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and furthermore, it is possible to easily grasp that the performance is for confirming whether or not there is an abnormality in the light emission of the LEDs.

Also, in this example, during the execution of the rainbow performance at the time of winning, the back top front decoration body 3310 is allowed to move from the initial position to the appearing position, and the back top front decoration body 3310 is lit in the rainbow luminescence mode by using each of the seven numbered display bodies. On the other hand, during the execution of the simulated rainbow performance, the back top front decoration 3310 is maintained at the initial position without moving from the initial position to the appearance position, and the back top front decoration 3310 is prevented from lighting in the rainbow luminescence mode by using each of seven numbered display bodies. As described above in detail, the back top front effect unit 3300 attached to the game board 5 includes a back top front decoration body 3310 that is long in the left and right direction when viewed from the front, a back top front decoration board (not shown) provided behind the back top front decoration body 3310 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back top front lifting unit (not shown) that raises and lowers the back top front decoration body 3310 (not shown). By moving the top front decoration 3310 from the initial position to the appearance position, the back top front decoration 3310 can appear on the front side of the performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加Thus, when executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the rainbow effect being executed is a simulated rainbow effect by visually confirming whether or not the upper front decorative body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearing position and whether or not the seven numbered display bodies of the upper front decorative body 3310 are lighted in the rainbow light emitting mode in which the seven numbered display bodies in the upper front decorative body 3310 are lighted in different light colors, and in turn, the effect for confirming whether there is an abnormality in the light emission of the LED. can grasp.

Thus, during execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning or the simulated rainbow effect, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are the same in that the light emitting effect is executed in the rainbow light emitting mode. and whether or not the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decoration body 3310 are lit in a rainbow light emission mode in which each of the seven numbered display bodies emits light of different luminescent colors. In other words, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the effect is executed with imperfect effect contents so that part of the effect contents executed in the rainbow effect at the time of winning is missing. As a result, when executing the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the rainbow performance being executed is a simulated rainbow performance by visually confirming whether or not the performance is being executed with incomplete performance contents, and furthermore, it is possible to easily grasp that the performance is for confirming whether or not an abnormality occurs in the light emission of the LEDs. In addition, when executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to light up in the rainbow light emission mode. The performance is more interesting than the simulated rainbow performance, and the performance attracts the player's attention.

It should be noted that the above description is the same in that, during execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning or the simulated rainbow effect, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to perform the light emitting effect in which the rainbow light emitting mode is lit. 7. Some of the LEDs 8-9 of the effect operation unit 300 and the LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3 may be configured so as not to light up. With such a configuration, during execution of the simulated rainbow performance, a part of the luminescent colors constituting the rainbow light emission mode is lacking, and light is emitted in a mode in which the rainbow light emission mode is not established, so that the visual difference becomes clear and it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the rainbow performance being executed is the simulated rainbow performance.

As described above in detail, the plate unit 200 is provided with a light amount adjustment button 228 that can be operated by the player on the right side of the effect operation section 301 in the effect operation unit 300 . As for the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 can be adjusted step by step by performing a light amount adjustment operation using the light amount adjustment button 228. For example, it is possible to adjust the level of the light amount of the LED from 1 (minimum light amount)→2→3→4→5 (maximum light amount), and the light amount of the LED increases as the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated upward to increase the stage, and the LED light amount decreases as the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated downward to decrease the stage. As for the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations, it is possible to adjust the amount of light both during the pattern change and during the non-change.

Regarding the above, during execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning or the simulated rainbow effect, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, at least the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) can be adjusted. Thus, during the execution of the simulated rainbow performance, it is possible to not only confirm whether or not the light emitting performance of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode can be normally performed by using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, but also whether or not each of the LEDs 1 to 14 can normally adjust the light quantity.

In this example, at least during execution of the simulated rainbow effect, among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) are capable of adjusting the light amount. The adjustment of the amount of light is made impossible, and the state of emitting light with a constant amount of light is maintained at all times. In other words, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated during execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the light amount of the LED whose light amount is variable (the LED which constitutes the rainbow light emission mode) changes relative to the LED whose light amount is unchanged (the LED which does not constitute the rainbow light emission mode). As a result, when the light quantity adjusting button 228 is operated during execution of the simulated rainbow presentation, it can be easily confirmed whether or not the light quantities of the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode can be normally adjusted. It should be noted that the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode cannot be adjusted in light quantity, and not only are they always maintained in a state of emitting light with a constant light quantity, but also the color of the emitted light is preferably maintained. As a result, during execution of the simulated rainbow presentation, attention is not paid to LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode, and attention can be made to confirm whether or not the light emission colors of the respective LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode are normally switched.

On the other hand, even during execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) can adjust the light amount. Although the adjustment of the light quantity is made impossible and the light is always emitted with a constant light quantity when the light is emitted, it is not necessary to maintain the light emission state, for example, it is set to a blinking state so as not to lose the decorativeness during the variable display of the pattern. As in the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, it is preferable that the LEDs (the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode are not allowed to adjust the light quantity, and that they not only emit light with a constant light quantity but also maintain the color of the emitted light. Thus, during the execution of the rainbow performance at the time of winning, attention can be paid to the LEDs which do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode, and the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed for the LEDs which constitute the rainbow light emission mode.

In addition, in this example, during the execution of the simulated rainbow performance, it is confirmed whether or not the lighting performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed, but when the performance operation part 301 is operated during the execution of the simulated rainbow performance, the simulated rainbow performance can be ended. Specifically, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated during execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the rainbow effect using the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) among the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 that constitute the rainbow effect is finished, and the LEDs that constitute the rainbow effect are stopped from emitting light in the rainbow light emission mode. It is designed to switch to non-light emission or monochromatic light emission. Thus, when manufacturing is confirmed in a factory, the simulated rainbow effect is executed, and after confirming whether or not the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed, the simulated rainbow effect can be terminated at an arbitrary timing by operating the effect operation part 301 at an arbitrary timing during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, and the execution of the unnecessary rainbow effect after the confirmation can be prevented from affecting other manufacturing confirmations. After the simulated rainbow performance is finished, the completion of the simulated rainbow performance can be clearly notified by switching the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emission mode from light emission in the rainbow light emission mode to non-light emission or to single color light emission.

On the other hand, during execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, even if the effect operation unit 301 is operated, the rainbow effect at the time of winning is not ended. Thus, during the execution of the rainbow performance at the time of winning, the rainbow performance at the time of winning does not end in the middle, and it is possible to reliably inform that the determined performance for determining the winning is being executed.

In addition, as a modification, at least during execution of the simulated rainbow effect, among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) change in light emission colors that constitute the rainbow light emission mode, whereas LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs of the game board 5). 15 to 17) may be configured so that the LED does not emit light, or the LED emits light without changing its emission color (not blinking). As a result, during execution of the simulated rainbow presentation, attention is not paid to LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode, and attention can be made to confirm whether or not the light emission colors of the respective LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode are normally switched.

Also in the above modification, when the effect operation unit 301 is operated at least during execution of the simulated rainbow effect, the simulated rainbow effect is terminated, and the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) are switched from light emission in the rainbow light emission mode to non-light emission, or to light emission in a single color. On the other hand, for the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode, when the performance operation part 301 is operated, the LEDs do not emit light, or the LEDs emit light without changing the emission color (not flashing). Thus, when the performance operation part 301 is operated during the execution of the simulated rainbow performance, only the light emission state of the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emission mode is changed, and the end of the simulated rainbow performance can be clearly notified.

On the other hand, as a modified example, during execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) change in light emission colors that constitute the rainbow light emission mode, whereas LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (game board 5). The LEDs 15 to 17) may be configured so that the LEDs can be in a blinking state or a state in which the color of the light emitted from the LEDs can be changed. As a result, during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, even for the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode, the decorativeness during the variable display of the pattern is not lost.

Also, in this example, the simulated rainbow effect is ended (the effect introduction period is ended) when the pattern variation display is started by entering the various starting ports (the first starting port 2004 and the second starting port 2005) during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect. It is possible to As a result, at the time of manufacturing confirmation at the factory, when it is desired to terminate the rainbow effect being executed, it is not necessary to enter the ball into various starting holes, and the effect operation section 301 can be operated. A plurality of operating parts such as a light quantity adjusting button 228 and a sound volume adjusting button 227 are provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 in addition to the performance operating part 301, but the rainbow performance being executed can be ended only when the performance operating part 301 is operated among the plurality of operating parts. As a result, for example, even if the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, the simulated rainbow effect being executed is not terminated, and it is possible to sufficiently confirm whether or not each of the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) constituting the rainbow light emission mode can normally adjust the light amount.

In addition, in this example, during the execution of the effect introduction period that starts when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has passed without the symbols being variably displayed, the simulated rainbow effect is executed, and it is confirmed whether or not the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode can be normally executed. , it is possible to confirm whether or not the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode can be executed normally. In addition, the simulated rainbow performance is not started until a prescribed period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the simulation start operation part is operated after the power is turned on, and the simulated rainbow performance is started after the prescribed period elapses. As a result, for example, when confirming production in line work in a factory or the like, the simulated rainbow effect can be started at any timing by operating the simulated start operating part at an arbitrary timing after the power is turned on. Problems (confirmation errors, omissions in confirmation, etc.) caused by the time difference between the work process of turning on the power and operating the simulated start operation part and the work process of confirming lighting can be solved, and the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved as to whether or not the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode can be normally executed. In addition, during a period from when the simulated start operation unit provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is operated until a predetermined period elapses (while waiting for the start of the simulated rainbow effect), the front side of the pachinko machine 1 may be enabled to perform a light emitting effect that lights in a light emitting mode other than the rainbow light emitting mode (e.g., a single color light emitting mode, a light emitting mode of a plurality of colors less than the rainbow light emitting mode, etc.), and these can be confirmed using the above-described time difference according to the line work mode. As a result, it is possible not only to prevent erroneous confirmation and omission of confirmation of the lighting effect of lighting in the rainbow luminous mode executed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, but also to further improve the efficiency of the confirmation work. The simulated start operation unit may be any operation unit that is provided at a location that the player cannot operate or visually recognize, apart from the power switch 630a related to turning on the power. Of these, if the operation unit is of the type operated by inserting a special tool (thin stick, etc.) possessed by the manager or a key, the action of the simulated start operation unit can be made to function only in the factory, and unintentional erroneous operations in the hall can be suppressed.

In the above, a simulation start operation part for forcibly starting a simulated rainbow performance is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, whereas a performance operation part 301 for ending the simulated rainbow performance is provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加Thus, it is necessary to go around to the front side of the Pachinko machine 1 in order to operate the performance operation part 301 after the power supply is turned on and the simulated rainbow performance is started, and it is possible to prevent the completion of the simulated rainbow performance by operating the performance operation part 301 without forgetting to confirm whether or not the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode executed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 can be normally executed when confirming the production at the factory.

(Relationship with confirmation other than rainbow emission)
As described above, in the present embodiment, during the variable display of the symbols, in addition to executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning (luminescence effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode) as a win confirmation effect for confirming the win, the simulated rainbow effect is executed at a timing different from the rainbow effect at the time of the win, so that the light emission in the rainbow light emission mode can be confirmed. That is, among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) can be checked whether they normally light up during execution of the simulated rainbow effect. At a different timing than the production, it is possible to check whether it lights up normally. In addition, it is possible to check whether contact with the steering wheel 195 is normally detected at a timing different from the simulated rainbow effect.

FIG. 237 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a confirmation period other than the simulated rainbow effect is provided after the power is turned on. In this example, after the power is turned on, all the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode among the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are kept turned on. Further, the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode emit light in a single color (for example, red or blue). Thus, after the power is turned on, it is possible to confirm whether or not an abnormality occurs in the light emission of the LEDs by visually checking whether the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) which do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode are lit.

In addition, after the power is turned on, the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode cannot be adjusted in light quantity, and are always maintained in a state of emitting light with a constant light quantity. That is, after the power is turned on, even if the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, the light amount of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode does not change. As a result, after the power is turned on, the light quantity of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode does not become too dark, and it is possible to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the light emission of the LEDs. It should be noted that the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode cannot be adjusted in light quantity, and not only are they always maintained in a state of emitting light with a constant light quantity, but also the color of the emitted light is preferably maintained. As a result, after the power is turned on, only the confirmation of whether or not the LEDs (the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode are normally lit can be made to be noticed.

Further, after the power is turned on, all the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are maintained in a lit state, but the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) are maintained in the rainbow light emission mode. It is restricted so as not to execute the lighting effect. Specifically, among the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) that constitute the rainbow light emission mode, at least some of the LEDs, for example, the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit. In addition, the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) that constitute the rainbow light emission mode emit light in a single color (for example, green or yellow) that is different from the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5). ), it is notified that it is a confirmation period to see if there is any abnormality in the light emission. In this way, during the period for checking whether or not there is an abnormality in the light emission of the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5), the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) do not perform the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. Therefore, attention can be paid to confirming whether or not the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode are lit normally. In addition, regarding the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) that constitute the rainbow light emission mode, even if the amount adjustment button 228 is operated, the amount of light does not change, and the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) are prevented from affecting the confirmation of whether they are lit normally.

In this example, after the power is turned on, it is possible to check whether contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. That is, after the power is turned on, a confirmation period is provided to check whether contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. In the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 side detects whether or not the player is in contact with the handle 195 by the handle touch sensor 192, and when the player operates the handle 195 while the contact with the handle 195 is detected, the handle rotation detection sensor 189 detects it on the main control board 1310 side, and the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 (the game ball B is shot from the ball launching device 540). ). In other words, even if the player touches the handle 195, the game ball B cannot be hit unless the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. Therefore, after the power is turned on, by providing a confirmation period for whether or not contact with the handle 195 is normally detected, a hall manager or the like comes into contact with the handle 195 and can confirm whether contact with the handle 195 is normally detected.

In addition, during a period for confirming whether the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected or not, when the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected when the hall manager or the like touches the handle 195, the fact that the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected is notified to the outside. Specifically, in addition to the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, an LED is provided for notifying that contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. Further, when the hall manager or the like touches the handle 195, if the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected, a confirmation sound is output from the speaker. As a result, when the hall manager or the like touches the handle 195 after the power is turned on, it can be properly confirmed whether the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected.

In addition, as described above, after the power is turned on, among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) are restricted so as not to perform the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. In other words, after the power is turned on, the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) that constitute the rainbow light emission mode are restricted so as not to perform the light emission effect of lighting up in the rainbow light emission mode during the period for checking whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected after the power is turned on. In this way, during the period for checking whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected, the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) that constitute the rainbow light emission mode are not illuminated in the rainbow light emission mode. You can draw attention to the confirmation of what.

As described above in detail, in this example, a simulation start operation section, which is a special operation section for forcibly starting the simulated rainbow effect after the power is turned on, is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and when the simulated start operation part is operated after the power is turned on, it is possible to confirm whether or not the simulated rainbow effect is started and the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed. In addition, the simulated rainbow performance is not started until a prescribed period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the simulation start operation part is operated after the power is turned on, and the simulated rainbow performance is started after the prescribed period elapses. Thus, after turning on the power, after confirming whether or not an abnormality occurs in the light emission of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode, or after confirming whether the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected, the simulated rainbow performance can be started at an arbitrary timing by operating the simulation start operation part at an arbitrary timing during the confirmation period. In addition, since the simulated rainbow effect is started after a predetermined period has passed since the operation of the simulated start operation unit, for example, when confirming manufacturing in line work in a factory, problems (confirmation errors, omissions, etc.) caused by the time difference between the work process of operating the simulated start operation unit and the work process of checking the lighting are solved. , the LEDs 10 to 14) of the door frame 3, the efficiency of confirmation work can be improved as to whether or not the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode can be normally executed.

In the above, the confirmation period executed before operating the simulated start operation part is continued during the period from when the simulated start operation part is operated until the predetermined period elapses (while waiting for the start of the simulated rainbow effect), and when the predetermined period elapses (when the simulated rainbow effect is started), the confirmation period executed before operating the simulated start operation part is terminated. In other words, since the simulated rainbow effect is not started and the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is not executed during the period from when the simulated start operation part is operated until the predetermined period elapses (while the start of the simulated rainbow effect is waiting), attention can be paid to confirming whether or not the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) not constituting the rainbow light emitting mode light up normally and whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected as before the simulated start operation part is operated.

Specifically, during a period from when the simulated start operation unit is operated until a predetermined period elapses (while waiting for the start of the simulated rainbow effect), all the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode among the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are maintained in a lit state, and at the time when the predetermined period has passed (when the simulated rainbow effect is started), the LEDs that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode (at the time of starting the simulated rainbow effect). The state in which all the LEDs 15 to 17) of the game board 5 are lit is ended. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the light emission of the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) which do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode by using the time difference between the work process of operating the simulated start operation part and the work process of confirming the lighting. Further, for example, even if it is not confirmed whether or not the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed before operating the simulation start operation part, it is possible to confirm whether or not the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed after operating the simulation start operation part, so that confirmation errors, confirmation omissions, etc. can be prevented. However, the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode are designed to emit light in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode executed before the simulation start operation unit is operated (e.g., in a different light color, or in a blinking state instead of a constantly lit state). As a result, it is possible to clearly grasp whether or not the simulated start operation section has been operated by the light emitting mode of the LEDs (the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode.

Similarly, during the period from when the simulated start operation part is operated until the predetermined period elapses (while the simulated rainbow effect is started), the period for confirming whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected is continued in the same way as before the simulated start operation part is operated, and when the predetermined period elapses (when the simulated rainbow effect is started), the confirmation period for whether the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected is terminated. In other words, during the period from the operation of the simulated start operation part until the lapse of a predetermined period (while waiting for the start of the simulated rainbow performance), when the hall manager or the like touches the handle 195, if the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected, the fact that the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected is notified to the outside. Thus, it is possible to confirm whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected by using the time difference generated between the work process of operating the simulated start operation part and the work process of confirming the lighting. Further, for example, even if it is not confirmed whether the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected before operating the simulated start operation part, it is possible to confirm whether the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected after the simulated start operation part is operated, so that confirmation errors, confirmation omissions, etc. can be prevented.

If the simulation start operation unit is not operated after the power is turned on, the confirmation period that is being executed after the power is turned on is terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the power was turned on. In other words, if the simulation start operation unit is not operated after the power is turned on, the period for confirming whether the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode are normally lit or not and the period for confirming whether the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected are terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the power is turned on. As the predetermined period for ending the confirmation period that is executed after the power is turned on, there is provided a sufficient period for confirming whether the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode are lit normally, and for confirming whether contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. In this way, when the simulated start operation part is not operated after the power is turned on, the simulated rainbow effect is not started immediately after the confirmation period which is executed after the power is turned on, but the simulated rainbow effect is executed during the effect introduction period which is started when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses of a state in which the pattern is not variably displayed.

Further, it may be possible to check whether contact with the handle 195 is normally detected by contact with the handle 195 even after the simulated rainbow effect is started. Specifically, if the simulated start operation unit is not operated after the power is turned on, the confirmation period that is being executed after the power is turned on ends when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the power is turned on. However, after the confirmation period ends, an extended confirmation period may be generated so that it can be confirmed whether contact with the handle 195 is normally detected by contact with the handle 195 during the extended confirmation period. When an extended confirmation period is provided, there is a possibility that the conditions for executing the simulated rainbow effect are established within the extended confirmation period, and the extended confirmation period and the simulated rainbow effect are executed in parallel. In such a case, if the handle 195 is touched within the extension confirmation period, the rainbow effect using the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) among the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, among the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, ends, and the rainbow effect using the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emission mode ends. can be switched from rainbow light emission to non-light emission or monochromatic light emission.

The main purpose of ending the simulated rainbow effect by operating the effect operation part 301 is to end the unnecessary simulated rainbow effect, while the main purpose of ending the simulated rainbow effect by contacting the handle 195 is not to end the unnecessary simulated rainbow effect but to confirm whether the contact to the handle 195 is normally detected. Also, in order to clarify such a difference, it is preferable to perform partially different processing at a control point different from light emission (for example, sound control) when operating the effect operation unit 301 and when touching the handle 195. For example, a unique performance end sound is output only when the simulated rainbow performance is ended by the operation of the performance operation part 301, thereby making it possible for the operator to surely recognize whether or not the unnecessary simulated rainbow performance is ended by the presence or absence of the performance end sound, even though the simulated rainbow performance is ended by the operation of the performance operation part 301 and the contact with the handle 195.例文帳に追加

In the above example, since a confirmation sound (sound different from the effect end sound) is emitted when the handle 195 is touched, if this confirmation sound is output when the handle 195 is touched during the extended confirmation period, the difference between the effect end sound and the confirmation sound allows the operator to reliably recognize whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. As the confirmation sound, a confirmation sound A at the time of contact with the handle 195 within the extended confirmation period and a confirmation sound B at the time of contact with the handle 195 within the confirmation period preceding the extension confirmation period may be provided, and the difference between the confirmation sounds A and B makes it possible for the operator to surely recognize whether or not the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected or not, and whether or not the confirmation is made during the extension confirmation period.

Further, in this example, when the power is turned off in a situation where the variable display of the pattern is being performed or the suspension of the variable display of the pattern is stored, such information is stored, and after the power is turned on, such information is restored and the variable display of the pattern is resumed. After turning on the power, there is no confirmation period for confirming whether the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode are normally lit or not, or whether the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. As a result, when the power is turned off during the variable display of the patterns or in a state where the variable display of the patterns is not yet performed and the suspension is stored, the variable display of the patterns can be quickly restarted after the power is turned on, and the influence on the resumption of the game can be prevented.

Further, in this example, when a state in which vibration is detected by a vibration sensor for detecting vibration applied to the pachinko machine 1 by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, or a state in which magnetism is detected by a magnetic sensor 1050 for detecting magnetism applied to the pachinko machine 1 by bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act is being carried out due to vibration or magnetism, and the occurrence of such an abnormality is notified to the outside. Then, after the power is turned on, during the period for confirming whether the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emitting mode are normally lit or not, or during the period for confirming whether the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected, when an abnormality due to the detection of vibration or magnetism occurs, such a confirmation period is forcibly terminated. As a result, it is possible to prevent cheating due to vibration or magnetism, which is performed by a hall manager or the like during the confirmation period to confirm whether the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode are normally lit or not, and to confirm whether the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected.

After the power is turned on, the front upper back decoration 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position in order to confirm whether or not the front upper back decoration 3310 operates normally, and the initial operation is performed so that the front upper back decoration 3310 appears on the front side of the performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加In such a case, after the front upper back decoration body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearing position, return control is performed for returning from the appearing position to the initial position, and when the front upper back decoration body 3310 has not returned to the initial position, it is determined that an initial position error has occurred on the side of the peripheral control board 1510. - 特許庁After the power is turned on, there is a confirmation period for confirming whether the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode are normally lit, and a confirmation period for confirming whether contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. For this reason, the initial operation of the back upper front decoration 3310 is preferably performed after the period for confirming whether the LEDs (LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5) that do not constitute the rainbow light emission mode are normally lit or not, and after the period for confirming whether the contact with the handle 195 is normally detected. This allows the operator to reliably perform confirmation during the confirmation period and confirmation during the initial operation of the front upper back decoration 3310 .

(Regarding the independent rainbow decorative part for checking the rainbow light emission)
As described above, in this embodiment, during the variable display of the symbols, in addition to executing the rainbow performance at the time of winning (lighting performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode) as the winning determination performance to confirm the winning, the light emission in the rainbow light emission mode can be confirmed at a timing different from the rainbow performance at the time of winning. Concretely, during execution of the performance introduction period during non-variable display of the pattern, as the simulated rainbow performance, the lighting performance of lighting in the rainbow lighting mode is executed as in the rainbow performance at the time of winning, and whether the lighting performance of lighting in the rainbow lighting mode can be normally executed can be confirmed in a hall, a factory, or the like. The performance introduction period is a performance that is started when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the variable display of the symbols is finished, and a simulated rainbow performance is executed in addition to the introduction of the model of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加However, at the time of execution of the simulated rainbow performance, when the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed, it is possible to grasp the execution timing of the simulated rainbow performance, but when the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is not normally executed, it is not possible to grasp whether the execution timing of the simulated rainbow performance has come. Therefore, in this example, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, in addition to executing the light emitting effect in which the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit in the rainbow light emitting mode, a rainbow independent decoration part 1700 that can be attached separately from the plurality of members is provided, and the LED of the rainbow single decoration part 1700 is lighted in the rainbow light emitting mode. By doing so, the fact that the simulated rainbow performance is being executed is notified, and it is clarified that it is the timing for confirming whether or not the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed in a hall, a factory, etc.

FIG. 229 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the game board 5 is equipped with the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700 . The rainbow independent decoration part 1700 is provided so as to be attachable to the game board 5 from the front side. Specifically, in the lower right area of the game board 5 (game area 5a), a connection terminal for connecting the independent rainbow decoration section 1700 is exposed, and by connecting the independent rainbow decoration section 1700 to the connection terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 enables light emission control of the LED provided in the independent rainbow decoration section 1700.

In this example, since the rainbow independent decoration part 1700 is attached to the game board 5 from the front side, the rainbow independent decoration part 1700 can be easily attached and detached even when the game board 5 is attached to the body frame 4.例文帳に追加For this reason, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the rainbow lighting effect is executed using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. However, only when it is confirmed in the hall, the factory, or the like whether the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode can be normally executed, the rainbow independent decoration part 1700 is applied to the game board 5 in order to know the execution timing of the simulated rainbow effect. may be worn. In addition, even when the rainbow independent decorative portion 1700 is not attached to the game board 5 and is removed, the decorativeness of the front side of the game board 5 is maintained.

In addition, as will be described later, the independent rainbow decorative portion 1700 is provided with a board on which 21 LEDs are mounted, 3 in the vertical direction and 7 in the horizontal direction. When the rainbow independent decoration part 1700 is removed from the game board 5, it is possible to remove the board on which the LED is mounted, but it is also possible to remove only the cover body without removing the board on which the LED is mounted. As a result, for example, when it is difficult to see the light emission of the LEDs in the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700, it is possible to easily grasp that the simulated rainbow effect is being executed by removing only the cover body.

Further, the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700 is provided in the game area 5a on the front side of the game board 5. As shown in FIG. Therefore, even when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4, the rainbow independent decorative portion 1700 can be easily visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the door window 101a. In addition, when executing the simulated rainbow effect, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to perform a light emitting effect that lights up in a rainbow light emitting mode. It is located on the front side of the area where the game ball B flows down. In other words, the light-emitting decoration provided with the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 allows the game ball B to flow down the front side, whereas the rainbow independent decoration part 1700 is configured so that the game ball B does not flow down the front side. As a result, when the LED of the rainbow independent decoration part 1700 is lit in the rainbow light emission mode, the user can easily grasp that the simulated rainbow performance is being executed without hindrance of visual recognition due to the falling game ball B.例文帳に追加

FIG. 230 is an explanatory diagram showing a rainbow independent decoration portion 1700. FIG. The independent rainbow decoration part 1700 has a substrate on which 21 LEDs in total, 3 LEDs in the vertical direction and 7 LEDs in the horizontal direction, are mounted. Then, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, a notification effect is executed in which the LED of the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700 is used to light up in the rainbow light emission mode. That is, when executing the simulated rainbow effect, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to execute the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode. Specifically, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, when the elapsed time from the start of the effect introduction period reaches a predetermined timing (timing t1), the three LEDs in row A of the rainbow independent decoration part 1700 are made to emit light in "red, purple, and blue," respectively. In other words, the three LEDs in the row A of the rainbow independent decorative portion 1700 are caused to emit light so that three predetermined colors appear at the same time.

Then, the LEDs of the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700 are switched so that the three LEDs in each row emit light in the order of row A→row B→row C→row D→row E→row F→row G every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds). In addition, the three LEDs in row A of the rainbow independent decorative portion 1700 emit light in "red, purple, and blue," the three LEDs in row B emit light in "purple, blue, and green," the three LEDs in row C emit light in "blue, green, and orange," the three LEDs in row D emit light in "green, orange, and yellow," the three LEDs in row E emit light in "orange, yellow, and white," and the three LEDs in row F emit light in "orange, yellow, and white." , "yellow, white, and red", and the three LEDs in row G emit "white, red, and purple" light. In this way, one of the three colors of the LEDs of the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700 is changed every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds), and the emission colors appearing at the same time are controlled to be switched. Then, during the execution of the simulated rainbow effect, such regular switching of the emission colors (switching of the columns in which the three LEDs emit light) is repeated.

FIG. 231 is a timing chart showing an example of executing a simulated rainbow effect when the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700 is attached. In this example, when executing the simulated rainbow effect, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to execute the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode. In this way, the rainbow independent decoration part 1700 lights up in the rainbow light emission mode as in the simulated rainbow effect (the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode), so that the fact that the simulated rainbow effect is being executed can be grasped, and the timing can be used as a guideline for confirming whether or not the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed in a hall, a factory, or the like. In addition, when the simulated rainbow effect is executed, if there is an abnormality in which some of the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) do not light up when the simulated rainbow effect is being executed, a part of the luminescent colors constituting the rainbow luminous mode will be lacking and light will be emitted in a manner in which the rainbow luminous mode is not established. Although it is difficult, regardless of whether or not such an abnormality has occurred, the rainbow independent decorative portion 1700 performs a notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. Thus, when an abnormality occurs in which some of the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emission mode do not light up during the execution of the simulated rainbow performance, a visual difference from the rainbow independent decoration part 1700 occurs, so that it is possible to easily grasp that the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is not normally executed even though the simulated rainbow performance is being executed.

The rainbow independent decoration part 1700 may be attached to the game board 5 not only at the execution timing of the simulated rainbow performance during execution of the performance introduction period during the non-variation display of the patterns, but also at the execution timing of the rainbow performance at the time of winning during the variable display of the patterns. In other words, the rainbow independent decorative portion 1700 may be attached to the game board 5 at all times. In such a case, when executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning, in synchronism with executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, the LED of the rainbow independent decoration part 1700 is used to perform the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode. In this way, the rainbow independent decoration part 1700 lights up in the rainbow light emission mode as well as the rainbow performance at the time of winning (the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode), so that it is possible to grasp that the rainbow performance at the time of winning is being executed, and it can be used as a guideline for the execution of the winning determination performance for determining the winning. Further, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed, if there is an abnormality in which some of the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) do not light up, the rainbow effect is being executed because part of the luminescent colors constituting the rainbow light emission mode is missing and light is emitted in a manner in which the rainbow light emission mode is not established. However, regardless of whether or not such an abnormality has occurred, the rainbow independent decoration section 1700 executes a notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. As a result, even if there is an abnormality in which some of the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode do not light up when the rainbow performance at the time of winning is executed, the player can grasp that the rainbow performance at the time of winning is being executed by visually recognizing the light emission in the rainbow light emitting mode in the rainbow independent decoration part 1700, so that the player does not miss information useful to the player.

Further, as described above in detail, after confirming whether or not the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed during the execution of the simulated rainbow performance, the simulated rainbow performance can be terminated by operating the performance operation section 301.例文帳に追加Thus, after confirming whether or not the luminous performance of lighting in the rainbow luminous mode can be normally executed by executing the simulating rainbow performance at the time of manufacturing confirmation at the factory, the simulating rainbow performance can be terminated at an arbitrary timing by operating the performance operation part 301 at an arbitrary timing during the execution of the simulating rainbow performance, and the execution of the unnecessary rainbow performance after the confirmation can be prevented from influencing other manufacturing confirmations. In addition, when the performance operation section 301 is operated during execution of the simulated rainbow performance, not only does the lighting performance of lighting in the rainbow lighting mode using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 end, but also the notification performance lighting in the rainbow lighting mode using the LEDs of the rainbow independent decoration section 1700 ends. Specifically, the LED of the rainbow independent decorative portion 1700 is switched from emitting light in the rainbow light emitting mode to non-emitting light. In this way, when the performance operation part 301 is operated during execution of the simulated rainbow performance, the completion of the simulated rainbow performance can be clearly notified by switching the LED of the rainbow independent decoration part 1700 from light emission in the rainbow light emission mode to non-light emission.

The Rainbow alone decorative unit 1700, even if it is not attached to the game board 5, it is not judged that there is an abnormality on the peripheral control board 1510 side, and at the time of the operation of the rainbow and the mock rainbow production at the time, as usual, the LED 1 to 4 of the playboard 5, the top unit of the door frame 45. The LED5-7 of 0, the direct operation unit 300 LED8-9, and the LED10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are performed to execute the light emission that lights up with a rainbow emission. Thus, only when it is confirmed in a hall, a factory, or the like whether or not the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed, the rainbow independent decoration part 1700 is attached to the game board 5 in order to know the execution timing of the simulated rainbow performance, and the rainbow independent decoration part 1700 can be removed during the other period. In addition, when the independent rainbow decoration part 1700 is attached to the game board 5, even if the notification performance of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode in the independent rainbow decoration part 1700 cannot be normally executed such as part of the LED of the independent rainbow decoration part 1700 does not light up, it is not judged that an abnormality has occurred on the side of the peripheral control board 1510.例文帳に追加In other words, when the rainbow effect or the simulated rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used as usual to execute the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode, so that the rainbow effect at the time of winning and the simulated rainbow effect can be prevented from being affected. Even if some of the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) do not light up, the peripheral control board 1510 does not determine that an abnormality has occurred. The light is emitted in a mode that does not hold).

In addition, the rainbow single decorative portion 1700 enables lighting in the rainbow light emission mode as a single member without using a plurality of members, but the back upper front decoration body 3310 also enables lighting in the rainbow light emission mode by using each of the seven numbered display bodies as a single member without using a plurality of members. However, during the execution of the simulated rainbow performance, the front upper back decoration 3310 is maintained at the initial position without moving from the initial position to the appearance position, and the front upper back decoration 3310 is prevented from lighting in the rainbow luminescence mode by using each of seven numbered display bodies. Therefore, although the back upper front decoration body 3310 can be lit in the rainbow light emission mode, it cannot be grasped that the simulated rainbow performance is being executed, and it cannot be used as a guideline for confirming whether or not the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed in a hall, a factory, or the like. In addition, since the back top front decoration 3310 is attached to the back side of the game board 5, the back top front decoration 3310 cannot be attached to and detached from the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the body frame 4.例文帳に追加In other words, the back top front decoration 3310 cannot be easily attached to and detached from the game board 5 from the front side like the rainbow independent decoration part 1700, and it is difficult to attach the back top front decoration 3310 to the game board 5 only when it is confirmed in a hall, a factory, or the like whether or not the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed. In addition, when the back upper front decoration body 3310 is removed from the game board 5, the decorativeness of the front side of the game board 5 is not maintained, so the back upper front decoration body 3310 is not suitable as a member for confirming the execution timing of the simulated rainbow performance like the rainbow independent decoration part 1700.例文帳に追加

As described above, the rainbow single decoration portion 1700 includes a substrate on which 21 LEDs are mounted. Specifically, a top-view type LED is mounted on the front surface of the substrate of the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700 (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player). The top-view type LED can irradiate light toward the front (player's side) of the rainbow independent decoration section 1700 . Therefore, when executing the simulated rainbow effect, when executing the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the LED of the rainbow independent decoration part 1700, each of the luminescent colors forming the rainbow light emission mode can be visually recognized brightly.

Also, as the substrate of the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700, a white substrate is used in which at least the front surface (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player) is painted white. When a white substrate is used as the substrate on which the LED is mounted on the front surface, it is possible to reflect light with a higher reflectance than when a substrate other than the white substrate (for example, a black substrate or a green substrate) is used. Therefore, when executing the simulated rainbow effect, when executing the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the LED of the rainbow independent decoration part 1700, each of the luminescent colors constituting the rainbow light emission mode can be visually recognized brightly.

In addition, on the front surface of the substrate of the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700 (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player), around each of the mounted LEDs, a coating film made of a solder resist having the same color as the emission color constituting the rainbow light emission mode is formed. In other words, each of the 21 LEDs mounted on the front surface of the substrate of the rainbow independent decorative portion 1700 emits light in any one of the emission colors "red, purple, blue, green, orange, yellow, and white" that constitute the rainbow emission mode, but the coating film made of the solder resist uses the same color as the emission color of the LED. Specifically, among the emission colors constituting the rainbow emission mode, a coating film made of a “red” solder resist is formed around the LEDs that emit “red” light, a coating film made of a “purple” solder resist is formed around the LEDs that emit “purple” light, a coating film made of a “blue” solder resist is formed around the LEDs that emit “blue” light, a coating film made of a “green” solder resist is formed around the LEDs that emit “green” light, and an “orange” color. A coating film made of an “orange” solder resist is formed around the LED that emits light, a coating film made of a “yellow” solder resist is formed around the LED that emits “yellow” light, and a coating film made of a “white” solder resist is formed around the LED that emits “white” light. Here, when the same color as the emission color constituting the rainbow emission mode is used as the coating film made of the solder resist, it is possible to reflect the emission color constituting the rainbow emission mode with a higher reflectance than when a color different from the emission color constituting the rainbow emission mode is used. Therefore, when executing the simulated rainbow effect, when executing the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the LEDs of the rainbow independent decoration part 1700, each of the luminescent colors constituting the rainbow light emission mode can be clearly visually recognized.

As for the coating film made of the solder resist described above, a white solder resist is used as a base, and a solder resist having the same color as the emission color constituting the rainbow light emission mode is added. When a white solder resist is used as the coating film made of solder resist, it is possible to reflect light with a higher reflectance than when a non-white solder resist is used. Therefore, when executing the simulated rainbow effect, when executing the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the LED of the rainbow independent decoration part 1700, each of the luminescent colors constituting the rainbow light emission mode can be visually recognized brightly. In addition, since the coating film made of solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance as the proportion of white solder resist as a base increases, it is preferable to increase the proportion of white solder resist as a base than the solder resist of the same color as the emission color that constitutes the rainbow emission mode.

In this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning or the simulated rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to perform the lighting effects in the rainbow light emission mode. However, like the LEDs of the rainbow independent decorative portion 1700, each LED may emit light in any one of the luminescent colors "red, purple, blue, green, orange, yellow, and white" that constitute the rainbow luminous mode. That is, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are not full-color LEDs, but single-color LEDs such as the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700 may be used. Then, like the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700, for example, three predetermined colors appear at the same time, and the three colors are regularly switched to realize a rainbow light emission mode. In such a case, as the substrate of the LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode, a white substrate is used in which at least the front surface (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player) is painted white, like the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700. In addition, on the front surface of the substrate of the LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player), around each of the mounted LEDs is formed a coating film made of a solder resist having the same color as the emitted light color that constitutes the rainbow light emission mode, like the rainbow independent decorative portion 1700. As for the coating film made of the solder resist, a white solder resist is used as a base, and a solder resist having the same color as the emission color forming the rainbow light emission mode is added. As a result, when executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning or the simulated rainbow effect, the same effect as the rainbow independent decoration part 1700 can be exhibited when executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. In addition, on the front surface of the substrate of the LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player), around each of the mounted LEDs is formed a coating film made of a solder resist having the same color as the light emission color that constitutes the rainbow light emission mode. Therefore, when the light emission color of the LED does not match the color of the solder resist, it can be understood that the LED is not mounted in the correct position.

In the above description, as the substrate of the LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode, a white substrate is used in which at least the front surface (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player) is painted white. However, as the substrates of the LEDs that are not involved in the rainbow light emission mode, substrates painted in a different color (e.g., black or green) from the luminescent colors that constitute the rainbow light emission mode are used. As a result, the LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode can reflect light with a high reflectance, whereas the LEDs not involved in the rainbow light emission mode cannot reflect light with a high reflectance, making it difficult to reflect light with a high reflectance. As a result, a difference occurs in the visibility of the light, and the luminescent colors that constitute the rainbow light emission mode can be visually recognized so as to stand out during the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning or the simulated rainbow effect.

As for the rainbow independent decoration portion 1700, an LED is mounted on the front surface of the substrate (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player), and the player can visually recognize the direct light from the LED. Such another example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 232 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a rainbow independent decoration portion 1700. FIG. The independent rainbow decoration part 1700 of another example is provided with a board on which seven LEDs are mounted side by side, and the board is provided in a direction perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 5 . Each of the seven LEDs mounted on the front surface of the substrate of the independent rainbow decorative portion 1700 of another example emits light in one of the emission colors "red, purple, blue, green, orange, yellow, and white" that constitute the rainbow light emission mode. In such a case, for example, by causing three predetermined colors to appear at the same time and switching the three colors regularly, a rainbow light emission mode can be realized. Further, a light guide portion is provided so as to be close to the seven LEDs, and the light guide portion can be caused to emit light in the color emitted by the LED by irradiating the LED light from the side of the light guide portion. The front side of the board on which the seven LEDs are mounted (the front side facing the player) is covered with a cover so that the player does not see the direct light from the LEDs. In this way, by providing a light guide part for guiding light from the LED and configuring the player to visually recognize the indirect light from the light guide part, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the direct light of the LED involved in the rainbow light emission mode burdens the eyes when visually recognizing.

Also, the separate rainbow decoration part 1700 can be easily detached from the game board 5, but it is also possible to remove only the light guide part without removing the board on which the LED is mounted. Here, when only the light guide portion is removed, the light from the LED is no longer guided by the light guide portion, and the light emission (light emission color) of the LED cannot be recognized. For this reason, only during a confirmation period in which it is confirmed in a hall, a factory, or the like, whether or not the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode can be normally executed, the light guide part is attached in order to know the execution timing of the simulated rainbow performance, and the light guide part can be removed during the other period. In addition, even if the light guide part is removed, the decorativeness of the front side of the game board 5 can be maintained, so in the separate rainbow independent decoration part 1700, it is preferable to remove only the light guide part without removing the entire rainbow decoration part 1700 including the board on which the LED is mounted.

[Restrictions on rainbow emission when an error is detected]
In the present embodiment, it is possible to execute at least the rainbow performance at the time of winning (light-emitting performance of lighting in the rainbow light-emitting mode) during the variable display of the symbols, but if the rainbow performance at the time of winning is not properly executed due to some trouble or abnormality, there is a possibility that the interest in the game will be lowered. Therefore, in this example, when some kind of trouble or abnormality occurs, the execution of the light emitting effect in which the rainbow light emitting mode is lit by using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 is restricted when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed.

In this example, it is only necessary to execute the rainbow effect at least during the variable display of the patterns, and in addition, as the rainbow effect for executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode, the rainbow effect at the time of loss may be executed during the variable display of the patterns, the effect of suggesting a set value 6 as the suggestive effect A during the variable display of the patterns, or the simulated rainbow effect may be executed during the non-variable display of the patterns. Such a rainbow effect is the same in that a light emission effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode is executed. That is, when the rainbow effect is executed, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used in conjunction with the display of the effect display device 1600 to perform the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. Specifically, when it is time to execute the rainbow effect, when the predetermined timing (timing t1) is reached, the LEDs 1-2 of the game board 5 are set to "red", the LEDs 3-4 of the game board 5 are set to "purple", the LEDs 5-6 of the door frame top unit 450 are set to "blue", the LED 7 of the door frame top unit 450 and the LED 8 of the door frame 3 are set to "green", the LED 9 of the door frame 3 and the door frame 3 are set to "green". The LED 10 of the door frame 3 is "orange", the LEDs 11-12 of the door frame 3 are "yellow", and the LEDs 13-14 of the door frame 3 are "white". That is, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are caused to emit light of different colors for each two groups.

As for LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, the LEDs emitting "red" light are "purple", the "purple" light emitting LEDs are "green", and the "green" light emitting LEDs are "orange" and "orange" at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.1 seconds). The LED is changed to "yellow", the LED emitting "yellow" is changed to "white", and the LED emitting "white" is changed to "red". In this way, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are changed in a predetermined order of "red→purple→blue→green→orange→yellow→white→red" every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds), and such a rule is applied until timing t10 (for example, 10 seconds). I'm trying to repeat the changes.

In this way, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are controlled so as to sequentially switch their emission colors to a plurality of emission colors in a short unit emission time, so that these LEDs can be visually recognized as if they are emitting light in a rainbow emission mode, and an impactful emission effect can be executed. Further, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are controlled in conjunction with the LEDs 1 to 14 so that the LEDs 1 to 14 are caused to emit light in a plurality of colors so that the LEDs 1 to 14 emit light in different light colors for each two groups, and furthermore, the light emission colors are switched in a short time, whereby a light emission performance with more impact than usual can be executed.

In this example, as light emission in the rainbow light emission mode, seven colors are emitted at the same time using a plurality of LEDs, and the respective emission colors are regularly switched.

Further, during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and a rainbow mode effect image is displayed in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color. In such a rainbow mode effect image, the display colors displayed in each of the plurality of display areas are changed in a predetermined order of ``red→purple→blue→green→orange→yellow→white→red” every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds), and such regular changes are repeated until timing t10 is reached (for example, 5 seconds). The target for displaying the effect image in the rainbow mode may be a effect image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, such as a background image, or may be a effect image displayed in a part of the display area of the effect display device 1600, such as a character, an item, or the like.

(When an abnormality is detected in the back upper front decoration (movable body))
As described above in detail, the back top front effect unit 3300 attached to the game board 5 includes a back top front decoration body 3310 that is long in the left and right direction when viewed from the front, a back top front decoration board (not shown) provided behind the back top front decoration body 3310 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back top front lifting unit (not shown) that raises and lowers the back top front decoration body 3310 (not shown). By moving the decoration 3310 from the initial position to the appearance position, the back upper front decoration 3310 can appear on the front side of the performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加In addition, the back upper front decoration body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearing position and used for performance, and then, when a predetermined performance end condition is established, the return control for returning from the appearing position to the initial position is performed. In such return control, whether or not the front upper back decoration 3310 has returned to the initial position is detected using a detection sensor, and when the front upper back decoration 3310 has not returned to the initial position, it is determined that an initial position error has occurred on the peripheral control board 1510 side. When it is determined that an initial position error occurs with respect to the back upper front decoration body 3310, even if a predetermined performance condition is satisfied after that, the movement control for moving the back upper front decoration body 3310 from the initial position to the appearance position is restricted. When it is determined that an initial position error has occurred with respect to the front upper back decoration 3310, return control for returning the front upper back decoration 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position is performed a plurality of times, and when the front upper back decoration 3310 is returned to the initial position, the determination that the initial position error has occurred is canceled on the side of the peripheral control board 1510.例文帳に追加

In the above description, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied during variable display or non-variable display of patterns, the front upper back decoration 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position so that the front upper back decoration 3310 can appear on the front side of the production display device 1600. In addition, for example, when the power is turned on, the front upper back decoration 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position in order to check whether the front upper back decoration 3310 operates normally. It is movable to allow the back upper front decoration body 3310 to appear on the front side of the effect display device 1600.例文帳に追加Even in such a case, after the front upper back decoration body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearing position, return control is performed for returning from the appearing position to the initial position, and similarly, when the front upper back decoration body 3310 has not returned to the initial position, it is determined that an initial position error has occurred on the side of the peripheral control board 1510. - 特許庁

FIG. 233 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the rainbow effect is executed when the back upper front decoration 3310 has an initial position error. In this example, when the rainbow effect is executed, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used in conjunction with the display of the effect display device 1600 to perform the rainbow effect. A lighting effect is being executed. Here, the back upper front decoration body 3310 is provided so that seven sumo rankings such as ``yokozuna'', ``ozeki'', and ``sekiwake'' are aligned from the left, and each of the seven rankings can be independently illuminated and decorated by the LED of the back upper front decoration substrate. Then, when the rainbow effect is executed, the seven numbered display bodies are lit in a rainbow luminous mode in which the luminous colors are different from each other. In such a rainbow luminous display, the luminous colors emitted in each of the seven numbers are changed in a predetermined order of ``red→purple→blue→green→orange→yellow→white→red”, and such regular changes are repeated until timing t10 (for example, 5 seconds).

If no initial position error has occurred for the back top front decoration 3310, the seven numbered display bodies of the back top front decoration 3310 are used to perform the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the seven numbered display bodies of the back top front decoration 3310 during the execution of the rainbow effect. Instead, the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decoration body 3310 are turned off. In other words, when an initial position error occurs for the back upper front decoration 3310, the execution of the luminous performance of lighting in the rainbow luminous mode using the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decoration 3310 is restricted in the execution of the rainbow performance. For example, when an initial position error occurs with respect to the back upper front decoration 3310, if a light emission performance of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode is executed using seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decoration 3310, the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is conspicuous, so that it is easy to notice that an initial position error has occurred with respect to the back upper front decoration 3310.例文帳に追加However, in this example, when an initial position error has occurred with respect to the back upper front decoration 3310, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which it is easy to notice that an initial position error has occurred with respect to the back upper front decoration 3310 by not executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decoration 3310. - 特許庁

Further, when an initial position error does not occur with respect to the back top front decoration 3310, when the rainbow effect is executed, a light emission effect lighting in a rainbow light emission mode is executed using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. The LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are extinguished without executing the light emitting performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. In other words, when an initial position error occurs with respect to the back top front decoration 3310, when the rainbow effect is executed, not only is the execution of the light emission effect lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the seven numbered display bodies in the back top front decoration body 3310 limited, but also the light emission effect lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. restricts the execution of For example, when an initial position error occurs with respect to the back upper front decoration 3310, if only the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decoration 3310 is not performed, which causes a sense of incongruity. It becomes easy to notice that an initial position error has occurred with respect to the upper front decoration 3310 . However, in this example, if an initial position error occurs in the back front decorative body 3310, the LED1-4 of the gaming board 5, the LED5-7 of the top unit 450 door frame unit 450, the LED8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300, and the LED 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used. By not executing the light emission production that lights up in such a case, it is possible to prevent a situation that makes it easier to notice that the initial position error has occurred in the back of the back front decorative body 3310.

In the above description, when an initial position error occurs for the back upper front decoration 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are turned off during the execution of the rainbow effect. 9. Instead of the light emitting effect in which the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved and lit in a rainbow light emitting mode, the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in lighting in a single color (for example, red or blue). As a result, when an initial position error occurs for the back upper front decoration body 3310, the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed in the execution of the rainbow performance, but the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit in a single color (for example, red or blue), so that the state where the light emission performance can be expected can be maintained.

In addition, in the above, when the rainbow effect is executed, in addition to the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the seven numbered display bodies in the back upper front decoration body 3310 is performed. However, such light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is not performed separately. , may be executed integrally. In other words, when the rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, and the back upper front decoration 3310 may be integrated to emit light in a manner that the rainbow light emission mode is established. In such a configuration, for example, when an initial position error occurs with respect to the back upper front decorative body 3310, if only the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is performed using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, a part of the light emission colors that constitute the rainbow light emission mode is missing. For this reason, in this example, when an initial position error occurs for the back upper front decorative body 3310, by not executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, light is emitted in a state in which the rainbow light emitting mode is not established, and a situation in which it is impossible to determine whether the rainbow effect is being performed is prevented. can be

In this example, if an initial position error occurs with respect to the front upper back decoration 3310, the seven numbered display bodies of the front upper back decoration 3310 are not used during the execution of the rainbow effect. The attached display body is used to perform a light emitting effect of lighting in a rainbow light emitting mode. In such a case, when the rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to perform the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. For example, even though the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed until a predetermined time such as several hours has passed since the power is turned on, if the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is not suddenly executed after the predetermined time has passed, the player feels uncomfortable that the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed. However, in this example, when an initial position error occurs with respect to the back upper front decoration body 3310 after a predetermined time such as several hours has passed since the power is turned on, such a sense of discomfort can be prevented by executing the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode.

Also, in this example, when an initial position error occurs for the back top front decoration 3310, the seven numbered display bodies of the back top front decoration 3310 are not used during the execution of the rainbow effect to light up in the rainbow light emission mode. He is trying to perform the light emission production which lights. In such a case, when the rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to perform the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. In such a case, the operation to eliminate the initial position error is not performed until a predetermined time such as several hours has passed since the initial position error occurred in the back upper front decoration body 3310 . In this regard, in this example, after a predetermined time such as several hours has passed after the occurrence of the initial position error on the back upper front decoration 3310, the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed during the execution of the rainbow effect.

In addition, in this example, when an initial position error occurs for the back upper front decoration 3310, in addition to the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the seven numbered display bodies of the back upper front decoration body 3310, the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 is performed. Although not executed, the LEDs (back upper front decorative body 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) constituting the rainbow light emission mode are also used in effects other than the rainbow effect. When an initial position error occurs for the back upper front decorative body 3310, the variation pattern for executing the rainbow performance (rainbow performance at the time of winning and rainbow performance at the time of losing) is determined, and the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emission mode are not lit when executing performances other than the rainbow performance during the variable display of the pattern for executing the rainbow performance. On the other hand, during the variable display of the pattern not executing the rainbow performance by determining the variation pattern for not executing the rainbow performance, the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emitting mode are lit when the performance other than the rainbow performance is executed. In such a configuration, even when light emission control is performed on the back upper front decorative body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 as a notice effect to anticipate the rainbow effect, such a notice effect is not executed, and the player can be prevented from expecting the rainbow effect.

In addition, in this example, when the rainbow effect (rainbow effect at the time of winning and rainbow effect at the time of losing) is executed, the back upper front decorative body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to execute the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode. Regardless, it continues the lighting effect according to the variation pattern. On the other hand, when an initial position error occurs with respect to the back upper front decoration 3310, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 are not turned off like the back upper front decoration 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, and the light emitting effect corresponding to the variation pattern is continued. are Thus, when an initial position error occurs for the back upper front decoration body 3310, the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed in the execution of the rainbow performance, but the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 continue the light emission performance according to the variation pattern, thereby maintaining the state where the light emission performance corresponding to the variation pattern can be expected.

Also, in this example, when an initial position error occurs with respect to the back upper front decoration body 3310, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas and a rainbow mode effect image is displayed in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color during execution of the rainbow effect, as in the case where the initial position error does not occur. In other words, when an initial position error occurs for the back top front decoration 3310, the back top front decoration 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 do not perform the rainbow lighting effect, whereas the effect display device 1600 displays the rainbow effect image. . As a result, as long as attention is paid to the light emission area around the display area of the performance display device 1600 (light emission by the upper front decorative body 3310 and LEDs 1 to 14), it is impossible to determine whether or not the rainbow performance is being executed, but by paying attention to the display area of the performance display device 1600, it is possible to grasp that the rainbow performance is being executed by the performance image of the rainbow mode.

(When a situation occurs in which the rainbow mode effect image cannot be visually recognized)
As described above, when the rainbow effect is executed, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and a rainbow mode effect image is displayed by displaying each of the plurality of display areas in different display colors. In this way, when a situation occurs in which the rainbow-mode effect image in the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the execution of the light-emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light-emitting mode is restricted with the involvement of the back upper front decoration 3310, the LEDs 1-4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5-7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8-9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10-14 of the door frame 3.

Specifically, a situation in which the rainbow mode effect image in the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized includes the light amount adjustment operation using the light amount adjustment button 228 and the volume adjustment operation using the volume adjustment button 227. The plate unit 200 of this example is provided with a light amount adjustment button 228 that can be operated by the player on the right side of the effect operation section 301 in the effect operation unit 300 . As for the LEDs of the light-emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 can be adjusted step by step by performing a light amount adjustment operation using the light amount adjustment button 228. For example, it is possible to adjust the level of the light amount of the LED from 1 (minimum light amount)→2→3→4→5 (maximum light amount), and the light amount of the LED increases as the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated upward to increase the stage, and the LED light amount decreases as the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated downward to decrease the stage. The plate unit 200 is provided with a volume control button 227 that can be operated by the player on the right side of the effect operation section 301 in the effect operation unit 300 . The sound output from various speakers (main body frame speaker 622, etc.) can be adjusted step by step by performing a volume adjustment operation using the volume adjustment button 227. FIG. For example, it is possible to adjust the level of the volume output from various speakers in the order of 1 (minimum volume) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum volume), and as the volume control button 227 is operated upward to increase the level, the volume output from the various speakers increases, and as the volume control button 227 is operated downward to decrease the level, the volume output from the various speakers decreases. It should be noted that the amount of light and sound volume can be adjusted both while the pattern is changing and when it is not changing.

When the light amount adjustment button 228 is used to adjust the light amount, a light amount adjustment image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to indicate the level of the light amount of the LED. These light amount adjustment image and volume adjustment image are displayed on the front side of the rainbow mode effect image on the effect display device 1600 . Therefore, when the light amount adjustment operation is performed using the light amount adjustment button 228 or the volume adjustment operation is performed using the volume adjustment button 227, at least a part of the rainbow mode effect image cannot be visually recognized due to the light amount adjustment image or the volume adjustment image. In addition, after a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds) has passed after the end of the light amount adjustment operation using the light amount adjustment button 228 and the volume adjustment operation using the volume adjustment button 227, the light amount adjustment image and the volume adjustment image are erased, and the situation returns to the situation where the rainbow mode effect image can be visually recognized.

In addition, as a situation where the rainbow mode effect image in the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, there is a case where the back upper front decoration body 3310 is abnormally stopped while being moved to the appearance position on the front side of the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁The back top front decoration body 3310 of this example moves from the initial position to the appearance position when a predetermined performance condition is established, and the back top front decoration body 3310 can appear on the front side of the performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加In addition, after the front upper back decoration body 3310 is moved from the initial position to the appearance position and used for performance, when a predetermined performance end condition is satisfied, return control is performed to return the front upper back decoration body 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position. In such a case, due to the abnormal stoppage of the back upper front decoration body 3310, at least a part of the rainbow mode effect image cannot be visually recognized, so it is determined that the rainbow mode effect image cannot be visually recognized on the side of the peripheral control board 1510. - 特許庁When it is determined that the front upper back decoration body 3310 is abnormally stopped at the appearing position, the return control for returning the front upper back decoration body 3310 from the appearance position to the initial position is performed a plurality of times, and when the front upper back decoration body 3310 returns to the initial position, the situation returns to the state in which the performance image in the rainbow mode can be visually recognized, so that the determination that the situation in which the performance image in the rainbow mode cannot be visually recognized occurs on the side of the peripheral control board 1510 is eliminated.

FIG. 234 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the rainbow effect is executed when the rainbow mode effect image in the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized. In this example, when there is no situation in which the rainbow effect image on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, when the rainbow effect is executed, the back upper front decoration body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to execute the light emission effect in which the rainbow effect image is lit in the rainbow effect display device 1600. When a situation that cannot be visually recognized occurs, when the rainbow performance is executed, the light emission performance lighting in the rainbow light emission mode involving the back upper front decoration body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 is not executed, and they are turned off. In other words, when a situation occurs in which the rainbow mode effect image in the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the execution of the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode in the light emitting area around the display area of the effect display device 1600 (light emission by the back upper front decoration body 3310 and LEDs 1 to 14) is restricted during the execution of the rainbow effect. For example, when there is a situation where the performance image in the rainbow mode cannot be visually recognized in the performance display device 1600, if only the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode in the light emitting area around the display region of the performance display device 1600 is executed, the inability to visually recognize the performance image in the rainbow mode causes a sense of incongruity. However, in this example, when a situation occurs in which the rainbow-mode effect image on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, such a sense of incongruity can be prevented by not executing the light-emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow-light-emission mode in the light-emitting area around the display area of the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁

Further, in this example, when the rainbow mode effect image on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the back upper front decorative body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in the execution of the rainbow effect. Even if the effect image is returned to the state in which the effect image can be visually recognized, the situation is continued in which the light-emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light-emitting mode is not executed for the remaining time. For example, if the remaining time after returning to the state in which the rainbow mode effect image can be visually recognized is too short in the execution period of the rainbow effect, it may not be possible to determine whether or not the rainbow effect is being executed even if the light emission effect lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed with the involvement of the back upper front decoration body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. Therefore, in this example, even if the situation is restored in which the performance image of the rainbow mode can be visually recognized during the execution period of the rainbow performance, it is possible to prevent occurrence of a situation in which it is impossible to determine whether or not the rainbow performance is being executed by continuing the situation in which the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is not performed for the remaining time.

In the above description, when the rainbow effect image on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are turned off during execution of the rainbow effect. 0 LEDs 8 to 9 and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in the lighting in a rainbow light emission mode, the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in lighting in a single color (for example, red or blue). Thus, when a situation occurs in which the rainbow mode performance image in the performance display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed in the execution of the rainbow performance, but the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit in a single color (for example, red or blue), so that the situation where the light emission performance can be expected can be maintained.

In addition, in this example, when the rainbow effect (rainbow effect at the time of winning and rainbow effect at the time of losing) is executed, the back upper front decorative body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to execute the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode. Regardless, it continues the lighting effect according to the variation pattern. On the other hand, when there is a situation in which the rainbow mode effect image on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 do not turn off like the back upper front decorative body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 during the execution of the rainbow effect. We are trying to continue. As a result, when there is a situation in which the performance image of the rainbow mode cannot be visually recognized on the performance display device 1600, the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed in the execution of the rainbow performance, but the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 continue the light emission performance according to the variation pattern, thereby maintaining the situation where the light emission performance corresponding to the variation pattern is expected.

In this example, even if an abnormality such as ball clogging (for example, a state in which a large number of game balls B are dispensed from the payout device 580 and the upper tray 201 is filled with game balls B) occurs in a situation where the rainbow mode effect image on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized, the back upper front decorative body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the effect operation unit 300 are displayed during the execution of the rainbow effect. The LEDs 8 to 9 and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to perform a rainbow lighting effect. For example, in a situation where a rainbow mode performance image in the performance display device 1600 can be visually recognized, if the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode in the light emitting area around the display region of the performance display device 1600 is not executed, a sense of incompatibility arises when the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed. However, in this example, it is possible to prevent such a sense of incongruity from occurring by executing the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode in a situation where the effect image in the rainbow mode can be visually recognized on the effect display device 1600.例文帳に追加

(When an abnormality is detected in a pachinko machine)
As described above, when the rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used in conjunction with the display of the effect display device 1600. LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used to limit the execution of the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode. In addition, depending on the type of abnormality in the pachinko machine 1, the execution of light emission other than the LEDs (back upper front decoration 3310, LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the performance operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) constituting the rainbow light emission mode is restricted.

Specifically, as the abnormalities of the pachinko machine 1, there are a first abnormality in which the possibility of fraud is low, a second abnormality in which the possibility of fraud is medium, and a third abnormality in which the possibility of fraud is high. As the first abnormality, a lot of game balls B are put out from the put-out device 580, the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are filled with the game balls B, and the game balls B cannot be discharged to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加In such a state, many game balls B are simply paid out from the payout device 580, and it is determined that the first abnormality has occurred on the main control board 1310 side. Also, when the balls are removed from the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 and the game balls B are returned to the state in which the game balls B can be released to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202, the determination that the first abnormality has occurred on the side of the main control board 1310 is canceled.

A second abnormality is a state in which the body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 . In such a state, there is a possibility that the hall clerk simply opened the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and it is determined that the second abnormality has occurred on the main control board 1310 side. Further, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the determination that the second abnormality has occurred on the main control board 1310 side is cancelled.

As the third abnormality, vibration is detected by a vibration sensor that detects vibration applied to the pachinko machine 1 by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, and magnetism is detected by a magnetic sensor 1050 that detects magnetism applied to the pachinko machine 1 by bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1. In such a state, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act is being carried out due to vibration or magnetism, and it is determined that the third abnormality has occurred on the main control board 1310 side when the detection signal from the vibration sensor or the magnetic sensor is being input. In addition, even if the state is returned to a state in which no vibration or magnetism is detected, the determination that the third abnormality has occurred is not canceled on the main control board 1310 side, and by turning on the power again, the judgment that the third abnormality has occurred on the main control board 1310 side is canceled.

FIG. 235 is a timing chart showing an example of the case where the rainbow effect is executed when the first to third abnormalities occur. In this example, when the first to third abnormalities do not occur, when the rainbow effect is executed, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed with the involvement of the back upper front decorative body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. On the other hand, when the first abnormality occurs, only the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are illuminated in a single color (for example, red or blue) during the execution of the rainbow presentation, and an error notification presentation is performed. As a result, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 aware that some kind of abnormality has occurred while maintaining a state in which the player can expect the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode.

In addition, when the second abnormality or the third abnormality occurs, when the rainbow effect is executed, the light emitting effect lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is not executed with the involvement of the back upper front decoration 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. is executing an error notification effect that lights up in a single color (eg, red or blue). That is, when the second abnormality or the third abnormality occurs before execution of the rainbow performance, the execution of the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode in the light emitting area (upper back front decoration body 3310, LEDs 1 to 14) around the display area of the performance display device 1600 is restricted. As a result, a situation occurs in which it is not possible to grasp that the rainbow performance is being executed, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 aware that some kind of abnormality has occurred.

In this example, when the first to third abnormalities do not occur, the back upper front decoration 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved in the execution of the rainbow effect (the rainbow effect on hit and the rainbow effect on loss). continues the light emission effect according to the variation pattern regardless of the light emission colors that constitute the rainbow light emission mode. On the other hand, when the first abnormality occurs, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 are not in an error notification state like the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, and the light emission performance corresponding to the variation pattern is continued during execution of the rainbow performance. In this way, when the first abnormality occurs, the light emission performance corresponding to the variation pattern is continued during the execution of the rainbow performance, thereby maintaining a state in which the light emission performance corresponding to the variation pattern is expected.

Similarly, when the second abnormality occurs, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 are not put into an error notification state like the LEDs (upper back front decorations 3310, LEDs 1 to 14) constituting the rainbow light emission mode, and the light emission performance corresponding to the variation pattern is continued during execution of the rainbow performance. As a result, when the second abnormality occurs, the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed in the execution of the rainbow performance, but the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 continue the light emission performance corresponding to the variation pattern, so that the pachinko machine 1 is notified of the occurrence of some abnormality, while the light emission performance corresponding to the variation pattern is expected to be maintained.

On the other hand, when the third abnormality occurs, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 are turned on in a single color (for example, red or blue) like the LEDs (back upper front decorations 3310, LEDs 1 to 14) constituting the rainbow light emission mode to notify an error, and the light emission performance corresponding to the variation pattern is stopped. As a result, when the third abnormality occurs, not only is the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode not executed during the execution of the rainbow performance, but also the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 do not execute the light emission performance corresponding to the variation pattern, thereby eliminating the situation where the light emission performance corresponding to the variation pattern can be expected, and making the pachinko machine 1 aware that some fraudulent act is being performed.

In this example, when the rainbow effect is executed, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and a rainbow mode effect image is displayed in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color. However, when the first to third abnormalities occur, the effect display device 1600 displays an image notifying the type of abnormality. However, when the first abnormality occurs, even if the image for notifying the type of abnormality is displayed, the condition in which the rainbow mode effect image can be visually recognized is maintained, whereas when the second abnormality or the third abnormality occurs, the rainbow mode effect image cannot be visually recognized when the image for notifying the type of abnormality is displayed, so that the rainbow mode effect image makes it impossible to grasp that the rainbow mode effect image is being executed.

FIG. 236 is a timing chart showing an example of the case where the first to third abnormalities occur during execution of the rainbow effect. In this example, during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the back upper front decorative body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 participate to perform the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode. Then, in the execution period of the rainbow effect, when the first abnormality occurs, an error notification effect is executed in which only the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are lit in a single color (for example, red or blue), and the remaining rear upper front decorative body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, and the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300 continue the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode. As a result, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 aware that some kind of abnormality has occurred while maintaining a state in which expectations are given to the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode.

In addition, when the second abnormality or the third abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the light emission effect lighting in the rainbow light emission mode involving the back upper front decoration 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 is stopped. Running an error notification effect that lights up in a color (eg, red or blue). In other words, when the second abnormality or the third abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the execution of the light emission effect lighting in the rainbow light emission mode in the light emitting area (upper back front decoration 3310, LEDs 1 to 14) around the display area of the effect display device 1600 is restricted. As a result, a situation occurs in which it is not possible to grasp that the rainbow performance is being executed, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 aware that some kind of abnormality has occurred.

In this example, during the execution period of the rainbow effect (rainbow effect at the time of winning and rainbow effect at the time of losing), the back upper front decorative body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are involved to execute the light emitting effect lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode. , The light emission effect is continued according to the variation pattern. On the other hand, when the first abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow performance, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 do not enter an error notification state like the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3, and the light emission performance corresponding to the variation pattern is continued. In this way, when the first abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow performance, the light emission performance corresponding to the variation pattern is continued, thereby maintaining the state where the light emission performance corresponding to the variation pattern can be expected.

Similarly, when a second abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow performance, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 do not enter an error notification state like the LEDs (back upper front decorations 3310, LEDs 1 to 14) constituting the rainbow light emission mode, but continue the light emission performance according to the variation pattern. Thus, when the second abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow performance, the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is stopped, but the light emission performance corresponding to the variation pattern is continued for the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5, so that the pachinko machine 1 is notified of the occurrence of some abnormality, and the situation where the light emission performance corresponding to the variation pattern is expected can be maintained.

On the other hand, when the third abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 are turned on in a single color (for example, red or blue) like the LEDs (upper back front decorations 3310, LEDs 1 to 14) constituting the rainbow light emission mode to notify an error, and the light emission effect according to the variation pattern is stopped. Thus, when the third abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow performance, not only the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is stopped, but also the light emission performance of the LEDs 15 to 17 of the game board 5 according to the variation pattern is stopped, thereby eliminating the situation in which the light emission performance corresponding to the variation pattern is expected, and making the pachinko machine 1 aware that some fraudulent act is being performed.

In this example, when the rainbow effect is executed, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and a rainbow mode effect image is displayed in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color. However, when the first to third abnormalities occur during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the effect display device 1600 displays an image notifying the type of abnormality. However, when the first abnormality occurs, even if the image for notifying the type of abnormality is displayed, the situation in which the performance image in the rainbow mode can be visually recognized is maintained, whereas when the second abnormality or the third abnormality occurs, the performance image in the rainbow mode cannot be visually recognized when the image for notifying the type of the abnormality is displayed, and depending on the performance image in the rainbow mode, it is not possible to grasp that the rainbow mode performance image is being executed.

In addition, in this example, when the second abnormality occurs, when the rainbow effect is executed, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode involving the back upper front decorative body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 is not executed. Similarly, when the second abnormality occurs during the execution period of the rainbow effect, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is stopped with the participation of the back upper front decoration body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. Under such circumstances, even if the second abnormality is eliminated during the execution period of the rainbow performance, the situation where the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed is continued for the remaining time. For example, if the remaining time after returning to the state in which the rainbow mode effect image can be visually recognized is too short in the execution period of the rainbow effect, it may not be possible to determine whether or not the rainbow effect is being executed even if the light emission effect lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is executed with the involvement of the back upper front decoration body 3310, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. Therefore, in this example, even if the second abnormality is resolved during the execution period of the rainbow performance, by continuing the situation where the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed during the remaining time, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which it is impossible to determine whether the rainbow performance is being executed.

[Rainbow production with increase and decrease of rainbow-emitting LEDs]
In the above description, the rainbow effect is executed as a high-expectation effect suggesting that the possibility of winning is high during the variable display of the symbols. When the rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3 are used in conjunction with the display of the effect display device 1600 to light up in the rainbow light emission mode. A case where a ring-shaped decorative part 1710 having a plurality of LEDs arranged in a ring is provided as a light-emitting decoration body involved in the above, and when the rainbow performance is executed, the LEDs of the ring-shaped decorative part 1710 are used to light up in a rainbow light-emitting mode will be described below. With such an annular decorative portion 1710, it is possible to increase or decrease the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode, and to change the impact on the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode.

FIG. 238 is an explanatory diagram showing the annular decorative portion 1710. FIG. The annular decoration portion 1710 is provided with a first annular decoration portion 1710A in which seven LEDs are arranged in a ring on the inside, and a second annular decoration portion 1710B in which 14 LEDs, which are more LEDs than the first annular decoration portion 1710A, are arranged on the outside. Further, in the annular decoration portion 1710, each of the first annular decoration portion 1710A and the second annular decoration portion 1710B can be lit in a rainbow emission mode. The ring-shaped decoration part 1710 is provided as one of the light-emitting decorations provided in the game area 5a on the front side of the game board 5. As shown in FIG.

In this example, the LEDs of the first annular decorative portion 1710A are lit in the rainbow luminous mode in which the LEDs of the first annular decorative portion 1710A emit different luminescent colors during the execution period of the lighting effect in which the LEDs of the first annular decorative portion 1710A are involved and lit in the rainbow luminous mode. In the first annular decorative portion 1710A having such a rainbow light emitting mode, the colors of light emitted from the respective LEDs of the first annular decorative portion 1710A are changed in a predetermined order of "red→purple→blue→green→orange→yellow→white→red", and such regular changes are repeated.

In addition, during the execution period of the light emitting effect in which the LEDs of the second annular decorative portion 1710B are involved and lit in the rainbow light emitting mode, two adjacent LEDs in the second annular decorative portion 1710B are grouped into one group, and each group of the two LEDs is lit in the rainbow light emitting mode in which the LEDs emit light in different colors. In the second annular decorative portion 1710B having such a rainbow light emitting mode, the colors of light emitted from each of the two LED groups are changed in a predetermined order of "red→purple→blue→green→orange→yellow→white→red", and such regular changes are repeated.

In this way, the LEDs of the first annular decorative portion 1710A and the LEDs of the second annular decorative portion 1710B are controlled so that the respective emission colors are sequentially switched to a plurality of emission colors in a short unit emission time, so that these LEDs can be visually recognized as if they are emitting rainbow emission mode in cooperation with each other, and an impactful emission effect can be executed. In addition, as for the LEDs of the first annular decoration part 1710A, seven LEDs are interlocked and controlled, the seven LEDs are caused to emit light in a plurality of colors so as to emit light in different emission colors, and the emission colors are switched in a short period of time, thereby making it possible to perform a light emission effect with more impact than usual. Similarly, with respect to the LEDs of the second annular decorative portion 1710B, 14 LEDs are interlocked and controlled, two groups of LEDs are caused to emit light in a plurality of colors so as to emit light in different emission colors, and further, by switching the emission colors in a short period of time, it is possible to execute a light emission effect with more impact than usual.

In this example, as light emission in the rainbow light emission mode, seven colors are emitted at the same time using a plurality of LEDs, and the respective emission colors are regularly switched.

In this example, as a performance corresponding to the variation pattern, a rainbow performance can be executed as a high-expectation performance during the variable display of the patterns, and a rainbow performance at the time of winning is derived as a result of the variable display of the patterns, and a rainbow performance at the time of loss is derived as a result of the variable display of the patterns although the rainbow performance is executed during the variable display of the patterns. In other words, it is possible to determine the variation pattern for performing the rainbow performance at the time of winning, and to determine the variation pattern for performing the rainbow performance at the time of losing at the time of loss. By lowering the ratio of determining the variation pattern for executing the rainbow performance at the time of failure to the variation patterns for executing other performances at the time of failure, the frequency of execution of the rainbow performance at the time of failure is made lower than the performance at the time of failure. As a result, when the rainbow effect is executed, it cannot be determined whether it is the rainbow effect at the time of winning or the rainbow effect at the time of losing, but the ratio of the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning is high, suggesting that the possibility of winning is high.

FIG. 239 is a timing chart showing an example of a rainbow effect using the annular decorative portion 1710. FIG. First, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, as a performance corresponding to the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command, the performance display device 1600 starts the variable performance such as the variable display of the decorative pattern in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. Then, when the variation pattern at the time of winning to execute the rainbow performance at the time of winning is determined, or when the variation pattern at the time of losing to execute the rainbow performance at the time of winning is determined, when the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the pattern reaches a predetermined timing, the first annular decoration part 1710A among the annular decoration parts 1710 is used to start the light emission performance (rainbow performance) of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode.

In addition, during the execution period of the rainbow effect using the first annular decorative portion 1710A, the effect display device 1600 displays a win when the subsequent rainbow effect (rainbow effect using the second annular decorative portion 1710B) is executed, and a loss when the subsequent rainbow effect (rainbow effect using the second annular decorative portion 1710B) is not executed (for example, “If the second annular decorative portion 1710B emits rainbow light, you win! 2 annular decorative portion 1710B, if it does not emit rainbow light, it is out!") is executed.

When the variation pattern for executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning is determined, after starting the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decoration part 1710A, the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decoration part 1710B is executed at a predetermined timing in addition to the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decoration part 1710A. In other words, both the LEDs of the first annular decorative portion 1710A and the LEDs of the second annular decorative portion 1710B are lit in the rainbow light emission mode. As a result, when the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative part 1710B is executed after the start of the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative part 1710A, it is possible to grasp that the variable display of the pattern being executed will be a win, and to know whether or not the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative part 1710B will be executed.

Further, as the rainbow effect at the time of winning, after starting the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative part 1710A, when the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative part 1710B is executed at a predetermined timing, the effect display device 1600 displays a specific image for recognizing that the variable display of the pattern being executed will be a win. Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, a display (for example, "Congratulations!") is executed to notify that the variable display of the symbols being executed is a win and the result is a happy one. As a result, even when a failure or an abnormality occurs in the second annular decoration part 1710B, and it is not possible to recognize that the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decoration part 1710B has been executed, the specific image displayed on the effect display device 1600 makes it possible to clearly grasp that the variable display of the pattern being executed is a win.

Further, as the rainbow effect at the time of winning, after starting the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative part 1710A, when the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative part 1710B is executed at a predetermined timing, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into a plurality of display areas, and a rainbow mode effect image is displayed in which each of the plurality of display areas is displayed in a different display color. In such a rainbow mode effect image, the display colors displayed in each of the plurality of display areas are changed in a predetermined order of ``red→purple→blue→green→orange→yellow→white→red” every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second), and such regular changes are repeated. The target for displaying the effect image in the rainbow mode may be an effect image displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, such as a background image, or may be an effect image displayed in a part of the display area of the effect display device 1600, such as an effect image such as a character or an item. As a result, even when a failure or an abnormality occurs in the second annular decoration part 1710B, and it is not possible to recognize that the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decoration part 1710B has been executed, the specific image displayed on the effect display device 1600 makes it possible to clearly grasp that the variable display of the pattern being executed is a win.

On the other hand, when the variation pattern for performing the rainbow performance at the time of failure is determined, after the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decoration part 1710A is started, the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decoration part 1710B is not performed. In other words, after the lighting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative part 1710A is started, even if the predetermined timing comes, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative part 1710B is not executed, the LED of the second annular decorative part 1710B remains in the off state, and only the LED of the first annular decorative part 1710A continues to light up in the rainbow light emitting mode. As a result, when the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative part 1710B is not executed after the start of the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative part 1710A, it is possible to grasp that the variation display of the pattern being executed is lost, and in order to know whether it is a win or not, it is possible to draw attention to whether the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative part 1710B is executed.

Further, as the rainbow effect at the time of failure, after starting the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative part 1710A, when the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative part 1710B is not executed, at a predetermined timing, the effect display device 1600 displays a specific image that does not make one recognize that the variable display of the pattern being executed will be a hit. Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, a display (for example, "Unfortunate!") is executed to notify that the variable display of the symbol being executed is out of order, resulting in a disappointing result. As a result, even when failure or abnormality occurs in the second annular decoration part 1710B and it is not possible to recognize that the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decoration part 1710B is not executed, the specific image displayed on the effect display device 1600 makes it possible to clearly grasp that the variation display of the pattern being executed is off.

In addition, as the rainbow effect at the time of failure, after starting the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative part 1710A, if the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative part 1710B is not executed, the effect display device 1600 does not display the rainbow mode effect image at a predetermined timing.

In this example, when executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning, after starting the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B is additionally performed at a predetermined timing. 710B is not executed, and the first annular decorative portion 1710A is used to continue the rainbow lighting effect. That is, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed, not only the LEDs of the first annular decorative portion 1710A but also the LEDs of the second annular decorative portion 1710B are lit in the rainbow light emission mode, and the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode is increased. As a result, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the variable display of the symbols being executed will be successful depending on whether or not the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode is increased. In addition, by increasing the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emitting mode, it is possible to excessively increase the player's willingness to play, coupled with the fact that the variable display of the symbols being executed is a win.

In this example, the LED of the first annular decorative portion 1710A and the LED of the second annular decorative portion 1710B are configured to light up in the rainbow light emission mode when executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning. In addition, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed, in addition to the state in which the LED of the first annular decoration portion 1710A lights up in the rainbow light emission mode, the LED of the second annular decoration portion 1710B is configured to light up in the rainbow light emission mode. It may be configured to switch to a lighting state at . Even in such a configuration, since the number of LEDs is larger in the second annular decorative portion 1710B than in the first annular decorative portion 1710A, the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow emission mode increases when performing the rainbow effect at the time of winning.

As the rainbow effect at the time of winning, after executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative part 1710A and the second annular decorative part 1710B, the winning result (winning pattern) is notified as a result of the fluctuation display of the symbols, but during the notification of the winning result, the first annular decorative part 1710A is used without executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative part 1710B. Only the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed. In other words, both the LED of the first annular decoration portion 1710A and the LED of the second annular decoration portion 1710B are lit when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed. In such a case, the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emitting mode is reduced during the notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, compared to when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed. Here, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed, since the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A and the second annular decorative portion 1710B is performed, a state may occur in which the player's willingness to play is excessively increased. To reduce the state in which the player's motivation to play is excessively enhanced, and to prevent the player from being excessively absorbed in the game in the subsequent game.

In the above, during the notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A is executed. In addition, the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode is reduced during the notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow performance at the winning time, compared to the execution of the rainbow performance at the winning time. For example, when executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the light emitting color of the LED is switched at a normal speed (for example, 0.1 second) when the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is performed, while the light emitting color of the LED may be switched at a slower speed (for example, 1 second) than the normal speed when performing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode during the notification of the winning result after the rainbow effect at the time of winning is performed. In other words, during the notification of the winning result after execution of the rainbow performance at the time of winning, the light emitting performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode may be executed so that the interval at which the light emitting color of the LED is switched becomes longer than when the rainbow performance at the time of winning is executed. Even in such a configuration, the interval at which the luminescent color of the LED is switched becomes long during the notification of the winning result after execution of the rainbow performance at the time of winning, so that the state in which the player's desire to play the game is excessively enhanced can be reduced, and the player can be prevented from being excessively absorbed in the game in the subsequent game.

Further, for example, when executing the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the light quantity of the LED is increased when the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed, while the light quantity of the LED is decreased when the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode is executed during the notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning. That is, during the notification of the winning result after execution of the rainbow performance at the time of winning, the lighting performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode may be executed so that the light quantity of the LED becomes lower than that at the time of execution of the rainbow performance at the time of winning. Even in such a configuration, the amount of light of the LED is reduced during the notification of the winning result after execution of the rainbow performance at the time of winning, so that the state in which the player's desire to play is excessively enhanced is reduced, and the player can be prevented from being excessively absorbed in the game in the subsequent game.

Further, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed, not only the LED of the first annular decoration part 1710A lights up in the rainbow light emission mode, but also the LED of the second annular decoration part 1710B lights up in the rainbow light emission mode. The LED of the annular decorative portion 1710B does not light up in the rainbow light emission mode, and the effect display device 1600 does not display the rainbow mode effect image. Even in such a configuration, since the performance image in the rainbow mode is not displayed on the performance display device 1600 during the notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow performance at the time of the winning, the state in which the player's desire to play is excessively improved can be reduced, and the player can be prevented from being excessively absorbed in the game in the subsequent game.

As described above in detail, it is possible to attach the independent rainbow decoration part 1700 to the game board 5. During execution of rainbow effects such as a simulated rainbow effect and a rainbow effect at the time of winning, the LEDs of the independent rainbow decoration part 1700 are turned on in synchronism with the execution of the rainbow effect using the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3. It is possible to execute a notification effect of lighting in a rainbow light emission mode. As a result, even when an abnormality occurs in which some of the LEDs constituting the rainbow light emission mode do not light up during the execution of the rainbow performance, the fact that the rainbow performance is being executed can be grasped by visually recognizing the light emission in the rainbow light emission mode in the rainbow independent decoration part 1700.例文帳に追加In this regard, in this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed, the notification effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the LED of the rainbow independent decorative part 1700 is executed in synchronization with the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative part 1710A and the second annular decorative part 1710B. Although the light emission effect is executed, the notification effect of lighting the LED of the rainbow independent decoration part 1700 in the rainbow light emission mode is not executed. Regarding this, since it is important for the player to know that the rainbow effect is being executed when the winning effect is being executed, and not to miss useful information for the player, even if there is an abnormality in which some of the LEDs of the first annular decorative portion 1710A and the second annular decorative portion 1710B do not light up, the player can recognize that the rainbow effect is being performed by visually recognizing the light emission in the rainbow emission mode of the rainbow independent decorative portion 1700. It is configured. On the other hand, during the notification of the winning result after the execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decoration part 1710A is executed, but the information is not useful for the player and is not necessarily the information to be conveyed to the player.

In this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of failure is executed, until a specific period (for example, 3 minutes) elapses after the rainbow effect at the time of failure is completed, the variation pattern for executing the rainbow performance at the time of failure is not determined, and the rainbow performance at the time of failure is not performed again. On the other hand, it is possible to determine a winning variation pattern for executing the winning rainbow performance until a specific period (for example, 3 minutes) elapses after finishing the winning rainbow performance, and does not limit the execution of the winning rainbow performance. As a result, the rainbow performance at the time of failure is not repeated in a short period such as a specific period, and the reliability of the rainbow performance executed as a high-expectation performance suggesting a high probability of winning is not lost, and the next rainbow performance can be waited for with pleasure. In addition, when the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decoration part 1710A is started as the rainbow performance before the specific period elapses after the rainbow performance at the time of winning is finished, the rainbow performance is not the rainbow performance at the time of failure, and it is possible to grasp that the rainbow performance at the time of winning is being executed without waiting for the addition and execution of the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decoration part 1710B.

Also, in this example, the rainbow effect (rainbow effect at the time of winning, rainbow effect at the time of losing) is executed as the effect during the variable display of the symbols, but this is not limited to this, and in a specific period such as during the winning game when the variable display of the symbols is not performed, after the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A is performed, the rainbow effect of whether or not the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B may be performed. . In this case, after the execution of the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative part 1710A, the player may be made to recognize whether or not some kind of game profit (probability variation, time reduction, etc.) is given after the winning game being executed, depending on the status of the rainbow effect as to whether or not to execute the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative part 1710B. In addition, after executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B, since it is after obtaining information useful for the player, it is sufficient to perform only the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the first annular decorative portion 1710A without executing the light emitting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emitting mode using the second annular decorative portion 1710B. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the state in which the player's desire to play is excessively increased, and prevent the player from becoming excessively absorbed in the game in subsequent games.

Further, as described above in detail, during the execution of the rainbow effect (rainbow effect at the time of winning, rainbow effect at the time of losing), a rainbow effect with button effect A, a rainbow effect with button effect B, and a rainbow effect with button effect C may be performed as a button effect capable of determining whether or not the player will win when a predetermined operation unit is operated. Further, during the execution of the rainbow effect (rainbow effect at hit, rainbow effect at loss), the effect display device 1600 may be configured not to execute the button operation prompting effect for prompting the operation of a predetermined operation unit (for example, "press the light amount adjustment button!"), and button effects A to C may function as a "hidden effect" during the execution of the rainbow effect (rainbow effect at hit, rainbow effect at loss). For example, as the button effect A, during execution of the rainbow effect at the time of winning, when the light amount adjustment button 228 is operated, at least the LEDs that constitute the rainbow light emission mode (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 change. When the adjustment button 228 is operated, the light amount of at least the LEDs (LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5, LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, LEDs 8 to 9 of the production operation unit 300, and LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) constituting the rainbow light emitting mode among the LEDs of the light emitting decorations provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 does not change. In other words, after the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decoration part 1710A is started as the rainbow performance, when the light quantity can be adjusted, the rainbow performance is not the rainbow performance when the rainbow performance is lost, and it is possible to grasp that the rainbow performance at the time of winning is being executed without waiting for the additional execution of the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decoration part 1710B. As a result, a player who usually positively operates the light quantity adjusting button 228 can be made to grasp whether or not the player will win at an early stage, and a player who does not usually positively operate the light quantity adjusting button 228 can be made to pay attention to whether or not to additionally execute the light emission performance of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the second annular decoration part 1710B, and thoroughly enjoy whether the player will win or not.

Further, in this example, when the rainbow effect at the time of winning is executed, the lighting effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode using the first annular decoration part 1710A and the second annular decoration part 1710B is executed. It is configured so that the execution period of the light emission effect of lighting in the rainbow light emission mode is longer than when the effect is executed. Here, since the number of LEDs involved in the rainbow light emission mode is reduced during the notification of the winning result after execution of the rainbow performance at the time of winning, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the lighting is in the rainbow light emission mode, but by making the execution period of the light emission performance lighting in the rainbow light emission mode longer than at the time of execution of the rainbow performance at the time of winning, it is possible to reliably recognize whether or not the lighting is in the rainbow light emission mode.

Regarding the rainbow performance of the present invention, various rainbow performances are individually described as necessary, but only one of these rainbow performances may be executed, or these rainbow performances may be combined and executed in parallel. For example, as the rainbow effect, a rainbow effect at the time of winning, a rainbow effect at the time of losing, and a simulated rainbow effect may be executed in parallel. In the rainbow effect of the present invention, not only the LEDs 1 to 4 of the game board 5 but also the LEDs of the members other than the game board 5 (the LEDs 5 to 7 of the door frame top unit 450, the LEDs 8 to 9 of the effect operation unit 300, and the LEDs 10 to 14 of the door frame 3) are used to perform the rainbow effect. can be configured to run.

[Time saving control of new mode]
In the above description, the general game machine is controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the big hit game, but the game machine may be controlled to the time-saving state in a new manner as follows to further improve the game interest.

(Time saving control triggered by stop display of time saving sudden pattern)
The gaming machine of the present embodiment is controlled to execute a special time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state) when the variable display of the first special symbol stops at a predetermined "time-saving sudden design" separately from the normal time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state and high-probability time-saving state) controlled after the end of the jackpot game. Specifically, as a lottery result of the first special pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2004, when a "time-saving hit" different from any of the big win, the small win, and the loss is won, a predetermined time-saving sudden pattern (a pattern different from the big win, the small win, and the loss) is stopped and displayed on the first special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 based on it, and the stop display is performed without executing any winning game. It is possible to turn on the time saving flag based on the passage of time and control the time saving state (low probability time saving state). By executing time-saving control triggered by the stop display of time-saving sudden patterns, it is possible to suddenly shift to a time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state) in the course of normal game progress, widen the range of game characteristics, and improve game interest by giving surprises and unexpectedness to players. Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving sudden design is set only in the first special design, but the time saving sudden design may also be set for the second special design. In this case, it is preferable to display time-saving sudden designs in different modes on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, as the lottery result of the first special symbol, the winning mode of "time saving hit" that triggers the stop display of the time saving sudden pattern is, in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability in the above-described embodiment, the first special random number with the probability of 2/319, which is the middle between 1/319, which is the jackpot probability when the set value is 1, and 3/319, which is the small hit probability. Random numbers are associated and set. In addition, in the hit determination table at the time of high probability, the time saving hit determination value is not set, so that the time saving hit does not occur during the so-called probability variation.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, as described above, when the power is turned on, the hall manager can set any one of set values 1 to 6 with different jackpot probabilities using the setting key. become.

In addition, it is possible to provide multiple time-saving sudden patterns, and regarding the period of occurrence of the time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state) triggered by the stop display of the time-saving sudden design, for example, in the case of time-saving sudden design A, 30 times of design fluctuations, in the case of time-saving sudden design B, 50 times of design fluctuations, and in the case of time-saving sudden design C, 100 times of design fluctuations (the same period as the normal time-saving state), depending on the type of time-saving sudden design. Accordingly, the occurrence period of the time saving state (low probability time saving state) can be set individually. The determination of the time-saving sudden patterns A to C is determined using the symbol random numbers for use in determining the hit types described above, in the same manner as when determining the jackpot types and minor hit types. Also, not limited to this, the occurrence period of the time saving state (low probability time saving state) may be determined at the start of fluctuation by lottery by another lottery means other than the symbol random number. Also, the time-saving hit determination value set in the big hit determination table at the time of low probability is divided into the time-saving hit determination value A, the time-saving hit determination value B, and the time-saving hit determination value C, and the control may be simplified so that one of the time-saving sudden patterns A to C is derived according to the time-saving hit determination value.

In addition, the time-saving control triggered by the stop display of the time-saving sudden design is configured to start operation regardless of whether the variable display of the next special design is started after the time-saving design is displayed (when the fixed stop time of the time-saving design has elapsed). It is preferable to notify the player that ``the time saving state (low-probability time saving state) starts to operate without going through a big win'' by executing a specific performance for controlling such as in a specific mode. Thus, even when the player runs out of balls when the time-saving sudden pattern is stopped and displayed, the player can be prevented from leaving the game machine while the time-saving sudden pattern is stopped and displayed. In addition, not limited to the above, if it is important to keep the fact that the time saving control is performed triggered by the stop display of the time saving sudden pattern as a secret as much as possible, during the variable display prior to the stop display of the time saving sudden pattern, common effects (announcement, reach, etc.) that are performed even at normal times are performed. Good.

The time-saving control triggered by the stop display of the time-saving sudden pattern is effective in a time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state), and invalid in a high-probability time-saving state such as a so-called probability variation or a high-probability non-time-saving state. The term "invalid" here means that although the determination as to whether or not the time saving hit is performed (lottery for the first special symbol or lottery for the second special symbol) itself is performed, no matter what the result of the determination is (whether or not it wins the time saving hit), the time saving control triggered by the stop display of the time saving sudden symbol is not started.

In addition, as the termination condition of the time saving state (low probability time saving state) started by the time saving control triggered by the stop display of the time saving sudden pattern, as described above, in addition to the case where the occurrence period ends with the specified variable display being performed, the end condition may be that it is controlled to the conventional big hit game, or the small win game different from the big win game (the probability of winning is higher than the big win game, but the number of balls is less) is controlled a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times). It is also possible to set the completion condition as a termination condition. In particular, when the number of executions of the small winning game is set as the termination condition of the time saving state (low probability time saving state) started by the time saving control triggered by the stop display of the time saving sudden pattern, the time saving state (low probability time saving state) is suddenly started in the game progress process by setting the opening and closing mode of the first big winning opening 2006, the second big winning opening 2007, etc. in the small winning game to a short time compared to the big winning game, and further A new game mode in which a time saving state (low-probability time saving state) suddenly ends at a relatively difficult time (the number of execution times of small winning games) can be realized, and the range of game characteristics can be further expanded.

(Time-saving control triggered by the number of rescues)
In the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state) operates based on the stop display of the time-saving sudden pattern has been described, but as another time-saving control, it is possible to control to operate the time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state) triggered by the fact that the number of times of special symbol fluctuation reaches a predetermined number of reliefs in a situation where a big hit is not obtained. The main purpose of the time-saving control triggered by the number of times of relief is to relieve players who have not been able to get a big hit for a long time. From this point of view, the number of times of relief that triggers the start of the time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state) is preferably set to a value (preset arbitrary number of times) about three times the probability of executing a big hit game. In addition, as a trigger (start timing) for starting counting (addition type or subtraction type) of the number of fluctuations, the starting point can be after the end of the big win game, and the number of fluctuations in the normal time saving state (low probability time saving state) controlled after the big win game is also counted to avoid complication of control such as diversification of the starting point of counting start. In addition, the number of fluctuations in a state in which sufficient profit is given to the player, such as a high probability time saving state or a high probability non-time saving state, is not counted. Further, such a count can be reset (initialized) by performing an operation related to RAM clearing or setting change, and when it is reset, counting starts from the initial value as immediately after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, an arbitrary period can be set in advance for the occurrence period of the time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state) started by the time-saving control triggered by the number of times of relief, and for example, it is possible to set the number of times that the next big hit is guaranteed, such as 700 times of pattern variation. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, the hall manager can set any one of the setting values 1 to 6 using the setting key, but the time saving control triggered by the number of times of relief The occurrence period of the time saving state (low probability time saving state) and the number of times of saving are fixed regardless of which setting value is set.

Further, in the above description, an example of resetting (initializing) the count of the number of repairs is performed by performing an operation related to RAM clearing or an operation related to setting change. That is, although the counting of the number of relief times itself is reset regardless of whether an operation related to RAM clearing or an operation related to setting change is performed, only one side of the case where the operation related to RAM clearing or the operation related to setting change is performed may start counting the number of times of relief accompanying the subsequent variation display, and the other side may not start counting the number of reliefs accompanying the subsequent variation display (so that the time saving state (low-probability time saving state) does not operate even if the number of times of relief is reached). By doing so, it is possible to provide a new game property that a player recognizes and guesses whether or not an operation related to a setting change is performed depending on whether or not a time saving state (low-probability time saving state) is started when the number of times of variation of special symbols reaches the number of relief times, and the range of game property can be further expanded. In addition, time saving control triggered by the number of reliefs may be changed according to the degree of advantage or disadvantage to the player, such as starting the counting of the number of reliefs when the setting value is downgraded from the upper setting (for example, setting values 4 to 6) to the lower setting (for example, setting values 1 to 3), and not starting counting the number of reliefs when the setting value is maintained at the higher setting (for example, setting values 4 to 6).

In addition, as the end condition of the time saving state (low probability time saving state) started by the time saving control triggered by the number of relief times, in addition to the case of reaching the above-mentioned generation period (for example, 700 times of pattern fluctuation), the end condition may be that a conventional big hit game has been performed, or the fact that a small win game has been performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). In particular, when the number of executions of the small winning game is set as the end condition for the ending condition of the time saving state (low probability time saving state) started by the time saving control triggered by the number of relief times, as the execution mode of the small winning game, the opening and closing mode of the first big winning mouth 2006, the second big winning mouth 2007, etc. in the small winning game is set to a short time compared to the big winning game. , only the end time can be made relatively difficult to understand (the number of executions of the small winning game), and the range of game characteristics can be further expanded.

In addition, it is possible to combine the two types of new time-saving control described above (time-saving control triggered by the stop display of a sudden time-saving pattern and time-saving control triggered by the number of times of relief) in a game. When time-saving control triggered by stop display of a sudden time-saving pattern and time-saving control triggered by the number of times of relief are used in combination for a game, it is desirable to set priorities in advance in association with mutual advantages in order to avoid complication of control when both occurrence opportunities overlap. For example, when in a time saving state (low-probability time-saving state) started by time-saving control triggered by the number of times of relief, similarly to the high-probability time-saving state or high-probability non-time-saving state, the time-saving control triggered by the stop display of a sudden time-saving design can be invalidated, and the transition from the advantageous time-saving state to the disadvantageous time-saving state can be exemplified.

In addition, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbols reaches the number of times of relief while in the time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state) started by the time-saving control triggered by the stop display of the time-saving sudden pattern, the occurring time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state) is terminated, and a new time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state) is started with priority given to the time-saving control triggered by the number of times of relief. By doing so, the transition to the advantageous time-saving state is not hindered, and the player can be given a sense of security. In addition, when the purpose is not to be disadvantageous to the player, it may be determined whether or not to start a new time saving state (low probability time saving state) according to the remaining number of times of the occurring time saving state (low probability time saving state).

In addition, when the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches the relief number when in the normal time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state) controlled after the end of the jackpot state, or when the time-saving sudden pattern is stopped while in the normal time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state) controlled after the end of the jackpot state, the normal time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state) is terminated, and a new time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state) is given priority to the time-saving control according to each opportunity. state). By doing so, the transition to the advantageous time-saving state is not hindered, and the player can be given a sense of security. Also in this case, if the purpose is not to be disadvantageous to the player, it may be determined whether or not to start a new time saving state (low probability time saving state) according to the remaining number of times of the occurring time saving state (low probability time saving state).

In addition, the above-mentioned various rainbow-related controls can be made to appear even under gaming conditions in which the two new types of time-saving control described above (time-saving control triggered by the stop display of time-saving sudden symbols and time-saving control triggered by the number of times of relief) are executed. When or after the time saving state is started by the time saving control, various rainbow-related controls (such as a rainbow effect) may be executed.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements and design changes are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention.

That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1 or the slot machine, but the game machine is not limited to this, and may be applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine formed by combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also, the present invention can be applied to a so-called enclosed type game machine in which the player never touches the game ball B, or a game machine called a management game machine.

Also, in this embodiment, the effect display device 1600 is attached to the center of the set plate 1650, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect display device 1600 may be attached to a position eccentric to the center of the set plate 1650. Also, although one effect display device 1600 is attached to the set plate 1650, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of effect display devices may be attached to the set plate 1650. FIG.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front constituent member 1100 Game panel 2000 Front unit 2500 Center accessory 2555 Center right front plate (holding plate)
2555a First accommodation part (accommodation part)
2555b Second accommodation part (accommodation part)
2555c Peeling hole 2555d In front of the protrusion (protrusion)
2700 Specific obstructive nail group 2701 Interfering nail part 2710 Guiding area 2711 First guiding area 2712 Second guiding area N Obstructing nail

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that conducts a lottery based on a ball entering a starting hole and provides a profit based on the result of the lottery,
a plurality of light emitting units ;
a first multicolor light emission control executing means for executing a first multicolor light emission control for sequentially switching light emission of three or more different colors using at least three or more of the plurality of light emitting units when the result of the lottery is a win;
a second multicolor light emission control executing means for executing a second multicolor light emission control in which the three or more light emitting units used for the first multicolor light emission control are sequentially switched to emit light of three or more colors different from each other at a specific time during a non-game ;
a shooting handle operated when shooting a game ball;
a production operation unit that is operated when proceeding with a predetermined operation production,
The light emission by the first multicolor light emission control cannot be terminated even if the operation section for presentation different from the firing handle is operated,
The light emission by the second multicolor light emission control can be terminated by operating the performance operation section separate from the firing handle even if the ball does not enter the starting hole,
Furthermore, after the operation unit for presentation is operated, the light emitting unit used for the second multicolor light emission control is in a predetermined mode,
Furthermore, comprising a specific light emitting unit that is not used for the first multicolor light emission control and the second multicolor light emission control,
During light emission by the first multicolor light emission control, the specific light emitting unit is in a blinking state, while during light emission by the second multicolor light emission control, the specific light emitting unit is in a lighting state.
Furthermore, a light amount adjustment operation unit that can be operated by the player, separately from the performance operation unit,
light amount adjustment means capable of adjusting the light amount of the three or more light emitting units used for the first multicolor light emission control and the second multicolor light emission control based on the operation of the light amount adjustment operation unit;
When the light amount adjustment operation unit is operated during light emission by the first multicolor light emission control or the second multicolor light emission control, the light amount adjustment means can adjust the light amount without terminating the multicolor light emission control in progress,
The amount of light emitted from the specific light-emitting portion remains unchanged in both the special mode in which the specific light-emitting portion is in the blinking state and the specific mode in which the light-emitting portion is in the lighting state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images